Proceeding
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 PPG Building UNESA, November 18th 2015
Organized by : Electrical Engineering Department Engineering Faculty Universitas Negeri Surabaya 2015
ISSN 2461-0909
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Proceeding
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Edited by ICVEE Team Copyright © 2015 and published by Electrical Engineering Department, Engineering Faculty, Universitas Negeri Surabaya. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form, without written permission from the publisher. The full paper are available in CD.
ii
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 HONORARY COMMITTEE Prof. Dr. Warsono, M.S. Prof. Ekohariadi, M.Pd. Puput Wanarti Rusimamto, S.T., M.T.
GENERAL CHAIRMAN Prof. Dr. Supari Muslim, M.Pd.
STEERING COMMITEE Prof. Ekohariadi (Unesa) Prof. Ir. Sukandar M.Sc. Ph.D. (UTHM, Malaysia) Prof. Ashari (Univ. Telkom) Prof. Bambang Suprianto (Unesa) Dr. IGP Asto (Unesa) Dr. Son Kuswadi (PENS) Prof. Dr. M Nuh DEA (ITS) Prof. Dr. Ir. Mauridhi Hery Purnomo, M.Eng. (ITS) Dr. Hendrawan (ITB) Dr. Agus Harjoko (UGM) Azis Muslim Ph.D.(Univ. Brawijaya) Prof. Datuk Dr. Ir. Mohd Noh Dalimin (UTHM, Malaysia) Dr. Fathul Arifin (UNY)
iii
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
ORGANIZING COMMITTEE Dr. Lilik Anifah, S.T., M.T. Hapsari Peni, S.Si., M.T. Prof. Dr. Bambang Suprianto, M.T. Dr. I G.P. Asto B., M.T. Dr. Tri Rijanto, M.Pd., M.T. Dr. Agus Budi Santosa, M.Pd. Dr. Euis Ismayati, M.Pd. Dr. Wiryanto, M.Si. Ir. Achmad Imam Agung, M.Pd. Nur Kholis, S.T., M.T. Eppy Yundra, S.Pd., M.T., Ph.D Lusia Rakhmawati, S.T.,M.T. Joko Catur Condro, S.Si, M.T. Nurhayati, S.T., M.T. Subuh Isnur H., S.T., M.T. M. Syariffudin Zuhri, S.Pd., M.T. Pradini, S.T., M.T. Yulia Fransisca, S.Pd., M.Pd. Arif Widodo, S.T., M.Sc. Mahendra WIdyartono, S.T., M.T. Rifqi Firmansyah, S.T., M.T. Widi Aribowo, S.T., M.T. Aditya Chandra H., S.S.T., M.T. Reza Rahmadian, S.St., M.Eng.Sc. Farid Baskoro, S.T., M.T. Pradini Puspitaningayu, S.T., M.T. Imam Basuni, S.T. Sugiono, S.T. Trisiana Dewi Aurora, S.S. Moch. Ma‘ruf, S.T. Gitut Sudarto, S.T. Subchan Sholikun Jamil
iv
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
OPENING SPEECH FROM RECTOR OF UNESA Assalamu Alaikum Wr. Wb., Good morning Ladies and Gentlemen, allow me in this opportunity to open this conference by first praying our grateful and praise to Almighty God for all His blessings, grace, and mercies that have made us possible to gather here in this room in excellent condition and health. Dear distinguished guests and participants of the The International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 with the theme ―Overcoming Challenge towards Asean Economic Community (AEC) 2015 in Profesional Qualification on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering‖. Universitas Negeri Surabaya (Unesa) is very pleased to host this conference in Surabaya. I believe the conference will provide an opportunity for participants to disseminate new knowledge specially in Vocational Education, Electrical Engineering, and Informatics major, and share recent experiences and knowledge as well as new practices, technologies, and new concept. My sincere appreciation also goes to all Keynote Speakers who have volunteered and spent your tight schedule to contribute to this special event in Surabaya. Your contribution to this conference and specially to Indonesia is highly appreciated. Greatest thanks are due to all our Organizing Committee members for their dedication and continuous efforts and hard work in preparing as well as organizing this conference with the supports from Unesa lecturers and students. To our main and supporting sponsors and donors, our most gratitude and thanks for their generous contributions to make this conference possible. Greatest thanks also to our participants, especially those who have contributed technical papers, thank you for your participation in this conference. I am convinced that this conference will be inspiring, and wish you all a successful and memorable time. I would like to sincerely congratulate all of you to have fruitful conference and discussions and enjoy meeting new friends and colleagues and to take advantages to support your profession during this conference. I wish you all have a truly sweet memory and enjoyable stay in Surabaya. Wassalamu Alaikum Wr. Wb., Prof. Dr. Warsono, M.S. Rector of UNESA
v
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
vi
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
ADDRESSING MESSAGE FROM DEAN OF FACULTY OF ENGINEERING UNESA
Honorable Rector of Universitas Negeri Surabaya, Prof. Dr. Warsono. Honorable Speakers and Participants, Distinguished Delegates, Guests, Ladies, and Gentlemen. Assalamu Alaikum Wr. Wb., I am sincerely glad to welcome all you here, especially as I see very many familiar colleagues, friends, and our patners. Welcome to our campus! First of all, I would like to praise God for His blessings and mercies which allow all of us to be here today in this building in good health. I wish to express our deepest appreciation to those who have come from far away, many of them having been involved in commencing exactly what we have gathered here for. It would be our great pleasure to welcome all of you, experts, engineers, and professional researchers from all over the world. The International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 is a scientific forum where all of us could meet colleagues and friends of broad areas, discuss and disseminate research findings and discoveries as well as to develop knowledge, technology, arts, and sustainable research networks, particularly in vocational education, electrical engineering, and informatics. This year conference raises a very important theme on ―Overcoming Challenge towards Asean Economic Community (AEC) 2015 in Profesional Qualification on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering‖. Therefore, it is a great pleasure and beneficial for all of us here today if we are able to take this advantage to build strong sustainable networks among researchers in order to develop knowledge, technology through recent research and innovation. By hosting this conference, Faculty of Engineering Unesa is not only gaining the advancement of science and technology from all the findings and discoveries delivered during the conference, but also fruitful to encourage and enhance the arts and cultural values that would further dignify our nation and country among other worldwide. Finally, I would like to convey our sincere gratitude to all participants, distinguished guests, and speakers that make this conference a great success. Thank you very much for being here. On behalf Faculty of Engineering Unesa, I thank you very much for your hard and untiring efforts. I wish that all of you may put all your continuous plants into undisturbed actions. And should push come to shove, that all your core processes may be continued seamlessly elsewhere. Today‘s program offers many various approaches to the issue. I wish you a very successful, productive, and inspiring conference!
vii
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The conference is an annual event which is held near the end of the year. We do hope that we could welcome you again next year in the 2nd ICVEE 2016, which certainly offers the most recent topics as well as advance science and technology in various areas. Thank you most cordially for your attention. Wassalamu Alaikum Wr. Wb.
Dean of Faculty of Engineering Universitas Negeri Surabaya Prof. Ekohariadi, M.Pd.
viii
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
WELCOME SPEECH OF GENERAL CHAIRMAN OF ICVEE 2015 Dear Distinguished Delegates and Guests, First, let us pray gratitude to the presence of Almighty God, for blessing and His permission, so "The 1st International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015" can be done well. Secondly, let us convey my warm welcome and high appreciation for the presence and the willingness of key speakers who came from Taiwan, Brunei, Malaysia, and Indonesia as well as other speakers, at an international seminar held on this day. Ladies and Gentlemen, Science and technology continue to evolve. Discovery after discovery continues to be obtained so as to make the world continues to change and evolve into a better direction. Tokyo Motor Show (TMS) in 2015 is one evidence of some of the latest findings. TMS 2015 exhibited a number of recent developments in the automotive field. Nissan Corp showing a concept car without a driver (Intelligent driving system = IDS). This concept makes Nissan IDS seem futuristic. The car has a manual and automatic mode. Automatic mode is used when the passenger wants to chat along the way. In that mode, the steering wheel will automatically folded down, replaced the screen so that someone can open an email, or talking through a "video call". IDS will become a mainstay of the new Nissan to be the pioneer in the world automotive industry. Next year there are at least a driver replacement system for toll roads in Japan, and is targeted by 2020, IDS cars can pave the roads of Japan. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation introduced the concept car "X electric crossover" is the latest electric car system. This car took part of the Outlander PHEV which includes models that demonstrate the framework of the technical features of electric vehicles and plug-in system twin motors 4 WD, so it is easy to drive. This car can monitor the situation around the vehicle, can control the speed, including a driver can use a smartphone to give instructions so that the car can park itself. To 44 other manufacturers, competing to develop fuel cell cars. Fuel cell car that's environmentally friendly hydrogen fuel. The chemical reaction between hydrogen stored in the fuel cell stack and oxygen that exist in nature, generating electrical energy stored in batteries. Electricity from the battery rotating electric motor to drive the car. Under conditions of full hydrogen, the car can travel a distance of 650 km, making the manufacturer mentions that fuel cell cars will become the flagship car of the future. Hopefully some examples of the development of science and technology as described above, inspired on "The 1st International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015" held on November 18, 2015 on the campus of the State University of Surabaya. Ladies and Gentlemen,
ix
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
This seminar can be accomplished, for the help of various parties. On this occasion, let us express our appreciation and gratitude to the key note speaker, the speakers, both from within and outside the country, so this seminar is warm and lively. To all those who have helped so that this international seminar to run smoothly in accordance with the intent and purpose, we extend our appreciation and gratitude. Not to forget we convey an apology, if in the organization of this seminar there are many shortcomings, and it all happened, solely because of the limitations that exist in us. Thus, thank you for all the attention, billahi taufik walhidayah, assalamu allaikum warahmatullahi wabarokhatuh. Chairman, Prof. Dr. H. Supari Muslims, Drs. MPd General Chairman of ICVEE 2015
x
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Table of Content Cover Opening Speech From Rector of UNESA Addressing Message From Dean of Faculty of Engineering UNESA Welcome Speech of General Chairman of ICVEE 2015 Table of Content
i v vii ix xi
A. Keynote Speaker Internationalisation and Harmonisation of TVET in Southeast Asia: Synchronizing Institutional and National Initiatives with Regional Trends, Issues, and Initiatives
1
Paryono
Intelligent Sensing: From Macroscopic to Microscopic Scale
15
Poki Chen
Efficiency Optimisation Control Strategi for DTC Induction Motor Drives
17
Wahyu Mulyo Utomo, Sy Yi Sim
Parametric Model of Laboratory Heat Exchanger
25
Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi
B. Vocational Education Problem Based Instruction (PBI) To Improve Think Critically Students in Planning Steel Construction
41
Heri Suryaman
Implementation of Curriculum 2013 in The Process of Learning SMK Engineering Building at Surabaya
47
Hendy Ardianto
Performance Comparison Between The Graduates Senior High School and Vocational High School
51
Charis Fathul Hadi
Indonesian Vocational Education and Technology- Ready for Asean Economic Community 2015?
55
Dimyati
The Design of Mobile Educational Role-Playing Game For Biology ―Bio Saga‖
61
Riady Salim, Robby Kurniawan Budhi, Indra Budi Trisno
Problem Solving Ability As Strategy To Improvement Of Vocational Skill Students
65
Kartika Tresya Mauriraya
The Influence of the use of Augmented Reality Media to xi
69
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Student‘s Learning Outcomes for multimedia department Students in SMK 12 Surabaya Septian Rahman Hakim, Supari Muslim, Ekohariadi
Thematic Learning Using Augmented Reality in Education with Aurasma
77
Arik Kurniawati
The Development of Instructional Media on Physics Subject To Increase The Class Effectiveness
81
Puput Wanarti, Euis Ismayati, Hapsari Peni, Yuni Yamasari, Elfira Taufida
Differences in Practice Student Performance Results Using Cooperative Learning Model Type GI With STAD PLC Programming on The Subject in at Vocational Schools
87
Parti Rahayu, Euis Ismayati
Designing of Tool for Teaching Based on Computer Interactive Learning And Computer Assisted Learning to Improve the Skill of Learner
95
M. Syariffuddien Zuhrie
The Evaluation of The Implementation of The Adiwiyata Program (Green School Program) in SMK Semen Gresik
101
Warju
Research and Development of Student Information System for Kindergarten In Klojen Malang
113
Dwi Fatrianto Suyatno, Yuni Yamasari, Rr. Hapsari Peni A.T.
Development of Learning Media Based E-Learning in Vocational High School
119
Baharuddin, Pryo Utomo
The influence of MySQL Utilization on Database Training Subject in Software Engineering Department Of State Vocational Senior High School 2 Surabaya
125
Didik Triaswara, Supari Muslim, Lilik Anifah
Engineering Development Control Module as A Result of Efforts To Improve Learning in Electrical Engineering Universitas Negeri Surabaya
131
Endryansyah, Puput Wanarti R, Mochammad Rameli, Eko Setijadi
The Development of Problem Based Learning Media in Electrical Lightning Installation using Macromedia Flash 8
135
Yulia Fransisca, Subuh Isnur Haryudo
Implementation of Problem Based Learning (PBL) Model in Developing Data Structure Learning Module to Enhance Students' Competencies Bambang Sujatmiko, Rina Harimurti, and Anita Qoiriah
139
Benefit of Learning ―Make Cake, and Torten Gateaux‖ Student
145
xii
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
in Practice Cake Shop SMKN 3 Bogor for Dealing Era Globalisasi Nisa Rahmaniyah Utami
Direct Instruction Model to Improve Students‘ Skills in Learning Physics at Vocational Schools Euis Ismayati
151
C. Electrical Engineering and Informatics Design of Expert System of The Republic Indonesia‘s Law Number 8 Year 1999 Concerning Consumer Protection Using Mobile Application
159
Sendra Darmawan, Robby Kurniawan Budhi, Dwi Taufik Hidayat
Design of Game Application ―Klung Your Beat!!‖
163
Tandra Tirta Wijaya, Robby Kurniawan Budhi, Indra Budi Trisno
Electronic Load Control System Simulation for Microhydro Power Plant Generator
167
Miftachu Ulum, A.Fiqhi Ibadillah, Diana Rahmawati, Haryanto
Protection System Of Over Current Disturbance By Using Sensor ACS712ELC-5A
173
Bambang Suprianto
VLAN Performance Analysis With Direct Measuring and Simulation Method
179
Achmad Ubaidillah, Dwi Kuswanto, Artika Frida Nirmala, Ida Kholida
Modelling and Analysis of a Photovoltaic Cell
183
Supriatna Adhisuwignjo, Indrazno Siradjuddin, Muhamad Rifa‘i, Ratna Ika Putri
Classification of Lung Nodule in CT Images based on GLCM features
189
I Ketut Eddy Purnama, Tri Deviasari Wulan, Mauridhi Hery Purnomo
Control of Synchronous Generator in Wind Power Systems Using Neuro-Fuzzy Approach
193
Ramadoni Syahputra, Indah Soesanti
Application of Particle Swarm Optimization Method for Batik Production Process
201
Indah Soesanti, Adhi Susanto, Ramadoni Syahputra
System Testing of Centralized Multi-Patient Health Monitoring System
207
I Ketut Eddy Purnama, Muhammad Fajariansyah Ismail, Arief Kurniawan
Solar Power Trainer Design using Buck Converter and Fuzzy Logic Control
213
Mahendra Widyartono, Arif Widodo, Reza Rahmadian
Customer Segmentation of SMEs Using K-Means Clustering Method and modeling LRFM xiii
219
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Bain Khusnul Khotimah
The Best Alternative Routes Search With Genetic Algorithm on Sidoarjo
225
Aeri Rachmad, Devie Rosa Anamisa
Application Predicts World Oil Prices on Stock Price Using Hybrid Method
229
Eka Mala Sari R, Aeri Rachmad
Tracking Control of an Inverted Pendulum Using Nonlinear Model Predictive Control
235
Rifqi Firmansyah
HAZOP Study Based on ANFIS Layer of Protection Analysis in Unit Kiln PT. Semen Indonesia Factory Tuban
239
Henry Prasetyo, Ali Musyafa
Big Data : Characteristics, Application and The Challenges in Indonesia
243
Naim Rochmawati
Implementation Coupled Linear Congruential Generator Methods For Questions Of Pattern Randomization
247
I Made Diyya Biantara, I Made Sudana, Suryono, Alfa Faridh Suni, Arimaz Hangga
Analysis of Adjustment Delay Scheme Beacon Enabled Mode for Star Networks
251
Eppy Yundra, Bih-Hwang Lee
Sinogram Data Processing System on CT-SCAN Using Reconstruction Method
259
Nur Kholis
Electrical Load Data Clustering in PJB UP Gresik Based on Time Series Analysis Approach
265
Ismit Mado, Adi Soeprijanto, Suhartono
Designing Semi Automatic Dryer Machine System to Knock Down for to Overcome Problems the Batik Creative Industries
273
Agung Prijo Budijono, Wahyu Dwi Kurniawan
Design Simulation on The Management of Water Pumps for Flood Control using Web Server and Arduino
279
Debby Oktavia G, Yulius Hari, Arif Budijanto
Design and Simulation of Mini Garden Fuzzy Microirrigation System
283
Diana Rahmawati, Kunto Aji, Heri Setiawan
Design And Implementation Of Embedded System For LPG Gas Leakage Detection Using PID Control System Kunto Aji, Miftahul Ulum
xiv
289
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Frequency Sampling Method for Pelog East Java Gamelan Model Based on Analog Voice Sensor
295
Joko Catur Condro Cahyono
SIMONTA: Responsive Web-Based Thesis Management System
299
Ibnu Febry Kurniawan, Yuni Yamasari, Andi Iwan Nurhidayat, Wiyli Yustanti
Method Comparison of Lung Cancer between X-ray Image and CT-Image Using Neural Network
307
Hapsari Peni A.T, Za‘imah Permatasari
Qualitative Image Enhancement Using Contrast Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization and Adaptive Illumination Compensation
311
Achmad Fiqhi Ibadillah, Haryanto, Koko Joni
Osteoarthritis Severity Determination Using Linier Vector Quantization Based Otsu Thresholding
319
Lilik Anifah
Web Services Implementation on Internship Management System Integrated with SIAKAD
325
Ricky Eka Putra, Asmunin
A Joint Balanced Scorecard and COBIT for E-learning Performance Evaluation: A Conceptual Framework
331
Yeni Anistyasari
Character Segmentation for Indonesian License Plate Using Morfology Process
335
Haryanto
The Effect of Convolutional Coding and Bit Interleaving for Rayleigh Communication Channel
341
Pradini Puspitaningayu, Faisal Aries Ramadhany, Ahmadan Ainul Fikri, Rosmita Dwijayanti
Impacts of the use of Appropriate Technology on the Increase of Milkfish Processing Productivity
345
Supari Muslim, Aminudin Kasdi, Any Sutiadiningsih
Increasing the Productivity of Chips Manufacturers through Utilization of Chip Raw Materials Chopper and Oil Drying Machine
349
Sukma Perdana Prasetya, Endryansyah, Retnani
Improving the Performance of Crackers SMEs through 353 Diversification of Products and Utilization of Crackers Drying Machine, in Purpose to Improve National Food Security and Crackers Export Bambang Suprianto, Agus Suprijono, Dwi Kristiastuti
xv
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Effect of Project-Based Learning Strategies and Self-Efficacy Toward Student‘s Learning Outcomes and Arguing Ability 357 Joko
Implementing the Interactive Learning Media in Power System Protection Class to Improve the Achievement 367 Achmad Imam Agung
Information Services for Industrial Practice in The Department of Electrical Engineering Based on Google Maps Api
373
Lusia Rakhmawati
The Use of Internet Media as A Source of Learning in Supporting Study Results Students in State Vocational Schools 5 Surabaya 377 Agus Budi Santoso
xvi
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Internationalisation and Harmonisation of TVET in Southeast Asia: Synchronizing Institutional and National Initiatives with Regional Trends, Issues, and Initiatives Paryono* SEAMEO VOCTECH Regional Centre for Vocational and Technical Education
[email protected] Abstract In the area of higher education, the idea of internationalising education is not new. Some countries are very aggressive in their efforts to make education more attractive to foreign students in order increase the university ranking and at the same time also to generate revenues. In Technical and Vocational Education and Training (TVET), however, the purpose of internationalisation is not so much for the institutional ranking and revenue generation, but more for providing learning opportunities for students to learn different cultures and relevant skills to prepare them for global job market. Harmonisation of education in Southeast Asia, including TVET, is picking its pace due to among others the initiatives of ASEAN (the Association of Southeast Asian Nations) Integration which opens up wider doors for goods, labours, and students mobility. Year 2015 marks the beginning regional integration in Southeast Asia in which harmonising and internationalising of TVET is seen as one of the important steps toward the quality improvement, and competency based-development for TVET which will ultimately support the regional integration objectives (SEAMEO Secretariat, 2015). Many initiatives have been taken at the regional, national and institutional levels. This paper will elaborate some of the identified regional trends, issues, and initiativesparticularlythose related to internationalisation and harmonisation of TVET. The paper then offers some suggestions on what a country and a TVET institution should respond to those regional trends, issues, and initiativesincluding suggested ways forward that contribute to the success of internationalisation and harmonisation of TVET in the region. A. Background Southeast Asia is a very dynamic region and so does its TVET system. TVET inmost member countries has received much attention from policymakers especially in response to youth unemployment and improve national economic productivity. ASEAN with 10 member countries: Brunei Darussalam, Cambodia, Indonesia, Lao PDR, Malaysia, Myanmar, Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, and Vietnam, has been very instrumental in promoting socio, economic, and political cooperation among the member countries and beyond. To provide a brief background of the ASEAN member countries, please see Table 1 that offers a summary of demographic and economic status of each member countries.From the demographic aspect, there is the smallest county in the region, Brunei Darussalam, with less than half a million and the biggest country member, Indonesia, with slightly above 250 million, which is the fourth biggest population in the world. From the GDP per capita income, Singapore and Brunei have very high income per capita adjusted with the purchasing power parity (PPP), US$ 81,300 and US$79,300 respectively, and some are US$ 5,000 or below, such as Vietnam, Lao PDR, and Cambodia. __________ *He is also a lecturer at State University of Malang, Indonesia. Table 1. Demographic and economic Indicators of Selected ASEAN Countries Variable
Country Brunei
Cambodia
Indonesia
Lao PDR
Malaysia
Population (2014 est.)
422,675
15,458,332
253,609,643
6,803,699
30,073,353
Literacy (2015 est.)
96.0%
88.7%
93.9%
79.9%
94.6%
Total dependency ratio
41.8%
57.6%
51%
62.6%
45.5%
Median age
29.3 years
24.1 years
29.2 years
22 years
27.7 years
1
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Employment sectors:
Agriculture
4.2%
48.7%
38.9%
73.1%
11%
Industry*
62.8%
19.9%
13.2%
6.1%
36%
Services
33% (2008est.)
31.5% (2013 est.)
47.9% (2012 est.)
20.6% (2012)
53% (2005 est.)
Unemployment
2.6% (2011 est.)
3.7% (2009 est.)
5.7% (2014 est.)
1.3% (2012 est.)
2.9% (2014 est.)
GDP Per capita PPP (2014 est.) GDP PPP (2014est.)
$77,700
$3,400
$10,200
$5,000
$24,500
$32.511b.
$50.26 b.
$2.554 t.
$34.48 b.
$746.8 b.
Education Expenditure (% GDP)
3.8% (2014 est.)
2.6% (2010)
3.6% (2012 est.)
2.8% (2010)
5.9% (2011)
Table 1. Demographic and Economic Background of ASEAN member Countries (Cont.) Variable
Country Myanmar
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Vietnam
Population (2015 est.)
55,746,253
107,668,231 ( 2014 est.)
5,567,301 (July 67,741,401 2014 est.)
93,421,835 (2014 est.)
Literacy (2015 est.)
93.1%
96.3%
96.8%
96.7%
94.5%
Dependency ratio
42.5%
60.7%
35.8%
38.6%
41.3%
Median age
27.9 years
23.5 years
33.8 years
36.2%
29.2 years
Employment sectors:
Agriculture
70%
30%
1.3%
32.2%
48%
Industry*
7%
16%
14.8%
16.7%
21%
Services
23% (2001 est.)
54% (2014 est.)
83.9% (2014)
51.1% (2014 est.)
31% (2012)
Unemployment
5.1% (2014 est.)
7.5% (2009 est.)
2% (2014 est.)
1% (2014 est.)
3.1% (2014 est.)
GDP Per capita PPP
$4,800 (2014 est.)
$7,000(2014 est.)
$81,300 (2014 est.)
$14,400 (2014 est.)
$5,600 (2014 est.)
GDP PPP (2014 est.)
$244.3 b.
$693.7 b.
$445.2 b.
$987.5 b.
$509.5 b.
Education Expenditure (% GDP)
0.8% (2011)
2.7% (2009)
2.9% (2013)
7.6% (2012)
6.3% (2012)
Source: CIA (2015) Considering the above diverse demographic and economic status, accompanied by different socio, cultural, political, and historical background of the ASEAN member countries, makes this region unique. This uniqueness also represented in the various education systems, including the TVET systems. The idea that ASEAN has to create One Community through various initiatives under the ASEAN Integration, especially on the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC), there are many aspects that must be considered and integrated in technical and vocational education and training (TVET). Four major thrusts under AEC include a single market and production base, a highly competitive economic
2
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
region, a region of equitable economic development, and a region fully integrated into the global economy (ASEAN Secretariat, 2010). These thrusts encourage country members to collaborate in several areas. The areas that closely link to TVET, among others are on human resources development and capacity building, recognition of professional qualifications, and integration of industries across the region to promote regional sourcing. Knowing that each member country has different TVET systems, it is important to create a platform so that each member can recognize each other‘s qualification. If ASEAN member countries are also interested in students and labour mobility, communications must be established to create trust and to be familiar with other education and training systems. Maintaining the uniqueness of the education and training system in every member state and at the same time making it easier for students and labour to move from one country to another, harmonizing the systems is inevitable. In order to prepare TVET graduates not only ready to work in their country but also to anticipate working abroad, the TVET programmes must be packaged in such a way that the students will learn necessary requirements to work abroad; this will include certain set of academic and technical skills and also socio cultural, including language skills. The term ―internationalization‖ of TVET comes into play when TVET providers start thinking of running a programme that prepares students to work overseas by providing learning contents and environment that can strengthen their academic and technical skills and also other socio, cultural, and language skills for working in other country‘s working environment. B. Identified Trends and Issues of TVET in Southeast Asia In the area of education and culture, SEAMEO (Southeast Asian Ministers of Education Organisation) established in 1965, has a mission to promote collaboration among the member countries to strengthen those areas. SEAMEO now has 11 member countries (ASEAN members+ Timor Leste). SEAMEO VOCTECH is one of the 21 SEAMEO Regional Centres that focuses on assisting the member countries in strengthening TVET policies and practices. Based on SEAMEO VOCTECH‘s Training and Research Needs Analysis in 2013 (SEAMEO VOCTECH, 2014), the Centre identified ten most salient TVET trends and issues that can be illustrated in Figure 1. TVET Quality Assurance
Graduate employability: Career guidance and job information
Qualficati on Framewor k
Relevancy of Curriculum: Green TVET, life skills, HOT skills
Lifelong Learning TVET trends and Issues Access and Equity
Articulatio n
Authetic Teachinglearning and assessment
R & D in TVET ICT in TVET
3
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Figure 1. TVET Trends and Issues in Southeast Asia 1) TVET Quality Assurance Framework. In response to the growing mobility of students and workers, the SEAMEO member countries have been venturing into improving the connectivity of their TVET systems to support regional economic integration via cross-border investment and the mobility of skilled labour. Currently, these processes have striven towards mechanisms for improving cross-national connectivity, particularly regarding occupational standards and qualifications. The development of Regional TVET Quality Assurance and Qualification Frameworks serves the purpose for building connectivity among various education and training modalities across the region. One of organisations spearheading the regional quality assurance framework is the East Asian Summit (EAS). The purposes of this TVET QAF are for (1) enabling countries to promote and monitor the improvement of their quality assurance systems; (2) facilitating cooperation and mutual understanding between member countries; and (3) supporting other initiatives within and across the region that enhance connectivity, integration, education and labour mobility, e.g. the ASEAN Regional Qualifications Framework. This is a coherent package capable of guiding the design and implementation of measures to strengthen quality assurance at the country level as well as providing a basis for alignment between national TVET quality assurance strategies (ASEAN, 2012). 2) National and Regional Qualification Frameworks. National Qualification Frameworks are to be used as a means for promoting the development, implementing and facilitating of a transparent mechanism used in the assessment, certification, and recognition of skills. Most countries in the region have developed their national qualification frameworks. At regional level, the ASEAN Qualification Reference Framework (AQRF) which covers 8 levels has been developed. ASEAN members are using this regional framework as a reference and a way of comparing their NQFs with other national qualification frameworks. In response to the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC) which commences in 2015, the development of AQRF is very timely. There are progresses in the adoption of AQRF as a reference for the ASEAN members‘ NQFs, but the implementation at the ground level is still very limited. 3) Relevancy of TVET Curriculum. This is a prevalent and an on-going issue that TVET institutions have been facing. Some of the issue under curriculum relevancy includes the integration of high-order thinking skills, integration of employability skills, the inclusion of entrepreneurship education, and the adoption of green technology. 4) Articulations. To create effective and efficient TVET systems, it is Articulations can be done horizontally and/or vertically. Horizontal articulation is done at the same level of education by recognizing or matriculating credits of courses from one school to the other, e.g. matriculating courses from secondary TVET institutions to secondary academic schools or vice versa, from postsecondary TVET institutions to postsecondary academic institutions or vice versa. Vertical articulation is done between lower level TVET institutions to a higher level. This type of articulation is occurring in several countries in the region. To encourage students to enrol in TVET and to avoid repetition of courses, the approved courses and credits from the lower level of education can be transferred to next education level according to matriculation mechanisms. 5) Teaching-learning and Assessment. Teaching-learning and assessment are the core of TVET activities that have to be revisited and continuously improved. Authentic teaching-learning and assessment have been gaining popularity considering that this approach is believed to be relevant for TVET context. The term ―authentic‖ implies that the teaching-learning and assessment should be as similar as in the real working environment: real problems, practical solutions, real approaches of solving the problems, multi (holistic) ways of assessing students. 6) ICT in Education. This trend on Information and Communication Technology is still relevant in the next five years. ICT has not been fully integrated in TVET yet. Much effort needs to be taken to continuously enhance ICT integration in education. The digital divide still exists not only between countries but even within the country as well. Following the UNESCO framework of ICT integration whereby stage of ICT integration is grouped into 4 stages: emerging, applying, infusing, and transforming; many countries in the region are still in emerging and applying stage.
4
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
7) Research and Development. In order for the member countries of SEAMEO and the region to continuously innovate and develop, research and development activities must be enhanced. Research activities should be proliferated especially through networking and partnerships. More importantly, there should be a platform to share the research findings either through seminars, conferences, and publications, especially online research database. 8) Access and Equality. To meet the UNESCO‘s millennium development goals, especially on Education for All agenda, all countries in the region are continuing to provide wider access to quality TVET. This access to TVET should be open to those who need it regardless of their background. Through the use ICT, TVET can be more accessible to many. 9) Life-long learning. Education, including TVET, should offer more flexibility to students and provide a strong foundation life-long learning. Likewise, there should be a mechanism to recognise prior leaning regardless of whether he learning was acquired from formal, non-formal or informal setting. The easy access to information through various media and the possibilities of carrying out jobs through various ways has open opportunity to individuals to learn continuously throughout their lives regardless of their age. 10) Graduate Employability. The issue of graduate employment is still prevalent in most of the countries in the region. This may be caused by the mismatched of the qualification, lacking of the employability of the graduates, and/ or lacking of job opening or information. There is a need to provide and improve career guidance for the students and trainees at early stage and incorporate necessary competencies for enhancing graduates employability in the teachinglearning processes. To address the unemployment issue, it is important also that the graduates have access to job information. The job information may cover the job openings at the local, national, or even at the regional/international level. C. Major Initiatives at the Regional Level There are important players that inspire regional initiatives in TVET, such as ASEAN Secretariat , SEAMEO (The Southeast Asian Ministers of Education Orgnanisation), especially SEAMEO Secretariat, SEAMEO SEAMOLEC, and SEAMEO VOCTECH, UNESCO, especially UNESCO UNEVOC and UNESCO Bangkok, ILO (International Labour Organisation), Colombo Plan Staff College (CPSC), East Asia Summit, Asia Europe Meetings. In addition there are also development and donor agencies funded by certain countries, such as GIZ Germany, USAID, AUSAID, British Council, KOICA, JAICA and others contributing the development of various regional TVET initiatives. The followings are the brief description of the initiatives. Mutual Recognition Agreements. These are arrangements among ASEAN member countries designed to facilitate the freer movement and employment of qualified and certified personnel between ASEAN member countries. Up to now there are 8 professions that have MRAs: Architecture Engineering, Accountancy, Tourism, Medical, Nursing, Dentistry, and Surveying.Please visit http://www.asean.org for more information. Regional TVET Quality Assurance and Qualification Frameworks. As described briefly in the previous section, these frameworks serve the purpose for building connectivity among various education and training modalities across the region by benchmarking their TVET programmes with these quality assurance framework. East Asia summit has been very instrumental in the development of this framework. The framework can be downloaded from: http://www.unevoc.unesco.org/eforum/120619%20%20East%20Asia%20Quality%20Assurance%20Framework_final%20co ncept%20paper_post%20worshop.pdf ASEAN Qualification Reference Framework. This framework is a translation device to enable comparisons of qualifications across participating ASEAN countries. This framework aims at building confidence and trust in national qualifications and in the value of the region‘s qualifications. This framework was initiated by officials from the ASEANAustralia-New Zealand Free Trade Area(AANZFTA) Committee on Trade in Services, staff from Ministries of Education, Labour, Manpower Development, and other relevant ministries and agencies involved with skills recognition. It comprises 8 levels covering
5
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
knowledge comprehensions and skills, application and responsibility.Knowledge and skills include various kinds of knowledge such as facts and theories as well as the skills used, such as practical and cognitive skills. Application and responsibility define the context in which the knowledge and skills are used in practice; as well as the level of independence including the capacity to make decisions and the responsibility for oneself and others. To implement this fully, there is need to operationalize it through referencing process. The draft of the AQRF can be download from http://ceap.org.ph/upload/download/20138/27223751388_1.pdf Southeast Asia TVET (SEA-TVET) on Harmonization and Internationalization. Harmonizing and internationalizing TVET in Southeast Asian region are seen by member countries‘High Officials of SEAMEO as one of the important steps toward the quality improvement and competency development for TVET which will ultimately support the regional integration objectives. The objective of SEA-TVET is (1) to leverage the standard and competency of in TVET in Southeast Asia through internationalization and harmonization; (2) to promote and develop the curriculum harmonization, and internationalization of study programmes through lecturer/student exchange, joint research programmes and industrial linkages; and (3) to create a sustainable networking platform among TVET leaders and institutions in Southeast Asia and industry, as well as other related development agencies. One of the salient initiatives under SEA-TVET is the formulation of SEA-TVET Consortium whereby the members comprising TVET institutions and TVET teacher colleges/universities in the region may share resources, expertise, experience, and organize staff and students exchange overseas. For more information, please visit: http://seatvet.seameo.org/ TVET Asia Online Journal. This is an open content online journal for scientists and practitioners in the field of Technical and Vocational Education and Training (TVET) and Vocational Teacher Education (VTE) in the East and Southeast- Asian region. Its main purpose is to provide access to peer reviewed papers and thus to enhance the dissemination of relevant content and the initiation of open discussions within the TVET community.Currently, this online journal is operated by the Regional Association for Vocational Teacher Education and Training in Asia (RAVTE) with support of the South East Asian Minister of Education Organization, Regional Centre for Vocational and Technical Education and Training (SEAMEO VOCTECH) and UNESCO Bangkok. The journal can be accessed from http://www.tvet-online.asia/ Regional TVET Personnel Common Core Standards. There are several reasons for the establishment of a common standard for TVET personnel at the regional level, among others are the comparability of TVET personnel qualifications across region, as a benchmark for each member country in term of TVET personnel qualification, as well as the increased acceptance for TVET personnel mobility working in different part of a country or region. Lead by GIZ-RECOTVET (Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale ZusammenarbeitRegional Cooperation Programme to improve the training of TVET personnel), commissioned by Germany‘s Federal Ministry of Economic Cooperation and Development (BMZ) the focus of this initiative is to develop common core competencies and future skills that need to be covered by TVET personnel in order to gain a better harmonisation of TVET and take a step towards better comparability of qualification needs for TVET personnel. The TVET personnel comprises of TVET teachers/instructors, school administrators/principals/directors, industry trainers, and trainers of trainers. The focus of this initiative, however, is on TVET teachers and administrators. At present, the standards are still in the developmental stage and will be completed in 2016. D. Synchronizing institutional and national initiatives with regional trends, issues, and initiatives At the national level: 1. Synchronizing policies in education and training with the economy and industry of the country and the region.Human resource development (HRD) is the most crucial development agenda in every country, yet many countries are still lacking of having a proper planning. One of the HRD planning is focused on TVET, especially in preparation for technician and
6
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
skilled workforce. It is difficult to have a perfect balance between supply and demand of labour market that will support the national economy. Most of the time, the country planning is not in line with the society interest for the type and level of education and training. Some countries are having abundant low level skills workforce but lacking the high level workforce; while others may have the opposite experience. Study has shown that the closer of the proportion between the demand and supply of labourforce the better the economic development of the country, see Figure 2. (Ezzine, 2012).
WEAK LINK • Weak growth • High unemployment • Inefficient • Brain drain
TVET
INDUSTRY
2.
STRONG LINK • Strong industry and economic growth • High employment • Efficient and effective VTET system
ECONOMY
Figure 2. The links between vocational TVET, industry (employment) and economy. (Adapted and modified from Ezzine. M., 2012) There are three types of education and training that occur in all countries, formal, informal and non-formal. In most cases, the link between these three types of education and training is not clear due to not having a system for recognizing prior learning. In TVET, in-formal and nonformal learning is still hardly recognized that put the individual in a disadvantage situation. It is important to encourage lifelong learning by establishing training and testing centres that can provide avenues for every individual to upgrade their competencies and to get certification regardless of where and how the skills were acquired. There is a need for having articulation across various education and training and also recognition of the certification for employment, of which many countries in the region are still lacking on this arrangement. In order to be able to recognize candidate‘s qualification, it is important to have clear competencies spelled out in the certification/credentials. These clear competencies must also be accompanied by a strong quality assurance, meaning that whatever listed competencies in the certificate really reflect the capabilities of the holder. This should be followed by having a framework that can be used as a reference for any qualifications that is commonly called as qualification framework. Many countries in the region have a national qualification framework, but not many have they implemented itsuccessfully. This is due to lacking recognition from employers or event Ministry of Labour. Linking NQF with AQRF. In the process of implementing ASEAN Economic Community (AEC), recognition of qualification across national border is needed. This should be facilitated by translating or referencing the Asian Qualification Reference Framework (AQRF) into the national qualifications framework of every industry sectors. Mutual Recognition Agreements (MRAs) in some professions have been initiated (surveying and mapping, engineering, architecture,health, dentistry, nurse, accountancy, and hospitality and tourism), but implementationis still
7
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
limited.Each member country should establish national level committee to administer and supervise the implementation of MRAs.
3.
4.
The discrepancies of educational and training systems among ASEAN member countries may also hinder the progress of having cross-national recognition of professional qualification. The willingness and commitments among member countries, especially at the implementing agency level is needed. Linking with Regional TVET Quality Assurance Framework. All countries have their own way of assuring their TVET quality. The development of Regional TVET Quality Assurance Framework will facilitate in promoting continuous improvement of TVET within the country and enhancing cooperation and mutual understanding between member countries. This eventually will improve connectivity, integration, education and labour mobility. Once the framework is properly adopted, this can be a useful tool for self-assessment or for accreditation of TVET at the member countries of ASEAN. Considering that the adoption is voluntary basis, it is up to the participating countries to utilize the framework that best fit for their needs. To support this initiative, it is very important to establish a smaller TVET quality assurance, such as focusing on teacher quality standards that is currently also being addressed by GIZ-RECOTVET. This can be a useful reference for all teachers to benchmark their competencies against the standards that will help them aware of their current status and have ideas for continuously improving their skills to the next levels. Supporting the initiative of harmonization and internationalization of TVET. SEAMEO Secretariat supported by SEAMEO VOCTECH and SEAMEO SEAMOLEC have coordinated various meetings at the regional high official level and also at the national and institutional level to harmonize and internationalize TVET programmes in SEAMEO member countries. One of the significant accomplishments is the initiation of SEA-TVET consortium that at the moment almost 500 institutions registered and expressed interest to share resources, expertise, experiences, and to organize staff and students exchange overseas, see http://seatvet.seameo.org/. Considering that this is a continuous programme and requires some administrative and financial requirements, the national governments especially the Ministries in charge for education and training must offer support to make this programme successful.
At the Institutional level TVET programmes should be closely related and be able to respond to the current economy and the changes in the labor market. The current trend in labour mobility, thus affects the way TVET institutions design the programmes. In a country where job opportunities are limited, TVET schools/colleges must prepare the graduates not only for working in the country but also working abroad. To prepare TVET students for the regional labour market, this paper will focus on several areas of school-level improvement: updating TVET programmes, improving curriculum contents, enhancing training processes, and assuring quality through skills standards, proper assessment, and recognition, and assisting graduates in finding jobs. Updating TVET programmes.The information about existing and future employment sectors both at the local, national and regional level is very crucial for designing appropriate TVET programmes, especially for the secondary level of education and training programmes. For postsecondary level TVET, however, the programmes may either follow or lead employment sectors. TVET at postsecondary level can lead the employment trends by introducing new programmes that can create new sectors of employment that create competitive advantages. The initiatives of opening new programmes or leading the trends in employment should be based on strong research and development (Gray & Herr, 1997). In 2015, the service sector is expected to be the largest sector in terms of employment in the SEA region, accounting for over 41 per cent of total employment. Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) provide jobs for the majority of workers in the region (ranging from more than 50 per cent in Singapore to more than 90 per cent in Indonesia) (ILO 2007a). An ILO report (2007a) highlights that labour productivity, education and migration will play an important role in shaping the Southeast Asian‘s competitiveness, growth and development.
8
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The changing labour market both nationally and regionally and various students‘ interests have to be responded appropriately by TVET institutions. TVET institutions should be proactive in monitoring the changes and at the same time willing to change or to close the irrelevant programmes. They should innovate programmes that meet the needs of the labor market and the interest of students (Gray & Herr 1997). As an illustration, in a country where the service sector is more promising in terms of offering decent jobs and salaries such as in Singapore, students are very interested in enrolling in service-related programmes. On the other hand, the traditional programmes such as masonry, woodworking, constructions are receiving negative response from the students; thus these industries rely on foreign workers for their business. In this case, TVET institutions in Singapore can offer TVET programmes that have high demand from both business and industry and students, i.e. in business sectors; while TVET institutions abroad planning to send their graduates to work in Singapore can offer traditional manufacturing programmes. This kind of ―match-making‖ initiative will benefit both ―sending‖ and ―receiving‖ countries and at the same time also benefit both students and employers. Improving curriculum content.The integration of ―common‖ or ―soft‖ skills in the curriculum, such as communication, teamwork, work ethics applicable to various working environments is very important (Klaus, 2008). Mastering relevant technical or vocational skills alone without having proper soft skills will hinder candidates entering the labour market. To prepare students with more suitable skills not only for working in the country but also abroad, TVET should incorporate inter-cultural understanding and international languages—especially English (Tiew Ming 2007). Mastering both the national language and English will be necessary. In Indonesia, foreign language competency, especially English, is also mandated for TVET students regardless of some limitations (DTVE, 2005). Students in Singapore are also exposed to learning about working conditions outside of their culture, country, and region, so as to benefit from opportunities abroad which are on the rise due to globalization (Tiew Ming, 2007). This initiative is also happening in other countries in the region as shared in the 2010World teachers‘ day conference in Bangkok, Thailand. In relation to the technical skills, TVET institutions should not offer narrow occupational skills catering to the needs of particular companies. Focusing on narrow occupational skills appears to be a major problem; instead there is a need to take a sectoral approach and look at all competencies that are performed in a given sector. Even though narrow skills are very relevant to meet the needs of particular businesses or industries, this will limit career mobility or options (Gray & Herr, 1997). Besides the technical skills or ―hard‖ skills that correspond to the employment sectors, TVET should also prepare students with the ―soft‖ skills, such as communication skills, team work, work ethic, etc. These soft skills are a prerequisite for employment and for moving up to the next level of skills. According to Gray and Herr (1997), there are three levels of essential occupational skills: Level 1, work ethics/ soft skills; Level 2, basic academic skills; Level 3, occupational specific and advanced workplace literacy skills. Please see Figure 3 for illustration.
9
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
High skills/High wage Level 3/Specific and Advanced Skills
Level 2/Basic Academic and General Skills
Low skills-Low wage Level 1/Work Ethics and other Soft Skills
Figure 3. Skills Pyramid Level 1, work ethics, including other soft skills that are very important and are basic prerequisites for anyone seeking employment. Many research findings support the importance of soft skills in today‘s work. According to Casner-Lotto & Barrington (2006) soft skills include among others professionalism or work ethics, oral and written communication, teamwork and collaboration skills, critical thinking or problem-solving skills. These skills are considered more crucial than the basic skills such as reading, writing, arithmetic, humanities, and history. The issue now is how to teach and assess soft skills. The practices vary in Southeast Asia; some teach these as an integral part across various courses, others teach them as special courses, and the rests only monitor whether students have fulfilled the criteria listed in an assessment form but do not teach them. Level 2, basic academic skills, including among others mathematics, science, languages, history, physics, basic engineering or economics , are the basic vocational and technical skills that prepare individuals to adapt easily and to learn faster in any job situations. These are prerequisites to move to the next level, the more specific and advanced vocational and technical skills. Level 3, specific or advanced occupational skills, are the skills needed to perform specific tasks in the occupation. These are the prerequisites to compete for higher salary. Some argue whether these specific skills should be taught at the secondary level or should be taught at tertiary schools or learned from outside of schools. TVET should prepare students for mastering all the three levels of skills to make them competitive in the labor market. For employability level one is very crucial and for receiving a high salary position a candidate should master all, especially the level 3 skills. Education and training processes. There are many ways of delivering TVET: formal, non-formal, and informal education and training. The formal TVET, either through formal schooling or formal training plays an important role in skills development. In most cases formal schooling is administered under the Ministry of Education and the formal training is under the auspices of Ministry of Labor. Non-formal training, either company-based training or community-based training also contributes a significant portion of manpower skills development. The informal training either through family or personal learning experiences regardless of limited recognition, is also very important in contributing to individual skills.
10
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The current trend in recognizing skills acquired in various ways, including non-formal and informal training that is commonly called Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL), will make TVET more efficient, effective, and attractive. This will eventually benefit not only the candidates but also the company and the national productivity. In relation to addressing labour mobility, TVET students and teachers should be given an opportunity to learn other countries‘ cultures or global values so that they will be sensitive and can adjust quickly in the new or foreign working environment. This can be done through attachment programmes abroad or in international companies, student and staff exchanges, participating ASEAN Skills Competition, and or cultural orientation. By participating in SEA-TVET consortium, TVET institutions, including universities that offer TVET teacher education can arrange staff and students exchange overseas and learn different cultures and different languages.
Skills standards, assessment, and recognition. Skills standards, assessment, and recognition are also important components for regional skills recognition. Each country should set up a strong mechanism for skills standards, assessment, and recognition before moving to regional level skills standards and recognition across borders. By participating in SEA-TVET consortium, TVET institutions, including universities that offer TVET teacher education can arrange staff and students exchange overseas.
Job market information. Providing students with appropriate knowledge, skills, and attitudes relevant to the needs of the job market is very important but this alone will not be sufficient for the graduates without providing them with the access to job information. For this reason, TVET institutions should have a strong network with employers, employers‘ organizations, labour departments, and other job centres from whom they can access job information that can be shared with the students and graduates. This job information should not only cover the job information in at the local and national levels, but also regional as well as international. In summary, the school level initiatives in response to labour mobility can be summarized in the following diagram: Programme and Curriculum
Teaching-Learning Process
Assessment and Certification
Job Information and Placement
Opening or modifying TVET programmes
Enhancing student and teacher attachment programmes at international/foreign companies or overseas
Adopting Holistic Assessment including portfolios and recognition of prior learning
Providing job information: local, national, regional, and international
Improving curriculum: Integrating soft skills, cultural awareness, and foreign languages
Being more responsive to students‘ needs and interests: Offering various/rich learning activities
Enhancing certificate recognition at various levels local, national, and regional/international
Assisting graduates in job application ad job search
Feedback and programme evaluation
Figure 4. School-level initiatives in response to labour mobility E. Concluding remarks
11
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
There are few initiatives at the regional level prepared specifically in anticipation of ASEAN Economic Community. In the area of TVET, harmonization and internationalization or mobility, are the common jargons that lately become very popular. Considering the diversity of education and training systems of ASEAN member countries, it makes sense that the region needs to have a platform that each member country can translate and refer to that platform for the purpose of comparing and benchmarking. This process will eventually create understanding and trust among members. The member countries have made it clear that the region are not planning to make the education and training systems similar or uniform but maintaining the diversity and at certain degree also need to harmonize them. Considering that one of indicators of ASEAN Economic Community is a freer flow of labors, providing education and training that are suitable for working in the country and abroad is very crucial. Therefore, internationalizing the TVET programmes and providing avenues for the personnel and students to learn from other schools, colleges, industries, and communities abroad becomes necessary. These trends and issues have inspired national and regional players to come up with few regional initiatives, including the development of Mutual Recognition Agreements, Regional TVET Quality Assurance and Qualification Frameworks, ASEAN Qualification Reference Framework, Southeast Asia TVET (SEA-TVET) on Harmonization and Internationalization, TVET Asia Online Journal, and Regional TVET Personnel Common Core Standards. These regional initiatives will be meaningless if the players at the national and institutional levels are not responding appropriately. Creating implementing agencies/committees at the national level and monitoring board accompanied by strong support from national level is very important. Likewise, the relevant institutions must also be aware of and be responsive to these regional and national initiatives by continuously adjusting their TVET programmes and their curricula, enhanced teaching-learning, more authentic and relevant assessment and certifications,and providing labour market information and job placement. There is a growing need for and importance of learning different cultures and regional/international language, i.e. English; institutions should provide opportunities for staff and students exchange facilitated by SEA-TVET consortium. Considering that TVET is very dynamic, continues adjustments of programmes and improvement of the way we deliver the education and training are crucial. TVET policymakers and practitioners should be aware of what is happening at international, regional, and national levels in order to come with TVET programmes that offer relevant and attractive to the needs of students/trainees, industry, and national/regional economy. References ASEAN Secretariat. (2010). ASEAN Economic Community Blueprint. ASEANJakarta. Retrieved from http://aseansec.org/21083.pdf. ASEAN.(2009). The ASEAN Socio-Cultural Community (ASCC) Plan of Action. http://www.aseansec.org/16832.htm, [accessed 29/11/10] Casner-Lotto, J and Barrington, L (2006). Are they really ready to work? Employers' perspectives on the basic knowledge and applied skills of new entrants to the 21 st century US workforce. n.p.: Conference Board, Partnership for 21st Century Skills,Corporate Voices for Working Families, & Society for Human Resource Management. Central Intelligence Agency. (2015). The World Fact book. Retrieved on 5 July 2015, from https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/resources/the-world-factbook/ DTVE- Directorate of Technical and Vocational Education (2005) The roadmap of technical and vocational education in Indonesia, DTVE, Jakarta. Ezine, M. (2012). Promoting TVET as key tool for skills development and youth employability in the Arab region. A paper presented at TVET Expert Meeting in Oman Gray, K.C. and Herr, E.L (1997) Workforce Education: The Basics, Allyn and Bacon, New York. ILO- International Labour Organisation (ILO) (2007) Skills recognition for migrant workers. Report of ILO/SKILLS-AP/Korea Regional Planning Workshop on Skills Recognition for Migrant Workers Bangkok, Thailand, April 23-25, 2007, Regional Skills and Employability Programme in Asia and the Pacific (SKILLS-AP). ILO. (2007a). Labour and Social Trends in ASEAN 2007 Integration, Challenges and Opportunities. International Labour Office Regional Office for Asia and the Pacific, Bangkok. Kim, K.B. (2007). Labour and Social Trends in ASEAN 2008: Driving Competitiveness and Prosperity with Decent Work, ILO, Jakarta. Klaus, P. (2008). The hard facts about soft skills, http://www.bettersoftskills.com/research.htm, [accessed 29/11/10]
12
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Laipson, E. and Pandya, A. (2010) Migration Challenges in the Indian Ocean Littoral. The Henry L. Stimson Center, Washington, D.C, http://www.stimson.org/rv [accessed 29/11/10] Ministry of Education Malaysia. (2010). ‗Technical and vocational education and training in Malaysian schools‘.A country paper presented during SEAMEO VOCTEH regular training programme on July 19-31, 2010. Majumdar, S (2009). ‗TVET response to global trends in the Colombo plan region’, Conference Proceedings of International Conference on Harnessing Qualifications Framework Towards Quality Assurance in TVET, Manila, Philippines, December 1-2, 2009. SEAMEO VOCTECH. (2014). The 5th Five Year Development Plan. Bandar Seri Begawan: SEAMEO VOCTECH. SEAMEO Secretariat.(2015). Harmonization and Internationalization of TVET in Southeast Asia. Working Paper for SEA-TVET High Official Meeting. Tiew Ming, Y (2007). Quality and Performance Management of Technical Education and Training in Singapore, Doctoral Thesis at the School of Education, Edith Cowan University Young, M (2005). National qualifications frameworks: Their feasibility for effective implementation in developing countries, International Labour Organization, Geneva.
13
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
14
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Intelligent Sensing: From Macroscopic to Microscopic Scale Poki Chen Department of Electronic and Computer Engineering National Taiwan University of Science and Technology
[email protected]
Abstract The intelligent household appliance and environment monitoring is the mainstream development for future energy saving and environmental protection. A complete open-source-based platform for smart building monitoring is developed first and then the corresponding hardware, firmware and sensing devices are fully integrated. Many award-winning technologies, such as high efficiency convertor, RF breath detector, time-todigital converter and CMOS thermal sensor … are created. Both digital and analog implementations are explored to optimize the performance. Finally, a self-powered surveillance device composed of MEMS-based solar cell and temperature sensor will be introduced to conclude the talk..
15
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
16
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
EFFICIENY OPTIMISATION CONTROL STRATEGY FOR DTC INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES Wahyu Mulyo Utomo1, Sy Yi Sim1 1 Electrical Power Department, Faculty of Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia, 86400 Parit Raja, Batu Pahat, Johor, Malaysia . E-Mail:
[email protected],
[email protected]
Abstract - Typical DTC IM drive has good efficiencies while operating at its rated condition, i.e., rated speed and rated torque. Nevertheless, most of the time a motor drive operates far from its rated operating point, which impairs the efficiency. Therefore, DTC should be associated with a loss minimization strategy to maximize the drive efficiency for a wider range of operation. Consequently, this paper proposed an online learning Artificial Neural Network (ANN) optimum flux controller with the objective to generate an adaptive flux level to optimize the efficiency of any different operating points, especially at low speed and low torque condition. The proposed controller uses the input power of the drive system as the objective function and minimizes it. The description of neural network control system with the training procedure is given in this paper. The simulation results show the effectiveness of the proposed method. Index Terms - Loss Minimization Adaptive Flux Controller Direct Torque Control Artificial Neural Network Induction Motor.
I. INTRODUCTION In recent past, an innovative control method namely DTC has gained the attraction [1]. The use of DTC strategies has become more universal and popular for induction motor drives and seems has a very rapid growth in the development of it. DTC can be considered as a simpler alternative to the FOC technique, where both provide an effective control of the flux and torque but unlike the traditional FOC, DTC enables both quick and precise torque response excluding the inner current regulation loop and complex field-oriented block, less parameter dependence and increase the precision and the dynamic of flux and torque response [2-3]. Hence, DTC is much simpler. A neural network based speed controller of SVPWMDTC was implemented to replace the conventional PID controller in order to overcome the common problems of conventional DTC such as overshoot during start up and a poor load disturbance rejection in permanent mode [4]. The ANN is chosen based on its several advantages over the others as ANNs are excellent estimator in nonlinear systems, insensitivity to the distortion of network inexact input data and its
17
simple architecture[5]. The neural network is trained in the supervised learning mode by using the back propagation algorithm. A better performance of transient response by reduce the overshoot and torque ripple is obtaned. The increasing emphasis on energy saving is highlighting the importance of attaining higher motor effiviency under all operating conditions especially for the industrial application. Intentionally, a control algorithm that manage to reduce the losses to maximize the efficiency of the IM drives is highly attractive. It is commonly know that the induction motor have good efficiencies while operating at full load. However, at lighter load, which is a condition that many machines experience for a significant portion of their service life, the efficiency decreases to a large extent. It is therefore important to maximize the efficiency of motor drive system while operating in adjustable speed applications. It is well known that the efficiency of an IM drives can be improved by reducing the flux level when it operates under light load conditions. However, the challenge is to be able to predict the extent to which the flux can be reduced, at any operating point over the complete torque and speed range, which will maximize the efficiency. This paper concern on the objective to determine the most suitable flux value for a DTC fed IM drives for maximization especially under part-load operation. An ANN based optimum flux predictor is presented. The speed and load torque are used as inputs for the neural network while the producing optimum flux is taken as neural network output. The proposed control algorithm will be simulated in Matlab/Simulink package to verify the proposed algorithm. II. DTC CONTROL A.
Model of Induction Motor The induction motor is an a.c. machine where the armature winding on the stator and the field is winding on the rotor. Few assumptions should be pertinent before the mathematical model of IM is design.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The electromagnetic torque equation is • The stator and rotor resistance (Rs,Rr) is used to represent the stator and rotor winding appropriately. • The stator and rotor inductance (Ls,Lr) is used to represent the flux in stator and rotor winding appropriately. • The mutual inductance (Lm) is used to represent the interaction between stator and rotor fluxes. • The air gap is consistently distributed between stator and rotor and hence the windings are sinusoidal distribution. • The motor is at steady state constant speed, ( ωr=0) • The motor is initially relaxed.
Te
Vds Rsids
Vqr Rr iqr
Vdr Rr idr
d ds e qs dt d qr
be zero if the VC control is fulfilled. The electromagnetic torque will be controlled only by the q-axis stator current and it can be express as follow: Te
3PLm ( dr iqs ) 4 Lr
(10)
The parameters for the motor are given as Table-1 Table-1. Motor Parameter Motor Parameter
Value
Frequency, f
50 Hz
Pole, p
2
Stator Resistance, Rs
8.2Ω
Rotor Resistances, Rr
5.3667Ω
Stator Self Inductances, Ls
0.4934H
Rotor Self Inductances, Lr
0.4934H
Mutual inductances , Lm
0.4867H
(1) B.
(3)
d dr (e r ) qr dt
(4)
Where, Vqr ,Vdr 0 The flux equation, qs Ll siqs Lm (iqs iqr )
(5)
qr Ll riqr Lm (iqs iqr )
(6)
ds Ll sids Lm (ids idr )
(7)
dr Ll ridr Lm (ids idr )
(8)
DTC Scheme and Principle
DTC was introduced in the middle of 80‘s and consider as an alternative technique to the FOC, which provide a fast and good dynamic torque response. The DTC scheme is very simple in its basic, which consists of DTC controller, torque and flux calculator, and voltage source inverter (VSI). The control philosophy of DTC is to directly control the inverter state so as to maintain the stator flux and torque within hysteresis band limits which requires no current regulator loops while the similar performance of the FOC can achieve at the same time or much better. As shown in Figure-1, the conventional DTC scheme for an induction motor consists of two loops, the magnitude of stator flux and the torque respectively. The three level hysteresis comparator take the output error between the estimated torque T and the reference torque Tref while the error from the estimated stator flux Ψ and reference flux magnitude Ψref is feed into the two level hysteresis comparator[9]. The estimated values are calculated by means of the adaptive motor model[10]. Hereafter, the position of the stator flux in sync with the resulting torque error and flux error of the hysteresis
(2)
(e r ) dr
dt
(9)
The q component of rotor field qr would
The induction motor can be derived to difference reference frames with respects to its stator, rotor, or its synchronous speed. Particularly, choosing the difference reference frames yields the different model of IM. All motor parameter such as voltage, current, and flux must be refer to the preferred reference frame for modeling[6]. The difference modeling frames are one of the primary divergences between FOC and DTC. The motor is refer to synchronously reference frame for FOC, ie ω=ωe while DTC is in stationary reference frames, i.e, ω=0. By considering, the stationary reference frames fixed on the stator, the mathematical equation of the IM can be written as follow[7],[8]: The voltage equation, d qs Vqs Rsiqs e ds dt
3PLm ( dr iqs qrids ) 4 Lr
18
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
block are used as the input for the selection table. The position of the stator flux is divided into six different sections. The decent voltage vector is select based on selection table. The selection table blocks are responsible for proper inverter switching state selection at each sampling time in order to confirm P the torque and flux error lays within hysteresis in band[7]. Terr
Tref* Ѱref
Ѱerr Ѱ
Hysteresis Comparator T Hysteresis Comparator
Sa
Voltage S b vector Sc Selector
Voltage Source Inverter (VSI)
flux controller imposed on the SVPWM DTC VDC scheme. To apply the ANN based optimum flux ω Vds has been ωerr the input power Terr of ref predictor, motor Speed Tref Torque controller Voltage calculated by equation (11). Controller ω
Pin_err
SVPWM T Vqs Flux ANN Pin Vd I d Vq I q Ѱerr Controller Optimum Flux Controller Ѱ
Pin_ref
Flux and Torque Estimator
IM
Source
(11)
Inverter (VSI)
Ids 2ϕ Iqs
Iabc
3ϕ
θ Stator Flux and Torque Estimator
V I
IM
Figure-1. Basic DTC scheme with the hysteresis controller. As a matter of facts, the fundamental concept of DTC is to produce the appetence torque by diametrically maneuver the stator flux vector. The instantaneous value of the stator flux and torque are calculated from the stator variable by utilizing a close loop torque and flux calculator. By select the appropriate inverter state, independent and direct control of stator flux and torque can be achieved. Meanwhile, the stator voltage and currents are indirectly controlled, therefore, currents feedback loops are unnecessary[11]. The major problem in conventional hysteresis-based DTC was the high torque ripple, stator current distortion in term of low order harmonics and variable switching frequency due to its hysteresis comparators[12]. A variety method has been proposed to overcome the issues as mentioned. The Space Vector Modulation Technique (SVM) was one of the enticing candidates. The space vector depends on the reference torque and flux is use to solve this problem. The reference voltage vector is then realized using a voltage vector modulator. In conventional hysteresis based DTC systems, the next switching condition of the VSI is generated directly from the torque error and flux error. Nonetheless, the SVM-DTC import a constant switching frequency signal to the VSI by the stator reference voltage vectors which produce from the flux and torque error [13]. By implementing the SVM technique, it is not only maintain the merits of the DTC but also make it more reliable and enhance the performance of the drive system for all speed range[14].
Figure-2. Block diagram of the proposed ANN based optimum flux DTC Among various kinds of ANNs that available, the most prevalent configuration appears as the feedforward network trained by the error back propagation algorithm for the engineering application. The feedforward neural networks indicate that a set of input data is supplied to the input units and the information is transferred to the output units through the hidden layers in a forward direction without fed back to earlier layers. The feedforward neural network are basically layers of neurons connected in cascade where the internal structure of a neuron consist of a summer to summing its weighted input signal with the bias and an activation function as shown in Figure-3. The neuron output is calculated as: a f wp b
(12)
Inputs General Neuron
p w
∑
n
f
a
b 1
Figure-3. The neuron structure.
III. ADAPTIVE FLUX CONTROLLER ALGORITHM
Where p is the input, w is the corresponding weight while b is the bias. The summer output n, often refer as the net input that feed to a transfer function f, which produces the scalar neuron output, a.
Basically, this method uses the input power of drive system as the objective function and minimizes it. Figure-2 shows the proposed optimum
19
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
aim f
The feedforward network is composed by the input layer, output layer, and the hidden layers. The hidden layers helps to associate the input and output layers, it can be one or several layers depending on the system complexity. Although a single hidden layer is sufficient to solve any function approximation problems, but a more complex problem will be easier to solve by a net with two or more hidden layers. In a multilayer neural network with two hidden layers, the first hidden layers often serves to partition the input space into regions and the units in the second hidden layer represent a cluster of points. According to the property of the multilayer feedforward network, this paper utilizes the three layers feed forward network. Basically, the numbers of input and output neuron at each layer are equal to the number of input and output signals of the system respectively. A multilayer perceptron network is implemented in this paper for the speed controller. The structure of the proposed ANN DTC is shown in Figure-4.
wijm
f
Ʃ
f
nim
Ʃ
f
Ʃ
f
Ʃ
f
f
m
(nim )
2 1 e 2 ni
m
1 (15)
wijm (k 1) wijm (k ) bim (k
1)
bim (k )
F (k ) wijm
(16)
F (k ) bim
(17)
where k is sampling time, α is learning rate, and F performance index function of the network. The next section will be explaining the details of offline and online learning NN that used for the simulation testing.
aim
Ʃ
The process to select and update the appropriate weights of the network in order to achieve the desired input or output relationship is known as training the network. The ability to learn by the training data to improve and achieve the require system performance is one of the most important features in ANN. Typically, the weight updating can be done by two primary ways, namely the online and offline learning. The general approach for both learning schemes are the same, the difference is that, for offline learning, the weight are updated after summing all training example, while in online training, the parameter are updated every time after a new training example is done[15]. In this paper, back propagation learning algorithm is implemented where it is also the most famous learning algorithm in the supervised learning mode. The back-propogation looks for the minimum of the error function difference between target output and actual output for all given training patterns by adjust the weight in all connecting links and thresholds in the nodes using the method of gradient descent. The combination of weights which minimizes the error function is considered to be a solution of learning problem. The backpropagation algorithm should adjust the network parameter in order to minimize the mean square error as calculated by:
a
The controller consists of input layer, hidden layer and output layer. Based on number of the neuron in the layers, the ANN DTC is defined as a 15-1 network structure. The first neuron of the output layer is used as a torque reference signal (a21=mf). The connections weight parameter between jth and ith neuron at mth layer is given by wmij, while bias parameter of this layer at ith neuron is given by bmi. Transfer function of the network at ith neuron in mth layer is defined by: S m 1
1 wijm a m bim j j 1
(14)
Updating of the connection weight and bias parameters are given by:
Figure-4. The architecture of proposed back propogation ANN Flux controller.
nim
(nim )
Where f is the activation function of the neuron. In this design the activation function of the output layer is unity and for the hidden layer is a tangent hyperbolic function given by:
bim Ʃ
m
(13)
The output function of neuron at mth layer is given by:
F (k )
20
1 2 ei (k ) 2 i
(18)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Loss Minimization
ei (k ) ti (k ) ai (k )
(19)
Proposed ANN Optimum Flux Controller
[Pin_ref] [Pin ]
where ti is target signal and ai output signal on last layer.
load
F wijm
F nim nim wijm
sim
sim
F aim aim nim
wijm
aim 1
DTC System
Induction Motor
The proposed adaptive flux is adopted before the DTC system in order to generate the appropriate flux reference according to a different speed and torque level instead of the conventional constant flux value. In order to verify the validity of the proposed ANNEO DTC, the efficiency is obtained with and without the ANNEO controller for a variety of speed and torque. Different operating speed is tested, which is 150 rad/s, 120 rad/s, 90 rad/s and 60 rad/s. Corresponding to each speed, different torque value will be tested, which is 0.2 Nm, 0.4 Nm, 0.7 Nm and 0.9 Nm, where the rated torque is 1 Nm for this testing three phase's induction motor. To verify the simulation result in real time, the proposed control method has been applied to an experiment setup for real time testing. The experiment setup, shown in Figure 6 consists a three phases insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) based inverter to fed the induction motor and controlled through the dSPACE DS1103 Real-time Digital Signal Controller. The entired control system is programmed in C language by the Matlab 2013 and interfaced by the ControlDesk 5.1. The digital control unit and current sensor is used to measure the feedback signal.
(22)
Gradient the transfer function again to the connection weight parameter is given by:
nim
Motor
Figure-5. The Simulink block diagram of the proposed LM SVM-DTC.
(21)
nim
Speed Controller
Flux,Torque Estimator
(20)
The sensitivity parameter of the network is defined as: F
Induction
SV PWM Speed Controller
Reference Speed (rad/s)
sv pwm
&
0.9 rated flux
By implementing the chain rule, the gradient descent of the performance index against to the connection weight is given by:
DTC
(23)
Finally, by substitution equation (21) and (23) into (16) the updating connection parameter for weights and bias is given by: wijm 1 (k 1) wim i (k ) sim (k )aim 1 (k )
(24)
bim1 (k 1) bimi (k ) sim (k )
(25)
IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The proposed model has been developed by Matlab/Simulink. The simulation block diagram for the proposed IM drives is shown in Figure-5.
21
optimum flux rated flux
40 30
50 optimum flux rated flux
40
International Conference on Vocational Education30and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6 Torque (Nm)
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.2
Speed = prototype 90rad/s Figure 6: Hardware of the proposed of the proposed EO SVPWM-DTC.
80 70
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6 Torque (Nm)
50 40 30 0.2
70
Speed = 150rad/s
Speed = 120rad/s
80
50 optimum flux rated flux
40
0.2
0.3
0.4
30
optimum flux rated flux 0.8
Efficiency (%)
80 70 60 50
70
Efficiency (%) Efficiency (%)
60
optimum flux flux optimum rated flux flux rated
40 40
80
90
optimum flux 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.4 0.5 0.6 rated flux 0.7 0.8 Torque (Nm) (Nm) Torque Torque (Nm) = 90rad/s 60rad/s 100 110Speed120 130 140 150 Speed (rad/s)
60 50 optimum flux rated flux
40
0.2
0.9
0.3
0.4
30 60
70
0.9 0.9
80 80 70 70 60 60 50 50 40 40 30 30 60 60 80
30
40
80
90
100 110 Speed (rad/s)
roptimum flux flux 0.5 0.6 rated0.7 0.8 Torque Torque (Nm) (Nm) 120
130
50 optimum flux rated flux
40
0.2 70 80 80
0.3
140
70 60
80
70 70
optimum flux 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 rated flux Torque (Nm) Speed Speed== 120rad/s 60rad/s 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 Speed (rad/s) Torque = 0.4 Nm Torque = 0.7 Nm
0.4 0.4
optimum optimum flux flux rated ratedflux flux optimum flux roptimum flux rated flux 0.7 0.9 rated 0.7 flux 0.8 0.8 0.9
60 60 50 50 40 40
0.2 0.2
70 70 80
0.3 0.3
80 80
90 90
70
0.5 0.6 0.5 0.6 Torque Torque(Nm) (Nm) 100 Speed 110 = 60rad/s 120 130 100 (rad/s) 110 120 130 Speed Speed (rad/s) Torque = 0.9 Nm
150 150
50 40 30
40 0.2
60
140 140
60
0.3
0.4
30
22
0.9
50
0.9
150
0.4
30 30
Torque = 0.7 Nm
70
Torque = 0.2 Nm
60
30
40
60
50 50
0.3 0.3
70
30
60 60
80
50
(%) Efficiency(%) Efficiency
70 70
0.2 0.2
0.9
0.9
60
Torque = 0.2 Nm
30 30
40
0.8
70
Efficiency (%)
50
0.7
Efficiency (%)
0.8
Efficiency (%)
optimum flux rated flux
(%) Efficiency (%) Efficiency(%) Efficiency
80 80
0.5 0.6 Torque (Nm) Speed 120rad/s Speed== 150rad/s 90rad/s
Efficiency (%)
60
Efficiency (%)
70
Efficiency (%) Efficiency(%)
Efficiency (%)
80
30
60
0.9
Speed = 60rad/s
80
70
0.8
The ANNEO controller is expected to be 60 adaptive and produce the optimal flux level corresponding to variance speed under difference 50 torque in order to attain its maximum optimum fluxefficiency, optimum flux 40 specifically at low speed and lowrated torque flux operation. rated flux The efficiency for each speed, resultant by different 30 torque condition is shown in Figure-7, while the 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 efficiency for each torque corresponding with the Torque (Nm) Torque (Nm) different speed operation is shown in Figure-8. The Figure-7. The efficiency for constant flux value and resulting adaptive flux level from the ANNEO for optimal flux value for the speed of 150 rad/s, 120 each testing operation condition is in Table-2, instead rad/s, 90 rad/s and 60 rad/s corresponding with of the constant 0.9 as the reference flux. different torque value. A significant amount of efficiency improvement has been achieved by the optimal flux level determined by the ANNEO, compared with the constant rated flux value. As show in Figure-7 and Figure-8, a reasonable amount or efficiency has been increased specially at light load. At the low load operation, in both high speed and low speed, the efficiency varies from 52% to 65 % and 30 % to 42% accordingly when the suitable flux value implemented as a reference value yields by the proposed ANNEO controller.
60
80
0.7
80 Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
Efficie
Efficie
50
70
80
90
0.5 0.6 Torque (Nm)
100 110 Speed (rad/s)
120
optimum flux rated flux optimum flux rated flux 0.8 0.7 0.9
130
140
150
30
Efficiency (%) Efficiency (%)
60
optimum flux rated flux
130
140
150
80 80 70 70 60 60 50 50 40 40 30 30 6060
Efficie
optimum flux rated flux
40
70
80
90
100 110 Speed (rad/s) Torque = 0.4 Nm Torque = 0.7 Nm
120
130
140
150
[1]
[2]
optimum flux roptimum flux [3] rated flux rated flux 7070
8080
90 90
100 110 100 110 Speed Speed (rad/s) (rad/s)
120 120
130 130
140 140
150 [4] 150
Torque = 0.9 Nm
130
Efficiency (%)
[5]
70 60 50
[6]
optimum flux rated flux
40 30
140
150
60
optimum flu rated flux
40
30 Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical
80
roptimum flux rated flux
50
[7]
70
80
90
100 110 Speed (rad/s)
120
130
140
150 [8]
Figure-8. The efficiency for constant flux value and optimal flux value for the different load torque, 0.2Nm, 0.4Nm, 0.7Nm and 0.9Nm corresponding with different speed value.
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
IV. CONCLUSION [13]
An Artificial Neural Network Efficiency Optimization (ANNEO) controller with the objective of generating an adaptive flux level to optimize the efficiency of different operating points has been proposed in this paper. This proposed technique is based on the principle that the flux level in a machine can be adjusted to give maximum efficiency for a given speed and load torque. The proposed method is proven to be particularly effective at light load and in a steady state of the drive. The simulation shows a significant improvement in the system efficiency with the proposed ANN EO controller, especially at the low torque and low speed operation. In conclusion, by obatianing the suitable flux level value can result in a significant efficiency improvement, thus, the proposed adaptive flux EO controller is significant
[14]
[15]
ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to gratitude Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia for any valuable supports during conducting this research and in preparing this manuscript.
23
60
70
80
90
100 110 Speed (rad/s)
120
REFERENCES Torque = 0.9 Nm 80 B.Singh, P. Jain, A.P. Mittal, J.R.P Gupta, ―Direct torque control: a practical approach to electric vehicle,‖ IEEE Power 70 India Conference, 2006, pp. 4. S.L. Kaila, H.B. 60 jani, ―Direct Torque Control for Induction Motor Using SVPWM Technique,‖ National conference on Recent trend 50 in Engineering & technology, 2011. W. Jiajia, G. Dawei, XinZhao, L. Qingchun,―An efficiency optimization 40strategy of induction motors for electric vehicles,‖ IEEE Vehicle Power and Propulsion Conference, 2008, pp. 1-5.30 A.H.M. Yatim, 60 W.M. 70 Utomo, 80 Efficiency 90 100Optimization 110 120of Variable Speed Induction Motor Drive SpeedUsing (rad/s) Online Backpropagation, IEEE International Power and Energy Conference, 2006, pp. 441-446. Efficiency (%)
Efficie
50
M. Wlas, Z. Krzeminski, J. Guzin, and H. A. Toliyat, ―Artificial-Neural-Network-Based Sensorless Nonlinear Control of Induction Motors,‖ IEEE Transsaction On Energy Conversion, vol. 20, no. 3, pp. 520–528, 2005. Z.A. Alnasir and A.H. Almarhoon, ―Design of Direct Torque Controller of Induction Motor ( DTC ),‖ International Journal of Engineering and Technology (IJET), vol. 4, no. 2, pp. 54– 70, 2012. M. K. Arya, ―Development of Direct Torque Control Modelwith using SVI For Three Phase Induction,‖ vol. 3, no. 8, pp. 6650–6655, 2011. A. P. Fizatul, S. Marizan, and I. Zulkifilie, ―Comparison Performance of Induction Motor Using SVPWM And Hysteresis Current Controller,‖ Journal of Theoretical and Applied Information Technology, vol. 30, no. 1, pp. 10–17, 2011. D. Casadei, G. Serra, A. Tani, and L. Zarri, ―Assessment of direct torque control for induction motor drives,‖ vol. 54, no. 3, 2006. S. G. Asst, P. M. M. U. Mullana, and B. V. K. A. P. M. M. U, ―SIMULATION OF DIRECT TORQUE CONTROL OF THREE PHASE INDUCTION. S. Allirani, ―Torque Ripples Minimization in DTC based Induction Motor Drive using Fuzzy Logic Technique,‖ vol. 40, no. 1, pp. 25–31, 2012. A. A. Pujol, ―Direct torque control of induction motors,‖ in XVIII Conference on Electronic Engineering Campus of Terassa, pp. 35–38. A. A. Pujol, ―Direct torque control of induction motors,‖ in XVIII Conference on Electronic Engineering Campus of Terassa, pp. 35–38. W. M. Utomo, S. Y. Sim, Z. A. Haron, A. A. Bohari, N. M. Zin, R. M. Ariff, and W. A. Siswanto, ―An Improved DTC of an Induction Motor Drive with Neural Network Controller,‖ International Journal of Mechanical & Mechatronics Engineering, vol. 14, no. 02, pp. 54–59, 2014. J. Wang, A. Belatreche, L. Maguire, and M. McGinnity, ―Online versus offline learning for spiking neural networks: A review and new strategies,‖ in IEEE 9th International Conference on Cyberntic Intelligent Systems, 2010, pp. 1–6.
130
140
optimum flu rated flux 130
140
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
24
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Parametric Model of Laboratory Heat Exchanger Tatang Mulyana – Tekom University, Bandung, Indonesia Mohd Nor Mohd Than – Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia Dirman Hanafi - Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia ABSTRACT A parametric model of laboratory heat exchanger has been presented. Such model is very important because it provides information about controlling a system operation. Without the model, the control task would be difficult to tune the controller. This article is the main objective of my doctoral thesis and one of the themes of my research during guiding the final year project students in University Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia (UTHM). The model consists of auto regressive with external input (ARX), average auto regressive moves with external input (ARMAX), output error (OE) or box-jenkins (BJ). On-site heat exchanger used is HE QAD BDT 821 that has been available in the Control Laboratory. INTRODUCTION Introducing a mathematical model related to represent the actual system dynamics is very important to science and technology. Such models can be useful e.g. for simulation and prediction or for designation of digital control systems. Many industrial processes must be controlled in order to be run safely and efficiently. To design regulators, some type of model for the process is needed. The models can be of various types and degrees of sophistication. Sometimes it is sufficient to know the crossover frequency and the phase margin in a Bode plot. In other cases, such as the designation of an optimal controller, the designer will need a much more detailed model that can also describe the properties of the disturbances acting on the process. In many cases, the primary aim of modeling is to assist in the designing process. The knowledge of a model can be the purpose itself. If the models can explain measured data satisfactorily then they might also be used to explain and understand the observed phenomena. However, sometimes this model is not easy to get especially when global representation system is required. Therefore, in order to solve the difficulties to get the dynamics model of process system, one can use system identification. The system identification is a technique to estimate the mathematical models of system dynamics based on data observed from the system (Knudsen, 2004; Ljung, 2011). In this article, a parametric identification approach has been implemented to a shell and tube heat exchanger to produce the parametric model based on one set of experimental data as case study. In general, a parametric method can be characterized as a mapping from the recorded data to the estimated parameter vector (Soderstrom, 2001). The best model of the parametric model depends on the order of polynomial equation. By choosing high order, it will result in highly nonlinear structure and increase possibility of best fits. But the resulted model is not practical because it will make the control task difficult. Therefore one must find a model that has the highest best fits; however, at the same time, it should not have highly nonlinear structure. In this case, the third order system is sufficiently high for the model system which is applied in the control design. In industrial process, heat exchanger is designed to transfer heat from one fluid to another. It has many different applications, especially in chemical process, air conditioning, and refrigeration. Since heat exchanger has a wide variety of applications and is commonly used in industry, control of the system is essential. A dynamic model may be created to allow the 25
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
chemical engineer to optimize and control the heat exchanger. By utilizing this model, predictions can be made to analyze how altering the independent variables of the system can change the outputs. Parametric Model A generalized model structure of the LTI system, which may give rise to different model sets, is given by Equation (1) where five polynomials have either of the forms like Equation (2) where A, C, D and F have leadings 1‘s (Soderstrom, 2001). ( ) ( ) ( ) ∑ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
<
( ) ;
;
;
;
; ;
;
;
;
;
;
;
; ; ;
(2) The Equation (1) is illustrated in Figure 1. The polynomial A corresponds to poles that are common between the dynamic model and the noise model. This polynomial is appropriate if the noise enters the system close to the input. Likewise, F determines the poles that are unique for the dynamics from input and D the poles that are unique for the noise. This structure is too generalized for most purposes and one or several of the polynomials can be set to unity. This gives rise to more common special black box SISO (single input – single output) models listed in Table 1. A parametric model is a model whose parameters are adjusted to fit the data and do not reflect physical considerations in the system. The polynomial models in Table 1 have four different structures known as auto-regressive with external input (ARX), autoregressive moving average with external input (ARMAX), box-jenkins (BJ) and output error (OE) (Ljung, 2010).
Figure 1 Generalized model structure LTI systems Table 1: Some common parametric models Polynomial used Name of model structure AB ARX ABC ARMAX BF OE BFCD BJ
26
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
An auto-regressive model with independent inputs (ARX) model is presented as Equation (3) (Ljung, 2010). The noise model is and the noise is coupled to the dynamic model. ( ) ( )
( ) (
∑
)
<
( ) ( ) An auto-regressive moving average with external input (ARMAX) model is presented as Equation (4) (Ljung, 2010). The ARMAX model is an extension of the ARX structure by providing more flexibility for modeling noise using the C parameters (a moving average of white noise). ( ) ( )
( ) (
∑
)
<
( ) ( ) ( ) An output error (OE) is presented by Equation (5) (Ljung, 2010). ()
∑
( ) ( )
(
)
<
( ) ( ) A box-jenkins (BJ) is presented by Equation (6) (Ljung, 2010). The BJ model provides completely independent parameterization for the dynamics and the noise using rational polynomial functions. () ( ) ( ) ( )
∑
( ) ( )
(
)
<
( )
The General Procedure A general procedure of the parametric system identification has been given by Ljung (1999). This procedure is illustrated in Figure 2. Note that the restart after the model validation gives an iterative scheme. There are three principles of the parametric system identification: least square method, the gradient correction method and the maximum likelihood method. The recognition system described in this article is the least square offline parametric system identification. Due to the complexity and diversity of the real system, the actual modeling problem from data acquisition to model establishment is difficult to complete by manual labor because it needs repeatedly questing and the amount of calculation is quite huge. The System Identification has simplified the calculation process and improved the efficiency of the parametric system identification. The process is as follow: data pre-processing, choosing structural parameters, parameter estimation, and model checking. In the system, an important issue is to choose rational structural parameters of the model. Considering ARX model structure, the first step is to generate ARX structure parameter, and the second step is to compute loss function, that is, the normalized quadratic sum of output prediction error. The last step is to select structural parameters based on loss function. After the identification results are obtained, it also needs to verify whether this model is applicable. If not, the model structure should be 27
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
changed and the parameters should be re-estimated. There are five ways for model validation and simulation, i.e.: to compare the predicted output with the measured output; computes and tests the residuals of the model; computes prediction errors; computes the k-step ahead prediction; simulates a given dynamic system.
Figure 2 the flow charts parametric system identification procedure (Ljung, 1999) Validation Model A best model order will be finding should be fulfilling that it is flexible enough and not too complex. The other said, the model structure should be large enough to cover the true system. This structure can be chosen from two or more candidates. This means that for a good model, ̂( ) should resemble the measured output as given in Equation (7) (Soderstorm, 2001). ̂( ) ( ; ̂ ) ( ) ( ) The model can be equivalently expressed as Equations (8) and (9) (Soderstorm, 2001).
28
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
( ) ( ) ( ) (
( ) ( )
( ) (
) (
)
(
))
( ) The model as Equation (8) and (9) have exactly the same form as considered linear regression. The estimated parameter in Equation (8) is known as the least squares (LS) estimation method. The name equation error method also appears in the literature. The criterion which maps the sequence of prediction errors into a scalar can be chosen in many ways. Concerning the first approach, it is often useful to plot the measured data and the model output. The model output ̂( ) is defined as the output of the model excited by the measured input without disturbances added. The deviation of ̂( ) from ( ) is due both to modeling errors and to the disturbances. It is therefore important to realize that if the data are noisy then ̂( ) should differ from ( ). In other words, it should only describe the part of the output that is due to the input signal. The term ( ) denotes the equation error. Here, the following class of criteria is adopted. ( ) is frequently called a loss function as shown in Equation (10). ( ) ∑
( )
(
)
<
A more general form of the loss function is, for example as given by Equation (11) ) must satisfy some regularity conditions. It where the scalar-valued function ( is also possible to apply the prediction error approach to nonlinear models. The only requirement is, naturally enough, that the models provide a way of computing the prediction errors ( ) from the data (Soderstorm, 2001). ( ) ∑ (
(
))
(
)
<
Figure 3 provides an illustration of the prediction error method (Soderstorm, 2001).
Figure 3 Block diagram prediction error method A Final Prediction Error (FPE) criterion provides a measure of the quality of the model by simulating a situation where the model is tested on a different data set. After computing the number of different models, compare models using these criteria. According to this theory, the most accurate model has the smallest FPE. If it 29
( )
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
uses the same data set for both model estimation and validation, the fit always improves as the order of the model increases. There is a flexibility of the model structure such as in ARX model. High order causes the model to have larger FPE. The Final Prediction Error (FPE) is defined by Equation (12) (Ljung, 2010).
[
]
(
)
If VN is the loss function, d is the number of estimated parameters, and N is the number of estimation data set. Toolbox assumes that the final prediction error is asymptotic for d<
[ (
]
(
)
) ( ∑ (
)( (
)) )
(
)
<
Polynomial models are created using ARX, ARMAX, OE and BJ models. The parametric model estimated from the data as a linear polynomial. To get a linear model is estimated data are continuous time. In order to estimate and verify the polynomial model, it must provide input delay and order model. If already insight into the physics of the system, it can determine the number of poles and zeros. In most cases, the order of the prior model is not known. In order to obtain an initial model order and delay of the system, one can estimate and verify several ARX models with various orders and delays, and then compare the performance of these models. The most suitable model that has the best performance is then chosen, and the order is then used as an initial guess for another model. Linear discretized models prepared on the base of the measurements various presentations as the parametric and process models. Their precision in physical phenomenon description has been valuated using two general criterions: Final Prediction Error (FPE) and FIT (represented in window Model Output). The values of the FIT and of the FPE are calculated from a formulae as given by Equation (15), where: – are values of the measurements, – are the values calculated from the model, – is the number of the experimental points, and – is the number of the model coefficients (Ljung, 2010). ) ( ) √( ( ) ( ̅) ̅) √( ( ,(
)
(
) -
The character of the reaction of the model to the step function has been investigated for the best models (with the maximum of the FIT and the minimum of the FPE). The transfer function or/and the step function are generally used in automatic fashion in order to investigate the dynamics of the elements. However, the difficulties in their interpretation have caused the necessity to examine them in different measuring positions. Residuals are actually representation of misfit between the data and the
30
)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
model. Any information remaining in the residuals is a clue that the model might be insufficiently complex; otherwise, it is appropriate (Johansson, 1993). Laboratory Heat Exchanger A real plant for laboratory heat exchanger which was used to get a set of experimental data is shown in Figure 4. The plant requires water heating of the product until it reaches temperature of set point. The output temperature will be measured by using a resistance temperature detector, and will be scanned and transmitted to a recorder by a temperature indicating transmitter. The signal received from the transmitter will be transferred to a temperature indicating controller. Any changes on the temperature reading will be corrected automatically by a valve where it can control the input quantity in a heating process that occurs in the heat exchanger.
Figure 4 Heat Exchanger QAD Model BDT 921 Some noise maybe apparent to the input-output data was varied. To overcome this problem, each experiment has been repeated. The heat exchanger is a single input single output system where FT11 is hot water flow rate inlet from tube side, ( ), as input variable and TIT14 is cold water temperature from shell side, ( ), as output variable. Case Study In this case study, Figure 5 demonstrates an input and output signals data of the heat exchanger. The number of data sampling taken is , whilst each sampling is . The input has fluctuated within a range of and the output increases from to as shown in Figure 5.
31
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Output signals of cold water temperature outlet dataexp1 measured
Ts (C)
60
40
20
0
1000
0
1000
2000
3000 4000 5000 Time (seconds) Input signals of hot water flowrate inlet dataexp1 measured
6000
7000
6000
7000
Ft (m3/hr)
5.2
5.15
5.1
2000
3000 4000 Time (seconds)
5000
Figure 5 the input and output signals dataexp1 measured The parametric model has determined which depicts the basic single input-single output configuration of a general system. By considering the reality of the heat exchanger, and attempting to compare different model structures as well as different identification methods, the following structures were adapted: ARX, ARMAX, OE, and BJ. In a broad sense, a good model is the one that is good at predicting, that is, the one that produces the FPE as small as possible when applied to the observed data. Here, the data processing was implemented using the MATLAB functions for all phases of the system identification process. In order to estimate the order of the heat exchanger, a loss function method combined with the prior knowledge and model validation will be adapted. This simply means that it must be introduced a method to check whether a certain model is a suitable one, based on model validation. The results of parametric models based on the ARX, ARMAX, OE, and BJ model structures of dataexp1, for parameter estimation, and validation model are shown in Figures 6 and 7. Referring to the result of model estimation in the Figure 6, both the parametric models, bj31131 and oe331, have the same percentages of fitting, i.e. 93.23%. Similarly, the percentage of fitting of arx321 and amx3111 is 92.26% and 94.59% respectively. According to these result, therefore, the parametric model amx3111 is the best model. Measured and simulated parametric model output of cold water temperature outlet dataexp1 estimation 45
Temperature Ts (C)
40
35 bj31131:93.23 oe331:93.23 amx3111:94.59 arx321:92.26 dataexp1 estimation
30
25
0
500
1000
1500 2000 Time (seconds)
2500
Figure 6 the parametric model dataexp1 estimation
32
3000
3500
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Measured and simulated parametric model output of cold water temperature outlet dataexp1 validation 54
Temperature Ts (C)
52
50
48
bj31131:87.35 oe331:87.35 amx3111:87.17 arx321:88.60 dataexp1 validation
46
44
42
4000
4500
5000
5500 Time (seconds)
6000
6500
7000
Figure 7 the parametric model dataexp1 validation When these models are validated using the model validation, the best fit occurs at arx321 which gives the best value of 88.60%. This fact is shown by Figure 7. From the Figure 7, the percentage of fitting for the bj31131 and oe331 is 87.35%. While the percentages of fitting for arx321 and amx3111 are 88.60% and 87.17%. In more details, it is presented in Table 2. The dataexp1e is dataexp1 for parameter estimation while dataexp1v is dataexp1 for model validation. Table 2: Estimation model and validation criteria parametric model dataexp1 Estimation Validation Criteria dataexp1v Model best fits loss function FPE arx321 94.84 0.0031 0.0032 amx3111 94.14 0.0032 0.0032 oe331 95.00 0.1022 0.1034 bj31131 95.00 0.0046 0.0046 Table 2 shows the best fits, loss function and FPE of the parametric model for parameter estimation and model validation dataexp1. According to these results, all parametric models have percentages of fitting (best fits) more than 92% for estimation and 87% for validation, whilst the loss functions and FPE is the smallest i.e. less than 0.005. Exception occurs for parametric model oe331 which is 0.1022 for loss function and 0.1034 for FPE. Based on these results, the amx3111 is the best model. For all data sampling of the dataexp1, the result of the fourth models are shown in Figure 8, and the parameter model values for all models are presented in Table 3. Table 3: Estimation model and equationdataexp1 Estimation Model Equation ; ; ; arx321 ( ) ; ; ( ) ; ; ; amx3111 ( ) ; ( ) ; ( ) ; ; ; oe331 ( ) ; ; ; ( ) ; ; ; bj31131 ( ) ; ( ) ; ( ) 33
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 ;
( )
;
;
Measured and simulated parametric model output of cold water temperature outlet dataexp1 measured 55
Temperature Ts (C)
50
45
40 bj31131:95.00 oe331:95.00 amx3111:94.14 arx321:94.84 dataexp1 measured
35
30
25
0
1000
2000
3000 4000 Time (seconds)
5000
6000
7000
Figure 8 the parametric model dataexp1 measured Based on the best fits result which is given by Figure 8 and Table 3, all parametric models have percentages of fitting higher than 94%. The high best fit is bj31131 and oe331, which is 95.00% and the lowest of best fit is amx3111, which is 94.14%. When one looks into the loss function and FPE, arx321 and amx3111 have the smallest value of 0.0032, compare with oe331 that gives loss function and FPE values of 0.1022 and 0.1034 respectively. On the other hand, bj31131 gives the loss function and FPE values of 0.0046. According to this result, only amx3111 is the best model and it should be chosen. Table 3 shows this result. Referring to the result for the ARX model of the dataexp1 in Table 3; the equation for this model in Equation (3) is shown in Equation (16). ; ; ; ) ( ) ( ; ; ) ( ( ) () ( ) The Equation (16) is written in the z domain as given in Equation (17). ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Equation (17) is written in the z domain transfer function by ignoring ( ) is given in Equation (18): ( ) ( ) (
)
The same way with the ARX model above, the ARMAX model of dataexp1 in Equation (4) is implemented to Table 3, and it would result as shown in Equation (19). ( ) ( ) (
34
)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The same way with the ARMAX model above, the OE and the BJ models of dataexp1 in Equations (5) and (6) are implemented to Table 3, it would result as shown in Equation (20). ( ) ( ) (
)
Summary This article has shown parametric model of shell and tube heat exchanger. The parametric models such as ARX, ARMAX, OE and BJ model structures have been proposed as candidate model to solve for the complicated equation of the dynamic model derived. Here, it has been proven that the dynamic model equation could be constructed as the parametric model structures. Almost all best fits of the parametric model used for the data are larger than 90%. The application of this identification is recommended only in some specific cases where the dynamic model of the system must, first of all, be derived to obtain a general structure form and a data experimental must be done. The number of the data very important to accuration models but the selection order to be difficult to obtain best model. Bibliography Johansson, R. (1993). System Modeling and Identification, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Knudsen, M. (2004). Experimental Modelling of Dynamics Systems, Department of Control Engineering, Aalborg University Ljung, L. (1995). System Identification, Sweden, Department of electrical Engineering, Linkoping University Ljung, L. (1997). Nonlinear Black-Box Modelling on System Identification, Sweden, Department of electrical Engineering, Linkoping University Ljung, L. (1999). System Identification: Theory for the User, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River NJ Ljung, L. (2002). Prediction Error Estimation Methods, Circuits Systems Signal Processing, Vol. 21, No. I. pp. 11 - 21 Ljung, L. (2008). Perspectives on System Identification, Division of Automatic Control, Linköping University Sweden Ljung, L. (2009). Perspectives on System Identification. Sweden, Report no.: LiTHISY-R-2900, Division of Automatic Control Ljung, L. (2010). Approaches to Identification of Nonlinear Systems, Division of Automatic Control, Linköping University Sweden Ljung, L., Hjalmarsson H., Ohlsson H. (2011). Four Encounters with System Identification, Sweden, Division of Automatic Control, Linkoping University Ljung, L. (2011). Approaches to Identification of Nonlinear System, Sweden, Division of Automatic Control, Linkoping University Qingchang, R. (1990). Prediction Error Method for Identification of a Heat Exchanger, Eindhoven University of Technology Research Reports, 1990 Raymond Chong and Shao Fen. (1995). Manual Book of QAD Model BDT 921/M3; Boiler Drum and Heat Exchanger Process Control Training System, Unpublished Shah R. K. and Sekulic D. P. (2003). Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 35
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Soderstrom, T. and Stoica, P. (2001). System Identification, New York, Prentice Hall Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Parametric and Nonparametric Identification of Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Mathematical Model, UTHM Thesis, 2014 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Modeling and Simulation of Co Current Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Model HE158C, International Journal of Integrated Engineering (IJIE), UTHM, 2011 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi and Afrodi Ali, Digital Control Design for the Boiler Drum BDT921, Journal of Mechanics Engineering and Automation (JMEA), David Publishing Company, 2011 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than and Dirman Hanafi, A Discrete Time Model of Boiler Drum and Heat Exchanger QAD Model BDT 921, Asian Journal of Mechanical Engineering (AJME) Part A: Fluid, Thermal and Energy System, 2011 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Intan Najiha Mohd Shukri, Identification of Heat Exchanger Plant, Book Project: "MATLAB", ISBN 979-953-307-7740, 2011 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi, Shafura Shariff, Lecture Notes in Computer Science: Identification of Heat Exchanger QAD Model BDT921 based on Various Model Approach: ARX, ARMAX, BJ and OE Models, Second International Conference on Recent Trends in Information Processing & Computing – IPC 2011 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi, Afrodi Ali, Digital Control Design for the Boiler Drum BDT921, Proceeding of Conf. on Industrial and Appl. Math. (CIAM2010), Indonesia 2010 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi, A Discrete Time Model of Heat Exchanger Types HE158C, 7th International Conference on Heat Transfer, Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics (HEFAT2010), 19-21 July 2010, Antalya, Turkey Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi, Intan Najiha Mohd Shukri, Identification of Co Current Plate Heat Exchanger Model HE158C, Proceeding of Conf. on IEEE Student Conference on Research and Development (IEEE SCOReD 2010), UNITEN, Bangi, Malaysia 2010 D73 1 Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Modeling and Simulation of Co-Current Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Model HE158C, Proceeding on Post Graduate Seminar (PGS 2010), UTHM Johor, Malaysia 2010, EE01-1 Tatang Mulyana, Aini Azilah Ramli, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Modeling and Simulation of a Double Pipe Heat Exchanger Model HE158C by using GUI MATLAB, Accepted paper for the 12th International Conference on Quality in Research (QiR) 2011, 4-7 July Bali Indonesia, Paper code: bd4d340ca6 Symposium: VIII. Electrical Engineering 2012-12-12 Tatang Mulyana, Farah Najaa Suhaimi, Dirman Hanafi, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, ARX Model of Four Types Heat Exchanger Identification, Malaysian Technical Universities International Conference 2011 (MUiCET 2011), 13 15 November 2011, Batu Pahat, Johor Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Dirman Hanafi, Nuur Rusilawati, Identification NLARX Model of Four Types Heat Exchanger HE158C based on the MATLAB System Identification Toolbox, International Conference
36
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
on Advance Computer Science and Information System 2011 (ICACSIS 2011), Hotel Mercure Ancol, Jakarta Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Noor Adzmira Mustapha, Identification of Heat Exchanger QAD Model BDT 921 Based on Hammerstein-Wiener Model, International Seminar on the Application of Science & Mathematics 2011 (ISASM 2011), 1 - 3 November 2011, Putra World Trade Centre, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Tatang Mulyana, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, ARX Model of QAD BDT 921 Heat Exchanger Identification, International Conference on Mathematics and Science 2011 (ICOMSc 2011), 12-13 October 2011 at Majapahit Hotel, Surabaya, Indonesia Dirman Hanafi, Mohd Nor Mohd Than, Abdulrahman A.A. Emhemed, Tatang Mulyana, Amran Mohd Zaid and Ayob Hj. Johari, Heat Exchanger‘s Shell and Tube Modeling for Intelligent Control, 2011 International Conference on Industrial and Intelligent Information, April 1-3, 2011, Bali, Indonesia
Tatang Mulyana was born in Bandung, Indonesia, in 1962. He received Physic degree from Padjadjaran University (UNPAD), Bandung, Indonesia, in 1987. He received M.Tech degree in Nuclear Engineering with Instrumentation and Control System Program Study from Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB), Indonesia, in 1996, and Ph.D. degree in Electrical Engineering from Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia (UTHM), in 2014. In 1988-2000, he joined Nuclear Engineering Research Center, the National Atomic Energy Agency (PPTNBATAN), Bandung, Indonesia, as a Researcher with field research of Physic and Metallurgy and Design of Nuclear Power Plant. In 2000-2004, he joined Universiti Teknologi Malaysia–Kolej Legenda Langkawi (UTM-KLL), as a Lecturer in Computer Science School. In 2004-2014, he joined Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia (UTHM), as a Lecturer in Electrical and Electronic Engineering Faculty, and since 2014, he has been working in Telkom University, Bandung, Indonesia, as a Lecturer in Department of Industrial Engineering, Faculty of Industrial & System Engineering. His current research interests include heat exchanger and boiler drum system identification, power plant control design and implementation, manufacturing production system and automation.
37
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
38
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
VOCATIONAL EDUCATION
39
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
40
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Problem Based Instruction (PBI) to Improve Think Critically Students in Planning Steel Construction Heri Suryaman Vocational and Technology Education Program Post Graduate Program State University of Surabaya
[email protected]
Abstract - The study is done with background to improve think critically (power analytic) students in make the planning construction steel. This study attempts to get a device learning and decent qualified for used, having feasibility learning reliability, cognitive study results processes and psychomotor, increased think critically (power analytic) a student on the matter beams, column, and beams-column steel structure.The methodology used is descriptive quantitative. The subject of study used is all students S1 PTB 2013 amounting to 40 students. The data techniques used technique observation, tests, and the survey. Analysis techniques data was undertaken by analyzing eligibility device learning, feasibility learning, the critical thinking, study results, and test hypotheses with test-t the left.The result showed that eligibility device learning got mean ratings of 82,54 %, category in a very reasonable used. Feasibility learning use the problem based instruction (PBI) got mean total of 80,67 %, are part good category. The critical thinking students get value mean class of 81,67 %, with T count of 12,826. T table value of 1,699, with a degree of freedom of 5 % (0,05), then h0 accepted and ha rejected. Students receive study results mean total of 82,07 %, with T count of 6,488. T table value of 1,699, with a degree of freedom of 5 % (0,05), then h0 accepted and ha rejected. Index Terms - Problem based instruction (PBI), the critical thinking students, planning steel construction
I. INTRODUCTION Learning have a definition of an effort that performed to gain the competencies in the form of knowledge, skill and attitude that is needed in do a job as an effort to increase the effectiveness of a learning process. Efforts to improve the quality of learning with how to use the approach as a logical process and recurrent that can be used to repair and improve the quality of the program learning (dick & amp; carey, 2005 in benny, 2009: 27). Based on government regulation PP No. 32 2013 article 19, on amendment of PP No. 19 years 2005 on national education standards presented by that the process of learning on a unit of education held in interactive, inspiring, fun, challenging, motivate students to actively participate, and provide adequate space for the initiative, creativity, and self-reliance in accordance with talent, interest and the development of physical and psycho.
41
Characteristic S1 engineering student education building (PTB) 2013 A heterogeneous are students in relation to the learning and ability skills live associated with human relationships which includes communication skill, conflict management, human relationships, presentation, conferring, build a team, the effectiveness of personal, creative problem solving, strategic thinking, influence others. This is shown by the task critical thinking students shown in time for the learning implemented. Based on the description of the background of problems can be formulated how learning model based on issue (PBI) to increase student thinking critical in planning steel construction includes: a. How validity device problem based instruction (PBI) in planning steel learning construction? b. How feasibility learning construction planning steel oriented problem based instruction (PBI)? c. How complete study results students after implementation learning construction planning steel oriented device problem based instruction (PBI)? d. How think critically (power analytic) students shown at feasibility learning construction planning steel oriented in problem based instruction (PBI)? Based on formulation problems, so can be concluded that the purpose of research problem based instruction (PBI) to increase reflect critical students in planning construction of steel was: a. Described the validity of device problem based instruction (PBI) to improve think critically students in planning steel construction. b. Described feasibility learning construction planning steel oriented in problem based instruction (PBI) to improve think critically students. c. Described study results students after implementation learning construction planning steel oriented in problem based instruction (PBI) to improve think critically students. Described think critically (power analytic) students shown at feasibility learning construction planning steel oriented in problem based instruction (PBI) to improve think critically students.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 II. A LITERATURE STUDY
affective assessed by validator to meet the criteria of parameter eligibility subuah device learning. Feasibility learning defined as a skill lecturer in managing the learning process consisting of the introduction, the core and cover and ability to the classroom of exposure presentation management (explanation) matter, the management of students, and management measured time with an instrument feasibility device SAP. Learning outcomes according to grun, tritscherarchan, weib (in 2013 eka yudianto: 74), defined as the percentage of student learning complete against indicators which have been determined. On this research base chosen competence planned beams, balok-kolom column and on the steel structure based on SNI 03-1729-2002. Material beams, column and beams-column the steel structure that will be studied by students, covering students ability to plan, calculating and designing size of the results of the planning and calculation of steel.
Problem based instruction (PBI) is a learning model based on many problems that requires autentik investigation, the investigation need to come from the problems real (trianto, 2007: 67). According to arends (in trianto, 2007: 68) that teaching problem is based on an approach learning where students do autentik problems with a view to draw up their own knowledge, develop inkuiri (develop the ability students in investigating the problem systematically, so they can develop their finding themselves), skill think high level, and develop independence and confident. PBI consisting of activities presents to the students situation problems that autentik and meaningful that can be providing facilities to them to investigate and inkuiri. Learning environment PBI is centered on students and encourage inkuiri open and think free. The whole process teaching and learning oriented PBI is to help students to be independent. Students mandiri (autonomous the students who believe in intellectual skills and their own abilities, involves active and environment oriented to inkuiri he, 2005: 4-5). The purpose of learning according to Ibraham 2005: 14 is as follows: a. Level reflect critical made in this PBI prod a student to bring up a wide variety of skills inkuiri. So as time passes expected the ability students in order to solve problems would be growing. b. Modeling the role of adults. Students can practice various roles adults in the community in a forum simulation. c. Learned autonomous and independent. Students can gradually trained to be a student independent after implementation PBI. Based on the above analysis that the purpose of PBI is to develop skill students in work on those problems that autentik and in the form of reasoning, made students active in implementing learning. Think critically is thought well , and think about thought process is part of think well (johnson, 2006: 187). Skill think critically has objective to reach a deep understanding for someone. Understanding that makes understand behind the idea who directs in life situations every day. Understanding expressing meaning behind an event (johnson, 2006: 185). Lecture construction is planning steel lecture obliged to education students technique (PTB) building. Lecture is a lecture requiring students understand the meaning of any the analysis, especially understanding the concept of characteristic of steel, stems pull and stems press, koppel, connection bolt and rivets, and connection torque and flexible by means of elastic using asd based on SNI 03-1729-2002. The device learning can be said worth when consists of syllabus, outline lecture plan (GBRP), SAP, handouts, mfi and key mfi, sheets appraisement (LP) and the key LP, and sheets of observation
III. RESEARCH METHODS The research is the kind of research quantitative descriptive where researchers will described feasibility learning about device, the learning, the critical thinking, and learning outcomes students who were treatment of learning based on the application of problems (PBI). Subject in research this is a student the course of study (prodi) S1 education technique a building (PTB) the 2013 state university surabaya who program eyes planning construction steel the first half the even 2014/2015. The number of a subject in this research is 40 students pilot field. Study was conducted in classrooms A4 house floor 1 of civil engineering unesa for ± 3 weeks effective with consideration the need for additional innovation learning meaningful found on lecture construction planning steel prodi PTB to improve think critically (power analytic) students. The design of this research use descriptive research. A groove in this research is described on flowchart following this:
42
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Table 1. The criteria the weighting for validation Assessment
Presentase
Very reasonable
81% - 100%
reasonable
61% - 80%
Quite feasible
41% - 60%
unreasonably
21% - 40%
Was very improper
0% - 20%
The analysis instrument that second is the implementation of learning. The implementation of learning data analyzed by the compute the average of every aspect of the meeting from the number that have been undertaken. Then the value is in accordance with the interpretation of the score criteria in table 2 to known qualitative assessments of the implementation of learning. Table 2. Criteria interpretation a score according to the scale likert
Persentase Score (%) 0 – 20 21 - 40 41 - 60 61 - 80 81 – 100
This research using four variables, the appropriateness device learning, the learning, the level of think critically and study results. The appropriateness device learning obtained from validation done validator. After done and expressed valid/worth it can be used to reference teaching and learning activities. Engineering data collection is systematic procedure to collect data needed in the research phase. This research using several the methodology. But the methodology it will use: observation, tests, and the survey. Techniques used to analyze data the research is the method of analysis statistics. Of an instrument sheets validation device learning done by specialists lecturer civil engineering obtained yields scores ratings every next item is calculated value mean the ratings with the formula (arikunto as follows, 2003): ∑ ( ̅)
annotate : NP = Value percent sought R = Value student who in accordance with the observer NS = Total assessment criteria critical thinking
Annotate : x = Means = The number of result rating
N
= Many items
not good Less good good enough either very good
Analysis an instrument the third is the extent of reflect critical students. The data collected to research this is the ability reflect critical students in a group which includes some aspects in their assessment. Aspects assessment reflect critical measured starting from activities practice to presentation products or work produced during practice. The assessment of the level reflect critical students indicated by the value 1 to 4 of every aspect of that is (as in the form of percent and inferred by reference in table scale the national reflect critical. Or may be formulated as following (purwanto in arini, 3013):
Figure 1. Flowchart a groove research
∑
Category
The results of that has been made used to determine the student ability to think critically activities in problem based instruction (PBI) from the table scale of the national critical thinking.
43
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Table 3. Scale of the national critical thinking The ability to No. category think critically 1. 86 % - 100 % Sangat Baik 2. 76 % - 85 % Baik 3. 60 % - 75 % Cukup 4. 55 % - 59 % Kurang 5. ≤ 54 % Kurang Sekali
The assessment results of the feasibility kind of classroom device based on a problem (PBI) covers the syllabus, SAP, about evaluation/post test, the assessment of the implementation of an instrument of learning, an instrument the assessment of the domain of affective, an instrument judgment critical thinking, an instrument the domain of psychomotor assessment, and the instrument of assessment practices of each each validator are presented in diagram following this:
Analysis an instrument fourth is study results. Study results covering 3 domain namely cognitive, affective, psychomotor and results of the practice. Data domain cognitive obtained from about post test tested in the end of learning. The results of domain learn cognitive can be calculated in formula (Depdiknas in fauzi , 2008,) ∑
Annotate: ∑ B = The right answer N = Many about The data affective and psychomotor acquired while learning held. To study results this domain, the score obtained next calculated by the formula as follows (riduwan in widoretno, 2014) :
Figure 2. The percentage the results of validation device learning
∑
Based on the analysis of the results of a device learning validation that has been shown above, hence the total score earned by % is 82,54 and is at 81 intervals % to 100 percent. Research based on the criteria, then the results of validation device learning included in a category very reasonable, so as to be used as an instrument. Assessment observation presentation weighting in get from observing teaching and learning activities use the problem based instruction (PBI). The following table the result of the observation presentation weighting.
∑
The data the practice conducted at learning held, then observers assess the practice of students in doing job sheet instructions sheets judgment available, analysis final score student study results are learning the value of students from the cognitive, affective, and the practice psychomotor. But the formula the study results are following (arikunto, 2007): ( ̅)
∑
annotate: ( ̅ ) = Average value ∑
= The sum of the values raw owned
N
= Many the raw
Table 4. The results of observations implementation of learning
Next score obtained from the value of learning outcomes cognitive domain, affective, psychomotor, and practice calculated the average value of his class and adjusted with table 2 criteria interprestasi a score based on likert scale. The data collected, analyzed by descriptive and statistics inferential. Descriptive statistics serves to categorize data, working the, described as well as presenting processed. Descriptive statistics used in this research namely the mean average ( ̅ ), and standard deviations. Inferential while statistics used to test hypotheses through test-t left parties. In this research there are two test test hypotheses namely hypothesis the level of critical thinking students and test hypotheses student learning outcomes.
From the table above, it is known that observation the learning made over 3 meeting which includes 4 aspects inception work, core activities, the cover and processing time during learning process. Meeting i mean observation the basis of 76,25 %. Meeting ii mean observation the basis of 82 %. And while the meeting III the mean of 83,75 %. So mean total the learning receive is 80,67 % and included in good category. This shows that the teaching and learning process with problem based instruction (PBI) effective. The critical thinking in the process of problem based instruction (PBI) observed based on an
44
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 instrument for a critical thinking students.The following is a picture charts level analysis critical thinking.
%. The assessment validation instruments the practice obtains mean ratings of 86 %. The result of the observation the implementation of the problem based instruction (PBI) should be conducted in every stage learning have an average of 80,67 % and in the category of good. Phases early or prelude done very well. It was proven by get the result of 85 % rating. At this stage, conducted for the purpose of creating a early learning conducive, that allows students can follow the process learning well. In addition motivation a start given to students will affect interest students to learning by means of inform learning being taken by students in resolving project. On core activities, the learning of meetings 1 and the meeting 2 outcomes of 70 rating % and 80, 56 % including uncategorized good. While at a meeting 3 outcomes of 81,25 rating % including category very good. Feasibility learning said effective when the capability of teachers in implementing learning is sesua with a device that referred to and has achieved good category or excellent. Thus, overall learning process with problem based instruction (PBI) the students class S1 PTB 2013 A lasting effectively, since the score of mean total of all aspects feasibility learning on class is in good category. Based on the research done on the level of reflect critical students, this research results from namely the average score class level reflect critical student during teaching and learning activities use the problem based instruction (PBI) as much as 81,67 %.While from the test-t one hand left obtained value T count of 12,826 and from T table of 1,699.Thus T count & gt; T table.So that hypothesis h0 received and ha rejected. So obtained conclusion that the reflect critical students class an undergraduate degree PTB 2013 A after implementation problem based instruction (PBI) is greater than or equal to enough 75 % with the economic situation of significant 0.05 or the economic situation of trust 95 %. Researchers can conclude that a problem based instruction (PBI) can improve thinking critical student in solving problems or complete a project. More students motivated in contributing to her group to finish projects corresponding that has been scheduled, so that learning activities being comfortable and conducive. Where each student can involve his ability as maximum as possible to her group formed again to knowledge and skills that would lead to the increase in learning outcomes. According to west (1998) research prove that in many areas activity and human effort, think critically the lead to efficiency and effectiveness better. Thus, problem based instruction (PBI) can improve think critically students and made the activity of students more effective and efficient. According to the research on the final result learn students by applying problem based instruction (PBI) obtained mean grade grades study results college students will receive of 82,07 %. Student study results obtained from the cognitive mean value,
Figure 2. Level analysis critical thinking Of the meetings value mean student classes S1 PTB 2013 A Unesa of 81,67 %, included in the category of matches interval 76-85 % on a scale the national critical thinking. So the level of the ability to think critically students in resolving valued both project. Of teaching and learning activities use the problem based instruction (PBI) study results obtained assessment. Study results assessed covering domain kognitf namely $ 80,67 %, domain affective of 83,27 %, domain psychomotor 82,81 % and value practice of 81,53 %. Based on the data these calculations, it has been calculated manual obtained final score the average student classes an undergraduate degree PTB 2013 A Unesa is of 82,07 % and including 23.501 very good in accordance with the intervals (81-100 %). Based on the calculation on think critically students and analysis test-t the left the obtained T count = 12,826 while T table = 1,699.So in the test t value T count the larger than T table (T count & T table ). So let h0 accepted and ha rejected. It means that the critical thinking students class S1 PTB 2013 A Unesa after implementation problem based instruction (PBI) is greater or the same quite (75 %) accepted. Based on the calculation of student learning outcomes and analysis test-t left parties obtained T count = 6,488 while T table = 1,699 .Then in the test t value T count the larger than T table (T count & T table). Thus then h0 accepted and ha rejected.That means that learning outcomes student classes S1 PTB A Unesa 2013 after learning the implementation of model based on issue (PBI) is greater or equal to KKNI (75) accepted. Based on chart is presented in figure 2, the results have validation syllabus mean ratings of 85 %. The validation SAP obtain mean ratings of 77,33 %, and categorized worth. Validation about the evaluation mean ratings have as much as 80 %. The validation instrument for the implementation of learning mean ratings have as much as 80 %. The instruments domain validation appraisement affective mean ratings have as much as 80 %. The assessment validation instruments think critically obtain mean ratings of 84 %. The assessment validation instrument for the psychomotor mean ratings of 88
45
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
d. Study results students use the problem based
the affective, the psychomotor and the pactice and sought mean. Based on the class mean study results obtained T count students value of 6,488 while the price of 1,699 T table. This means that the price of T count & T table so h0 accepted and ha rejected. This statement in accordance with the test the left, if the price T count & T table so h0 accepted and ha rejected. If T count & T table h0 turned down and ha accepted. Acceptance h0 can be seen from the test one study results the left students. So in conclusion that hypothesis that reads the study results class students S1 PTB 2013 A after implementation problem based instruction (PBI) is greater than or equal to KKNI (75) acceptable. There are 26 student who meet KKNI (75), and there are 4 student who does not meet KKNI. It is based on interviews with subject teachers implementation planning kostruksi steel that 4 students scoring under KKNI is a student who is also scoring under KKNI. Four students this scoring under KKNI caused by in doing the evaluation they did not say anything about correctly. Attitude done and ability when the learning process or practice also less. Besides one of 4 students were has the ability to reflect (IQ) under mean. It is one of the factors that can affects the bottom line learn obtained. Based on research, it can be said this research is successful, because is hypothesized that is hypothesized tested. So hypothesis that reads the study results class students S1 PTB 2013 after implementation problem based instruction (PBI) is greater than or equal to KKNI (75) accepted. Based on the above that student study results use the problem based instruction (PBI) having category very good. This proves of research before that study results students increased good judgment affective, psychomotor, and kognitifnya after using problem based instruction (PBI).
instruction (PBI) on the cognitive obtain mean of 80,67 % included in good category, on the affective obtain mean of 83,27 % category in a very good, on the psychomotor obtain mean of 82,81 % category in a very good, while in value of the practice obtains mean 81,53 % category in a very good. Out of four this assessment obtained value of students have learned mean class of 82,07 %. This value category in a very good, because it is in the interval 81-100 %. Suggestion Based on the research done above, it can be suggested the following: a. Expected for the candidates professional teachers should give the learning methods he continued in accordance with their condition that students students more creative and active in again so can increase knowledge and learning outcomes students. b. From the level of critical thinking, can be advisable to use the problem based instruction (PBI) when learning activities using group, because this kind of classroom can improve think critically students. c. When the group should use the random sampling order to reduce the were. d. Management need a great time that the learning process is on track to learning. There needs to be further investigation in order to know the critical thinking students influences student study results using problem based instruction (PBI). REFERENCES [1] [2]
V. CONCLUDING
[3] [4]
Based on the research done that has been done a conclusion can be drawn as follows: a. Learning the worthiness of the device use the problem based instruction (PBI) on the subjects of the implementation planning steel construction declared fit for use. b. The implementation of the problem based instruction (PBI) on the subjects of the implementation planning steel construction they received a score the average total of 80,67 %, and in the category of good, because in line with intervals 61-80 %. c. Value the average level of reflect critical students in the learning process use the problem based instruction (PBI) receive an average of value 81,67 %. This value included in a category very good, as it lies in the interval 81-100 %.
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[13] [14]
46
Ahmadi,K & Amri,S. 2011. A learning process innovative and creative in class. Jakarta: Prestasi Pustakarya Arikunto, S.2009. The rudiments of evaluation of education. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara Asri, B.2012. Learning and instruction. Jakarta:Rineka Cipta Benny, Pribadi. 2009. Model design learning system. Jakarta: Penerbit Dian Rakyat Department of national education. 2010. Standard guide the process of learning and active in college. Jakarta: Depdiknas, Depag, KPN KTI, DBE, USAID Ibrahim, R & Nana, S. 2003. Planning teaching. Jakarta: PT Rineka Cipta Ibrahim, M. 2005. Sustainable assessment. Surabaya: Unesa Iniversity Press PU. 2002. SNI 03-1729-2002 Procedures for planning steel structure to the building. Jakarta: public works department Sudjana, Nana. 2011. The assessment learning process. Bandung: PT Remaja Rosdakarya Sugiyono.2010. Statistika for research. Bandung: CV Alfabeta Sukmadinata, Nana. The methodology education. Bandung: PT. Remaja Rosdakarya Surapranata, Sumarna. 2004. Analysis, validity, reliability, and interpretation test results. Bandung: PT. Remaja Rosdakarya. Wina, S. 2008. Planning and design a system of learning. Jakarta: Kencana Prenada Media Group Wina, S. 2009. The act of class research. Jakarta: Kencana Prenada Media Group
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Implementation of Curriculum 2013 in The Process of Learning SMK Engineering Building at Surabaya HENDY ARDIANTO Program Studi S2 Pendidikan Teknologi dan Kejuruan Program Pascasarjana Universitas Negeri Surabaya
[email protected] teachers have a greater opportunity to manage learning in the classroom and provide maximum learning outcomes for learners. On Curriculum 2013 the Government has set up several devices, namely: core competencies, basic competencies, Syllabus and Handbook for teachers, students and a series of books Permendikbud associated with the implementation of Curriculum 2013. Such devices greatly assist teachers in performing its main task as a teacher. The main task of the teacher is teaching Planning, implementing learning and doing Evaluation of Learning. To acquire the 2013 curriculum teachers can acquire through training activities curriculum in 2013, through the vice principal in the school curriculum or download directly from various sites on the Internet about the curriculum in 2013. Based on some of these devices, the teacher lived arrange learning implementation plan (RPP) and then carry out learning in the classroom and Implement Evaluation of learning. Teacher load is reduced compared to the curriculum KTSP 2006. In 2006 KTSP teachers only given Competence Standard and Basic Competence, teachers are still burdened with finding appropriate teaching materials with SK and KD, create a syllabus, locate and determine the appropriate books with SK and KD. In line with the implementation of the curriculum in 2013, it turns out not all teachers in the school curriculum implemented in 2013 have the same opportunity to receive Devices curriculum in 2013, namely high school (SMA) and Vocational High School (SMK). One thing is certain for senior high school and vocational training of teachers and the new curriculum in three subjects, so that some call the "Curriculum 3 Subjects". Moreover, especially for teachers in vocational subjects are propping membership packages have not felt the touch of the curriculum in 2013, when some schools implement the curriculum targets already set in 2013. Hence the need for an assessment of the implementation of the curriculum in 2013 in the learning process in Vocational Engineering Building School in Surabaya.
Abstract-Curriculum 2013 aimed at preparing to Indonesia having the ability of human life as personal faith and citizens, productive, creative, innovative, and affective and capable of contributing to the social life, national, state, and civilization the world.This research using methods poll. The population of this research is Vocational School Building Techniques in Surabaya which totaled 7 SMK, sample vocational school used (SMKN 2 Surabaya, SMKN 3 Surabaya, SMKN 5 Surabaya, SMKN 7 Surabaya, SMKN 11 Surabaya, SMK PGRI 4 Surabaya, SMK 45 Surabaya) the number of teachers who were given the poll 3 teachers totaled each school. The sample collection using random sampling. Data analysis techniques conducted using quantitative analysis techniques. The results of research on Vocational School Building Techniques in Surabaya shows that School Techniques Buildings in surabaya who had implemented by 80 percent of the curriculum 2013, only 20 percent of the not ready to implement curriculum 2013. Index Terms - The Implementation of the Curriculum 2013, SMK Building Technique at Surabaya.
I. PRELIMINARY Curriculum 2013 was developed with the goal of achieving national education goals, namely: "developing students' potentials in order to become a man of faith and fear of God Almighty, noble, healthy, knowledgeable, capable, creative, independent, affective and able to contribute to the life of society , nation, state, and world civilization [3]. The development potential of learners should be done gradually in accordance with the development of psychology students so that education at the primary school level should focus on the development of attitudes and behavior. Learners should be guided to recognize its potential early on and are able to develop that potential with the help of teachers so that they can be the generation that is able to contribute significantly to the advancement of the nation. Curriculum 2013, which imposed a gradual start of the school year 2013/2014 brought new hopes for teachers at all level ranging from elementary, junior high, high school and vocational school. New hope that brings
47
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Surabaya, SMK PGRI 4 Surabaya, SMK 45 Surabaya).
II. STUDY THEORY A. Curriculum 2013 In the new academic year 2013/2014 the government set the implementation of a new curriculum that Curriculum 2013 replaces KTSP. Curriculum 2013 is part of the continuing development of the KBK which were initiated in 2004 to include the competence of attitudes, knowledge, and skills in an integrated manner, as mandated by Law 20 of 2003 on National Education System in the explanation of Article 35, where the competence of graduates is the ability qualification graduates includes attitudes, knowledge, and skills in accordance with national standards that have been agreed. Here we can see that the graduates were born of this character-based curriculum implementation can be a great graduates and able to compete internationally if the curriculum is run properly and correctly by all parties concerned. In the history of education in Indonesia, the implementation of the curriculum and the process of change is very rapid. As if, all of them have to follow what is desired authorities. When it is not required then thrown away and replaced with a new one. This of course adds to the complexity of the implementation of education, which eventually became the victims are the people and children who are being educated. Substitution ongoing curriculum, 2004 curriculum called Competency-Based Curriculum (KBK) still whole corn suddenly turned into Curriculum 2006, which referred to the Education Unit Level Curriculum (KTSP). B. Vocational Technical Building in Surabaya Building Engineering skills program is a program of study that prepares students to become professional workforce in the field of vocational training. Students are more geared to plunge into the world of work. Building Engineering Program objectives are generally referring to the contents of the National Education System Law (Law SPN) of Article 3 on the objectives of the National Education and the explanation of Article 15 which states that vocational education is secondary education that prepares students primarily for work in a particular field. In particular purpose Building Engineering Program is to equip students with the skills, knowledge and attitudes to be competent in the discipline of Building Sciences. Vocational High School of Engineering Building in Surabaya totaling 7 SMK, sample school SMK used is (SMKN 2 Surabaya, SMKN 3 Surabaya, SMKN 5 Surabaya, SMKN 7 Surabaya, SMKN 11
III.
ASSESSMENT METHOD
A. Types of Research This type of research used in this study is a kind of ex post facto research using quantitative data approach. Ex post facto research is research that aims to expose the events that are taking place. In the classification of research, this study distinguished by the type of descriptive study, but in application, these two studies have similar resemblance [2] B. Identification of Variables Variables can be defined as an attribute of a person or object that has a variation from one person to another person (Sugiyono, 2005:38). Variables in this study amounted to two, namely the independent variable and the dependent variable: -
Independent variables: curriculum 2013 The dependent variable: SMK Engineering Building in Surabaya C. Paradigm Review
Curriculum 2013 D.
Vocational School Building at Surabaya
Population and Sampling Techniques 1. Population Population is the whole subject of research [1]. Population is a generalization region consisting of objects or subjects that have a certain quantity and characteristics defined by the authors to be studied and then drawn conclusions [4]. The population to be used as an object of research is the whole SMK Engineering Building in Surabaya. 2. Sample The sample is part of the number and characteristics possessed by this population (Sugiyono, 2005:91), while according to Arikunto (1998:117) is partially or a representative sample of the population studied. The sampling technique used in this study is a simple random sampling technique. According Sugiyono (2005:93) is said to be simple (simple) for taking a sample of the members of the population was randomly without regard to strata that exist in the population. Samples of this study is (SMKN 2 Surabaya, Surabaya SMKN 3, SMKN 5 Surabaya, SMKN 7 Surabaya, SMK 11 Surabaya, SMK PGRI 4 Surabaya, SMK 45 Surabaya). E. Place and Time Study This study was conducted in SMK Engineering Building in Surabaya. Time used in 2015 for one week, from 07.00 until 09.00 pm.
48
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 F. Data Collection Techniques This study uses data collection techniques questionnaire or questionnaire. According Sugiyono (2005:162) the questionnaire is the technique of data collection is done by giving a set of questions or a written statement to the respondent to answer. The questionnaire used in this study to obtain data on the number of buildings that implement curriculum 2013 at SMK. IV.
From some of the things that have been done show that the curriculum in 2013 can also be implemented in the Department of Buildings vocational group of subjects building skills package, albeit with limitations. In accordance with the motto "SMK CAN" Hopefully in the future implementation of Curriculum 2013 Especially For SMK be better again and have prepared all the tools to implement Curriculum 2013.
RESULTS
V. CONCLUSION
Studies have shown that from 7 SMK we give questionnaire 6 SMK Department Building in Surabaya have implemented the curriculum 2013. 100% 80% 60% 40% 20%
0%
Based on data collected from questionnaires it can be concluded as follows: 1. Vocational curriculum implementation in 2013 at the Department of Building in Surabaya has shown good numbers. 2. Percentage of vocational curriculum implementation in 2013 at the Department of Building in Surabaya has reached 80%. 3. Fore expected SMK Department Building in Surabaya can be an example of good implementation of the curriculum in 2013.
SMK has not Implement Curriculum 2013 Implementat ion of Curriculum 2013
REFERENCES [1] [2]
Figure 1: Percentage Implementation of Curriculum 2013 on Vocational Department Building at Surabaya
[3] [4]
49
Arikunto, Suharsimi. 1998. Prosedur Penelitian. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta. Bungin, Burhan. 2011. Metodologi Penelitian Kuantitatif. Jakarta: Kencana. Ridwan, 2014. Pembelajaran Saintifik Untuk Implementasi Kurikulum 2013. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara. Sugiyono. 2005. Metode Penelitian Administrasi. Bandung: Alfabeta.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
50
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Performance Comparison Between The Graduates Senior High School and Vocational High School Charis Fathul Hadi, S.Pd Mahasiswa S2 Pendidikan Teknologi Dan Kejuruan Progam Pascasarjana Universitas Negeri Surabaya
[email protected]
Abstract - The new governance structure including the Indonesian economic order is changing in the direction of free trade in this era era marked by the opening of opportunities for cooperation between countries, namely the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC). On the other hand these changes pose stiff competition, to take part in the necessary human resources (SDM) who has openly competitiveness with other countries. Research focuses on a high school Research graduate SMK Muhammadiyah 2 and SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya who works in the scope of the industry. Research Questions Problem (1)What is the profile of workers in the industry? (2) How do labor competency required? (3) How does the development work ability among high school graduates Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya? (4) How is employee performance evaluation system for graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya?. Research purposes (1) To determine the profile of workers in the industrial field (2) To determine the necessary labor competency (3) To determine the development of employability among graduates SMA Muhammadiyah Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya (4) To determine the employee performance evaluation system for graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya. Index Terms - Comparison , The Graduates Senior High School , Vocational High School
I. INTRODUCTION Your goal is to simulate the usual appearance of papers in ICVEE 2015 conference proceedings. For items not addressed in these instructions, please refer to the last issue of your conference's proceedings for reference or ask your conference Publications Chair for instructions. A. Backgroud Story The new governance structure including the Indonesian economic order is changing in the direction of free trade in this era era marked by the opening of opportunities for cooperation between countries, namely the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC). On the other hand these changes pose stiff competition, to take part in the necessary human resources (SDM) who has openly competitiveness with other countries. Increased capacity and skills to the younger generation prospective labor world is the
responsibility of educators, both formal and nonformal education. Implementation of educators in schools cannot be separated from strategies for educational purposes can be achieved optimally, for the school to apply various models according to the program of study and the characteristics of learners. B. The focus of research focuses on a high school graduate SMK Muhammadiyah 2 and SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya who works in the scope of the industry C. Research Questions Problem 1. What is the profile of workers in the industry? 2. How do labor competency required? 3. How does the development work ability among high school graduates Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya? 4. How is employee performance evaluation system for graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya? D. Research purposes 1. To determine the profile of workers in the industrial field 2. To determine the necessary labor competency 3. To determine the development of employability among graduates SMA Muhammadiyah Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya 4. To determine the employee performance evaluation system for graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya E. 1. 2. 3.
4.
51
Usability Research to measure the profile of workers in the industrial field to measure labor competence required The ability to measure the progress of work between high school graduates and SMK Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya to measure employee performance evaluation system for graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Multicultural / Multilingual Solving, Technological Skills.
II. LITERATURE REVIEW
Literacy,
Problem
III. RESEARCH METHODS
A. Data Most profile industry workers educated SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya section of the administration and technicians and there are some educated junior high and elementary school for part of the courier, kepetensi glittering world of work of high school graduates and vocational school that high school graduates are more likely to discipline compared with vocational school graduates but the ability early practice is dominated by graduates of SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya, while developments kemapuan work graduate high school and vocational faster bekembang workers high school graduates in the fields of theory and practice of some of these companies or industries evaluate workforce both high school graduates mapun vocational graduates in bindang certain both theory and practice of evaluation results largely dominated by a high school graduate workers Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya. B. Theory From this background can be identified that the level of human resources (SDM) will affect the level Profisional berkualiatas prospective workers in the field of employment and are able to compete in this era. 1. Education goals of SMA and SMK Path of education in Indonesia consists of formal and informal education that can complement and take into wealthy. Formal education is the educational curriculum and assessment regulated by the government, which consists of basic education, secondary education and higher education. While informal education that is where courses, tutoring, galleries - galleries curriculum dibut and evaluated by the manager . 2. Labor force Thus the quality of human resources is one of the most important factors in achieving the success of the development program.Qualified human resources to be able to manage natural resources properly and efficiently. SDM issues cannot be separated from the problem of labor. The quality of labor is highly dependent on the quality of human resources. Therefore, the quality of human resources should be given priority to be upgraded and expanded in order to get a quality workforce baik.Tenaga quality work and have a high work ethic will strengthen the position of the industry that will ultimately mempekuat the country's economy. Tony Wagner with the opinion above, from the literature mentions that in the 21st century, students as educational products are required to have competence: Communication Skills, Critical and Creative Thinking, Information / Digital Literacy, Inquiry / Reasoning Skills, Interpersonal Skills,
A. Background descriptions, entry, and Presence Research Description background of this research is trying to explain or describe clearly and in detail about the place or location of the employment of high school graduates Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya in the industrialized world. This is done to provide clarity in full and thorough about the process of working ability of high school graduates Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and Surabaya SMK Mahammadiyah 2. Entry, researchers malakukan contact between the school and the data graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya, the data graduate SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya who was working in the industrial world, the first step the researchers met with the principal SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya to meinta the data of graduates who work, kediua way to meet the leadership of the company work force of SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya. The presence of researchers, is weeks to obtain the necessary data in a research institute, the researchers present the company - the company that its workforce graduated from high school and SMK Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya. B. Description Researchers As Data Collrction Tools And Methods Data collection close relation in a study. The data obtained will be analyzed and the conclusion of an interview from the company's existing workforce who graduated from high school and SMK Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya. C. Stage Research And Siting Phase of this research through interviews, locations studied in graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya who work in the industry, the first stage of requesting data from each school and observation to industrial employment of high school graduates
52
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya.
and
SMK
By Eisner (1975, Lincoln and Guba, 1981: 313) as a tool to accommodate and adjust with the criticism written for the purpose of evaluation .
D. The process of recording and Data Analysis The process of recording of interviews of company employees graduated from high school and SMK Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya, so it can be analyzed outcome data from the source - the source-related.
E. Triangulation, Interviews, Notes, Documentation Techniques for comparing data from interviews, records and supporting documentation that is to mengetai prifil workers in the field of industry, competence of labor required, the development of employability among graduates SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya, the system of evaluation of employee performance graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya. F. Auditing This technique check the validity and researchers, this study is a qualitative study using research background in the field is to take the data to know the working ability of high school graduates and graduates Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya And SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya.
IV. TECHINCAL DATA EXAMINATION VALIDITY A.
Extension presence of Observers This technique in order to check the validity of the data that is one way that fits in the research is to utilize something else to check and compare the data obtained is data graduate SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya and SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya who work in the industry in order to compare developments ability to work.
B.
Discussion Fellow Associate This technique is used so that researchers can maintain an attitude of openness and honesty as well as provide the opportunity a good start by discussing the research with colleagues criticism and constructive suggestions that the results wawan way can be interpreted that the employability of graduates SMA Muhammadiyah 4 Surabaya is superior compared to graduates SMK Muhammadiyah 2 Surabaya. C. Negative Case Analysis Done by gathering examples and cases that do not fit the patterns and trends information that has been collected and used as a comparison.Adequacy of Reference; by Einser (1975, Lincolndan Guba, 1981: 313) as a tool to accommodate and adjust with the criticism written for the purpose of evaluation. D. Reference
REFERENCES [1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]
[7]
53
Adi, W. 2005. Penerapan Model Pendidikan Sistem Ganda Sebagai Upaya Peningkatan Mutu Keterampilan Lulusan Pada SMK Negeri 2 Surakarta. Majalah Ilmiah Ilmu Pengetahuan Sosial, 4 (2), 201-222 Alipuor, M. 2009. A Study of On the Job Training Effectiveness: Empirical Evidence of Iran. International Journal of Bussines Management, (4) 2. Diperoleh 12 Agustus 2012,dari http://ccsenet.org.journal.html/ [3] Anwar. 2002. Pelaksanaan Program Pendidikan Sistem Ganda pada SMK di Kota Kendari. Jurnal Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan. 8 (36), 418-435 [4] Hasibuan, M.S.P. 2011. Manajemen Sumber Daya Manusia Edisi Revisi. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara [5] Jelita, S. 2008. Analisis Pembelajaran Prakerin Siswa di SMK Negeri Pangkalan Kerinci. Jurnal Pakar Pendidikan, 6 (1), 77-89, Diperoleh 1 Februari 2012, darihttp://isjd.pdii.lipi.go.id/admin/jurnal/6108778 9.pdf Ninghardjanti, P. 2003. Studi Penelusuran TamatanSMK Kelompok Bisnis dan Manajemen Rumpun Administrasi Perkantoran di Kotamadia Surakarta. Majalah Ilmiah Ilmu Pengetahuan Sosial, 2 (2), 167-183 Sedarmayanti. 2010. Manajemen Sumber Daya Manusia, Reformasi Birokrasi dan Manajemen Pegawai Negeri Sipil. Bandung: PT. Refika Aditama
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
54
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Indonesian Vocational Education and Technology- Ready for Asean Economic Community 2015? Dimyati Researcher, University of public universities graduate Surabaya Email:
[email protected]
Abstract – The competition has been beaten . Indonesia will soon enter the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC) . There are various agreements that have been agreed , covering trade in goods and services and investment. The problem , NOT ALL Ready Challenges faced by Indonesia . If not immediately overcome underdevelopment , Indonesia will only be a foreign audience that debuted in Indonesia. " More than 70 % of our people are still on the stage of advanced yet, the current level of education in Indonesia is still low. The majority of the population down to the high school educated . Citing data from the Central Bureau of Statistics , per February 2015 workforce education levels Indonesia is still dominated by lower elementary school education , which amounted to 54.61 million or 45.19 % . The first intermediate level 21.47 million or by 17.77%, High 19.81 million , 11.80 million vocational. The educated and university diploma respectively 3.14 million and 10.02 million people. For information, capabilities of low population reflected in the level of education of the population. Report of the United Nations Development Programme ( UNDP ) in 2014 mentions , the average length of school population of Indonesia is only 7.5 years, This achievement is far below the number of ASEAN countries. The average length of 10.2 years of school in Singapore , Malaysia 9.5 years , 8.9 years the Philippines , and Brunei Darussalam 8.7 years. The entry of the ASEAN free market era will bring consequences , namely Indonesia becomes open markets for Southeast Asia. Potential economic activity in these free trade would be more in Indonesia.
TVE expansion a priority. The Ministry has also set a goal to shift the ratio of students enrolled in general senior secondary education to those in vocational senior education school to 40:60 by 2015. TVE LEGISLATION
The overall structure of the Indonesian education system including TVE is stated out in the National Education System Law, enacted in 2003. It describes all levels of education and the structure attached to each of them. Manpower Act n. 13 of 2003 regulates the national training system (preparation for work). The Teacher Law of 2005 and its respective regulations provide for the organisation of teacher profession and its quality.
TVE FORMAL, NON-FORMAL AND INFORMAL SYSTEMS
Index Terms – Indonesia vocational education and technology, ASEAN, ASEAN Economic Community.
I. INTRODUCTION Indonesia is currently undergoing a transition period towards a knowledge economy and increased competitiveness, growth and employment performance.Skills gaps are seen as significant obstacles in this respect, and the country‘s government is investing more in the development of the nation‘s education system in order to close these gaps and to transform the Indonesian TVE system into one that provides demand-driven and practiceoriented programmes, aimed at improving employability and participation in lifelong learning.
Fig. 1 Scheme extracted from UNESCO-IBE (2011). World Data on Education VII ed. Indonesia.
The Ministry of National Education that administers formal TVE has increased its investments and made
55
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Non-formal education includes non-formal primary, junior secondary and senior secondary equivalent programmes, known as Pakets A, B and C. The Pakets are a part of so called equivalency programme that allows those who do not have access to formal education system to achieve formal qualifications. Pakets A and B together form basic education. These programmes are especially targeted for those living in remote areas. In addition to equivalency programmes, both private and public institutions offer short-term nonformal vocational training. This training focuses on preparing workers and trainees to enter the job market with specific, upgraded skills. Public non-formal vocational training providers (known as BLKs), that are under the responsibility of district governments, provide programmes for poor individuals who dropped out of primary or secondary school. There are 4 types of training offer by BLK: Institutional training (job training programmes which aim to increase the skills of job seekers); Non-institutional training (training programmes for people in remote areas organised through Mobile Training Units); Apprenticeship programmes; and Demand-based trainings (trainings based on the demand of industries). BLKS are also divided into 3 types: Type A (largest training providers located in urban areas); Type B (training providers located in smaller urban centres); and Type C (the smallest training providers located in rural areas. Larger centres provide industrial and service skills training, while smaller ones offer training in different technologies and skills for self-employment. Informal education is identified as a form of selflearning, provided by family and surroundings. Just as in non-formal education the outcomes of the informal one shall be recognised as those of formal after passing government assessment. Employers give great attention to the development of the skills of their employees; therefore in-service employee training is very important in Indonesia.
FORMAL TVE SYSTEM Upon successful completion of lower secondary school pupils may proceed to senior general secondary schools (SMA ) or senior technical and vocational secondary schools (SMK), both offering 3-year programmes. Access to senior secondary education also depends on the results of an academic and psychological test. Technical and vocational education consists of 47 programmes in the following fields: technology and engineering; health; arts; craft and tourism; information and communication technologies; agrobusiness and agro-technology; and business management. A certificate is awarded upon completion of senior secondary school. Students also sit a national examination, and, if successful, they are awarded a national certificate which grants access to higher education. Higher education in Indonesia is provided by institutions falling under one of the following 5 types: Single-faculty academies, that provide instruction in only one field and mostly offer either applied science, engineering, or art studies and grant Diplomas and Certificates for technical-level courses at both public and private levels; Advanced schools, that offer academic and professional university-level education in one particular discipline; Polytechnics, that are attached to Universities and provide sub-degree junior technician training; Institutes, that provide education programmes in several fields of study by qualified faculty and are ranked at the same level as universities with the right to grant a degree; and Universities that offer training and higher education in different disciplines. According to the Law on National Education System of 2003 ―non-formal education is provided for community members who need education services which functions as a replacement, complement, and/or supplement to formal education in the frame of supporting life-long education‖ (Law on National Education System, 2003)[1].
GOVERNANCE
NON-FORMAL AND INFORMAL TVE SYSTEMS
Planning and implementation of educational services is conducted by the Ministry of Education and Culture (MOEC). The following units make up the structure of MOEC at the central level: the General Secretariat; the National Institute for Educational Research and Development; the General Expectorate; the General Directorate of Basic and Secondary Education; the General Directorate of Higher Education; the General Directorate of Nonformal and Informal Education; and the General
The aim of non-formal education is to develop the potential of learners with the emphasis on the acquisition of knowledge and functional skills. ‗Non-formal education comprises life-skills education, early childhood education, youth education, women empowerment education, literacy education, vocational training and internship, equivalency program, and other kinds of education aimed at developing learners‘ ability‘ (Law on National Education System, 2003).
56
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Directorate for Quality Improvement of Teachers and Education Personnel.
period of further studies that has the duration of 2 years. Students attending public non-formal vocational training institutions (BLKs) receive certificates upon completion. They may also take a company trainee exam and/or a professional association exam to receive a certificate from the company or association in question
Provincial offices of education established in each of the 34 provinces (as of June 2009) and district offices in 497 districts and municipalities represent MOEC at lower level. These offices manage, adapt and implement ministerial policies at the local level. The Ministry of Manpower and Transmigration is responsible for the national training system that prepares citizens for the world of work. The National Agency for Professional Certification is in charge of issuing competence certificates.
NATIONAL QUALIFICATIONS FRAMEWORK (NQF) Indonesia‘s TVET National Qualifications Framework is known as Kerangka Kualifikasi Nasional Indonesia, or KKNI.
FINANCING
QUALITY ASSURANCE
In accordance with the Law on National Education of 2003 the financing of education is the shared responsibility of the government, local government and community. Education expenditure excluding the salary of teachers is allocated at a minimum of 20% of the National Budget and a minimum of 20% of the Regional Budget. Salaries of teachers appointed by government are funded from the National Budget. Allocation of funds to educational institutions takes the form of a grant. The same form is applied when funds are allocated from National Government to local ones.
According to the Law on the System of Education of 2003 evaluation of educational institutions is undertaken in order to monitor and control the quality of education. Evaluation of learners‘ achievement, of institutions and of educational programmes is conducted regularly by independent bodies. Accreditation of educational programmes and education institutions for formal and non-formal education is also an important part of quality assurance. The National Board of School Accreditation (BAN) and the National Accreditation Board for Higher Education are agencies responsible for conducting accreditation.
TVE TEACHERS AND TRAINERS
CHALLENGES
According to the Teacher Law of 2005, all teachers must complete certification process that requires them to have a four-year higher education degree by 2015. The teachers are certified in line with the standards developed by the National Standards Board (BSNP). The main teacher training institutions in Indonesia are teacher training institutes within universities. The Teacher Law of 2005 obliged these institutions to introduce a 4-year course leading to a degree.
The main challenges currently facing TVE in Indonesia can be summarised as follows: Lack of sufficient correspondence between the practical training and skills taught in TVE institutions and the demands of the labour market; and Uneven balance between teachers with academic and practitioner background in TVE institutions, where the latter are underrepresented. POPULATION (MILLION)
QUALIFICATIONS AND QUALIFICATIONS FRAMEWORKS
Table 1 population average yearly population growth rate 2005 – 2010
A graduation certificate is awarded upon completion of senior secondary school. If a student proceeds to tertiary education, upon successful completion of a chosen higher education institution he/she is awarded: A Diploma level qualification when graduating from an Academy or Polytechnic; and At University level, the first stage of studies is classified as Sarajana (level S1). S1 qualification is awarded after 4-years of full-time studies at a recognised university, institute or advanced school. The Magister (S2) is awarded after a
57
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Data table above shows that population average yearly population growth rate 2005 – 2010
UNEVOC CENTRES
+1.44 % For comparison: Global average yearly population growth rate 2005-2010: 1.17% Source of : UNESCO-UNEVOC based on UN ESA: World Population Prospects/ the 2010 revision
GDP PER CAPITA (CURRENCY: US$)
The Centre for the Development and Empowerment of Educators and Educational Personnel Indonesia University of Education TVE INSTITUTIONS Ministry of Education and Culture Ministry of Manpower and Transmigration
Table 2 compiled by UNESCO-UNEVOC based on World Bank database
CHALLENGES OF AN OPEN ECONOMY Indonesia, with 250 million people living in it, can't grow on their own. We have to open up the economy. And the young people in Indonesia have the capability to compete with the rest of the world. But as a nation becomes an open economy, challenges rise. Hans-Paul Burkner, chairman of Boston Consulting Group Germany, and co-chair of the forum, said that opening up has a very strong domestic dimension that needs to be addressed.
EMPLOYMENT (MILLION) Table 3 that Labour Force reached 47.3%
INDONESIA HAS TWO HOMEWORKS: DEVELOPING TALENT AND SUPPORTING INFRASTRUCTURE. Mahbubabi also advised Indonesia to continue working on improving the country's competitiveness."There are hundreds of indexes on competitiveness. You should move yourself up on economic competitiveness index," he said. ON THE ASEAN ECONOMIC COMMUNITY From the above data shows that Labour Force reached 47.3% Unemployment 7.9%
As the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC) come into effect by the end of the year, the tide is even higher. The world is watching what ASEAN will do with AEC. In the process, strong trust from the market is very critical. "It's not what the government will say or announce, but what the market believes in," he said "Next two months are critical. Indonesia's role is very fundamental for the success of AEC, as the biggest economy of the region." On the other hand, Indonesia's role is very fundamental for the success of AEC, as the biggest economy in the region. Also a main challenge is the urgency of bringing the discourse on AEC to the grassroot level. AEC has only been a discussion among government officials and the business elite.
YOUTH EMPLOYMENT (MILLION) Table 4 compiled by UNESCO-UNEVOC base on ILO: Key indicators of the labour market
CRUCIAL: EQUITABLE DEVELOPMENT As nations open up their economy and generate a more connected global market than ever before, one big question remains: how to grow without leaving anyone behind?
58
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Data from Thomas Piketty quoted, shows how the gap between the rich and poor is growing larger: From 3 to 1 in 1820 to 80 to 1 in 2014. History also shows this can be reduced by revolution or war – things we need to avoid. As ASEAN moves forward to a more open region economically, countries have to put their focus on equitable economic development.
culture , infrastructure and of course readiness of students and graduates , asset management ,development of academic culture, the quality and quantity of cooperation , and the quality of graduates mainly in the absorption in the world of work. REFERENCES [1]
CONCLUSION [2]
Technological and vocational education in Indonesia would not want to be ready to welcome the free market era ASEAN. All the hard work to equip themselves in order to compete shall be done from nowReadiness of education in the system of learning,
[3]
59
Government of the Republic of Indonesia (2003). Law on National Education System. National Gazette Republic of Indonesia. The World bank (2010). Indonesia Skills Report. Washington: the World Bank. UNESCO-IBE (2011). World Data on Education VII ed. Indonesia. Geneva: UNESCO-IBE.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
60
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Design of Mobile Educational Role-Playing Game For Biology ―Bio Saga‖ Riady Salim1, Robby Kurniawan Budhi2, Indra Budi Trisno3 Widya Kartika University, Surabaya Jl. Sutorejo Prima Utara II/1 Surabaya, Jawa Timur, Indonesia
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected]
subjects more. Furthermore, this instructional media position is also as independent learning resources. Independent learning resources are not only used as learning tools but also can be used by the students with or without teachers in subject concerned. There are a lot of video game genres that are available to play. One of those genres is RolePlaying Game (RPG). Role-Playing Game (RPG) is a game in which players assume the roles of characters in fictional settings[1]. Players take responsibility for acting out these roles within a narrative, either through literal acting or through a process of structured decision-making or character development. Actions taken within games succeed or fail according to a formal of structured decisionmaking or character development[2]. This game genre will be used by the researcher to design educational game for biology subject. The reasons that the researcher use RPG is because the researcher believe that there are elements in Role-Playing Game (RPG) that can make educational game for biology becomes more interesting and can motivate students in learning biology more. Those elements are among others, battle system in which the students must answer biology questions to defeat enemies, and the development of player's character from ordinary human into super hero. Furthermore, based on the survey done by Agate Studio (one of the most productive game studio in Indonesia) in 2012 showed that Role-Playing Game (RPG) genre is the most loved genre by Indonesian gamers[3]. In addition to the distribution of games by genres, there are also distribution of games by platforms. The examples are among others, arcade games, PC (Personal Computer) games, console games, handheld games, and mobile games. Recently mobile games have rapid progress because of the increasing sales of smartphones. Based on the data by www.emarketer.com, it is predicted that the Indonesian smartphone users in 2015 will reach 52,2 million users[4]. Furthermore, based on a website that provides statistics data which is www.gs.statcounter.com, in Indonesian mobile games rank first and then followed by PC (personal computer) games. Based on the statistic results
Abstract - Biology subject is one of the compulsory subject in Indonesia school's curriculum. But, many high school students think that biology subject is difficult. The reason is because there are so many terms related to organisms and nature that need to be memorized by the students. The purpose of this research is to design a learning methodology which is a Mobile Educational Role-Playing Game For Biology to help the students learn biology subject and to increase their interest in biology subject. The methodology which is used by the researcher to design the game is RAD (Rapid Application Development) methodology starts from planning process, design process, and implementation. The researcher will use GDD (Game Design Document) to design the game and Unity to develop the game. The trial results to the high school students and biology teachers show that Bio Saga helps high school students in learning biology subject and increases their interest in biology subject. Furthermore, Bio Saga also helped teachers teach biology subject to high school students. Index Terms - Biology, Role-Playing Game, Rapid Application Development, Game Design Document, Unity.
I. INTRODUCTION Biology subject is one of the compulsory subject in Indonesia school's curriculum. But, many high school students think that biology subject is difficult. The reason is because there are so many terms related to organisms and nature that need to be memorized by the students. Based on the survey done by the researcher against 54 respondent, biology subject ranked second as the most difficult high school subject. Therefore, it is necessary to do some development about instructional media that can help students to learn biology terms and to increase their interest in biology subject. One of those instructional medias is by using game. Recently game has been utilized as one of the instructional media. Game that have educational content is called educational game. The purpose of this educational game is to increase students' motivation in learning against school subjects especially biology subject while playing, so that with happy feeling, students can understand school
61
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 above then the researcher will design educational RPG game for biology using mobile platform so that the game can be accessed by many students in Indonesia. The researcher expect that this mobile educational RPG game for biology can help high school students to learn biology subject and to increase their interest in learning biology subject.
B. Core Gameplay Player enter the main menu scene and then choose one of the two roles provided. Player then choose and enter the stage. Every stage will be guarded by three enemies. To clear the stage, player must defeat all the three enemies by answering biology questions. Player can use items to assist them in answering the questions. Player's goal is clear stage five which is guarded by the final boss named Dr. Mutant. The game will be over if the player die before defeating the third enemy or the player quit the stage. Here are the lists of action that can be done by the players in Bio Saga game : 1) choose the main role, 2) choose the stage that the player wants to play, 3) answer the questions given by the enemies, attack the enemies if the player can answer the question correctly or attacked by the enemies if the player fails to answer the question correctly or the time has run out, 4) use items to assist the player in answering the questions, 5) buys items from the shop, 6) clear the achievements and claim the rewards, 7) earn gold and experience by defeating the enemies, 8) level up the player's role, 9) pause the game, 10) quit stage, 11) quit Bio Saga game.
II. Research Methodology A. Step Study This step study contains every step's explanation used in designing mobile educational role-playing game for biology : 1) Preliminary Survey Observation is done before the real research with purpose to get general overview from research object. 2) Literature Review Review is done in order to get more understanding about the research object theoretically by collecting relevant literatures. 3) Analysis of the Issue Analyzing why high school students have difficulty in learning biology subject. 4) Question Bank Design From the analysis of the issue then the researcher will design question bank to hone the students' skill in learning biology subject. 5) Game Design Designing a game which consists of game concept, story, target audience, target platform, system requirements, feature sets, core gameplay , game mechanics, level design, and assets by using Game Design Document (GDD)[5]. 6) Game Development From the game design process, the researcher will create the mobile educational role-playing game for biology to help students in learning biology subject. 7) Implementation After the game development process is done, implement it by uploading the game to Google Play so that it can be played by the students. 8) Internal Evaluation Evaluating the game by debugging to find the bug in the application. After the bug has been found, fix it by changing the codes which contain the bug. 9) External Evaluation Evaluating the game by using the reviews from the users that have downloaded and played the game throught Google Play wether the game help the students in learning biology subject or not. 10) Report Preparation After evaluating the game, prepare the report accompanied by conclusions and suggestions.
Figure 1 Bio Saga Scene Flow
C. Scene Design
Figure 1 shows Bio Saga scene flow. Player starts from the splash screen in which an UWIKA logo contained and then the player enters the main menu scene. If the player is playing the game for the first time, then the player will enter the story scene. After reading the story, player will then enter the role selection scene where player can
62
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 choose one of the two roles provided. After choosing the role, player will then enter the stage selection scene. If player is playing the game for the second time, then the player will enter the stage selection scene. In the stage selection scene, player can choose what stage to play. There are five different stages with each stage contains different theme. Stage one is virus themed, stage 2 is kingdom plantae themed, stage 3 is kingdom animalia themed, stage 4 is motion system themed and stage 5 is mutation themed. Player can also enter the shop scene to buy items by clicking shop button in stage selection scene or enter the achievement scene by clicking the achievement button in stage selection scene. Every gameplay has a question mode button. If the button is clicked then the player will enter the question mode scene to answer the question. If player has done answering the question or the time has run out then the player will be back to the gameplay scene. III. Results and Discussions The implementation of Bio Saga game is run through smartphone with android 4.2 Jelly Beans operating system.
Figure 7 Shop Scene
Figure 8 Shop Scene Figure53Role Main Menu Scene Figure Selection Scene
63
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 question mode scene to answer biology questions. IV. Conclusions The conclusions of Bio Saga game are : 1) Overall the players like Bio Saga game both in terms of concept, story, graphics, audios, control, fun factor, and replay factor. 2) Bio Saga game helps students in learning biology. 3) Bio Saga game increases stundents' interest in learning biology subject . 4) Bio Saga game help teachers teaches biology subjects to high school students.
Figure 9 Gameplay Scene
V. References [1] Haggerty, Matt. (28 November, 2012). The State of Mobile Game Development. gameindustry.biz. http://www.gamesindustry.biz/articles/2012-11-28-the-state of- mobile-game-development. [2] Harris, John. (2 Juli, 2009). Game Design Essentials:20RPGs. Gamasutra. http://www.gamasutra.com/view/feature/4066/game_design_ essentials_20_rpgs.php. [3] Helgason, David. (November 2, 2012). Game Developers, Start Your Unity 3D Engines. GamesBeat. Interview oleh DeanTakahashi(VentureBeat). http://venturebeat.com/2012/11/02/game-developers-startyour-unity-3d-engines-interview/. [4] Millward, Steven. (25 March 2014). Indonesia diproyeksi lampaui 100 juta pengguna smartphone di 2018, keempat di dunia. Techinasia. https://id.techinasia.com/jumlah-pengguna-smartphone-diindonesia-2018. [5] Oxland, Kevin (2004). Gameplay and design. Addison Wesley.
Figure 10 Question Mode Scene
List of scenes in the figure 2 - 10 are splash screen scene, main menu scene to start the game, role selection scene to choose main role, stage selection scene to play stages, shop scene to buy items, achievement scene to claim rewards, gameplay scene where player fight enemies, and
64
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Problem Solving Ability As Strategy To Improvement Of Vocational Skill Students Kartika Tresya Mauriraya Electrical Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering Universitas Negeri Surabaya – Indonesia
[email protected]
King [2010] stated that for the planners is concerned with the links between skills and poverty reduction, skils and competitiveness, skills and employement, and skills and social cohesion must attend to what kind and quality of skills people are learning. Vocational skills have implemented in the life skill to improve better life for society.
Abstract - One of the learning strategy that based on student center is problem based learning method. Problem based learning method has been used to teach students where students actively to search information, data and facts what they need to answer or to solve a problem and test the hypotheses. In the vocational school, students are emphasized to mastery in the psychomotor domain, but don‘t forget cognitive and afective domain. So, it might be expected through vocational schools may establish a workforce that has a profesionality skilled. In this paper, the objective of this research is to investigate the vocational skill of students to analyze and to measure units of electricity in basic electronic circuit. This research uses two classes, one class for experiment with problem based learning method and the other class for control that uses lecture learning method. Quasi Experimental, Nonequivalent Control Group Design is used to compare the vocational skill of student on both classes. The vocational skill of students in psychomotor domain are tested through performance test such as work samples. The vocational skill of students in cognitive domain are tested through paper and pencil. Anova 2 ways is used to analyze the vocational skill of students toward learning outcomes and interaction between them.
II. METHODS A. Problem Based Learning Problem Based Learning Method is a intructional method that present a contectual problem that stimulate to learn. In this class that implement of problem based learning method, student work in teams to solve real-world problems. Problem based learning will happen with meaningful learning. Students learn to solve a problem then they will apply the knowledge possessed or sought to know the necessary knowledge. Syntax problem based learning is : a) Defining the problem b) Self learning c) Investigation d) Exchange knowledge e) Assessment And then, The goals of problem based learning method for student are : a) Developing creativity b) Developing the ability to think rationally and critically c) Increasing the activity of students in the learning process d) Learning to solve problems
Index Terms – Vocational Skill Student, Problem Based Learning.
I. INTRODUCTION As a direct result, many of today‘s workplaces require creative problem solving instead of in-routine activities in a variety of technology is very important role. Humans, as the main focus in developing of the science and technology, are required to always evolving anyway. One of the elements that can help human development is through education. Because education can build human character to face the future challenges. Vocational High School (SMK) is an educational institution that prepares its graduates to be workers ready and skilled. Vocational High School is an education in secondary education that promotes the development of the students' ability to be able to work in a particular field, the ability to adapt in the workplace, see job opportunities, and develop them in the future [Ilahi 2012]. While the vocational skills of students can be enhanced by creating a learning environment that is attractive, fair competition, and increasing student activity in learning.Technical and vocational skills can help to development in economic and social dimensions.
B. Vocational skill of student Increased vocational skills will greatly influence students' interest and learning outcomes of students to continue to develop and improve the ability to think. Vocational skills education is a concept that emphasizes the self development of students to face the challenges of life is increasingly complex and competitive. Vocational skills have a purpose not only preparing skilled workers and creative, but also preparing students to be able to address and resolve problems, because vocational skills have scientific background [Toharuddin 2005]. Vocational skill of student are divided into two as follows :
1) Basic vocational skill 65
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Basic vocational skills include doing basic motion using simple tools in manual work (such as hammers, screwdrivers and pliers) and proficiency in reading simple drawing. In addition, basic vocational skills include aspects attitudes consistent, precision, accuracy and timely that lead to productive behavior.
experimental class is TEI2 class that uses the problem based Learning method. Meanwhile, in the control class is TEI1 class that uses Lecture Learning method. Both classes are in 10th class in Vocational High School in Sidoarjo, East Java. Table 1 shows the Design of Multiple Choice Tests that are used to examine the vocational skills (cognitive domain) of the students after receiving the learning process by using the problem based learning method or lecture learning method.
2) Occupational skill 3) Occupational skill is the ability of a person taken in accordance with the field that he/she has learned. For example, a person's ability in the field of electronics engineering, hospitality, or machining
TABLE II THE DESIGN OF MULTIPLE CHOICE TESTS
C. Linkage Problem Based Learning for established Vocational Skill The ability of students to solve problems in a problem based learning method is one of the steps to improve the vocational skills of students. With these capabilities, students can think solution-based, creative and innovative and be able to draw conclusions from the results of the speed of perception to a concept or theory in the learning activities. III. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY This research uses research technique Quasi Experimenal Design with type Nonequivalent Control Group Design with the formula as follows [Arikunto, 2010]: O1 X1 O2 O3 O4 Description: O1 = Pretest class eksperiment O2 = Posttest class eksperiment X1 = Treatment with problem based learning - - = Used Lecture learning Method O3 = pretest class control O4 = Posttest class control
The next stage is the measurement of the psychomotor domain as shown in Table 2 Table 2 shows the matrix of work assessment of vocational skills students consisting of basic vocational skills and occupational skills. The measurement of psychomotor domain in this research refers to the opinion of Arikunto [2012] that the measurement skills must be itemized as follows: (1) how to hold, (2) how to lay, (3) how to read numbers, (4) how to restore to its original place, etc.
A. Procedures This study is divided into three phases: preparation, implementation, and analysis of research results.
B. Hypotesis The Hypothesis for the research are :
1) Preparation stage In this stage, the research activities consist of:
a) How the effect of vocational skill toward learning methods? b) How the effect of learning outcomes toward vocational skiil level? c) Testing the interaction between learning methods toward vocational skill?
a) Survey to the school will be a place of research, in order to determine the problem and the sample to be studied. b) Develop learning instrument and research instruments: (1) Syllabus, (2) Lesson Plan, (3) Student Worksheet, (4) Instruments. c) Validate learning instruments and research instruments. 2) Implementation Stage In this stage, we have two classes, namely the experimental class and the control class. The
66
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 TABLE II MATRIX OF VOCATIONAL SKILLS No
1
2
3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10
Skills
Assessment Scores 1 2 3 4 5 Basic Vocational Skill
No Item scores
Preparing tools needed in the experiment Capable to prepare the necessary materials in the experiment Knowing the procedure of the use of tool in the experiment Performing calibration before use tools Identifying the amount of electricity that will be measured in accordance with work instructions Identifying a simple circuit that will be made Diligent in working Using time effectively Paying attention Work Safety Capable of cooperate
13
14
15
16
12
Assessment Scores 1 2 3 4 5 Basic Vocational Skill
Item scores
the electrical quantities in electronic circuits Measuring the voltage in an electronic circuit using multimeter analog and digital Measuring the current in an electronic circuit using multimeter analog and digital Measuring resistance in an electronic circuit using multimeter analog and digital Performing power measurements on electronic circuits
REFERENCES [1] [2]
[3] [4]
Occupational Skill
11
Skills
Identifying electronic measuring devices such as multimeter analog and digital are used in the measurement Preparing the operation of multimeter analogue and digital to measure
[5]
[6] [7]
67
Arikunto, Suharsimi (2012): Dasar – Dasar Evaluasi Pendidikan. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara. Fischer, Martin and Waldemar Bauer (2004): Competing Approaches Towards Work Process Orientation In German Curriculum Development, (Online), [http://www.leeds.ac.uk/educol/documents/00003886.htm, accessed 24 March 2014]. Ilahi, Mohammad Takdir (2012): Pembelajaran Discovery Strategy dan Mental Vocational Skill. Yogyakarta: Diva Press. King Kenneth and Robert Palmer (2010): Planning for technical and vocational skills development, UNESCO: International Institute for Educational Planning. Summak, Semih M. and Mustafa Samancioglu (2011): Assessment Of Technology Integration In Vocational Education And Training Schools, (Online), (http://ijedict.dec.uwi.edu/viewarticle.php?id=1259, accessed 2 April 2014). Toharuddin (2005): Life Skill dan Keharusan Penataan Kembali Pendidikan Kita. Malang: UIN Malang. Wade Emmie (2013): Kunzwana Women‘s Association: Technical and vocational skills development for youth in Zimbabwe, International Perspectives in Adult Education – IPE 68, pp. 99-110 dvv international.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
68
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Influence of the use of Augmented Reality Media to Student‘s Learning Outcomes for multimedia department Students in SMK 12 Surabaya Septian Rahman Hakim1, Supari Muslim2, Eko Hariadi3 1
2
S2 Vocational Education State University Of Surabaya
[email protected]
Professor of Electrical Engineering Department State University Of Surabaya
[email protected] 3 Professor Electrical Engineering Department State University Of Surabaya
Abstrak – This study aims to improve the teaching and learning process through the application of Augmented Reality media in the subject of Digital Image Processing on 11th grade student of SMK 12 Surabaya. This study uses Quantitstive research method in which of type of research is Quasi-Experimental Design. The design used in this research is nonequivalent control group design. The results show that the learning activities of students who learn to use the media of augmented reality with a significantly higher score on average by 67.33 (very good). While the results of the study the affective domain of learning outcomes for student who learn to use the media of augmented reality significantly higher with an average score of 73.94 (very good). While the cognitive domain of learning outcomes for students who learn to use the media of augmented reality significantly higher with an average score of 85.83 (Master). Psychomotor domain of learning results while for students who learn to use media of augmented reality with a significantly higher score on average by 81.04 (category has been completed).
his supporters. One of them, namely the curriculum that was developed and used in educational units. Therefore, the curriculum must be developed over time in line with the development of science, technology, and art, as well as the development of various challenges and demands competence required in the development of human civilization Indonesia who aspired to in the future. Curriculum development should pay attention to the various challenges that will be faced by the nation's emerging and Indonesia in the future. Various challenges are, among other : (1) the dynamics of the global era; (2) development of science and technology; (3) development of communication technology and information; (4) environmental concerns; (5) the development of knowledge-based economy; (6) the awakening of creative and cultural industries; (7) a shift in the economic power the world; (8) the influence and swet up in techno sains; (9) quality, investment and transformation in education sector; (10) the development and changes in the international political map; and (11) the development of civilizations and cultures of various Nations. In the program there are Multimedia in SMK productive learner for digital image processing. Having regard to the curriculum design 2013, teacher of such productive Multimedia in SMK be charged open with scientific and technological developments relating to the learner matter of digital image processing in Multimedia school. It is therefore necessary the change pattern of view of teacher in SMK Multimedia could be developed multimedia curriculum according to needs of the world of business and industry to look at the development of science and technology. Media of Augmented Reality (AR) is one of the results of the development of digital image processing. Media of Augmented Reality (AR) is an environment that incorporates digital image object into the real environment. The system is closer to the real environment (real). Therefore, the
Keywords – The development of science and Technology, augmented reality media, digital image processing, understand bitmap image, optimize the ability.
I. INTRODUCTION Development of science and technology (SCIENCE and TECHNOLOGY) in the XXI century it runs very quickly, so the effect directly against the technology used in the environment of society in General, especially in an environment of world business / industry (DU/I). While the type and level of technology used in the world of business/industrial environment, have implications and direct towards the completion of the human resources (HR) conducted by the World Education (Supari, 2003). The empirical basic can note that the success of the development of quality education is affected by the availability of the various components of
69
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 element of reality preferred on this system. AR allows its users to interact in real time with the system. The use of AR have been widened to the many aspects in our lives and is projected to experience a significant development. This is due to the use of the AR is very interesting and makes it easy for users in doing such a thing, as in digital image processing. When there is a digital image, so far only shown in the monitor does not look real. Digital image that looks real will further develop the audience‘s imagination. Media Augmented Reality is one way to make it happen. With Augmented Reality, digital image will be created virtually and in accordance with the needs of business and industry. To improve learning outcomes in basic competency of understanding the bitmap image in the learner digital image at SMK 12 Surabaya can not be separated from effort to improve the quality of learning in schools, thefore it is neccesary to apply the model, approach, or strategy of learning the optimal and effective that can be implemented by teachers without compromising the interest and motivation of students. Because learning is the process for students in building their own ideas or understanding, then learning activities should provide the opportunity for students to engage effectively in the learning activities. One of the learning models that can be applied in SMK is a direct learning model. Direct learning model is designed to teach students about knowledge that is well structured and can be taught in step by step. Direct learning model is an effective way to teach basic skills and information to students. The learning effects of learning model is improving the skills of alleviation of simple, complex, and declarative knowledge can be clearly defined and taught in step by step (Nur, 2011 : 56). The implementation of this model of learning, the teacher gives the opportunity to the students to practice applying the concepts or skills that have been studied and provide feedback. Student involvement actively in training and absorption for the students themselves, make learning takes place with more meaningful. It even allows students to apply concepts and skills practice. Students can apply the concepts and skills in the use of augmented reality.
prize. In contrast, behavior that was not good was given a reprimand. Teachers can craft a learning program based on the view Skinner, known as Skinner‘s theory. According to the theory of Skinner, (Dimyati 2009 : 9) teachers need pay attention to two important things : (1) the selection of a discriminating stimulus; and (2) the use of reinforcement. In line with the opinion of the Skinner, Piaget (Dimyati 2009 : 13) States that knowledge is shaped by the individual. Because the individual doing the continous interaction with the environment. The interaction with the environment, then the growing intellectual function. Knowledge is constructed in the mind. Each individual build their own knowledge. Knowledge constructed consists of three forms, namely physical knowledge, knowledge of logicmathematical, and social sciences. Learning knowledge includes three phases, the phase is a exploration phase, that is the introduction of the concept, and concept application. In the phase of exploration, students learn the symptoms with guidance. In the introduction of the concept phase, the student knows the concept that has to do with the symptoms. In this phase the application concepts, students use concepts for examining other symptoms further. In the meantime, Gagne (Dimyati 2009:10) argues that learning is a complex activity. The results of the study in the form capabilities. After having studied, people have the skills, knowledge, attitudes, and values. The incidence of such capabilities is form: (1) the stimulation that comes from the environment; and (2) cognitive process conducted by learner. As such learning is a set of cognitive process that change the nature of environmental stimulation, passing information management, became the new capabilities. In line with the opinion of Gagne, Hammalik (1995:28) States that the study are : (1) learning situations that aims and objectives were received well by the public, and that goal is one aspect of the learning situations; (2) the aim and purpose of the study stems from her own children‘s lives; (3) within reach the goal, the students always will meet difficulties, obstacles, and situations that aren‘t fun; (4) the results of a major study is the conduct of the round; (5) the learning process mainly teach things that are actually learn what do and do what is learned; (6) the activities and the the results of his study brought together and linked with the objectives of the learning situation; (7) the students gave an overall reaction; (8) the students reaction something meaningful from environmental aspects for him; (9) the students is directed and supported by the people who are in that environment; and (10) the students brought and directed to other goals, whether related or not related to the primary purpose in learning situations.
II. REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE A.
Learning Activities According to Skinner (Dimyati 2009 : 9) that learning is a behavior. At the time of learning, then the response was for the better. Conversely, if he does not learn then the response was decreasing. In the study found the presence of the following, namely: (1) the occurrence of a chance event which ellicted the response learner; (2) the response learner; and (3) the consequences are strengthened response. As an illustration, the response behavior of a good learner was given a
70
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 In line with the opinion of the Hamalik, Sardiman (2011:20) states that learning is a change in behavior or appearance, with a series of activities such as reading, watching, listening, imitating and also learned it would be better, if the subject of the study it‘s experience or did it, so there are verbal. In line with the opinion of the Sardiman, Djamarah (2010:10) States that learning is a change in behavior, both regarding knowledge, skills or attitudes, even covering all aspects of organisms or private. Teaching and learning activities such as organizing learning experiences, cultivate the teaching and learning activities, assess progress, and the results of the study are included in the scope of the teacher. Based on some of the opinions of experts such as described above it can be concluded, that learning is a change in behavior, both regarding knowledge, skills or attitudes through a series of activities such as reading, watching, listening, imitating to solve the problems now and later confronts students with the results of the study are included in the scope of the teacher. In conducting the study of learning activities in the classrom. Learning activities in the classroom are used to measure the success rate difference in the use of the media or the difference of the use of the learning model used. In this study the learning activity used to measure the difference in the use of print media images with augmented reality in the subject of the digital image processing with the basic competence to process bitmap image. According to Sardiman (2011: 103) in the learning activities there are some principles that oriented on the view of science of the soul, i.e. According to the view of science of old soul and the view of modern psychology. According to the view of the old science soul science activity is dominated by the teacher according to the view of science of modern soul‘s activity was dominated by students. In line with the opinion of the Sardiman, Dierich (Sardiman, 2011 : 101) mentions that the indicator which reveals the activities of students in teaching and learning, namely : (1) visual activities, such as reading, viewing pictures, pay attention to the experiment and the work of others; (2) oral activities, such as States, formulates, asks, member suggestions, issuing opinions, conducting interviews, discussions, interruptions; (3) the listening activities, for example listen to description, conversation, discussion, music, speech; (4) writing activities, such as writing a story, essay, now report, copying; (5) drawing activities, such as drawing, create graph, maps, and diagrams; (6) the motor activities, which include , among others, experimenting, making construction, model refit, playing, gardening, and livestocks; (7) the mental activities, for example : perceive, remember, solve the problem, analyze, view relationship, decision maker; and (8) emotional activities, such as
interest, feeling tired, excited, passionate, brave, quiet, and nervous. B. Learning, Model and Learning Devices According to Sardiman (2011: 26) that learning objectives divided into 3 types namely : (1) to gain knowledge with marked ability to think; (2) the cultivation of the concepts and skills by looking at physical and spiritual skills; and (3) the formation of the attitude by growing attitude, mentally, behavioral and personal. In line with the opinion of the Sardiman, Meger (Hamzah 2008 : 35) States that the goal of learning as behavior that is about to be achieved or that can be done by Students on the conditions and the level of specific competence. In contrast to the opinion of the Meger, Dejnozka (Hamzah 2008 : 35) States that the goal of learning is a question that specifically expressed in behavior or appearance that is manifested in the form of writings to describe the expected learning outcomes. In line with the opinion Dejnozka, Ellington (Hamzah 2008 : 35) States that the goal of learning is a clear statement and shows the appreance or certain students skills that are expected to be achieved as a result of learning. Based on some of the opinions of experts such as described above it can be concluded, that the goal of learning is a question that specifically expressed in behavior or appreance that is manifested in the form of writing to get knowledge, describe the expected learning outcomes, and the formation of attitude by growing attitude, mentally, behavior, and personal. In doing the learning in the classroom is not detached from the learning model used. The model of learning is a form of learning that is imaged from beginning to end is typically presented by teachers in the classroom. In this study the model used is a direct learning model. According to Arends (2012 : 297) that direct learning model is designed to deliver the mastery of skills (procedural knowledge) and factual knowledge which can be taught step by step. In contrast to the opinion of the Arends, Rosenshine (Nur 2011 : 65) States that direct learning model includes sevent events (specific activity of teacher and students), namely : (1) deliver previewGeneral; (2) review-reset, check out their previous work; (3) presents a new content & skills; (4) exercise early students, checking for understanding, feedback and corrections; (5) exercise independent; (6) the test is often done; and (7) homework, Deuteronomy weekly and monthly. In line with the opinion of the Rosenshine, Slavin (Nur 2011: 66) States that direct learning model includes seven events (specific activity of teacher and student), namely : (1) stated learning objectives and motivate students; (2) review – reset prerequisite knowledge; (3) presents new knowledge; (4) give exercise social interactions;
71
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 (5) give the exercise independently; (6) access performance and member feedback; and (7) gives the advanced workout. In line with Slavin, Nur (2011 : 17) States that direct learning model is a model that is centered on the teacher who has five steps: prepare and motivate students, explain and / or demonstrate the excercise, social interactions, feedback, and advanced practice. In line with the opinion of the Arends, Nur (2011:26) States that direct learning model has been designed specifically for teaching students on procedural knowledge required to carry out simple and complex skills and declarative knowledge is well structured and can be taught in step by step. Based on some of the opinions of experts such as described above it can be concluded, that the direct learning model is a model that is centered on the teacher that is designed to deliver the mastery of skills (procedural knowledge) and factual knowledge which can be taught step by step include seven events, namely : (1) deliver preview –general; (2) review – reset prerequisite knowledge; (3) presents a new content & skills; (4) give exercise social interactions; (5) give the exercise independently; (6) the test is often done; and (7) homework, Deuteronomy weekly and monthly. Direct learning model has five important steps or phases. The lesson begins with the teacher giving the lesson for rational, motivate students, and prepare students to learn. Phases of preparation and motivation is then followed by the presentation of the material that is being taught or a demonstration of a particular skill. The lesson then provides the opportunity exercise social interactions on student and teacher feedback over the progress of the students. In the phase of feedback, the teacher should always give the opportunity students to transfer the knowledge being taught to real-life situations. Learning lessons directly always concludes with an advanced exercise and transfer skills. In doing the learning in the clasroom is inseparable from learning devices are used. Before carrying out the task of teaching in the classromm, teachers have to make a written preparation. All the written preparations for the purpose of teaching known as the learning device. Learning device aims to equate the vision and mission of teachers in terms of the implementation of the education curriculum in schools. In this research study is made of the device : (1) the syllabus; (2) Learning implementation plan (RPP); (3) Student Worksheet (LKS); and (4) Pretest and Posttest.
is created where the recipient can perform learning process effectively and efficiently. In contrast to the opinion of Schramm, Gerlach (Arsyad 2011:3) stated that when the media understood generally are human, material and events that build conditions that make students to acquire the knowledge, skills or attitudes. In contrast to the opinion of Gerlach, Heininch (Arsyad 2011:4) stated that the learninh media is an intermediary who carries messages or information aimed at containing or instructional purposes among learning sources and receiver. Meanwhile according to Gagne and Briggs (Arsyad 2011:5) that the learning media includes tools that physically used to deliver the content of learning material, which consists of, among other books, tape recoders, cassettes, video camera, video recorder, film, slide (picture frames), photographs, pictures, graphics, tv, and computer. Based on some of the opinions above it can be concluded that the media is anything objects or components that can be used to transmit the message and impression of the sender to the recipient so that a conducive learning environment is created where the recipient can perform learning process effectively and efficiently. According to Arstad (2011:19) that it is in the process of teaching and learning, two important elements are the methods of teaching and learning media. These two aspects are inter-related. The selection of one particular teaching method will affect the learning of appropriate media types, although there are still various orther aspects that must be sonsidered in chosing media, among other learning objectives, types of assignments, and the response was expected to be controlled by the students after learning takes place. Nevertheless, it can be said that one of the main functions of the media learning is a teching tool that also affect the climate, the conditions and the environment that are styled and created by teachers. D. Learning Outcomes According to kingsley (Sudjana, 1991:22) there are three sorts of learning outcomes, namely: (1) the skills and habits; (2) knowledge and understanding; and (3) attitudes and ideals. In line with the opinion of Kingsley, Sudjana (1991:22) argues that learning outcomes to be achieved can be categorized into 3 fields i.e. fields of cognitive (Intellectual mastery), Affective (attitudes and value-related), as well as psychomotor fields (ability/skill). Different opinions with Kingsley, Gagne (Sudjana, 1991:22) argues that there are five categories of learning outcomes, namely : (1) the verbal information; (2) intellectual Skills; (3) Cognitive strategies; (4) the attitude; and (5) Motoris Skills. The learning outcomes Achieved by learners in the learning process Generally includes the results of a study of cognitive, affective learning outcomes, and psychomotor learning outcomes acquired through learning. The three of them can
C. Learning Media According to Schramm (Ibrahim : 76) that the media learning technology is a carrier of messages that can be used for purposes of learning. In line with the opinion of the Schramm, Munadi (2013:8) argues that the media is learning everything it can convey or transmit the impression of planned resources so that a conducivelearning environment
72
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 not stand on its own but is an Inseparable unity, even forming the relationship hierarchy. The results of learning a learner can note when held the measurement of knowledge, attitudes, and skills of learners. To measure learning success rate to the which learners must have A Certain measuring instrument that can measure the results of a study of the learners. Measuring instrument used is called a test. It may take the form of test tasks that must be Carried out, and may Also be in the form of a question or questions that should be answered. The results of the study are usually Expressed in the form of scores Obtained following a test students after study results held after completion of the learning process. Thus Spake the results of the study can be interpreted that a description of the business results Achieved learners in a learning process, in the form of letters and numbers. Referring to Several definitions of the above it can be concluded that the results of learning is the Attainment of the ability of the learning process (as Formulated in the objectives of the study) of students demonstrated by the results of the posttest after following the learning process, in the the form of changes in behavior Gathered in three domains: cognitive ability abilities (cognitive domain), affective abilities (affective domain), and psychomotor abilities (psychomotor domain). According to Supari (2013: 13), in the process learning focuses on learning objectives above three domains: (1) the cognitive domain; (2) the realm of affective; and (3) the psychomotor domain.
Validation of learning device that consists of a syllabus, lesson plans, LKS, and grain question to test the feasibility of the content / materials, construction, and linguistic devices based on opinion or response of the experts. The results of the validation of the learning device that consists of a syllabus, lesson plans, and LKS retrieved results as shown in Table 4.1. Table 4.1 The Results Validation of Learning Outcomes Learning No Percentage Category Devices 1 Syllabus 90,82 % Very Decent Very Decent 2 RPP 87,05 % 3 LKS 86,60 % Very Decent B. The Validity of Student Learning Activities The results of the validation of the student's learning activities using the media of augmented reality and print images from the aspect of material, construction, and aspects of language / writing aspect of the grain problem retrieving the results as shown in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 Student Learning Activities Student Learning No Activities Percentage Category Using The Media Augmented Reality 92,0% Sangat Layak 1 92,0% Sangat Layak 2Print Images
III. RESEARCH METHOD This research was Quasi-experimental research the type of Experimental Design with design research "Non-equivalent Control Group Design" which consists of three classes i.e. XI MM 1 as experimental classes, XI MM 2 as the control and Class XI MM 3 as a free trial class. According to Sugiyono (2011: 72) that: (1) experimental research is the research methods used to locate a particular treatment influence against the other in conditions completely, (2) types of QuasiExperimental Design is the design development of a True Experimental Design , and (3) design research Nonequivalent Control Group Design is almost the same design with pretest-posttest control group design this design, just on the good experimental group or the control group not randomly selected.
C. Research Result 1. Student Learning Activities Research results the average student learning activities that use augmented reality media is 67.3 with standard deviation 1,473, and the learning activities of students using the print image is of 64.1 with standard deviation 1.700. This means, the learning activities of students who use the medium of augmented reality is higher than the learning activities of students using the print image. The F values 0.923 Obtained with the number sig. or p-value = 0.310> 0.05, which means the variance population of both groups the same or homogeneous. As for the value of t, Obtained price t = 8.782, df = 76 and sig (2-tailed) or p-value =0.000 / 2 = 0.000 < 0.05. Table 4.3 Independent Sample t-Test Student Learning Activity
IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Prior to the implementation of the research instrument, a device that has been validated by the three competent in their field validators, first tried out instruments outside of the classroom, the which samples of research. A. The Validity of Learning Devices
73
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Table 4.5 t-Test Learning Outcomes Affective Domain
2.
Learning Outcomes Cognitive Domain Research results the average cognitive domain of learning outcomes for students who use the medium of augmented reality is 86.025 with standard deviation 6.007 and cognitive domains of learning outcomes for students who use print media image is of 82.371 with standard deviation 5.469. The F value 0.295 Obtained by number sig. or p-value = 0.589> 0.05, which means the variance population of both groups the same or homogeneous. As for the t value Obtained, price t = 2.809, df = 76 and sig (2-tailed) or p-value =0.006/ 2 = 0.003 <0.05.
4.
Learning Outcomes Psychomotor Domain The study results average study results psychomotor domain for students who use the medium of augmented reality is 81.15 with standard deviation of 1.634 and psychomotor domains of learning outcomes for students who use the print image is 78.32 with a standard deviation of 1.581 , F value of 0.375 Obtained by number sig. or p-value = 0.542> 0.05, which means the variance population of both groups the same or homogeneous. As for the value of t is Obtained, price t = 7.781, df = 76 and sig (2-tailed) or pvalue =0.000 / 2 = 0.000 <0.05. Table 4.6 t-Test Learning Outcomes Psychomotor Domain
Table 4.4 t-Test Learning Outcomes Cognitive Domain
3.
Learning Outcomes Affective Domain The study results average study results Affective domain for students who use the medium of augmented reality is of 73.6 with standard deviation and 1.769 realm of affective learning results for students using the print image is 72.04 with a standard deviation of 2.287. The F values 2,492 Obtained with number sig. or p-value = 0.119 > 0.05, which means the variance population of both groups the same or homogeneous. As for the t value Obtained, price t = 3,132, df = 76 and sig (2-tailed) or p-value = 0.001 / 2 = 0.0005 < 0.05.
V. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTION A. Conclusion 1. The learning activities of students who learn to use the medium of augmented reality is higher in significantly (0.000 <0.05), with an average score of 67.33 (very active) than students who study learning activities using the print image with average score of 64.16 (active). 2. Affective domain of learning outcomes for students who learn to use the medium of augmented reality was Significantly higher (0.001 <0.05), with an average score of 73.94 (very good) learning outcomes than students
74
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
3.
4.
wajah panggung kelas x tata kecantikan kulit di SMKN 2 Boyolangu Tulungagung‖. E-Journal : Yudisium periode Oktober 2013, Vol. 2 No. 3. [14] David, P.L. (2013). Delivering Educational Multimedia Contents Through An Augmented Reality Application : A Case Study On ITS Impact On Knowledge Acquisition And Retention. TOJET: The Turkish Online Journal of Educational Technology, Issue 4., Vol. 10. [15]Dimyati, dan Mudjiono. (2009). Belajar dan Pembelajaran. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta. [16]Djamarah, S.B. dan Zain, A. (2010). Strategi Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta. [17]Hamalik, O. (2013). Proses Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. [18]Hamzah, B. Uno. (2008). Perencanaan Pembelajaran. Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. [19]Ibrahim, M. (2010). Dasar-dasar proses Belajar Mengajar. Surabaya : Universitas Negeri Surabaya. [20] Ismet, B. (2014). Asesmen Pembelajaran. Bandung : Rosdakarya. [21]Kamphius. (2014). ‖Augmented reality in medical education?”. Perspect Med Edu 2014. [22]Khotimah. (2014). ‖Aplikasi Tutorial Rukun Umroh Menggunakan augmented reality‖. Prosiding disampaikan pada Seminar Nasional Komputer dan Sistem Intelijen (KOMMIT 2014) Universitas Gunadarma, tanggal 14-15 Oktober 2014. [23] Lee, K. (2012). ‖Augmented reality in education and training”. TechTrends, Vol. 56 No. 2. [24] Leonita. (1999). Penyusunan Butir Tes Obyektif Bentuk Pilihan Ganda. Surabaya : Universitas Negeri Surabaya [25] Majid, A. (2012). Perencanaan Pembelajaran. Bandung : Rosdakarya. [26] Malikova, E. (2013). ‖Advancing creative visual thinking with constructive function-based modelling‖. Journal of Information Technology Education : Innovations in Practise, Vol. 12. [27] Martiyono. dkk. (2014). Mengelola dan mendampingi implementasi kurikulum 2013. Yogyakarta : Aswaja. [29] Munadi, Y. (2013). Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta : GP Press. [30] Muslim, S. (2003). ‖Re-engineering Pendidikan kejuruan seiring dengan perkembangan teknologi dan tuntutan pasar global‖. Makalah disajikan pada peresmian penerimaan jabatan Guru Besar dalam Bidang Kajian Ilmu Pendidikan Teknologi dan Kejuruan Fakultas Teknik Universitas Negeri Surabaya, tanggal 29 Januari 2003. [31] Muslim, S. (2013). ‖Tes Kinerja(Performance Test) dalam bidang teknologi dan kejuruan‖. Makalah disajikan pada Seminar Teknik Elektro dan Pendidikan Teknik Elektro, Desember 2013. [32] Nurul, H. (2013) ‖Perbedaan hasil belajar siswa antara menggunakan media pocket book dan tanpa pocket book pada materi kinematika gerak melingkar kelas X‖. Jurnal Pendidikan Fisika, Vol. 1 No.1. [33] Nur, M. (2011). Model Pengajaran Langsung. Surabaya : Universitas Negeri Surabaya. [34] Omodara, O.D. (2014). ‖Relevance of Educational Media and Multimedia Technology for Effective Service Delivery in Teaching and Learning Process‖. IOSR Journal of Research & Method in Education Issue 2, Vol.4 Ver.1. [35] Owen, M. (2011). ‖Pedagogic Issue and Question From the Science Centre to Go, Augmented Reality, Project Implementation‖. Proceedings of the Science Center To Go, October 2011. [36]Paul, A. (2009). ‖Virtual Merdeka : Experiencing augmented reality for social angagement in a network environment‖. [37] Permendikbud Nomor 65 tahun 2013 [38] Pramono, A. (2013). ‖Media pendukung pembelajaran rumah adat Indonesia menggunakan augmented reality”. ELTEK, Vol.11 No. 1. [39]Program Pascasarjana Universitas Negeri Surabaya. (2012). Pedoman penulisan tesis dan desertasi. Surabaya. [40] Pusat Bahasa, Depdiknas. (2008). Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia. Jakarta : Depdiknas. [41] Putu, A.S.D. (2014). Pengaruh Model Problem Based Learning Berbantuan Media Cetak Terhadap Hasil
learn by using the print image with average score of 72.04 (very good). The cognitive domain of learning results students who learn to use the medium of augmented reality was Significantly higher (0.006 <0.05), with an average score of 85.83 (master) Compared to the results of study of students who learn to use print images with average score of 82.37 (master). Psychomotor domain of learning results of students who learn to use the medium of augmented reality was Significantly higher (0.000 <0.05), with an average score of 81.04 (completed) than students who study results using the print image with average score of 78.32 (completed)
B.Suggestion 1. For teachers of SMK eye training productive, especially in the multimedia department, it is recommended to use the medium of augmented reality in the learning process Because this proven learning media can improve learning activities and student learning outcomes, both affective domain of learning outcomes, the results of the cognitive domain of learning, as well as the results of the psychomotor domain of learning; and 2. For researchers, need to research that are akin to a longer learning time (one half), so that the expected results of Reviews These research results are more accurate and Gives more detailed information. REFERENCES [1] Abbas, A. (2012). ‖Web-based AR Advertising & Branding for Proton Company‖. IJCSI : International Journal of Computer Science Issue 2012, Vol. 9 No. 3, pp. 149-158. [2] Adridana, D. (2013). ‖Perancangan Kartu Nama dengan Augmented Reality sebagai Portofolio Digital‖. E-journal Teknik Elektro dan Komputer 2013. [3] Alsalem, M.Y.A. (2012). ‖A Low Cost Vision Based Hybrid Fiducial Mark Tracking Technique for Mobile Industrial Robots ‖. IJCSI : International Journal of Computer Science Issue 2012, Vol. 9 No. 2, pp. 151-156. [4] Arends, R.I. (2012). Learning to teach. New York : McGraw-Hill. [5] Arikunto, S. (1998). Prosedur Penelitian. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta. [6] Arikunto, S. (2012). Dasar-Dasar Evaluasi Pendidikan. Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. [7] Arshad, A. (2011). Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta : Rajawali Pers. [8] Azuma, R.T. (1997). ‖A survey of augmented reality”. Presence : Teleoperators and Virtual Environments 1997, Vol. 6 No. 4, pp. 355-385. [9] Bhatia, S. (2012). ‖Augmented Reality Repair Guidance System‖. IJCSI : International Journal of Computer Science Issue 2012, Vol. 9 No. 3, pp. 333-343. [10] Bloom, B.S. (1956). Taxonomy of Educatonal Objectives. Michigan : Longmans. [11] Chafied, M. (2010). ‖Brosur Interaktif Berbasis Augmented Reality‖. [12] Chofifah, C. (2010). ‖Rubber Ball-Virtual Game dengan menggunakan ARToolKit‖. [13] Cyndia, R.L. (2013). ‖Pengaruh penerapan media video terhadap hasil belajar siswa pada sub kompetensi merias
75
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Belajar IPS Siswa Kelas V SD Gugus V Mengwi. Jurnal Mimbar PGSD Universitas Pendidikan Ganesha. Vol.2 No.1. [42] Ramsey, T.D. (1996). ‖The effect of multimedia interface design on original learning and retention‖. Virginia : Virgina Polytechnic Institute and State University. [43] Sardiman, A.M. (2011). Interaksi dan Motivasi Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta : Rajawali Pers. [44] Sudjana, N. (1991). Penilaian Hasil Proses Belajar Mengajar. Bandung : Rosdakarya. [45] Sugiyono. (2014). Metode penelitian kuatitatif, kualitatif dan R&D . Bandung : Alfabeta.
[46] Syah, M. (2012). Psikologi Belajar. Jakarta : Rajawali Pers. [47] Tanner, P. (2014). ‖Augmenting a child’s reality : using educational tablet technology”. Journal of Information Technology Education : Innovations in Practice, Vol. 13. [48] Undang-Undang RI No. 14 Tahun 2005 [49] Wen, Guang. (2013). ‖Study of RBF Nerve Network Tuning PD Control Algoritm of Bilateral Servo System‖. IJCSI : International Journal of Computer Science Issue 2013, Vol. 10 No. 3, pp. 393-396. [50] Yulia, R. (2013). ‖Pengaruh penggunaan media model terhadap hasil belajar ilmu bangunan gedung kelas x teknik bangunan SMKN 1 Padang‖.
76
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Thematic Learning Using Augmented Reality in Education with Aurasma Arik Kurniawati Informatics Department University of Trunojoyo Madura
[email protected]
particular focus on mobile learning for thematic learning with Aurasma
Abstract - Augmented Reality has high potential to provide both powerful contextual, on learning experiences and discovery of the connected nature of information in the real world. New curriculum with integrative thematic concept allows students to investigate science issues in the context of the world around them. This paper will be presented the AR book for Buku Tematik Terpadu Kurikulum 2013. This technology based on mobile application will be develop using Aurasma
II. AUGMENTED REALITY IN EDUCATION An Augmented Reality system allows for combining or real-world objects with virtual objects or superimposed information. As a result, virtual objects seem to consist in the same space with the real world. However, Augmented Reality is not restricted only to the sense of sight, but it can be applied to all senses such as hearing, touch and smell (Azuma et al., 2001). AR allows for combining virtual content with the real world seamlessly (Azuma, Billinghurst, & Klinker, 2011). This differents of a Virtual Environment (VE) where the user is completely immersed inside a synthetic environment. The Augmented Reality (AR) completely replacing it‖ (Azuma, 1997). The Reality-Virtuality Continuum (Milgram, Takemura, Utsumi, & Kishino, 1995) clearly shows the relation between a real environment, AR and a virtual environment.
Index Terms – Augmented Reality, curriculum, Aurasma.
I. INTRODUCTION In recent years, technology-enhanced learning research has increasingly focused on technologies such as augmented reality, ubiquitous learning (ulearning), mobile learning (m-learning), serious games and learning analytics for improvement learning environments In particular, augmented reality (AR) research has matured to a level that its applications can now found in both mobile and non-mobile devices. Research on AR has also demonstrated it is for increasing the student motivation in the learning process [1] Augmented Reality has high potential to provide both powerful contextual, on learning experiences and discovery of the connected nature of information in the real world. Many researchers and professionals have striven to apply Augmented Reality for the classroom-based learning within subjects like chemistry, mathematics, biology, physics, astronomy in education for kindergarten, elementary school, junior or higher, and to adopt it as augmented books and student guides. [2]
The manifest functionality of AR has an improved user interface technology, many researchers believe that AR has potential implications and numerous benefits for learning environments, such as: AR books, AR gaming, discovery-based learning, objects modeling, and skills training. It is likely that AR books will be an important stepping stone helping the public bridge the gap between the digital and physical world. Augmented Reality has great potential to offer students 3D presentations and interactive experiences. [4]
Since 2013 Indonesia government revealed new curriculum with integrative thematic concept applied to elementary, secondary, high school, and vocational school. The system allows students to investigate science issues in the context of the world around them. This curriculum is named K13 at better known as thematic curriculum. [3] This paper examines the state of the art in the application of augmented reality for education, with a
77
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 III. THEMATIC LEARNING IN K13 CURRICULUM
Terpadu Kurikulum 2013 Mendeskrip-sikan daur hidup beberapa jenis mahluk hidup
Discovery and Integrated Thematic Learning Model are mutually supportive. Organizing learning independently by students in discovery learning allows learners will be easier to carry out the theme and sub-theme in each daily learning activity. Integrated thematic learning offers many benefits including (1) easy to focus on a particular theme, (2) is able to learn knowledge and develop basic competencies among subjects in the same theme, (3) understanding of the subject matter more deeply and memorable (4) relate the lesson to the student's personal experience (5) benefit and learn the meaning because the material is presented in the context of a definite theme (6) is more excited to know because it can communicate in real situations, to develop knowledge and skills are also associated with spiritual attitude and attitude social [5].
Memahami manusia dalam dinamika interaksi dengan lingkungan alam, sosial, budaya, dan ekonomi
The steps for preparation to implementing AR Book for Buku Tematik Kurikulum 2013 are:
IV. RESEARCH METHOD
1. Prepare the content of the material will is done the object virtual that called Augmented Reality. The content material could be an image or video file, either 2D or 3 D. This content is an overlay image at Aurasma. 2. Determine the picture that used as a marker in Augmented Reality. This marker is a trigger image in Aurasma 3. Implementation in Aurasma
This paper will be presented the AR book for Buku Tematik Terpadu Kurikulum 2013. This technology based on mobile application will be develop using Aurasma. Aurasma is a mobile application that merges the physical and virtual worlds together. Available on smartphones, the app was created out of technology that is capable of recognizing image, symbols and objects in the real word can deliver relevant content in real time, including video, animation, audio or webpages. Aurasma is changing the way for interact with the world. Turn everyday objects, images, and places into new opportunities for engagement through striking augmented reality experiences which graphics, animation, video, audio, and 3D content. Aurasma's platform includes a powerful drag-and-drop web studio that enables anyone to create quickly, manage, and track augmented reality experiences.
Some files were prepared to used as an overlay; the file is a video.
Four Steps to Creating an Aura [6]
1. Upload a trigger image for marker 2. Upload an overlay image or video (graphics, animation, video, audio, and 3D content) 3. Create a channel for your Auras to go in. 4. Add the finished Aura to your channel. The subject matter that will use as an illustrative example of thematic learning in Book AR is a lesson for the 4th-grade elementary school. Table 1 are some illustrative examples of material that can integrate with the K13 curriculum and Augmented Reality. Table 1. Illustrative examples of material [7] Kompetensi Inti Memahami pengetahuan faktual dengan cara mengamati [mendengar, melihat, membaca] dan menanya berdasarkan rasa ingin tahu tentang dirinya, makhluk ciptaan Tuhan dan kegiatannya, dan benda-benda yang dijumpainya di rumah dan di sekolah Kompetensi Dasar
Figure 2. Overlays
Ilusstration of Buku Tematik
78
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 While the image to used as a marker is the image contained in the Buku Tematik Terpadu Kurikulum 2013, i.e.,
Figure 5. The result of AR Book VI. CONCLUSION
With the media this technology, each student will better understand the meaning contained in the image. Because the media that appears from the picture more visual, interactive and engaging.
Figure 3. Trigger images for markers The steps for implementation AR in Aurasma are describe in Figure 4 [6].
REFERENCES
1. Create an Aurasma account 2. Create an Aura 3. Share your Aura
[1] J. B. S. B. R. F. S. G. dan K. , ―Augmented Reality Trends in Education: A Systematic Review of Research and Applications.,‖ Journal of Educational Technology & Society.
V. RESULT AND DISCUSSION
[2] K. L. ―Augmented Reality in Education and Training,‖ University of Northern Colorado & KOSH Republic of Korea.
The result of implementing AR Book in the Buku Tematik Terpadu Kurikulum 2013 displayed in Figure 5. If the camera on smartphones directed to the trigger image that have used as a marker will be displayed virtual object that stored in that image, That is called Augmented Reality
[3] H. D. M. F. H. G. P. dan E. N. , ―Integrated Science For Thematic Learning In Indonesian High School,‖ dalam International Seminar on Applied Technology, Science, and Art 4 th APTECS , 2013. [4] S. Y. G. Y. dan E. J. , ―Augmented reality: An overview and five directions for AR in education,‖ Journal of Educational Technology Development and Exchange, vol. 4(1), pp. 119140., 2011. [5] D. ―Humor Cartoon-Based Integrated Thematic Learning Model for Character Education in Elementary School,‖ DIJE, 2014. [6] ―https://www.aurasma.com/,‖ [Online]. [7] Buku Tematik Terpadu Kurikulum 2013, Kementrian Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan Republik Indonesia, 2014.
79
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Figure 4. The steps in Aurasma
80
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Development of Instructional Media on Physics Subject To Increase The Class Effectiveness Puput Wanarti1, Euis Ismayati2, Hapsari Peni3, Yuni Yamasari4, Elfira Taufida5 1
Elctrical Engineering Department, Unesa, Surabaya
[email protected] 2 Elctrical Engineering Department, Unesa, Surabaya
[email protected] 3 Elctrical Engineering Department, Unesa, Surabaya
[email protected] 4
Informatic Engineering Department, Unesa, Surabaya
[email protected] 5 Graduated of Electrical Engineering Department, Unesa, Surabaya
[email protected]
Abstract - This research is aimed to develop the
I. INTRODUCTION
instructional media by using adobe flash in the Physics subjects on vocational school in Surabaya. Furthermore, the purpose of this research was to obtain a description of the quality of instructional media are applied to the Physics course, the effectiveness of media-based learning e-learning are applied to the Physics course, and the student response against media developed by researchers. The result of this research and development is a product of instructional media using Adobe Flash Maker. Subjects were studied in the learning media is the magnetic field, the ampere‘s law, Faraday‘s law, and the nature of magnetism . The method used in this research is the Research and Development (R & D). However, in this research, the method of R&D are modified by researchers into five steps of research and development. The results showed that the learning media in the Physics was stated percentage of good quality by experts validation to 89.5% of the media so that the media was declared unfit for use as a medium of learning Physics subjects. To study the effectiveness of using the media, the percentage of results obtained matter expert rating is 86%, so it is very effective instructional media used in teaching Physics. As for the response of students to instructional media are obtained a percentage of 90.6%, It showed a positive response or very good, so the instructional media can be used in teaching Physics . Index Terms – Instructional media, Research and Development Methode, Student Response
81
Education is one of the most important needs in human life. Education itself is one aspect of a dynamic manifestation of human culture, in which human culture as a culture-laden means to development [1]. This development could not be separated from the cultural changes of human life, as well as the use of information and communication technologies (ICTs) in everyday life. Studying is to develop new knowledge, skills, and behaviors that constitute the interaction of individuals with the information and the environment [2]. Environment in this case is not only soft, but also a physical nature, such as highways, television, computers, and so forth. Looking at the definition, it became clear that learning could not be separated from an interaction between the individual and his environment, with a medium of learning is achieved information aimed at the individual. With the medium of learning, learners can easily understand what the material content of the lesson. This is consistent with the definition of instructional media itself. As noted by Briggs [3] that learning is a means of physical media to deliver content or learning materials, such as books, movies, videos and so on. In practice, Kemp & Dayton [3] grouped into eight types of media, ie print media, display media, overhead transparancies, audiotape, slides and movie series strips, multi-image presentation, video and film footage of life , as well as computers. While the application of today's technology, that the media
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 which covers almost all types of media is the implementation of e-learning medium. Based on the student of The State Vocational School 5 in Surabaya , facilities to support the procurement of media learning has been developed , but the implementation was still not maximized . Learning that delivered still tend to use conventional instructional media such as notes from the blackboard and presentation using Power Point , It was less effective and interactive because there were no moving images . Especially in subjects Physics , which essentially requires understanding not only fixated on the media that had used images ( non multimedia ) but it was need a subject that required a simulation tool or magnet which can represented the magnetic flux that could not be seen by the human eye significantly . The learning material had presented so tend to be boring and less effective for students to understand the subject matter of the first physics course . By implementing learning media based to the students are expected to media learning can be directly accessed easily by students anywhere in the form of instructional media applications on a PC or notebook, and can improve the students' understanding of the course Physics I magnetism. Nowadays more and more computer programmers to develop software provider of instructional media application making it. Among them is software Adobe Flash. With software that educators can use to its full potential in the context of preparing lessons that will be taught to students. Based on the description above , the formulation of the problem that can be taken are: how is the quality of instructional media based on e-learning applied to the course Physics based media expert, how the effectiveness of media that were applied to the Physics course according to matter experts , and how the response of students to intsructional media based that were applied to that course . A.
information to an audience. In other words, multimedia means “an individual or a small group using a computer to interact with information that is represented in several media, by repeatedly selecting what to see and hear next”.[ 10] The power of multimedia lies in the fact that it is multi-sensory, stimulating the many senses of the audience. It is also interactive, enabling the end users of the application to control the content and flow of information. This has introduced important changes in the educational system and impact the way we communicate information to the learners II. METHODE Research to be carried out are research based instructional media development. The research method used is a kind of method of research and development (research and development (R & D)). The research and development, is a research method used to develop or validate the products are used in education and learning [4]. Media research development is implemented in State Vocational School in Surabaya. The population of this research is State Vocational School in Surabaya The sample was State Vocational School 5 surabaya. Furthermore, there are four main characteristics of research and development, namely: (1) studying the results of studies related to the product to be developed; (2) developing products findings; (3) testing area that it would be used later; (4) and revising to correct deficiencies found in the field trial stage [5]. By virtue of the characteristics research and development, there are ten steps according to Borg and Gall's research (1983) described as follows: (1) research and data collection; (2) planning; (3) development of a draft product; (4) the initial field trials; (5) revise the test results; (6) the trial court; (7) improvement of product field trial results; (8) the implementation of field trials; (9) improvement of the final product; (10) dissemination and implementation. Having described the research and development steps according to Borg & Gall. in this study summarized the steps into a five-step procedure of research and development of e-learning media as arranged in Figure 1. below.
Instructional Media
Different types of educational experiences exist - from hands-on apprenticeships to role-playing, from demonstrations to reading printed text. Some educators believe that different experiences are more or less effective for achieving different types of instructional outcomes. For example, text with pictures is not as effective as live demonstrations for teaching motor skills. As a rule, educational experiences that involve the learner physically and that give concrete examples are retained longer than abstract experiences such as listening to a lecture. Instructional media help add elements of reality - for instance, including pictures or highly involved computer simulations in a lecture [8]. Multimedia is defined as the combination of various digital media types such as text, images, sound and video, into an integrated multi-sensory interactive application or presentation to convey a message or
82
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 rating scale is a numeric rating scale were then interpreted in a qualitative sense. Instrument rating scale with the scale must be able to interpret any given number of alternative answers to each item on the instrument In the assessment sheet media expert validation to measure the feasibility of the media, researchers used a rating scale with categories of validation as shown in Table 1. Meanwhile, the feasibility of the media to interpret scores can be seen in Table 2.
Needs Analysis • The study of literature • The field study • User analysis • e-Learning analysis
Developing Initial Product • designing Flowchart • Making e-learning • Uploading e-learning on the Department of Electrical Engineering website, State University of Surabaya
TABLE 1. CRITERIA VALIDATION LEARNING MEDIA ASSESSMENT OF E-LEARNING (EXPERT MEDIA) Assessment criteria Weight Value 1 invalid 2 less valid Valid 3 4 very Valid
Expert Validation and Revision
Meanwhile validation of expert assessment sheet material to measure the effectiveness of the media, researchers use category rating scale with validation as shown in Table 3. While to interpret scores of media effectiveness can be seen in Table 4.
• Validation of the feasibility and effectiveness of elearning media by experts. • Revisions to the media
Trial Phase • Testing media on student.
Last Stage Product Repair • Repair media • make conclusions • e-Learning implementation
TABLE 3. CRITERIA VALIDATION LEARNING MEDIA ASSESSMENT OF E-LEARNING (EXPERT MEDIA) Assessment criteria Weight Value 1 invalid 2 less valid Valid 3 4 very Valid TABLE 4. INTERPRETATION EFFECTIVENESS SCORE Presentage
Criteria
0% - 20%
Very Weak / Very Not Effective
21% - 40% 41% - 60% 61% - 80% an 81% - 100%
Weak / Not Effective Enough / Effective Enough Strong/ Effective Very Strong/ Very Effective
For data collection techniques , researchers used instrument validation sheet and questionnaire (source Riduwan, 2013: 22) responses of students . In the development of this research , there are two kinds of validation sheet . Furthermore, the assessment of the level of The validation sheet to test the feasibility and effectiveness of e-learning media . For the assessment student response to the e-learning media, of the feasibility or quality media , researchers used researchers use category rating scale with an pieces of validation in which there are aspects of the quality of e-learning media . In this case , the attitude scale as shown in Table 5. validator or reviewers for quality media is a media Meanwhile to interpret scores student expert . As for assessing the effectiveness of the responses to the media can be seen in Table media , researchers used a validation sheet in which there are aspects of the effectiveness of e-learning 6. media . In this case , the validator or an expert TABLE 5. reviewers for the effectiveness of media material , CRITERIA ASSESSMENT QUESTIONNAIRE RESPONSE TO due to the achievement of a learning effectively , then THE MEDIA STUDENT LEARNING E-LEARNING the media should be in accordance with the instructional goals of learning . While the use of this Assessment criteria Weight Value questionnaire aims to find out how much the student 1 Strongly Disagree response to the learning media is applied to students . 2 Disagree While the techniques of data analysis, researchers Agree 3 used rating scale. According Sugiyono (2011: 97)
83
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Strongly agree
4
(source Sugiyono, 2011: 120)
TABLE 6. INTERPRETATION STUDENT RESPONSE Presentage
Criteria
0% - 25% 26% - 50% 51% - 75% 76% - 100%
Not Good
Figure 3. Effectiveness of Instructional Media
Not very good Good
As for the results of the percentage of student responses to the media e-learning, an average large student response assessment of some aspects of media, such as media format, media content, media language used, the ease of operation of the media, and student attitudes towards the use of instructional media e-learning. The average percentage of each aspect got response rate of 90.6%. This means that elearning media are in very good criteria for student response. Furthermore, the description of the results of student responses to the e-learning media can also be shown in the graph in Figure 4
Very good
(source Riduwan, 2013: 22)
The quality e-learning media consists of the aspects of ease of operation, integration aspects, aspects of balance, and aspects of media form. Form validation in general to the variable quality of e-learning media, it can be seen the average percentage is 89.5% of media quality. It was mean that e-learning media had a very feasible quality according to expert judgment. Furthermore, the description of the quality of media can also be shown in the graph in Figure 2
Figure 2. Instructional Media Quality Effectiveness of e-learning media consists of the format and content of the media that was in compliance with the purpose of learning materials on physics I. From the results of the validation assessment in general to the variable effectiveness of e-learning media, it can be seen the average percentage of media effectiveness was 86%. This shows that e-learning media had very effective interpretation rating scale according to expert assessment . Furthermore, the description of the effectiveness of e-learning media can also be shown in the graph in Figure 3.
Figure 4. Student Responses Against Instructional Media III. CONCLUSION Based on the research problem formulation, there are three conclusions, namely: (1) based on the study conducted by media specialists, instructional media developed by researchers gain medium quality overall percentage of 89.5%, which means that the media has a very good quality and worth to used as a medium of learning Physics on Surabaya State Vocational School ; (2) the results of the validation are performed by experts materials, instructional media developed by researchers obtained a percentage of 86% effectiveness of the media, which means that e-learning media very effectively used in teaching Physics ; (3) Student response to the elearning medium showed a very good response. This
84
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [19] Sugiyono, Metode Penelitian Pendidikan Pendekatan Kuantitatif, Kualitatif, dan R&D. Bandung: Alfabeta. . 2010. [20]Borg, W. R. & Gall, M. D. 1983. Education research: an instrucduction (4th ed). New York: Longman Inc [21]Halliday Resnick, ―Fudamental of Physics‖ 8 th edition, US, Wiley, 2007 [22]Tipler. Fisika untuk Sains dan Teknik. Jakarta: Erlangga2001. [23]The Florida State University , Instruction at FSU, ― A guide to teaching and learning practice‖, 7 thEdition Handbook 2011 [24]US Department of Education, , ―Improving Adolescent Literacy: Effective Classrom and Intervention Practice‖, IES Practice Guide August 2008
can be shown by the results obtained from the percentage of student responses at 90.6%.
REFERENCES [16]Amri, Sofan.. Pengembangan dan Model Pembelajaran dalam Kurikulum 2013. Jakarta: Prestasi Pustaka. 2013 [17] Smaldino, Sharon E. &James D. Russel.. Instructional Teknologi and Media for Learning. Yogyakarta: Prenada Media Group, 2011 [18] Arysad, Azhar. Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta: Rajawali Press,2013.
85
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
86
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Differences in Practice Student Performance Results Using Cooperative Learning Model Type GI with STAD PLC Programming on The Subject in at Vocational Schools Parti Rahayu1, Euis Ismayati2 1
State Vocational Technical High School 1 Cerme Gresik
[email protected], 2 Department of Electrical Engineering, State University of Surabaya
[email protected]
Abstract - The goals of this research are: (1) The result of practice performance of students using cooperative learning model type STAD on PLC programming subject; (2) The result of practice performance of students using cooperative learning model type GI on PLC programming; (3) To determine the differences in result of practice performance of students using cooperative learning model type GI with STAD on PLC programming subject; (4) The difference in the student‘s activity that learned using cooperative learning model type GI with STAD on programming subject. The type of this research is an experiment of Quasi Experimental using Nonequivalent Control Group Design. This research conducted in SMKN I Cerme Gresik (formal Vocational Technical High School in Indonesia), which grade XI- TITl-1 is treated by cooperative learning model type STAD and class XI TITL-2 cooperative learning model type GI. After finding out both learning model STAD with GI, researcher analyze to determine the difference between practice performance results between STAD with GI. Based on the data analysis results, it can be stated result of practice performance of students which treated with learning GI model sig 0,019 < 0,05 means there are significant difference between two classes and the average practice performance of GI is better than STAD. Index Terms - GI with STAD , Practice Performance , and PLC Programming
I. INTRODUCTION To understand the basic competency of PLC Programming Language, it‘s needed proper techniques / methods and learning models before students learn the basic competency of Operate PLC which is an Advanced Basic Competency. In order to make Programming Language learning easier to understand, so it requires right medias, i.e. PLC CPU, Software, and connecting software with PLC CPU (HC / PC). Nowadays, in order to address limited presence of PLC CPU in SMKN 1 Cerme-Gresik, so it overcomes by simulation software. In addition, operation practice of PLC device simulators are also
87
limited compared to number of students in a class, so some study group is formed in study process. Based on observation of practice learning process with simulator, many students whose lab performance result is less than KKM according to the data (Researcher‘s note: 2010) and when programming on laptop is still often incorrectly and waiting for their teacher to conduct one by one, so it spends more time. Shlomon Sharan (1999; 225) states that the cooperative learning model is very suitable to support interaction among students and between students with teachers. Conditions such as this is highly expected in order to make interaction goes well for smooth learning and in accordance with state of study groups on Basic Competency of PLC Programming Language with limitations of practical devices (PLC Software Simulator), since this material is presented after students finished PI (Industry Practices) and students have known various engineering problems in PI; therefore it‘s expected students can apply those problems to PLC Program.. The usage PLC Software in DU/DI in its existence was always renewed easier for user to apply them. Therefore, teacher should motivate students to obtain material or topics that can be browsed from internet access or do investigation in a library. Until now, topics/tasks of PLC Programming are come from teachers (this according to STAD Cooperative Learning Model) but for GI model it matches with the syntax stages of topics/tasks that come from teachers/students. Based on novelty of Badarudin research result (2012:2), the analysis result conclude that: (1) Cooperative Learning Model GI type produce better achievement in learning mathematics than type STAD type on statistics subject, (2) There is an interaction between learning model and learning creativity towards achievement in learning mathematics, (3) There is an interaction between learning model and category of confident attitude toward achievement in learning mathematics, (4)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 There is an interaction between category of creativity and category of confident attitude toward achievement in learning mathematics, (5) There is an interaction between learning model, category of creativity and confident attitude of students toward achievement in learning mathematics. Based on above explanation, author is encouraged to conduct research under title ―Differences In Practice Student Performance Result Using Cooperative Learning Model GI Type With STAD On PLC Subject in SMKN 1 Cerme Gresik". The issues of this study are: (1) How result of PLC programming practice performance on students were are taught by cooperative learning model GI type (Group Investigation) ?, (2) How result of PLC programming practice performance on students were are taught by cooperative learning model STAD type ?, (3) Is there any difference in result of PLC programming practice performance on students were are taught by GI with STAD?, and (4) Is there any difference in activity of students were are taught using cooperative learning model STAD type with GI type On PLC Programming Subject?. The goal of this research is to know and analyze: (1) The result of PLC programming practice performance on students were are taught by cooperative learning model GI type, (2) The result of PLC programming practice performance on students were are taught by cooperative learning model STAD type, (3) The differences in result of practice performance on students that were taught by GI type with STAD, (4) The difference in the student‘s activity that were taught using cooperative learning model STAD type with GI on PLC programming subject. Barnawi (2012:13) states that ―performance is success level of a person or group in order to carry out tasks according with responsibility and authority based on performance standards that have been determined for a certain period within the framework of achieving organizational goals. According to Meier (1965) in As‘ad (1987:61) states that considered as factors/indicators of work performance generally are quality, quantity, time spent, position held, attendance, and safety in performing job duties. This research use six indicators, such as (1) Preparation of work, (2) Process/quantity of work, (3) Result/quality of work, (4) Work Attitude (Usage simulator supporting media tools and work safety), (5) Time Spent, and (6) Presence. Piaget and Kohlberg (Shlomo, 2009:225) conclude that ―The advantage of cooperative learning on competitive learning and individualistic increase when the task is more conceptual and require better problem solving which require reasoning and critical thinking, needs more creative answer, asking for long-term memory and requires application that more than what have been learned.‖ Cooperative Learning Model is very important in supporting interaction among students and between students and teacher. There are 4 kind of Cooperative
learning model (Arend , 2001:323-327), namely: 1) STAD, 2) JIGSAW, 3) GI and 4) Structural Approach. Based on table 1 (Arend , 2001: 327) displayed comparison two cooperative learning models between GI with STAD. Table 1. Comparison Two Cooperative Learning Approach
Source; Arend (2001;327)
As for the implementation or syntax GI and STAD learning according to Slavin (1995) are shown in Table 2. Table 2. GI and STAD Syntax
GI Syntax
STAD Syntax
Phase 1: Topic Selection Phase 2: Plan cooperation Phase 3: Implementation Phase 4: Analyze and synthesis Phase 5: Presentation of final result Phase 6: Evaluation
Phase 1: Class presentation Phase 2: Team work Phase 3: Quiz Phase 4: Score of individual improvement Phase 5: Team Award Phase 6: -
According to Sanjaya (2008:249), advantages and disadvantages of cooperative learning GI type are: (1) Advantages: student is not too dependent on teacher but can add the trust of think by themselves; can develop ability to express an idea; can help children to respond others; can empower student to take more responsible in studying; can increase academic achievement and social capabilities; cam develop student‘s ability to test their own ideas and understand by themselves; receive feedback can increase student‘s ability to use information and abstract learning ability to be real; can increase motivation and provide a stimulus to think. (2) Disadvantages: since the learning is flexible, then if the flexibility is not optimal so the purpose of what is learned won‘t be achieved; group assessment can blind assessment individually if teacher is not keen in implementation; develop group awareness takes a long time.
88
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Based on research background, a relevant research and literature review, a hypothesis can be formulated: there is a difference in result of student‘s practice performance that use cooperative learning model between GI type and STAD.
Before research be done, learning media that is used is test by expert validation test first by 3 validator, they are content expert, learning design expert, and learning media expert. Summary of validation result of learning media is shown in Table 3 and the result is worth using.
II. METHOD Table 3. Summary of Validation Result of Learning Media
Metode penelitian yang dilgunakan adalah Instrument No Rate % Information Quasiexperimental (Sugiyono, 2011),dengan Type rancangan penelitian Nonequivalent controlgroup RPP 1 86 % Worthy design seperti ditunjukkan Tabel 3.Penelitian ini Modul 2 89 % Worthy LKS 3 74 % Worthy membedakan kinerja praktik pemrograman PLC siswa yang dibelajarkan menggunakan model Summary of validation result of practice pembelajaran kooperatif tipe GI dengan tipe STAD. performance instrument is shown in Table 3 and the This research was conducted in SMKN 1 Cermeresult is good for to be used. Gresik and held on second semester of academic year 2012. The subject of this research are students of Table 4. Summary Of Validation Result Of Practice Performance class XI TITL 2 (experiment class) were subjected by Instrument cooperative learning model GI type and students of No Jenis Intrumen Hasil rating % Keterangan class XI TITL 1 (control class) were subjected to cooperative learning model STAD type in SMKN practice 11 performance test sheet 92% Good Cerme Gresik which member of each class is 30 Observation 2 assessment sheet of90,5 % Good students. Research design according to Sugiyono practice performance (2011) is shown in figure 1. Activity 3
E K
O’1 O’2
X --
O1 O2
of student‘s practice 90 % performance sheet
Good
After instrument of practice performance is stated valid then it‘s tested to know its validity and reliability of practice performance to be post-test. Analysis of test result using SPSS software version 18, show 25 statements of practice performance score are valid with whole correlation values (25) statement above correlation is r-table > 0.36. Summary of analysis result of test 1 performance score with SPSS Program Version 18 is shown in Table 5.
Figure 1. Experimental Quasi Method with form Nonequivalent Control Group Design
Description: X = Treatment GI type - = Treatment STAD type O'1 = Preliminary observation of experimental group Tabel 5. Ringkasan Hasil Analisis Ujicoba 1 Skor Kinerja dan O1 = Final observation of experimental group Angket Motivasi dengan Program SPSS Versi. 18 O'2 = Preliminary observation of control group Hasil Validitas dan O2 = Final Observation of the control group Instrumen Keterangan reliabilitas E = experiment group Assement K = control group Observation 25 statements After learning devices, test sheet instrument, Score Of 25 Statement r tabel 0,361 are all used test observation sheet and sheet of activity Practice observation of performance practice statement items Performance In this research, before learning with validated, the Items are tested to 32 students in class appropriate method that to be investigated, author see XI TITL 3 which not subject to GI or STAD learning, ability level and student‘s early understanding on then the result of practice performance is processed lesson which will be taught at test time, which take using Ms. Excel and SPSS version18. Furthermore, final data of electric control performance score when the valid items are used for experiment. student of class X at last semester, this data is taken The research instrument that used is test sheet of instrument validity of PLC Programming practice because when odd semester student of class XI leave performance, observation sheet of PLC Programming for Industrial Practice (PI). practice performance, and observation sheet that Result of processing initial ability data using T-Test measure student‘s activity, while the data collection by SPSS Software version 18 is an output table that method using a test method called pre-test and post- shown in Table 6 test. Pre-test is to determine prior knowledge and Tabel 6. Process Output by SPSS Version 18 fpr Initial Ability Std. post-test is to determine result of practice Std. Class N Mean Error Deviation performance on students who had been given Mean X 30 79,9000 4,65610 ,85008 learning treatment.. TITL1 X TITL2
III. RESULT AND EXPLANATION
89
31
78,9677
5,03643
,90457
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 . Independent Samples Test Levene's Test
F s k o r
Equal variances assumed
,243
t-test for Equality of Means Mea n Diffe rence
Std. Error Differe nce
95% Confidence Interval of the Difference
Sig.
t
,624
,750
59
,456
,93226
1,24295
-1,55487
3,41939
,751
58,88
,456
,93226
1,24133
-1,55173
3,41625
Equal variances not assumed
df
Sig . (2tail ed)
Lower
Upper
At Table 6, Independent sample test, it‘s significant in levene‘s test column 0.624 which means variance assumption of both group is equal. In t column, it visible t-test gives 0.750 and 0.751 with significant value is more than 0.05 means Ho accepted, average ability both classes are same significantly. We can conclude that initial ability of experiment class (GI/TITL 2) and control class (STAD/TITL1) are same, so that the hypothesis test is ability data before research are same averagely. Frequency distribution PLC Programming practice performance of GI class‘s (Experiment class) post test is shown in Table 7.
Figure 3. Histogram of practice performance of GI class using SPSS SPSS
Based Histogram Figure 3 for the highest frequency is 8 reached at intervals / performance scores range from 94.9 to 99.85 practices, but diinterval 59.9 to 64.85 and 74.9 to 79.85 there is no value that can not be shown gambat trunk, from 4.3 image can also be seen wide distribution of variables, which include the type of normal disrtibusi appropriate guidance properties of the normal distribution statistical methods (in Sudjana, 2005: 137). Frequency distribution PLC Programming practice performance of STAD class‘s (Experiment class) post test is shown in Table 9..
Tabel 7 Frequency distribution of GI Class‘s Practice Performance List No Performance Frequency(f i) Percentage Score Range (%) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Total
59,9-64,85 64,9-69,85 69,9-74,85 74,9-79,85 79,9-84,85 84,9-89,85 89,9-94,85 94,9-99,85 99,9-104,8,5
0 2 2 5 0 5 7 8 2 ∑N = 31
0,00 % 6,45 % 6,45 % 16,13 % 0,00 % 16,13 % 22,56 % 25,81 % 6,45 % 100 %
Tabel 9 Frequency distribution of STAD Class‘s Practice Performance List
At table 7, it shows score distribution list of GI Class performance practice of total of student 31 with grade span 9. The highest frequency is in score range 94.9 - 99.85, 8th class range with percentage reached at 25.81 %, and there is no student get score in 2 class range, 59.9 – 64.85 and 74.9 – 79.85, so percentage that achieved is 0.0%. Table and Figure of Frequency Distribution Histogram of PLC Programming practice performance of GI class which is an output from SPSS V.18 is shown at Table 7 and Figure 3.
Frequencies Statistics KelasGI Valid Missing
Mean Std. Error of Mean Median Mode Std. Deviation Variance Range Minimum Maximum Sum
Performance Score Range
Frequency(f i)
Percentage (%)
1 2
34,9-39,85 39,9-44,85
1 3
3,33% 10,00%
3 4 5 6 7
44,9-49,85 49,9-54,85 54,9-59,85 59,9-64,85 64,9-69,85
2 0 3 1 4
6,67% 0,00% 10,00% 3,33% 13,33%
8 9 10 11 12 Total
69,9-74,85 74,9-79,85 79,9-84,85 84,9-89,85
3 5 3 2 3 30
10,00% 16,67% 10,00% 6,67% 10,00% 100,00%
89,9-94,85
In Table 9 shows the score distribution list STAD class performance practices of the total number of students by 30 the number of grade 12 and a frequency range of the highest scores are in the range of 74.9 to 79.85, which is 5 percentage achieved by 16.67%, to the range 49.9 to 54.85 no students who scored stretched, so the percentage obtained was 0,00%. persentase yang didapat adalah 0,00 %. Table and Figure of Frequency Distribution Histogram of PLC Programming practice performance of STAD class which is an output from SPSS V.18 is shown at Table 10 and Figure 4.
Table 8. Frequencies of Practice Performance GI with Program SPSS-Frequencies
N
No
31 0 88,3813 1,80679 91,8300 92,00 10,05979 101,199 31,33 68,67 100,00 2739,82
In table 8, shows result of practice performance of treated class GI Learning with 31 students as member of the class. The highest score in that class 100, an ideal score, the lowest score is 68.67, and the average score is 88.38.
90
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Table 10. Frequencies of Practice Performance STAD with Program SPSS-Frequencies Frequencies Statistics KelasSTAD N
Valid
30
Missing
0 69,4950 2,92444 72,7500 44,00 16,01782 256,570 54,50 39,50 94,00 2084,85
Mean Std. Error of Mean Median Mode Std. Deviation Variance Range Minimum Maximum Sum
From table 11, result of K-S Normality Test from 2 sample shows 2 data groups meet the normality assumption which shown on significant value of STAD class, 0.703 and GI class, 0.388 which greater than 0.05. Hence, Ho is accepted, means both class are normal distribution. For result for Homogeneity test is shown in Table 12.
Table 10 shows the results of performance class practices that are treated STAD with the number of students by 30, the highest score obtained in one class is utuk 94.00 and the lowest was 39.50, the average score obtained was 69.
Table 12. Homogeneity Test Output of Practice Performance Data Using SPSS Program Oneway Descriptives Skor 95% Confidence Interval for Mean N
Figure 4. Histogram of practice performance of STAD class using SPSS
Based on Figure 4. Histogram for the highest frequency was achieved at intervals 5 / practice performance scores range from 74.9 to 79.85, but diinterval 49.9 to 54.85 there is no value that can not be shown pictures trunk, from Figure 4.4 also can be seen wide distribution of variables, which include guidance within their normal distribution type properties of the normal distribution statistical methods (in Sudjana, 2005: 137). For prerequisite test consists of Normality Test and Test-Homogeneity of Practice Performance Score of data using SPSS Versi.18 Output of processed products indicated in Table 11.
Minimu
Maximu
Deviation
m
m
Lower Bound
Upper Bound
Min
Max
16,01199
2,92338
63,502
75,460
39,50
94,00
2
31
88,51
9,83493
1,76641
84,902
92,117
68,67
100,00
Total
61
79,15
16,25694
2,08149
74,988
83,315
39,50
100,00
Levene Statistic
df1
df2
Sig.
6,351
1
59
,014
Skor
Between Groups Within Groups Total
Sum of Squares
df
Mean Square
F
Sig.
5520,385 10336,906 15857,290
1 59 60
5520,385 175,202
31,509
,000
Based on Table 12, standard deviation of both classes is quite different, 16.01199 vs 9.83493. To test assumption both sample, we can see Test of Homogeneity of Variances Table which seen the significant value is 0.014 means below 0.05, so Ho is rejected and variance both samples are significantly different or both are heterogenous. Thus as data analysis prerequisite for hypothesis test use T-Test.
NPar Tests Std.
Std. Error
69,48
ANOVA
Descriptive Statistics
Mean
Std. Deviation
30
Test of Homogeneity of Variances Skor
Table 11. Output Data Normality Test Results Performance Practice SPSS
N
Mean
1
Uji Hipotesis
KelasGI
31
88,3813
10,05979
68,67
100,00
KelasSTAD
30
69,4817
16,01199
39,50
94,00
The analysis is using T-Test or Mean Different Test with formula as below Ho : μA1 = μA2., There is no difference significantly of PLC Programming practice performance result between GI class and STAD class. Ha : μA1 ≠ μA2, There is a difference significantly of PLC Programming practice performance result between GI class and STAD class. This hypothesis test is done using SPSS Program V.18 and the output is shown in Table 13.
91
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Table.13 Output of Practice Performance T-Test of GI Class and STAD Class using SPSS
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
From table 20, seen the t-test with significant level = 0.05, so coefficient balue 0.019 is gained. Thus t-test output against 1st hypothesis is reject Ho and accept Ha. It means GI class give better result than STAD class. Based on observation, we can see that students that were taught by cooperative learning model GItype have rate 80%, while STAD type have rate 55%. So, it can concluded that the activity of practice performance here that were taught with cooperative learning model GI type is better than STAD type.
[8] [9] [10]
[11]
[12] [13]
CLOSING Conclusion Based on analysis and explanation, it can be concluded that: Student that were taught using learning model GI type, their PLC Programming practice performance is better than student that were taught learning model STAD type.
[14] [15] [16]
SUGGESTION Based on first conclusion, so highly recommended for teachers for learning material presentation which in form practice performance of PLC Programming is use learning model GI type which more complex for complete programming task with program that better understood by student, result of the investigation. Based on final conclusion that treatment to cooperative learning model GI type is give more influence than STAD to result and activity of PLC programming practice performance, so that is advisable to learning material of PLC Programming Practice using GI model. In this research, it‘s produced test instrument of PLC Programming practice performance and learning media which the manual follow or implement cooperative learning model GI type or STAD. Therefore, if other researchers interested to use it, they should follow steps that given in learning management and its subject matter can be selected according to characteristic of cooperative learning model GI type or STAD.
[17]
[18] [19] [20]
[21]
[22]
[23] [24]
REFERENCES [1]
[25]
Aljufri, S. 1987. Perspektif Pendidikan Kejuruan. Makalah Seminar Pendidikan Menengah Kejuruan PPS IKIP Yogyakarta.
92
AM, Sardiman. 2010. Interaksi & Motivasi Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta: Raja Grafindo Arends, R.I. (1997). Classroom Instruction and Management. New York: Mc-Hill __________ (2008). Learning to Teach. Belajar untuk Mengajar. Edisi ketuju. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar. As'ad, M.1987. Psikologi Industri. Yogyakarta: Liberty Badarudin. 2012. Efektivitas Model Pembelajaran Kooperatif Tipe Group Investigation (GI) dan Student Teams Achievement Divisions (STAD) Ditinjau dari Kreativitas dan Sikap Percaya Diri Peserta Didik Kelas XI SMA Negeri Kabupaten Lampung Utara Tahun Pelajaran 2011/2012, Abstrak Tesis: 851008007. (Online), (http://pasca.uns.ac.id/?p=2153) diakses 10 Mei 2012. Barnawi dan Arifin, Mohammad. 2012. Kinerja Guru Profesional. Jogjakarta: AR-RUZZ Media Boltom, W. 2004. Programmable Logic Controller. Jakarta: Erlangga. Depdiknas. 2002. Kamus besar Bahasa Indonesia Edisi Ketiga. Jakarta: Balai Pustaka _________. 2008. Spektrum Keahlian dan Standart Kompetensi dan Kompetensi Dasar (SK – KD) Program Poduktif Sekolah Menengah Kejuruan. Finch, Curtis R., and Crunkilton, John R. 1979. Curriculum Development in Vocational and Technical Education, Boston: Allyn and Bacon, Inc. Hamzah B. Uno, 2011. Teori Motivasi & Pengukurannya.Cet-8 Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. Hamzah B. Uno dan Nina Lamatenggo. 2012. Teori Kinerja dan Pengukurannya. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara. Irianto, A. 2010. Statistik Konsep Dasar, Aplikasi, dan Pengembangannya. Jakarta: Prenada Media Group Klein, B.S. 1982. Motivation Biosocial Approaches. New York: McGraw-hill Book Company Krisdiana, I. 2010. Efektivitas Model Pembelajaran Kooperatif Tipe STAD (Student Teams Achievement Divisions) Terhadap Prestasi Belajar Matematika Ditinjau dari Aktivitas Belajar Siswa Pada pokok Bahasan Persamaan dan Fungsi Kuadrat Kelas X SMA di Kota Madiun. Tesis: Pendidikan Matematika Program Pasca Sarjana Universitas Sebelas Maret Surakarta. 2010. (http://pasca.uns.ac.id/.p=321) Abstrak Tesis: 850908110. (Online), diakses 02 Januari 2012. Littrell, JJ. 1984. From School to Work, A Cooperative Education Book. South Holland, Illinois: The GoodheartWillcox company,Inc. McClelland, D.C. 1961. The Achieving Society. NewJersey: Van Nostrand Reinhoild Mardapi, D. 2008. Teknik Penyusunan Instrumen Tes dan Nontes. Jogyakarta: Mitra Cendekia. Irianti, dkk. 2007. Interaksi Belajar Mengajar Dalam Pembelajaran Fisiska Dengan Penerapan Model Pembelajaran Kooperatif Tipe Investigasi Kelompok Pada Kelas X1 SMA Negeri 1 Tambang Kampar. Geliga Sains 1 (1) 9-14: hlm 6, (Online), dalam ISSN 1978-502X (htpp//interaksi pbm gi.edu.), diakses 01 Maret 2012 Nur, M. 2011. Model Pembelajaran Kooperatif. Edisi kedua. Timm Pembelajaran Pengembang LPMP Jawa Timur dan PSMS Unesa. Surabaya: PSMS Unesa ______. 2008..Pemotivasian Siswa Untuk Belajar , Tim Pengembang LPMP Jawa Timur dan PSMS Siswa Unesa. Surabaya: PSMS Unesa Ormrod, J.E. 2003. Educational Psychology, Developing Learners.(4d ed). Merrill: Pearson Education, Inc. Riduwan. 2010. Belajar Mudah Penelitian untuk GuruKaryawan dan Peneliti Pemula. Alfabeta: Bandung Sanjaya, Wina. 2008. Strategi Pembelajaran Berorientasi Standart Proses Pendidikan. Jakarta: Kencana Prenada Media Group
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [26] Sharan, S. 1999. Handbook of Cooperative Learning. Inovasi Pengajaran dan pembelajaran untuk memacu keberhasilan siswa di kelas. Alih bahasa Sigit Prawoto. 2009. Yogyakarta: Imperium [27] Slavin, R.E. 2009. Educational Psychyology Theory And Practice. New Jersey: Jeffrey W Johnston [28] _____, (1995). Cooperative Learning Theory, Research And Practice. Massachusetts: Allyn and Bacon. [29] Sugiyono. 2011. Statistik Untuk Penelitian. Bandung: Alfabeta [30] Sutjipto (Arends). 2008: Learning To Teach – Belajar Untuk Mengajar. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Belajar [31] Suhendar. 2005. Programable Logic Control – PLC Dalam Dasar-dasar Sistem Kendali Motor Listrik induksi.Yogyakarta: Graha Ilmu [32] Sudjana, 2005. Metoda Statika. Bandung: Tarsito. [33] Tim. 2010. Buku Penulisan Karya Ilmiah Malang: Kementerian Nasional Universitas Tim. 2010. Buku Penulisan Karya Ilmiah Malang: Kementerian Nasional Universitas Negeri Malang. [34] Tim. 2012. Buku Pedoman Program Pascasarjana Universitas Negeri Surabaya. Surabaya: Departemen Pendidikan Nasional Unesa [35] Widoyoko, P.E. 2012. Teknik Penyusunan Instrumen Penelitian. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar. [36] Wood, M.D & Chen, C.K. 2010. Evaluation Techniques For Cooperation Learning.Vol 14 No 1, pp. 4.
93
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
94
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Designing of Tool for Teaching Based on Computer Interactive Learning And Computer Assisted Learning to Improve the Skill of Learner M. Syariffuddien Zuhrie 1 1
Jurusan Teknik Elektro Universitas Negeri Surabaya - Kota Surabaya. e-mail:
[email protected]
Abstract - In the last two decades, the use of mobile robots (robot moves) continues to grow, because there are several benefits for industry and society. In Indonesia, the object of this research is a topic that continues to grow. Actually, the development of robotics in the ground water has been very encouraging. The focus of this research is the design of the device in the course of learning robotics mechatronic through intelligent robot fire extinguisher that is booming and will be implemented in the Indonesia Intelligent Robot Contest and the industrial world in order to advance the world of robotics Indonesia. In the first year focused on teaching module manufacturing, planning mechanical design, control system through microprocessor technology and maneuverability of the robot. The principal issue is how the curriculum and the learning modules are implemented in accordance with the approach of industrial needs (workforce). To answer these problems in this research will be compiled in the form of learning devices in the course of mechatronic robotics-based on Computer Interactive Learning and Computer Assisted Learning" to improve the skills of learners. Specific objectives to be achieved, namely the drafting of this research Learning Tool Subjects Mechatronics Robotics in Computer Interactive Learning and Computer Assisted Learning. Generally, this research resulted in two main things, the first is a guide to determine the content of teaching materials and learning strategies, the latter in the form of teaching materials and equipment that had been adapted to the needs as a tool for teaching and learning tool at the State University of Surabaya to improve the skills of learners Computer interactive computer learning and computer assisted learning strategies is a teaching strategy that emphasizes the use or the use of computers and learning aids (assisted learning) in teaching and learning process. This research conducted by applying the research design development with the aim to produce a product in the form of modules and learning devices Robotics. These modules developed are the results of research and monitoring lead researcher with the team for 3 years continue to develop research-based robotics contest. Data dissemination module results in students of Department of Mechanical Engineering the State University of Surabaya obtained using questionnaire responses sheet instruments Assessment validator of the module is referring to the validation sheet indicators. From the data of the Indonesia Robot Contest during the period 2009 - 2014 can be seen that the modules that have been developed have reached the fourth stage of the research methods of development that disseminate methods. Socialization questionnaires showed that levels of
student majoring in mechanical engineering competencies image currently only limited to conventional machines. The average assessment is 3.34 validator included in either category. Modules developed can give hope to the future are able to produce computer-based learning tools robotics assisted interactive learning and learning to improve the skills of learners that can be applied to the field. Results of student responses also showed a positive response to the module robotics and computer-based interactive learning assisted learning developed. The average assessment is 3.34 validator included in either category. Keywords: Robotics Learning Tool, Computer Interactive Learning, Computer Assisted Learning, Course of Mechatronics, The Indonesia Robot Contest
I. INTRODUCTION In Indonesia, the object of this research is a topic that continues to grow. Actually, the development of robotics in the ground water has been very encouraging. The barometer is the success of the Indonesian Robot Contest (KRI) and the Indonesian Intelligent Robot Contest (KRCI). In the contest no less than 40 major universities in Indonesia took part. But the development of such robots is limited to the contest and has not been developed to address the issues more real, especially in the industrial world. The focus of this research is the design of the device in the course of learning robotics mechatronic through intelligent robot fire extinguisher that is booming and will be implemented in the Intelligent Robot Contest Indonesia and the industrial world in order to advance the world of robotics Indonesia. Robots of this type developed by developed countries such as America, Japan, the UK the price is very expensive. Currently the robot actually uses high tech, because the control is fully controlled by a microprocessor as a substitute for human and we strive to develop the Low Cost Technology. The focus of research in the first year is a teaching module manufacturing, planning mechanical design, control system through microprocessor technology and maneuverability of the robot. The first year of the study is expected to produce an intelligent robot that is reliable both in terms of technology and in terms of economy.
95
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The principal issue is how the curriculum and the learning modules are implemented in accordance with the approach of industrial needs (workforce) [4]. In order to support competency-based curriculum needs of the industry, has also been compiled modules both manual and interactive, oriented to the achievement of competence as well as accommodate the working life skills. With regard to the problems that will arise is what kind of learning modules appropriate to the characteristics of the attainment of the goal of learning the world of work as well as the achievement of competence in the field of life skills by using the main teaching materials in the form of modules and learning media. To answer these problems in this study will be compiled in the form of learning devices in the course of mechatronic robotics-based on computer interactive learning and computer assisted Learning to the needs of industry. Expected results of this study will be able to bridge the needs of the workforce, particularly of graduates majoring in Mechanical Engineering the State University of Surabaya which will work as a vocational teacher or plunge into the world of industry.
The purpose of this stage is to determine and define the conditions of learning. This phase has five basic steps include: front-end analysis, analysis of student, concept analysis, task analysis, and formulation of learning objectives. Design Stage The design of prototype learning device is produced. Result of this phase is usually a preliminary design of the learning device depending on requirements. Device components used are very diverse, such as: student book, modules, teacher guide, student activity sheets, lesson plans, tests of student learning outcomes, and learning media. Develop Stage This stage aims to produce learning tools that have been revised based on the input of experts. The next step is a trial with an appropriate number of students in a class of real (not unlimited). This activity was conducted to determine how effective learning tools developed when applied to the learning process. The effectiveness of the learning device can be seen through the observation, for example, the activities of teachers and students, the ability to manage learning and student achievement test. Disseminate Stage At this stage is the stage of deployment and use learning device. Learning tools that have been tested and revised earlier, duplicated and distributed for use on learning in a larger scale.
II. THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK Computer Interactive Learning And Computer Assisted Learning Strategy Computer interactive computer and computer assisted learning strategies is a teaching strategy that emphasizes the use or the use of computers and learning aids (assisted learning) in teaching and learning activity. The use of computers as a learning medium useful for learners to simulate the material learned. The simulation results of these computers will be applied, or applied to the learning tools (assisted learning) that exist. So through interactive learning strategies and computer assisted learning easier for students to understand the material and apply the concept of the material on teaching aids directly. To support the teaching and learning process and assisted interactive computer-based learning, the necessary infrastructure in the form of learning equipment consisting of: a) Computer interactive learning is a computer device containing computer programs (software) that can be used to perform simulations of materials studied by learners. Examples of simulation programs for learning Computer Interactive Learning. b) Computer Assisted Learning is a learning tool that can be used to apply the results of computer simulation on the appliance directly.
III. Research Methods This research was conducted by applying the research design development with the aim to produce a product in the form of modules and device-based learning Robotics "Computer Interactive Learning and Computer Assisted Learning" at the Department of Mechanical Engineering to improve the skills of learners Development Procedures Procedure development in research carried out through several stages as follows: a. Identifying the various issues surrounding the Robotics used in contests robot through the study of literature and data mining to be used as reference for the formulation of theory, simulation and applications approach; b. Analyze and formulate the identification of various issues surrounding the Robotics relevant to developed in the Department of Mechanical Engineering Analyze and formulate the identification of various issues surrounding the Robotics relevant to developed in the Department of Mechanical Engineering; c. Make analysis and draw up scenarios Content and Design of Learning and infrastructure needed for the development of equipment, teaching staff, laboratory personnel, and the establishment of appropriate evaluation system material needs robotics;
Development Learning Tool 4-D Model In this research the development model used is the 4-D model (four D models). This model suggested by Thiagarajan, Semmel, and Semmel (1974). 4-D Model consists of four stages: Define Stage
96
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 d. Formulate indicators of success PBM activities oriented to the achievement of the performance demands of the professional needs of the workforce; e. Implementation of the manufacture of teaching modules and learning devices (infrastructure) based on Computer Interactive Learning and Computer Assisted Learning as a means to integrate the theory, simulations and applications suitable with various issues surrounding the learning needs and Robotics for contest; f. Conduct field trials on teaching modules and learning tools of mechatronic robotics course based on Computer Interactive Learning and Computer Assisted Learning in the Department of Mechanical Engineering oriented to the mastery of the competency needs of the workforce; g. Analyzing the results of field trials and make improvements to validate test procedures and test results; h. Doing the final revision of the module teaching and learning tools based robotics Computer Interactive Learning and Computer Assisted Learning based on the results of field test and validation.
Based on the data about the socialization of the learning is done on students majoring in mechanical engineering at the above resulted in the following data. For questions 1, 2, and 3 all respondents consisting of 10 students from representatives of various courses in the department of mechanical engineering (100%) answered no understanding of the application of robotics in the industry, or about robotics equipment. Respondents also argued robotics competence that is not taught in the department of mechanical engineering department. This shows that the image of the competence of the department of mechanical engineering is currently only limited to conventional machine, which ranges on a lathe, machining scrap and welding machines only, not offensive competence in the robotics industry. Yet today the development of machinery industry has many uses industrial robots. To question no. 4 of robotics module of computerbased interactive learning and assisted learning of respondents who answered draw was as much as 9 students (90%) of the 10 student-vocational and vocational representatives argue unattractive as much as one student (10%). As for the question no. 5 and no. 6 on the use of computer tools and modules of respondents who think "interesting" as many as 10 students (100%) and argue "unattractive" as none (0%). This shows the positive response of the device in the form of learning modules and devices are developed lesson To question no. 7 all respondents as many as 10 people (100%) found the module that was developed to facilitate the understanding of matter. All respondents (100%) believed that they feel happy and motivated by learning to use modules and learning aids. This indicates that the module can be motivating learners and assist learners in understanding the material.
Data Collection and Analysis Techniques Data Information on the results of field surveys and discussions in order to implement the standards needs of the robot contest/ competition and the learning device is analyzed with descriptive techniques. Likewise, data from focus group discussions in order to identify and formulate the essential topics as teaching materials for integrated mechatronic courses in the form of theory, simulation, and applications by using qualitative descriptive analysis techniques. Qualitative descriptive analysis techniques emphasis on making the evaluation and synthesis of the conclusions result from the activities. Synthesis and conclusions on the outcome of this study was formulated through forums workshops and focus group discussions. IV. Results And Discussion 1.
2.
3.
Data from the Indonesia Robot Contest 2009-2014 From the data of the Indonesia Robot Contest during the period 2009-2014 can be seen that the modules that have been developed have reached the fourth stage of the research methods of development that disseminate methods. So that, the module is perfect, ready to be duplicated and distributed as learning devices subject of robotics and mechatronics courses. In this National Robot Contest, material-based teaching module compiled specifically for the contest is not only electro majors alone, but multi-disciplines, and the object of research being developed not to be the latest technology and appropriate technology alone, but include the development of learning tools.
Data from the validation of learning by teaching staff (lecturers) Module that has been created and then validated on 5 validator consisting of faculty learning experts, education experts, engineering experts and grammarians. And the average assessment is 3.34 validator included in either category. So that the module can be used in trial 2 that experiments performed in the course of mechatronic.
IV. Conclusions Based on the results of data analysis and discussion, the researchers can draw conclusions as follows: 1. This is a module developed research results and monitoring research officer with the team for 5 years continues to develop research-based robotics contest, with the hope of the future be
Data Socialization Result in Student Learning Tool
97
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 able to produce computer-based learning tools interactive learning robotics and computer assisted learning to upgrade the skills of participants learners;
[1] Adviso F, bernardo (1990). Development Of The National Training Council As The Coordinating Body For Technical And Vocational Trainng, Jakarta: Depdikbud [2] Blank,WE. (1982). Handbook For Developing Competency Based Training Program. Englewood Cliffs; Prentice Hall. [3] Bonk CJ, Cummings JA, Hara N, Fischler RB, Lee SM. (2000)A ten level web integration continuum for higher education: new resources, partners, courses, and markets. Abbey B, ed. Instructional and cognitive impacts of webbased education. University of Indiana [4] Brown S. (1999) Reinventing the university. Assoc Learning Technol J; 6: 30-37. Fender B. The e-university project. London: Higher Education Funding Council for England. [5] Carr MM, Reznick RK, Brown DH. (1999) Comparison of computer-assisted instruction and seminar instruction to acquire psychomotor and cognitive knowledge of epistaxis management. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg; 121: 430-434 [6] Depdikbud, (1993) Konsep Sisem ganda pada sekolah menengah Kejuruan di Indonesia,Jakarta, Depdikbud RI. [7] ------, (1998). Keputusan Menteri Pendidikan Menengah Dan Kebudayaan RI No. 323/U/1997 tentang Pelaksanaan Pendidikan Sistem Ganda Pada Sekolah Menengah Kejuruan. Jakarta; Direktorat Dikmenjur. [8] Dit. Dikmenjur, (1996). Kerangka Acuan Studi tentang Pelaksanaan Program Dukungan Pelatihan Industri ( Industrial Training Support Program ). Jakarta: Proyek Pendidikan Teknologi dan Kejuruan. [9] Daniel JS.( 1996) The knowledge media. In: Megauniversities and knowledge media. Technology strategies for higher education. London: Kogan Page,:101-135. [10] Devitt P, Palmer E. (1999)Computer-aided learning: an overvalued educational resource Med Ed; 33: 136-139 [11] D'Alessandro DM, Kreiter CD, Erkonen WE, Winter RJ, Knapp HR. Longitudinal follow-up comparison of educational interventions: multimedia textbook, traditional lecture, and printed textbook. Acad Radiol 1997; 4:723 [12] Elves AW, Ahmed M, Abrams P. Computer-assisted learning; experience at the Bristol Urological Institute in the teaching of urology. Br J Urol 1997; 80 (suppl 3): 59-62 [13] Erickson, H.L (1998) Concept Based Curriculum Instruction: Teaching Beyond The Thousand Oaks: Corwin [14] Finch, Curtis R. & john R Crunkilton. 1983. Curriculum Development in Vocational and Technical Education, London: Allyn and Bacon, Inc. [15] Greinert, WD., 1992. The Dual System Of Vocational Training In The Federal Republic of Germany; Structure and function. Postfach 1, 6101 6326 Eschborn, Federal Republic of Germany [16] Heywood, John, 1989 Learning Adaptability And Change: The Challenge For Education And Industry, Great Britain: Paul Chapman Publishing Ltd. [17] Harris, R., Guthrie, H., Hobart, B., dan Ludnberg, D. (1995). Competency-Based Education And Training; Between A Rock And Whirlpool. South Yarra; Macmillan Education Australia [18] Loftis, H. A. (1980) ― An Exemplary Model For Change”, Vocational Instruction. Columbus; Flarson Publisher [19] Mardapi, Djemari. (1999). ―Performance Based Evaluation‖ Bahan Lokakarya Tentang Performance Based Evaluation di Program Pascasarjana UNY. [20] Norton, R.E (1985). DACUM handbook. Columbus: The National Centre For Research In Vocational The Ohio State University
2. The results of student responses during learning tools developed socialization shows that the image of competence for the mechanical engineering department is currently still limited to conventional engines ranged on a lathe, machining scrap and welding machines only, not offend industrial robots. Yet today the development of machinery industry has many uses industrial robots. Therefore we need a learning device that can support learning robotics competence in the department of mechanical engineering. From the results of student responses also showed a positive response to the module robotics based on computer interactive learning and computer assisted learning developed. 3. Module that has been created and then validated on 5 validator consisting of faculty learning experts, education experts, engineering experts and grammarians. And the average assessment is 3.34 validator included in either category. So that the module can be used in trial 2 that experiments performed in the course of mechatronic. Based on the analysis of the data research and conclusions as well as the real conditions for research in the field, the researchers can provide advice as follows: 1. Keep the learning modules other than the subject of robotics mechatronic modules such as sensor module, the module microcontroller and others to support the course of mechatronic; 2. The method of computer interactive learning and computer assisted learning lectures should be done on any existing courses in addition to courses in mechatronics. Because of lectures that use computers and assistive devices as a medium of learning can help improve the motivation of students to attend lectures and to facilitate students to understand the course materials; 3. Competence robotics needs to be taught in the department of mechanical engineering, both for high school or university. Because robotics competence is necessary for graduates majoring in engineering when it plunged into the world of industry, especially industries that the machines operate automatically.
REFERENCES
98
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [21] Sulifan, R. (1995) The Competency Approach To Training. JHPIEGO strategy Paper. www.reproline.jhu.edu /english/6read/6training/cbt/cbt.htm [22] Slamet PH., 1993. ―Pendekatan Alternatif Dalm Penyiapan Dan Pengembangan Tenaga Kerja Profesional Di Indonesia‖ Disampaikan Pada Seminar Nasional Sistem Permagangan Dalam Pendidikan Dan Kejuruan Dan Penyiapan Tenaga Kerja, Malang 18 Desember [23] Phillips R. 1996. Developers' guide to interactive multimedia. A methodology for educational applications. Perth: Curtin University Press,. [24] Haag M, Maylein L, Leven FJ, Tonshoff B, Haux R. 1999. Web-based training: a new paradigm in computer-assisted instruction. Int J Med informatics 1999; 53: 79-90. [25] Hilger AE, Hamrick HJ, Denny Jr FW. Computer instruction in learning concepts of streptococcal pharyngitis. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 1996; 150: 629-631
[26] Kulik JA. Meta-analytic studies of findings on computerbased instruction. In: [27] Baker EL, O'Neil HF, eds. Technology assessment in education and training. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum, 1994:52-66. [28] Kallinowski F, Mehrabi A, Gluckstein C, Benner A, Lindinger M, Hashemi B, et al. Computer-based traininga new method in surgical education and continuing education. Chirurg 1997; 68: 433-438 [29] Rogers DA, Regehr G, Yeh KA, Howdieshell TR. Computerassisted learning versus a lecture and feedback seminar for teaching a basic surgical technical skill. Am J Surg 1998; 175: 508-10 [30] Son Kuswadi, Eru Puspita, (2005) Modul Praktikum Interaktif Teknik Digital. Modul praktikum Politeknik Elektronika Negeri Surabaya – ITS, Surabaya [31] Son Kuswadi, Eru Puspita, (2006) Modul Praktikum Computer Assisted untuk Pengendalian Kecepatan Motor DC, Modul praktikum Politeknik Elektronika Negeri Surabaya – ITS,Surabaya
99
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
100
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Evaluation of The Implementation of The Adiwiyata Program (Green School Program) in SMK Semen Gresik Warju1,2 1 Doctoral Student of Technical and Vocational Education, Graduate School, Yogyakarta State University 2 Lecturer at Mechanical Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, The State University of Surabaya
[email protected]
Abstract - This study aims to evaluate of the implementation of the adiwiyata program (green school program) in SMK Semen Gresik, East Java. This study was evaluation research using the context, the inputs, the processes, and the products (CIPP) model developed by Stufflebeam and Shinkfield. The data were collected using an observation, interview, and documentation and then analyzed using the percentage descriptive quantitative technique. The findings of research are as follows. (1) The results of the evaluation visits context of caring and community expectations, relevance of programs, regulations and policies considered good, relevant, and support. (2) The results of the evaluation of the input characteristics of the principal, teachers, administrative staff, special officer school, and the school committee showed all know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in the protection and management of the environment (100%), while in terms of characteristics students as much as 73.33%. Judging from the curriculum, curriculum structure containing safeguards and environmental management in the components of a compulsory subject only to the subjects of Religion, Civics, Indonesian, English, Arts and Culture, and Chemistry are implemented in an integrated and local content subjects of environmental education living monolithic implemented. (3) The results of the evaluation process showed that only 46.66% of lesson plan that is integrated with environmental education, only 70% of teachers are developing indicators of learning and assessment instruments related to the protection and management of the environment, only 70% of teachers who prepare lesson plan related to the protection and management of the environment, only 53% of students who produce real work related to the protection and management of the environment, only 50% of students who communicate the results of the learning environment, and there are 5 documents of MoU has been built with partners in order Adiwiyata program. (4) The results of the evaluation of product based on student achievement, student competence, and feedback/satisfaction of the people considered good. Keywords: evaluation, adiwiyata school (green school), vocational high school
I. INTRODUCTION The issues of environmental education have emerged since 1975 at the International Conference on Environmental Education in Beograde,
Yugoslavia. This conference produced "The Berlgrade Charter - a Global Framework for Environmental Education" which contains the need to: 1) increase awareness and attention to the linkages in the field of Social, Economy, Politic, and Ecology, both in urban and in rural areas; 2) provide opportunities for everyone to acquire the knowledge, skills, attitudes, motivation required to work individually and collectively to care for the environment; and 3) create a whole pattern of ecofriendly attitude. In Indonesia, the Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia Year 1945 Article 28h states that a good environment and healthy life is a basic right of every citizen of Indonesia [1]. Therefore, efforts were done to put the mandate of the predetermined Law Number 32 Year 2009 on the Protection and Management of the Environment [2] into reality. The Law includes a set of responsibilities and obligations of government, local governments, and stakeholders in environmental protection and management, as well as the people's right to a good environment and healthy living as well as the obligation to preserve the function of society in preserving environment and controlling pollution and environmental damages. Environmental education is developed as an effort to overcome the environmental degradation that occurs in many regions. Environmental education needs to be done to improve knowledge, understanding and community participation in environmental management. To achieve these objectives, environmental education is developed through formal, informal and non-formal education. From the three lines, the level of formal education such as early childhood education programs (PAUD), primary school (SD), junior high school (SMP), senior high school (SMA), and vocational high school (SMK) and the higher education (institute/academy/polytechnic/university) become one of the strategic lines that have been developed jointly by the Ministry of Environment and the Ministry of National Education of the Republic of Indonesia through ―Adiwiyata Program‖ (Green School Program). Meanwhile, a joint program which has been developed by the Ministry of Environment
101
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 and Forestry with the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education for institute/academy/polytechnic/university is known as a ―green campus/eco-campus program‖. The agreement was followed with the signing of the Memorandum of Understanding between the Ministry of Environment to the Ministry of National Education on June 3, 2005 to increase environmental knowledge and understanding of learners and society. Due to the agreement, on February 21, 2006 adiwiyata program was proclaimed with an aim to create school communities which have environmental concern and apply environmental culture. Until 2013 as many as 2558 schools have participated in the adiwiyata program. To be an adiwiyata school there are four components to fulfill, they are: 1) environmental-friendly policy, 2) environment-based curriculum implementation, 3) participatory-based environment activities, and 4) environmental-friendly infrastructure and facilities management. Currently, there are 10 adiwiyata model school, 663 national adiwiyata schools, and 243 autonomous adiwiyata schools, which have gained appreciation from the government in the fulfillment of four adiwiyata components (Kusumatuti et al., 2014) [3]. Ability to achieve the four components is essential for the school to be admited as a school that has environmental concern and apply environmental culture. National Adiwiyata Award is usually given every year to schools that reach minimum score 72 points in the assessment carried out by a national evaluator team. Autonomous Adiwiyata is awarded after a school get National Adiwiyata Award or has been declared as a national adiwiyata school; at the time of assessment of the current year the school has reached the national level achievement score; and has had ten influenced (10) schools that meet the adiwiyata criteria of distric/city which has been awarded as an adiwiyata school in District/City level. This award is given as an evaluation on the results of the coaching that has been done at the level of district/city and province. To put these four components into reality, the Ministry of Environment has prepared technical guidelines to be used by the parties, especially the schools in establishing adiwiyata schools. Adiwiyata program is a program to establish schools which have environment concerns and cultures, which is implemented based on education, participatory, and sustainable principles. In order to improve the quality of schools that have environmental concern and apply environmental-culture as well as to facilitate the achievement assessment, the Deputy of Environmental Communication and Community Empowerment, the Ministry of Environment of the Republic of Indonesia has conducted assessment and awarded Adiwiyata. One same parameter is used to determine which schools that have implemented all components of adiwiyata program that get the award i.e. based on the Regulation of the Minister of
Environment Number 05 Year 2013, the necessary knowledge, skills and abilities. Deputy Communication and Community Empowerment has provided methods and procedures for adiwiyata school assessment as stated in the Technical Guidelines of the National Adiwiyata Assessment Program. Adiwiyata Technical Guidelines are the implementation Regulation of Minister of Environment Number 05 Year 2013 on Guidelines for Adiwiyata Program [4]. Annex III of the regulation has mandated the availability of: 1) Technical Guidelines for Adiwiyata School Achievement, and 2) Technical Guidelines for Adiwiyata School Assessment. Availability expected by the Technical Guidelines number 2, namely the Technical Guidelines for Adiwiyata School Assessment, implementation and assessment procedures of adiwiyata school are more easily understood, measurable, transparent and conducted with the methods and standards of judgment are the same, so that the data quality assessment results produced will meet candy assessment standards as mandated by the Minister of Environment Number 05 Year 2013 as mentioned above. The Minister of Environment Regulation Number 05 Year 2013 Annex III, the four components of adiwiyata has eight standards. From the eight standards, if applied will break down into thirty implementations. From the eight standards, if described in accordance with Annex III the Minister of Environment Regulation Number 05 Year 2013 will be divided into thirty-three adiwiyata school achievements. Based on the background above, it is necessary to evaluate the implementation of the adiwiyata program (green school program) in school. This research will evaluate the practical implementation of the adiwiyata school (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik, East Java. A program that does not have clarity of purpose will affect the outcome of the implementation of the program. Program objectives can be likened to a map that shows the direction of travel. The importance of research evaluation of Adiwiyata school program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik on various aspects of education as a whole will benefit as Adiwiyata school achievement information related to the praxis of environmental education to improve the quality and the quality of its graduates. Results of this evaluation are expected to be used as input for Gresik District Government to continue to improve environmental awareness and culture for the whole school community. Various problems in adiwiyata school (green school), among others: (1) schools are still experiencing difficulties how to prepare environmental impact assessment is a comprehensive, (2) there are many teachers who are still experiencing difficulties how to integrate environmental education
102
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 into subjects, methods of learning, and how to evaluate it, (3) means environmental-friendly in schools not based on the school local needs, because most are just imitations of other schools, (4) the increasing use of electricity, water, stationery so that there is no efficient use of energy with adiwiyata school programs (green school program), and (5) there are many school canteens still sell food/beverages containing four hazardous substances (dyes, taste, preservatives, and sweeteners). This study has the following objectives: (1) to determine the condition of the school program execution context Adiwiyata (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik in terms of awareness and expectations of society, the relevance of the program, and regulation and government policy. (2) to determine the characteristics of the input that includes the principal, teachers, administrative staff, special officer school, the school committee, and students; curriculum; and environmental-friendly infrastructure and facilities in schools. (3) to determine the learning process that is integrated with environmental education, both theory and practice, ranging from the preparation of teaching, learning, and collaboration with other institutions. (4) to determine student achievement, competency of students, and the public response to the graduates. This research is expected to make a positive contribution both practically and theoretically for: (1) Education, Youth and Sports Office and Environmental Office, Gresik District, as information and input for taking policy, (2) the principal and teachers, can be used as input information and to raise awareness and culture in the school environment, (3) the elderly, can be used as information on quality and quality of environment based-school. School as an educational institution must be maintained as much as possible. Sugiyono (2003: 2124) states that the professional management of vocational education is the intelligent management is the management capable of performing management functions in earnest, consistent and sustainable resource management so that the objectives of vocational education can be achieved effectively and efficiently [5], Meanwhile, according to Syaefudin (2010: 155), the means is a facility that directly affect the success of students in achieving the goal of learning activities [6]. In the Encyclopedia of Evaluation stated that “evaluation is an applied inquiry process for collecting and synthesizing evidence that culminates in conclusions about the state of affairs, value, merit, worth, significance, or quality of a program, product, person, policy, proposal, or plan” (Mathison, 2005:140) [7]. Evaluation has a very broad sense and is not a new concept. Hadley and Mitchell (1995:48), defines evaluation as “applied research carried out to make or support decisions regarding one on more service
programs‖. Evaluation as applied research conducted to make or support decisions on one or more program services. While understanding the evaluation according to the United Nations Development Program/UNDP (2006: 6) is “selective exercise that attempts to systematically and objectively assess progress towards and the achievement of an outcome. Evaluation is not a one-time event, but an exercise involving assessments of differing scope and depth carried out at several points in time is response to evolding needs for evaluative knowledge and learning during the effort to achieve an outcome” [8]. Further Stufflebeam (in Worthen & Sanders, 1973: 129) states,“evaluation is the process of delineating, obtaining and providing useful information for judging decision alternative” [9]. The point is the evaluation as a process that describes, produce and present information that is useful for decision making. In the field of education are also frequent overlapping use of terms between evaluation and research. What exactly is the common thread that can be taken from both? Mertens (2009) states that “while there is much overlap between the world of research and evaluation, evaluation occupies some unique territory" [10]. Although there is much overlap between the world of research and evaluation, the evaluation occupies several unique regions. More detail Trochim (2006) stated that “evaluation is unique because of the organizational and political context in which it is conducted, which require skills in management, group processes, and political maneuvering that are not always needed in research” [11]. Understanding of the evaluation of a number of the above it can be concluded that the evaluation is an activity to gather information about the workings of something, which then the information is used to determine an appropriate alternative in the decision. There are many models of evaluation that can be used to evaluate a program. However, the most commonly used is the context, input, process, output (CIPP) model. Stufflebeam & Shinkfield (1985:156) state that ―this basic framework of the CIPP was complete (context evaluation to help develop goals, input evaluation to help shape proposal, process evaluation to guide implementation, and product evaluation to serve recycling decisions)” [12]. This model has a complete basic framework that the evaluation context to help formulate goals, evaluation of inputs helped in compiling the program, the evaluation process is to direct enforceability of a program, and product evaluation to determine the achievement of a program.
103
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig. 1 The CIPP Model of Evaluation (Source: https://www.google.co.id/search) [13] Banerjee and Muley quoted Ajit (2011: 61), stated that the three stages in the educational activities engineering interrelated, namely: (1) input is community needs and resources, (2) process is about learning, and (3) the output is the ability of the workforce [14]. II. LITERATURE REVIEW A. Green School Definition There is no standard definition of green schools. There are some confusing terms, namely the term ―green", "healthy", "sustainable", and "high performance" are often used interchangeably. However, there are some principles that are often used to define green schools, namely: protecting the environment, lowering operating costs, improving health and the quality of learning environments, and integrating learning opportunities with the environment (Anonymous) [15]. Green school is a school that is energy efficient, highest performing schools that benefit the environment, economical to build and operate, and offers enhanced learning environment. The topic of green school increased in recent years, driven by greater environmental awareness and increased energy and cost. United States Green Building Council (2008), on its website greenschoolbuildings.org has defined as a green school building or facility that creates a healthy and conducive environment for learning as well as saving energy, resources and tuition [16]. Gordon (2010) states that the green school is the result of a consensus process of physical planning, design, and construction of buildings that takes into account performance over the whole life cycle of 50-60 years [17]. Gordon further indicated that green schools built so as to provide clean air and fresh, the temperature range that is comfortable, the lighting is plentiful, and low noise of unwanted noise when everything maximize the efficiency of resources,
minimizing pollution, and to teach the students about the importance of innovation in the environment. Gary Bailey, vice president of Innovative Designs, in an interview with Olson and Kellum (2003) agreed that schools are sustainable or green schools can create a better learning environment [18]. The concept of sustainable development reflects an understanding that we must meet the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. A sustainable school not only covers the concept of sustainability, but in itself, a teaching tool for sustainability (Ramli et al., 2012) [19]. From the above it can be concluded that the green school is a school which have environmental concern and apply environmental culture. B. Green School Benefits Benefit with a more universal green schools is as follows: 1. Energy efficiency. 2. Financial sustanaibility. 3. Promoting environmental stewardship. 4. Demonstrating environmental sustainability. 5. Supporting student achievement (ZAS Architects Inc) [20]. C. General Characteristics of Green School The Centre of Green School under the US Green Building Council (in Ramli et al., 2012) has emphasized the general characteristics of green schools are important to be developed in order to build a green school design. The characteristics are: 1. Conserves energy and natural resources. 2. Improves indoor air quality. 3. Removes toxic materials from places where children learn and play. 4. Employs daylighting strategies and improves classroom acoustics. 5. Decreases the burden on municipal water and wastewater treatment. 6. Encourages waste management efforts to benefit the local community and region. 7. Conserves fresh drinking water and helps manage storm water runoff. 8. Encourage recycling. 9. Promote habitats protection. 10. Reduced demand on local landfills. From the background of the problem and study the theory above, the design of the evaluation is shown in Fig. 2.
104
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The data obtained will be analyzed descriptively percentage. The next is to compare the data with existing standards or criteria. Then all the results of these calculations and the data interpreted objectively analyzed according to the research problem.
Vision and Mission of SMK Adiwiyata Program (Green School)
Evaluation of Adiwiyata Program Implementation (Green School) in SMK
Context
Input
Process
Product
Awareness and community expectation The relevance of the program Regulation and government policy
Principals Teacher Administra -tive staff Special officer School committee Student Infrastructure and facilities Curriculum
Teaching and learning activities include: Planning Process Cooperation with other institutions
Student achievement Student competence Satisfaction/ public response
IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION A. 1.
Fig. 2 Design of Evaluation Implementation III. RESEARCH METHOD This study is an evaluation research aimed to evaluate adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik, East Java, Indonesia. Evaluation model used was Context, Input, Process, Product (CIPP model) developed by Stufflebeam and Shinkfield in 1985. The purpose of the evaluation is to collect data or information to be compared with the criteria that have been made subsequently drawn conclusions. The gap between the real condition of the hope that is sought. The gap obtained a description of the implementation of the program examined whether it is appropriate, less fit, or not in accordance with established criteria. The approach used is quantitative descriptive supported with qualitative approach. The decision making process is done by comparing the findings/facts contained in context, input, process and product with a standard or predefined criteria, ie based on the Technical Guidelines for Adiwiyata School Assessment in annex III of the Regulation of the Minister of Environment Number 05 Year 2013. Research conducted at SMK Semen Gresik which has five (5) competency skills, namely Light Vehicle Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Welding Engineering, Installation of Electric Power Engineering, and Software Engineering. The timing of the study in June 2012. Subjects in this study were adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik. Source of information extracted ie principals, teachers, administrative staff, students, special officer school, school committees, and school partners. Data collection techniques used in this study are: (1) observation, (2) interview, and (3) documentation.
Context Evaluation Awareness and Community Expectations From interviews with seven (7) members of the school committee is seen that the school committee has concerns and expectations to the success of SMK Semen Gresik in creating a school which have environment concerns and cultures. This is indicated by the presence of three (3) Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) between the school and the school committee and school partners. Even the school committee and school partners involved in environmental action organized by the school. Among them are: 1) activities of the anniversary of the declaration of the movement of one million trees on January 10, 2012, 2) as a speaker/trainer in composting, 3) as a speaker/trainer in the manufacture of biopori, 4) as a guest speaker/trainer in the manufacture of Wastewater Treatment Plant (WTP), 5) as a speaker/trainer in the manufacture of organic waste chopper machine, etc. Based on the facts above it can be concluded that the concerns and expectations of society greatly to the implementation of the Adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik. 2.
The Relevance of The Program Communities around the schools interviewed (Board RT and RW) also said that the Adiwiyata program at the school is very helpful for reduction of garbage in the school, which is usually the garbage is placed in front of the school to be transported to the final disposal (landfill). The reason, schools have implemented the 3R (Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle). From interviews with principals, teachers, administrative staff, special officer school, and the students also said that Adiwiyata program is in accordance with the existing potential in school. With Adiwiyata program, waste/garbage in schools can be reduced and even can be used as a source of school revenue from the sale of compost and the creation of souvenirs manufacture of processed plastic and paper waste in school. So the concept of environmental education can be taught in a way to integrate it with the subjects and the local content of environmental education. Subjects are integrated with environmental education and local content of environmental education implemented in a monolithic which have minimum criteria for mastery between 73-80. Based on the facts above it can be concluded that the implementation of the Adiwiyata program (green school program) has a strong relevance in SMK Semen Gresik.
105
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 3.
Regulation and Government Policy Adiwiyata school program (green school program) is a joint program between the Ministry of Environment and the Ministry of National Education. The realization of the agreement evidenced by the signing of an Agreement between the Minister of Environment and the Minister of National Education on June 3, 2005 to increase knowledge and understanding of the environment for learners and society. Realization of the agreement, on February 21, 2006 has been proclaimed Adiwiyata program with the aim to realize the school community which have environment concerns and cultures. In terms of legal protection, Adiwiyata program is supported by a number of laws, regulations, and the MoU. Among them are: 1) The Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia Year 1945, 2) Law Number 20 Year 2003 on National Education System [21], 3) Law Number 32 Year 2009 on the Protection and Management of the Environment, 4) The Minister of Environment Regulation Number 05 Year 2013 on Guidelines for Adiwiyata Program, 5) The document of the MoU with Environment Development Center, Semen Gresik Foundation, 6) The document of the MoU with the Environment Agency, Gresik District, and 7) The document of the MoU with the Office of Education, Youth and Sports, Gresik District. With a variety of legal basis of the above, the implementation of Adiwiyata school (green school) at SMK Semen Gresik, East Java, strongly supported its existence. B. 1.
Input Evaluation The Characteristics of Principals, Teachers, Administrative Staff, Special Officer School, and the School Committee From interviews with principals, 7 teachers, 4 administrative staffs, 2 special officer school (gardener and the caretaker), and 6 school committee looks that they all know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of schools (100 %) in the protection and management of the environment. 2.
The Characteristics of Student From interviews with 30 students it appears that as many as 22 students or as much as 73.33% of students know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in the protection and management of the environment. 3.
Curriculum The Vision, mission, and objectives of the school to load directly the issue of the protection and environmental management. Two attempts environmental protection and management clearly visible on the indicator's vision, mission, and objectives of the school. The curriculum structure includes the protection and management of the environment in the components of compulsory subjects, as subjects of Religion, Civics Education, Indonesian, English, Arts
and Culture, and the Chemistry that is integrated with environmental education. In addition, there is also a local content subjects Environmental Education is monolithic and self-development through extracurricular Nature Lovers "HARPA" and the Student Organization (OSIS). All subjects were integrated environmental education and local content of environmental education are minimum mastery learning between 7380. School budgets in the Activity Plan and School Budget in 2011-2012 were allocated to environmental protection and management of Rp. 342.65 million of total school budget of Rp. 1.255.861 billion or approximately 27%, which Adiwiyata school requirement shall allocate at least 20% of the School Budget and Activity Plan for protection activities and environmental management. 4.
The Characteristics of Environmental-friendly Infrastructures and Facilities From the observation of the school infrastructure is seen that the school maintains three (3) environmental-friendly infrastructure according to its function, namely: a. The room has an arrangement of light and natural ventilation. b. Maintenance and setting shade trees and greening. c. Using paving block and grass. There are a number of school community innovations in creating an environmental-friendly facilities for the environment learning, namely: a. The Organic waste enumerator machine that is named "Ghilas", where the patent has been registered with the Directorate General of Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Justice and Human Rights of the Republic of Indonesia. b. The vacuum cleaner machine ―VACREZAQ‖. c. The Munisipal Solid Water (MSW) enumerator machine into Refuse Derived Fuel (DRF) named ―SHREDDER‖. d. The metal plate punching machine. e. The portable coconut grater machine. f. The composter to make compost from organic waste that is named ―esgepride‖. g. Biopori Infiltration Hole (BIH). BIH serves to prevent inundation and flooding; prevent erosion and landslides; improve clean water supply; and make compost and fertilize the soil. h. Waste Water Treatment Plant (WWTP) in which there are meterial alum, zeolite stone, fibers, sand, pebbles and charcoal. Alum serves as a coagulant. This coagulants increase the size of the particles of mud and other particles floating in the water so it can be deposited. Zeolite stone serves to reduce the content of iron (Fe), manganese (Mn), zinc (Zn) and lead (Pb) contained in the water. Zeolite stone was also able to reduce levels of ammonia in wastewater. Fibers serves to filter out particles that escaped the previous filter layer and
106
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 smoothing the flow of water. The sand serves to hold the silt. Coral acts as a filter and helps aeration oxygen. While charcoal surface has pores serves as an absorber of fine particles, odor, and color of the water. i. Infiltration wells. Infiltration wells serves to reduce the surface flow so as to prevent/reduce flooding and waterlogging, maintain and increase the ground water level, reducing erosion and sedimentation, reduce/resist the intrusion of sea water for the area adjacent coastal areas, preventing soil degradation (land subsidence), and reducing the concentration of water/soil pollution. j. The separate trash (leaf litter, plastic waste and paper waste). k. The school forests for green open space as a producer of oxygen for people in schools. l. Green house. Green house is a nursery-shaped house and used to sow the seeds/seedlings and seeds temporary weaning to become seedlings ready for planting in the field. Sow an activity to grow the seeds/seedlings in pots media/polybag in nurseries. Whereas a separate seed wean or move the group to become a seed of individual plants in a separate container in accordance with the size of the growth. m. The waste water reservoir of air conditioner The benefits of waste water from air conditioners can be used for: 1) watering plants, 2) adding electrolyte in batteries, 3) filling the radiator on the vehicle effectively (avoiding corrosive), 4) cleaning floors or glass, 5) wash, and 6) filling the tank (to prevent mildew). n. Takakura. Takakura is a processing system based household organic waste by using such a source of compost. C. 1.
Process Evaluation Learning Preparation Viewed from the side of the lesson plan document, only seven (7) subjects integrated environmental education of 15 subjects that none or only 46.66% of lesson plans that are integrated with environmental education. Only 70% of teachers who develop indicators of learning and assessment instruments related to the protection and management of the environment. Only 70% of teachers who drafted a study related to the protection and management of the environment. 2. Learning Process Only 16 students from 30 students or 53% of students who produce real work related to the protection and management of the environment. Only 15 students from 30 students or 50% of students who communicate the results of the learning environment through wall magazines, tabloids "GAPURA", educational exhibits, school website, Giri FM Radio, television media (SCTV), and Jawa Pos daily newspaper. But no one has communicated through scientific journals.
A total of 40 people from 48 people in schools or by 83.33% of schools involved in building maintenance and school environment. There are only two environmental action organized by outsiders school followed by teachers. While there are five environmental action organized by outsiders, followed by students. The school principal is only one (1) time as a guest speaker in the framework of the learning environment in the form of a workshop held by parties outside the school. Environmental learning process is also done by the Association of Young Nature Lovers (HARPA) and the Student Organization (OSIS) of SMK Semen Gresik. The activities are recycling plastic and paper with 3R program (Reduce, Reuse, Recycle). Reduce is to reduce waste by using items that are still usable. Reuse is the reuse of goods are still fit for use. Recycle is to recycle organic waste and utilize organic waste safely and appropriately (composting of organic waste). In addition, environmental education is also done by training nursery medicinal plant families and vegetables, such as: turmeric, aloe vera, ginger, galangal, ginseng, rosella, iodine, tomatoes, taro, cat whiskers, lime, eggplant, peppers, etc. 3.
Cooperation with Other Institutions Cooperation that has been built with other institutions in order to Adiwiyata program at SMK Semen Gresik, including by: a. SMA Negeri 1 Driyorejo, Gresik. b. SMA Negeri 1 Manyar, Gresik. c. Environmental Development Center, Semen Gresik Foundation. d. Environment Agency, Gresik District. e. Office of Education, Youth and Sports, Gresik District. D. 1.
Product Evaluation Student Achievement From the results of Adiwiyata program (green school program) activities at SMK Semen Gresik produced a number of student achievement in academic and non-academic, ie: a. First Winner of Photo Booth's Creativity Contest. b. Second Winner of SMK Festival Yamaha 2011. c. Second Winner of Marine Diesel Asembling 2009 categories of vocational school students organized by Shipping Systems Engineering Department, Faculty of Marine Technology, Sepuluh Nopember Institute of Technology. d. First Winner of Youth Scientific Paper Competition between Senior and Vocational High School in East Java provincial level. However, the achievements in the field of energy saving and alternative energy has not yet appeared at the school. 2.
107
Student Competence
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The product of organic waste enumerator machine named "Ghilas" produced by Semen Gresik students have ordered a total of 100 units by PT. Semen Gresik and has been distributed to the community and other schools. Ghilas name itself has registered its patent rights to the Directorate General of Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Justice and Human Rights of the Republic of Indonesia. So, in addition SMK Semen Gresik students have competence for their expertise, they also have competence to make of organic waste enumerator machine, a vacuum cleaner "VACREZAQ", the Munisipal Solid Water (MSW) enumerator machine into Refuse Derived Fuel (DRF) named ―SHREDDER, metal plate punching machine, and the portable coconut grater machine. This is proved by the Adiwiyata program (green school program) to further improve creativity, student achievement, and the competence of SMK Semen Gresik students. 3.
Satisfaction/Public Response From interviews with six (6) parents, they were satisfied with the process of education in SMK Semen Gresik for two reasons, namely: 1) students are not only taught to master the specific competencies expertise, but also taught that the students behave environmental-friendly forms of action, 2) students equipped with the skills to make the appropriate technology in the form of environmental-friendly engines that distinguishes it from other SMK students. E.
Discussion of Context Evaluation Results Context evaluation include: awareness and expectations of society, the relevance of the program, as well as regulation and government policy. From the evaluation results it is clear that the public has concerns and expectations of Adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik. Forms manifested concern with real environmental action activities, namely as a participant million tree planting activities and as a speaker/trainer in creating innovation environmental-friendly are existing facilities in schools. This indicates that the MoU is woven by the school with the school committee and school partners have come to the application level. Based on interviews with principals, teachers, administrative staff, specialized workers, students, school committees, and surrounding communities (RT and RW) also said that Adiwiyata program is in accordance with the existing potential in school. With Adiwiyata program, waste/garbage in schools can be reduced and even can be used as a source of revenue for schools from the sale of compost that has been given the brand "esgepride" and the creation of souvenirs manufacture of processed plastic and paper waste in schools. It can be concluded that the Adiwiyata program (green school progrm) has a very strong relevance of the program at SMK Semen Gresik.
In terms of regulation and government policy, Adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik is strongly supported by the existing rules or policies from the central, provincial, and district levels. In fact it has formed a district adiwiyata team consisting of representatives from the Office of Education, Youth, and Sport, Gresik District; Environment Agency, Gresik District; and Environment Development Center, Semen Gresik Foundation. Regent's role in the Adiwiyata program (green school program) in school are also quite large considering one of the requirements the district/city to city awarded Verse, then there must be schools in districts/cities that have been bearing the title of Adiwiyata school (green school) at national level. F.
Discussion of Input Evaluation Results Input component includes principals, teachers, administrative staff, school special officer, and the school committee; the characteristics of the students; curriculum; and facilities. From the results of the study indicated that the principal, teachers, administrative staff, school special officer, and the school committee know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school (100%) in the protection and management of the environment. Adiwiyata school goal is to realize the school community which have environment concerns and cultures. Where the form of awareness and environmental culture was demonstrated by the environmental protection and management program which consists of three main activities, namely: 1) the preservation of environmental functions, 2) prevention of environmental damage, and 3) the prevention of environmental pollution. From the results of the study indicated that as many as 73.33% of students know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in the protection and management of the environment. That is, there are 26.67% of students who do not know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in the protection and management of the environment. Therefore, it is necessary socialization of the vision, mission, and objectives of the school effectively and continuously, for example by means of: 1) put the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in strategic places in schools, 2) put the vision, mission, and school objectives in every classroom, 3) teachers convey the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in the beginning of the lesson, and 4) the principal conveying the vision, mission, and objectives of the school during the flag ceremony. From the results of the study also indicated that the structure of the curriculum which includes the protection and management of the environment in the components of a compulsory subject only to the subjects of Religion, Civics Education, Indonesian, English, Arts and Culture, and the Chemistry that is integrated with environmental education and local content subjects Environmental Education implemented in monolithic. Subjects integrated environmental education and local content of
108
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 environmental education are minimal mastery learning between 73-80. However, there has been no productive subjects are integrated with environmental education. Though these subjects that are characteristic of SMK. Therefore, the school Adiwiyata team should start thinking about the effort that all normative subjects, adaptive and productive can be integrated with environmental education. At school available 5 (five) infrastructure to address environmental issues in accordance with the standards of facilities and infrastructure based on the National Education Minister Regulation Number 24 Year 2007, such as: water, garbage (provision of separate waste, composter), feces, sewage/drainage, and green open space. However, the fasilities to reduce noise, vibration, radiation, toxic materials and hazardous waste, and vehicles exhaust emissions have not been done in SMK Semen Gresik. Therefore, it is necessary environmental-friendly technologies (green technology) so as noise, vibration, radiation, toxic materials and hazardous waste, and exhaust emissions can be reduced. At school also have available seven (7) supporting infrastructure of environment learning, among others: composting, utilization and processing of water, forest/ park/school garden, green house, biopori, infiltration wells, etc. Therefore, it is still necessary supporting infrastructure of other environmental learning such as fish ponds, biogas, alternative energy, and energy-saving technologies to support energy efficiency. Especially in SMK Semen Gresik there is Jatropha which can be used diodiesel as a substitute for diesel fuel. School cafeteria also have made three (3) attempts to improve the quality of service canteen healthy and environmental-friendly, include: 1) the canteen does not sell food/beverages containing four hazardous substances (dyes, taste, preservatives, and sweeteners) which do not comply with health standards, 2) canteen does not sell food polluted/contaminated, expired, and 3) the canteen does not sell packaged foods that are not environmental-friendly, such as: plastics, styrofoam, and aluminum foil. G.
Discussion of Process Evaluation Results Process evaluation component includes: preparation of teaching and learning before, lesson plan; teaching and learning process; and collaboration with other institutions. Teachers always make a lesson plan at the beginning of the semester. The lesson plan is made so that learning can be delivered into targeted and measurable. From the results of the study concluded that: 1) there are only 7 subjects integrated environmental education of 15 subjects, or only 46.66% of lesson plans that are integrated with environmental education, 2) only 70% of teachers develop learning indicators and assessment instruments related to the protection and management of the environment, 3) only 70% of teachers who drafted a study related to the protection and management of the environment,
4) only 53% of students who produce real work related to the protection and management environment, 5) only 50% of students who communicate the results of the environment learning through wall magazines, tabloids "GAPURA", educational exhibits, school website, Giri FM Radio, television media (SCTV), and Jawa Pos daily newspaper. But no one has communicated through scientific journals. Therefore, it is necessary the establishment of a scientific journal in school or submitting scientific articles to the environment scientific journals that already exists in other institutions. At school there are also five (5) MoU documents that have been built with school partners in order to Adiwiyata program. Therefore, it is still necessary to improve cooperation in the form of another MoU for the development of Adiwiyata program at school. In general, the process evaluation is quite good, but still need improvement.
H.
Discussion of Product Evaluation Results Evaluation of products in terms of student achievement, student competence, and response/community satisfaction. The results showed that the results of Adiwiyata program (green school program) activities at SMK Semen Gresik produced four (4) student achievement in academic and nonacademic. In addition to having expertise competence in accordance with practiced, students in SMK Semen Gresik also have additional competencies, which can make organic waste enumerator machine named "Ghilas" which has been produced and ordered by PT. Semen Gresik total of 100 units and has been distributed to the community and other schools. In addition, students also have competence in making vacuum cleaner "VACREZAQ", Municipal Solid Water (MSW) enumerator machine into Refuse Derived Fuel (DRF) named "SHREDDER" metal plate punching machine, and portable coconut grater machine. From the results of the study also indicated that parents are satisfied with the process of education in SMK Semen Gresik for two reasons, namely: 1) students are not only taught to master the specific competencies expertise, but also taught that the students behave in an environmental-friendly in the form of real action, 2) students equipped with the skills to make the appropriate technology in the form of environmental-friendly technologies that distinguishes it from other SMK students. In general it can be said that the evaluation of the product is quite good V. CONCLUSION Based on the research results, and discussion of the Adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik can be summarized as follows: 1. Based on the context aspect consists of three variables as follows: (1) awareness and
109
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
2.
3.
expectations of the community are included in both categories; (2) The relevance of the implementation of the Adiwiyata program (green school program) including relevant to community needs and local potential; and (3) Judging from the aspect of regulation and government policy, both the central government, provinces, and regions/districts strongly support the implementation of the Adiwiyata program (green school program) at SMK Semen Gresik. Based on the input aspect in terms of the characteristics of school principals, teachers, administrative staff, school special officer, and the school committee, all know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school (100%) for safeguards and environmental management. Judging from the characteristics of the students, as much as 73.33% of students know and understand the vision, mission, and objectives of the school in the protection and management of the environment. Judging from the curriculum, curriculum structure which includes the protection and management of the environment in the components of a compulsory subject only to the subjects of Religion, Civics Education, Indonesian, English, Arts and Culture, and the Chemistry that is integrated with environmental education and local content of Environmental Education implemented in monolithic. Therefore, the team of Adiwiyata school should start thinking about the effort that all normative subjects, adaptive and productive can be integrated with environmental education. In terms of both facilities and infrastructure of the learning space, as well as an environmentalfriendly fasilities of supporting environment learning is considered good. But needs to be improved environmental-friendly technologies to reduce noise, vibration, radiation, toxic materials and hazardous waste, and exhaust emissions. School cafeteria also has made three (3) attempts to improve the quality of canteen services healthy and environmental-friendly. Based on the process aspect, there are only 7 subjects integrated environmental education of 15 subjects, or only 46.66% of lesson plans that are integrated with environmental education, 2) only 70% of teachers are developing indicators of learning and assessment instruments related to the protection and management of the environment, 3) only 70% of teachers who drafted a study related to the protection and management of the environment, 4) only 53% of students who produce real work related to the protection and management of the environment, 5) only 50% of students who communicate the results of the learning environment, and 6) there are 5 MoU documents that have been built with school partners in order to Adiwiyata program at SMK Semen Gresik. In general, the process evaluation is quite good, but still need improvement.
4.
Based on the product aspects in terms of student achievement, student competence, and response/community satisfaction in either category. However, in the future the students need to be taught other environmental-friendly technologies to reduce noise, vibration, radiation, toxic materials and hazardous waste, and exhaust emissions because it is a competence that is needed by the world of work that led to the creation of green jobs ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to thank the Ministry of Environment (MOE) of the Republic of Indonesia which have financed this research. Acknowledgements are also extended to friends in the Department of Education, Youth and Sports Gresik; Gresik Environment Agency; Environmental Development Center, Semen Gresik Foundation has supported this research. REFERENCES [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8]
[9]
[10] [11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
110
Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia Year 1945. Jakarta: House of Representatives. Law Number 32 Year 2009 on the Protection and Management of the Environment. Jakarta: Ministry of the Environment. Kusumatuti, et al. (2014). Technical Guidelines of National Adiwiyata Program Assessment. Jakarta: Ministry of Environment. Minister of Environment Regulation No. 05 Year 2013 on Guidelines for Adiwiyata Program. Jakarta: Ministry of the Environment. Sugiyono. (2003). Professionalism of Vocational Education Management in Indonesia. Yogyakarta: Speech, unpublished, Inauguration of the Field of Management Science Educator's Vocational Technology in the Faculty of Engineering Yogyakarta State University. Syaefudin, Udin. (2010). Education Innovation. Bandung: Alfabeta. Mathison, S. (Ed.). (2005). Encyclopedia of Evaluation. Thousand Oaks, California: SAGE Publications, Inc. United Nations Development Programme (UNDP). (2006). Handbook on Monitoring and Evaluating for Results. New York: Author. Worthen, B. R. & Sanders, J. R. (1973). Educational Evaluation: Theory and Practice. Belmort, California: Wadswort Publishing Inc. Mertens, D. M. (2009). Transformative Research and Evaluation. New York: Guilford. Trochim, W. M. (2006). The Research Methods Knowledge Base (2nd Ed). Ithaya, New York: Author. Rethieved April 1, 2015 from http://www.socialresearchmethods.net/kb/. Stufflebeam, D.L. & Shinkfield, A.J. (1985). Systematic Evaluation: A Self-Instructional Guide to Theory and Practice. Klu-wer-Nijholf Publishing. https://www.google.co.id/search?hl=en&site=imghp&tbm=is ch&source=hp&biw=1056&bih=505&q=cipp+model&oq= CIPP+M&gs_l=img.3.0.0l5j0i8i30j0i30l3j0i24.2800.4381.0 .8166.6.6.0.0.0.0.396.1009.21j2.3.0....0...1ac.1.64.img..3.3.1 008.OBdj30okL8Q, accessed in July 7, 2015. Ajit Kumar, N. S. (2011). Criteria for Evaluating the Quality of a Question Paper [Versi Cetak]. Journal of Technical Education and Training, 3, 59-64. Anonymous. ------------. Green Schools Resource Guide A Practical Resource Guide for Planning and Building Green Schools in Ontario. Ontario: ZAS Architechs Inc in Association with Halsall Associates. United States Green Building Council (2008). Green Schools 101: Why Green Schools? Retrieved on 5 Juni, 2015 from http://www.greenschoolbuildings.org/gs101.aspx.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [17] Gordon, D. E. (2010). Green Schools as High Performance Learning Facilities. Washington, D.C.: National Clearinghouse for Educational Facilities. Retrieved on March 23, 2012, from http://www.ncef.org/pubs/greenschools.pdf. [18] Olson, S.L. & Kellum, S. (2003). The Impact of Sustainable Buildings on Educational Achievements in K-12 Schools. Leonardo Academy Cleaner and Greener Program Report, November 2003.
[19] Ramli, et al. (2012). A Comparative Study of Green School Guidelines. AcE-Bs 2012 Bangkok ASEAN Conference on Environment-Behaviour Studies, Bangkok, Thailand, 16-18 July 2012. Procedia - Social and Behavioral Sciences 50 (2012) p. 462 – 471. [20] ZAS Architects Inc, Green Schools Resource Guide: A Practical Resource for Planning and Building Green School in Ontario. [21] Law Number 20 Year 2003 on National Education System.
111
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
112
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Research and Development of Student Information System for Kindergarten In Klojen Malang Dwi Fatrianto Suyatno1, Yuni Yamasari2, Rr. Hapsari Peni A.T.3 1
Informatics Engineering, Department of Engineering, Surabaya State University
[email protected] 2 Informatics Engineering, Department of Engineering, Surabaya State University 3
[email protected] Electrical Engineering, Department of Engineering, Surabaya State University
Abstract - In the world of education, use of information technology can be use Academic Information Systems, e-Learning System, Web-based Education at High School level, School of Information Systems for middle school and Student Information System for pre-primary school level or elementary school. Use of Student Information Systems, at the level of ECD (Early Childhood Education) needs to be put into use in order to improve services to stakeholders. The process of recording and administration of the kindergarten ABA 17 has been recorded using Microsoft Office. For kindergarten ABA 5 are still using document on paper-based records made hard to organized, meanwhile there‘s a limited number of employees for Administration. This can cause a decrease in the value of the trust the parents of students who will have massive effects associated stakeholder satisfaction in this case the parents to the school administrative services. The resulting output of this research is a software based of web for Student Information System. This information system will be used to improve academic services to students including the parents. Improved academic services to students be the main goal of this Student Information System, alsoused to improve the competitiveness of schools while number of students increasing from year to year.
bulid a student information system, it is in conflict with the commitment of schools that want to provide good service for students and parents. Similar conditions also experienced in Kindergarten ABA 5 only in this kindergarten still trying to improve school quality and service so that school accreditation can raise from grade B into A, one of their effortsto raisethat grade is by make improvement of student administration. II. SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT LIFE CYCLE A. Waterfall Waterfall approach was first SDLC Model to be used widely in Software Engineering to ensure success of the project. In "The Waterfall" approach, the whole process of software development is divided into separate phases[1]. In Waterfall model, typically, the outcome of one phase acts as the input for the next phase sequentially. To develop this Academic Information System is using waterfall method which consists of 5 stages, that‘s 5 stage:
I. INTRODUCTION The development and advancement of information technology goes very fast. Along with the development of information technology and the delivery of data storage is getting cheaper and better quality for used as individuals or institutions and for thats reason governments also involved to make efforts to take advantage of those technology. The development of information and communication technology today has implications in education worlds. In the world of education, the advantage of information technology can be used as Academic Information Systems, e-Learning System, Web-based Education at High School level, and Student Information System. Kindergarten ABA 17 so far has been trying to build a student information system, but because of the lack of knowledge about information systems. Revenues from donations from students parent is not enough to support school operations, even more to
113
Figure 1. Waterfall Method
1.
Requirement Gathering and analysis: All possible requirements of the system to be developed are captured in this phase and documented in a requirement specification doc.
2.
System Design: The requirement specifications from first phase are studied
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 in this phase and system design is prepared. System Design helps in specifying hardware and system requirements and also helps in defining overall system architecture. 3.
Implementation: With inputs from system design, the system is first developed in small programs called units, which are integrated in the next phase. Each unit is developed and tested for its functionality which is referred to as Unit Testing.
4.
Integration and Testing: All the units developed in the implementation phase are integrated into a system after testing of each unit. Post integration the entire system is tested for any faults and failures.
5.
Deployment of system: Once the functional and non - functional testing is done, the product is deployed in the customer environment or released into the market.
6.
Maintenance: There are some issues which come up in the client environment. To fix those issues patches are released. Also to enhance the product some better versions are released. Maintenance is done to deliver these changes in the customer environment.
B. PHP PHP is a programming language for building dynamic, interactive Web sites. As a general rule, PHP programs run on a Web server, and serve Web pages to visitors on request. One of the key features of PHP is that you can embed PHP code within HTML Web pages, making it very easy for you to create dynamic content quickly [2]. This programing language is used to build this student information system. PHP is used to build this system cause this programing language can make a server - side scripting language, which means that PHP scripts, or programs, usually run on a Web server. PHP is also can used as an interpreted language — a PHP script is processed by the PHP engine each time it‘ s run so it can easy to modified and maintenance.
2.
3.
The Web server recognizes that the requested URL is a PHP script, and instructs the PHP engine to process and run the script. The script runs, and when it ‘ s finished it usually sends an HTML page to the Web browser, which the visitor then sees on their screen.
C. SQL SQL is the de facto standard language used to manipulate and retrieve data from these relational databases. SQL enables a programmer or databaseadministrator to do the following[3]: 1. Modify a database's structure 2. Change system security settings 3. Add user permissions on databases or tables 4. Query a database for information 5. Update the contents of a database This language will combine with PHP to process data that already stored at database. When user need information from web, this language will process it by communicating with database. Administrator who already store information on the database can be accessed by user of student information system. To use this language there's a tool that can used one of the is MYSQL. MYSQL is database engine that's usually used by PHP Programmer, combination of this two tools can make a good student information system. D. DFD Data flow diagrams (DFDs) reveal relationships among and between the various components in a program or system. DFDs are an important technique for modeling a system‘s high-level detail by showing how input data is transformed to output results through a sequence of functional transformations. DFDs consist of four major components: entities, processes, data stores, and data flows[4]. This method is used to design of system, it will describe how data flows through systems (and how that data is transformed in the process). Systems analysts prefer working with DFDs, particularly when they require a clear understanding of the boundary between existing systems and postulated systems. DFDs represent the following: 1. External devices sending and receiving data 2. Processes that change that data 3. Data flows themselves 4. Data storage locations
This process below can describe hot PHP works: III. ANALYSIS AND REQUIRMENT 1. A visitor requests a Web page by clicking a link, or typing the page‘s A. Problem Analysis URL into the browser‘ s address bar. Identifying the problem is the first step in doing The visitor might also send data to the the systems analysis phase. In reality that Web server at the same time, either kindergarten ABA 17 and ABA 5 is still do theirs using a form embedded in a Web page, services manually but there‘s some work aided by or via AJAX (Asynchronous JavaScript computers. This are some of their‘s service that‘s still And XML). manually used :
114
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 1.
2.
3.
The process that‘s Teachers do to make the report cards very inconvenient because the process still manually. Registration of personal data , teachers, and employees who are still manually so that if someone wants to find data takes a long time and less tidy. Recording the average growth of students toddler needs specific data to enhance the ability of students in accordance with their potential.
pejfvg_guru_staff
pejfvg_modul id_modul id_gurustaff nama_modul folder_modul pembuat url_pembuat deskripsi tahun status session
B. Design At this stage begin to be made DFD to describe the activity data flowing from one entity to another. The goal of this process is to obtain a detailed overview of the functions - anything that will function in the school information system. At this stage is also illustrated in detail the stakeholders involved in the process of managing data in the system simultaneously process input and output data of each - each stakeholder.
int(11)
int(11) varchar(30) varchar(30) varchar(30) varchar(30) text year(4) int(1) text
int(11) varchar(30) varchar(5) varchar(30) varchar(50) varchar(50) varchar(1) int(11) int(11) text varchar(20) year(4) varchar(20) varchar(30) varchar(15) varchar(30) date int(50) int(11)
pejfvg_jabatan id_jabatan int(11) nama_jabatan varchar(30) deskripsi_jabatan text
pejfvg_quran_ar
pejfvg_quran_id
id_quran int(11) surano int(11) ayatno int(3) ayat_ar text
id_quran int(11) pej_surano int(11) sura varchar(12) ayatno int(11) surano int(3) ayat_id text
pejfvg_quran surano int(11) sura varchar(250) sura_ar varchar(50) jml_ayat int(11) juz int(11)
pejfvg_blok pejfvg_info_sekolah id_info id_menu id_user_group nama_info isi_info tanggal_info posisi_menu status_terbit
int(11) tinyint(3) int(11) varchar(50) text date int(1) int(1)
pejfvg_buku_tamu id_bukutamu int(11) nama_bukutamu varchar(30) subjek text isi_pesan text email varchar(30) tanggal_kirim date status int(1)
pejfvg_menu2 pejfvg_menu id_menu tinyint(3) menu_id tinyint(3) judul varchar(100) url varchar(100) urutan tinyint(3) status int(11)
id_menu id_kategori id_aplikasi menu_id judul url urutan status
pejfvg_sidebar
tinyint(3) int(11) int(11) tinyint(3) varchar(100) varchar(100) tinyint(3) int(11)
id_sidebar id_kategori jenis status nama isi1 isi2 kategori stat
int(11) int(11) varchar(20) int(1) varchar(50) text text int(2) int(11)
pejfvg_galeri id_galeri int(11) nama_galeri varchar(100) id_album int(11) tanggal_galeri date judul varchar(250) deskripsi text
pejfvg_kategori
pejfvg_aplikasi id_aplikasi int(11) nama_aplikasi text file_aplikasi text blok_aplikasi int(11)
The role of teachers in kindergartens generally can not be separated from the role of administrative support school operations. The availability of student data to support administration work in those kindergarten. As a top manager, the principal need of tools that can support and increase administrative performance. The existing data still can not be processed in such a way to generate useful information for decisionmaking, making it difficult for schools to design needs of students in each school year.
id_gurustaff nip posisi nama_gurustaff password foto jenkel id_mapel id_jabatan alamat status_kawin tahun_masuk pendidikan_terakhir email telepon tempat_lahir tanggal_lahir nuptk id_pangkat
pejfvg_pangkat id_pangkat int(11) nama_pangkat varchar(30) golongan_pangkat varchar(20) ruang_pangkat varchar(20)
id_kategori int(11) nama_kategori varchar(50) deskripsi_kategori text fungsi varchar(250) sub int(11)
pejfvg_album id_album int(11) nama_album varchar(30) tanggal_album date deskripsi_album text foto_album varchar(50)
id_blok nama_blok deskripsi_blok link_blok folder posisi isi_blok menu_blok status urutan
int(11) varchar(30) text int(11) text int(11) text int(11) int(11) int(11) pejfvg_user_group id_user_group id_bukutamu id_galeri id_berita id_siswa id_pengaturan nama_group informasi_sekolah album_galeri berita buku_tamu guru_staff siswa psb_online pbm pengaturan import jadwal raport un ekstra perpustakaan sarana prakerin bkk up dudi tu plugin1 plugin2 plugin3 plugin4 plugin5 modul1 modul2 modul3 modul4 modul5
int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) varchar(250) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11)
pejfvg_mapel id_mapel int(11) id_kurikulum int(11) nama_mapel text deskripsi_mapel text
pejfvg_jurusan
pejfvg_siswa id_siswa nis foto nama_siswa password jenkel tempat_lahir tanggal_lahir alamat tahun_registrasi tahun_lulus sekolah_asal email telepon status_siswa status_oke id_kelas nama_ortu pekerjaan_ortu pekerjaan_sekarang info_tambahan id_jurusan id_psb nisn
pejfvg_psb
int(11) int(10) text varchar(30) varchar(50) varchar(1) varchar(30) date text year(4) year(4) text varchar(30) varchar(15) int(1) int(1) int(11) varchar(30) varchar(50) text text int(11) int(11) int(50)
id_psb id_pekerjaan nama_psb foto nem jenkel sekolah_asal no_sttb tanggal_sttb tempat_lahir tanggal_lahir bb tb status_psb tanggal_psb nama_ortu pekerjaan_ortu alamat_psb polling_psb telepon email
pejfvg_statistik
pejfvg_pengaturan
ip_addres varchar(20) tanggal date mengunjungi int(10) online int(255)
id_pengaturan int(11) nama_pengaturan varchar(50) isi_pengaturan text isi_pengaturan2 text
int(11) int(11) varchar(30) text varchar(5) varchar(1) text varchar(15) date varchar(30) date int(3) int(3) int(1) date varchar(30) varchar(50) text varchar(20) varchar(15) varchar(30)
pejfvg_komentar
pejfvg_chat id int(11) pesan text pengirim varchar(30) id_pbm int(11) tanggal timestamp
id_komentar id_pbm id_materi id_filter_kata id_media id_sumber id_pengayaan id_evaluasi id_penugasan nama_komentar email_komentar isi_komentar tanggal_komentar status_terima url
pejfvg_kelas
pejfvg_pekerjaan
id_kelas int(11) nama_kelas varchar(30) deskripsi_kelas text wali_kelas int(11)
id_pekerjaan int(11) nama_pekerjaan varchar(30) deskripsi_pekerjaan text
id_users namausers sandiusers nama_lengkap_users level_users s_username login_terakhir email_users
int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) int(11) varchar(25) varchar(30) text date int(1) varchar(250)
pejfvg_sensor id_filter_kata int(11) kata_filter varchar(100) ganti_filter varchar(200)
pejfvg_materi
pejfvg_pbm
pejfvg_users pejfvg_statistik2 ip_addres varchar(20) tanggal date mengunjungi int(10) online int(255)
pejfvg_kurikulum id_kurikulum int(11) nama_kurikulum varchar(30) deskripsi_kurikulum text
id_jurusan int(11) nama_jurusan varchar(30) deskripsi_jurusan text
id_pbm int nama_pmb longtext
id_materi file_materi judul_materi deskripsi_materi id_mapel nip tanggal_upload download id_pbm
int(11) varchar(50) text text int(11) varchar(30) date int(11) int(11)
pejfvg_berita
varchar(50) varchar(30) varchar(50) varchar(30) int(2) varchar(30) datetime varchar(50)
id_berita id_komentar judul_berita isi_berita tanggal_posting gambar_kecil status_terbit status_komentar status_headline s_username id_kategori
int(11) int(11) varchar(100) text date varchar(50) int(1) int(1) int(1) varchar(30) int(11)
pejfvg_pengumuman id_pengumuman int(11) judul_pengumuman varchar(50) isi_pengumuman text tanggal_pengumuman date s_username varchar(30)
pejfvg_agenda id_agenda int(11) judul_agenda varchar(50) tanggal_agenda date tempat_agenda varchar(50) keterangan_agenda text s_username varchar(30)
Figure 3. Entity Relationship Diagram C. Functional Requirment In the Student Information System there are several levels of access to access these applications include employees, parents and administrators. Facilities owned by the level of access each of which can be explained as follows: Teachers have access to incorporate measurement data and assessment and observation of students' abilities. These data will be input for depictions of child development and the students' report cards online. Employees have access to the facilities of input data for teachers, employees and students. Parents have access to online report cards and see their children's growth charts. The admin has the highest access level because it can control and be responsible for all the facilities and features in this student information system. Student Information System software Kindergarten has features (facilities) as follows: Data recording of students, teachers and employees. Processing of student data in the form of temporary value and its products at the end of the year report cards while the original form of report cards (the actual report cards includes). Monitoring and controlling the development and growth of students
Figure 2. Data Flow Diagram
In the design processalsocovers the processfor the design ofthe ERD(Entity Relationship Diagram) is a model ofthe designdata togivean overall pictureof thedatabaseframeworkwhichwill consistoftablestables thatare interrelated. So thatin the process ofdatabase developmentfor this systemwould beeasier todeterminethe relationshipbetweenone table withthe other.
IV. IMPLEMETATION A. Prototyping After the design phase of the database already implemented the next stage of this developing activity is the implementation phase into the program, described in the previous stage that application has developed with some framework to facilitate the development process. Implemetasi application "Web-
115
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Based Student Information System" will include doing a data input from students who are still active and also alumni of the school. Proototype of these applications can be seen in Figure 4.
Figure 6. Administrator Menu
Figure 4. The Prototype Application
B. Testing This stagebefore theStudentInformation Systemused After the application prototype phase to the stakeholders consulted in this case the principal, to generallyfirstconductedtestingprocessesboth see whether the functional requirements of the internallyand externallyinvolvingthe schoolswith a application has met the expectations of the school. limited number. This processwillbe able to after the number of times do brainstorming with obtaininputfrom theuserof what iscontainederrors school principals gained some input for the andimprovement ofprogramfeatures. improvement of the application so that the Theres some point that tested : application changes as in Figure 5. 1. Testing is the process of executing a program with the intent of finding errors. 2. The successful testing is a test that has a high probability to find and reveal all the errors that have not been discovered or previously suspected. IV. CONCLUSION In the test phase is student information system for kindergarten ABA and ABA 5 17 Malang changes for improvement, the school provide input include: 1. 2.
Figure 5. Application after some repair
The academic information system for kindergarten also include admin page which can be primarily used by the user with the right level: superadmin, administrators, teachers and principals. User SuperAdmin: have every right to access the menu in the admin page. admin user: has access to administrative processes, among others, the input of employee data, school information and components in the report. User Teacher: have of action to absent students, fill out daily activities and fill out report cards of students in accordance with the class they teach. User Principal: has access to monitor student progress reports, report cards on the performance of teachers and all students in the school.
Menu for the students placed on the main page of the information system. The component values can be changed according to the current curriculum.
The changes are based on feedback from school to accommodate the needs of schools in general. So that the pilot phase is a lot of improvement silakukan by the development team.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT The author would like to express gratitude to Allah SWT, My Family, Department of Informatics UNESA, All stakeholders in Kindergarten ABA 5 and ABA 17 Klojen Malang. REFERENCES [1] Cadle and Yeates, Project Management for Information Systems, 5th Edition, © Pearson Education Limited 2008 [2] Doyle, Matt, Beginning PHP 5.3, Wiley Publishing, Inc, 2010.
116
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [3] Stephens, Ryan K., Teach Yourself SQL in 21 Days, Second Edition, Macmillan Computer Publishing, 2011
[4] Le Vie, Donald S., Understanding Data Flow Diagrams, Information Development Director Integrated Concepts, Inc.
117
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
118
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Development of Learning Media Based E-Learning in Vocational High School Baharuddin 1, Pryo Utomo2 1,2
Education Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, University State of Medan Jl. William Iskandar Psr. V – Medan 20221 [email protected], [email protected]
Abstract - This study aims to development of learning media based E-learning. This research is motivated by the lack of vocational students' learning outcomes. Students difficult to understand the subject matter due to less media used by educators that can lead to creative thinking power of the material being studied. The research method using the Research and Development (R & D) and combined with instructional design the ADDIE model (Analisys, Design, Development, Implementation, Evaluation). Feasibility studies towards learning of E-learning by media experts showed an average of 4.4 and expressed "very decent" and materi testing by experts showed an average of 4.4 expressed "very decent". Testing phase one to students by an average of 4.5, and are categorized as "Very Good" and the Testing phase two average of 4.5, and are categorized as "Very Good". Based on the results of feasibility and testing of media experts and material experts as well as the students, it can be inferred media based learning E-learning is very good and deserve to be used as a medium of learning. Index Terms - E-Learning; Research and Development (R&D); Model ADDIE
I. INTRODUCTION At the Vocational High School - Technology as an institution that organizes vocational education, is a very appropriate place to establish expertise in learners. But seen from the graduates of vocational school students are still far from what was planned from the prescribed curriculum. This is evidenced from the results of interviews with subject teachers at SMK Tamansiswa Medan stating that the learning outcomes of 40 students from 63 students in class X Computer Network 1 and X Computer Network 2 to subjects Electronics Analog and Digital that has value below the minimum completeness criteria is <75.0. Value graduation subjects Analog and Digital Electronics is the value taken by finding the average value of daily tasks and test scores. However, many students found to not be able to complete the tasks in accordance with the terms regulated, so that the value obtained student is still below the average passing score, so that they are required to follow the remedial. Based on the information from teachers of analog and digital electronics in learning in the school system is rarely used medium of learning. The
medium that used only a simple media such as media images. This media has many limitations is merely display static images are displayed on the whiteboard or LCD projector. Other than that there are very limited facilities which resulted the students is difficult to perform repetitions in deepening material. This leads to the lack of understanding of students on the material presented because learners can not interact directly then make students less active in carrying out the learning process. One of the media can be used with mediabased learning with e-learning is to apply learning with the help of a computer that can create a learning does not only reveal a static image, but may also be able to display a moving image or animation often called. The subject matter can be created through the help of a software program applications that use Adobe Flash CS6 so in the learning process, teachers can display the subject matter more interesting and not boring, and students more easily understand the subject matter. The survey shows the unavailability of media-based learning e-learning using interactive multimedia in vocational Tamansiswa especially on the subjects of Analog and Digital Electronics. Science teachers can only provide simple instructional medium. Based on the description that has been stated above, the researchers are interested in doing research titled: "Development of learning media based e-learning in vocational high school‖ II. THEORITICAL REVIEW A. Understanding of Learn and Learning Learning is a factor that greatly influences in shaping a person's character either private establishment and formation of behavior. Thus the study can not be separated from the educational process. Both formal, informal and non-formal undertaken by learners. Learning experienced by a person basically is to meperoleh new things or new knowledge. There is some sense to learn according to some experts. According to Surya in Rusman (2013: 85) "learning can be defined as a process by individuals to acquire new behavior changes as a whole, as a result of the individual's own experience in interacting with the environment‖[1]. Sudjana (2010: 28) explains the "learning a process that is
119
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 characterized by a change in a person" [2]. Based on the definition of learning from some experts who described it can be concluded that the notion of learning is the behavioral changes that result from the process of training, experience, or habits that have been done by someone. Learning is basically a process of interaction between teachers and students. The interaction can be either direct interaction such as face-to-face or indirect such as use of instructional media used. Learning is a blend of several components that are formed into a system. These components include the objectives, materials, methods, and evaluation. The fourth component of the study should be considered by educators in selecting and determining media, strategy, and what the right approach should be used in learning activities [1]. According Warsita (2008: 85) "study is an attempt to make students learn or an activity for learners are teaching" [3]. Learning is done to seek to create conditions so that teaching and learning takes place. Law No. 20 Year 2003 on National Education System chapter 1 verse 20 states that learning is a process of interaction of learners with educators and learning resources in a learning environment [4]. Miarso (2007) explains there are five types of interaction that occur during the learning process takes place, namely: 1) the interaction between educators with learners; 2) interaction among learners or among peers; 3) interaction of learners with a resource; 4) interaction of learners together pedidik with learning resources deliberately developed; and 5) the interaction of learners together educators with sosil and natural environment [5]. From the description above it can be concluded that learning is a conscious effort from the teacher to make students learn, which is a change of behavior on students who are studying, which change with the acquisition of new skills applicable in a relatively long time and because of the effort B. Learning Media The word comes from the Latin media medium that has the meaning of "intermediate" or "introduction". So according to the media language means pengatar message from the sender to the recipient of the message. More specifically, the notion of media in teaching and learning prses be interpreted as graphics tools, photographic, or electronic to capture, process and reconstruct inforasi visual or verbal (Azhar Arsyad in Sukiman, 2012) [6]. According to the NEA (National Education Association) defines the media as objects that can be manipulated, seen, heard, read or discussed along with the instruments that are used by both the teaching and learning activities, and can affect the effectiveness of the instructional program. Then the Association for Education and Communication technology (AECT) provides limits on media as forms and channels used to convey the message or information (Sukiman, 2012: 28) [6].
Media is one of the communication tools in conveying the message is very useful when applied in the learning process, the media used in the learning process is referred to as a medium of learning. Heinich and friends (Arsyad, 2005: 4) suggests a medium of learning as follows: "Limitations as an intermediary medium that transmits information between the source and the receiver" [7]. Meanwhile, according to Anderson (Sukiman, 2012: 28). explained that "learning media is a medium that allows the realization of the relationship between the work of someone developers lagsung subjects with the students" [6]. Based on the various opinions that have been described, it can be concluded learning media is anything that can be used to deliver the message so as to achieve the learning objectives effectively. Essentially learning media as a vehicle to convey the message or information on the source of the message forwarded to the recipient. Messages or information submitted is learning materials to achieve the learning objectives or the number of competencies that have been formulated, in the process requires media as a sub-system of learning. C. E-Learning E-Learning (elektronic learning) is a study that uses media elektronik.E-learning covers learning at all levels, both formal and informal, are using the intranet (LAN) or extranet (WAN), in whole or in part, interactions, facilitation ( Allen in Sutopo, 2012: 3) [8]. With e-learning, can make the learning process without having to meet directly with the teacher. E-learning was first introduced by the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign by using computerassited instruction system and a computer named PLATO (Darmawan, 2014: 15) [9]. Web-based learning is a subset of e-learning and learning refers to the use of browsers (such as Internet Explorer, Google Chrome, and others) (Sutopo, 2012: 3) [8]. But other than that educators also use e-learning in the form of video or flash with different formats are used as learning. Pebelajaran is presented in the form of CDs whose contents can be tutorials, video documentary or instructional materials are already widely used for education (Darmawan, 2014: 15) [9]. D. Interactive Multimedia In a multimedia language derived from the multi (Latin, nouns) which means a lot, various sorts, and medius were in the plural medium (Latin) meaning something that is used to convey or bring something. Multimedia is commonly known today is a wide variety of combinations of graphics, text, sound, video and animation. (Arsyad, 2013: 10) [7]. Multimedia can be used in all fields, especially in education. In the field of education, multimedia can be used as a medium of learning tools that help educators deliver the message content to be more easily understood by learners. With the help of multimedia, interactive learning can also be where learners can interact actively and directly.
120
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Utilizing multimedia in learning will be able to improve the understanding of students in mastering the material. It is as disclosed Baugh (Arsyad, 2013: 13) less than 90% of one's learning results obtained through the senses of sight, and only about 5% obtained through the senses of hearing and 5% again by the other senses. But Dale (Arsyad, 2013: 13) estimates that the acquisition of learning outcomes through the sense of sight around 75%, through the sense of hearing about 13%, and through the other senses approximately 12% [7]. According to Bruner, there are three main levels learning mode that direct experience, experience the image and experience of the picture (Rusman, 2013: 165) [1]. One illustration of the most widely referenced as the theoretical basis of media use in the learning process is Dale Cone Experience (Experience Cone Dale) as can be seen in the following figure:
would be the use of English units as identifiers in trade, such as ―3.5-inch disk drive.‖ Avoid combining SI and CGS units, such as current in amperes and magnetic field in oersteds. This often leads to confusion because equations do not balance dimensionally. If you must use mixed units, clearly state the units for each quantity that you use in an equation. In this research, design and manufacture of products using the learning model of ADDIE combined by steps of research development recommended by Borg and Gall with the consideration that the models are suitable for developing a product model of instructional / learning is right on target, effective and dynamic and very helpful in the development of learning for teachers. The fusion between the stages of R & D research methods with the ADDIE model of learning can be seen on the following table:
Fig. 1 Experience Cone Dale). (Source : Rusman, 2013 )
Basic development of cone above is not the level of difficulty, but the level of abstraction number of types of sensory participate during acceptance teaching content or message. Direct experience will give the impression of the most intact and the most meaningful of the information and ideas contained in that experience, because it involves the senses of vision, hearing, feeling, smell and touch. This is known as Learning by Doing, or Learning to Do (Sukiman, 2012: 33) [6]. Using multimedia learning media is often referred to as interactive multimedia-based learning media. According Niken and Haryanto (2010: 25) is a multimedia interactive multimedia equipped with a controller that can be operated by the user so that the user can select what is desired for further processing. Examples of interactive multimedia are: multimedia interactive learning, gaming applications, and others [10]. So from some of the above opinion can be concluded that interactive multimedia is a combination of multiple media such as text, images, sound, video and animation that comes with the controller so that users can navigate, interact and III. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Use either SI (MKS) or CGS as primary units. (SI units are encouraged.) English units may be used as secondary units (in parentheses). An exception
This study was conducted in SMK Tamansiswa Medan is located at Jl. Sabaruddin 8 Medan in the academic year 2015/2016 first semester of class X in July 2015. Objek penelitian adalah mata pelajaran elektronika analog dan digital. Subjek penelitian meliputi 5 siswa kelas X TKJ yang termasuk kelompok kecildan 10 siswa kelas X TKJyang termasuk kelompok besar di SMK Tamansiswa Medan. The object of research is the subject of analog and digital electronics. Research subjects include 5 class X Computer Network which included a small group of 10 students of class X and Computer Engineering networks including large groups in vocational Tamansiswa Medan. Questionnaire is a technique of data collection that contains the questions submitted in writing to the person or group of people to get an answer or response and the information that required by the researcher. Data obtained from the questionnaire is the answer in the form of an explanation (qualitative
121
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 data) validation of instructional media development of analog and digital electronics. With so researchers will give a presentation picture of the situation examined in the form of a narrative description. Questionnaire data obtained will be analyzed with the following steps:
1) The questionnaire which has been filled by respondents, examined the completeness of the answer, then prepared in accordance with the code of respondents. 2) Quantify the question by giving a score in accordance with a predetermined weighting. 3) Creating a data tabulation. 4) Then transformed into the following table:
Fig. 3 Display Learning Objectives Menu.
The menu contains the instructions for use on the use of the navigation instructions in using this interactive media.
Fig. 4 Display Instructions for Use Menu.
Menu start learning is a sub-menu containing options menu of learning presented in this software.
IV. RESULT AND DISCUSSION The execution of the software starts from the making of the background image with the help of Adobe Photoshop and put it in Adobe Flash CS6 and then place the buttons for in accordance with a predetermined design so that the software can be used as desired. Menu porch was the main ingredient in this software. On the menu, there are several menu leading to sub-learning materials and sub-sub exercise and contains the instructions for use and profile of instructional media makers.
Fig. 5 Display Start Learning Menu
The menu is a menu that contains material information related to the content of the materials that will be presented starting from the "Basic Principles of Digital Systems", "Understanding Gate Logic", and the kinds of logic gates.
Fig. 2 Display Porch Menu.
The menu is a menu that contains destination information to students about the learning objectives are based on the design of lesson plans. Fig. 6 Display Material Basic Principles of Digital Systems Menu
122
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig. 7 Display Logic Gate Materials Menu
Fig. 10 Graph Results Validation By Expert Media.
Exercise menu is a menu that contains practice questions to gauge the level of understanding of students in mastering the material they have learned. On the menu there is another sub-menu option to select multiple choice questions or essay.
The results of validation by the material experts note that the media get the average assessment on the indicator Information Guide 4.7 (Very Good), Teaching Material Content indicator of 4.3 (Very Good) and if averaged overall scores 4, 4 and can be expressed "very good" However there are a few comments / suggestions from the expert material that is (1) the media-based learning e-learning if it allows more material is loaded; (2) displaying video or simulation to create a digital electronic circuits.
Fig. 8 Display Multiple Choice Questions Menu
Fig. 11 Graph Results Validation By Material Expert.
By looking at the results of validation by the media experts and expert material, then softwarelearning multimedia interactive learning is already worth to be used / applied on research.
Fig. 9 Display Essay Menu
A. Validation By Expert Media and Material Expert The results of validation the media by medium experts note that medium get the average assessment on the indicator Information Guide 4.7 (Very Good), indicator Coursware use of 4.3 (Very Good), Aesthetic Quality indicators Exposure of 4.2 (Very Good ) and if averaged overall scores of 4.3 and can be expressed "very good". But there are some responses from expert advice to revise the medium: (1) better facilitate navigation buttons; (2) an assessment of the results of the essay and multiplechoice exercises tailored to the instructions; and (3) as much as possible to determine the duration of working time practice questions.
B. Testing Phase I dan Phase II From the results of this first test we can see the results of the test had an average assessment on the indicator Information Guide at 4.5 (Very Good), Teaching Material Content indicator of 4.2 (Very Good), Media Quality indicators of 4.6 (very Good), Pedagogy Effect indicator of 4.9 (Very Good) and when averaged overall by 4.5 and categorized as "very Good". There are several inputs obtained as (1) learn to use this medium is not boring, (2) the learning using this medium is very interesting and already understood (3) good medium because they can learn while using the computer.
123
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
V. CONCLUSION Based on the research that has been done in class X TKJ VOCATIONAL HIGH SCHOOL Tamansiswa Medan, software-based instructional media e-learning that has been developed is feasible to be used / applied to the learning process.
REFERENCES [1]
Fig. 12 Graph of Testing Phase I.
From the results of this second test we can see the results of the test had an average assessment on the indicator's Guide Information of 4.4 (Very Good), Teaching Material Content indicator of 4.2 (Very Good), Media Quality indicators at 4.5 (very Good), Pedagogy Effect indicator of 4.9 (Very Good) and if averaged overall by 4.5 and categorized as "very Good". There are several inputs obtained as (1) very good, and useful for many people, (2) if it could all subjects using medium like this, (3) we suggest if you are teaching teachers using this medium because it is easier to understand, (4) very interesting and very useful to increase knowledge (5) medium good father, (6) a way of learning good but the exercise are difficult, (7) very interested in learning to use this medium, (8) medium very nice.
Rusman. 2013. Belajar dan Pembelajaran berbasis komputer – Menggabungkan profesional guru abad 21.Bandung : Alfabeta H. Simpson, Dumb Robots, 3rd ed., Springfield: UOS Press, 2004, pp.6-9. [2] Sudjana, Nana. 2010. Penilaian Hasil Proses Belajar Mengajar. (Cet. XV). Bandung: PT. Ramaja Rosdakarya [3] Warsita, Bambang. 2008. Teknologi Pembelajaran Landasan & Aplikasinya. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta [4] Undang Undang RI Nomor 20 Tahun 2003 Tentang Sistem Pendidikan Nosional. Jogjakarta : Media Wacana Press. [5] Miarso, Yusufhadi. 2007. Menyemai Benih Teknologi Pendidikan. Cetakan Ketiga. Jakarta: Kencana Prenada Media Group [6] Sukiman. 2012. Pengembangan Media Pembelajaran. Yogyakarta : Pedagogia. [7] Arsyad, Azhar. 2013. Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta : Rajagrafindo Persada. [8] Sutopo, Ariesto Hadi, 2012, Teknologi Iinformasi dan Komunikasi Dalam Pendidikan, Yogyakarta : Graha Ilmu [9] Darmawan, Deni. 2014. PENGEMBANGAN E-LEARNING TEORI DAN DESAIN. Bandung: Remaja Rosdakarya [10] Niken Ariani dan Haryanto. 2010. Pembelajaran Multimedia di Sekolah. Jakarta: Prestasi Pustaka. [11] Sriadhi. 2014. Penilaian Multimedia Learning. Konferensi Nasional Pengembangan Teknologi Informasi dan Komunikasi, Ke-TIK, USU Press.
Fig. 13 Graph of Testing Phase II.
124
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The influence of MySQL Utilization on Database Training Subject in Software Engineering Department Of State Vocational Senior High School 2 Surabaya Didik Triaswira1, Supari Muslim2, Lilik Anifah2 1
Vocational Technology Study Program, Postgraduate Program, State University of Surabaya 2 Department of Electrical Engineering, Universitas Negeri Surabaya Kampus Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
Abstract - The development of sience and technology encourages the offorts of modernnity in the use of results of technology in the learning process. Teachers are demanded to be able to use the tools at scholl according to teh development and demand of the time. The purpose of this research is to improve the students‘ Database competence through the implementation of MySQL to face their apprenticeship on Database Training Subject in the eleventh grade of State Vocational Senior High School 2 Surabaya. The research used quantitative research method with a quasi experimental non-equivalent control group design. The subjects were two classes which consisted of a control class with a database application of Ms. Access and the experimental class with MySQL database applications. Pre-test was conducted before the treatment and after that post-test was conducted. The results show that the students‘ learning activities using MySQL is significantly higher with an average score of 77.37 (categorized as very good), and students‘ affective learning outcome using MySQL is also significantly higher with an average score of 75.93 (categorized as very good). While, their cognitive learning outcome using MySQL is significantly higher with an average score of 80.82 (categorized as complete). While, the students‘ psychomotoric learning outcome using MySQL is significantly higher with an average score of 83.02 (categorized as complete).Based on the results, it can be concluded that the implementation of MySQL for students to prepare their apprenticeship on Database Training Subject is applicable. The teaching and learning set is also applicable in this research, but this needs to be adjusted to the conformity e school condition. Index Terms – MySQL, Database Training Subject
I. PRELIMINARY The development of science and technology increasingly encourages reform efforts in utilizing the results of technology in the learning process. The teachers are required to be able to use the tools provided by the school, according to the development and the demands of the times. Teachers at least be able to use a tool that is cheap and efficient though simple to achieve learning objectives
Given the making of databases requires mastery of depth on how to assemble (design) database, implementation, and testing, as well as the workings of the database system that will be used, to avoid errors, the direct instructional model in the learning database into an alternative that needs to be developed. MySQL into one software database system not paid (free software), allows students to learn the database system, there are guidebooks that use paid software (commercial or Proprietary Software). According to the regulations of Law no. 19, 2002, Chapter II Scope of Copyright the first part of the function and nature of copyright Article 2 reads: "Author or the Copyright Holder of cinematographic works and computer programs have the right to give permission or prohibit another person without his consent rent creation is for the benefit of the commercial nature ". By looking at the current 2013 curriculum structure, training eye databases in class XI still at the stage of application using Microsoft Office Access database (Ms, Access). In addition, in connection with the preparation of Industrial Employment Practices (Prakerin) committed students of class XI at the end of semester 2, learners should have before executing Prakerin, is equipped with advanced database application. Then from the teaching team SMK 2 Surabaya have thought by inserting sub-subject on the basis of competence to understand the language to manage the database using MySQL database applications. Thus the suitability of the Education System Dual (PSG), where competences acquired in school can be applied or train students to adapt to the situation of actual work, is to go directly into the workplace as companies, institutions, government agencies, state-owned companies / enterprises and so that according to the competence of the expertise of each program can be achieved. Unpreparedness of the field led to the current lack of ability on the competence of the database. Thus MySQL a viable alternative as a learning tool database training eye in class XI N 2 Surabaya. To meet the needs of the curriculum, the school needs and problems in the field that has been stated
125
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 above, it is necessary to study, entitled "Effects of Using MySQL Against Currency Competence Training Programs Database Software Engineering Schools SMK Negeri 2 Surabaya". Based on the background research that has been presented, made the formulation of the problem as follows: (1) Is there a difference between the learning activities of students who use MySQL and students using the training eye treatment Ms.Access Base Datadengan basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class Department XI RPL N 2 Surabaya ?; (2) Are there differences in cognitive learning outcomes among students who use MySQLdan students who use Ms.Access on training eye Database with a basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?; (3) Are there differences in the affective learning outcomes among students who use MySQL and students are using the training eye Ms.Accesspada Database with a basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?; (4) Is there a difference between the psychomotor domain of learning outcomes of students who use MySQLdan students who use Ms.Access on training eye Database with a basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?. Based on the formulation of the problem as described above, the purpose of this study is as follows: (1) To analyze the differences between students' learning activities using MySQL and students using the training eye treatment Ms.Access Base Datadengan basic understanding of language competence to manage base Data in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?; (2) To analyze the differences in cognitive learning outcomes among students who use MySQL and students are using the training eye Ms.Accesspada Database with a basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?; (3) To analyze the differences in learning outcomes between students' affective domain that uses MySQL and students who use Ms.Access on training eye Database with a basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?; (4) To analyze the differences between the psychomotor domain of learning outcomes of students who use MySQL and students are using the training eye Ms.Accesspada Database with a basic understanding of language competence for managing databases in class XI RPL Department N 2 Surabaya ?. II. LITERATURE REVIEW
A.
Learning Activities
According Djamarah (2010: 10) that learning is a change in behavior, both concerning the knowledge, skills and attitudes, even covering all aspects of the organism or person. Teaching and learning activities such as organizing learning experiences, teaching and learning process, assessing
the process and outcomes of learning within the scope of teachers Disagree with Djamarah, Sardiman (2011: 103) argues in learning activities there are several principles oriented view of the science of the soul, which in the view of the science of long life and view of modern life sciences. In the view of the science of long life is dominated by the teacher while the activity in the view of modern life science activity is dominated by students. In this study, the learning activities used to measure differences in the use of MySQL in the subject database processing with a basic understanding of language competence to manage the database. Learning activities are part of learning. Measuring the activity of learning in the classroom is used to see the level of success of the different uses of media, applications, tools, or differences in the use of the learning model used. Following the implementation of the activities of students in learning by using direct instructional model in the use of database applications: (1) students to pray in accordance with the religion and beliefs of each and greetings before starting the lesson; (2) students examine the direction of teachers and observe the instructions SQL described by the teacher; (3) consider and implement the outline of the attitude indicator spiritual, social attitudes, knowledge, and skills that will be taught; (4) students pay attention and listen to the recorded material on the general provisions to understand the language to process the database described by the teacher; (5) students pay attention and listen to the recorded material about understanding the language to process the database deeper or more to the core material described by the teacher; (6) students demonstrate the ability to communicate when things are not yet understood and given the opportunity to ask questions; (7) students prepare software and hardware in accordance directed teachers to use in doing pratik understand the language to process the database with full responsibility and communicate with each other; (8) students conduct experiments, communicate with friends in the classroom and teacher; (9) Students read and dig through LKS information about understanding the language to process the database according to the direction of teachers with confidence and honest; (10) students work an investigation step by step starting with formulating hypotheses, students are asked not easily discouraged to continue to try to help each other to behave friend in a class that can not be merusmuskan hypothesis; (11) students to discuss with each other if there is a problem in carrying out the experiment in accordance with the procedures do not despair; (12) students communicate their experimental results with honesty and discipline; (13) students can express opinions, communicate information and ask the students to respect each other when one of his friends was expression; (14) each student to work together and be honest in formulating operational definitions are communicating with each other in solving
126
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 practical information given; (15) students to discuss with each other in completing the practice, so as to draw conclusions based on experiments; (16) students present the results of experiments in collaboration with not easily discouraged and in charge of presenting the results of its work; (17) students pay attention to any of your friends who mempersentasikan their work with full responsibility; (18) students respond to friends mempersentasikan performance with respect; (19) student questions or opinions with honesty and mutual respect; (20) students received awards of teachers according to learning outcomes achieved in pebelajaran; (21) students summarize the subject matter has been studied with reference to the learning objectives with the discipline to behave; and (22) close Students learning to pray in accordance with confidence and say hello.
running order DDL and DML that has been presented by Indrajani, MySQL allows users to take advantage of two menus, which use the menu-based query GUI (Graphic User Interface) to select attributes beradasarkan what to look for and use a query-based CLI (Command Line Interface) as shown below.
Fig 1. Picture Menu Script MySQL
B.
Learning Outcomes
According Sudjana (1991: 22), the learning outcomes to be achieved can be categorized into three areas of the field of cognitive (intellectual mastery), the field of affective (related to attitudes and values), as well as psychomotor field (ability / skills). All three can not stand alone but is an integral and inseparable, even form a hierarchical relationship. As a goal to be achieved, all three should appear as a result of student learning in school. To obtain the data processing training eye learning outcomes database with basic competence to understand the language to manage the database as an instrument in the future, include: (1) the cognitive learning; (2) affective learning outcomes; and (3) psychomotor learning outcomes. According Supari (2013: 13), the learning process focuses on three domains of learning objectives namely: (1) cognitive; (2) the affective domain; and (3) psychomotor.
In need of DU / DI students' results in the output of the student before entering Prakerin basic needs the ability to understand language to manage the database has to be mastered. Therefore, based on the description above, it can be concluded by using MySQL, students are trained and reliable when in operating a database on CLI especially on competence to understand the language to manage the database. Needs in running the DDL and DML commands to the application of Ms. Access many use the help of a tool (tools) that has been provided. Existing aid allows users to execute DDL and DML commands, but independence for students influential in understanding the language proficiency to manage the database. Therefore, based on the description above, it can be concluded by using MySQL, students are trained and reliable when in operating a database on CLI especially on competence to understand the language to manage the database.
C. Understanding the Language To Manage Database.
III. METHODS
According Indrajani (2014: 87), that in understanding the language to manage the database. SQL commands can be used not only to search the database (the database), but also to perform various other functions like create tables, add data to the table, change the data; and delete the table. This subject in a database called the Data Definition Language (DDL), a SQL command to perform the manufacturing, deleting databases, tables, and change the structure. In line with the opinion of Priyadi (2012: 82), that the name DDL SQL commands used in the form of: (1) create; and (2) alter. Then Data Manipulation Language (DML), the SQL commands that are used do pegolahan record or manipulation of records of a table in a database. In can help, writing SQL commands in this group consists of: (1) select; (2) Insert; (3) update; and (4) delete. The application of DDL and DML commands on the database application is not all the same, following a description of the application command at the database application MySQL and Ms. Access: In
This research is a kind of quasi experimental research design Experimental Design "Nonequivalent Control Group Design" which consists of two classes of RPL1 as an experimental class XI and XI RPL 2 as the control class. The research design used in this study is "Nonequivalent Control Group Design", which is one form of the design of Quasi Experimental Design. The first step is to conduct preliminary tests before treatment, then once subjected to treatment in a given period of time made the final test. This design is used to obtain the initial test scores with the score of the final test in order to see the difference in student learning outcomes after application of learning models directly in the competence to understand the language to manage the database using MySQL. IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION In this study it was found that the activity of learning for students who are learning to use MySQL applications significantly higher (0.000 <0.05) with
127
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 an average score of 77.37 (a very active category) than the learning activities of students who are learning to use the application Ms. Access to an average score of 67.87 (active category) Based on the results of studying the affective average scores for students using MySQL applications at 75.93 with excellent category, higher than the affective student learning outcomes by using application Ms. Access to an average score of 73.81 (Table 4.6) with excellent category, through the t test indicated t (76) = 2.325; P <0.05 and sig. 0:02 <0:05, so it can be concluded that the affective learning outcomes of students who learn to use MySQL applications significantly higher 0:02 <0:05 with an average score of 75.93 (very good category) than students who learn by using the application Ms. Access. The average score of posttest cognitive learning outcomes for students who are learning to use MySQL applications at 91.25 with complete categories, higher than cognitive learning outcomes of students who learn to use the application Ms. Access to an average score of 80.35 with complete categories, test Independent Sample t-Test in columns and rows Equal variances assumed Levene's Test for Equality of Variance obtained F = 0,427 with sig numbers. or p-value has a sig. 0.516> 0.05, which means that variations in the population of both groups the same or homogeneous. As a result of the data variance homogeneous, it will be chosen fields equal variances, and on the t-test for equality means dperoleh price t = 6.060, df = 64 and sig. (2 tailed) or p-value = 0.000 / 2 = 0.000 <0.05 or H0 is rejected and Ha accepted. Thus the hypothesis tested by the data, so it was concluded that the MySQL application class higher than the class of applications Ms. Access. The average score psychomotor learning outcomes for students using MySQL applications at 89.15 (Table 4.5) with complete category higher than psychomotor learning outcomes using the application Ms. Access at 85.16 with complete categories, through the t test indicated t (76) = 2.26; P <0.05 and sig. 0:03 <0:05, so it can be concluded psychomotor learning outcomes of students who use MySQL applications significantly higher 0:03 <0:05 with an average score of 89.15 (complete category). Based on the research results, the conclusions of this study are: (1) learning activities for students who are learning to use MySQL applications significantly higher (0.000 <0.05) with an average score of 77.37 (a very active category) compared to activity learning students learn by using the application Ms. Access to an average score of 67.87 (active category); (2) affective learning outcomes for students who are learning to use MySQL applications significantly higher (0.02 <0.05) with an average score of 75.93 (very good category) compared the learning outcomes of students who learn by using Ms. applications Access to an average score of 73.81 (category very good); (3) The results of cognitive learning for students who are learning to use MySQL applications significantly higher (0.000 <0.05) with an average score of 91.25 (complete) than the learning outcomes of students who learn to use the
application Ms. Access to an average score of 80.35 (completed); (4) The results of psychomotor learning students learn by using MySQL applications significantly higher (0.03 <0.05), with an average score of 89.15 (complete category) compared the learning outcomes of students who use the app Ms. Access to an average score of 85.16 (complete category). Based on the discussion of research results and conclusions, it is recommended: (1) For the teacher vocational training eye productive, especially in the majors multiaplikasi, it is advisable to use MySQL applications in the learning process as learning applications is proven to improve learning activities and student learning outcomes, better learning outcomes affective, cognitive learning outcomes, as well as psychomotor learning outcomes; and (2) For other researchers, there should be a study similar to training the eyes of others, so that it can be seen, where the application is suitable for training eye is concerned. REFERENCES [1] [2]
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [9] [10]
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[17] [18] [19]
[20]
128
Ali, 1994, Penelitian Pendidikan Prosedur dan Strategi, Bandung: Angkasa. Aji, 2013. Pengaruh Media Pembelajaran Menggunakan Macromedia Flash 8 Pokok Bahasan Internet Pada Mata Pelajaran TIK Terhadap Hasil Belajar Siswa Kelas XI IPA SMA N 6 Purworejo.Univerisitas Negeri Yogyakarta, Yogyakarta. Andreaa, 2014, The development of an electronic business based on the MySQL technology, West Virginia University. Arends, Richard, 1997. Classroom Instruction and Managemen, New York: Mc. Graw Hill. Arikunto, 1989, Prosedur Penelitian, Jakarta: Rineka Cipta. Arsyad, Azhar, 2013. Media Pembelajaran, Jakarta : PT. Raja Grafindo Persada. Budi, 2010. Pengembangan Sistem Informasi Lapas Narkoba Untuk Menunjang Pengungkapan Kasus Narkoba di Lembaga Pemasyarakatan Pada Puslitbang dan Info Badan Narkotika Nasional. Gunadarma, Cimanggis, Depok. Bloom, Benjamin S., 1956. Taxonomy of educational objectives. Chicago : Longmans. Dave, R.H., 1967. Taxonomy of educational objectives and achievement testing. London: University of London Press. Darwis, 2012. Implementasi Basis Data Terdistribusi Menggunakan MySQL Pada PT Thamrin Brothers Palembang. Palembang. Denton, 2012. Selection and Use of MySQL in a Database Management Course. West Virginia University Denton, 2012. Selection and Use of MySQL in a Database Management Course. West Virginia University Depdiknas, 2002. Ringkasan Kurikulum Berbasis Kompetensi, Pusat Kurikulum, Balitbang Depdiknas. Dimiati, 2009, Belajar dan Pembelajaran, Jakarta: Rineka Cipta Fathansyah, 2012, Basis Data, Bandung: Informatika Fraenkel J. R., Wallen N. E., 2003. How to Design and Evaluate Research in Education, Fifth Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill Higher Education. Gagne, Robert M., 1988. Principles Of Instructional Design, Florida:Saunders College Publishing Haryodi, 1996. Koleksi Latihan Soal Jawab dBase III Plus, Jakarta: Dinastindo Hidayat, Ali. 2011. Pengaruh Penggunaan E-Learning Terhadap Motivasi Dan Hasil Efektivitas Pembelajaran Fisika Bagi Siswa SMA (studi kasus di SMA Negeri 1 Depok) Inan, 2014. Analysis and Design Complex and Large Data Base using MySQL Workbench. Papua State University, indonosia.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [21] Indrajani, 2014. Pengantar sistem basis data case study all in one. PT elex media komputindo, Jakarta [22] Irianti, 2015, Relevance Of Work Skill Obtained By Students In Industrial Working Practice (Prakerin) In Various Types Of Fashion Industry, Doctoral Student at Program of Study PKJ UniversitasNegeri Malang. [23] Kadir, 2015, Statistika Terapan, Jakarta : Rajawali Pers [24] Letkowski, J. (2015). Doing database design with MySQL, Western New England University
[25] Letkowski (2015), Learning problem solving with Excel, Access and MySQL, Western New England University [26] Muslim, Supari, 2003, Re-enggineering Pendidikan Kejuruan Seiring dengan Perkembangan Teknologi dan Tuntutan Pasar Kerja Global, makalah disampaikan dalam peresmian jabatan Guru Besar dalam bidang kajian Ilmu Pendidikan dan Kejuruan FT UNESA, Januari 2003.
129
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
130
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Engineering Development Control Module as A Result of Efforts to Improve Learning in Electrical Engineering Universitas Negeri Surabaya Endryansyah 1), Puput Wanarti Rusimamto1), Mochammad Rameli2), Eko Setijadi2) 1 Faculty of Engineering Unesa [email protected] [email protected] 2 Faculty of Industrial Technology ITS
Abstract - This research was aimed to develop Festive Module Settings technique uses cooperative learningbased trainer to consider the demands of the students to the science of understanding the competence of control and its applications in the field of Electrical Engineering.A completely applications of control in the field of Electrical Engineering becomes an important consideration in this study because it has the aim to topics and teaching materials presented during the learning can contribute the maximum to the conformity of knowledge obtained with the application in the field and improve the quality of graduates of the Department of Electrical Engineering Universitas Negeri Surabaya , With the module and trainers are expected to be used by educators in delivering teaching materials with practical and as a reference for setting technique taught courses. The use of this trainer modules and aims to prepare student to be able to apply the theoretical knowledge gained control over the college in the field of Electrical Engineering so that students understand and know how its application in the field.Modules and trainers who have been made subsequently to 5 validator validated the results are as follows, the results of a feasibility assessment of the module Teaching Subjects Techniques Action Control Basic Control System developed is high. The analysis results obtained from the validator is 79.92% for modules and 76.8% for the trainer. Then tested is limited to 10 students of Department of Electrical Engineering who has been programmed settings. From the results of student responses to the module is 81.36% and 80.8% for the trainer. Festive module so Courses Action Control Basic Engineering Control System for Cooperative Learning Model developed and feasible should be applied to the lecture course setting techniques. Index Terms - Cooperative learning, teaching modules, trainer, control system.
I. INTRODUCTION Department of Electrical Engineering studying plans for the development lab, in particular laboratory control system, the teaching team setting techniques also prepare a plan for the lab development with emphasis on lab module is accompanied by a trainer or a kit.
To answer these problems one of which is to conduct research involving partner research teams that have qualified lab and has a lot to contribute in the field of system settings. Researchers are partners of the Department of Electrical Engineering ITS who already have laboratory control system that can be used as a reference laboratory development and learning devices. The research conducted was to develop experimental module course setting technique uses cooperative learning-based media trainer. From these results the students know and understand the application of regulation in the field of industrial engineering. In addition, it can also motivate student learning in university classes. It is very supportive competence of students before plunging into the world of work, especially for graduates of the Electrical Engineering Department of Surabaya in which will work as a vocational teacher or plunge into the world of industry. II. LITERATURE According Trianto 2007, learning that take shelter in the constructivist theory is cooperative. Cooperative learning comes from the concept that students will more easily find and understand difficult concepts if they were in discussions with his friend. Students regularly work in groups to help each other solve complex problems. So the social nature and the use of peer group becomes the main aspect in cooperative learning. According Sugiyanto 2010, cooperative learning itself is a learning approach that focuses on the use of small groups of students to work together to maximize the learning conditions in achieving the learning objectives. There are six major steps or stages in a lesson using cooperative learning. The lesson starts with the teacher deliver a lesson objectives and motivate students to learn. This phase was followed by the presentation of information, often with the substance of the verbal readings. Furthermore, students are grouped into teams to learn. This stage followed the
131
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 guidance of teachers when students work together to complete the task with them. The last phase includes a percentage of the final results of the working group or evaluation of what they have learned and give tribute to the efforts of groups and individuals. The module is a program unit of teaching and learning smallest detail outlining: a) The purpose of general instructional, b) The purpose of instructional specifically, c) Principles of the material to be learned and taught, d) Status of the function unit in the unity of the program that will be used, e ) teaching and learning activities, f) Statute of work that will be done during the learning process takes place (Wijaya: 1996). Furthermore, according to Nasution (1982: 205) module is a complete unit that stands alone and consists of a series of learning activities designed to help students achieve a number of objectives that are formulated specifically and clearly. The module is a program unit of teaching and learning smallest detail outlining: a) The purpose of general instructional, b) The purpose of instructional specifically, c) Principles of the material to be learned and taught, d) Status of the function unit in the unity of the program that will be used, e ) teaching and learning activities, f) Statute of work that will be done during the learning process takes place (Wijaya: 1996). Furthermore, according to Nasution (1982: 205) module is a complete unit that stands alone and consists of a series of learning activities designed to help students achieve a number of objectives that are formulated specifically and clearly. Development of the device refers to the four D models proposed by Thiagarajan, Semmel (1974: 5). 4-D Model consists of four stages but held only 3 stages alone that define, design and develop. The indicators instrument used in this study refers to the format indicator instrument Fauzi Amin in Siara (2004) cited Purdiana (2004: 28). Your goal is to simulate the usual appearance of papers in ICVEE 2015 conference proceedings. For items not addressed in these instructions, please refer to the last issue of your conference's proceedings for reference or ask your conference Publications Chair for instructions. III. RESEARCH METHODS Results indicators in this study were 1) the manufacture lab module Action Basic Control System course on regulation techniques and 2) the manufacture trainer for practical action on the Control System Basic engineering courses as a companion module settings. The research instrument is a tool or facility used by researchers to collect data so that job easier and the results better, in the sense that a more thorough, complete, and systematic so more easily processed (Arikunto, 1997: 151). Instruments in this study include the validation module sheet and sheet student questionnaire. This instrument is used to collect data for an expert
assessment of the lab module. This assessment is then used as the basis for revising the modules developed. Assessment module validation were analyzed using descriptive statistics in the form of the average score. To determine the level of quality of learning outcomes using test instruments and performance and to determine the level of activity of students using the observation sheet instruments The data obtained in this study were collected through a questionnaire sheet gives validation to the module expert lecturers and professors of engineering experts as well as a questionnaire to the student of 2012 in the Department of Electrical Engineering program and following the lecture Mechanical Settings. Action Trainer Basic Control System is a product of learning media development in this study. With this medium, students are expected to understand the material and able to apply it. If used as a medium of learning the trainer is then used as a test practice someday. It is necessary for validation before being used as a medium of learning and research instruments. Validate the form of logical validity is done by providing validation sheet for lecturers are experts in the control system. There are several expert lecturers in their respective fields for the validation process were: expert trainer design, module design experts, expert control system, and experts substance. Here are the lattice sheets trainer validation response in Table 1. Table 1. Validation Trainer
No
aspects examined The quality and look of the media
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Display Trainer Selection of Size and Shape Trainer Board. Trainer performance In the language Understandable Trainer Linkage media in accordance with Module
Basic Actions modules developed Control System consists of modules and module lecturers students. Student module contains material, practicum and formative tests, while the lecturer modules contain material, practicum, formative test, and answer formative tests. To that end, the module also needs to be validated before use. Forms and methods of data collection module validation together with validation trainer. Here is a lattice sheet module validation response in Table 2.
132
Table 2. Validation Module
NO 1.
Rated aspect Typographical
arrangement
and
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
5.
75
Series1
Figure 1. Results of the validation module by 5 validator.
Results Validation Trainer 100% Series1
Modul…
0%
In the…
50% Trainer…
4.
85 80
Electio…
3.
Results Validation Module
Display…
2.
layout a. The face of the cover has an appeal. b. Face load module element module title, author name, c. Cover picture depicts the contents of the module. illustration a. The information presented clearly legible. b. The sequence of images and text are interrelated. c. The picture is quite clear (not blurred). d. Captions and tables are quite clear. language a. Easy to understand language b. Indonesian language is good and right contents a. The level of the material in the module concept of truth. b. Fill material in accordance curriculum modules. c. Sufficient information on the module. d. Questions / tasks encourage the activity of the students. e. Worksheets on module according to media trainer. Font and size of the material a. Font size proportional and legible. b. The length and width of the module is considered economically module production.
Figure 2. Results of the validation trainer by 5 validator
Student response to the Module Front view Illustration
Figure 3. Results of response module by 10 students
IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Student response to the Trainer
With questionnaires given knowable feasibility trainer devices are made. Feasibility done by responding to a Likert scale, among others, the criteria are very good, good, fairly good, less good and not good. To analyze the answers validator and student response analysis, researchers used descriptive statistics on average scores. Results of the validation by 5 validator and test is limited by the 10 students of the Department of Electrical Engineering depicted in Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 4 below.
Display Trainer.
Figure 4. The result of trainer response by 10 students.
In a media trainer basic action of this control system, there are several functions, among others, to understand the control action proportional, integral, derivative, proportional and integral, proportional and drivatif and proportional integral and derivative. Refers to the manufacturing module based Handbook of Surabaya in 2014-2015 for the Faculty of Engineering Department of Electrical Engineering at the Technical Settings subjects.
133
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Modules and trainers who have been prepared then validated on 5 validator consisting of faculty learning experts, engineering experts and grammarians. From the data sheet instrument obtained an average assessment is 79.92 validator of the modules included in either category. While the results of the assessment of the trainer validator is 76.8 which is included in both categories. From the results of these assessments, the module can be quickly duplicated to the next will be tested is limited to students engineering courses Electrical Engineering Unesa settings. From the results of the student's response is known that the appearance rating tainer 82%, selecting the size and shape trainer board 82%, 84% performance trainer, trainer easily understood language in 80.8%, and according to the media connection module is 78%. So that the overall response of the students to the trainer of 80.8%. Being a student responses on the module are as follows, disposition and layout of 82.67%, 81% illustration, language of 91%, 78% and the contents of the letter and the size of the material to 87%. So that the overall results of the validation media viewed from 5 aspects is 81.36%. From the results of all responses are categorized very well could be concluded, that the students are very interested in the trainer and eager to understand more deeply study the basic action trainer control system to add knowledge about control systems.
Outcomes Quality in the Department of Electrical Engineering FT Unesa developed is high. The analysis results obtained from the validator is 79.92% for modules and 76.8% for the trainer. From the response of the students was 81.36% for modules and 80.8% for the trainer. Festive module so Courses Action Settings Basic Engineering Control System for Cooperative Learning Model developed and feasible should be applied to the lecture course setting techniques. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [9]
[10]
V. CONCLUSION Based on the results of data analysis and discussion, it can be concluded as follows. 1) Has been successfully developed Teaching Subjects Techniques Module Action Settings Basic Control System for Cooperative Learning Model As Efforts to Improve Learning Outcomes in the Department of Electrical Engineering FT Unesa designed using 4-D (four D model) in the course of Engineering settings. 2) The results of the feasibility assessment of the module Teaching Subjects Techniques Action Settings Basic Control System for Cooperative Learning Model As Efforts to Improve Learning
[11]
[12]
[13]
134
Arikunto, S., 1997, the research procedure, Yogyakarta: Rineka Reserved. Basuki, Ismet. (2004). Competency-Based Textbook Development. Surabaya: UNESA. Unesa Curriculum Handbook 2012 - 2013, UNIPRESS Unesa 2012. Ibrahim, the Muslims. 2005. Cooperative Learning, Unesa University press, Surabaya Mulyasa 2004, Learning Media, Surabaya: Surabaya State University. Nasution, H., 1982, Software Development Learning, Yogyakarta: Rineka Reserved Purdiana, L., 2004, the Software Development competency based curriculum Learning Training courses Pilpt material Electric Materials Science, Surabaya: Surabaya State University. Sugiyanto. 2010, Innovative Learning Models, Surakarta: Yuma Library Thiagarajan, Sivasailam.Gemmmel, Dorothy S. and Semmel, Melviyn I. 1974. Instruction Development Training For Teachers Of Exceptional Children. Minnesota: Indiana University. Trianto 2007, Model Integrated Learning in Theory and Practice, Performance Library Publisher: Jakarta. Wanarti R., Puput et al, 2013, Development of Teaching Modules Physics II Course for Cooperative Learning Model as Efforts to Improve Learning Outcomes Quality in the Department of Electrical Engineering FT Unesa, Proceedings STE 2013, ISBN 978-979-028-051-9, Engineering Seminar Electrical and Electronic Engineering Education, 2013, Unesa Wanarti R., Puput, 2012, Instructional Module Development Engineering Software Settings Using Matlab with inquary Based Learning Oriented Industry, JPTE, http://ejournal.unesa.ac .id / index.php/jurnal-pendidikanteknik-elektro Wijaya, A., 1996, Development of Media-Media Learning, Yogyakarta: Andi Offset Yogyakarta.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Development of Problem Based Learning Media in Electrical Lighting Installation Using Macromedia Flash 8 Yulia Fransisca1, Subuh Isnur Haryudo2 1,2
Pendidikan Teknik Elektro, Teknik Elektro, Fakultas Teknik, Universitas Negeri Surabaya Gedung A5 Kampus Unesa Ketintang, Surabaya 1 [email protected] 2
[email protected]
Abstract - This research is motivated by the lacking of students‘ material understanding in participating on the classroom learning activities using lecture method and also less the maximum use of the media to support the learning process. The subjects in the study were students of class XI IIPTIL SMK 1 Nganjuk, whereas the object of this research is the development of problem-based learning model using the software Macromedia Flash 8. This study aims : (1) to determine the feasibility of problem-based learning model using software macromedia flash 8, (2) to study the response of learners, (3) to determine the increase of students‘ learning result after using problem-based learning model with the software Macromedia Flash 8. The method used is a quasi experimental research design with non-equivalent control group pretest-posttest. The results showed that: (1) The results of cognitive learning experiment t t table with an average value of 86.56, while the results of cognitive learning class control t t table with an average value of 80.0. The average value of the affective learning outcomes experimental class is 81.94, while the control group was 79.95. The average value of learning outcomes psychomotor experimental class is 87.08 while the control group was 86.09. (2) The respond results of experimental class students is very well with the average value of 89.29. (3) The result of an increase (gain) experimental class is superior to the control class with the class criteria for high gain 46,67, medium 53,33%, and low 0%, and at the control class the high criteria 23,33%, medium 76,67%, and low 0%.hese instructions give you the basic guidelines for preparing papers for ICVEE 2015 conference proceedings. Index Terms - Development, Macromedia, response, improvement..
I. BACKGROUND Education is a process of forming dispositions of individual or group in maturing human by teaching, training, process, way, and action to educate [2]. Education is a conscious and planned effort to educate student such that student‘s and teacher‘s efforts are led to reach planned learning goals. Problem based learning is a learning which emphasizes in problem solving. Arends [3] stated problem based learning is a constructivism-based learning model which accommodates student‘s involvement in learning and authentic problem
solving. Need assessment which has been conducted in SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk showed obstacles exist in learning process. They are the lacking of student‘s understanding of materials in classroom and the ineffectiveness of learning media implementation. The lacking of material understanding leads minimum completeness criteria (MCC) of student, which is specified as 75, is hard to reach. A proper selection of learning model and learning media deeply influences teaching-learning process. Development of interactive learning could be selected as an alternative of learning media which is combined with problem based learning model. Every useful media by which learning information is transferred effectively and efficiently is referred as learning media. Learning media utilization is expected to enhance student‘s understanding of materials which is delivered by teacher so that student has deep understanding of the lesson. This work utilizes Macromedia Flash 8 as a learning media. By utilizing Macromedia Flash 8, students are expected to be more interested to learn and more focus to pay attention to the materials. Furthermore, in teaching-learning process teacher implements problem based learning model. Problem based learning model assists student to develop thinking skill and problem solving, authentic adult role model and being independent learning [6]. According to aforementioned background, the objective of this work are (1) to understand the appropriateness of problem based learning model by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8, (2) to obtain student response, (3) to find out student learning outcome improvement after implementing problem based learning by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8. This work is expected to encourage student for attending learning activity in classroom and provide interesting learning to enhance the understanding and outcome such that it is greater than MCC. II. METHODS This research is an elaboration of Research and Development (R&D) model since the result is a Macromedia Flash 8 based learning model for Electrical Lighting Installation subject to enhance student learning outcomes in XI TIPTL class of SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk. The implementation procedure of
135
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Research and Development (R&D) in this work is shown in Fig. 1.
n = number of validators p = maximum weight of qualitative value Determining number of validator‘s response Strongly agree nx5 Agree nx4 Somewhat agree nx3 Disagree nx2 Strongly disagree nx1 ------------------------------------- + Validation score …
Fig. 1 The adapted Research and Development (R&D) procedure for this work
In this work, we take students who join Electrical Lighting Installation class as a research population. While the samples of this work are 30 students of XI TIPTL 2 class and 31 students of XI TIPTL 1 class as experimental group and control group, respectively. This work adapted nonequivalent control group pretest-posttest research design which is shown in Table 1.
where n is the number of validator who selects qualitative assessment. The next step after summing up validators‘ responses is to determine the ratio results, which is denoted as HR, by employing the following formula. HR
TABLE I NON-EQUIVALENT CONTROL GROUP PRETEST-POSTTEST RESEARCH DESIGN
Pre-test O1 O3
Treatment X -
Post-test O2 O4
Table description: O1 : Pretest (A preliminary test of problem based learning model utilizing software macromedia flash 8) O2 : Posttest (a test given after implementation of problem based learning model utilizing software macromedia flash 8) O3 : Pretest (A preliminary test of learning process utilizing power point) O4 : Posttest (a test given after implementation of power point in learning process) X : Treatment The validity of learning tools is determined by the value that scored by validators and further is converted to measurement assessment table as listed in Table II. TABLE II VALIDATION MEASUREMENT ASSESSMENT
Qualitative Assessment Very good Good Average Bad Very bad
Score weight 5 4 3 2 1
Quantitative Assessment 81% - 100% 61% - 80% 41% - 60% 21% - 40% 0% - 20%
Source: Riduwan, (2013)
The maximum validator score is determined by multiplying the number of experts to the maximum weight value in quantitative research. This score is formally expressed as follows. ∑ maximum validator score = n x p where:
respondent's responses x100% respondent's maximumscore
HR value is then adjusted to Table I to measure the quality of corresponding learning tool. The measurement response aspect of students is according to their response in questionnaire sheets. Student‘s response is determined from the scoring which is in the range of 1 to 4. Student‘s respon percentage =
A x100% B
where, A = the proportion of students who respond B = the number of student (respondent) [9] Student learning outcome is measured in cognitive, affective, and psychomotor domains. Furthermore, student learning outcome is analyzed according to final test. The corresponding final grade is employed to gain study completeness level of student with the criteria value in SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk is ≥ 75. Based on the aforementioned requirement, student has completed the study if both pretest and posttest grades satisfy the specified minimum passing criteria in SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk, i.e. ≥ 75. In this work, sample data are collected from both pretest and posttest in two classes, i.e. XI TIPTL 2 (experimental group) and XI TIPTL 1 (control group). Both pretest and posttest values in those two classes are then exploited in normality test, homogeneity test, and t-test. The normality test is conducted to determine if population is well-modeled by a normal distribution. The population is assumed to be normal distribution if it is normally distributed which means there are several scores with low, medium, and high values. This work exploited normality test with Kolmogorov-Smirnov by utilizing IBM SPSS Statistics 21. The procedures of normality test/ Kolmogorov-Smirnov test are as follows. (1)
136
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Formulate the hypothesis of H0 and Ha as normal distribution and abnormal distribution, respectively. (2) Determine significance level, α, as 0.05. (3) Statistical test utilizing SPSS V.21 by employing Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test. (4) Testing criteria, H0 is accepted if the significance level > 0.05 while H1 is accepted if the significance level is < 0.05. Homogeneity test is conducted to determine if data are homogeneous. The details below are procedures in homogeneity variant test. (1) Formulate the hypothesis of H0 and Ha as normal distribution and abnormal distribution, respectively. (2) Determine significance level, α, as 0.05. (3) Statistical test is utilized by SPSS with homogeneity test. (4) Testing criteria, H0 is accepted if the significance level > 0.05 while H1 is accepted if the significance level is < 0.05. T-test is conducted to determine the difference of student‘s learning outcome between control and experimental group. The procedures of the test are as follows. (1) Formulate the statistical hypothesis. In this work, the proposed hypotheses are H0 and Ha. H0 is defined as the absence of the difference student learning outcomes between preimplemented and post-implemented of Macromedia Flash 8 for Electrical Light Installation subject in XI TIPTL class of SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk. Ha refers to the presence of the difference the difference student learning outcomes between pre-implemented and post-implemented of Macromedia Flash 8 for Electrical Light Installation subject in XI TIPTL class of SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk. (2) Determine significance level, α, as 0.05. (3) Statistical test is conducted by utilizing IBM SPSS Statistics 21, i.e. paired sample t-test. (4) Testing criteria, according to SPSS test results H0 is rejected while Ha is accepted if tobserved < ttable. III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The validation results given by validators for all research instruments are as follows. Learning Implementation Plan‘s (LIP‘s) score is 92.50; student worksheet‘s (SWS‘s) score is 90.37; test question‘s score is 87.84; and media‘s score is 90.24. Simply, the validation results are listed in Table III. TABLE III VALIDATION RATING RESULTS OF RESEARCH INSTRUMENTS
No
Research instruments 1 LIP 2 SWS 3 Test question 4 Media Average
Sum of rating scores (%) 92.50 90.37 87.84 90.24 90.24
Score criterias Very good Very good Very good Very good Very good
The average value of research instruments validation is 90.24% which reveals it is very good and fit to be implemented in SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk. Student learning outcome after implementing Macromedia Flash 8 in experimental class confirms that the average score of cognitive, affective, and
psychomotor domains are 86.56, 81.94, and 87.08, respectively. On the other hand, Student learning outcome after implementing PowerPoint in control class shows the average score of cognitive, affective, and psychomotor domains are 80.00, 79.95, and 86.09, respectively. According to student response analysis in experimental class for implementation of problem based learning model by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8, the learning media has a very good response with the score 89.29. Furthermore, student cognitive outcome of implementing problem based learning by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8 in experimental class confirms the results of paired sample t-test are described follows. The result of tobserved is -30.914 and ttable is -1.699. Obviously, tobserved is less than ttable or simply, tobserved < ttable. As the result, H0 is rejected while Ha is accepted, that is to say, there is a difference of student learning outcome between pre and post implementation of problem based learning by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8. In addition, according to gain recapitulation table of experimental and control class, gain criteria percentages of experimental class for high, medium, and low scores are 46.47%, 53.33%, and 0%, respectively. On the other hand, gain criteria percentages of control class for high, medium, and low scores are 23.33%, 76.67%, and 0%, respectively. IV. CONCLUSIONS AND SUGGESTIONS A. Conclusions The conclusions of this work are listed below. (1) With the implementation of Research and Development, this work produces learning media which utilizes Macromedia Flash 8 to enhance student learning outcome in electrical lighting installation subjects. The validation rating result is 90.24 thus the development of this media is revealed to be appropriate. (2) The overall responses of 30 students in experimental class to the development of problem based learning by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8 is 89.29. Student responses is therefore showed the development of problem based learning by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8 is very good. (3) The implementation of problem based learning by utilizing Macromedia Flash 8 in electrical lighting installation subjects for XI TIPTL class in SMK Negeri 1 Nganjuk leads an enhancement in cognitive domain. Gain test reveals experimental class outperforms control class by the results of high, medium, and low are 46.67%, 53.33%, and 0%, respectively. On the other hand, gains of control class as high, medium, and low are 23.33%, 76.67%, and 0%, respectively.
137
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 B.
Suggestions According to the result of this work, we give some suggestions as follows. (1) For teachers, interactive learning media is proofed to be media aided to deliver learning materials to students such that student learning outcome enhances. (2) For students, the development of interactive learning media provides motivation and spirits in learning process. (3) Researcher who wants to expand this work is suggested to develop a better interactive learning media such to enhance student learning outcome for other subjects. REFERENCES [1] [2]
Arsyad, Azhar. 2009. Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta : Rajawali. Hakim, Bayu Rahman; Haryudo, Subuh Isnur; 2014, ―Pengembangan Media Pembelajaran Interaktif Animasi Flash Pada Standar Kompetensi Memasang Instalasi
Penerangan Listrik Bangunan Sederhana di SMK Walisongo 2 Gempol‖. Jurnal Pendidikan Teknik Elektro. Vol. 03 (01): hal. 15-21. [3] Marhaeni, Agung. 2007. Pembelajaran Inovatif dan Asesmen Otentik dalam Rangka Menciptakan Pembelajaran Yang Efektif dan Produktif. Singaraja: Universitas Pendidikan Ganesha. [4] Martinis Yamin. 2011. Paradigma Baru Pembelajaran. Jakarta: Gaung Persada. [5] Musfiqon. 2012. Pengembangan Media dan Sumber Belajar. Jakarta: Prestasi Pustaka Publisher. [6] Nur, M. 2011. Model Pembelajaran Berdasarkan Masalah. Surabya: Pusat Sains dan Matematika Sekolah UNESA. [7] Riduwan. 2013. Skala Pengukuran Variabel-Variabel Penelitian. Bandung: Alfabeta. [8] Sudjana, Nana. 2004. Dasar-Dasar Proses Belajar Mengajar. Bandung: Sinar Baru Algensindo. [9] Sugiyono. 2013. Metode Penelitian Pendidikan. Bandung: Alfabeta. [10] Trianto. 2009. Mendesain Model Pembelajaran InovatifProgresif. Jakarta: Kencana Pernada Media Group. [11] Wijayanto, Sri dan M. Haiban Agus S. 2013. Instalasi Listrik Penerangan. Klaten. Saka Mitra Kompetensi.
138
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Implementation of Problem Based Learning (PBL) Model in Developing Data Structure Learning Module to Enhance Students' Competencies Bambang Sujatmiko1, Rina Harimurti2, and Anita Qoiriah3 1
Department of Informatics – State University of Surabaya Gedung B1 Kampus Unesa Ketintang Surabaya 1 [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
Abstract - The explosive growth of technology requires students to have good ability in programming. Learning to write and to implement a computer code is complicated. Therefore some adequate tools such as teaching module and learning tools are required to facilitate these activities. Data structure course introduces how data is stored, arranged, and managed in computer storage to make them efficiently explored. The fundamental materials of data structure are array, pointer, structure, stack, queue, linked-list, recursion, searching, sorting, and tree. The aforementioned materials are abstract and require deep cognitive understanding to be associated with real world. Learning medium is therefore required to guide and to assist students in this learning process. In this work, we propose PBL-Based Learning Module to address this issue. PBL-Based Learning Model is a well-known learning model which is associated with contextual learning. In PBL-Based Learning Model, students are presented with a problem scenario. They formulate, analyze, and generate possible solutions of the problem by exploring new knowledge. At the completion of the problem, students reflect on the knowledge gained which enhance their skills. The outcome of this work is establishing learning tools for Data Structure course by implementing PBL-Based Learning Model to enhance students' competencies, partially in programming subjects. The proposed PBL-Based Learning Module will guide students to solve their related-programmingproblems with step-by-step of PBL syntax to reach the goal and conclude the result. Index Terms – Data Structure, Computer Program, Problem Based Learning (PBL), Teaching Module.
I. INTRODUCTION Education is an important thing for the growth and advancement of a nation. The achievement of educational goals is being a responsible for everyone. This is to say, a new perspective must occur in teaching and learning process. Furthermore, a synergic integration of several aspects should be existed. Competence based curricula which are fully supported by learning model, learning tools, and learning facilities.
The explosive growth of technology requires students to have good ability in programming. Learning to write and to implement a computer code is complicated, therefore some adequate tools such as teaching module and learning tools are required to facilitate these activities. We therefore develop a module of Data Structure subjects which is expected to be a foundation to enhance student‘s competence in computer programming. The outcome of this work is establishing learning tools (i.e. Module) for Data Structure courses by implementing Problem Based Learning (PBL) Model to enhance students‘ competencies, partially in programming subjects. Some studies about Problem Based Learning (PBL) have been conducted. Kadir et al. [1] studied about the effect of implementation of PBL model for student learning outcomes in mathematical communication ability. This revealed PBL for mathematics gain higher student learning outcome than conventional learning in terms of mathematical communication ability for two-variable linear equation in VIII grade of SMP Negeri 9 Kendari. Astika et al. [2] showed the effect of PBL model for scientific attitude and critical thinking. It confirmed student‘s scientific attitude and critical thinking gained by PBL implementation is better than expository learning model. II. LITERATURE REVIEW A. Problem Based Learning (PBL) Siburian et al [3] referred PBL as a learning model which is associated to contextual learning. A learning is defined as a problem by which solving the problem yields student to reflect their knowledge and gain fundamental skills. PBL is also defined as a learning innovation since teaching and learning process optimize student‘s ability in systematic grouping works. Therefore, students are able to empower, reinforce,
139
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 evaluate, and develop their thinking ability in sustainable. As aforementioned theory, we clonclude PBL model is a learning model which leads student to have an active learning. Student is firstly provided a real-life problem. They are then required to solve the problem and create a new knowledge.
B. The Implementation of PBL model in Data structure course Data structure course introduces how data is stored, arranged, and managed in computer storage to make them efficiently explored. The fundamental materials of data structure are array, pointer, structure, stack, queue, linked-list, recursion, searching, sorting, and tree. PBL is applied to this course by the following procedures which are listed in Table I. TABLE I PBL PHASES FOR DATA STRUCTURE COURSE Phases Lecturer behavior Phase 1: Describing an Lecturer delivers learning orientation about the outcome, describes every problem to students important logistic and motivates student to solve problem Phase 2: Lecturer assist students to Organizing students to do define and organize learning research. assignments related to the problem. Phase 3: Assisting to do Lecturer encourages students individual and group to collect appropriate investigation information, to do experiment, and to find solutions. Phase 4: Developing and Lecturer assists students to presenting artifact and plan and prepare some exhibition appropriate artifacts such as reports, databases, video recording, and models. Lecturer guide students to present their findings to others. Phase 5: Analyzing and Lecturer assists students to evaluating problem solving reflect their investigations and process their used process.
3) The module is employed as learning implementation strategic and guidance for learning process in class, laboratory, and training schools where students doing internship. 4) The module is used as PBL model of facilities and infrastructures. Infrastructure is a laboratory while supporting medias for interactive learning process are computer, projector LCD, and application software. B. Benefits The objective of this work is establishing learning tools, i.e. data structure module which is described as follows. 1) To enhance students‘ competencies since teaching and learning process are facilitated by a complete and easy to understand learning module. 2) This module is equipped with programming design example analysis which is applicable for teaching and learning process in class such that Data structure course are easy to be understood. 3) By the existence of this module, the overall learning process starting form organizing learning materials, teaching and learning strategy both for class and laboratory, and student individual homework is expected to be a systematic and direction such that all standards are achieved. 4) The existence of facilities and infrastructure to support the implementation of this modules for teaching and learning process provides more benefits to enhance students competencies in understanding data structure course. 5) By implementing PBL model, students are guiding to solve problems, are organized to do a good research both individually and group, to represent, to analysis, and to evaluate learning process such that students are able to individually solve their problems. III. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY A. Research flow diagram The research is conducted in two steps for 2 years. Generally, the process is illustrated in Fig. 1. B. Evaluation of data structure module steps Learning tools are developed by implementing 4D model [6], i.e. define, design, develop, and disseminate. The details of 4-D are described as follows.
III. RESEARCH OBJECTIVES AND BENEFITS A. Objectives The objective of this work is establishing learning tools, i.e. data structure module which is described as follows.
1) Selecting and determining material topic which is employed as a reference of Semester Learning Plan (SLP). 2) The selected material topics are then transferred as a complete theory, analysis, and design example which are implemented in learning process.
1) Define step is to determine and define learning requirement. In this step, learning objectives and material boundaries are analyzed. 2) Design step is to design learning tools prototype. 3) Develop step is to produce learning tools which has been improved according to experts‘ feedbacks. 4) Disseminate is to deliver learning tools and test it to limited samples. However, this work still works up to 3 steps.
140
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Courses / credit Courses code Requirement Lecturer
: Data structure / 3 : : Basics Programming :
Learning outcome: 1. Students have algorithmic computational thinking abilities such as variable, sequence, iteration, conditional, and function. 2. Students have knowledge about several IT-based learning medias 3. Students have abilities to design a graphic-based computer programming language. 4. Students have ability to utilize authoring software to create IT-based learning materials Description: Data structure course introduces how data is stored, arranged, and managed in computer storage to make them efficiently explored. The fundamental materials of data structure are array, pointer, structure, stack, queue, linked-list, recursion, searching, sorting, and tree. E. Data structure module Learning scenario which is implemented in Data structure course is PBL model with module as learning tool. The design of Data Structure module is as follows. Module comprises several topics as aforementioned. Each topic is started with a problem which is expected to be solved. By solving the problem, students are expected to get ready for deeply learn module materials. This module ends with evaluation test to evaluate their understanding of the topic. According to selected topic, module comprises are array, pointer, structure, stack, queue, linked-list, recursion, searching, sorting, and tree. Each topic is initiated by problems which should be investigated by students and lead them to deeply learn data structure materials.
Fig. 1 Research flow diagram
C. Results Selecting and determining materials topic for data structure course 1) Array, Pointer, and Structure 2) Single Linked List 3) Double Linked List 4) Stack 5) Queue 6) Recursion 7) Sorting 8) Searching 9) Tree
D. Developing SLP for data structure course The aforementioned topic in subsection is then exploited to develop SLP based on PBL model. We give an SLP example for data structure module. Faculty Concentration
: Faculty of Engineering :
F. Validation for Data structure module 1. Calculating average value for each criteria of three validators which is formally expressed by: 3
Ki
V h 1
hi
3
(1) where: Ki = the i-th criteria average Vhi = the v-th validator measurement score for i-th criteria i = criteria h = validator The results are listed in average column in validation sheet. 2. Determining average value of those 3 aspects by employing a formula below.
141
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 VALIDATION DATA ANALYSIS OF DATA STRUCTURE COURSE MODULE
n
Ai
K
ij
i 1
n
N o.
(2)
where: Ai = average of the i-th aspect Kij = average of i-th and j-th aspect n = number of criteria in i-th aspect i = aspect j = criteria ij = i-th aspect and j-th criteria
1
The results are listed in average column for each aspect in validation sheet.
2
3. Determining average value of those 3 validators by employing a formula below.
Aspect The alignment between module and SLP The alignment between module and PBL
3
RTVTK
A i 1
i
3
(3)
3
where: RTVTK = average value of total questionaire validity Ai= the i-th aspect average i = aspect
The alignment between module and module physical criteria
The results are listed in total average rows. In Table II, module validation sheet comprises 8 categories. Module is assumed to be valid when its average score is greater than 3. Otherwise, module is assumed to be invalid when its average score is less than 3.
4
5
III. CONCLUSIONS AND SUGGESTIONS A. Conclusion The results of first step implementation of the development of data structure module are described below. 1) PBL in computer programming requires different procedures comparing to other subjects since it tends to be abstract and highly requires students‘ activities and thinking ability with high order thinking (hot) 2) Data structure module by implementing PBL has satisfied module criteria and is fit to be disseminated to limited samples. B. Suggestions According to the first year implementation of this work, we give the following suggestions. 1) The need of media companion from module in the form of visualization to clearly explain the problem. 2) The need of testing of data structure validatedmodule. The evaluation could be PBL model with 5 phases.
6
7
8
Module presentation
Module materials appropriatene ss
Module language
Module illustration
The alignment between module characteristic and self instructional
Vatotal TABLE II
142
Crite ria
Validator‘ s ID 1 2 3
1
3
5
(Ki)
(Ai)
4 4.00 4.33
2 4
5
5 4.67
1
4
4
4 4.00
2
4
4
4 4.00
3
4
4
4 4.00
4
4
4
4 4.00
5
4
4
4 4.00
1 2
4
4
4 4.00
4
4
4 4.00
3
4
4
4 4.00
4
4
4
4 4.00
5
4
4
4 4.00
6
4
4
4 4.00
7
4
4
4 4.00
1
4
4
4 4.00
2
4
4
4 4.00
3
4
4
4 4.00
1
4
4
4 4.00
2
4
4
4 4.00
3
5
5
5 5.00
4
4
4
4 4.00
1
4
4
5 4.33
2
5
4
5 4.67
3
5
5
5 5.00
1
4
4
4 4.00
2
4
4
4 4.00
3
4
4
4 4.00
1
4
4
4 4.00
2
4
4
4 4.00
3
4
4
4 4.00
4
4
4
4 4.00
5
4
4
4 4.00
6
4
4
4 4.00
7
4
4
4 4.00
8
4
4
4 4.00
9
4
4
4 4.00
10
4
4
4 4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.25
4.67
4.00
4.00
4.16
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Where
Ki
the i-th criteria average
Ai
the i-th aspect average the overall validation average
Vatotal
[1]
REFERENCES Kadir Tiya, Kadir & Hasminah, 2012. Pengaruh Penerapan Model Pembelajaran Berbasis Masalah Terhadap Hasil Belajar Melalui Kemampuan Komunikasi Matematik Siswa: Jurnal Pendidikan MatematikaVolume 3 Nomor 2 Juli 2012.
[2] I. Kd. Urip Astika1 , I. K. Suma2, I. W. Suastra3, 2013. Pengaruh Model Pembelajaran Berbasis Masalah Terhadap Sikap Ilmiah Dan Keterampilan Berpikir Kritis : E-Journal Program Pascasarjana Universitas Pendidikan Ganesha Program Studi Ipa (Volume 3 Tahun 2013) [3] Siburian, Jodion. 2010. Model Pembelajaran Sains, Jambi: Universitas Jambi [4] Thiagarajan, S., Semmel, D. S & Semmel, M.I. 1974. Instructional Development for Training Teacher of Expectional Children. Minneapolis, Minnesota: Leadership Training institute/Special Education, University of Minnesota.
143
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
144
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Benefits of Learning "Make Cake, and Torten Gateaux" Student in Practice Cake Shop SMKN 3 Bogor for Dealing Eraglobalisasi Nisa Rahmaniyah Utami Pasca Sarjana Universitas Negeri Surabaya [email protected]
Abstract -The background of the study is the result of learning to make cakes, gateaux and Torten which is expected to benefit the student's readiness for practice in the cake shop, especially in the face of eraglobalisasion. The purpose of this research to gain an overview of the benefits learning outcomes in practice in cake shop which includes the preparation, implementation, and evaluation phase, students are able to self-employed independent, ready to be jobs with the skills they have ability. This study used a descriptive method. The population is a class XII student Skills patiseri SMK Negeri 3 Bogor. The sampling technique using saturated sample, the total sample of 35 people. The results showed that the benefits of learning outcomes, associated with the preparation phase has average value the percentage of 62% which is the useful, the implementation phase has an average value the percentage of 63% which is the useful, evaluation phase has an average value the percentage of 63% which is the beneficial. Suggestions intended for students continue improve learning outcomes broaden and develop the material has been given searching various references from other sources. Index Terms - Benefits, Learning Outcomes, Cake, Gateaux and Torten, Practice at Cake Shop
I. INTRODUCTION 1. BACKGROUND RESEARCH
This research is motivated one of the core competencies of "making cakes, gateaux and Torten", in which discussed the definition and kinds of cake, materials, equipment and manufacturing practices cake. The expected learning outcomes of students are able to practice back in the cake shop. The learning process is carried out for a change of behavior of students, then the results of this learning to train students more skilled at making cakes, gateaux and Torten and get better results than before and could face eraglobalisasi today. students are also trained to be independent and be self-employed. Results learn to make cakes, gateaux and Torten said to be good if basic competence goals can be achieved by the students. Study results will be useful for students when it can provide benefits and practice in the cake shop. Judging from the students about the value of making cakes, gateaux and Torten, students scored above (KKM) Minimum Criteria for completeness.
(Document Currency value patiseri Continental Cakes Training, Basic Competence making cakes, gateaux and Torten, 2013). Results practicum students may be distributed in the cake shop . Cake shop authors intent in this study is a place where students sell the practice of making cakes , gateaux and Torten . Cake shop itself is located in the school environment , and the price of products offered relatively cheaper , since the purchase of products in the cake shop majority are students of SMK Negeri 3 Bogor . The writer found the problem , students are able to make various kinds of products cake , gateaux and Torten but not describe their readiness , less careful in the selection of materials cake quality , the process of making cakes , gateaux and Torten can not be performed optimally and lack of coordination in the division tasks among group members . Practice makes cake , gateaux and Torten will go well , then students need the knowledge gained . Therefore , the practice of making cakes , gateaux and Torten expected to benefit starting from the preparation , implementation , and evaluation . The general objective of this research is to obtain information and an overview of the benefits of learning outcomes " Making Cake , Gateaux and Torten " In practice Cake Shop Class XII patiseri Program of the Department of Catering SMK 3 Bogor In Eraglobalisasi. 2. THEOLOGICAL PROBLEM AND OBJECTIVES
Based on the research background , research problem can be formulated as follows : " What are the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and cake shop Torten the practice of students SMK 3 Bogor ? " . The aim in this study are : 1) The benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and related Torten preparation phase includes planning practices dishes , standard recipes , knowledge of materials , knowledge tools, determining the selling price .
145
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 2)
3)
The benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and related Torten practical implementation stage includes the process of making cakes , gateaux and Torten . Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and related Torten practice evaluation phase covers product appearance cake , gateaux and Torten in the era of globalization .
in the cake shop at (62%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to the functioning of sugar in the manufacture of cake in practice in the cake shop at (60%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to the functioning of milk in the manufacture of cake on the practice in the cake shop at (67%) were on the criteria of useful benefit results learn to make cakes, gateaux and Torten related to the functioning of fat in making cake in practice in cake shop for (60%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten associated with additional material in the manufacture of cake in practice in the cake shop at (62%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten associated with filler material in the manufacture of cake on the practice in the cake shop at (61%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten associated with blowing agents in the manufacture of cake on the practice in the cake shop at (58%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to decoration materials used to decorate the cake in practice cake shop for (62%) are in useful criteria.
II. METHOD/STUDY THEORY
1. Methodology The method used in this research is descriptive method , the method of research that aims to describe a symptom , events , events that occur in the present . Descriptive research method used by the authors is to obtain a description or an overview of the " Benefits of Learning Outcomes Making Cake , Gateaux and Torten at Cake Shop Practice Students of SMK Negeri 3 Bogor " . Population to be used as research were all students of class XII Skills Program patiseri SMK Negeri 3 Bogor as much as one class and a number of 35 people. The samples are saturated sample . Which amounted to 35 respondents . Where the research is done in an environment SMK Negeri 3 Bogor is located at Jln . Pajajaran No. 84 Bogor . Data collection tool using questionnaires and data processing techniques using a percentage formula . III. RESEARCH/ STUDY
1. Research a. Preparation In Cake Shop as Benefits Practice Results Learn to Make Cake, Gateaux and Torten Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to planning the dish on the practice in the cake shop at (65%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to prescriptions in practice in the cake shop at (56 %) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to the types of products cake on the practice in the cake shop at (68%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten that relating to the selection of wheat flour both in practice in the cake shop at (54%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten associated with choosing margarine good in practice in the cake shop at (61%) were the useful criteria, The benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to the selection of refined sugar that is good in practice
b.
146
Phase Implementation In Practice at Cake Shop as Benefits Results Learn to Make Cake, Gateaux and Torten Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to the use of processing tools in practice in the cake shop at (64%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to the way the weighing flour on the practice in the cake shop for (50%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related by measuring the cooking oil in the manufacture of cinnamon chiffon cake to the practice in the cake shop at (66%) were on the criteria of useful benefit results learn to make cakes, gateaux and Torten relating to methods of sugar batter method in the manufacture of fruits cake on the practice in the cake shop at (62%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to temperature and time used for
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 burning cake on the practice in the cake shop at (60%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to the storage of the product cake on the practice in the cake shop at (72%) were on the criteria of useful, benefits the results of learning to make cakes, gateaux and Torten relating to accuracy in making cake in practice in cake shop for (66%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten related to surveillance to maintain the quality of the cake in practice cake shop for (62%) are in useful criteria. c.
In the evaluation phase at Cake Shop Practice as Benefits Results Learn to Make Cake, Gateaux and Torten Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to the criteria chiffon cake well in practice in the cake shop at (43%) were the criteria are quite useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten associated with rich cake / fruits cake less tender to the practice in the cake shop at (69%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten associated with the assessment of sponge cake less expands the practice in cake shop for (81%) were on the criteria of very useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten pertaining to the assessment ferade torte well in practice in the cake shop at (77%) were on the criteria of useful, the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake, gateaux and Torten relating to the evaluation of the product in practice in cake shop for (46%) are in quite useful criteria. IV. DISCUSSION
2.
Discussion of the results of the research are developed based on the research objectives , literature review , and the data processing results on the benefits of learning to make cakes , gateaux and Torten in practice in the cake shop class XII student Skills Program patiseri SMK Negeri 3 Bogor . Discussion of the results of this study , the authors limit the related preparation, implementation, and evaluation stages . Discussion of the research results can be expressed as follows : 1.
Student SMK Negeri 3 Bogor Judging from Preparation The results showed that the obtained data on the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten in practice in cake shop in the preparation stage . The preparation phase is the first step that must be done in starting something. Preparation in the practice of making cakes, gateaux and Torten in cake shop which includes planning of dishes , recipes, types of products cake , the selection of flour is good, the selection of margarine is good, the selection of refined sugar is good for the manufacture of marble cake , function sugar , function milk , fat function , additives , fillers , materials developers , tool preparation in the manufacture of cake , calculation of costs and determine the selling price , as well as decoration materials used to decorate the cake . The results showed that in the preparation stage is at useful criteria with a percentage of 62 % . The preparation phase is the most important stage of the whole process of practice because without preparation , including planning, other processes in the practice , as well as the evaluation will not run well , in line with the views expressed by Bahri and Zain ( 2010 : 30 ) that " planning is a a benchmark in future planning and work plan in accordance with the objectives to be achieved " , so that students gain learning experience in preparing and planning practices make make cakes , gateaux and Torten . Based on the results of the study explained that the teaching given to students by teachers both theoretically and prakik can provide a change in behavior in the form of preparation useful in making cakes, gateaux and Torten . The above discussion implies that the learning process has been beneficial in the preparation stage to the practice in the cake shop .
Benefits of Learning Outcomes Making Cake , Gateaux and Torten At Cake Shop Practice in
Benefits of Learning Outcomes Making Cake , Gateaux and Torten At Cake Shop Practice in Student SMK Negeri 3 Bogor Judging from Implementation Phase Based on the research results obtained from the data on the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten the cake shop practices in the implementation phase . The implementation phase is a step that is carried out in doing what had been planned in advance. Implementation in practice of making cakes, gateaux and Torten in cake shop include the use of processing tools , how to weigh the flour , how to measure cooking oil in the manufacture of cinnamon chiffon
147
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 cake , methods of sugar batter method in the manufacture of fruits cake , temperature and time used for burning cake , cake baking process , condition good packaging , storage , precision in the manufacture of cake , to maintain quality control cake . The results showed that the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten the cake shop practices in the implementation phase is the useful criterion with a percentage of 63 % The criteria is quite useful is likely to occur because students do not meet the classification of the skill itself , which as of the classification of psychomotor learning outcomes according to Simpson that the authors extracted in wingkel (2009 : 278-279 ), namely perception , readiness , guided movement , accustomed movement , complex movements , penyesuaiam patterns of movement and creativity . Referring to the statement , then the results of this study stated that the possibility of the students have not fully membadakan a situation and initiate a movement which was initially given an example first, then become accustomed movement so that people can be expressed expert This is in line with that proposed by Slameto (2010 : 2 ) revealed that " a mental activity that takes place in an active interaction with the environment , which resulted in a number of changes in the knowledge , understanding , skills , values and attitudes " . Is consistent with the opinion expressed by Saiful (2010 : 10 ) " The process of behavior change due to experience and practice " . Based on the opinion of the expert learning and experience as well as exercises that a person will cause a change in a person . Implementation or movement is to move people to want to work by itself on consciousness together to achieve the desired goals effectively. Referring to the views expressed by Umar (2003: 78), "The movement is essentially an attempt moving person or people to love and to work to achieve the goals set affectively and efficiently". Is consistent with the opinion expressed by Sudjana (2001: 31) argues that "type of psychomotor learning outcomes with respect to the skills or the ability to act after he received a certain learning experience". Based on the expert's second opinion that a skill or ability to act after receiving the experience in order to work to achieve the goals set affectively and efficiently. The above discussion implies that making a cake, gateaux and Torten has provided benefits in the implementation phase of the practice in the cake shop.
3.
Benefits of Learning Outcomes Making Cake , Gateaux and Torten At Cake Shop Practice in Student SMK Negeri 3 Bogor Judging from Phase Evaluation Based on the research results obtained from the data on the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten in practice in cake shop in the evaluation phase . Evaluation is an activity that is carried out after the implementation process is completed. Evaluation was conducted to determine the advantages and disadvantages of either a person or a tool / goods . Evaluation of the practice of making cakes, gateaux and Torten in cake shop includes criteria that good chiffon cake , cake rich assessment / fruits cake less tender , less fluffy sponge cake assessment , assessment torte ferade good , as well as product evaluation cake , gateaux and Torten . The results showed that the benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten in practice in cake shop in the evaluation phase are at useful criteria with a percentage of 63 % . Evaluation is an attitude in analyzing the conclusions and to seek input from an activity performed. Furthermore, supported by the opinions expressed by Yamin ( 2008 : 228 ) that " evaluation is useful to look at changes in the level of knowledge skills , proficiency in the skills and attitude change in one learning unit or learning program that has been done " . An evaluation expected to find deficiencies in practice so that it can be corrected, in line with the views expressed by Mulyasa (2011 : 139 ) that " a number of capabilities that must be mastered learners in certain subjects " . Opinions Sudjana ( 2013 : 22 ) who argued that : "The results of learning are skills that owned the student after he received a learning experience " . Based on the expert opinion of the above , any learning is done and accepted will be the ability of a person and determine in certain subjects . The above discussion implies that making a cake , gateaux and Torten has provided benefits in the evaluation phase of the practices in the cake shop . The benefits gained after learning " to make cake , gateaux and Torten " is expected to benefit in practice in the cake shop . The above discussion implies that making a cake , gateaux and Torten has benefited in practice in the cake shop .
148
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 that the criteria chiffon cake was good with a useful enough category.
IV. CONCLUSION
a. conclusion Based on the purpose of research , data analysis and discussion of research results . The conclusion from this study is : 1. Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten the cake shop practices in terms of preparation, students can feel the benefits which include meal planning , recipes , types of cake products , the selection of a good wheat flour , margarine a good election , election refined sugar is good for the manufacture of marble cake , the function of the sugar , the function of milk , the function of fat , additives , fillers , materials developers , tool preparation in the manufacture of cake , calculation of costs and determine the selling price , as well as decoration materials used to decorate the cake is at useful criteria . The highest percentage of benefits perceived by students are the types of products cake with useful category , while the lowest percentage of benefits that the selection of a good wheat flour with a useful enough category . 2. Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten the cake shop practices in terms of the implementation phase , the students can feel the benefits which include the use of processing tools , means weighing flour, cooking oil measuring method in making chiffon cake cinnamon , sugar batter method method in the manufacture of fruits cake , temperature and time used for burning cake , cake baking process , condition good packaging , storage , precision in cake -making , supervision to maintain the quality of the cake are useful criteria . The highest percentage of benefits perceived by students that product storage cake with useful category , while the lowest percentage of benefits that is how the weighing flour with useful enough category . 3. Benefits of learning outcomes makes cake , gateaux and Torten the cake shop practices in terms of the evaluation phase , the students can feel the benefits which include criteria for good chiffon cake , cake rich assessment / fruits cake less tender , less fluffy sponge cake assessment , assessment ferade torte was good , as well as product evaluation cake , gateaux and Torten are at useful criteria . The highest percentage of benefits perceived by students are less fluffy sponge cake assessment categorized as very useful , while the lowest percentage of benefits
b . Suggestion Suggestions results of this research is based on the conclusion that the authors have described previously . The author tries to give some suggestions addressed to several parties , which are as follows : 1. Students Skills Program patiseri class XII SMK Negeri 3 Bogor The results showed that the results of learning to make cakes , gateaux and Torten in practice in the cake shop already has the ability in the preparation stage to make cakes , gateaux and Torten , the implementation phase of making cakes , gateaux and Torten and evaluation phase to make cakes , gateaux and Torten , located at useful criteria . Under these circumstances can be used as motivation for students to be able to improve and maintain its ability , ranging from the preparation phase , the implementation phase and evaluation phase by adding insight and develop the material given by the teacher and more thoroughly in practice either at home or at school . 2. Teachers of subjects cake , gateaux and Torten Researchers suggest the educators to improve student learning outcomes by developing teaching materials or methods either in theory or practice that will be given to students , and to provide motivation kepda students to further develop and enhance students' skills better than knowledge or skills 3.
Teachers or lecturers Prodi Catering Education UPI Based on the results of data processing and analysis that ties make cakes , gateaux and Torten during the preparation, implementation , and evaluation practices in the cake shop is at useful criteria . So I gave submit to the lecturer in business patiseri lecturers are expected to help to look for business opportunities as well as motivating and sharing. Lecturer gives an insight into the business patiseri to students in order to better prepare for the implementation of business lectures patiseri . REFERENCES M. King, B. Zhu, and S. Tang, ―Optimal path planning,‖ Mobile Robots, vol. 8, no. 2, pp. 520-531, March 2001. [2] H. Simpson, Dumb Robots, 3rd ed., Springfield: UOS Press, 2004, pp.6-9. [3] M. King and B. Zhu, ―Gaming strategies,‖ in Path Planning to the West, vol. II, S. Tang and M. King, Eds. Xian: Jiaoda Press, 1998, pp. 158-176. [1]
149
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [4] B. Simpson, et al, ―Title of paper goes here if known,‖ unpublished. [5] J.-G. Lu, ―Title of paper with only the first word capitalized,‖ J. Name Stand. Abbrev., in press. [6] Y. Yorozu, M. Hirano, K. Oka, and Y. Tagawa, ―Electron spectroscopy studies on magneto-optical media and plastic substrate interface,‖ ICVEE 2015 Translated J. Magn. Japan, vol. 2, pp. 740-741, August 1987 [Digest 9th Annual Conf. Magnetics Japan, p. 301, 1982]. [7] M. Young, The Technical Writer’s Handbook, Mill Valley, CA: University Science, 1989. [8] Departemen Pendidikan Nasional. (2009). Kurikulum SMK Negeri 3 Bogor. Tidak Diterbitkan [9] Departemen Pendidikan Nasional. (2012). Silabus Patiseri SMK Negeri 3 Bogor. Tidak Diterbitkan
[10] Faridah,A. dkk. (2008). Patiseri Jilid 2 SMK. Jakarta: Direktorat Pembinaan Sekolah Menengah Kejuruan [11] Megawati, dkk. (2013). Bahan Ajar Continental Pastry. Bogor: Tidak Dterbitkan [12] Mulyasa, E. (2011). Kurikulum Tingkat Satuan Pendidikan. Bandung: Remaja Roda Karya [13] Yogha,Sudewi.,Yulia. R. (2012). modul cake & recipe. Bandung :Program Studi Pendidikan Tata Boga Jurusan PKK FPTK UPI. Tidak Diterbitkan [14] Sagala. Syaeful. (2003). Konsep dan Makna Pembelajaran. Bandung : Alfabeta. [15] Sudjana, N. (2013). Penilaian Hasil Proses BelajarMengajar. Bandung: PT Remaja Rosdakarya
150
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Direct Instruction Model to Improve Students‘ Skills in Learning Physics at Vocational Schools Euis Ismayati Department of Electrical Engineering, State University of Surabaya [email protected]
Abstract - Teaching-learning process in vocational
schools greatly affects the students‘ abilities to adapt to the technology in their work environment. It means that the learning of science (physics) in vocational schools should be oriented to the students‘ employment. Therefore, teachers have to choose learning approaches or learning models which are appropriate to the subjects they teach. In fact, several learning models chosen by teachers cannot be implemented properly since their implementation needs to be equipped with a complete laboratory. Thus, teachers prefer to apply Direct Instruction as a learning model since it can be easily carried out and adapted to the equipment condition existing at schools. Several studies showed that Direct Instruction (DI) is a learning model that can quickly encourage student achievement, without regard to ethnicity, family background, and socio economic condition. Moreover, the students on the learning using Direct Instruction generally show higher performance. Direct Instruction also make the students‘ initial acquisition can be maintained at the next level, so it can be used to improve their basic skills. In learning physics at vocational schools, those basic skills are needed to improve the students‘ skill of technology and its application in their work environment. In short, Direct Instruction is a good alternative learning model to improve students‘ skills through its five phases that are: 1) clarifying goals and establishing a set, 2) demonstrating knowledge or skills, 3) providing guided practice, 4) checking for understanding and providing feedback, and 5) providing extended practice and transfer. Index Terms - Direct Instruction, basic skills,
learning physics. I. INTRODUCTION The process of learning in vocational schools greatly affects the students‘ abilities to adapt to the technology in the working environment. Similarly, science learning in schools should be oriented to the students‘ employment. Therefore, teachers should be good at selecting learningapproaches or models appropriate to the subject matter they teach.
Physics (science) learning at schoolshould be oriented to the students‘ needs. Teachers should seek how to enrich the students‘ learning experience by preparing and providing learning tools for the teaching and learning. According to Poedjiadi [1], in studying science at school students are exposed to a wide range of facts, and then develop the exploration of the material being studied and put forward predictions. Furthermore, they conduct experiments which are relevant to their cognitive development to find a concept as if they find it themselves or to verify a concept that has been proposed by the teacher. The learning process of science has students to think and behave scientifically. Thus, teachers should apply a learning approach that is appropriate to the needs of the material being taught and in accordance with the students‘ needs. Conventional teaching methods (lecturing, questioning and answering, and giving assignment) is an option in the implementation of the teaching and learning process at classroom, but we recognize that using a monotonous teaching method cannot train students reasoning power and is not oriented to the needs of the students' knowledgedevelopment. According to Degeng [2], the improvement of the teachingquality is not only based on rational studies but also empirical studies. This is in accordance with the demands of learning in vocational schools which prefers the process to achieve the expected results. As stated in the curriculum for vocational schools in 2006, the direction of vocational education developmentis oriented towards the fulfillment of the labor market demand in Indonesia, which refers to the principle of demand-driven. Conventional teaching method used by teachers in the school is not the same as the Direct Instruction Model. Learning activities with conventional method is usually done by teachers without using structuredstages. Activities carried out depend on the teachers teaching "styles". In the other hand, learning activities using Direct Instruction model apply structured stages in accordance with teaching material and students‘needs. The material taught is done gradually until students can really comprehend and understand it. Therefore, Direct Instruction model is very suitable for vocational students‘practices in the laboratory or in the workshop, as well as for physics learning. The use of Direct Instruction model will have the students
151
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 understand the concepts of physics to be applied in the field of technology. II. REVIEW OF DIRECT INSTRUCTION MODEL Direct Instructionmodel can also be called as Direct Instruction, active teaching model, masteryteaching model, training teaching model, explicit teaching model, or teachingmodel that is synonymous with Expository teaching model [3, 4, 5]. According to Lindsay [6],the term "Direct Instruction" refers to the teaching methods which are well developed and grow rapidly by providing continuous interaction between students and teachers. The philosophy of Direct Instruction is that "If children do not learn anything, then the teacher does not teach anything".It indicates that the most disadvantaged student may show his ability if the teacher teaches them. Kozloff [7] stated that Direct Instruction is more than just a series of programs, a way to organize teaching, an educational perspective, or subjects. Direct Instructionis directed from the first word to the last one by a set of verifieddesign principles. Direct Instruction is an epistemology applied by using the principles that explain how people develop (acquiring, understanding, establishing, "gaining") general ideas from examples (eg, strategies to communicate the words during the initial teaching) and how they apply their knowledge in new examples (for example, words that are not so well known). The purpose of Direct Instruction is to communicate logically and technically so that all students acquire the fundamental knowledge quicklyand continually feel successful. Direct Instruction is a teacher-centered learning strategy where the teacher is the primary information provider. In direct learning model, the teacherrole is to show facts, rules or sequence of actions to students directly. This is usually done in the form of face-to-face meetings accompanied by the provision of explanations, examples, and opportunities to practice and provide feedback [3 and 5]. Arends [5] said thatDirect Instructionmodelis a teaching model that aims to assist students in learning some basic knowledge and skills step by step. Arends‘ opinion is in accordance with the results of Ismayati‘s [8] research on the mastery of the physicsconcepts in vocational schools majoring Technology and Industry. The research method used a combination of quantitative and qualitative research method conducted in two classes. Students in the experimental class had physics learning usingDirect Instruction model, while the students in the control class had physics learning using conventional teaching model. The results showed that the students learningusingDirect Instruction Model gotbetterlearning results (cognitive, affective, and psychomotoric) than the students learning using conventional teaching model, especially on the subjects of Electricity and Magnetism
wheretheoretical concepts were given in the classroom and the practice is done in the workshop. Moststudents who had practices in the workshop were able to understand and comprehend the physicsconcept taught and to improve their skills to be applied in the field of technology. Based on the result, it can be concluded that the Direct Instruction model can improve students‘basic skills to be developed on the more advanced skills. III. TYPES AND ACTIVITIES IN DIRECT INSTRUCTION MODEL According to Rosenshine and Good [in the third], the characteristics of direct learning are: 1. Whole class earning (as opposed to small-group learning) 2. Learningorganizationbased on the questions given by teachers. 3. Provision of practice in detail and in large quantities. 4. Presentation of the material in the form of facts, rules and order, can be mastered before mastering the followingfacts, rules and sequence. 5. The formal order in the classroom to maximize presentation and practice. Borich [3] equated direct learning with an effective demonstration that includes activities such as the following: 1. Teachers clearly present the objectives and main points: a) Stating the purpose of the presentation from the beginning. b) Focusing on one thought (point, direction) at one time. c) Avoiding deviations. d) Avoiding phrases and pronouns that are not appropriate. 2. Teachers present the material or content in sequence: a) Presenting material in small steps. b)Organizing and presenting the material from a point that can be mastered before moving to the next point. c) Providing explicit instructions step by step. d) Presenting an outline when the material is complex. 3. Teachers are focus, specific and concrete: a) Demonstrating skill or process (if appropriate). b) Providing a detailed description of the points that are difficult. c) Providing concrete and varied examples for students. 4. Teachers check students‘ understanding: a) Ensuring that students understand one point before proceeding to the next point b) Asking questions to the students to check students' understanding of the material presented. c) Asking students to summarize the main points in their own words
152
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 d) Reinforcingthe elusiveparts for students, through teaching, explanationing or peer learning among students. IV. DETERMINING LEARNING OBJECTIVES AND LEARNING OUTCOMES STUDENTS Based on the opinions of the learning theory experts, knowledge can be divided into two types, namely declarative knowledge and procedural knowledge. Declarative knowledge expresses knowledge about what something is, while procedural knowledge is knowledge of how to do things [5, 9, 10]. Declarative knowledge was relatively static, while procedural knowledge is more dynamic. If the procedural knowledge is activated, then the result is not the retrieval of information but a transformation of information [9]. The use of procedural knowledge often requires mastery of prerequisite knowledge in the form of declarative knowledge. Therefore, students in the learning process are expected to acquire declarative and procedural knowledge, so that they can perform the learning activities with good results. Arends [5] stated that Direct Instruction is designed specifically to enhance student learning of procedural knowledge, which is needed to use to practice the simple and complex skillsand aims to improve the declarative knowledge that is well structured and can be taught in steps. V. PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATING LESSONS A. LessonsPlanning According to Arends [5], Direct Instructional plan includes the following activities: a) Setting goals: Setting goals is expected to be suitable toMager format that a good purpose must be oriented on students and specific nature that can specify test conditions, and identify the level of performance expected. b) Conductingtaskanalysis: task analysis is a tool used by teachers to define the characteristic of specific skills or knowledge that would like to be taught. It is complex understanding and skills which cannot be learned in a period or at once. For an easy understanding and mastery, skills and complexunderstanding must first be divided into several significantcomponents. Task analysis can help teachers in defining exactly what should be done by the students in order to perform desired behaviors. c) Planning the time and space: Teachers should make sure that the available time is sufficient, or in accordance with the action and the ability of students in the classroom. Besides, students should be motivated to stay involved during the lesson delivered. B. The Implemention of Learning and syntax In Direct Instruction, Arends [5] suggested five phases or five basic steps of delivering a lesson. First, the teacher begin the lesson by explaining the
purpose of the lesson and learningbackground, motivate students and prepare them to receive teacher‘s explanation about the givenmaterial. In the second phase,the teacher presentsa subject matter or demonstrate knowledge or skills, and information step by step. Next, the teachers plans,guides the training and provides opportunities for students to conduct initial training. In the fourth phase, the teacher checks the students' understanding of the learningtasks and provides feedback on students‘ success. In the last phase, the teacher provides studentsthe opportunity to undertake advanced training and to apply knowledge or skills learned into a more complex situation inreal life. Slavin [11] suggested seven basic steps of delivering a lesson that are: (1) stating learning objectives and engage students in the subject by motivating students, (2) reviewing the first prerequisite by checking the skills or students' needsconcepts, (3) presenting the subject matter and demonstrating concepts, (4) checking students‘ understanding and responding to students‘ responses, (5)giving students the opportunity to undertake training or practice skills, (6) conducting resultssearchingand providing feedback, and (7)providing advanced training and giving tasks to improve students' memory. If we examine the delivery of lessons presented by Arends and Slavin, both have the same purpose and content. Accordingly, it can be concluded that there are five steps or phases of teaching learningusingDirect Instruction that include both opinions, ie: the teacher begins the lesson by giving the rationalesof teaching and learning, seting up and preparing the students. This phaseof preparation and motivation is followed by a presentation of the subjects taught or demonstration activities of a particular skill. Lessons then continued by giving students the opportunity to practice with the guidance and feedback from the teacher about the progress made by students. In the feedbackpractice phase, the teacher should provide opportunities for students to transfer knowledge or skills taught to be used and applied in real life situations. Table 1. Direct Instruction Model Syntax Phase
Behavior
Phase 1: Telling the objectives and motivating the students
Teachers communicate the learning objectives, give background information and explain the importance of the lessons. Preparing students to learn. Teachers present knowledge correctly, or demonstrated skills step by step.
Phase 2: Presenting knowledge or demonstrating skills. Phase 3:
153
Teachers give and guide the
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Phase
Behavior
Provide guided practice.
initial training.
Phase 4: Checking understanding and provide feedback.
Teachers check whether the students do the job properly or not and give feedback.
Phase 5: Giving further training and transfer.
Teachers prepare the conditions for further training by focusing on the transfer of skills in the subject to a more complex situation.
C. The Learning Environment Settingand Its Management. InDirect Instruction, teachers should create an effective learning environment and organize the learning environment so that students can become good listeners and observers. Thus, teachers should manage teaching planning and its implementation. The learning management system must be well planned so that it can engage students so that the students can pay attention, listen, and recite(question and answer) to the teaching learning in a comfortable situation. Although Direct Instruction is planned by teachers to engage students, this model is centered on the teachersince the teacher plays a role in planning and managingthe learning. D. Assessment and Evaluation. Direct Instruction model emphasizes the importance of compatibility between the testing strategiesand evaluation with specific learning objectives. According to Arends [5] and Nur [12],the use of Direct Instructionmodel is more suited to teach knowledge and skills, therefor there are two kinds of evaluation, thatare written testsof knowledgeand skills to assess declarative knowledge and performance test which assess the development of skills. For example, a test to identify the type of tools for physics practice. This test does not mean students have been able to identify the tools of physical practice, but this information will be known after students had a test of skill by showing the type of tools of physics practice. VI. THE USE OF DIRECT INSTRUCTION STRATEGIES Borich [3] stated thatDirect Instruction strategy is suitable to disseminate information that is not in a textbook or workbook of which composition is incomplete. So teachers should segregate, sort out and interpret the material of textbooks and workbooks into a form that is more easily understood by students. If the material has been written, students can learn the material from other sources freely.And
the teachersonly give an introduction or constructivecomments. The use of direct learning strategies can increase student interest. The teacher direct involvement with the student in presenting the subject matter can provide the necessary humanismelements in learning so that students can actually experience it. Direct Instructional strategies are used to fundamentallyachieve mastery of the material about facts, rules and sequences of action which is essential for subsequent learning. And it is not appropriate to use if the goal is to not about facts, rules and sequences of behavior because the learning strategies can instantly become more rigid, inefficient and ineffective than the strategy of inquiry or problemsolving [3]. The mastery of basic skills in physics concept allows students to develop further skills in technology applications for other subjects. The flowchart of Direct Instruction for learning mastery can be seen as the following:
Fig 1.The Flowchart of Direct Instruction [3]
1. Overview of understanding The overview of understanding in the beginning of learning emphasize on the relationship between lessons so that students can recall their prior knowledge and get new knowledge as a logical development of the content of the material has been mastered. In addition, it is the most efficient and appropriate way to determine the level of student mastery of the initial knowledge to start a new lesson. If students have not mastered the material yet, the teacher can teach it again. 2. Presenting and structuring (compiling) The presentation of new material is done in small steps.The method of structuring or compiling the materials is done through several ways, for example: from the general to the details, from simple to complex, from the concrete to the abstract. Borich[3] suggested four ways to organize the content that is relevant to Direct Instruction, namely: a. Full relationship: Full format is in the form of the most common topic, then the topic is divided into subdivisions that are easily distinguished from the wholerelationship. This arrangement form small parts that can help students to organize the
154
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 material being taught and provide information to students about the content of the existing parts. b. Sequential relations: Sequential setting is that the teachers teach the lessonbased on the facts, rules or sequences learned in the real world. c. Combined relationship (combination): To combine the lesson content is by bringing together the various elements or dimensions that affect the facts, rules and sequences into a single format. This makes the whole framework steer the content sequencebyshowing the logic of some factscombination, rules and sequences. d. Comparative relationship: In thearrangementof comparativecontents, the different parts of the content are put side by side so that students can compare and distinguish. The facts, rules and sequences are placedside by side in two or more categories to make students see the similarities and differences. 3. Guided practice / exercises In Direct Instruction, teachers should provide practical/guided exercises for their students. Arends [5] explained that activepractices can improve retention, make more automatedlearning, and allow students to transfer learning into a new situation. There are some principles that teachers can apply: a. Provide short and meaningful practice: On learning that involves skill, teachers need to provide the students guidance to perform their skills in a short period. If it is a complex skill, teachers should simplify the task since the early stages of learning. Nevertheless,short practice assignments that have been simplified should not deviate from the pattern of overall skill. b. Provide practice for improving overlearning: The criticalskills to future performance is important to continue until beyond the stage of initial mastery. A skill can be used effectively in new situationsonly through overlearning and total master. c. Know the advantages and disadvantages of Sustained Practice and Distributed Practice: Sustained practice is recommended when the students learn new skills, while distributed practice is reccomended when the students develop the skills already possessed. d. Pay attention to the early stages of practice: In the early stages of practice, the students want to show their performance. But the students do the practices inappropriately or inadvertently, so it requires special attention from the teacher at this early stage. 4. Checking understanding and providing feedback This phase is a phase of recitation and a very important aspect in the Direct Instruction because teachers provide meaningful feedback to students and knowledge of the learning outcomes so that the practice becomes useless for students. Teachers do feedbacks in various ways, for example: they give the
feedbacks verbally by recording the action, test, or written comments. Some guidelines for teachers to provide feedback are as follows: a. Give feedback as soon as possible after having practice. b. Give specific feedback. c. Focus on specific behaviors. d. Make sure that the feedback in accordance with the stage of student‘sdevelopment. e. Emphasize onpositive feedback and give feedback on the correct performance. f. Show the correct procedures when giving negative feedback, g. Help students to focus on the process, not the result. h. Teach students to provide feedback themselves and to assess their own performances. When all the stages of Direct Instructionhave been done and the students still need additional understanding, the teachers must teach them again in the next cycle with several additional studies and more in-depth materialcontent. If it is needed, the teachers givecontinuedpractice and additional feedbacks until the student really understand the material being taught by the teacher.
REFERENCES [1] [2]
[3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
[8]
[9] [10] [11] [12]
155
Poedjiadi, Anna, Sejarah dan Filsafat Sains. Bandung: Yayasan Cendrawasih, 1987. Degeng. Sudana. I Nyoman, Pengorganisasian Pengajaran Berdasarkan Teori Elaborasi dan Pengaruhnya terhadap Perolehan Belajar Informasi Verbal dan Retensi. Disertasi tidak diterbitkan. Malang: Program Pasca Sarjana, Universitas Negeri Malang, 1988. Borich, Gary. D, Effective Teaching Methods (3rd ed). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc, 1996. Joyce, Bruce. & Weil, Marsha. Models of Teaching. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc, 1972. Arends, Richard I, Learning to Teach. Singapore: McGrawHill Higher Education, 2001. Lindsay, Jeff, What the Data Really Show: Direct Instruction Really Works! Jurnal Policy Research Institute Report, Direct Instruction and the Teaching of Early Reading, 2004. (Online), (http://www.JeffLinsay.com/EducData.shtml, diakses 13 Juni 2005). Kozloff, Martin, Direct Instruction Is Applied Philosophy. Jurnal Policy Research Institute Report, Direct Instruction and the Teaching of Early Reading, 2004. (Online), (http://people.uncw.edu/kozloffm/ditechprof.htm, diakses 13 Juni 2005). Ismayati, Euis, Pengembangan Model Pengajaran Conductive untuk Meningkatkan Kemampuan Siswa Berpikir Kritis dan Bekerja Berkolaborasi Pada Pembelajaran Fisika di SMK (SMK Kelompok Teknologi dan Industri Bidang Keahlian , eknik Listrik). Disertasi tidak dipublikasikan. Program Pasca Sarjana Universitas Negeri Malang, 2009. Dahar, R.W, Teori-teori Belajar. Jakarta: Erlangga, 1996. Kardi, Soeparman. & Nur, Mohamad, Pengajaran Langsung. Surabaya: University Press, 2004. Slavin, Robert E, Educational Psychology Theory and Practice, Sixth Edition. Singapore: Allyn and Bacon, 2000. Nur, Mohamad, Guru yang Berhasil dan Model Pengajaran Langsung. Depdiknas. Dirjendikdasmen. LPMP Jawa Timur, 2005.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
156
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING AND INFORMATICS
157
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
158
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Design of Expert System of The Republic Indonesia‘s Law Number 8 Year 1999 Concerning Consumer Protection Using Mobile Application Sendra Darmawan1, Robby Kurniawan Budhi2, Dwi Taufik Hidayat3 Universitas Widya Kartika Jalan Sutorejo Prima Utara II/1 Surabaya [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
condition could give benefit for consumer because consumer's needs of goods/services could be fulfilled. But in the other side, that condition could make the position of seller and consumer become unbalance and consumer will be in weak position. To be realized, best part of consumers in Indonesia tend to accept any condition of their goods/services. That caused a lot of rotten sellers try to get more profit using any way to achive it and have no care about consumer's rights or safety. The government as policymaker, realize that needs a law and rules in every sectors which is relate to the transfer of products and services from sellers to consumers. The purely purpose is to protect consumer and increase their status and awareness and undirectly to push sellers become more responsible in running their business. Consumer must realize one thing that they have rights which is protected by consumer protection's law. So consumer can also make social control toward the sellers' business and government. With Law Number 8 Year 1999 concerning Consumer Protection hopeable the efforts of protecting consumer in Indonesia could be more catch attention. Although Law Number 8 Year 1999[1] already established as the reinforcing law in field of consumer protection, however the awareness level of citizen‘s rights as consumers still low. This is especially caused by the level of consumer's education is low. So only little number of people understand the content of consumer protection's law considering the complexion of predicative as well as the rules. The lack of knowledge about consumer's rights make people become irresponsive and impact to the appearance of many fraudulent and violation that had been around consumer. Therefore need a way to make consumer who are best part of ordinary
In the globalization and free trade era nowadays, can trigger the emergence of various products and services that marketable to consumers. The consumers usually easy receptive when there is something detrimental happened even it caused by the sellers themself. Afterwards, this will make the increase of fraudulence things which make consumers loss. The government as policymaker, realize that needs a law and rules in every sectors which is relate to the transfer of products and services from sellers to consumers. Although Law Number 8 Year 1999 already established as the reinforcing law in field of consumer protection, however the awareness level of citizen’s rights as consumers still low. Law consultant who is an expert in interpreting laws and rules, is the right person to be ‘bridge’ between consumer protection’s law and citizens as consumers. Knowledges and skills that belong to law consultant could be adopted inside a system, which is expert system. The method used to identify the violations of law article which is conducted by sellers, is certainty factor that be used by give questions for each criterias along with give the score for each questions which is obtained from the expert. All of the scores would be solved using the certainty factor formula. With the design of expert system of consumer protection’s law based on mobile application, it will make consumer understand their rights as a consumer. The result of this research is a mobile application that can help consumer having more comprehension about their own rights. And also, it made consumers having more selfconfidence to make a protest against the sellers if something detrimental happens and it is because the consumers already knew the legal basis. Keywords : Consumer Protection, Law Number 8 Year 1999, Expert System, Certainty Factor
I. INTRODUCTION The development of economy could be measure from the increase of commercial and industry, which give the incredible pleasure for consumer because there are a lot of product variations. In one side, that
159
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
people, understand the rights belong to consumer. Law consultant who is an expert in interpreting laws and rules, is the perfect man to be 'bridge' between consumer protection's law and people as consumer. Knowledges and skills that belong to law consultant could be adopt into a system, expert system[2]. But remember that not all consumer familiar with the world of informatics technology, so needs a way to make the expert system into a simple form and easy to access. This expert system will use certainty factor method to build it. This method will give score from the user's answer. The score from user and from expert will combine use probability and produce some final score[3]. This system is based on mobile applications. With the trend of technology especially mobile gadget make people become more familiar so it can increase its user, particularly the user of android mobile gadget. The using of mobile gadget not only for communication but also as an efficient and quick informative device. With that excess, the design of expert system into mobile android application will be a wise option.
Eclipse Android Developer Tools and storage of datas related to Consumer Protection‘s Law is using MySQL. 5. Implementation After complete making the application, the implementation is done using the Android Smartphone to run the application and see whether the application in accordance with the original purpose. 6. Evaluation Measurement of suitability with the purpose is done by distributing questionnaires before and after the user uses the application. Then process the questionnaire in the form of statistical data with intention of easily comparison. 7. Preparation of Reports After the test is done successfully, then compiled a report accompanied by conclusions and suggestions. B. System Design Basically this application is made by calculating the value of certainty (Certainty Factor) between selected issues relating to article in Consumer Protection‘s Law. The following system design:
1) On the menu ‘Konsultasi‘, the input data is an indication of the shape of irregularities or violations, first of all user choose one of three categories: the quantity of goods / services, quality of goods / services, or advertising / promotion. 2) After the input of these categories, user will get choices of more specific criteria to describe user‘s condition. 3) The system will calculate the value of certainty factor of each level of confidence in the criteria questions that filled by user. The criteria in the list associated with existing articles in Consumer Protection‘s Law. 4) The system will display the article that has certainty factor which has been calculated, wherein it will be included with the Certainty Factor value. 5) The end result of this application is the article information relating to the problems that fed by user and it also accompanied with legal sanctions.
II. METHOD A. Research Steps This implementation step contains an explanation of each steps used in expert system Law Number 8 Year 1999 based mobile applications, which are: 1. Datas Collection Conduct direct surveys by interviewing a lawyer and literature studies to gather information about the ins and outs of the rules in Law Number 8 Year 1999. 2. Problem Analysis Analysis of the articles and other rules in the Consumer Protection‘s Law, then determine the problem which is the lack of public understanding of their rights as consumers. After that define the needs of expert system to be applied to the application. 3. System Design From the needs then we made the system design to adopt a 'law consultant' related to Law Number 8 Year 1999 concerning Consumer Protection. Where the design will help to plan and create the application. 4. The Making of Application From the formulation of the problem, there is need to create applications that can help people in providing information about their rights, duties, violations, and sanctions related to consumer protection which is contained in Law Number 8 Year 1999. The Android Mobile Application are made through the
C. Certainty Factor(CF) Certainty Factor values obtained from the result of reducing the amount of degrees of confidence (Measure of Belief - MB) with a degree of distrust (Measure of Disbelief MD)[4]. The amount of MB and MD obtained
160
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
from the value that determined by an expert with a range of values that CF: -1 ≤ CF ≤ 1.
b) How much confidence are you that when you weigh the product you buy it does not as heavy as weight listed in the packaging
. (1) In addition, experts also determines the interpretation of the user‘s confidence levels answer choices. In the making of this application, the expert‘s interpretation can be seen in Table I below.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TABLE I TYPE SIZE FOR PAPERS Description CFuser Value Very Sure 1 Sure 0.66 A little bit sure 0.33 Don‘t Know 0 A little bit unsure -0.33 Unsure -0.66 Very Unsure -1
Furthermore CFpakar and user‘s answer (CFuser) will be multiplied.
Then, the user determines the level of confidence to question 1) and 2), with answer options Very Sure, Sure, A little bit sure, Don‘t Know, A little bit unsure, Unsure, Very Unsure. In example user selects an answer to the question Very Sure for question a) and Sure for question b). Furthermore, CF calculation process begins.
1) CF for question a) : CFpakar = 0.69 CFuser = 1 (Very Sure) CF1 = CFpakar * CFuser = 0.69 * 1 = 0.69 2) CF for question b) : CFpakar = 0.95 CFuser = 0.66 (Sure) CF2 = CFpakar * CFuser = 0.99 * 0.66 = 0627 3) CFcombination:
. (2) If there are more than one statements that want to find the value of its CF value, then the merger is done with only two statements in one calculation. 1) If CF1 & CF2, both values >= 0 : ( ) . (3) 2) If one of the CF value < 0 : *| 3) If CF1 & CF2, both values < 0 :
|| .
|+ (4)
.
) (5)
(
(
( )
)
From the calculation‘s result, the problems experienced by user, is breaking Article 8 Paragraph 1 Clause C with value (0.88437 * 100%) = 88.437% ~ 88.44% D. Use Case
Examples: In this application, there are three main categories of problems that experienced by consumers are: quantity, quality, and advertising / promotion. When a user selects the category 'quantity' and in this category there are five criteria that Heavy Products, Product Number, Product Quota, Services Quota and Products Through Order. Each criteria related to articles in Consumer Protection‘s Law. Users select criteria Number of Products as his problems. Number of Product criteria related to Article 8 Paragraph 1 Clause C. There are questions inside criteria Number of Products, as follows:
Use Case Sysem Design Fig. 1 Describe the use case of the system design to be created.
As can be seen, there are two actors namely Admin and User. Admin has can login to the website administrator. Later in the website administrator, admin can add criteria, the question, as well as sanctions and remove criteria, questions and sanctions. While users can use the four menus, the menu to see which applications use guide contains information on
a) How much confidence are you that the size of the products you buy are not same as the size listed on the packaging
161
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
how to use expert system application for users who are having trouble, and see Law No. 8 of 1999. There is also a consultation menu that the user can get the information of article as well as other laws relating to the problem, as well as a menu of feedback that can help the user deliver his problems to application developers.
Fig. 3 shows some pages contained in the server to manipulate datas and see the feedback from the user application.
III. EXPERIMENTAL RESULT Implementation of Expert System Application of Law Number 8 Year 1999 concerning Consumer Protection is run through a smartphone with android 5.0 operating system lollipop owned by the author.
Fig. 3. Administrator Website Page
IV. CONCLUSION The conclusion that can be drawn from Design Expert System Law Number 8 Year 1999 concerning Consumer Protection Using Mobile Application: 1. This application helps understand the rights as a consumer in Indonesia, which are protected by Law Number 8 Year 1999. 2. Based on the user response to the questionnaire, this application gives more confidence for consumers to protest against the seller if there are problems with the goods / services purchased.
Fig. 2. Display Application
3.This application is user friendly. Fig. 2 Illustrates some view when the application is run for the trial implementation. These views are when the initial application is run, the 'Panduan Penggunaan' menu, the 'Lihat UU' menu, the 'Konsultasi' menu, the 'Umpan Balik' menu. Implementation of the system is in the form of display every pages of the administrator website. There is a login page, the Home page-Admin, insert criteria page, insert question page, insert sanctions page, delete criteria page, delete question page, delete sanctions page and one page to see the feedback from users who have used the application. All of these pages can only be accessed by the administrator.
4.The grammar and language used in this application is easy to understand. REFERENCES [1]
[2] [3]
[4]
162
Nurhayati, I. dan Y.M, E. (2011). Perlindungan Konsumen Melalui Kontrol Sosial Formal Dan Informal. Jurnal Ekonomi Dan Bisnis, Vol 10, N0. 1 : 71-76 Marimin. (1992). Pengenalan Sistem Pakar. Jakarta : Elex Media Komputindo. Turban, E., Aronson, J.E., and Liang, T.P. (2005). Decision support systems and intelligent systems, 7th ed., New Jersey: Pearson, Prentice Hall. Yulianton, Heribertus. (2010). Model Certainty Factor – Pengantar. Retrieved February 24, 2015, from http://heri.staff.unisbank.ac.id/2010/12/21/modelcertainty-factor-pengantar
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Design of Game Application ―Klung Your Beat!!‖ Tandra Tirta Wijaya1, Robby Kurniawan Budhi2, Indra Budi Trisno3 Faculty of Engineering, Informatics Engineering, Widya Kartika University Jl. Sutorejo Prima Utara II/1, Surabaya 60113 [email protected], [email protected], [email protected] and become most used application on android platform. Preservation of traditional musical instrument Angklung become one of the things that should be considered to preserve the culture and traditions of the country of Indonesia. Through the media of games on the Android platform, it can be used to introduce angklung to play modern song especially among youth.
Abstract - Angklung is a traditional musical instrument from Sunda, West Java. Angklung made from bamboo which cut in it edge and tied together in a frame, vibrated to generate a sound. Nowadays fewer and fewer people are interested in angklung especially among the youth. This situation happen because the youth is more interested in modern instruments and some of them thought that the traditional musical instrument can‘t be used to play songs which is currently a trend among them. The price of a set of angklung can also be said to be expensive, causing limited resource for the youth to be able to have and learn it. Preservation of traditional musical instrument Angklung become one of the things that should be considered to preserve the culture and traditions of the country of Indonesia. Through the media of games on the Android platform, it can be used to introduce angklung to play modern song especially among youth.
II. APPLICATION DESIGN
Index Terms: Angklung, Game, Android
I. INTRODUCTION Angklung is a traditional musical instrument from Sunda, West Java. Angklung made from bamboo which cut in it edge and tied together in a frame, vibrated to generate a sound [1]. Although angklung is a traditional musical instrument which still widely known among the people of Indonesia and even to foreign countries, but nowadays fewer and fewer people are interested in angklung especially among the youth [2]. This situation happen because the youth is more interested in modern instruments such as guitar, keyboard, drum, etc. Furthermore some of youth thought that the traditional musical instrument can only be used to play traditional song and can‘t be used to play modern songs which is currently a trend among them. The price of a set of angklung can also be said to be expensive, causing limited resource for the youth to be able to have and learn it [3]. Entertainment became one of the important aspects required by any person either from the young to the elderly. Game is one of some entertainment that enjoyed and liked by all people especially by the youth [4]. Android smartphone has also become one of the technology trend that is in demand and has even become a necessity for everyone. This leads to transition platform on various applications into the android platform where the game becomes one of the rapidly growing applications on the android platform [5]
Fig. 1 Storyboard of play game‘s layout.
Fig. 1 is the layout of play game that consists of rectangular blocks which arranged into 2 rows and 6 columns which represent 12 tones in one octave. While the game has run, a circle will appear periodically on top of rectangular block with various types that determine what response should be made by user. 4 types of circular shape are circle shape only, circle shape with arrow, circle shape with rectangle block, and combination of circle shape, arrow, and rectangle block. When circle shape only appear, user just need to touch the circle shape. When circle shape with arrow appear, user need to touch the circle shape then doing swipe according to arrow direction. When circle shape with rectangle block appear, user need to touch the circle and hold it until the rectangle block which show the progress has been fulfilled. When combination of circle shape, arrow, and rectangle block appear, user need to touch the circle and hold it then move his finger following the circle shape that moving along rectangle block toward next circle. Every circle shape which appear will be followed by ring shape which shrink periodically. This ring shape is used for measure user‘s accuracy when they touch the circle with notes time in the song. Perfect position occur when ring shape touch directly with circle shape. The more accurate user
163
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Fig. 3 Storyboard of learn about angklung‘s layout.
touch circle shape, the more score will be get. The user‘s accuracy are classified into five grade which consist of ‗Perfect‘, ‗Great‘, ‗OK‘, ‗Bad‘, and ‗Miss‘. This grade also affect the score which user get when user touch the circle. ‗Perfect‘ grade will give 500 score, ‗Great‘ grade will give 300 score, ‗OK‘ grade will give 150 score, ‗Bad‘ grade will give 50 score, and ‗Miss‘ grade won‘t give any score. Total score that user get will be used to determine skill of user to play music with angklung. We can assume that the more accurate the user, the better the skill they have.
Learn about angklung is an simulation which represent a real angklung and used to shown how to play a real angklung to user. Fig. 3 is the layout of learn about angklung that consists of 12 rectangular blocks which represent each angklung which have sound from ‗C‘ notes to ‗B‘ notes. User can pick one of rectangle block to choose angklung‘s sound which they want to play. Afterwards user need to shake their smartphone to ring the angklung which they pick before. III. IMPLEMENTATION
Fig. 2 Storyboard of compose game‘s layout. Fig. 4 Screenshot of main menu.
Compose game is a feature which designed to give the user ability to compose a game set using song which user have in external storage of user‘s smartphone. The layout of compose game is same with layout of play game, but the circle shape which appear periodically in play game layout will be shown permanently on top of each rectangle block in compose game‘s layout as shown on fig. 2. Every rectangle block represent one music notes which are C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B consecutively from top left rectangle block to bottom right rectangle block. On each rectangle block will be shown 3 circle shape which each of them represent one octave of music notes based on rectangle block that they placed. Upper circle represent high octave, middle circle represent normal octave, and bottom circle represent low octave. To compose a game set, user need to touch the circle shape that shown based on music notes of song which user choose from smartphone‘s external storage. User can do single touch or holding touch on circle shape when compose a game set. Single touch used for represent one beat music notes while holding touch used for represent music notes which have beat more than one.
As we can see on fig.4, Main menu of this game have 4 navigation button which give user an option to choose what activity which they want to choose. Play button used to enter play game menu, compose button used to enter compose game menu, learn about angklung button used to enter angklung‘s simulation menu, and how to play button used to show an menu which contain instruction and information to play the game.
Fig. 5 Screenshot of play game.
Fig. 5 is shown the display of play game menu in the game. When music start playing, circle shape will appear periodically and user need to touch the circle based on it type. At the bottom left part of the screen, there is a text which show song‘s duration of played song. A text which show total score that user get placed at upper left part of the screen. At the upper middle part of the screen, there is a text which show a grade that user get when they touch the circle shape. At the upper right part of the screen, there is a menu button which used to open game‘s menu. Menu in play game consist 3 option which are continue, restart, and back to main menu. Continue used to
164
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Fig. 7 Screenshot of learn about angklung
continue game and close menu, restart used to restart the game, and back to main menu used to go back to main menu.
Fig. 7 is shown the display of learn about angklung menu in the game. In this menu, user can pick one of 12 angklung which shown on the screen to choose musical notes that they want to ring. Selected angklung will be marked by a palm on that angklung. Afterwards user need to shake their smartphone to ring the angklung which they pick before. IV. CONCLUSION Nowadays the traditional musical instruments diminishing popularity because more and more modern musical instruments that have sprung up. In order to continue to survive and got the attention of the public, the traditional culture should also be able to adapt to technological developments. From the results of the implementation conducted showed that the game application ‗Klung your Beat!!' was able to introduce angklung to play modern song especially among youth. In addition, the game was considered quite interesting to play, especially among youth.
Fig.6 Screenshot of compose game.
Fig. 6 is shown the display of compose game menu in the game. At the first time screen loaded, there is no circle shape will appear. Compose will be started when user touch compose button that used musical notes icon. When compose button touched, music will start playing and circle shape will appear then user need to touch the circle according musical notes from song which has been played. Beside compose button, there is a play button which used to play a preview of compose result that user do before. There is also a stop button which used to stop an activity that was running. At the upper right part of the screen, there is a menu button which used to open game‘s menu. Menu in compose game consist 2 option which are save and back to main menu. Save used to save composed game set and back to main menu used to go back to main menu.
REFERENCES [1] Kubarsah,Ubu R. 1994. Mengenal Alat alat kesenian Jawa Barat. Bandung: CV Sampoerna. [2] Staffi, Sulhan. 2009. Udjo Diplomasi Anglung. Jakarta: Grasindo [3] Kamarullah, Muhammad Azmi. 2012. Perancangan Kampanye Meningkatkan Apresiasi Terhadap Angklung Sebagai Budaya Indonesia Bagi Remaja. Bandung [4] Wolf, Mark. J.P. 2000. Genre and the Video Game. USA : University of Texas Press. [5] Lee, W. M. 2011. Beginning Android 4 Application Development. Canada : Willey Publishing
165
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
166
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Electronic Load Control System Simulation for Microhydro Power Plant Generator Miftachul Ulum1, A. Fiqhi Ibadillah1, Diana Rahmawati1 , Haryanto1 1
Electrical Engineering University of Trunojoyo Madura JL. Raya Telang PO Box 2 Kamal Bangkalan Madura [email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
Abstract - An Electronic Load Controller (ELC) is
an electronic device that keeps the speed of synchronous generator constant at varying load conditions. The generator is driven by unregulated turbine with constant power output and a dummy ballast load is connected across the generator terminals to dump the excess of power generated. When the consumer‘s load changes, frequency of generated voltage changes. This research deals with the electronic load control settings prototype using a microcontroller ATMega 16. Load control is used to reduce the overloading of the generator by using firing angle control. The triac is used to control the power consumed by ballast of each phase and the change in load in one phase doesn‘t affect the dummy power consumption of other phases. The simulation and experimental results show that the developed ELC works very well. The frequency of the system is nearly constant. This shows that the proposed scheme has eliminated the problem of overloading of the generator in micro hydro power plant.
used instead of oil pressure governor in order to reduce the high cost of governor. MHP is run off river type plant without reservoir at headrace and turbine is operated at constant head and discharge. The plant capacity is designed for minimum discharge available at dry season. There is no meaning of saving the water during light load period. Frequency variation of ±2% and terminal voltage variation of ±5% from their nominal rated values are generally acceptable in MHP schemes [3].
Load
An Electronic Load Controller (ELC) is an electronic device that keeps the speed of synchronous generator constant at varying load conditions. The generator is driven by unregulated turbine with constant power output and a dummy ballast load is connected across the generator terminals to dump the excess of power generated. When the consumer‘s load changes, frequency of generated voltage changes. The frequency is sensed and compared with the reference frequency and error so obtained is utilized to control power consumed by ballast load so that generator always operates at its full rating, resulting in constant speed [4].
Micro-hydro power plant (MHPP) was one of the earliest small scale renewable energy technologies to be developed, and is still an important source of energy today [1]. It has the potential to produce an important share of power more than solar or wind power with a low price. Generation capacity of micro hydropower plants ranges from 0.2KW to 100KW and are thought to be ideal renewable resources to electrify isolated rural communities, particularly, in developing countries [2]. Micro Hydro Power (MHP) plant is one of the most economical and environmental friendly technology of energy supplement in rural area. MHP fulfills the electrical energy demand in rural area which is not served from national grid due to the higher cost of transmission line. So, all the MHP plants are operated in isolated mode. MHP designers always try to design the MHP at a lower possible cost. Therefore, Electronic Load Controller (ELC) is
Various types of electronic load controller so far developed are reported in the literature [5]. The ELC developed so far works on frequency balance technique in which the ballast of each phase is fired with same firing angle. So, all ballast loads consume equal power resulting to overloading of synchronous generator for unbalanced loads and oversized generators are selected to overcome this problem. This research deals with the electronic load control settings prototype using a microcontroller ATMega 16. Load control is used to reduce the overloading of the generator by using firing angle control. The triac is used to control the power consumed by ballast of each phase and the change in load in one phase doesn‘t affect the dummy power consumption of other phases. II. Proposed Scheme ELC is used to consume the excess of power delivered by the synchronous generator. The ELC proposed in the scheme consumes power in such a way that the excessive power of particular phase is
Keywords: microhidro, Control, firing angle
Electronic
I. INTRODUCTION
167
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 dissipated in the ballast of the respective phase. So, the generator is not overloaded. c. Generator
power waveform to measure the number of oscillations or pulses per second. Function Generator with 555 timer
consumer s load
Zero Crossing Detector
DC Power Supply
AT Mega 16 : Frequency sensor
Display
AT Mega 16 : Triac Firing Angle
Triac s Driver
Dummy Load
Fig. 1 Hardware‘s Block Diagram The input of this system are zero crossing detector and the generator grid frequency sensor. For data Fig 4. Function generator with 555 timer processing and controller, we used a microcontroller ATMega 16. Then the output of the system is connected with a triac driver to control the dummy A sine wave generator is a device which can generate sine waves. load firing angle. Each block function : Sine waves are waveforms which alternate in values a. Zero Cross Detector A zero-crossing detector is used to generate a sync during a cycle. It has a peak value, the highest pulse related to the AC voltage phase angle amplitude it attains and a trough value, the lowest amplitude it obtains. The sine wave in between the often used in power control circuits. peak and trough takes on an infinite number of values in between the peak and trough value. Sine waves are actually very common. One of the most frequent places you will find them is in household electricity sockets. Out of household electricity sockets comes out AC sine voltage signals. In the United States, the sine waves have a frequency of 60Hz, meaning there are 60 cycles in a second. In countries throughout the world, the frequency is either 50Hz or 60Hz. In the United States, the amplitude of AC voltage is 120V or 240V. Throughout the world it varies from as low as 110V to 240V.
Fig 2. Zero Cross Detector Using AVR
You will also see sine waves in function generators. Function generators usually can output AC signals in sine wave, square wave, or triangle waveform[7].
Fig. 3 Zero Cross Detector‘s testing b. Frequency Sensor A frequency counter is an electronic instrument, or component of one, that is used for measuring frequency. Frequency counters usually measure the number of oscillations or pulses per second in a repetitive electronic signal(Hertz). We use microcontroller ATMega 16, Code Vision frequency sensor and zero crossing detector circuit to detect the zero point of the AC
d. Display 7 segment The 7-segment display, also written as ―seven segment display‖, consists of seven LEDs (hence its name) arranged in a rectangular fashion as shown. Each of the seven LEDs is called a segment because when illuminated the segment forms part of a numerical digit (both Decimal and Hex) to be displayed. An additional 8th LED is sometimes used within the same package thus allowing the indication of a decimal point, (DP) when two or more 7-segment displays are connected together to display numbers greater than ten. e. Triac‘s firing angle Triac firing angle control circuit is designed to control flow of AC power from input supply to load
168
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 by changing the average voltage appearing across load. In this project triac firing angle is controlled to control amount of power flow to load. Firing angle control circuit is designed using analog electronics components like operational amplifier, resistor and capacitor. Zero crossing detection, step down transformer , rectifier , comparator and ramp generator are the basic componnets of firing angle control circuit for triac. Triac have many applications in power electronics especially in AC voltage controller circuits.
Fig 5. Logic for firing angle generation Fig. 5 shows the logic behind the firing angle generation for the ballast of each phase. The frequency of the generated voltage is compared with the reference frequency i.e. 50 Hz. The error so obtained is fed to the controller [6]. The controller generates firing angle to balance the frequency of the generated voltage. Moreover, the load current of each phase is fed to the microcontroller. Inside the microcontroller, each phase load current is compared with the rated generator current i.e. 23A for 16KVA generator. This error current of each phase should flow through the ballast of respective phase to balance the generator terminal currents. In order to flow this desired current through ballast, the firing angle is calculated inside the microcontroller using equation (3). Equation (1) and equation (2) give the output voltage and current of the chopped waveform for different values of firing angle for the resistive ballast load [5]. Using data of output chopped current and firing angle obtained from equation (2), the equation (3) has been derived using regression method. Equation (3) gives the value of firing angle alpha for a particular value of current. In this way, the microcontroller generates the firing angle for the ballast of each phase using equation (3) which balances the phase current of the generator. Finally, the firing angle generated by microcontroller for each phase is added with the firing angle generated by the controller. The firing angle so obtained for each phase fires the ballast of respective phase. In this way, both the generator terminal currents and frequency are balanced without causing overload to the generator even in unbalanced load[8]. 0
1
Io =
=
0
1
⁄
(2)
(3) Where, =output rms voltage of the chopped waveform =input rms voltage for the thysristor =output rms current of the chopped waveform of the ballast
The required value of ballast load resistance is calculated as follows: Line to line voltage (VL) = 400 V Generator full load current (Iphase) = = = 23A Consumer load per phase (Pphase) = 5 KW Ballast resistance per phase (Rballast)=
=
= 9.45Ω ≈ 9 Ω f.
Triac‘s driver
Fig 6. Triac‘s Driver MOC3021 Opto Triac Driver, Opto-isolator, Triac Driver output 400V peak. This is useful in 220V AC application where microcontroller should be isolated from AC main lines. It should not be used directly with AC line see more in datasheet. III. Implementation and Discussion Prototype testing shown at the figure below :
⁄
(1)
169
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Voltage (Volt) 275 273 270 253 240 220
(Lamp) (Watt) 0 25 60 85 145 205
Load (Watt) 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Hz) 75 66 60 55 53 51
Table 2. Testing Result With Control Circuit
Fig 7. Prototype testing Fig. 7 shows the overall hardware circuit diagram of ELC. It consists of a frequency sensor, three zero crossing detectors, offset and triac firing circuits. The overall programming is done in ATMEGA32 microcontroller. The frequency sensor senses the frequency of the generated voltage by synchronous generator. The zero crossing detector circuit detects the zero crossing points of ac voltage of each phase which is used as reference point for gate signal for firing triac. The microcontroller can measure voltage only but not current. So the consumers‘ load current is measured with the help of transducer called current probe which converts alternating current to equivalent AC voltage. This ac voltage cannot be directly fed to microcontroller. The offset circuit offsets the AC voltage obtained from the current probe and converted to DC signal and by using root mean square formula the current is calculated by microcontroller. Finally, the microcontroller generates the firing angle ―α‖ by using the technique used in simulation and fires the triac so that the extra power generated are dumped in the ballast load of respective phases. Prototype test generate by combine genset, zero cross detector, frequency sensor, firing angle circuit, lamp as load, dummy load, and triac‘s driver. The prototype was tested with square wave generator frequency circuit using IC 555 between 4951 Hz, the amount of ballast remain on the amount of the time, if the frequency is increased, the number will increase by 1 after 1 second, if the frequency is still above 51 Hz, the be adding more ballast amount equal to 1 stage, but if the frequency below 49 Hz, the amount of ballast will be reduced by 1 stage and if the frequency of 49-51 Hz has been reached then the addition will be terminated. It can be seen the results of testing of the system before and after the firing angle control by using a heating element and a load of incandescent lamps with varying power.
Testing Result with Control Circuit Generator Load Dummy Frequency Voltage (Lamp) Load (Hz) (Volt) (Watt) (Watt) 210 0 210 49 219 25 180 50 218 60 140 50 218 85 127 50 220 145 68 49 220 205 0 51 From table 1 we know that if generator run without load result generator voltage is 275 volt and frequency is 75 Hz, if with 205 Watt lamp load, generator voltage is 220 volt and frequency is 51 Hz. Then we test this prototype with control circuit which use dummy load. This test shown at table 2, result a stable generator voltage between 210 volt-220 volt, and frequency between 49-51 Hz.
IV. Conclusion The simulation and experimental results show that the developed ELC works very well. The frequency of the system is nearly constant. This shows that the proposed scheme has eliminated the problem of overloading of the generator in micro hydro power plant.
REFERENCES [1] I. Salhi, S. Doubabi, ―Fuzzy Controller for Frequency Regulation and Water Energy Save on Micro-Hydro Electrical Power Plants,‖ International Renewable Energy Congress, Tunisia, November 2009. [2] M.A. Wazed, Shamsuddin A., ―A feasibility study of micro hydroelectric power generation at sapchari waterfall, Kharachari ‖, Journal of Applied science, pp 372-376, 2009. [3]
[4]
[5]
Table 1. Testing Result Without Control Circuit Testing Result without Control Circuit Generator Load Dummy Frequency
[6] [7]
170
I.Tamrakar, L.B. Shilpakar, B.G. Fernandes and R. Nilsen, ―Voltage and frequency control of parallel operated synchronous generator and induction generator with STATCOM in micro hydro scheme,‖ IET Generation, Transmission, Distribution., vol. 1, pp. 743-750, September 2007. Adam Harvey, Andy Brown, Priyantha Hettiarachi and Allen Inversin ―Micro hydro design manual‖ Intermediate Technology Publications, 1993. Prof. I. Tamrakar, ―Development Stages of ELC for MicroHydro Power Plant, E-novation, Vol. 2, pp-1, 2002. Ogata, K. 2005. Modern Control Engineering. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall. Rashid, M. H. 2004. Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices, and Applications. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [8] Shrestha, Dipesh, et. Al. ―Advance Electronic Load Controller for Micro Hydro Power Plant‖, Journal of Energy and Power
171
Engineering
8
(2014)
1802-1810
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
172
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Protection System of Over Current Disturbance By Using Sensor ACS712ELC-5A Bambang Suprianto Department of Electrical Engineering, State University of Surabaya [email protected]
Abstract - Protection system, is one of the most vital things in electricity. Protection system is used to maintain continuity of electrical power supply and secure either the equipment of electricity grid and the electric load or consumers due to a disturbance. Over current protection system by using sensor ACS712ELC5A is designed to fulfill the performance of the protection system. This research is aimed to (1) design over current protection system by using sensor ACS712ELC-5A, and (2) determine the accuracy of the over current protection system by using sensors ACS712ELC-5A. The research method was experimental / descriptive research which was modified. The testing was performed by using ready-made miniature entitled ―Over Current Protection System by Using Sensor ACS712ELC-5A‖. The analysis used in this research is the analysis of the error factor, by using the formula , where this error occurs on the precision and thoroughness. The results of this research indicate that: (1) over current protection system by using sensor ACS712ELC5A can function well in the protection system, (2) the accuracy of over current protection system using sensor ACS712ELC-5A is 94,8% in Bus A and 94,4% in Bus B. Within these results, it appears that the system is wellfunctioned. Index Terms - Accuracy System, Miniature, Protection System, Current System.
I. INTRODUCTION Protection system is one of the most vital things in electricity. Protection system is used to maintain continuity of electrical power supply and secure either the equipment of electricity grid and the electric load or consumers due to a disturbance. In electrical installation, frequently, the equipment which will be installed by the installer in electrical installation can be damaged, either those equipments cannot function well, not matched with the standard, or how it works is not as expected. Those equipments are miniature circuit breaker (MCB) and automatic fuse. MCB serves to limit the current supplied to the customers and secure it from over current and short circuit. MCB works using a bimetal thermal element wrapped by heating wire that is functioning when over current occurs which causes a rise in temperature of the conductors or equipments. Over current protection is by using sensor ACS 706ELC. In this tool, there is sensor ACS706ELC-20
that can function to read the current which is being consumed. This research has an advantage in which it can perform more accurate securing against the interference of over currents than the conventional one, MCB. II. LITERATURE REVIEW Protection system is very helpful to: 1. Avoid or reduce damage to the equipments due to disturbances (abnormal condition of the operating system). The faster reaction of the protection device is used, the less the effect of disruption to the possibility of damage to the equipments. 2. Quickly localize the area that has been affected, as small as possible. 3. It can provide electrical services with high reliability to consumers and also good electrical quality. 4. It secures humans against the dangers caused by electricity. MCB is the electrical installations safety from over current interference that may cause heat to conductors and equipments installed on the installation. MCB works by terminating installation channels from the source, the termination process is using thermal elements and electromagnetic elements. The current sensor from ACS712 family is the solution to the current reading in the world of industrial, automotive, commercial, and communication systems. This sensor is typically used to control motors, electrical load detection, switchedmode power supplies and overload protection. This sensor has a reading with high precision, because there is a series of low-offset linear hall with a trajectory made of copper in it. The accuracy of the sensor readings are optimized by means of the installation of the components inside the conductor that generates a magnetic field with the hall transducer adjacently. Exactly, low proportional voltage will stabilize Bi CMOS Hall IC that has been created inside to get high accuracy by the manufacturer.
173
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 III. METHOD The research method was experimental / descriptive research which was modified. ―The research methods include non-hypothetical, so that the research step does not require the formulation of hypothesis, in which the data testing is compared to a criterion or standard that has been set formerly at the time of the preparation of the study design‖. (Suharsimi, 1998:245).
The output of the sensor is filtered by using a series of thevenin as an inductance barrier in order to obtain appropriate voltage due to the sensor output voltage is still a sine wave. The output is then rectified, the result of the sensor output voltage rectification is subsequently strengthened by using non inverting Op-Amp. In addition as an amplifier, non inverting Op-Amp also serves as a shaper of the reference voltage at 0 volts when the current is 0 Amperes (See fig. 2, 3 and fig. 4).
A. System Definition At this stage, things that are required in making protection system of over current disturbance using sensor ACS712ELC-5A, are: (1) light bulb, as the factor of over current disturbance. (2) sensor ACS712ELC-5A, as a detector of over current disturbance. (3) HRS4 relay which is used as an AC voltage switch B. System Design The system works starts from the reading of the flowing current in the grid to the sensor ACS712ELC-5A through pin 1 and pin 2 to pin 3 and pin 4. This current sensor output is in the form of an analog voltage linearly up and down. The greater the flowing current to the current sensor, the greater the voltage generated by the sensor, with the initial voltage sensor is 2.5 volts during the reading 0 Amperes. The output of the sensor is filtered by using a series of tevenin as an inductance barrier in order to obtain appropriate voltage due to the sensor output voltage is still a sine wave. The output is then rectified, the result of the sensor output voltage rectification is subsequently strengthened by using non inverting Op-Amp. In addition as an amplifier, non inverting Op-Amp also serves as a shaper of the reference voltage at 0 volts when the current is 0 Amperes. Op-Amp output is connected to the LM311 comparator to receive the appropriate voltage protection system. The comparator output is connected to TIP122 as a switch locker series of protection system. The composition of power supply circuit is composed of a DC jack, polar capacitors, ceramic capacitors and IC regulators 7805 and 7905. IC Regulator 7805 is used so that the output voltage is precisely at 5V, and also regulator 7905 regulator is used so that the output voltage is precisely at 5V (see Figure 1).
Fig. 2 Circuit of sensor ACS712ELC-5A.
Fig. 3 Circuit of Op-Amp LM741
The comparator output is connected to TIP122 as a switch locker series of protection system.
Fig. 1 Circuit of Power Supply. Fig. 4 Circuit of Comparator LM311
174
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The output of the comparator provides high and low values that trigger the working of the timer IC 555, when the comparator is high, IC 555 is not working, and when it is low, IC 555 will work that provides impulse to IC 4017, when it is in standby
position, the value is low. When the reset button is pushed, the value is high (See fig. 5).
TABLE I EXAMPLES OF OBSERVATION OF IMPOSITION
TABLE II WORK VOLTAGE OF BREAKER SERIES OF AC LOAD
TABLE III OBSERVATION RESULTS OF IMPOSITION ON BUS A
Fig. 5 Circuit of Locker
IV. TESTING
Relay HRS4 is used as a breaker that has a maximum current of 15A and a maximum voltage of 240 V. This relay serves as an AC voltage switch (See fig. 6).
Test is carried out by using a ready-made miniature entitled ―Prevention of Fire Building Protection System Due the Over Current Disturbance by Using Sensor ACS712ELC-5A.‖ The data analysis which was used was quantitative analysis.
Fig. 6 Circuit of Relay HRS4
175
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
TABLE V ERROR PERCENTAGES OF IMPOSITION ON BUS A
TABLE VI ERROR PERCENTAGES OF IMPOSITION ON BUS B
In this study, the research results are visualized through making tables and explanations. V. DATA ANALYSIS
The analysis used in this research is the analysis of the error factor, where the error that may occur is regarding the accuracy and thoroughness. ―The accuracy is defined as a measurement of the ability to obtain a similar measurement results. By providing a specific value for a variable, precision is the level of measurement that show differences in the measurements results that are performed in sequence. Meanwhile, accuracy is the closest value to an instrument reading that is closer to the actual value of the measured variable‖
VI. DISCUSSION At the validation system, the checking of tool working is performed wholly. This validation is done to prove that all of the components and the circuit have been as expected. The testing is using the load of an incandescent bulb @ 60 Watt in the test series 2-level protection in the setting for a bus at 1 Ampere and bus B at 2 Ampere. From Table 3 and Table 4, the performance of the system were observed, by doing an experiment with different current limits, with the available data used to calculate the % of the errors of the calculation results with observations or measurements by using the formula as follows (see Table 5). Table 5. The calculation of system performance in Bus A is done, and the result shows that errors average percentages are 5,2 %, so the protection precision accuracy is 94.8%. With this high accuracy, it can be said the system can work well. Table 6. The calculation of system performance in Bus B is done, and the result shows that errors average percentages are 5,6 %, so the protection precision accuracy is 94,4%. With this high accuracy, it can be said the system can work well.
(Cooper, 1999:1). With the pattern is as follows: In which: Icount = Current calculation results, Ireal = Current measurement results
Fig. 7 Comparison Chart of the Measurement of Current Calculation and Tangible Current on Bus B TABLE IV OBSERVATION RESULTS OF IMPOSITION ON BUS B
176
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [2] Belarminus, Robertus. 2012. ―Ini Penyebab Kebakaran Hebat di Kapuk Muara‖ Kompas.com. (html://Kompas.com. html, diakses 28 Februari 2013). [3] Hani, Slamet. 2009. Proteksi Arus Lebih Dengan Menggunakan Sensor ACS 706ELC. Jurnal Teknologi, (Online), Vol. 2, No. 2, (http://jurtek.akprind.ac.id, diakses 28 Februari 2013). [4] Kompas. 2013. ―Sistem Proteksi Tidak Sesuai Standar‖. Kompas.com. (html://Kompas.com. html, diakses 28 Februari 2013). [5] Listrik, Dunia. 2008. Dasar-dasar Sistem Proteksi. Artikel Ilmiah (Online). (http://dunialistrik.blogspot.com/2008/11/dasar-dasar-sistemproteksi.html. [6] Natsir, M. t.t. Materi Kursus Peneraan kWh dan MCB. Pandaan: P.T. PLN (PERSERO) UDIKLAT M. [7] Penyusun, Tim. 2006. Panduan Penulisan dan Penilaian Skripsi Universitas Negeri Surabaya. Surabaya: University Press Unesa. [8] Rohmah, Alfiyyatur. 2012. ―Selama 2012, Terjadi 1.008 Kebakaran di Jakarta‖. Kompas.com. (html://Kompas.com. html, diakses 28 Februari 2013). [9] Zulfikar, Viki. 2012. Aplikasi Modem Wavecom M1306B Q24 + RS232 dengan Website Sebagai Media Kontrol Motor Stepper dan Led 8 Bit Menggunakan Mikrokontroler Atmega 162. Skripsi tidak diterbitkan. Surabaya: JTE FT Unesa.
VII.CONCLUSION Protection system of over current disturbance by using sensor-5A ACS712ELC can work well in the protection system. The accuracy of protection system by using sensor ACS712ELC-5A is 94.8% on Bus A and 94.4% on Bus B. With this high accuracy, it appears that the system can work well. It is advised to develop the microcontrollers so that it can summarize the work system comparator and locker circuits. Besides, LCD appearances have to be developed as a substitute for Analog Ammeter in order to increase the accuracy of measurement readings. REFERENCES [1]
Allegro Micro Systems, Inc. 2012. Fully Integrated, Hall Effect-Based Linear Current Sensor IC with 2.1 kVRMS Isolation and a Low-Resistance Current Conductor. Amerika Serikat : Allegro MicroSystems, Inc.
177
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
178
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
VLAN Performance Analysis With Direct Measuring and Simulation Method Achmad Ubaidillah1, Dwi Kuswanto2, Artika Frida Nirmala2, Ida Kholida3 1
Electrical Engineering Department Madura Trunojoyo University 2 Informatics Engineering of Madura Trunojoyo University 3 Physics Education of Madura Islamic University [email protected]
service quality of computer network system of Madura Trunojoyo Madura. So, research by direct measuring method is needed to get the QoS data. But this paper has hypotesis that the use of bandwidth is not reach overload and congestion condition. It gives difficulty to observe how reliable the network performance will be, especially in extreme overload condition. So, this paper also simulates the network system performance using Network Simulator 2 to observe how reliable the network performance will be, especially in extreme congestion condition by make it as bottle neck network system. This research begins from (Achmad Ubaidillah Ms., 2012) that observes the computer network performance in Madura Trunojoyo University LAN based until February 2012. It uses metrix bit rate and bandwidth utility to measure the performance. While this research observes and measures the VLAN based computer network in Madura Trunojoyo University with direct measuring and simulation method. Throughput is used as metrix of the performance.
Abstract - The computer network system has to be observed and evaluated continually to provide reliable service. In this paper, the computer network performance of Madura Trunojoyo University is measured with direct measuring to get the real data. After that, it is simulated with Network Simulator 2 to make strong analysis about it‘s reliability. The research result shows that the bandwidth has not been used maximally yet. Overload and congestion condition has not been reached. It is based on the linearity of measured troughput in three condition quite, average and busy. Beside that, the grouping consideration of quite, averege and busy condition of this paper that is based on customary date in quite, averege and busy is not appropriate. It is proven and shown from the nonlinearity of condition quite, average and busy to throughput values. Beside the grouping consideration, traffic condition and device specification also give influence to the result of measured data Index Terms - Direct Measuring, Simulation, Performance, VLAN.
I. INTRODUCTION
II. PERFORMANCE MEASURING METHOD
Computer network system has to be managed, evaluate, and enhanced continually in order to provide good service and reliable performance. it is very important because the need of network service is getting higher and higher. So without that efforts, the quality of service can not handle the very fast development of network need. The definition of performance in (Mohammad Iqbal, Dr., 2012) are :
Aplication of computer network system needs some network management efforts like monitoring, evaluation, planning and service quality enhancement. Evaluation is applied based on monitoring result. From evaluation result, planning is arranged to enhance the quality of service. Metrix or parameter that is used in performance evaluation must be determined first. Some of them that are usually used to evaluate a network system performance are delay, jitter (variation of delay), throughput, bandwidth utility, and blocking probability. Measuring performance of computer network system can be applied in three methods :
1) According to DIN55350, Performance is value of quality and quantity of characteristic and main activity in one production. 2) According to ANSI, performance describes all characteristic of production or service to fullfil the need. 3) According to IEEE standard 729-1982, performance describes how far the need has been satisfied.
1) Direct measuring, collecting experimental data from a system directly 2) Simulation, making model of observed system using computer technology 3) Pure Analysis, describing a system model analitically.
The computer network system in Madura Trunojoyo University has developed very fast. So do the users that are getting greater. It is very important to manage, evaluate and enhance the
179
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Fig. 1 The simulated network topology of Madura Trunojoyo University
Direct measuring method has overplus especially it has high accuration and it can observe many problems to detail exploration. But it also has minus side especially in measuring instrument problem, parameter coverage that can be handled by the instrument until time improvidence problem. Simulation method also has overplus especially it can control observation time scale, it does not need the real system, it can make comparations of system design alternative beside it can observe until detail exploration. But it also has minus side especially about sensitivity and accuracy of measured data when it is compared with the real system. So, it still needs validation process of the output data. On the other side, pure analysis method also has overplus especially it can cover all level of the system easily, it can save the time and it easily studies tradeoff of the system. on the other hand it also has minus sides especially it just describes aproximation analysis of the system, so it become difficullt to develop the model. (Hendrawan, Dr., 2006).
IV. RESULT This section shows result of the calculated throughput of VLAN based Madura Trunojoyo University network in three building (Rektorat, Cakra and Teknik) and three traffic condition (quite, average and busy), that is shown in table 1. While the simulation result is shown by Fig 2.
TABLE I THROUGHPUT RESULT OF THE DIRECT MEASURING
Condition
Quite
III. METODOLOGY Basically, the observation of network performance of this paper is devided into two step, direct measuring and simulation. For direct measuring, metrix that is used as output variable and the performance measurement is throughput. While packet length is set as input variable. In the measuring, sampling process is taken in three buildings. They are Rektorat, Cakra and Teknik. The measurring of that three building is done in three conditions, quite, average and busy. The grouping consideration of quite, averege and busy condition of this paper is based on customary date in quite, averege and busy. Sampling of the quite condition is taken on university student holidays. Sampling of average condition is taken on campus normal days. While sampling of busy condition is taken when the students fill the online Study Planning Card. The beginning hypothesis of the research assumes that overload and congestion condition of the network can not be reached. Therefore, simulation is choosen to make that condition. The simulation is made using Network Simulator 2. It is applied to simulate the real condition as a bottle neck network to observe and evaluate how reliable it will be especially in congestion condition. Figure 1 shows the simulated network topology.
Average
Busy
Packet Length
Throughput (Mbps) Teknik
Cakra
Rektorat
2,2
1,9
2,2
8,4
8,0
8,5
1000 byte
16,4
15,7
16,1
1400 byte 100 byte 500 byte
22,9
20,8
21,4
1,5
0,9
2,2
5,4
3,5
8,0
1000 byte
10,9
7,7
14,9
1400 byte 100 byte 500 byte
16,0
9,3
20,5
2,2
1,3
2,2
7,9
4,5
8,6
1000 byte
15,5
10,0
16,0
1400 byte
20,5
13,9
21,0
100 byte 500 byte
Fig. 2 Event time to terminal throughput in node 3 of simulation result
IV. DISCUSSION Data of table 1 shows that the measured throughput increases as the increasing of the packet length. For example, the throughput values in quite condition on Rektorat are 2,2 Mbps for 100 byte packet length, 8,4 Mbps for 500 byte,
180
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 16,4 Mbps for 1000 byte and 22,9 Mbps for 1400 byte. It occurs in all three conditions (quite, average and busy) and thee building (Rektorat, Cakra and Teknik). The increasing of packet length makes traffic load also increases. Therefore it makes throughput value also increases. Beside that, it proves that the traffic load has not reached congestion condition yet. When congestion condition has been reached, the relation between packet length to throughput value should not be linear anymore. And it is proven and shown by the simulation result graph 1. In graph 1, the throughput value increases until the traffic load reachs overload and congestion condition. When it has reached congestion condition, then the throughput value decreases. On other observation, the throughput values on the same condition and same packet length are different between Rektorat, Cakra and Teknik. For example, the throughput values in quite condition for 100 byte pcket length are 2,2 Mbps in Rektorat, 1,9 Mbps in Cakra and 2,2 Mbps Teknik. It occurs in all three condition. And it occurs because the traffic load in the three of them are not same even the switch trunking specifications of them are also different. The interesting thing from table 1 is nonlinearity of condition quite, average and busy to throughput values. The throughput value for packet length 100 byte in Rektorat are 2,2 Mbps in quite, 1,5 Mbps in average and 2,2 Mbps in busy. The throughput value for packet length 500 byte in that building are 8,4 Mbps in quite, 5,4 Mbps in average and 7,9 Mbps in busy. The throughput value for packet length 1000 byte are 16,4 Mbps in quite, 10,9 Mbps in average and 15,5 Mbps in busy. And the throughput value for packet length 1400 byte are 22,9 Mbps in quite, 16,0 Mbps in average and 20,5 Mbps in busy. This nonlinearity condistion occurs on all three building. Theoritically, increasing of traffic load from quite to average to busy should increase the throughput value as long it has not reached congestion condition. It occurs because the grouping consideration of quite, averege and busy condition that is based on customary date in quite, averege and busy (quite is in holiday, average is in normal day and busy is in online filling week of Study Planning Card) is not appropriate. The traffic load in average condition may be higher and lower than quite. The traffic load in busy condition may be higher and lower than average. It makes nonlinearity effect on the result. The grouping consideration should be based on bandwidth utillity level, so the traffic load on average is higher than quite and traffic load on busy is higher than average.
IV. CONCLUSION Some conclusions from the research result and the discussion are : 1) The VLAN performance of Madura Trunojoyo University is good, because the fact shows that the bandwidth utiliy has not reached maximum threshold. 2) The grouping consideration of quite, averege and busy condition of this paper that is based on customary date in quite, averege and busy is not appropriate. The grouping consideration should be based on bandwidth utillity level, so the relation between traffic load condition to throughput value become positif linear. 3) Some factors that give influence in the result of computer network performance measuring of this research are traffic load condition and switch instrument specification. Therefore, the next research should make appropriate condition grouping consideration. Beside that, it is needful to explore and focus on what factors that give influence to the linearity or anomaly of traffic load to network QoS, and how strong the impact will be. REFERENCES [8] Achmad Ubaidillah Ms., 2012, ―Studi Kinerja Sistem Jaringan Komputer Universitas Trunojoyo (Sampai Februari 2012)‖, Simantec 2012, Madura Trunojoyo University. [9] Cisco exploration 4.0, Local Area Networking. [10]Cisco exploration 3.0, VLAN‘s Implementation. [11]Jianping, Wang, 2004, NS-2 Tutorial, Multimedia Networking Group, The Department of Computer Science, UVA. [12]Hendrawan, Dr., 2006, ―Handout : Kinerja Jaringan Telekmunikasi dan Komputer‖, STEI - Bandung Technology Institute. [13]Mohammad Iqbal, Dr., 2012, ―Handout : Analisis Kinerja Sistem‖, Gunadarma University.
181
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
182
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Modelling and Analysis of a Photovoltaic Cell Supriatna Adhisuwignjo1, Indrazno Siradjuddin 2, Muhamad Rifa‘i3, Ratna Ika Putri4 1,2,3,4
Electrical Engineering, Politechnic State of Malang, East Java, Indonesia [email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
PV out far from the MPP. A method that can recover the operational point of the PV back to the optimal point is known as the Maximum Power Point Tracker (MPPT) [4]. Therefore, establishing a PV model is necessary to understand the behavior of the PV and to design a proper controller which could track the MPP to optimize the energy conversion. In this paper, a 50 WP PV model has been derived and explained in detail in next sections.
Abstract—This paper describes the modeling and analysis of a photovoltaic 50WP capacity to increase efficiency. Developing a method for increasing efficiency is an important issue in photovoltaic systems. Two modeling issues have been addressed, which are the modeling of photovoltaic VI characteristics with changes in solar irradiation, and the characteristics of PV photovoltaic toward changes in solar irradiation, photovoltaic VI characteristics toward the temperature and the characteristics of PV toward changes in temperature. The modelling results indicate that the higher the temperature the lower the output power. Photovoltaic modeling results can be used as a reference to determine the appropriate controller to improve efficiency.
II.
Two procedures used to model the PV: data logging and mathematical modeling. A time period for data logging is between 8.00 am to 3.00 pm where in this time period, significant fluctuations of the cell temperature and sun energy irradiation can be observed. Four data variables are observed: open circuit voltage, short circuit electrical current, voltage and current of the PV with variation of the load. In this research, a variable resistor were used to simulate the effect of the load to the PV performance. This collected data was used to verify the derived PV mathematical model. Equations shown in (1) – (3) describe the PV current, voltage and power [5].
Index Terms - photovoltaic; efficiency; characteristics; MATLAB
I.
Modelling Of PV Sunrise SRM-050D
Introduction
Motor vehicles polluting the air in large quantities. According to the EPA, the United States accounted for almost 80% of transport emissions of carbon monoxide and 55% of nitrogen oxide emissions. Every day of motorcycles, cars and trucks burn millions of barrels of oil, which is a non-renewable energy source. If the majority of road users switch to using the bike, it is certain that air pollution will be reduced and can save fuel. To overcome these problems, many parties started implementing bike-sharing program. To be noted for the reader that the research described in this paper is a part of the investigation of the bikesharing research program. Bikesharing has grown rapidly since the first program was launched in the Netherlands in the mid-1960s. As of May 2011, there were estimated 136 bikesharing programs in 165 cities around the world, with 237,000 bikes. In America, bike-sharing activity has spread to Canada, Mexico, United States, Argentina, Brazil, Chile, China, South Korea, and Taiwan [1]. Solar cells become a source of the most important renewable system that offers many advantages such as it does not require fuel, produces no pollution, low maintenance costs and produces no noise. The solar cells system is a promising renewable energy source in many tropical countries, where the sun energy irradiation does not fluctuate too high throughout the year and radiates about 12 hours a day. An important issue of the PV system is the energy efficiency, by means that the energy conversion is low, it is reported that the conversion efficiency is about 18% [2]. To address this issue, the energy conversion efficiency can be increased by operating the PV system near the Maximum Power Point (MPP) [3]. Cell temperature and sun energy irradiation are variables that could shift the operational point of the
I sol I SC K i (T 298.18) 1000
(1)
where
I sol is the electrical current produced by PV, K i is a temperature coefficient of the short circuit, T
is the temperature, λ is the sun energy irradiation (W/m2 ). P I I I I V 0 V V V V
(2)
1 (3) I (V RsI )I SC A exp[ A(V RsI )] Rsh
Where
𝑞 𝛾
, Nsel is the total cell in series
circuit, ISC is the short circuit current, Rs is the series resistance, Rsh is the shunt resistance. In a simple PV model, some variables are negelected. In this paper: series and parallel are considered to be included in the model derivation. Therfore, it can be described as follows:
I = Isc – Io*(eq*(V+I*Rs)/(n*k*T) -1) – (V + 183
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
I*Rs)/Rp
(4)
III.
A. PV Measurement In this paper, a PV cell Sunrise SRM-050D was used which has technical specification as follows 1. Maximum power: 50W 2. The number of cells: 36 3. Short circuit current: 3,16 A 4. Open circuit voltage: 21,91V 5. Maximum current: 2,90 A 6. Maximum voltage: 17,28V 7. Idealitic diode coefecient: 1.2 8. Cell junction temperature: 0.2% Figure 2 shows the I-V and P-V PV cell characteristic.
Where Isc is the short circuit current. The output current depends on the idealitic diode coefecient where its values in the range of 1 and 2. In this paper, the idealitic coefecient of 1.2 was used as it has been suggested by Herder Tyson [6]. Equation (4) can be approximated using the iterative Newton Raphson method which can be described as Xn+1 = Xn –f(Xn)/ f‘(Xn)
(5)
where f‘(x) is the first derivative of f(Xn) and n indicates the n-th iteration. Thus (4) can be rewritten as f (I) = Isc – I – Io*[eq*(V+I*Rs)/(n*k*T) – 1] = 0
Simulation and Analysis
(6)
Using Newton method
(7) Equation (7) is then used to simulate the PV characteristic. The Matlab implementation is shown in Figure 1. Using the Matlab implementation of the model 4 PV characteristic can be obtained, which are: 1. The I-V characteristic associated with the change of irradiation intensity 2. The I-V charecteristic associated with the change of cell junction temperature 3. The P-V characteristic associated with the change of irradiation intensity 4. The P-V characterictic associated with the change of the cell temperature
Figure 2 V-I and P-V PV characteristic of the Sunrise SRM-050D Figure 3 describes the irradiation intensity and the temperature measured between 8 am – 3 pm. In the morning, at 8-9 am the irradiation intensity reached 400 W/m2. At 11-12 am the irradiation intensity reached the maximum of 740 W/m2. From 12 am until 3 pm the irradiation intensity decreased, and it was 220 W/m2 measured at 3 pm. The temparature changes are strongly related with the change of the irradiation intensity, by means that the irradiation intensity increases the temperature. It has been measured that at the maximum irradiation intensity, the temparature was at 45oC . The temparature was also decreasing from 12 am to 3 pm.
Irradiasi Matahari (W/m2)
Perubahan Irradiasi Matahari Terhadap Waktu 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 8:00 AM
9:00 AM
10:00 AM 11:00 AM 12:00 AM
1:00 PM
Waktu Perubahan irradiasi matahari terhadap waktu
(a)
Figure 1 Pseudo Code algorithm of (7)
184
2:00 PM
3:00 PM
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Karakteristik V-I Photovoltaic Berdasarkan Data Pengukuran
Perubahan Suhu Terhadap Waktu Pengukuran 3
50
2
Arus (A)
Suhu (Celcius)
2.5
40 30
1.5 1
20
0.5 0
10
0
5
10
15
20
25
Tegangan (V)
0 8:00 AM
9:00 AM
10:00 AM 11:00 AM 12:00 AM
1:00 PM
2:00 PM
3:00 PM Jam 8.00
Jam 9.00
Jam 10.00
Jam 11.00
Jam 12.00
Jam 13.00
Jam 14.00
Jam 15.00
Waktu Perubahan Suhu Terhadap Waktu Pengukuran
(a)
(b)
Karaktristik P-V Photovoltaic Berdasarkan Data Pengukuran
Figure 3 (a) The irradiation intensity (b) the temperature
45 40 35
Arus (A)
Figure 4 shows the characteristic of : the short circuit current, the open circuit voltage. The short circuit current was measured at peak of 2.6 A between 11 and 12 am. In contrast, the open circuit voltage reached its minimum of 19.34 V at 11-12 am.
25 20 15 10 5 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
Tegangan (V) Jam 8.00
Perubahan Isc Trhadap Waktu
Arus (A)
30
Jam 9.00
Jam 10.00
Jam 11.00
Jam 12.00
Jam 13.00
Jam 14.00
Jam 15.00
(b)
3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0
Figure 5 The V-I and P-V characteristic based on the measurement
8:00 AM 9:00 AM 10:00 AM
11:00 AM
B. Model Verification Figure 6 shows the simulation result of the I-V characteristic (see Matlab program in Figure 1).
12:00 1:00 PM 2:00 PM 3:00 PM AM
Waktu Pengukuran Perubahan Isc Trhadap Waktu
(a) Kurva I-V Model Photovoltaic Terhadap Perubahan Irradiasi Matahari 4
Perubahan Voc terhadap Waktu
Irradiasi 1000w/m2
3.5 3
Irradiasi 800w/m2
2.5
20.5 Arus (A)
Tegangan (V)
21 20 19.5
Irradiasi 600w/m2 2
Irradiasi 500w/m2
1.5
19 18.5 8:00 AM
9:00 AM
10:00 AM
11:00 AM
12:00 AM
1:00 PM
2:00 PM
1
3:00 PM
0.5
Waktu Pengukuran Perubahan Voc terhadap waktu Pada 24 Agustus
0
(b)
0
2
4
6
8
10 12 Tegangan (V)
14
16
18
20
22
Gambar 6 Karakteristik V-I Model Photovoltaik Terhadap Perubahan Irradiasi Matahari
Figure 4 Characteristic of the short circuit current and the open circuit voltage measured between 8 am and 3 pm
Based on the measurement, the MPP point can be observed from P-V characteristic as shown in Figure 5b. Figure 5b can be compared with the P-V characteristic simulation result as shown in Figure 7. The maximum irradiation intensity plot which was measured at 12 am in Figure 5b is compared with the maximum P-V characteristic resulted by the simulation program where the maximum of 1000 W/m2 was assumed. The error of the open circuit voltage between the measurement and the simulation can be computed as
From the obtained data, the I-V and P-V characteristic can be plotted as shown in Figure 5a and Figure 5b, respectively.
185
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Error =
9 ; 8
Karakteristik P-V Model Photovoltaic Terhadap Perubahan Suhu
9
40 Suhu 25C
35
= 6,67 %
Suhu 30C
30
The MPP error between the measurement and the simulation model was 25%
Suhu 45C
Daya (W)
25
Kurva P-V Model Photovoltaic Terhadap Perubahan Irradiasi Matahari
Suhu 35C
20 15
60 Irradiasi 1000w/m2
10 50 Irradiasi 800w/m2
5
Daya (W)
40
0 Irradiasi 600w/m2
30
0
2
4
6
8
10 12 Tegangan (V)
14
16
18
20
22
Irradiasi 500w/m2
Figure 9 P-V model characteristic associated with the temperature changes
20
10
IV. 0
0
2
4
6
8
10 12 Tegangan (V)
14
16
18
20
Conclusion
The PV model has been derived and simulated using MATLAB. The P-V and I-V characteristics from the measurements and the simulation results have been compared. The error of the open circuit voltage between the measurement and the model was 6.67 %, and the error of the MPP was 25%. Those errors are acceptable which verifies the validity of the derived model, and can be used to further research of the controller development for bikesharing research program.
22
Gambar 7 P-V model characeristic associated with the irradiation intensity The increase of the photovoltaic temperature can degrade the PV performance. Figure 8 and Figure 9 depict the relation between the V-I and the temperature, and the P-V and the temperature, respectively.
Karakteristik V-I Model Photovoltaic Terhadap Perubahan Suhu 3.5
Acknowlegment
3
The authors would like to thanks to the Ministry of the Research and Technology and Higher Education who has funded and supported this research through ―Penelitian Unggulan Perguruan Tinggi Politeknik Negeri Malang‖.
suhu 30C suhu 45C
suhu 25C
2.5
Arus (A)
suhu 35C 2
1.5
1
References
0.5
0
[1] 0
2
4
6
8
10 12 Tegangan (V)
14
16
18
20
22
[2]
Figure 8 V-I model characteristic associated with the temparature changes
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
186
Shaheen, Susan dan Stacey Guzman, 2011. Worldwide Bikesharing. Access Nomor 39, Fall 2011. p 22-27 Ayvazyan GY, et al., ―Maximum Power Operation Of PV System Using Fuzzy Logic Control‖, Armenian Journal of Physics. Volume 1. 2008. Chun hua Li, et al., ―Maximum Powwer Point Tracking Of A Photovoltaik Energy System Using Neural Fuzzy Techniques”. Journal Shanghai University, Vol 13 (1) : 29-36. Cina. 2009. Aldhobani MS & John Robert, ―Maximum Power Point Tracking Of PV System Using ANFIS Prediction And Fuzzy Logic Tracking‖, Proceeding Of The International Multi Conference Of Engineers And Computer Scientists 2008 Vol II. IMECS 2008. Hongkong. 19-21 March 2008 Salhi M & El-Bachtiri, ―Maximum Power Point Tracking Controller For PV System Using PI Regulator With Boost DC/DC Converter‖, ICGST-ACSE Journal, ISSN 1687-4811. Volume 8. Issue III. January 2009 Den Herder Tyson, ―Design and Simulation Photovoltaic SUPER System using Simulink‖. Senior Project. California Polytechnic State University. San Luis Obispo. 2006. Chouder A, et al., ―Simulation of Fuzzy Based MPP Tracker And Performance Comparison With Perturb & Observe
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
[8]
Veerachary Mummadi, et al., ―Voltage-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking Control of PV System”, IEEE Transactions On Aerospace And Electronics Systems Vol 38 No 1. January 2002. [10] Walker G, ―Evaluating MPPT Converter Topology Using A Matlab PV Model”., Journal of Electrical & Electronics Engineering. 2001.
Method”, Revue des Energies Renouvelables Volume 11 No (4). 2008. Premrudeepreechacharn S & Patanapirom N, ―Solar Array Modelling And Maximum Power Point Tracking Using Neural Network‖, IEEE Power Tech Conference. Bologna. Italy. 2326 June 2003.
[9]
187
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
188
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Classification of Lung Nodule in CT Images based on GLCM features I Ketut Eddy Purnama1, Tri Deviasari Wulan2, Mauridhi Hery Purnomo 1 1
Teknik Multimedia dan Jaringan, Fakultas Teknologi Industri, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember
Surabaya, Indonesia {ketut, hery}@te.its.ac.id 2
Jaringan Cerdas Multimedia, Pasca Sarjana Teknik Elektro, Fakultas Teknologi Industri, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember
Surabaya, Indonesia
introduce errors. Hence, reliable methods have been developed. Several studies have been done in performing lung nodule segmentation by several methods. Gomathi et al, 2010 [4]proposed classification of benign and malignant nodules using support vector machine. Real time lung images are taken for this researce. Lung image are segmented to retrieve the region of interest. After that, the features can be Obtained from it for Determining the diagnostic rule for detecting the cancer nodules in the lung region perfectly. The features that are used are the area, the maximum drawable circle (MDC) and average intensity value. Support vector machine is used to classify cancer nodules. In this study using three kernel functions in classifying lung nodule. Experimental result Showed that SVM with RBF kernel has better accuracy in classifying cancers nodule. Ananda , 2012 [1] was proposed segmentation of nodules on CT image using a max tree and attribute filters. On lung CT image study conducted preprocessing then max tree generation process and the process filtering attribute. Nodule area resulting from the process is then compared with the results from the radiologist contained annotation database. But it is drawback is this study has not used the texture features for lung nodule analysis. This analysis considered more suitable for lung nodule that have irregular shapes. Huan Wang et al, 2010 [2] provided models Multi Binominal Logistic Prediction on malignant lung nodules based on texture features on CT scan images. In their study, nodule segmentation done by searching the Region of interest (ROI) pulmonary nodules. Although the results were reported accurately, this research uses statistical analysis to differentiate between benign and malignant. Hence this paper proposed a new approach to Classify between lung nodules and other tissues using Grey level Co-Occurence Matrix, and performing two classification methods
Abstract- In this paper we proposed a new approach for classifying lung nodule on CT images based on Grey Level Co-Occurence Matrix (GLCM) features. Two classification methods were tested, Probabilistic Neural Network (PNN) and Support Vector Machine (SVM). The result shows that SVM deliver more accurate results than PNN to classify between lung nodule and other tissues. By having the results classification of lung nodules in CT Images based on GLCM feature is feasible. Keyword: root canal length, active shape model, dental x-ray image, x-ray image, measurement of root canal length. I. INTRODUCTION Lung cancer is one of most deadly deadly disease in the world. WHO states that the data of 7.6 million (13%) deaths in 2008 caused by cancer. Of these, lung cancer is classified as topranked. International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) in GLOBOCAN 2008, obtaining data at least 1.61 million (12.7%) cases of lung cancer. In addition 1.38 million (18.2%) deaths due to cancer, are caused by lung cancer. Early examination of lung cancer is needed to avoid the growth of cancer and reduce mortality caused by lung cancer. One sign that is often used to diagnose lung cancer is a nodule or spotting. Nodules in the lungs are patches that are scattered throughout the lung with a random position, diverse shapes and sizes are undefined. These spots will then develop and raged into lung cancer. One of current procedures to examine lung cancer is by examining images of CT scan of the thorax area. Due to radiation exposure, only several slices are taken at certain parts. Radiologist examine the images and determine the area expected to be lung nodules. The drawbacks of this procedure are very subjective, time consuming and
189
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Probabilistic Neural Network (PNN) and Support Vector Machine (SVM). II. MATERIAL AND METHODS A. Material This research utilizing a collection of 74 digital CT images. The data used in this study is the image of the CT-Scan lungs obtained from Lung Times Database. But not all of the CT image in good condition and fit for use in this study, so that only 60 CT images were selected. 40 images used for training and 20 the data used for training process. One of CT image shown in Figure 1. The images containing all part of lung nodule and other part of lung such as bone, blood vessel, and other soft tissue of lung.
Fig 3. Cropping ROI Lung Nodule
Manual determination of ROI aiming to obtain the area of the lung nodules and other tissues, based on the coordinates obtained from the lung nodule annotation that has been examined by radiological lung times contained in the database. Afterwards, the cropping process in the area of lung nodule was performed. The results of ROI determination and cropping processes is shown in Figure 3.
Fig 1. CT Image
Grey Level Co-Occurence Matrix Feature extraction in this study using texture analysis is Gray Level Co-occurrence Matrix [5]. Texture Features that will be used as the input of the classification system is ASM, IDM, entropy, correlation, and contrast. 1. Angular Second Moment (ASM) ASM is a measure of the homogenity image, using the equitation :
B. Method The proposed approach consists of the following procedures: manual determination of region of interest (ROI) of lung nodules and ROI of other tissues. Then, texture features of the ROI, in this case its Grey Level Co-Occurence Matrix, was extracted. In the classification process, two classification methods Probabilistic Neural Network (PNN) and Support Vector Machine (SVM) was applied in the class. The procedure is shown in Figure 2.
∑ ∑( <
(
) )
<
2. Contrast Contrast is a measure of the variation presence of graypixel image.
CT Images
∑
Cropping ROI
{ ∑
(
)}
| ; |<
<
3. Invers Different Moment (IDM) IDM is measure the homogeneity of the image. IDM can be calculated using the equation:
Feature Extraction
∑∑ <
Classification
<
(
( (
) )
4. Correlation Correlation is measure of linear dependence of the degree of gray image so as to provide guidance for linear structures in images, can be searched using the equation:
Fig 2. Methodology of the Research
∑< ∑
190
<
( )(
(
)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 5. Entropy Entropy indicates the size of the irregularity shape. Large entropy value transform image with uneven degrees of gray transition and of little value if the structure is irregular or variable image. This entropy values can be calculated using the equation: ∑ ∑( <
(
)
(
(
extraction of pulmonary nodules and no lung nodules. The results of this training will be used for the testing process which used 20 CT images. In this classification was performed three randoms omposition of data that aims to get the average value of the accuracy of testing. III. EXPERIMENTS AND RESULTS Pre-prosessing image of manual segmentation was applied to get a lung nodule area and other tissue based on the coordinates (x, y) which has been attached to the annotation Lung Time Database. The result of cropping ROI lung nodule shown in Figure 4.
)
<
Classification Methods Probabbilistic Neural Network (PNN) and Support Vector Machine (SVM) used for classification of lung nodules. This classification is aim to get difference between lung nodules and other tissues.
Probabilistic Neural Network (PNN) Probabilistic Neural Network is one of artificial neural network which using supervised training system. PNN derived from Bayesian networks and algorithms Statistical named Kernel Fisher Discriminant Analysis. PNN has three layers are:
Fig 4. The Result of Cropping Lung Nodules Area
a. Input Layer Input layer is a layer of input data for PNN b. The Hidden Layer At this layer receives data from the input layer to be processed in the PNN. c. Output Layer At this layer, in the form of binary output node which produces classification decision.
Results feature extraction uses GLCM between lung nodule and no lung nodule shown in table 1. The results of the texture differences between that features be used the classification process. Classification in this research used Probabilistic Neural Network (PNN) and Support Vector Machine (SVM). In the training step, 40 CT data used for the classification process, while the testing step using 20 CT images.
Support Vector Machine (SVM) Support Vector Machine is a machine learning method that works on the principle of Structural Risk Minimization (SRM) with the goal of finding the best hyperplane that separates two GLCM classes in the input space. The basic principle is a o linear SVM classifier, and further developed in0 order to work on a non-linear problem. by o 45 incorporating the concept of kernel trick in highdimensional workspace [6]. 90o SVM concepts can be explained as an o attempt to find the best hyperplane which serves as135 a separator are two classes in the input space. Classification problem can be translated to the GLCM process of finding a line (hyperplane) that separates the two groups. o 0 Hyperplane best separator between the two classes can be found by measuring the45o hyperplane margin and look for maximum points. o Margin is the distance between the hyperplane to90 the nearest pattern of each class. The closest135o pattern is called a support vector. Attempt to find the location of this hyperplane is the core of the learning process in SVM [6] GLCM Both of PNN and SVM used 40 CT images for o the training process the data from texture features0
191
TABLE I RESULTS OF EXRACTING FEATURES
ASM Lung Nodule
Other Tissue
0.0607
0.0086
0.0562
0.0091
0.0518
0.0100
0.0518
0.0095
Contrast Lung Nodule
Other Tissue
57.5000
165.0909
84.5769
79.0187
68.4615
140.4813
49.1731
357.6952
IDM Lung Nodule
Other Tissue
0.1222
0.1348
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
45o 90
0.1822
0.1604
95%
0.1721
0.1268
90%
0.0942
0.0822
85%
o
135o
Entropy GLCM 0
Lung Nodule
Other Tissue
o
45o 90o 135o
2.8480
4.7908
2.9127
4.7532
2.9774
4.6796
2.9774
4.7291
0
Lung Nodule
75%
SVM
65% first second third average random random random Fig 5. Chart 1 Distinguishing between lung nodules and other tissue based on texture features.
Other Tissue
o
45
PNN
70%
Correlation GLCM
80%
0.0064
0.0030
IV. CONCLUSSIONS
-0.0074
0.0043
-0.0018
0.0034
0.0077
0.0002
We have presented a new approach to classify lung nodules in CT Images based on Grey Level Co-Occurence Matrix. The classification proses comparing two methods, Probabilistic Neural Network and Support Vector Machine to distinguish between lung nodule and other tissue. We found average accuracy value using SVM method is greater than using PNN method. To ddistinguish between lung nodule and other tissue based on gray level coocurance matrix. Average accuracy result using SVM is 86,67 % while using PNN the accuracy is 83.33 %. By having the results, classification of lung nodules in CT Images based on GLCM feature is feasible.
o
90o 135o
The testing process with probabilistic Neural Network method uses a spread of 0.5 for three random composition. Average accuracy results of the testing process using the third random composition of the data is 83,33 %. Details of the test results of each composition of random data are shown in Table 2. TABLE II AVERAGE ACCURACY VALUE OF PNN METHOD
Random First random Second random Third random Accuracy
Accuracy 90 % 85 % 75 % 83,33 %
REFERENCES [1] Ananda.2012. Nodule Segmentation on CT images Using Max Tree and Attribute Tree. ITS. Surabaya [2] Wang. H., Guo, Jia.Z., Li.H. 2010. Multilevel Binominal Logistic Prediction Model For Malignant Pulmonary Nodules based on Texture Feature on CT Images. European Journal of Radiologi. Pp 124-129. [3] IARC.2010. Lung Cancer Incidence and Mortality Worldwide in 2008. http: //globocan.iarc.fr/factsheets/cancer/lungs.asp [4] Gomathi. M., Thangaraj. P., 2012. An Effective Classification of Benign and Malignant Nodules Using Support Vector Machine. Journal of Global Research in Computer Science. Vol.3, No.7. [5] Kadir, Abdul., Susanto, Adhi. 2012. Pengolahan Citra TeoridanAplikasi. Yogyakarta. [6] Nugroho, Anto Satriyo., Witarto, Arief Budi., Handoko, [7] Dwi. 2003. Support Vector Machine Teori dan Aplikasinya dalam Bioinformatika. Ilmu Komputer
On the other hand the testing process with Support vector machine method for three random composition have average accuracy result by 86,67 %. Details of the testing result of each composition of random data shown in Table 3. TABLE III TESTING RESULT OF EACH COMPOSITION OF RANDOM DATA
Random First random Second random Third random Accuracy
Accuracy 90 % 85 % 85 % 86,67 %
Chart 1 shows that the SVM method with a red line has an average value greater accuracy than the PNN method indicated by the blue line in distinguishing between lung nodules and other tissue based on texture features.
192
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Control of Synchronous Generator in Wind Power Systems Using Neuro-Fuzzy Approach Ramadoni Syahputra1, Indah Soesanti2 1
Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Muhammadiyah Yogyakarta, Indonesia Jl. Ringroad Barat Tamantirto, Kasihan, Yogyakarta Indonesia 55183 E-mail: [email protected] 2
Department of Electrical Engineering and Information Technology, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Gadjah Mada Jl. Grafika 2 Kampus UGM, Yogyakarta, Indonesia 55281 E-mail: [email protected]
Abstract - This paper presents the control scheme of a synchronous generator in wind energy power system using adaptive neuro-fuzzy approach. A neuro-fuzzybased controller is used for controlling a permanent magnet synchronous generator (PMSG) that is used in wind power systems. The variables have been controlled are the angular velocity, dc voltage, reactive power, active power, a phase current and voltage phase of generator output. The simulation results show that the adaptive neuro-fuzzy controller has successfully controlling all variables in a relatively short time to get back to a stable state. Several simulation results are given to show the effectiveness and the good performances of the proposed control structure. Index Terms – Wind power, synchronous generator, fuzzy logic controller, ANFIS, wind farm system.
I. INTRODUCTION Production of electricity from renewable energy sources like wind energy increases due to environmental problems and the shortage of traditional energy sources in the near future [1]-[4]. Among renewable sources, wind energy is one of the fastest growing and lowest-priced renewable energy technologies available today. Wind power depends mainly on geographical conditions and weather conditions. Therefore, it is necessary to construct a system capable of generating maximum power under these constraints [5]-[6]. Nowadays, permanent magnet synchronous generators (PMSG) are used in wind turbine because of its advantages: better reliability, less maintenance and more effective [7]-[9]. In addition, exploiting the case of variable speed allows obtaining an optimal efficiency of the system [10]. For remote sites located far from the utility, a practical approach for power generation is to use a variable speed wind turbine to create an autonomous system. It often includes batteries, used when the wind cannot provide sufficient power. If wind conditions are favorable, these autonomous wind energy systems can provide electricity at low cost. If wind power exceeds the load
demand, the surplus can be stored in batteries and if wind power cannot meet load demand, the batteries can compensate it [11]. On the other hand, the use of artificial intelligence-based method has a lot of help in the field of electrical power systems [12]. The use of artificial intelligence-based method is not only limited to the field of image processing [13]–[16]. In this research, we present the control scheme of a synchronous generator in wind energy power system using adaptive neuro-fuzzy approach. A neuro-fuzzy-based model reference adaptive system is continuously tuned with actual permanent magnet synchronous generator (PMSG) to neutralize the effect of parameter variations such as stator resistance, inductance, and torque constant. This neuro-fuzzy-tuned estimator is able to estimate the rotor position and speed accurately over a wide speed range with a great immunity against parameter variation. The simulation is done in Matlab-Simulink environment. II. SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR IN WIND POWER SYSTEM A. Wind Power System There were several attempts to build large scale wind powered system to generate electrical energy. The first production of electrical energy with wind power was done in 1887 by Charles brush in Cleveland, Ohio. DC generator was used for power production and was designed to charge the batteries. The induction machine was used at the first time in 1951. Wind turbines convert the kinetic energy present in the wind into mechanical energy by means of producing torque. Since the energy contained by the wind is in the form of kinetic energy, its magnitude depends on the air density and the wind velocity. The wind power developed by the turbine is given by the equation (1) [11]:
193
(1)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 where Cp is the Power Co-efficient, ρ is the air density in kg/m3, A is the area of the turbine blades in m2 and V is the wind velocity in m/sec. The power coefficient Cp gives the fraction of the kinetic energy that is converted into mechanical energy by the wind turbine. It is a function of the tip speed ratio λ and depends on the blade pitch angle for pitch-controlled turbines. The tip speed ratio may be defined as the ratio of turbine blade linear speed and the wind speed
𝑞
𝑞
𝑞
𝑞
(6) where vds and vqs are the d- and q-axes stator voltages, ids and iqs are the d- and q-axes stator currents, Rs and Ls are the stator resistance and inductance, Ld and Lq are the d- and q-axes inductance, λf is the magnetic flux, and ωr is the electrical angular speed.
(2) Substituting (2) in (1), we have:
( )
. / ( )
(3)
The output torque of the wind turbine Tturbine is calculated by the following equation (4):
. /
(4)
where R is the radius of the wind turbine rotor (m) There is a value of the tip speed ratio at which the power coefficient is maximum. Variable speed turbines can be made to capture this maximum energy in the wind by operating them at a blade speed that gives the optimum tip speed ratio. This may be done by changing the speed of the turbine in proportion to the change in wind speed. Fig.1 shows how variable speed operation will allow a wind turbine to capture more energy from the wind [11]. As one can see, the maximum power follows a cubic relationship.
Fig 2. Equivalent circuits of a PMSG: (a) d-axis, (b) q-axis
For the generator with surface-mounted permanent magnets, d- and q-axes inductances are the same (Ld = Lq ). Then, the electromagnetic torque Te is expressed as: 𝑞
(7)
where p is the number of poles. In this research, the system consists of a PMSGbased variable speed of wind energy power system consisting two back-to-back inverters with a common dc link. The generator-side inverter controls its speed to extract maximum power at different speeds, while the grid side inverter delivers the renewable power to grid with nonlinear-load compensation simultaneously. The block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 3.
Fig 1. Variable speed operation of wind turbine
B. Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator In this work, we have used permanent magnet synchronous generator (PMSG) type for wind turbine system. Figure 2 shows the d–q equivalent circuits of the PMSG. The voltage equations of the PMSG are expressed in the synchronous d–q coordinates as: 𝑞
Fig 3. Block diagram of control of PMSG in wind power system
III. NEURO-FUZZY ADAPTIVE METHOD
(5)
194
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The basic structure of the type of fuzzy inference system could be seen as a model that maps input characteristics to input membership functions. Then it maps input membership function to rules and rules to a set of output characteristics. Finally it maps output characteristics to output membership functions, and the output membership function to a single valued output or a decision associated with the output. It has been considered only fixed membership functions that were chosen arbitrarily. Figure 4 shows Sugeno‘s fuzzy logic model while Figure 5 shows the architecture of the ANFIS, comprising by input, fuzzification, inference and defuzzification layers. The network can be visualized
as consisting of inputs, with N neurons in the input layer and F input membership functions for each input, with F*N neurons in the fuzzification layer. There are FN rules with FN neurons in the inference and defuzzification layers and one neuron in the output layer. For simplicity, it is assumed that the fuzzy inference system under consideration has two inputs x and y and one output z as shown in Fig. 2. For a zero-order Sugeno fuzzy model, a common rule set with two fuzzy if-then rules is the following: Rule 1: If x is A1 and y is B1, Then f1 = r1 (8) Rule 2: If x is A2 and y is B2, Then f2 = r2 (9)
A1
B1
x
w1
f 1 = p1x + q1y + r1
w2
f 2 = p2x + q2y + r2
y
A2
B2
y
x
Fig 4. Sugeno‘s fuzzy logic model
Layer 1
Layer 2
A1 x
Layer 3
w1
Layer 4 x y
Layer 5
N
A2
f
B1
y
N
w2
B2 x y Fig 5. The architecture of the ANFIS with two inputs and one output
Here the output of the ith node in layer n is denoted as On,i: Layer 1. Every node i in this layer is a square node with a node function:
195
O1i = Ai(x), for i = 1, 2,
(10)
or,
O1i = Bi-2(y), for i = 3, 4
(11)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 where x is the input to node-i, and Ai is the linguistic label (small , large, etc.) associated with this node
Start
1
function. In other words, Oi is the membership function of Ai and it specifies the degree to which the given x satisfies the quantifier Ai. Usually Ai(x) is chosen to be bell-shaped with maximum equal to 1 and minimum equal to 0, such as the generalized bell function:
μ A (x)
1 x ci 1 ai
Literature review
Create the wind farm model using permanent magnet synchronous generator
(12)
2bi
Design the fuzzy logic controller
Parameters in this layer are referred to as premise parameters. Layer 2. Every node in this layer is a circle node labeled Π which multiplies the incoming signals and sends the product out. For instance,
Design the fuzzy logic controller of the wind farm
Oi2 = wi = Ai(x) x B(y), i = 1, 2.
(13) Each node output represents the firing strength of a rule. (In fact, other T-norm operators that performs generalized AND can be used as the node function in this layer.) Layer 3. Every node in this layer is a circle node labeled N. The i-th node calculates the ratio of the ith rule‘s firing strength to the sum of all rules firing strengths:
Oi3 w
wi , i = 1, 2. w1 w2
Examine the fuzzy logic controller of the wind farm model
Examine the faults in the wind farm model
(14)
For convenience, outputs of this layer will be called normalized firing strengths. Layer 4. Every node i in this layer is a square node with a node function:
Oi4 wi f i wi (pi x qi y ri )
Other fault types?
(15) No
where wi is the output of layer 3, and {pi, qi, ri} is the parameter set. Parameters in this layer will be referred to as consequent parameters. Layer 5. The single node in this layer is a circle node labeled Σ that computes the overall output as the summation of all incoming signals, i.e.,
Oi5 wi fi
Yes
Analize the fuzzy logic controller
Conclusion
(16)
IV. METHODOLOGY
Stop
In this work, the control scheme of a synchronous generator in wind energy power system using adaptive neuro-fuzzy approach is presented. The control schemes and wind power system with permanent magnet synchronous generator have been developed in Matlab-Simulink software. The research steps are summarized in the flow chart as can be seen in Figure 4.
Fig 4. Research steps of this research
V. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION In order to analyse the advantage of adaptive neuro-fuzzy method to control the permanent magnet synchronous generator in wind power system, the overall system is simulated using Matlab-Simulink software. The system described in this section
196
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 illustrates the steady-state and dynamic performance of a 10 MW wind farm connected to a distribution system. A 10 MW wind farm consisting of five 2 MW wind turbines connected to a 25 kV distribution system exports power to a 120 kV grid through a 30 km, 25 kV feeder. The system that created in MatlabSimulink simulation software can be seen in Figure 5, while Figure 6 shows the control scheme of wind power system. In this research, type 4 wind turbine model is used. The Type 4 wind turbine presented in
this work consists of a synchronous generator connected to a diode rectifier, a DC-DC IGBT-based PWM boost converter and a DC/AC IGBT-based PWM converter modeled by voltage sources. The Type 4 technology allows extracting maximum energy from the wind for low wind speeds by optimizing the turbine speed, while minimizing mechanical stresses on the turbine during gusts of wind.
Fig 5. Wind power system connected to a distribution system
Fig 6. Control scheme of wind power system
197
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 In this study, the wind speed is maintained constant at 15 m/s. The control system of the DC-DC converter is used to maintain the speed at 1 pu. The reactive power produced by the wind turbine is regulated at 0 MVAr. Figure 7 shows the performance characteristic of wind power system with PMSG using neuro-fuzzy controller. The variables shown in Figure 7 is the angular velocity, dc voltage, reactive power, active power, a phase current and voltage phase of a permanent magnet generator output. Rotor angular velocity is relatively stable 1 pu up to t=0.03 seconds, but subsequently rose to 1.0005 pu which occurred up to time t = 0.15 seconds, and after that, there is experiencing stable again. Rotor angular velocity change is due to a short circuit on the
network that causes a voltage drop at the current time of 0.03 seconds. This voltage drop is as a consequence of the increase in network flows due to short circuit. Voltage changes that occur at t = 0.03 s also affect the amount of active power and reactive power generator. As shown in Figure 7 that there has been a reduction in active power of 10 MW to 7 MW at t = 0.03 s to t = 0.08 s. Conversely, the generator reactive power increases at t = 0.03 s is from 0 MVAr to 0.4 MVAr happens to t = 1 s, after which the system becomes unstable because it is controlled by the neuro fuzzy controller. In general it appears that the whole system parameters can be controlled well by controllers based on adaptive neuro-fuzzy approach.
Fig 7. Performance characteristic of wind power system
Technology and High Education, Republic of Indonesia, for funding this research.
VI. CONCLUSION In this study has demonstrated performance of intelligent controller based on adaptive neuro-fuzzy. This controller is used for controlling a permanent magnet synchronous generator (PMSG) that is used in wind power systems. The variables have been controlled are the angular velocity, dc voltage, reactive power, active power, a phase current and voltage phase of a permanent magnet generator output. The simulation results show that the adaptive neuro-fuzzy controller has successfully controlling all variables in a relatively short time to get back to a stable state.
REFERENCES [1]
[2] [3]
[4]
ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors gratefully acknowledge the contributions of the Ministry of Research,
198
R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, Optimization of Distribution Network Configuration with Integration of Distributed Energy Resources Using Extended Fuzzy Multiobjective Method, International Review of Electrical Engineering (IREE), vol.9, no.3, 2014. R. Syahputra, Distributed Generation: State of the Arts dalam Penyediaan Energi Listrik. LP3M UMY, Yogyakarta, 2012. R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, ―Optimal Distribution Network Reconfiguration with Penetration of Distributed Energy Resources‖, in Proceeding of ICITACEE 2014, Semarang, Indonesia, 2014. R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, ―Performance Improvement of Radial Distribution Network with Distributed Generation Integration Using Extended Particle Swarm Optimization Algorithm‖, International Review of Electrical Engineering (IREE), vol.10, no.2, 2015. pp.293304.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [5]
J.G. Slootweg, S. W. H. Haan, H. Polinder, and W.L. Kling. ―General Model for Representing Variable Speed Wind Turbines in Power System Dynamics Simulations‖. IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 18, No. 1, February, 2003. [6] R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, Distribution Network Efficiency Improvement Based on Fuzzy Multiobjective Method. IPTEK Journal of Proceedings Series. 2014; 1(1): 224-229. [7] R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, M. Ashari, Modeling and Simulation of Wind Energy Conversion System in Distributed Generation Units, 3rd International Seminar on Applied Technology, Science and Arts (APTECS), 2011, pp. 290-296. [8] S. Kim and E. Kim, ―PSCAD/EMTDC-based modeling and analysis of a gearless variable speed wind turbine‖, IEEE Trans Energy Conversion, Vol. 22, No. 2, pp. 421-430, 2007. [9] R. Syahputra, ―Fuzzy Multi-Objective Approach for the Improvement of Distribution Network Efficiency by Considering DG‖, IJCSIT, Vol. 4, No. 2, pp. 57-68, April 2012. [10] R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, Reconfiguration of Distribution Network with DG Using Fuzzy Multi-objective Method, Int. Conference on Innovation, Management and Technology Research (ICIMTR), May 21-22, 2012, Melacca, Malaysia. [11] R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, ―Performance Analysis of Wind Turbine as a Distributed Generation Unit in
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
199
Distribution System‖, International Journal of Computer Science & Information Technology (IJCSIT) Vol 6, No 3, pp. 39-56, June 2014. R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, and M. Ashari, ―PSO Based Multiobjective Optimization for Reconfiguration of Radial Distribution Network‖, International Journal of Applied Engineering Research (IJAER), vol.10, no.6, 2015. pp. 14573-14586. R.N. Rohmah, A. Susanto, Indah Soesanti, M. Tjokronagoro, Computer Aided Diagnosis for lung tuberculosis identification based on thoracic X-ray, International Conference on Information Technology and Electrical Engineering (ICITEE), Yogyakarta, 2013. H. Afrisal, M. Faris, P. Utomo, Indah Soesanti, F. Andri, Portable smart sorting and grading machine for fruits using computer vision, International Conference on Computer, Control, Informatics and Its Applications, IC3INA 2013. H.A. Nugroho, N. Faisal, I. Soesanti, L. Choridah. ―Analysis of digital mammograms for detection of breast cancer‖. Proceeding - 2014 International Conference on Computer, Control, Informatics and Its Applications: "New Challenges and Opportunities in Big Data", IC3INA 2014. R.N. Rohmah, A. Susanto, I. Soesanti. ―Lung tuberculosis identification based on statistical feature of thoracic X-ray‖. 2013 International Conference on Quality in Research, QiR 2013 - In Conjunction with ICCS 2013: The 2nd International Conference on Civic Space.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
200
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Application of Particle Swarm Optimization Method for Batik Production Process Indah Soesanti 1, Adhi Susanto2, Ramadoni Syahputra3 1,2
Department of Electrical Engineering and Information Technology, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Gadjah Mada Yogyakarta, Indonesia 1
[email protected]
3
Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Muhammadiyah Yogyakarta Yogyakarta, Indonesia [email protected] Abstract – The process steps of batik are designing, ‘pencantingan’, staining, ‗pelorodan’, and washing. These process steps determine production cost of batik industry. This paper presents application of particle swarm optimization (PSO) method for batik production process optimization. Production cost is determined by the efficiency and calculation of input to output ratio in the production process. In this research, PSO method is used to optimize the production process on Yogyakarta batik industry. The main objective of this research optimization is to minimize the cost incurred in the production process of batik in order to obtain maximum benefit. PSO method has successfully optimized the production goals to be achieved by minimization the using of raw materials and production time. Index Terms - batik; production process; optimization; particle swarm optimization.
I. INTRODUCTION One of the potential of small and medium industries at the local level were developed in an effort to accelerate economic empowerment is commodities eminent in the field of creative industries. In the future, the creative industries are into a leading industry in most of Yogyakarta province. One of the creative industries that are still the flagship is the batik industry [1]. This industry is one of the leading industries in Yogyakarta province, where the creative industries have developed into becoming an industry cluster. Batik industry is expected to give a significant role in supporting the industrial sector's contribution to the local revenue of Yogyakarta province. In the industrial world, the comparison between the production cost and selling price can affect the competitiveness in the market. Production cost is determined by the efficiency and calculation of input to output ratio in the production process. Efficiency is a measure maximize results by using capital (labor, material and tools) are minimal. Efficiency can also be
interpreted as an effort to use the smallest input to obtain maximum production [2-3]. Thus, the management can combine the factors of production with certain management techniques so as to produce a product effectively and efficiently in the quantity, quality, and time of production. Business potential batik industry in this province can be demonstrated by the availability of labor is quite large, the amount of demand for batik products are relatively stable, and the number of batik production are also relatively stable, although recent years slightly decreased due to the batik products imported from China. In addition, the batik production process optimization opportunities a distinct advantage for the progress and development of the batik industry, especially in Yogyakarta province. Fig 1 shows the example of Yogyakarta batik. Each company generally wants to get maximum benefit by optimizing the limited resources available. It can be solved using optimization methods based on particle swarm optimization (PSO). PSO is an artificial intelligence-based optimization method that has been widely used in various fields [4] – [8]. The ability of PSO optimization methods have been tested for computing the low and optimal results [9] – [10]. In this study, PSO method is used to optimize the production process of batik on one of Yogyakarta batik industry. The main objective of this research optimization is to minimize the costs incurred in the production process of batik in order to obtain maximum benefit. PSO method can optimize production goals to be achieved by the limits of existing resources. This is confirmed by other scientists who claimed that when companies produce products that vary, the planning method for producing the goods in order to obtain the maximum benefit can be obtained by PSO method. Thus, the PSO method is a method used by the company in producing more than one variation with limited resources.
201
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Once dry, re-do the batik process that is painted using wax using canting using canting to cover parts that will be maintained in the first coloring. Then the process is followed by a second color dyeing process. 5.
Process of the First Pelorodan The next process is to remove the wax of the fabric by putting or boiling the cloth in hot water on the stove.
6.
Process of the Third Pencantingan After a clean cloth of candles and dried, can be carried back to the closing of wax batik process (using canting) to hold the first and second color.
7. Fig 1. Example of Yogyakarta batik
The process of opening and closing the wax can be repeated according to the number of colors and the complexity of the desired motif.
II. BATIK PRODUCTION PROCESS Indonesia has been recognized internationally as a pioneer and leading producer of batik. In 2009, UNESCO has named Indonesian batik a masterpiece of the ‗Oral and Intangible Heritage of Humanity‘. The crowning of course very proud for Indonesia. This fact reflects UNESCO‘s efforts to move beyond the protection of ancient monuments and encourage living artistic traditions.
8.
2.
Process of Washing
Process of designing and Molani The first process is a process of drawing or sketching that wanted in the fabric / silk using a pencil or pen.
III. PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION
Process of First Pencantingan
Process of Staining The process is the first coloring process on the part that is not covered by wax by dipping the cloth in a particular color. Once dipped, the fabric in the drying and dried.
4.
9.
The next process is to wash the batik cloth and then dry it by way of drying or cooling it down in the shade.
After completing the process of molani, the second step is pencantingan namely painting fabric with wax using the canting by following a pattern that has been made on both sides of the fabric (back and forth). 3.
Process of the Second Pelorodan The process is that the fabric has changed the color of boiled hot water. The aim is to remove the layer of wax, so the motives which have previously drawn clearly visible, previously seen clearly, this immersion will not make motifs that have been drawn exposed to color, because the top of the fabric is still shrouded in a thin layer (wax not completely faded).
The batik tradition is particularly prevalent on the Java island and was handed down from generation to generation. Batik is created either by drawing dots and lines of the resist with a spouted tool called a canthing. The process of making batik is described as follows. 1.
Process of Opening and Closing of Patterns
Process of the Second Pencantingan
Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) algorithm was first published by Eberhart and Kennedy. The algorithm was inspired by a flock of birds movement in searching of food. The movement model can be used as a powerful optimizer. In one n-dimensional search space, let us assume that the position of the i-th individual is Xi = (xi1, ..., xid, ..., xin) and the speed of the i-th individual is Vi = (vi1, ..., vid, ..., vin). The particle best experience i-th is recorded and represented by Pbesti = (pbesti1, ..., pbestid, ..., pbestin). The best global position for swarm search is Gbesti = (gbest1, ..., gbestd, ..., gbestn). Fig. 2 shows the concept of optimization using PSO. The modified velocity of each particle is calculated based on the personal initial velocity, the distance from the personal best position, and
202
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
the distance from the global best position, as shown in the following equation: Vi (t 1) Vi (t ) c1 rand1 () ( Pbest i X i(t ) ) (1) c2 rand2 () (Gbesti X i(t ) )
Else if particle position pos(j)mv, then vel(j)=mv Else if particle velocity vel(j)<-mv, then pos(j)= -mv. 8. Decrease the inertia weight (ω) linearly from 0.9 to 0.4. Repeat steps 2-8 until a criterion is obtained. BATIK PRODUCTION PROCESS OPTIMIZATION
Fig. 2. The concept of optimization using PSO.
Equation (1) determines the velocity vector of the i-th particle. Therefore, the latest position of the particle can be determined by using the equation:
X
( t 1) i
X
(t ) i
Vi
max
a.
max min t max
t
Minimization of raw materials k
f1 ( X ) Ri
( t 1)
(2) where i = 1, 2, ..., N is the index of each particle; t is the number of iterations; rand1() and rand2() are a random number between 0 and 1; and N is the number of the swarm. Inertia weights ω can be determined by the equation: ( t 1)
The main objective of optimization in this research is to minimize production costs include raw materials, processing time, and the energy expended in the production process of batik in order to obtain maximum benefit. The objective function in the optimization is shown in the following equations:
b.
Minimization of processing time k
f 2 ( X ) Ti
(5)
i 1
The multi-objective formulation of batik production process could be defined as follow: max J ( X ) || f ( X ) f 0 ||2
(3)
where ωmax is the maximum inertia weight; ωmin is the minimum inertia weight; tmax is the maximum number of iterations; and t is the actual number of iterations. The value of inertia weight decrease linearly from 0.9 to 0.5. The improved PSO algorithm is described as follows: 1. Input the data of the raw materials, processing time and the energy expended in the production process of batik and initialize the parameters of PSO. 2. Run the program of raw materials, processing time, and the energy expended in the production process of batik to measure the fitness (length) of each particle (pbest) and store it with the best value of fitness (gbest). 3. Update velocity of particle using (1). 4. Update position of particle using (2). 5. Decrease the inertia weight (ω) linearly from 0.9 to 0.4. 6. Perform violation of particle position: If particle position pos(j)>mp, then pos(j)=mp
(4)
i 1
f 1 ( X ) f o1 2 f 2 ( X ) f o 2 2
Subject to: F(x) = 0
(6)
Ti ,min Ti Ti ,max
(7) (8)
Pi ,min Pi Pi ,max
(9)
where f1(X) is a cost function of raw materials; f2(X) is a cost function of processing time; Ri is a raw variable of batik; Ti is a processing time variable; and Pi is an energy of batik processing. Furthermore, based on cost functions as expressed in the equation (4) to the equation (7) conducted a multi-objective optimization to optimize the production process of batik in one of Yogyakarta batik industry. IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION In this section, the results of multi-objective optimizations of batik production process includes raw materials, processing time, and the energy used in the production process of batik are described. Demand for raw materials, process time, and energy used in the production process of batik to produce 100 pieces of batik cloth shown in Table 1.
203
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
A.
Preparing Your Paper 1) Paper Size: Prepare your paper in full-size format on US letter size paper. 2) Type Sizes and Typefaces: Follow the font type sizes specified in Table I. The font type sizes are given in points, same as in the MS Word font size points. Times New Roman is the preferred font. 3) Paper Margins: Paper margins on A4 letter size paper are set as follows: top = 20 mm, bottom = 20 mm, left = 35 mm, and right = 20 mm. 4) Paper Styles: Left- and right-justify the columns. On the last page of your paper, adjust the lengths of the columns so that they are equal. Use automatic hyphenation and check spelling and grammar. Use high resolution (300dpi or above) figures, plots, drawings and photos for best printing result.
energy during the production process 100 batik cloths. The processing time is expressed in hours, which shows the amount of time required for the production process 100 batik cloths.
TABLE II RAW MATERIAL COST, PROCESS TIME, AND ENERGY COST IN BATIK PROCESS PRODUCTION BEFORE OPTIMIZATION Stages of Process Molani First Pencantingan Staining Second Pencantingan First Pelorodan Third Pencantingan Opening and Closing of Patterns Second Pelorodan Washing Total
TABLE I RAW MATERIAL IN BATIK PROCESS PRODUCTION Stages of Process Molani First Pencantingan Nembok Staining Second Pencantingan First Pelorodan Third Pencantingan Opening and Closing of Patterns Second Pelorodan Washing
Raw Material white cloth wax wax dye wax hot water wax wax hot water water
Table II shows the raw material, process time, and energy in batik process production before optimization. Raw material costs are stated in Rupiah, which indicates the amount of the cost needed for the procurement of raw materials to produce 100 batik cloths. Also, energy costs are stated in Rupiah, which indicates the amount it costs to pay for energy during the production process 100 batik cloths. The processing time is expressed in hours, which shows the amount of time required for the production process 100 batik cloths.
Table II shows the raw material, process time, and energy in batik process production before optimization. Raw material costs are stated in Rupiah, which indicates the amount of the cost needed for the procurement of raw materials to produce 100 batik cloths. Also, energy costs are stated in Rupiah, which indicates the amount it costs to pay for
Raw Material Process Time Cost (Rp) (hours) 5,000,000 14 600,000 24 3,200,000 10 400,000 23 100,000 400,000 100,000
8 14 8
100,000 100,000 10,000,000
8 8 117
In this production process using 4 pieces stove for mencanting. As for the process pelorodan used 2 pieces of gas stoves. The production process is carried out for 7 hours a day, 6 days a week. The production process is done by 10 employees. The production costs are calculated without taking into account salaries. TABLE III RAW MATERIAL COST, PROCESS TIME, AND ENERGY COST IN BATIK PROCESS PRODUCTION AFTER OPTIMIZATION Stages of Process Molani First Pencantingan Staining Second Pencantingan First Pelorodan Third Pencantingan Opening and Closing of Patterns Second Pelorodan Washing Total Saving (%)
4,500,000 500,000 2,900,000 300,000 90,000 300,000 90,000
Process Time (hours) 12 21 9 23 7 12 7
90,000 90,000 8,860,000 11.4
7 7 105 10.256
Raw Material Cost (Rp)
As shown in Table II that prior to the optimization of the production process of batik, the costs of raw materials needed is Rp
204
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
10,000,000 with as many as 117 hours of production time. Results of batik production process optimization using PSO method is shown in Table III. As shown in Table III that after the optimization of the production process of batik, the costs of raw materials needed is Rp 8,860,000 with as many as 105 hours of production time. Optimization results show that there is a saving of raw materials amounted to 11.4%. Results also showed an optimization of production time savings of 126 hours to 105 hours, or 10.256%. These savings would have an impact on improving operational efficiency in the batik industry. This optimization is expected to help strengthen the competitiveness of Yogyakarta batik industry. V. CONCLUSION This paper presents batik production process optimization using particle swarm optimization (PSO) method. Optimization results show that in batik production process, there is a saving of raw materials amounted to 11.4%. Results also showed an optimization of production time savings of 117 hours to 105 hours, or 10.256%. These savings would have an impact on improving operational efficiency in the batik industry. This optimization is expected to help strengthen the competitiveness of Yogyakarta batik industry. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors gratefully acknowledge the contributions of Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education, Republic of Indonesia, for funding this research.
REFERENCES [1]
[2]
I. Soesanti, ―Design of Batik Production Process Monitoring Based on Web Technology‖, Proceeding of National Seminar CITEE 2009, Electrical Engineering of UGM, Yogyakarta. 2009. S. Freihat, ―The Role of Marketing Information System in Marketing Decision-making in Jordanian
Shareholding Medicines Production Companies‖, IJRRAS, 11(2), May 2012. [3] H. Afrisal, M. Faris, P. Utomo, I. Soesanti, F. Andri, ―Portable smart sorting and grading machine for fruits using computer vision‖, Proceeding - 2013 International Conference on Computer, Control, Informatics and Its Applications: "Recent Challenges in Computer, Control and Informatics", IC3INA 2013. [4] R.N. Rohmah, A. Susanto, I. Soesanti, M. Tjokronagoro, ―Computer Aided Diagnosis for lung tuberculosis identification based on thoracic X-ray‖, Proceedings 2013 International Conference on Information Technology and Electrical Engineering: "Intelligent and Green Technologies for Sustainable Development", ICITEE, Yogyakarta, 2013. [5] R.N. Rohmah, A. Susanto, I. Soesanti, M. Tjokronagoro, ―Thoracic X-ray features extraction using thresholdingbased ROI template and PCA-based features selection for lung TB classification purposes‖, Proc. of 2013 3rd Int. Conf. on Instrumentation, Communications, Information Technol., and Biomedical Engineering: Science and Technol. for Improvement of Health, Safety, and Environ. ICICI-BME, 2013. [6] H.A. Nugroho, N. Faisal, I. Soesanti, L. Choridah, ―Identification of malignant masses on digital mammogram images based on texture feature and correlation based feature selection‖, Proceedings - 2014 6th International Conference on Information Technology and Electrical Engineering: Leveraging Research and Technology Through University-Industry Collaboration, ICITEE, Yogyakarta, 2014. [7] I. Soesanti, T.S. Widodo, ―Classification of Batik Pattern Based on Eigenimage Feature Extraction‖, Proceeding of National Seminar on Annual Engineering Seminar 2013, Engineering Faculty of UGM, Yogyakarta, Indonesia, 2013. [8] I. Soesanti, A. Susanto, ―Image Compression Based on DCT and Adaptive Fuzzy Logics‖, Proceeding of National Seminar on Annual Engineering Seminar 2014, Engineering Faculty of UGM, Yogyakarta, Indonesia, 2014. [9] R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, M. Ashari, ―Performance Improvement of Radial Distribution Network with Distributed Generation Integration Using Extended Particle Swarm Optimization Algorithm‖, International Review of Electrical Engineering (IREE), Vol. 10, No. 2, 2015, pp. 293-304. [10] R. Syahputra, I. Robandi, M. Ashari, ―Optimization of distribution network configuration with integration of distributed energy resources using extended fuzzy multiobjective method‖, International Review of Electrical Engineering (IREE), Vol. 9, No. 3, 2014, pp. 629-639.
205
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
206
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
System Testing of Centralized Multi-Patient Health Monitoring System I Ketut Eddy Purnama1,2, Muhammad Fajariansyah Ismail1, Arief Kurniawan1,2 Department of Electrical Engineering, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS), Surabaya, Indonesia 2 Department of Multimedia and Network Engineering, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS) , Surabaya, Indonesia 1
(Tel: +62 31 5922936; Email: ketut[at]te.its.ac.id, arifku[at]ee.its.ac.id) walk around to each room patient to obtain vital sign data of each patient. The collected data is not real-time and can be changed when the paramedics out of the patient's room. Another problem of the current procedure is that the monitoring procedure can not be performed remotely or can not be concentrated in a central monitoring room. As a result, monitoring patient condition will be more difficult. Hence, such a system to monitor patient condition remotely and centralized will be beneficial. Related works has been done extensively [1-6]. Megalingam, et.al. [6], in their research, has been designing and making tools to monitor the health of patients by using standardized IEEE 802.15 radio network. Vital sign parameters used in the study is the heart rate, blood pressure, ECG (Electrocardiogram), EEG (Electroenchelo- graphy), and body temperature. By using the five parameters of vital signs, the result of data transmission time was reported at the value of 0.8 second for each patient. This studies conclude that such a device can only work effectively for monitoring six patients. More advance study was done by Mukherjee et al. [7]. They proposed the design and implementation of an e-health monitoring networked system based on smart devices and wireless sensor networks (WSN). However, they stress on WSN and was aimed for telemonitoring system. Hence, we have developed a Centralized Multi-Patient Health Monitoring System based on micro-controller and TCP / IP Protocol. In this paper we describes the work to perform comprehensive testing of the developed system.
Abstract- In this paper we describes testing results of a system called centralized multi-patient health monitoring system. The system is benefecial to be used in hospital so that vital signs of hospitalized patients can be monitored centrally by paramedics on duty, reducing time for visiting patients while improving quality of service to the patients. The system consist of sensors attached to the patient, micro-controller to receive the sensor data and send the data to the server via TCP/IP protocol, the display system in the patient side and display system in the server side or in the central monitoring room. The test includes the test for application, user interface, health sensors, throughput, and delay. The error values of sensor data acquisition are accepptable, temperature sensors, breath, and heart rate errors respectively are 4.57%, 11.9%, and 9.85%. In terms of data transmission in the network, the system has downlink and uplink throughput on average respectively 17.61 Kbit/s and 4.21 Kbit/s. Sensor data can be transmitted in a real time manner with time delay of 1 ms. All functions in the user interface work properly. The relation between time delay with number of attached devices in a form of an equation can be made. In conclussion, the centralized multi-patient health monitoring system is promising to be developed. Keyword: E-Health, Health Monitoring, Vital Sign, Microcontroller, Throughput, Web-Based Applications.
I. INTRODUCTION Patients who are hospitalized should always be under the supervision of the medical team with the aim that the health of patients can continue to be monitored and avoiding unexpected things that sometimes can occur in patients. Current procedure to monitor patient condition in many hospital is by placing equipmentd called vital sign monitoring device installed in the room of each patient. Paramedics on duty who are responsible to monitor hospitalized patients should visit all of the patient rooms at regular intervals to check the patient's vital signs such as blood pressure, heart rate, body temperature, and others. This procedure has the disadvantage because paramedics had to
II. CENTRALIZED MULTI-PATIENT HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM
A. Design System The proposed system consists of three layers, namely Perception Layer; Middleware and API's Layer; and E-Health Application and Service Layer [7]. Perception layer is a layer that responsible for data acquisition of e-health. This layer generally consists of sensors attached to the patient's body. Middle-ware and API's layer is the
207
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 middle layer between Layer Perception and EHealth Application and Service Layer. This layer serves to handle the connectivity between the two layers. Inside this layer there are some features such as back-end storage in a database or regulating the flow of data between applications. E-Health Application and Service Layer is the topmost layer in the architecture. This layer contains the applications and interfaces for user applications. The users may doctors, paramedics, patients, or other entities that use the system for health purposes. The proposed system is based on the architecture illustrated in Figure 1.
B. Web-Based Applications The user interface is used to visualize the data that is already stored in the database. User interface is made in the form of web based applications to enable the sytem to be used across operating systems. It is expected that the operating system does not limit the performance of the application. The user interface is created using the HTML based web programming added with some additional libraries such as jQuery, CSS, and D3.js. The use of these four elements to develop user interface will make the system to be interactive, and enable paramedics pay attention to the displayed vital signs accurately. There are two modes of vital signs visualization is the visualization in the patient's room and visualization in the paramedics room. There are some important data that need to be displayed in visualization in the patient's room: 1. Name of the patient is being monitored, 2. Room number of patient room, 3. Patient ID number, 4. Historical vital signs data in real-time graphical form, 5. Value of the current vital sign that is represented in the form of numbers, 6. Notice or warning when the vital signs are within abnormal conditions, and visualized in red without sound alert. The second visualization is the visualization at paramedics room. The display system in the paramedics room display all vital sign data of all patient being monitored. User Interface is divided into two parts. The left section displays the identity of patients being treated along with his vital signs. The patient data can be switched to display the historical graphical of patient‘s vital signs.
Figure 1. Architecture of the proposed system
II. TESTING: METHODS AND RESULTS A. Testing to the Receiver Module This test aims to determine the amount of data received by the receiver program which then is stored in the database. Within two minutes, 600 (six hundred) of testing data can be received by the program and can be inserted into the database. The ratio between the amount of received data with the amount of sent data is 100%. One can say that the receiver program work well and can be used to receive data and can be stored in the database.
Figure 2. System Design
Based on this architecture, the system is designed as shown in Figure 2. Vital sign sensors are attached to the patient in each room. Stream of vital sign data is then directed to the server and stored in database. The stored data is then displayed in monitor device in the patient room. In the monitoring room, paramedic on duty can monitor vital sign of all patients and in a such way so that the paramedic can recognize patient in emergency status.
B. Tests User-Interface This test aims to determine the results of a user interface of the system that has been created. Results of user interface illustrated in Figure 3. The display system run as expected in the design. The system can provides notification when the condition of the patient's vital signs are in abnormal condition. For example, when the temperature and pressure conditions which exceed normal limits, user-interface turns into red.
208
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Table 3 shows the testing results of breathing. The lowest error occurred in patient 3 with the value of 7.14% while the value of the highest error occurred in testing on patients 2 with a value of 120%. This value is high since patient 2 breath more slowly than the other patients. This condition makes the sensor can not measure accurately how many breath patient 2 has taken per minute. The value of average error of the test if patient 2 is excluded from the test is 11.9%. By having the results, one can be say that the breath sensor can replace the manual calculation with a note that the patient breath normally and not too slow.
Figure 3. User-Interface of Normal and Abnormal Condition
C. Comparison Tests Sensor This test aims to determine the accuracy of data acquisition sensors used in the system. The tested sensors is a temperature sensor, an ECG sensor, and the breath sensor module of e-Health Arduino Shield. Reference data for this test is the method commonly used. The test results are shown in Table 1 to Table 3
D. Testing Throughput Single User This test aims to determine the speed of deliveries both uplink and downlink of data on one device that is connected to the server. Testing is done with the help of an application called nload. Tests performed on three subjects for one minute. The test results are shown in the graph in Table 4, Table 5, and Table 6.
TABLE 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR TESTING
Subject #
Sensor E-Health
Digital Termometer
Error
1
38.47
37.1
3.69%
2
37.93
35.7
6.24%
3
38.09
36.7
3.78%
TABLE 4 AVERAGE THROUGHPUT OF UPLINK AND DOWNLINK
Table1 shows that the smallest error occurred in patient 1 testing with an error value of 3.69% while the biggest error occurred in patient 2 testing with an error value of 6.24%. The average error of is 4.57%. The reading of the data on the temperature sensor E-Health always produce higher value compared with a digital thermometer. From the results of this test, the vital sign sensor can replace a digital thermometer to measure patient's body temperature data.
Subject # 1
22.9%
Downlink
1
1.23%
1.23%
2
2.78%
3.58%
3
1.18
0.77%
TABLE 5
TABLE 2 Manual Counting 87
Uplink
MAXIMAL THROUGHPUT OF UPLINK AND DOWNLINK
ECG SENSOR TESTING
Sensor E-Health 60
Testing #
Testing #
Uplink
Downlink
1
19.31
4.26
2
11.37
4.29
3
22.16
4.05
Error TABLE 6
2
60
62
3.33%
3
93
90
3.33%
TOTAL THROUGHPUT OF UPLINK AND DOWNLINK
Table 2 shows the testing results of ECG Sensor compared with manual counting. The lowest error occurs in the test in patient 2 and patient 3 with a value of 3.33% error. While the highest error occurred in patient 1 with the error value of 22.9%. The average error value on this test is 9.85%. From the results of this test, the value of ECG sensor readings can be said to be good to calculate the patient's heartbeat per minute. TABLE 3 Sensor EHealth
Manual Counting
Error
1
21
18
16.67%
2
33
15
120%
3
15
14
7.14%
Uplink
Downlink
1
73.8
73.8
2
166.8
214.8
3
70.8
46.2
Table 4 shows that the average throughput of uplink and downlink of patient 2 is the highest with the value of 2.78 Kbit/s and 3.58 Kbit/s respectively. This test shows that the use of resources in the network is considered to be minor since the overall average throughput of all the test has an average value of 1.73 Kbit/s and 1.86 Kbit/ s, respectively. Table 5 shows that the highest maximum throughput value of uplink is found in patient 3 with a value of 22.16 Kbit/s, while the highest maximum throughput value of downlink is found in patient 2 with a value of 4.29 Kbit/s. The whole
TESTING OF BREATHING SENSOR
Subject #
Testing #
209
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 test show that the maximum throughput of uplink is always greater than the maximum throughput of downlink. The average value for the maximum throughput of uplink and maximum downlink throughput of the overall testing of each is 17.61 Kbit/s and 4.21 Kbit/s, respectively. Maximum throughput of both uplink and downlink are still small relative to the local network that using ethernet 100 Mbps. Table 6 shows that the highest value of total throughput uplink and downlink throughput are both present in patient 2 respectively 166.8 and 214.8 Kbit. Whereas total average throughput between uplink and downlink are respectively 103.8 and 113.6 Kbit. Within one minute testing, the total value of transmitted data and received data are relatively small.
time delay of delivery. The test results are shown in the graph in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Relation between number of device with time delay By applying linear regression to the data in
Figure 4, it is obtained the following equation: y = 0.068x + 0.055
E. Throughput Testing of Multi User Condition This test aims to determine the speed of data transmission both uplink and downlink on some devices connected to the server. Testing is done with the help of a terminal program called nload. Testing is done on a server with four user in which simulation of vital sign data are transmitted for two minutes. The testing delivers the uplink throughput is 13.16 while the downlink throuhput is 24.2. The two minute test shows that the average throughput at four users is relatively small, and the load of the transmitted data is still in a tolerated condition.
By having this equation, one can calculate the expected maximum number of devices to be installed to the system of a tolerated time delay. For example, if one can tolerat time delay maximum of 10 ms, then the maximum number of devices that can be handled is: 10 = 0.068x + 0.055 x = (10-0055) /0.068 x = 146.25 ≈ 146 It means that 146 devices can be attached simultaneously in the same network to the system. Regarding the proposed multi-patient health monitoring system, it also mean that 146 patient can be inspected by the system. Obtained from the calculation of ideal conditions that the system can handle 146 devices simultaneously in the same network.
F. Time Delay Testing This test aims to determine the time delay of the transmitted data from the sender to the recipient. This test is divided into two, namely the time delay test of single-user and time delay test of multiuser. Testing single-user time delay is done by searching for a pause between two deliveries data followed by the substraction to the acquisition time by the sensor. The test results are shown in Table 7.
IV. CONCLUSSION We have presented the work of system testing of centralized multi-patient health monitoring system. The test includes the test for receiving application, user interface, health sensor, throughput, and delay. The receiving application can receive transmitted data well and the transmitted data can be stored in the database. User interface can display vital sign data and appear in red for abnormal condition. Health sensor functions normally, throughput system of both uplink and downlink is acceptable. The relation between time delay with number of attached devices in a form of an equation can be made. In conclussion, the centralized multi-patient health monitoring system is promising to be developed.
TABLE 7 TIME DELAY (SINGLE USER)
Data #
Average Delay (ms)
1-100 101-200 201-300 301-400 401-500 501-600
201.01 201 201 201 201 201
Overall average of delivery time between the two data is 201 ms. Since the duration of the process is 200 ms, then the time delay to deliver data from the transmitting device to the receiving device is 1 ms. Furthermore, there is a delay testing multi-user, wherein number of devices connected to the server is more than one. This test aims to determine the relationship between the number of devices with a
ACKNOWLEDGMENT We thank to Directorate General of Higher Education, DIKTI, Ministry of Research Technology and Higher Education for providing grant to this research.
210
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [4] Sukanesh R., ―Intelligent Wireless Mobile Patient Monitoring System‖, ICCCCT'10. - 2010. - pp. 540-543. [5] Zhang Z. and Huang T.,‖An intelligent patient monitoring system for home application‖, Conference on Genetic and Evolutionary Computing, 2009. [6] R. K. Megalingam, ―Efficient patient monitoring for multiple patients using WSN,‖ in Advances in Mobile Network, Communication and its Applications (MNCAPPS) International Conference, 2012. [7] S. Mukherjee, ―Patient health management system using ehealth monito- ring architecture,‖ in IEEE International Advance Computing Conference, 2014.
REFERENCES [1] N. Hafizah, K. Yusnani, M. Yussoff, H. Hashim, ―Two-Tier e-Health Monitoring System‖, in Proceeding of the 13th International Conference on Applied Computer and Applied Computational Science (ACACOS), 2014. [2] Hristoskova A., ―Ontology-Driven Monitoring of Patient's Vital Signs Enabling Personalized Medical Detection and Alert‖, Sensors. - 2014. - pp. 1598-1607. [3] J.G. Ko, ―MEDiSN: Medical Emergency Detection in Sensor Networks‖, ACM Trans. Embedded Comput. Syst., vol. 10. - 2010. - pp. 11.1-11.29.
211
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
212
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Solar Power Trainer Design using Buck Converter and Fuzzy Logic Control Mahendra Widyartono1, Arif Widodo2, Reza Rahmadian3 1,2,3
1
Electrical Engineering Department of Surabaya State University Engineering Faculty, Surabaya State University
[email protected], 2 [email protected], 3 [email protected] energy consumption by using the most efficient equipment and then to design a solar power system around the energy-efficient system [7]. Solar Power Trainer is the equipment used for teaching, training, and study of green energy technologies (Green Energy Technology), the conversion of solar energy into electrical energy, and to know the characteristics of PV cells. In addition to the above, solar power trainer can also be used to study the current - voltage curve from the solar cell to get the output power (Maximum Power Point), calculate the efficiency of solar cells and can be used for DC load applications such as fans and lights PV systems are power source that have non-linear current-voltage characteristics [1]. The nature of the solar panels is the current and voltage output that varies depending on solar irradiation and temperature. If the solar panels are connected directly to the load, the voltage and current that flows through the load will be changeable / variable to follow changes in solar irradiation and temperature. Because power is a multiplication of voltage multiplied by current, then the power output of the solar panels will also vary. Changes in voltage, current and power output of the solar panels will result in reduced efficiency of solar panels. To overcome these problems, we need a method to search for the maximum point of the output current and output voltage of the solar panel to produce the maximum output power of solar panels in a wide variety of conditions. To overcome this limitation, Fuzzy Logic Control and electronic circuits are introduced to control the battery charging, conversion DC to DC voltage and convert DC voltage to AC (inversion). DC-DC converter is used to convert the DC input voltage that varies into controlled DC output voltage at the desired voltage level while Fuzzy Logic Controller (FLC) is suitable to control a non-linear systems through manipulating its membership function and rule base [5].
Abstract—Photovoltaic (PV) systems are power source systems that have non-linear current – voltage characteristics (I-V) under different environments condition. The system consists of PV generator (cells, modules, PV array), energy storage (batteries), buck converter, and resistive load. The proposed maximum power point control is based on fuzzy logic to control the switch of the buck converter. Buck converter is used to convert DC input voltage that varies into controlled DC output voltage at a desired output voltage. Voltage and current output from PV module were used as input parameters of fuzzy control to generate optimum duty cycle so that maximum power can be generated in varying operating condition. With buck converter and fuzzy logic control, the current and voltage through the load is drop from 0,83 A to 0,81 A and from 16,27 V to 15,72 V. Using buck converter and fuzzy logic control method, the system have better stability even in dynamic operating conditions. Index Terms—Photovoltaic System, Solar Power Trainer, Fuzzy Logic Controller, Buck Converter.
I. Introduction Solar energy represents an inexhaustible clean energy source that allows for local Energy Independence, and photovoltaics (PV) is the one electric power available to anyone virtually anywhere on the planet. Solar energy can be converted through chemical, thermal, or electrical processes . Capturing solar energy typically requires equipment with a relatively high initial capital cost. However, over the lifetime of the solar equiptment, these systems can prove to be cost competitive, especially because there are no recurring fuel cost, as compared to conventional energy technologies. In order to size and design a solar energy system, it is necessary to conduct a reasonable assessment of the energy requirements that the system will have to meet. With this information, a reasonable estimate for the size of a PV system required to supply the energy needed can be made [7]. In PV systems, energy demand is specified on a per-day basis; this leads to the next factor for consideration : the proposed use of the energy. Is the energy for regional telecommunications system that will operate 24 hours/day, 7 days/week? Is it for lights only at night? or maybe for waterpumping system that will mostly be needed during the hot summer. The key is first to minimize
II. Photovoltaic System Modeling
a. Photovoltaic cell model The simplest equivalent circuit of PV cell is current source paralel with a diode (Fig. 1). The output of current source proportional to the amount of solar iradiation on the PV cell (IPV). In this
213
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 considered ideal. The equation of the buck converter circuit is as follows :
model, the open circuit voltage and short circuit current is a key parameter [6]. Short circuit current depends on the intensity of sunlight, while the open circuit voltage is affected by the material and temperature.
(
)
𝑔
(
)
( ) ( )
Fig 1. Equivalent circuit of one diode PV model.
Fig 2. Buck converter circuit.
Equations of this model are : [
]
) ( ) ( ) Based on Figure 2, It can be determined parameters for modeling buck converter used in this research. These parameters are as follows : Vin = 16 V Vout = 14 V RL = 150 mΩ D = Vin/Vout Iload = 3,13 A RC = 5,5 Ω fs = 1/T = 25 KHz Iripple = 0,3 Iload R = 19,5 Ω The input voltage of buck converter adapted to the maximum output voltage of PV module. Because it uses a buck converter, the output voltage of buck converter is smaller that the input voltage. In this research the buck converter output voltage is set at 14 Volts. Duty cycle (D) is set at 85% or 0,85 to generate the required output voltage. Switching frequency used in this research were selected at 25 KHz. Ripple current are generally capped at 30% of maximum load. From the above parameters can be searched the value of inductor required by using equation bellow : ( ) ( ⁄ ) ( )
( )
𝑂
( ) [
]
( )
I-V characteristic of PV cells can be defined as follows : *
(
(
)
)
+
( )
Where IPH is the photovoltaic current, ID is the diode current, RS is the series resistance and RP is paralel resistance of PV cells. The parameter used in the model is taken from the PV module specification as listed in Table 1. PV module specification data above refers to the Standard Test Condition (STC) is the irradiation of 1000 W/m2 and at temperatures of 25 ° C.
From equation 9 above the required inductor value L is ≥ 0,75 mH. Capacitors are used as filter to reduce the ripple that occurs. Because ripple is inversely proportional to the value of the capacitor, the greater value of the capacitor, the smaller the resulting ripple. A capacitor (C) with a value of 2200 µF is used to reduced module ripple voltage. I. Fuzzy logic control Fuzzy logic control has several advantages such as suitable for use on systems that are not linear and can work with imprecise inputs. Fuzzy control (Fig. 3) using input voltage (V) and current (I) and generates a duty cycle (D) output that used as buck converter input. The input voltage and current for fuzzy control is from the output voltage and power from PV module. Fuzzy logic control consist of three stages : fuzzification, inference method and defuzzification. a. Fuzzification Fuzzification stage is a stage where the input variable was changed into the language (linguistic) based on the membership function. Triangular and trapesium membership function with seven fuzzy
TABLE I PV MODULE SPECIFICATION
Model Material Power output (max) Voltage output (max) Current output (max) Open circuit voltage Short circuit current Dimension
(
ST-50-P6 Polycrystalline Silicon 50 W 16 V 3,13 A 19,7 V 3,58 A 784 x 596 x 35 mm
b. Buck Converter Model Buck converter (step-down) can change a DC input voltage into a regulated DC output voltage whose value is lower than the input voltage. The buck converter circuit used in this research can be seen in Figure 2. The key components are inductor (L), the switch (S) and the diode (D). The capacitor (C) stores charge and maintains a smooth output voltage as the switch is cycled on and off. For purposes of analysis, the diode and switch is
214
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 subsets VVS (very very small), VS (very small), S (small), M (medium), B (big), VB (very big), VVB (very very big) is used (Fig. 4). Variable V and I are used as input, and variable D as output.
LOAD HOURS OPERATING/DAY
Load
One DC LED Lamp 12 V One PC Fan
Figure 3. Fuzzy logic controller. b. Inference method At this stage, Mamdani method is used to control the generated output. The design of basic rules (rule base) consists of 49 fuzzy control rules. This rule implemented by computer and used to control the duty cycle of buck converter in order to obtain maximum power from PV modules in different conditions. These rule were expressed as IF-THEN statements as follows R1 : IF V is VVS and I is VVS THEN D is VVB. R2 : IF V is VVS and I is VS THEN D is VVB. R3 : IF V is VVS and I is S THEN D is VVB. R4 : IF V is VVS and I is M THEN D is VVB. R5 : IF V is VVS and I is B THEN D is VVB. R6 : IF V is VVS and I is VB THEN D is VVB. R7 : IF V is VVS and I is VVB THEN D is VVB. Fuzzy rule base used for this research can be seen in Table 2. TABLE II FUZZY RULE BASE I VS S M B VB VVB V VVS VVS
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VS
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
S
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
M
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
B
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
VVB
B
B
M M M M M c. Defuzzification At this stage, the outputs of fuzzy logic control is changed from linguistic variables into numeric variables using membership function. With defuzzification, fuzzy logic control can generates analog output signal that can be converted into digital signals and control the buck converter. Centroid type of defuzzification is used for this research. J. Sizing PV System In order to size and design a solar energy system, it is necessary to conduct a reasonable assessment of the energy requirements that the system will have to meet. With this information, a reasonable estimate for the size of a PV system required to supply the energy needed can be made. Table 3 bellow is load hours operating/day that used in this research.
Hours operating/day (hours) 12
Power (W) 5
Daily energy (Wh) 60
12
2,4
28,8
Total energy required : 88,8 Wh Critical month of use : 5 sun-hours PV module STC rating : 50 W Battery size : 12V / 12 Ah PV system size required : 88,8 Wh/(5 sun hours* 50 W * 50% efficiency) = 0,7104 (which means using 1 module) Battery bank size required : 88,8 Wh/(45% DOD * 75% battery efficiency * 12 Ah * 12 V) = 1,83 batteries in parallel (which means using 2 batteries)
(a)
(b)
(c) Fig 4. Membership function : (a) first input V, (b) second input (c) output D.
TABLE III
215
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig 5. Simulation of Solar Power Trainer using buck converter and fuzzy logic control
a.
converter using solar panel voltage and current. The fuzzy controller block performs the fuzzification, inference method, and defuzzification process.
Simulation of Fuzzy Logic Control
The simulation software is used for simulate fuzzy logic control with PV module and resistive loads. The system consist of :
Buck Converter Block DC – DC converter is used to convert the DC input voltage that varies into controlled DC output voltage at the desired voltage level. Buck converter (Fig. 2) produces a dc output voltage of the average lower than the input DC voltage
PV Module Block Simulate the non-linear I-V characteristic of ST-50-P6 PV module (Fig. 6). 4
PWM Block Generates the pulse signals for the buck converter based on the desired duty cycle.
3.5
Current
3 2.5
Load A 19,5 ohm resistive load is connected to PV module via buck converter. This value obtained from internal resistance of a 12V DC LED lamp and a PC Fan that connected in parallel with the system.
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 1.47 2.94 4.41 5.88 7.35 8.82 10.29 11.76 13.23 14.7 16.17 17.64 19.11
0
III.
This chapter contains the result and analysis of solar power trainer using buck converter and fuzzy logic control simulation system (Fig. 5). This simulation uses two operating conditions. Condition one without buck converter and fuzzy logic control (e.g., direct connection of module PV and the load). Condition two with buck converter and fuzzy logic control. The solar iradiation used for simulation is vary between 400 ~ 1000 W/m 2. Figure 7 and 8 show the load current and voltage characteristic of the two conditions. With the change of solar iradiation, the current through the load R = 19,5 ohms also changed.
Voltage 1000 W/m2
800 W/m2
400 W/m2
200 W/m2
Result and Analysis
600 W/m2
Fig 6. I – V Characteristic of PV modul
Fuzzy Controller Block Simulates the fuzzy MPPT process and computes the desired duty cycle of the buck
216
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Figure 6 shows that in condition one (without buck converter and fuzzy logic control) by changing of solar iradiation from 1000 W/m2 to 400 W/m2 resulted the load current drop from 0,98 A to 0,88 A. While condition two (using buck converter and fuzzy logic control), the load current drop from 0,83 A to 0,81 A. This condition is also hold for the load voltage (Fig. 7). In the condition one, the load voltage drop from 19,03 V to 17,24 V. While condition two the load voltage drop from 16,27 to 15,72 V. These results indicates that PV systems using buck converter and fuzzy logic control has better performance than PV systems without using buck converter and fuzzy logic control.
IV. Conclusion From the simulation results and analysis, it can be concluded that solar power trainer using buck converter and fuzzy logic control has better performance than the system without buck converter and fuzzy logic control. This can be seen on the load current and voltage curves which are more stable than the system without fuzzy logic control. System with fuzzy logic control have better stability even in dynamic operating conditions.
References
Condition 1 [1]
Current (A)
1000 m/s2 400 m/s2
[2]
[3] Condition 2 [4]
t (s) Fig 7. Load current condition one and condition two
Voltage (V)
Fig
1000 m/s2 Condition 1
400 m/s2
[5]
Condition 2 [6]
[7]
[8]
Fig 8. Load voltage condition one and condition two.
217
Masoum, M, A, S an Sarvi, M. 2005. A new fuzzy-based maximum power point tracker for photovoltaic applications. Iranian Journal of Electrical & Electronic Engineering, Vol. 1. Iran. Markvart, T and Castaner, L. 2003. Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics Fundamentals and Applications. Elsevier Advanced Technology. Oxford, Inggris. Mohan N, Undeland T, M, and Robbins, W, P. 1995. Power Electronics. Converters, Applications, and Design. (2nd Edition). John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Daoud, A, Midoun, A. A Fuzzy Logic Based Photovoltaic Maximum Power Tracker Controller. Department of Electronics, Faculty of Engineering, University od Sciences and Technology of Oran. Algeria. Patcharaprakiti N., et al. 2005. Maximum power point tracking using adaptive fuzzy logic control for gridconnected photovoltaic system. Elsevier Ltd. Khaligh, A and Onar, A, C. 2010. Energy Harvesting : Solar, Wind, and Ocean Energy Conversion Systems. CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group. Boca Raton, Florida. Foster, R., et al, A. 2010. Solar Energy Renewable Energy and the Environtment. CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group. Boca Raton, Florida. Simoes M,G, Franceschetti N, N, Friedhofer, M. 2008. A Fuzzy Logic based Photovoltaic Peak Power Tracking Controller, IEEE-ISIE International Symposium on Industrial Electronics, Vol. 1,pp. 300-305.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
218
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Customer Segmentation of SMEs Using K-Means Clustering Method and modeling LRFM Bain Khusnul Khotimah Engineering Faculty, Madura Trunojoyo University Jl. Raya Telang PO BOX 2, Kamal, Bangkalan 69162, 031-3011146, 031- 3011506 E-Mail : [email protected]
Abstract - Market segmentation on SMEs is central to the economy of the community to serve all customers in a large market, broad and diverse. By segmenting the market, SMEs are able to serve the narrow strategic targets effectively and efficiently than competitors who compete in the wider market. One way that can be used to find out information about the characteristics of the customer is to perform customer segmentation. Customer segmentation is done by digging the customer data (data mining). This paper used data from a case study of SMEs Batik Madura (consisting of customer data and historical sales transaction data). The data will then be processed by LRFM model (Length, Recency, Frequency, Monetary), as one way to check your customer lifetime value (CLV), and the phases of clustering (to determine the number of clusters best and algorithms k-means that a distance-based cluster analysis to make the process of clustering operation. Once operational processes clustering is done, the results will be mapped cluster with customer value and customer loyalty matrix matrix to determine the characteristics of each customer segment. Therefore, this research is useful for determining customer strategipengelolaan each segment. Value model.
Index Terms: Clustering Analysis, Customer Analysis, Data mining, LRFM
I. INTRODUCTION Information technology in business is an innovative way of doing activities of the company. By using Internet technology, companies conduct business electronically activities such as; business transactions, the operating functions, a variety of information with customers, the purchase process. This business activity electronically (e-commerce) has provided some convenience to expand the marketing of the product [7]. It easier to obtain and compare information about the products to be bought. According to Director General of Small-Medium Industry Ministry of SMEs have been mentioned above 30-40 percent of which already utilize sophistication of IT (information technology) to develop its business. One way that manage relationships with customers to understand and provide treatment varies characteristics of the customers in each segment. Customer segmentation can be done by data mining to find out information
about the characteristics of customers. The determine of the customer segments to perform clustering analysis by clustering. The process of forming segments by observing the similarity between the data with the other data. This research aims to conduct customer segmentation based on data on real case studies SMEs (a company engaged in manufacturing: ice cream), which consists of customer data and historical sales transaction data with memanfaatan LRFM model (Length, Recency, Frequency, Monetary) as one way to find out the Customer Lifetime Value (CLV). The next will be to determine the amount of cluster best owned by the data and then the second phase will use the algorithm k-means to perform operational processes clustering, where kmeans clustering is clustering techniques with statistical methods based on the distance between the data (distance-based cluster analysis), the closer the distance between the data, the closer the resemblance, and vice versa. This research aims to manages in the data base storage of e-commerce transaction process customer segmentation and identifying patterns. Customer segmentation is done by digging data mining to find out information about the characteristics of customers who concealed inside one way Clustering [5]. Clustering or grouping of customers is one of data mining techniques used in customer segmentation [8]. One of them by finding out the segmentation pattern of behavior or customer profiling customers who have high purchasing power for certain goods. For it will be done a search of valuable information for the analysis of data mining with the rules of clustering based on transaction data in e-commerce, survey data socio-economicdemographic customers and the survey on customer satisfaction with the use of batik products is that then the data is put together and processed by using Kmeans clustering algorithm. A. Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Customer Relationship Management (CRM) has a broad meaning and each expert or competent source in this field providing different definitions according to their point of view. After conducting a survey of the many alternative definition of CRM, Payne and frow gave the following description of the CRM,
219
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 which are specifically described as follows: CRM is a strategic approach with regard to creating an increase shareholder value by developing the right relationships with key customers and segments customer needs. CRM unites the potential of the system of marketing strategies (marketing strategies) with information technology (IT) to create an advantage in the form of long run relationships with customers and other key stakeholders. CRM provides an opportunity to use the data and information which are both used to better understand customers and create a greater value for them. It requires crossfunctional integration possessed of each process capabilities, personal, operating, and marketing capabilities all of which included into one unity through the application of information technology [9]. More simply, Paul Gray [3] made a triangle analogy of what is CRM, as can be seen in Figure 1.
The main purpose of segmentation is to build a service model as a potential target of promotion. Segmentation approach originally based on geographical criteria, so the company will mengklaster customers according to area of residence or employment. This is followed by segmentation based on socio-economic indicators, so that customers will be grouped by age, gender, income, or employment. Customer segmentation can also be made based on the level of customer loyalty In determining the customer segments, Chang and Tsay using customer value matrix representing Frequency and Monetary attributes (figure 2). Thus, it can be seen that a loyal customer segments for targeted marketing activities proper. As for the less loyal customers, the company may seek to change the strategy less profitable customers become loyal customers and provide value to the company [1].
Fig. 1. Components of CRM The three components above, CRM will integrate them into a single unified system. This system will be a business strategy that sustain customer relationship with a company with the help of information technology [3].
Fig 2.Customer Value Matrix Customer segmentation can be used by management to find consumer segments that aims: Build a profile of the consumer (customer profiling) associated with purchase history and determine the right marketing in each segment is formed.
B. Customer Value Analysis dengan LRFM model Customer value analysis is the foundation of customer relationship management (CRM) because the value of this analysis is used to analyze the value of a company's customers. Companies need to sort out between customers valuable and less valuable considering the limited resources they have to manage all of its customers. Customers need segmented because each customer has different types that need different strategies for managing the customer segments defines that the model RFM using three dimensions: (1) recent transaction time: refers to the time of the last transaction of customers and analyzing the distance point of time, (2) how often customers buy the product in some periods, the higher frequency representing greater demand and high loyalty; monetary value: the total value of purchases for a certain period, a higher number represents greater contribution to the company. Ebner and Manuel proposed an idea of the relationship between length of customer relations with customer loyalty and the company's profitability. In order to increase customer loyalty, they are advised to increasing the length relations [2].
D. K-Means Clustering The main objective of the cluster is a method of grouping a number of data / objects into clusters (group) so that in each cluster will contain the data as closely as possible. In our clustering trying to place similar objects (short distance) in one cluster and create the distance between clusters as far as possible. This means that objects in the cluster are very similar to each other and different from the objects in other clusters. From some clustering techniques that the simplest and most commonly known is the k-means clustering. In this technique we want grouping objects into k groups or clusters. To do this clustering, the value of K must be determined in advance. Usually the user or users already have preliminary information about the object being studied; including how many clusters are most appropriate [3]. Kmeans clustering algorithm can be summarized as follows: Step 1: Group items in a database on the K cluster Step 2: Determine randomly centroid value and Generate k Centroid (the center point of the cluster) beginning at random. Centroid initial determination is done by random / random
C. Customer Segmentation Strategy
220
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 from the objects available as k cluster, then to calculate the cluster centroid i-next, use formula:
do August 2014 transaction.
Before doing the research, carried out literature studies and understanding of SME business first and then proceed with collecting the data, apply LRFM models, perform data preprocessing, perform two stage clustering, validation and analysis of clustering results and draw conclusions research. Research groove shown in figure 2.
Where v is Centroid of the cluster and x represent the object. the number of objects / number of objects to be members of the cluster Step 3: Insert each item dataset that were located closest to the centroid value into the cluster centroid. Step 4: Calculate the average value of the items in each cluster to serve as the new centroid. Step 5: Perform repetitions step 2 da step 3 until the centroid value is equal to the average value of the items in cluster
see product Buy Product
Discussion forums START
Seeing a best seller
Add to basket
Review produk
Euclidean distance calculation of distances between points by using Euclidean distance can be done at that point in one-dimensional, two-dimensional or threedimensional. Formula The distance between two points in one, two and three dimensions respectively 1,2,3 are shown in the following formula. To calculate the distance of all data to any point in the center of the cluster can use the Euclidean distance theory formulated as follows:
Fill customer data
shopping results ADMIN
Data reservations
validasi
START
Manage web Data user SMEs Data product
(
)
√(
)
(
)
(
)
Kmeans Clustering
Where: d(x,y) = Distance data to the cluster center x to y x= data record y=data centroid
Add product SM Es
II. RESEARCH METHODS In this phase the data will be processed in the form RFM model (Length, Recency, Frequency and Monetary). The data will be processed Based LRFM attributes pecified in Table 1. below:
No 1 2
3
4
5
end
transaction reports
Result k-means
Fig. 3. Flowchart System In this phase the data will be processed in the form RFM model (Length, Recency, Frequency and Monetary). The data will be processed Based LRFM attributes specified in Table 3.2 below: Table 3.2 betuk Data With 5 Attributes
Table 1. Bentuk Data With 5 Attributes Name Konten Data Transaction Interval initial transaction and Lenght end customers (days) Recent Time / date of the last Transaction customer transactions in Time period analysis Average Frequency of purchase or Frequency transaction within certain Value (average number of purchase) within 1 month. 1 month since an ideal number adjusted for study in the case of the company. Average Average - The average value Monetary of transactions customers in Value the run 1 month. New/old f the old customers have Customers transactions since november 2013. Customers new if new
III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION Before doing the research, carried out literature studies and understanding of SME business first and then proceed with collecting the data, apply LRFM models, perform data preprocessing, perform two stage clustering, validation and analysis of clustering results and draw conclusions research. Research groove shown in figure 1. A. Customer Segmentation The determining the customer segments, Chang and Tsay using customer value matrix representing Frequency and Monetary attributes (figure 3) and
221
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 customer loyalty matrix that represent the attributes Length and Recency (figure 4) to seek customer segments. The second matrix obtained from 16 possible group / customer segment (Table 2).
LRFM index for The fourth segment of customers, the next step is to map the index LRFM with customer value matrix and customer loyalty matrix. Table 7 shows the results of the mapping of the index LRFM.
Table 2. LRFM 16 Customer Groups Based on Customer Value Matrix and Customer Loyalty Matrix
Table 4. Descriptive statistics cluster 10 N
N
Min
Max
Mean
sym
0.448
Std. Dev 1.08
ZLENGTH
10
2.487
ZRECENCY ZAVG_FREQ ZAVG_MONE TARY Valid N (listwise)
10 10 10
0.721 0.152 0.763 5.938
0.594 3.181 15.74
0.465 1.616 10.06
.177 .931 3.43
↓ ↓ ↑
↑
10
B. Clustering Analysis
From the results of running the command kmeans that obtained respectively determined as the third of three segments of the data used, the number of members of each of the segments on each of the data can be viewed at Table 5. Table 5. Number of Members per Cluster Cluster 2 3 4 5
Number 23 45 136 92
% 4% 13.73% 53.35% 28,92%
Initial group Core Customers Potential Customers Lost Customers New Customers
Table 5. There are differences in the number of members on the same segment for different data, no one has any segment the same number of members. Core Customers as much as 4% (23 members) to qualify to 3 that Platinum Customer. Potential Customer as much as 13.73% (45 members) to qualify first namely Potential Loyal Customer (4 customers), the terms Both namely Potential High Frequency Customer (2 customers), and The third requirement Potential Consumption Customer (6 subscribers). Thus, Lost Customers as much as 53.35% (136 members) with a qualified High Value Lost Customer (1 customers) and terms Frequency Lost Customer (192 customers). To approach new customers by 28.92% (2 members) with the proviso uncertain new customer
Next step is to map the R, F, M every customer within one month. Every customer is calculated R, F and M in the accumulation period of one month as shown in Table 2. Standard deviation is selected because it describes the size The most common statistical distribution of the data set By comparing the standard deviation for each cluster with a standard deviation of all the data, obtained LRFM index. Table 6 and 7 show the way 6 LRFM indeks
C. Cluster Analysis of Sum Of Square Error (SSE) At this stage it will produce clusters of data regarding SMEs. Then the next step is to perform SSE calculation Kmeans, then look for the smallest value and use the cluster with calculation sum of square error (SSE) is used to Determine the performance of 5 of each method. Data on SMEs generate the greatest decline was at K = 4. This can be seen in Table Results Sum of Square Error of each cluster to 156 Cluster Data.
Tabel 3. Obtain descriptive statistics for the entire data N
N
Min
Max
Mean
ZLENGTH ZRECENCY ZAVG_FREQ ZAVG_MONETARY Valid N (listwise)
90 90 90 90
-1.223 -2.234 -1.673 -0.875
2.500 0.746 3.342 10.45
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Std. Dev 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Once known RFM value of every customer, then weighted RFM to facilitate analysis that is by dividing the value of R, F and M each into 5 parts. Weighting attribute R, F, and M can be seen in the following table: Table 4.1 1 Weighted Attribute Value RFM. Four Customer Segments Generated After knowing
Table 6. Result Sum Square Error Cluster Sum Square Error 2 0.3452 3 0.0398 4 0.0081 5 0.1276
222
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 information system can learn from each customer group to determine the handling promotion, service according to a group of customers. The SMEs are four customer segments which obtained from LRFM mapping index into slices customer matrix value and customer loyalty matrix. 2. The four customer segments consist of: Core Customers: Customers Platinum (cluster 1), Lost Customers: Uncertain Lost Customers (cluster 2) New Customers: Uncertain New Customers (cluster 3) and Core Customers: High Frequency Buying Customers (cluster 4).
Then, result cluster refer to the best-selling product will display the cluster members most of the other cluster members on figure 4.
REFERENCES [1] Pei Chao, Hsin-Pin Fu, Hung-Hsuan Lee & Ya-Cheng Chang. 2008. ―Identifying The Customer Profiles For 3C-Product Retailers: A Data Mining Approach‖. International Journal of Electronic Business Management, Vol. 6, No. 4, pp. 195-202. [2] Ebner, Manuel, Hu, Arthur, Levitt, Daniel and McCory, Jim. 2002, "How to Rescue CRM", McKinsey Quarterly, Special Edition: Technology, New York. [3] Gray, Paul. 2001, ―Customer Relationship Management Version 3-6‖, Irvine : University of California. Chang, H. H., & Tsay, S. F. (2004). Integrating of SOM and K-mean in data mining clustering: An empirical study of CRM and profitability evaluation. Journal of Information Management, 11, 161 -203. [4] Ebner, Manuel, Hu, Arthur, Levitt, Daniel and McCory, Jim. 2002, "How to Rescue CRM", McKinsey Quarterly, Special Edition: Technology, New York. [5] Gray, Paul. 2001, ―Customer Relationship Management Version 3-6‖, Irvine : University of California. [5] Wei Jo-Ting , Lin Shih-Yen and Wu Hsin-Hung , 2010.A review of the application of RFM model . African Journal ofBusiness Management Vol. 4(19), Pp. 4199-4206. [6] Cheng, Ching-Hsue dan Chen, You-Shyang (2009), ―Classifiying the segmentation of customer value via RFM model and RS Theory‖, Expert BPS Provinsi Jatim Tahun 2012 [7] BPS, 2012, Statistik Indonesia 2012. Badan Pusat Statistika, Jakarta. [8] Firli Irhamni, dkk, 2012. Advanced Methodology for Requirements Engineering Technique Solution (AMRETS), IJACT, Volume 4, Number 5, March 2012.
Fig 4. Best Seller Product Image
K Means method is quite able to be applied in the grouping of products batik based on the preferences of buyers with the criteria that have been determined. From one test result comparison of the value of SSE Cluster 2,3,4 and 5 that cluster 3 with the value of the SSE most smallest 0.0081. The result Cluster shows there are 4 clusters in the offender SMEs monitored by local government.
1. Cluster 2 is a cluster with entrepreneurs in SMEs medium with the help of the form of kits effort and has done production and marketing. 2. Cluster 3 is a cluster with SMEs actors business medium with assistance in the form of cash, has been can do production but has not been able todo marketing. 3. Cluster 4 is a cluster with SMEs businesses medium with the help of the form of kits businesses but not able to do the production and marketing. 4. Cluster 5 a cluster with medium businesses with assistance in the form of cash, it can be do production but marketing the product still passive. IV. CONCLUSION The customers home industry of SMEs has a characteristic that is different. this happens because each customer has a cycle of transactions different. transaction amount and quantity of goods purchased is also a factor affect the value of each LRFM customer. Thus the expected Applications Information Systems This can be useful for SMEs as supporting existing business processes to internal company. With this
223
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
224
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Best Alternative Routes Search With Genetic Algorithm On Sidoarjo Aeri Rachmad 1, Devie Rosa Anamisa 2 1,2
Engineering Faculty – Trunojoyo University of Madura 1
[email protected], [email protected]
2
Abstract Sidoarjo mud flow which is known as Lapindo mud led to stagnant settlement areas, agriculture and industry in the last few years. Mudflow brought tremendous impact to the surrounding community as well as for economic activity in East Java, nonfunctioning educational facilities, inundated environmental damage areas, the destruction of infrastructure facilities (electricity and telephone networks), inhibition of highway of Malang-Surabaya. Similarly, it also give the impacts toward the production activity in the region Ngoro (Mojokerto) and Pasuruan which has been one major industrial areas in East Java. To overcome this problem it is necessary to make an alternative path from Surabaya to Malang or otherwise in order to avoid congestion of traffic flows in the path of incoming and outgoing Porong. To seek alternative optimum path, it requires an optimization method. This research uses genetic algorithms to solve these problems. Genetic Algorithm is a heuristic method which is used to solve complex optimization problems such as finding the optimum path by taking into account of damage road conditions, for example either or damaged roads. Simulations were carried out by finding the optimum solution approach with the number of points n = 10 and n = 20. The test results showed that the genetic algorithm can be used to solve the problem of finding alternative pathways, including in terms of location search area Lapindo mud. Based on the results of tests performed genetic algorithm to obtain optimum results, it can be concluded that the greater its fitness value, then the path of the shorter can make the trend faster travel time. And conversely the smaller the value of her fitness, then the path taken longer and the longer travel time. Keywords: Alternative pathways Lapindo, Heuristic method, Genetic Algorithms.
I. INTRODUCTION Since May 29, 2006, hot mud began to gush to the surface of the earth in Porong, Sidoarjo. After three years running, bursts it can not be stopped and a serious threat to people living around the area. No one can predict when this bursts stop. Until now, the efforts of government and Lapindo has not shown success to stop bursts or manage social and
225
environmental impacts of the mud overflow [4]. See this disaster as a humanitarian disaster that is related to the issue of development issue, state, capital and public spaces. Government relations and Lapindo is quite complicated, as the largest shareholder of Lapindo is also a minister in the period 2004 -2009, Bakrie. The growing discourse in this case is the attempt to use the legitimacy of power in all government tactical actions to address the impact of post disaster which tends to protect the one hand and negated the other [5]. Lapindo is the name of the oil company that is suspected by many as a major cause of the mudflow in Porong. The occurrence of the Lapindo mudflow in Porong Siring area, causing the density of traffic flow along the path of Sidoarjo increased. The riders require optimum alternative path to be passed by considering the efficiency of time so that the required accuracy in determining the optimum path between a city. Results of the determination of the optimum path will be a consideration in the decision to show the path taken and obtained also require speed and accuracy with the aid of a computer. Genetic Algorithm (GA) is an algorithm based on the genetic processes in living organisms. Genetic Algorithm is a branch of evolution algorithm that can be used to solve a problem related to optimization problems [1]. Therefore, the Genetic Algorithm can be used to solve the problem of finding an alternative path Lapindo. However, it should be determined the value of the desired optimization criteria in the form of crossover probability (Pc) and the probability of mutation (Pm). In addition, the Genetic Algorithm is also influenced by the large number of iterations or generations [2]. In addition to Genetic Algorithms, there are ants and the PSO algorithm (Particle Swarm Optimization) that can be used to solve problems related to optimization. However, when compared with the two algorithms are genetic algorithm has several advantages. Genetic Algorithm among other advantages do not require too much math requirements in the settlement process optimization, Genetic Algorithms have a very effective operation of evolution to observe global position at random as
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 well as more convenient and flexible to be implemented on certain issues [3]. Based on the description it needs to make an application that can help users find an alternative path traversed a vehicle in the crossing area Lapindo mud using Genetic Algorithm with attention to road conditions for example traffic density, one-way streets and others. II. METHODOLOGY
Selection determination of parental chromosomes is done by using Roulette Wheel. For using this method, every chromosome has elected possibility as with greater the probability of each chromosome. Crossover is influenced by crossover probability (pC). Crossover is done when the two chromosomes are the same gene. This is done to avoid rupture mutation step done to avoid the local optimum. Local optimum is the best solution resulting in a set of solutions and global nature or there is still the possibility of a better solution. Mutation probability is affected by the mutations (pM). To determine the new population, it is coupled with the results of offspring initial population or populations previously and sorted based on the value of the highest fitness. The order of the top five would be a new population to undergo further evolution process [7].
A. Genetic Algorithm Genetic algorithm consists of several stages, which evoke the chromosomes (initial population), calculate the fitness value of each chromosome, the selection of the chromosome, do crossover or interbreeding and gene mutations. After all the stages through which it will form a new population. The new population is obtained by comparing the value of fitness offspring mutation results with fitness value of each chromosome in the population before. B. Shortest Path Chromosomes with great fitness values are used The in issue of finding the shortest path is the shortest path the process of the next evolution [6]. Evolutionary between two or several nodes are connected. The process reaches the value convergen or carried out in issue of searching for the shortest path in the graph is accordance with the amount of an evolutionary one of the optimization problems. These issues are process that has been determined. Calculation steps usually represented in the form of a graph. Graph using Genetic Algorithm flow chart is shown in used in the search for the shortest path is a weighted Figure 1 graph (weighted graph), which is a graph that each side has a value or weight. The weights on the side of the graph can state the distance between cities, message delivery time, cost of development and so on. There are several types of shortest path problems, such as the shortest path between two specific node, the shortest paths between all pairs of vertices, the shortest path from a particular node to all other nodes, the shortest path between two nodes that through some specific node. The issue of the shortest path into the needs in many areas of life has a variety of different purposes. One example is the case of finding the shortest path between the pair in the center of a network of a large business enterprise with headquarters in New York has several major branches in countries around the world. Central office to coordinate all operational activities of the company, and every day all the information Figure-1.Flowchart Genetic Algorithm (including demand, supply and cost) should be administered from headquarters to branch offices. Beginning with the formation of initial population, Information that is sent via telex give the cost of where chromosomes randomly is generated by the sending messages through telex between two system at the beginning of the gene is a position companies, and set the lowest communication path which is entered by the user and the end of the gene from the central office and each other branch offices is a gene in which there is an alternative path. [8]. Table 1. Intersections on Sidoarjo
226
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 II.DESIGN SYSTEM The data which is used in this research is data of Sidoarjo district roads in the period January 2011 which is sourced from the Department of Transportation and Public Works Department Binamarga Sidoarjo. Number of intersections that are used as much as 350 intersections contained in Sidoarjo, can be seen in Table 1. The initial stage is the determination of the initial value based on the starting point and the destination point is then processed by a genetic algorithm to find the shortest path, as in Equation 1. , ……………………………………..(1) Where V is the average speed which entered the user, s is the path length of each chromosome and t is the travel time. For design system can be seen in Figure 2.
Figure-2.Flowchart Design System After initializing, the next process is the process of forming the initial population. This process serves to form the first generation population. Formation of the population of first generation is done by filling the existing chromosomes at random / random from all points there. At the time of this establishment need to be checked in order to form an initial population is valid. Is a valid form of chromosomes has a length corresponding to the number of points and through all the points. Then it
calculated the fitness value of each chromosome that has been formed in the population, as in Equation 2. ………………………………………(2) ( ) :
Where f is the fitness value and (h+a) = number of lines of each chromosome. After the initial population, then the next step is the selection process, which once formed the initial population and fitness of its calculated value. Selection methods used in Genetic Algorithm is roulette wheel selection. How it works roulette wheel selection is as follows: first randomized would have been a value between 0 and 1, then the value will be compared with the value of fitness cumulative (FK) obtained from the summing fitness value of the cumulative plus the value of fitness relative (FR) . Total fitness obtained from the sum of all individuals in that generation. Thus individuals who have high fitness will have a greater chance of being elected, because the larger the fitness value of an individual, the greater the influence on the sum of the fitness of individuals in the population. After the selection process, the outcome of the process will be used in the process of crossover. Before performing the crossover process performed the draw with random numbers for each chromosome, whether the chromosomes undergo crossover or not. If the process of drawing shows occur crossovers, it will be made more random numbers to determine where the crossover would occur. The drawing is done by generating random numbers any random worth 0 and 1. Selecting prospective parent to be a parent is random probability of crossover and so on until the position is selected. Method crossover used in Genetic Algorithm is a one cut point crossover. Crossover process itself is done by copying the contents of parent chromosome 1 in the offspring chromosome 1 and the contents of parent chromosome 2 in the offspring chromosome 2, from chromosome 2 to a position where the crossover would occur. Next will be copying the contents of parent chromosome 2 in the offspring chromosome 1 and the contents of parent chromosome 1 in the offspring chromosome 2, from chromosome that is located right after the crossover position up to the length of the shortest chromosome. After the crossover process is run always be checked whether the affected chromosome is a chromosome crossover valid, in the sense of the chromosomes crossover results form a route. If there is a repetition of the individual in the chromosome, the normalization process is carried out to make the chromosome becomes valid. The process of normalization remove individuals who repeatedly and replace with individuals who lost in the chromosome to form a new route that is used valid. Method mutation is a mutation insert, adding a point. Once the mutation process the selection, the process will be done again and checking whether the overall process has been completed or not.
227
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION
Scenario
Scenario
Scenario
Scenario
Testing program with search visualization shortest path and travel time to get the optimum alternative path Lapindo done four times, namely: 1: The position of the starting point and the destination point adjacent to an average speed of 60 km / h and there is no obstacle in the intersection except intersection Lapindo mud. By using three populations, they are namely 5, 10, and 20. 2: The position of the starting point and the destination point apart at an average speed of 60 km / h and there is no obstacle in the intersection except intersection Lapindo mud. By using three populations, they are namely 5, 10, and 20. 3: The position of the starting point and the destination point adjacent to an average speed of 60 km / h and there is a hitch at one or more intersections, including intersections Lapindo mud. By using three populations, they are namely 5, 10, and 20. 4: The position of the starting point and the destination point apart at an average speed of 60 km / h and there is a hitch at one or more intersections, including intersections Lapindo mud. By using three populations, they are namely 5, 10, and 20.
B. Test scenario 2 Based on the results of experiments performed using either a population of 5, 10, and 20 which generate the largest fitness value reaches 2.52321E-05 on the route consisting Krian Katerungan Klagen Tropodo Simogirang Cangkringturi Wonoplintahan Kedungwonokerto Kedungkembar Gampang Bulang Krembung Porong Kedungcangkring Dukuhsari Semambung JB Kedungpandan Bangil, the number is 18. So in the adverse scenario testing 2, sit obtained shortest path length of 39.632 meters and the fastest time of approximately 29.724 minutes. But what distinguishes in each population is the execution time of each process on Genetic Algorithms. At 5 populations in the selection process resulted in 0:13:05, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. At a population of 10 in the selection process resulted in 0:39:12, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. In the population of 20 in the selection process resulted in 1:11:56, the crossover process produces 00:00:05, and at 00:00:02 the mutation process generates.
A. Test scenario 1 The position of the starting point and the destination point adjacent to an average speed of 60 C. Test scenario 3 km / h is from Candi to Porong. There is no obstacle Based on the results of experiments in the intersection unless intersection Lapindo mud. performed using either a population of 5, 10, and 20 It was calculated fitness value calculation to process which generate the largest fitness value reaches the shortest path and travel time in order to obtain 3.29283E-05 on the route consisting of Candi optimum alternative pathway Lapindo. It also Kedungkendo Karangtanjung Ketegan calculates the search time each process to determine Randegan Lajuk Wangkal Tulangan the long search of any process which, among others, Kepatihan Kepadangan Krembung Porong, the selection process, the process of crossover and Adverse number is 12. So in the testing scenario 3 is mutation process. the shortest path length of 30.369 meters and the Based on the results of experiments performed using either a fastest time around 22.777 minutes. population of 5, 10, 20 which resulted in the largest what distinguishes in each population is the execution time fitness value reaches 3.57449E-05 on theBut route consisting of Candi Kedungkendo of each process on Genetic Algorithms. At 5 Karangtanjung Ketegan Gagang panjang populations in the selection process resulted in Pangkemiri Kedondong Medalem 0:00:49, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, Kepadangan Krembung Porong, Adverse and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. At a number is 12. So in the testing scenario 1 is obtained population of 10 in the selection process resulted in shortest path length of 27.976 meters and the fastest 0:05:54, the crossover process produces 00:00:06, and at 00:00:01 the mutation process generates. In the time of approximately 20.982 minutes. But what distinguishes in each population is the execution population of 20 in the selection process resulted in time of each process on Genetic Algorithms. At 5 0:00:40, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, populations in the selection process resulted in and the process of generating mutations 00:00:00. 0:00:40, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, D. Test scenario 3 and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. At a population of 10 in the selection process resulted in Based on the results of experiments performed using 0:03:43, the crossover process produces 00:00:05, either a population of 5, 10 and 20 which generate the and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. In largest fitness value reaches 2.2205E-05 on the route the population of 20 in the selection process resulted consisting of Krian Katerungan Tanggul in 0:05:01, the crossover process produces 00:00:07, Simoangin-angin Grabakan Modong and at 00:00:01 the mutation process generates. Durungbedug Medalem Kepadangan
228
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Krembung Porong Kedungcangkring Dukuhsari Semambung JB Kedungpandan Bangil, the number is 18. So in the adverse scenario testing 2 obtained shortest path length of 45 035 meters and the fastest time around 33.776 minutes.
[3]
But what distinguishes in each population is the execution time of each process on Genetic Algorithms. At 5 populations in the selection process resulted in 0:07:44, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. At a population of 10 in the selection process resulted in 0:00:40, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, and at 00:00:00 the mutation process generates. In the population of 20 in the selection process resulted in 0:00:40, the crossover process produces 00:00:00, and the process of generating mutations 00:00:00.
[5]
of [4]
Algorithm
in
Vehicle
Trails
Planning,
Akbar, AA .2007. Conspiracy Behind The Lapindo mud. Yogyakarta: Galang Press. Schiller, J, Lucas, A & Sulistiyanto, P .2008. Learning from the East Java mudflow: disaster politics in Indonesia. Indonesia 85 (April):51-77.
[6]
Yusuf, Akhmad dan Soesanto, Oni, 2012, ―Completion Genetic Algorithm on Root Equation A Function‖, Journal Matematika Murni dan Terapan, Vol. 6, No. 2, hal.47-56.
[7]
Sivanandam, S.N., Deepa, S.N, 2008, Introduction to Genetic Algorithms, New York, Springer Berlin Heidelberg, Hal: 3060.
[8]
Genetic Algorithm optimization level is determined by the value of fitness. The greater value of her fitness, then the path of the shorter and faster travel time. And conversely the smaller the value of her fitness, then the path taken longer and the longer travel time. So the fitness of the largest reaches 3.57449E-05 with a path length of 27.976 meters and 20.982-minute travel time. Fitness smallest reached 2.2205E-05 with 45.035 meters of path length and travel time 33.77625 minutes. For different cases and there is obstruction, generating alternative paths are different and require a long program execution time. Total population affect program execution time of each process is the process of genetic algorithm selection, crossover, and mutation. The fastest program execution time in a population of 5. The selection process execution time is 00:00:40; the crossover is 00:00:00 and 00:00:00 for mutation process. ACKNOWLEDGMENT I am grateful to Lisetyo Ariyanti and Sulistyowati for helpful advice and discussions about the manuscript, and to the ICVEE committee editors for their constructive suggestions that improved the manuscript. REFERENCES Anitya, Firar S, Sugiharti, Endang, Dwijanto, 2013, ―Implementation of Genetic Algorithm for Solving Traveling Salesman Problem‖, UNNES Jurnal of Mathematics, hal.117120. [2]
Genetic
Undergraduate Thesis, Universitas Diponegoro
IV. CONCLUSIONS
[1]
Lumbantobing, H., Hidayatno, A., Darjat, 2011, Application
Lukas, S., Anwar, T., Yuliani, W., 2005, Application of Genetic Algorithm for the Traveling Salesman Problem by Using Method Insertion Order Crossover and Mutation, Seminar Nasional Aplikasi Teknologi Informasi.
229
Alamsyah, 2010, ―Utilization Heuristic Method On Shortest Path Search With Genetic Algorithms‖, Journal SMARTTek, Vol. 8 No. 4 Nopember, Hal: 307-316.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
230
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Application Predicts World Oil Prices On Stock Prices Using A Hybrid Method Eka Mala Sari R1, Aeri Rachmad\] 1,2
Engineering Faculty – Trunojoyo University of Madura 1
[email protected] 2 [email protected]
Abstract Stock price prediction is one of many important research in economic field. This research develops a method to predict stock price by effect of world oil using hybrid method of artificial neural network (BPNN) with back propagation and genetic algorithm (GA). The formula that has been implemented in the method of prediction developed in this research is the representation of influences of both past stock price movement. In this research, BPNN is used to find patterns from the past, while GA is used to overcome the local optima and over fitting that may exist in the artificial neural network . Experimental results of the hybrid method which combine BPNN and GA (BPNNGA) in this research is capable in producing stock price prediction with low root mean square error (RMSE). Using the data pattern 20-21-1 in BPNN and parameter genetic algorithm with a total population of 20, it reaches the crossover probability of 0.9 and mutation probability of 0.2. In this regard, the RMSE value of 0.000614 that was produced by BPNN-GA prediction method indicates a better result than the product which uses BPNN prediction method. This BPNN prediction method produces only the RMSE value of 0.000657 in predicting the composite stock price index (CSPI) that effect by world oil price. Keywords: Stock price prediction, artificial neural network, genetic algorithm, world oil price
I. INTRODUCTION Prediction of stock price and its movement is one of the important research and challenging application of time series data [1]. Stock price developments can be seen in the Composite Stock Price Index (CSPI) in which the stock price rises show an increase while the fall-down stock price indicates a market sluggishness. Developments in crude oil prices is an important concern in the economy, industry, government, and others. The influence of fluctuations in the price of crude oil extends reach a large number of goods and services that have a direct impact on the economy and society [2]. The crude oil price movements tend to be non-linear and non-stationary which is influenced by many factors that affect demand and
supply [3]. The movement of crude oil prices is also heavily influenced by the many events of the past or present or future irregular, such as weather, stock levels, the growth of GDP (Gross Domestic Product), political aspects and psychological expectations of society [4]. The characteristics of the crude oil price movements tend to be non – linear, and nonstationary is very important to understand. Most researchers and business practitioners fail to produce the results of the analysis are consistently good prices, due to the intrinsic complexity of the oil market that is dynamic and unstable. Various information which is entered in the capital market as well as events that are not related to the capital markets may affect the volatility or the rise and fall of stock prices [5]. JCI movement is influenced by various factors both internal and external. External influences such as the movement of world oil prices are believed to have become the dominant factor affecting the JCI; while the internal factors are more affected by events in the country such as the rational expectations of investors and the influence of the movement of macroeconomic variables such as the exchange rate against the US dollar. Those exchange rates involve the inflation rate, interest rates and the money supply. Changes in stock prices are very hard to know. One branch of AI (Artificial Intelligence), known as Artificial Neural Network (ANN) is one of the information processing system that is designed to mimic the way the human brain works in resolving a problem with the process of learning through weight changes its synapses [6]. This study [1] conducts research on prediction of stock price using actual data from the years 19972007 stock without considering the economic conditions that affect the movement of stock prices by using ANN. Moreover, ANN and SVM are two models that show significant performance in predicting the direction of movement of the stock price. The performance of the model ANN (75.74%) was significantly better than the model SVM (71.52%). Research [7] states that the stock price is influenced by several external factors such as macroeconomic and non economic which caused the stock price go up and down. The study uses the Max
229
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Min and Similar Sequence Matching System. Results from these studies prove that the share price proved to be influenced by external factors with an error rate of less than 14% but in other cases the level of accuracy is very large it is caused by lack of narrowness hose class and the small value of the shares actually create greater percentage of error. Therefore, it is advisable to use a neural network models that can better accuracy rate. It appears the problem is how to modify the model EMD (empirical mode decomposition) become EEMD (Ensemble empirical mode decomposition) based neural network that is integrated with a genetic algorithm to improve the performance forecasting crude oil prices better. II. METHODOLOGY A. Stock Stock is a sign of ownership or possession of any person or entity in a company or a limited company. Form of stocks in the form of a piece of paper that explains who the owner is. However, this is now paperless system has been carried out on the stock exchange in which the ownership is no longer in the form of sheet stock that is named the owner but already in the form of an account in the name of the owner or scripless shares. So the completion of the transaction will be faster and easier because it is not through letters, forms, and procedures are convoluted [7]. Through the IPO (Initial Public Offering) or Public Initial Public Offering (PPP) firm offer a part or all of its shares to the public. Through the IPO, the public can participate in capitalized company that they trust. At IPO, price is determined by: the enthusiasm of the market, appraiser estimates, the company's management, and the guarantor. By using this unique mechanism bargain arises the initial price. After the IPO, the price of shares outstanding in the public will turn to follow the scheme and offer existing inventory in the stock market (in our context the Indonesia Stock Exchange). This is done through a scheme demands made in the exchange system, the system is similar to an auction. Each person can trade shares in this system, either selling or buying. We can offer own shares at a certain price, if there are people who want to buy according to the price we set, then the transaction takes place and vice versa. If there is a lot of interest at the same price, the transactions prioritize someone who is faster. This auction mechanism formed this unique stock prices. When the demand is high, it will rise; when demand is low, it will go down. B. World Oil Crude oil is one of the most actively traded commodity in the world. Crude oil prices play an important role in the global economy, the government plans and commercial sectors. The benchmark for
determining the price of crude oil, there are three, namely West Texas Intermediate (WTI), Brent Blend and Dubai. WTI is used in the United States. Brent Blend is used throughout the world, especially in Europe and OPEC market, while Dubai is produced in the Emirate of Dubai. The influence of oil price fluctuations extends reach a large number of goods and services that have a direct impact on the economy and society [2]. The crude oil price movements tend to be non-linear and nonstationary influenced by many factors. Factors that affect demand and supply [3], but is influenced by many events of the past / present / future irregular such as weather, stock levels, the growth of GDP (Gross Domestic Product), political aspects and psychological expectations of society [4], The characteristics of the crude oil price movements are very important to understand, because of the intrinsic complexity of the oil market. [8] The application of EEMD is used to analyze the crude oil prices. Crude oil prices with a time range and a different frequency is decomposed into several independent intrinsic mode (IMF), from high frequency to low frequency. The results of the study can explain the decomposition into three components, namely the long-term trends, the effects of significant events shaking and short-term fluctuations caused by an imbalance of supply and demand. EEMD proved an important technique for the analysis of crude oil prices. By analyzing the price of crude oil, forecasting strategies can be used to estimate the future price of crude oil C. Backpropagation Neural Network is an information processing paradigm that is inspired by biological nervous systems, such as information processing in the human brain [6]. Neural networks can solve complex problems or impossible if solved using conventional computing. Each neuron can have some input and has an output. Strip input to a neuron may contain raw data or processed data from the previous neuron; while the output of a neuron can be the end result or as an input for the next neuron. As well as the human brain, neural networks also consist of several neurons. Neurons will transform the information received through the connection leading to the release of other neurons. In the neural network, this relationship is known as weighting. Such information is stored at a particular value in weight [6]. The method used to perform Predictive stock prices in this study is the method of Backpropagation Neural Network (BPNN) and Genetic Algorithm method. Backpropagation has been a method of ANN (Artificial Neural Network) multi-layer that matches the nature of the data on stock prices and the nonlinear time series; and can reduce the prediction error by adjusting the weight of the nodes when the training phase.
230
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Before the data is processed into formulations BPNN that normalizing external factors, formula results were obtained from external factors which should be normalized first, because BPNN can only recognize the value of the range (0 - 1).
been generated by ANN be used as input to the genetic algorithm is used to find the weights and perform the optimization of the weight of parental chromosomes. Parameters for the search process via encoded on the chromosome. Results election parent chromosome with the best fitness value is processed using a three-layer neural network. Stages in the process of genetic algorithm are as [9]:
The next stage is to enter the values of the external factor formula into the input layer. ANN model uses three layers: the input layer, the hidden and the output shown in Figure (2.1). In a study [8] uses 24 input neurons, then in this study used as reference input layer 20. Artificial neural networks are twice the weighting of the weighting process performed feed forward. Stages can be seen in Figure 1
PRNG
On
1.
2.
Sn
( Sn+1
The weighting is done by clicking on the weight optimization ANN number of genes and chromosomes according to the amount of weight resulting from ANN. The process of training to gain weight is to minimize the value of fitness. Because the fitness value generated when large it will produce poor predictions. Normalization share data denoted by si to get an overall difference in the amount of stock it can be formulated in the following equation: |….(1) ) ∑< | ()
On+1
E. RMSE (Root Mean Squared Error) y2
Sn+20
On20
Normalisasi
Lap Input
Lap Tersembunyi
Lap Output
Figure-1. Propose Design with BPNN D. Genetic Algorithm When value of RMSE is smaller, it is getting better because the stock price approached the predicted results with actual prices. After the RMSE values are obtained then the value is stored in accordance with representations that run on GA which will seek global optimum value accordingly. Measurement conditions are most suitable based on the use of the fitness value. After the GA method and this BPNN smallest RMSE results are stored as the best result. Stored value will be used as variable in the testing phase. Method of Genetic Algorithm (GA) in this study is used to optimize the parameters on method BPNN. This optimization is done to reduce errors in the prediction process. Parameters are optimized, among others epoch, learning rate and momentum. Epoch is the number of rounds used during the training phase. Learning rate is the learning rate while the momentum is a parameter that is used to prevent the system converges towards a local optimum. In this stage, it is done to assist the performance of ANN, ie when the neural network is still not getting the best value a genetic algorithm to search the connection and optimal weight. Target value has
Selection of the best forecasting method should be based on a projection error rate. Measurement error is made to see whether the methods that have been used are adequate for predicting a data, because there is no forecasting method that can predict future data appropriately. The smaller of the margin of error is generated, the more precisely a method of producing predictions. Measurement error using the Root Mean Squared Error (RMSE) is the square root of the Mean Squared Error (MSE). Error suggests how minimum predicted results with actual value [9]. Average error square root or RMSE is equated as follow: n
RMSE
X t 1
Ft
2
t
n
…………………..(2)
RMSE is obtained from the roots Xt number which is forecasting the expected value of the reduced period t; while Ft is the value of the forecasting system in period t which is squared and the n is averaged as much as amount of data. III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION The data which are used in this research is quantitative secondary data regarding the daily closing stock price index and the number of shares traded on the stock price index. The source of the data in this study was obtained from the World Investment. In consideration of capital market conditions were relatively stable this study used the study period 2010-2012. Historically the price of daily closing and the number of shares traded in 2010-2012 have been going better which reflects actual market conditions, so that the research results
231
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 will be used as valuable information for market participants. Data obtained from the website belonging duniainvestasi.com IDX (Indonesia Stock Exchange) are shown in table 1 and table 2.
1/22/2010
72.73
1/25/2010
72.18
1/26/2010
72.63
Training data that are used in this study for training are 618 of data range from January 2010 July 2012 and since August 2012 - December 2012 a total of 119 data are being used as a test without taking a day off.
1/27/2010
72.75
1/28/2010
70.65
1/29/2010
71.2
Table 1. History Stock Price in December 2012 12/03/2012
IHSG
4277.19
4302.444
12/04/2012
IHSG
4281.96
4269.652
12/05/2012
IHSG
4263.02
4286.84
12/06/2012
IHSG
4296.02
4292.605
12/07/2012
IHSG
4286.19
4290.796
12/10/2012
IHSG
4295.47
4302.609
12/11/2012
IHSG
4301.19
4317.918
12/12/2012
IHSG
4321.21
4337.528
12/13/2012
IHSG
4331.14
4320.189
12/14/2012
IHSG
4320.38
4308.863
12/17/2012
IHSG
4305.46
4315.857
12/18/2012
IHSG
4320.08
4301.436
12/19/2012
IHSG
4306.38
4275.859
12/20/2012
IHSG
4267.55
4254.816
12/21/2012
IHSG
4252.94
4250.214
12/26/2012
IHSG
4251.83
4275.094
12/27/2012
IHSG
4276.01
12/28/2012
IHSG
4298.93
Trials at this stage are used to do some things which define the parameters of forecasting models and the use of different sets of data for comparison. Training and testing BPNN use parameters with the number of iterations 10000 times, the learning rate of 0.1 and an error tolerance of 0.0001. Node architecture which is used in the input layer, hidden layer and output layer 20-21-1. Table 3. Comparison of Results Prediction using BPNN Data Prediction CSPI RMSE By historical stock 0.0.00891 With world oil 0.000657 Table 4. Comparison of Predicted Results PNN-GA with a population of 20, 100 generations, crossovers 0.9 RMSE with Price RMSE IHSG World oil Mutation 0,000961
0,00114
0,000953
0,000976
0,000740
0,000943
4281.861
0,000791
0,000918
4316.687
0,000614
0,000801
0,000857
0,00113
0,00100
0,00104
0,000950
0,00119
0,000821
0,00120
0,000817
0,000905
0,00115
0,00123
0,000840
0,00121
0,000829
0,00109
0,2
Table 2. World Oil Data in January 2010 World oil
0,4
1/4/2010
79.05
1/5/2010
79.27
1/6/2010
80.14
1/7/2010
80.57
1/8/2010
80.06
1/11/2010
80.14
1/12/2010
79.38
0,000807
0,00108
1/13/2010
77.57
0,000867
0,00109
1/14/2010
77.61
1/15/2010
76.85
0,000823
0,00116
1/18/2010
76.21
0,000785
0,00110
1/19/2010
75.18
0,000922
0,00138
1/20/2010
75.09
0,000907
0,00123
1/21/2010
74.13
0,6
0,8
232
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 0,000899
0,00112
[2].
Kulkarni,S., Haidar, I., 2009, ―Forecasting Model for Crude Oil Price Using Artificial Neural Networks and Commodity Futures Prices‖, International Journal of
Table 3 is the result of prediction RMSE stock. So we get the results of training with BPNN architecture with the smallest RMSE value that are compared with the RMSE values predictive value using historical data closing stock price. Whereas in table 4 is about RMSE stock prediction results using BPNN-GA. It can be conclude that the results which are obtained with architectural training BPNN-GA with RMSE values is better than using BPNN only. The comparison of forecasting PNN(Probabilistic Neural Networks) and PNN-GA can be detailed as follow: the data pattern with parameters 20-21-1 iteration of 10000 and the learning rate of 0.1 and an error rate of 0.0001 for the genetic algorithm it self with the generation of 100, a population of 20, the probability of crossover 0.9 and 0.2 mutations probability.
Computer Science and Information Security, Vol.2,No.1, Juni 2009. [3].
Stevens, P., 1995. ―The determination of oil prices 1945– 1995‖. Energy Policy 23 (10), 861–870
[4].
Pasaribu, R. B. (Juli 2008). Fundamental Variables Influence On Stock Price Company Go Public In Bei. Jurnal Ekonomi dan Bisnis Vol 2 No. 2 , 101-113.
[5].
Yu,L.,Wang,S., Keung, K.L., 2008, ―Forecasting crude oil price with an EMD-based Neural Network ensemble learning paradigm‖, Energy Economics 30, 2623-2635.
[6].
Kusumadewi,
S.
(2003).
Artificial
Intellegence.
Jogjakarta: Graha Ilmu. [7].
Septem, R. L. (2007). Stock Price Prediction Model Based Data Histories and Current Condition Using Similar Methods Sequence Matching and Max-Min Ant System. Bandung: Thesis ITB.
[8].
Zhang, X., Lai, K.K., Wang, S.Y., 2008. ―A new approach for crude oil price analysis based on Empirical Mode Decomposition‖, Energy Economics 30, 905-918.
IV. CONCLUSIONS
[9].
Implementation of the results of experiments conducted five times to obtain the results of RMSE are getting smaller. Table 4 represents the results of experiments on JCI with the smallest RMSE value compared with the RMSE values predictive value using only historical data closing stock price alone. The conclusions are as follows: 1. System can perform daily stock price prediction. The trial results produced by the prediction method BPNN-AG with RMSE 0.000614 proved to be better than the prediction method BPNN with RMSE value only amounted to 0.000657 in the Composite Stock Price Index (CSPI).
Model By Evolving Partially Connected Neural Network For Stock Price. Expert Systems with Applications 39, 611–620. [10]. Horne,
J.
C.
(2009).
Fundamental
of
Financial
Management : Principles of Financial Management. Jakarta: Salemba Empat. [11]. Dunia Investasi. (n.d.). Retrieved January 2013, from Dunia Investasi Web Site: http://www.duniainvestasi.co
2. From the test results determining the forecasting model parameters can be concluded that the best performance can be obtained using a neural network parameter with the number of iterations as many as 10000 times, the learning rate of 0.1, and the fault tolerance of 0.0001. For all kinds of daily data stock, architecture BPNN use structure 20-21-1 (twenty neurons in the input layer, twenty-one in the hidden layer, and one neuron in the output layer). The best performance is obtained by using a genetic algorithm parameter with a total population of 20, crossover probability of 0.9 and mutation probability of 0.2.
REFERENCES [1].
Chang, P. C., Wang, D. d., & Zhou, C. l. (2012). A Novel
Kara, Y., Boyacioglu, M. A., & Baykan, O. K. (2011). Predicting Direction Of Stock Price Index Movement Using Artificial Neural Networks And Support Vector Machines: The Sample Of The Istanbul Stock Exchange. Expert Systems with Applications 38 , 5311–5319.
233
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
234
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Control of an Inverted Pendulum Using Nonlinear Model Predictive Control Rifqi Firmansyah Electrical Engineering Department, Universitas Negeri Surabaya JL. Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
referenced to the vertically upward direction. The model of an inverted pendulum is based on [4].
Abstract - Model predictive control (MPC) has appeared as one of the most interesting control techniques in the chemical and petrochemical industries during the past decade. However, the model has some weakness. A nonlinear system controlled by linear MPC may not present a satisfactory dynamic performance. To solve the problem, this research uses method of nonlinear MPC. The method is obtained from nonlinear state space model of inverted pendulum. The model is based on Euler-Lagrange Equation and formed into state dependent coefficient (SDC). The result shows that with using nonlinear MPC response of cart position and angle position are faster to reach set point than linear MPC.
̈
̈
(
) ̈
Index Terms – tracking control, inverted pendulum, nonlinear model predictive control.
̈
(1) (2) ̇
Fig 1 inverted pendulum-cart system
I. INTRODUCTION
The Euler-lagrange equation is of the form
Model predictive control (MPC) is successful modern control technologies with several thousand applications such as in chemical and petrochemical industries during the past decade [1][2]. In MPC, a process dynamic model is used to predict future outputs over a prescribed period. Processes in chemical and petrochemical plants are inherently nonlinear and many of them are highly nonlinear. For highly nonlinear system, a linear MPC may not give satisfactory dynamic performance. Lately, many researcher have developed nonlinear MPC (NMPC) such as using fuzzy, neural network approach [2][3]. In this paper, NMPC is designed from dynamic model or mathematics model of plant. The model is modified in form state dependent coefficient (SDC). the SDC is used to obtain augmented model which is used to design model predictive control. The model will be tested on inverted pendulum because inverted pendulum is highly nonlinear plant.
( ) ̈
(
̇) ̇
( )
(3)
Where all these matrices have values as [
(
[
) ]
̇
],
0 1 0
1
( ) [
]
The last matrix is somewhat like T and is useful when SDC form is obtained. B. SDC Formulation The state dependent coefficient (SDC) form that can be obtained from matrices of Euler Lagrange Equation is as given below [4][6] ̇
[
;
;
]
0
;
1
(4)
II. MATHEMATICAL MODELING It help to bring the dynamic equation to the form of equation, required to apply the nonlinear MPC.
A. Mathematics model of an inverted pendulum The simple inverted pendulum stabilization and tracking is a problem for which a number of nonlinear design methods have been used. In fig 1, The cart mass and the ball point mass at the upper end of the inverted pendulum are denoted as and respectively. There is an externally directed force on the cart , and is the tilt angle
III. CONTROL METHODS
235
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 A. Linier MPC For simplicity, we begin our study by assuming that the underlying plant is assumed as single-input and single-output system, described by [5][7]: ( ( )
)
( ) ( ) (5) ( ) (6) where is the manipulated variable or input variable; is the process output and is the state variable vector. Note that this plant model has ( ) as its input. Taking a difference operation on both sides of (1.1), obtained (
) ( ( )
( ) (
(
( )
(
))
))
(7)
( ) ( ) ( ), di mana where Nc is called the control horizon. With given information ( ), the future state variables are predicted for , number of samples. Where called prediction horizon or length ofoptimization window. The future state variable as | ) ( | ) ( | ) ( ( | ) where | ) is the predicted state variable at ( with given current plant information ( ). Based on the state-space model (A,B,C), the future state variables are calculated sequentially using the set of future control parameters: ( (
| ) | )
( ) ( ) ( | ) ( ( ) ( )
Denote the difference of the state variable by ( ( )
)
( )
(
(
)
),
(
( );
( )
( )
(
)
(9)
)
( )
( )
(10)
(
( ) (
, )
( ) ( )
( )(
( ( ( )
) )
)
(12)
From the predicted state variables, the predicted output variables are, by substitution | ) | )
( ) ( ) )
(
( ) ( )
;
( ;
( )
| )
;
Note that the input to the state-space model is ( ). The next step is to connect ( ) to output ( )
)
( ) )
(
;
( (
With this transformation (7),(8), and (9), the difference of the state-space equation is (
;
(8)
and the difference of the control variable by
;
( )
| )
) (
(
( ) )
(
)
(13)
Define vectors
( ))
[ ( ,
| ) ( )
( (
| ) )
(
| )] )- (14)
(
(11) Using equation (12) and (13) in the form (14), be obtained
Putting together (10) with (11) leads to the following state-space model: ( : )
⏞ [
( )
( (
( )
) ⏞ ,
( )
) ]
⏞ [ -[
⏞ ][
] ( )
⏞ [
(15)
where ]
( ) ] ( )
[
⏞ , where is called the augmented model, which will be used in the design of predictive control. The next step in design of predictive control is calculate output of predicted with the next control signal. The prediction is described by optimization window. Assuming that at the sampling instant , vektor variabel state ( ) is available through measurement, state ( ) provides the current plant information.. The future control trajectory is denoted by
]
(2.1.5)
[
] ;
;
;
For a given set-point signal ( ) at sample time , within a prediction horizon the objective of the predictive control system is to bring the predicted output as close as possible to the setpoint signal. Assuming that the data vector that contains the set-point information is
236
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 ⏞ ,
- ( ),
(16)
And define the cost function control objective as (
) (
that reflects the ̅
)
(17)
Substitution equation (15) and (16) into (17) and derivative to with set point ( ) be obtained );
(
(̅
( )
( ))
Fig 3 Response of cart position
(18)
Because of the receding horizon control principle, it only take the first element of at time as the incremental control, thus ( )
⏞ , (̅
( )
-( ( ))
For response with disturbance, response pendulum angle and cart position are shown in fig 4 and fig 5, respectively. With using nonlinear MPC, the response is faster to reach desired value than linear MPC.
);
(2.1.10) B. Strategy of Nonlinear MPC First step to design of NMPC is obtaining nonlinear mathematics model of inverted pendulum. second, obtaining SDC form of the model. Third, obtaining augmented model which is used to design model predictive control. Fourth, obtaining state prediction and output variable to get matrix and . Fifth, obtaining from first row of ( ); and from first ̅. element of ( );
IV.
Fig 4 Response of pendulum angle with disturbance
SIMULATION AND RESULT
In MPC, there are three parameters of controller affecting performance of the controller. The parameters are prediction horizon , control horizon and parameter tuning . the parameters will be used to test performance of the controller. The parameters used are . parameters of inverted pendulum are . For stabilization initial condition used is and . fig 2 and fig 3 respectively is response pendulum angle and cart position using linear MPC and Nonlinear MPC. With using nonlinear MPC, the response is faster than linear MPC.
Fig 5 Response of cart position with disturbance
For tracking control, response pendulum angle and cart position are shown in fig 4 and fig 5, respectively. The response of the controller Nonlinear MPC is better in following tracking signal given than linear MPC.
Fig 6 tracking control of pendulum angle
Fig 2 Response of pendulum angle
237
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig 7 tracking control of cart position
V. CONCLUSION Controller of Nonlinear MPC obtained from dynamic model of plant has been tested to control stabilization and tracking control of inverted pendulum. to compare the result, controller linear MPC has been tested. There are three parameters affecting performance of the controller. The parameters are prediction horizon , control horizon and parameter tuning . change of affect speed of response to reach desired condition. change of and affect the maximum of pendulum angle deviation. The response of nonlinear MPC for stabilization, with disturbance and tracking control is better than linear MPC.
REFERENCES [14]S. J. Qin and Thomas A. Badgwell, ―A survey of industrial model predictive control technology,‖ Control Engineering Practice, vol. 11, pp. 734-764, 2003. [15]Yan, Z. and Wang, J. (2011), ―A Neural Network Approach to Nonlinear Model Predictive Control‖, IECON - 37th Annual Conference on IEEE Industrial Electronics Society, Vol. 37, pp. 2305-2310. [16]Huang, Y. L., Lou, H. H., Gong, J. P., and Edgar, T. F. (2000), ―Fuzzy Model Predictive Control‖, IEEE Transactions on Fuzzy Systems, Vol. 8, No. 6. pp. 665-678. [17]Singh, N. M., Dubey J., Laddha G.(2008), ―Control of Pendulum on a Cart with State Dependent Riccati Equations‖, World Academy of Science, Engineering and Technology 41, pp. 671-675. [18]Wang, L. (2008), Model Predictive Control Sistem Design and Implementation Using MATLAB, Springer, Scotland. [19]Utami, D. T. (2011), Design Controller State Dependent Riccati Equation to Stabilize Two Stage Inverted Pendulum, Final Project of Electrical Engineering, Sepuluh Nopember Institute of Technology, Surabaya. [20]Firmansyah, R (2013), Design and Simulation Fast NMPC for tracking Two Stage Inverted Pendulum Thesis of Electrical Engineering, Sepuluh Nopember Institute of Technology, Surabaya.
238
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Hazop Study Based on Anfis Layer of Protection Analysis in Unit Kiln PT. Semen Indonesia Factory Tuban 1, 2)
Henry Prasetyo1), Ali Musyafa‘ 2) Engineering Physics, Faculty Industrial Technology ,Institut Technology Sepuluh Nopember Jl. Arief Rahman Hakim, Surabaya 60111 [email protected]
Analysis (ETA), Fault Tree Analysis (FTA), Quantitative Risk Assesment (QRA), Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA), Probabilistic Risk Assesment (PRA) that is used to identify potential accident scenarios, estimate their their likelihoods and consequences and improve system safety and operation [10,11]. However, knowledge is developing rapidly, but there is still lacking and uncertain process information, implicit in the variable, model and in the large accident hazard consequently [12], and risk and reliabelity analysis involves estimating the probabilisties of hazardous events such as hardware or system failures and consequently their severrity [13].
Abstract - Process safety and risk assesment are vital demand for any industry to characteristize hazard and their for personnel, environment and loss of money. Unit Kiln are part of industrial cement, operated at high temperatur and high preassure. Security so the process must be maintenaned so as not to pose a hazard with a high risk. Risk matrix is a very useful tool to estimate of process or equipment that helps decision making process. HAZOP(Hazard and Operability) study is one methode to know risk assesment. Thus ANFIS logic methode for risk assesment is selected as a new and efficient way to industry resource management. This study generally include quantative review of possible accident, based on previous accident experiences that may accur in a thypical procces in unit kiln. For the HAZOP study the possible axist to limit faillure in case definition and risk modeling to only accident that may include fire,exploision and toxic effect risks. Consequency a ANFIS risk matrix is based on Layer Of Protection Analysis (LOPA) and HAZOP Study prosedur for analysing.The result from this research that have be done study hazop unit kiln pt semen indonesia factory tuban and also know risk impact and get SIL rating for this plant. Keyword : Hazop, Anfis, Unit Kiln, Lopa
I.
II. METHOD Start Design Variabel ANFIS Layer of Protection Analysis Identification data process
Suitable Data Consept HAZOP & LOPA ANFIS
Field study process in unit kiln PT Semen Indonesia
INTRODUCTION
Analysis Estimation SIL value&Risk Impact
Consclution
Nowdays, Artificial inteligent (AI) computational methods, such as knowledge-based system, neural network, genetic algoritm, and fuzzy logic, have been increasingly applied to several industrial researcher[1-6]. Chemical and proces unit contain huge amount of dangerous chemical product and substances that may be exposed to any kinds of hazard, like natural and process hazard [7]. Risk assesment must be an analytical process for identifying to potential hazard, and consequently hamfull effect of these hazard[8]. In recent years,cement industry, quantitative risk analysis have provided valuable information for decision process in the planning phase[9]. Risk analysis techniques based on particular characteristics are divided into four categories : deterministic, probabilistic, quantiative and qualitative. Some methods of risk analysis are: HAZOP, Event Tree
Data collection: P&ID, Data Human Error, Data unsafe, Risk Matriks, Data Maintenace, PFD, Data acciddnt, unsafe condition, Data safeguard, Data BPCS and Alarm End
Developtment Skenario for Hazard Proses
Fig 1. Flowchart Research Method
Adaptive Neuro Fuzzy Inference System(ANFIS) is one modern method that can be used in implementing an assesment, estimations and prdiction qualitatively and quantitatively. ANFIS is merger of Fuzzy Inference System (FIS) mechanism, which is descibed in the neural network architecture.
239
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Desain Proces
Basic Proces Control System
Risk impact Adaptive Neuro Fuzzy Inference system
Adaptive Neuro Fuzzy Inference system
SiL Rating
Passive Device
Frequency
Consequece Severity
Active Device
Fig 2. Arsitektur Adaptif Neuro Fuzzy Inference System Layer of Protection Analysis(ANFIS LOPA) for search SIL
Medium
Mediu m High
Mediu m Low
High
Low
Very High Castatro pic
Low
Mediu m Mediu m Low
Low
Low
Severity
High High High Mediu m Mediu m Low
Very High Emerge ncy High High
Castatrop hic Emergen cy Emergen cy High
Medium
High
Low
Medium
Risk Impact ANFIS LOPA
TABLE 2 Rule Base for SIL Rating Frequency
Low
Rare 1
Unlikely 1
Low 2
Medium 3
High 3
Medium
1
1
3
4
NR
High
1
2
3
4
NR
Castatropihc
1
2
3
4
NR
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Pemantauan Pengendalian Tujuan & sasaran Pemantauan Pengendalian Tujuan & sasaran Pemantauan Pengendalian Tujuan & sasaran Pemantauan Pengendalian Tujuan & sasaran
Low
Low
Risk impact assesment for node 1- node 4 show that figure 4
Skenario ANFIS LOPA
Probabil ity
Fig 3 Surface Viewer for Seveity Risk Impact
TABLE I Rule Base for Severity Risk Impact Consequence Severity
node 1
III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION Analisys severity risk impact based on ANFIS look at surface view in figure 3 Unit Kiln in PT. Semen Indonesia divided 4 node: node 1(process in blending silo and kiln feed), node 2(suspension preheater), node 3(rotary kiln) and node 4( clinker cooler). Surface view ANFIS for risk impact:
node 2 node 3 Risk Impact
node 4
Fig 4 Risk Impact with ANFIS LOPA for node 1- node 4
For search SIL rating , see the table 3.
Node
TABLE 3 SIL rating SIL Rating
Skenario Fuzzy
1
SIL 1
1
2
3
4
240
NR
1
SIL 1
3
NR
2
SIL 2
3
SIL 3
5
SIL 1
2
SIL 2
3
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
[5]
IV. CONCLUTION Based in the research and analysis, can get concluded that have be done study hazop unit kiln PT Semen Indonesia factory Tuban and also know risk impact and get SIL rating for this plant. For node 1 get SIL 1, node 2 get SIL 1 , node 3 get SIL 3 and node 4 get SIL 2
[6]
[7]
[8]
REFERENCES [9] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Pace R, and Rodriques E(2012). Development of enviromental quality indexes based on fuzzy logic A case study Ecological Indicator , vol(23),555-565. Gharibi H, Mahvi AH, Nabrizadeh R, Arabalibeik H, Yunesiana M,Sowlat MH(2012). A Novel approach in water quality based on fuzzy logic, Journal of enviromental management, vol (112),87-95 Akkoc S (2012). An empirical comparison of conventional techniques, neural network an three stage hybrid adaptive neuro fuzzy inference system(ANFIS) model for credit scoring analysis: The case turkies credit card data, European Journal of operational research, vol (222) 168-178 Li D F (2012). A fast approach to compute fuzzy values of matrix games with payoff of trianggular fuzzy number, Eur0pean Journal of operational research, vol(223) 421492
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
241
Zarandi A (2010). On fuzzy information theory, Indian Journal of Science and technology, vol(3),No(2) Valizadeh Z, Erzati R, Kherzelo S (2012). Approximate symmetric solution of dual fuzzy system regarding two different fuzzy multiplications, Indian Journal of Science and technology, vol(5),No(2) Markowski A S, Mannan M S, Bigoszewska A (2009). Fuzzy logic for process safey analysis, Journal of loss prevention in the process industries,vol(22) 695-702 Milne I, Richie R, Karihaloo B L (2003). Comprehensive structural integrity,Vol(1), Elsevier publishers Khaleghi, Sohrab. Givehchi, Saeed. And Karimi, Saeed. (2013). Fuzzy Risk Assesment and Categorization, based on Event Tree Analysis(ETA) and Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA); case study in cement industry. World Applied Programming Journal, vol(3) Issues (9) 417-426 Marengo C R, Flores J D L., Molina A L, Roman R V, Vasques V C, Mannan M S (2013). A formulation to optimize the risk reduction process based on LOPA, Journal loss prevention in the process industries, vol(26) 488-494 Mohaghegh Z, and Mosleh A (1999). Incoporating organizational factors into probabilistic risk assesment of complex sosiotechnical system: Prinsiple and theoritical foundations, Safety science, vol(47) 1139-1158 Morkowski A S, and Mannan M S (2009). Fuzzy logic for piping risk assesment (pfLOPA). Journal loss prevention in the process industries, vol(22) 921-927 Guikima S D, and Goffelt J P(2008). A flexible count data regression model for risk analysis, Risk Analysis, vol(28) 213-223
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
242
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
BIG DATA: CHARACTERISTICS, APPLICATION AND THE CHALLENGES IN INDONESIA Naim Rochmawati 1
Department of Informatics, Universitas Negeri Surabaya Kampus Ketintang Gedung B1 Ketintang, Surabaya
business executives, and the investment community to make fact-based decisions on technology purchases and business strategy. It is not a secret that many people are addicted to access facebook and other social media. The use of the internet results huge data including data stored by service providers such as Google, Yahoo, Microsoft, Facebook and so on. The data in amount of large size in world is growing day by day. Billions of gigabytes of data from millions of users are stored by the service provider not only in the consumer market, but also in the corporate market. Internet companies will definitely be in touch with millions, even billions of gigabytes of data through the billions of users. collection of data sets which is very large in size is called Big Data. In short, Big Data is the data with a large capacity. According to some researchers, the term Big Data applies to information that cannot be processed or analyzed using traditional processes or tools[2]. Big Data is data that exceeds the capacity of the existing database systems [1]. Data is too large and too fast or not in accordance with the structure of the existing database architecture. To get the value of the data, then it should choose alternative way to process it. Based on the understanding of the those experts above, it can be concluded that Big Data is data that has a large volume that can not be processed using traditional tools which should use the regular and new ways and mean to get the value of this data. This paper outlines the concept and characteristic of Big Data and the application and challenges of Big Data in Indonesia. It does not aim to cover the entire spectrum of challenges nor to offer definitive answers to those it addresses, but to serve as insight about Big Data in Indonesia.
Abstract - The phenomenon of the Internet is now a very common thing. Anywhere and anytime, internet has become familiar to anyone. The use of the internet results huge data including data stored by service providers such as Google, Yahoo, Microsoft, Facebook and so on. The data in amount of large size in world is growing day by day. Billions of gigabytes of data from millions of users are stored by the service provider not only in the consumer market, but also in the corporate market. Internet companies will definitely be in touch with millions, even billions of gigabytes of data through the billions of users. collection of data sets which is very large in size is called Big Data. Big Data has characteristics 3V namely volume, variety, velocity, and one more characterictic, veracity. Some sectors of Big Data applications are: companies, telecommunications, financial services industry, education and many others that have not been mentioned. Indonesia, as a developing country, is certainly very necessary to implement the use of Big Data so there is no gap in knowledge between developed countries and developing countries. Nevertheless there will some challenges when the Big Data applied in Indonesia. Here are some challenges: heterogeneity and incompleteness, scale, timeless, privacy and human collaboration. Index Terms - Big Data, Data mining, volume, velocity, variety, veracity .
I.
Introduction
The phenomenon of the Internet is now a very common thing. Anywhere and anytime internet has become familiar to anyone, not only for college student but also elementary student. Even children in level of kindergarten and playgroup already access the internet facilities. They usually use for playing games. they may not understand what the internet is, but the fact, all level of our society can not escape from the influence of the internet. People have connection with internet all day. New IDC Research reports that people have interaction with each other through the phones begins as soon as they awake. Within the first 15 minutes of waking up, 4 out of 5 smartphone owners are checking their phones before doing anything else. International Data Corporation (IDC) is the premier global provider of market intelligence, advisory services, and events for the information technology, telecommunications, and consumer technology markets. IDC helps IT professionals,
II.
Characteristics of big data
Big data has 3 characterictics known with 3V [2,3]: a. Volume (number / capacity) Volume refers to the exponential growth of the amount of data generated and stored. It is estimated that the production of data will increase 44 times greater in 2020 than in 2009. The massive
243
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 scale and growth of unstructured data outstrips traditional storage and analytical solutions.
The information that has been collected eventually became Big Data that can be used to help farmers increase crop production, predicting the right time for planting, and others. In the future, this project will be carried out also in other areas.
b. Variety (variation) Variety describes differences in the format of the data that can be used, either starting from images, text, video, sound and so on. Big Data will try to exploit these data although currently do not have a standard format or unstructured.
b.
The public awareness is still low to pay taxes so that every year the DGT never meet the tax revenue target. Big Data can improve the utilization of state tax revenue in Indonesia. Head of the Directorate General of Taxation, Iwan Djuniardi reported that application of Big Data technologies in taxation is still in the development stage. With this technology, of course, the government can raise awareness to pay taxes, reducing tax fraud, and optimize income countries.
c. Velocity (speed) Velocity represents the addition amount of data generated frequency. The Growth of censor integrated in all types of devices and the growing number of global mobile phone used around the world contribute significantly to the amount of data generated. Projects of Big Data is used to exploit this data quickly so that decisions can be taken appropriately. d. Veracity (uncertainty) Having a lot of data in different volumes coming in at high speed is worthless if that data is incorrect. Incorrect data can cause a lot of problems for organisations as well as for consumers. Therefore, organisations need to ensure that the data is correct as well as the analyses performed on the data are correct. Especially in automated decision-making, where no human is involved anymore, it will need to be sure that both the data and the analyses are correct. If we want our organisation to become information-centric, we should be able to trust that data as well as the analyses. Actually there are 3 more characteristics which are different from above: variability, visualization and value. But mostly, 3 main characterictics are: volume, variety, and velocity.
III.
c.
Wearable Technology
Wearable technology is usually used to help with daily activities such as communication and navigation. But in the hands of Daniel Oscar Baskoro,wearable technology has emerged as the technology of information gatherers Big Data. Oscar is a student and researcher at the University of Gajah Mada. He has won many awards in his career such as being Google's Ambassador to the Southeast Asian region, the winner of the World Bank Global Winner Award in London with the application of natural disasters, and much more. In his presentation, Oscar describes wearable technology and featuring a number of applications it developed for Google Glass and smartphones, namely Quick Disaster, Weaver, Realive, and Stress Rate. Quick Disaster natural disaster is an application that will help users in the event and after a natural disaster. For example, when an earthquake happens, Google Glass will help provide a solution in time of the disaster by providing evacuation route navigation. After a disaster occurs, the user can take pictures and report the damage caused by natural disasters through this application.
Application Sectors of Big Data
Big Data can be applied in many sectors. Indonesia is developing country where Big Data is still considered as something new.. Here are application sectors of Big Data which can be applied in Indonesia:
a.
Tax
Agriculture
As an agricultural country with over 30 million farmers and large farms, Indonesia will certainly benefit from the adaptation of Big Data technology, especially in agriculture. Big Data can help farmers to improve their lives. A number of talented students from Padjadjaran University conduct research in an area of rice cultivation in West Java. The first stage is to analyze the quality of the soil and vast rice fields with aerial photos. The research team take 400 photos for each 1 hectare of rice fields.The next step is to observe high growth of rice every week and also collect weather data from day to day.
d.
Health
Currently all clinics, health centers, and hospitals in Indonesia use different software to record patient data. With the role of Big Data technologies, all Indonesian population health information will be centralized. So that the data can be processed and analyzed to improve the health sector in Indonesia as to predict disease and determine the level of health of the population in the country.
e. 244
Company
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 One of the developers of Big Data solutions for the corporate sector, Teradata Corp., recently introduced its latest Big Data applications, Teradata Aster AppCenter. Developed for largescale businesses, this application has a vision to transform business challenges into revenue opportunities. Solution based on Big Data is known to generate insights that can drive strategic decisions in a company's business processes. Many beneficial things can be obtained from the application of Big Data. Various sectors have proved it. By equipping the business with Big Data solutions, can help the store to create a business model, to recognize patterns of consumer behavior, to detect market trends that can help businesses gain a competitive advantage. Teradata applications available in the webbased portal is focused on solving complex problems in the company. Teradata designed this application to perform various operations such as detection with Big Data analysis of the possibility of financial fraud, acquisition and customer retention by competitors, the payment when a customer makes a purchase, and also optimize the process of marketing the product.
unpredictable to both students and their parents. Big data can be a solution for this problem. In addition, Big Data can also be used to support teaching management. Each university manages the test scores of students in large numbers from various different faculties. With the implementation of the data warehouse and analyze data using a variety of data mining techniques, the Dean of faculty can exploit the hidden information and can perform forecasting and analysis so the Dean of faculty can use to improve the quality of teaching and knowledge. IV.
Challenges in Indonesia
Indonesia is a developing country. To bridge the gap between the developed countries and developing countries, it is urgent to apply Big Data. Indonesia will obtain a lot of benefits if Big Data widely applied. However, the application of Big Data is not that easy. To apply Big Data, Indonesia will face many challenges. a. Data collection Data in Indonesia is unstructured and not organized well. Data between one district and another district is not integrated. Each of district government is not connected with others. It is also very difficult to collaborate the human[4].
f.
Telecommunication. Telkom is Indonesia's largest telecommunication and network provider. Big Data can be used to determine public response to Telkom products through analysis on social media. Results of this analysis will help decision makers to decide more precisely and accurately. Finally this will help improve the company's image in the eyes of customers, especially Telkom. Big Data can also help to perform the analysis and prediction of the customer which will terminate its service. For example by keeping track of which customers who do complain three times a week. By knowing the track of customers, Telkom can serve customer better than before.
b.
Variety (Heterogeneity and incompleteness) The other challenge is a difficult process of how to capture unstructed data and transform in a good shape to be analyzed c. Scale (Volume) This challenge is not only in Indonesia but also in other countries. The volume of data generated by the engine is growing fast. It will explode and grow annually with new data sources are emerging. For example, in 2000 there were 800,000 petabytes (PB) of stored data and is expected to reach 35 zettabytes (ZB) in 2020, according to IBM [6].
g.
Education Currently the application of business intelligence in the education industry is still relatively limited when compared to the banking industry, healthcare, insurance, etc. [5]. Implementation of Big Data in education can be applied on the new admissions, teaching management, etc. [7]. The acceptance rate in some elite colleges is as low as 10%, and the uncertainty often causes talented students to apply to schools in the next tier. Students try to improve their chances of getting into a college by applying to multiple schools, with each school having its own timelines and deadlines for admissions. Consequently, students are often caught in a dilemma when they run out of time to accept an offer from a university that is lower on their priority list, before they know the decision from a university that they value more. The college admissions process is thus extremely stressful and
d.
data privacy, security, regulatory and ethical issues. The challenge is how to use data not only to obtain the benefits of Big Data, but also to protect people‘s privacy and their data are still secure. V.
Conclusion
It can be concluded that Big Data has many benefits for to be applied in many sectors. Indonesia as a developing country, should bridge the gap with developed countries by implemening Big Data. There many sectors where Big Data can be implemented: Agriculture, Tax, Wearable
245
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Technology, Health, Company, Telecommunication, and Education. Anyway, to implement Big Data is not that easy. There are many challenges: Data Collection, Variety, Volume and Data Privacy. REFERENCES [1] Dumbill, E. (2012). Big Data Now Current Perspective. O'Reilly Media. [2] Eaton, C., Dirk, D., Tom, D., George, L., & Paul, Z. (n.d.). Understanding Big Data. Mc Graw Hill. [3] Hitzler, P. and Janowicz, K. (2013). Linked Data, Big Data, and the 4th Paradigm (editorial). Semantic Web Journal. Volume 4, Number 3, pp. 233-235, IOS Press. [4] http://www.antaranews.com/berita/477302/fasepengumpulan-tantangan-utama-big-data-diindonesia [5] Lihua, S., Yongsheng, Z., & Zhonglei, Z. (2008). Research on Data Mining in College Education.International Conference on Computer Science and Software Engineering (pp. 385-388). IEEE. [6] Prof. Roberto V. Zicari (2013). The challenges and opportunities of Big Data. [7] Rebbapragada, S., Basu, A., & Semple, J. (2010, April). Data Mining and Revenue Management Methodologies in College Admissions. Communication of the ACM , pp. 128-133.
246
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Implementation Coupled Linear Congruential Generator Methods For Questions Of Pattern Randomization I Made Divya Biantara1, I Made Sudana2, Suryono3, Alfa Faridh Suni4, Arimaz Hangga5 Electrical Engineering Education Semarang State University, Semarang, Indonesia [email protected]
implementation of the test required an absence of variation type questions are different. The provision of different types of tests that can be conducted by randomization question. In general there are two methods of randomization question namely conventional and computerized. Randomization was performed manually still constrained least variation about the type and randomization long time. Given these conditions, the research is expected to provide solutions to address the problem at least the variety of types of questions in the examination. This research using a computerized randomization question by applying the method of randomization Linear Congruential Generator (LCG) and Couple Linear Congruential Generator (CLCG).
Abstract - In implementation of a test frequently found existence of the act of fraudulently students. The act of fraudulently can be caused by several factors among other : lack of confidence students, the same type of exams and technological advances. From these factors, factors which the same type of exam is a factor that often give students opportunities to commit fraud. This research aims to address the problem at least the variety of types of questions in the examination by using Linear Congruential Generator (LCG) and Couple Linear Congruential Generator (CLCG) method of randomization. The result of research showed that the questions of pattern randomization with CLCG method more complicated than LCG method so variation about type of questions obtained many. The mean of distribution in common questions using LCG and CLCG method had the changes value of precentage is not too significant within the range 13.3% - 21.7%. Keyword:Questions of pattern randomization, precentage, LCG, CLCG.
II. RESEARCH METHOD The methods used to perform randomization question are Linear Congruential generator (LCG) and Coupled Linear Congruential Generator (CLCG). The variables are changed in this research is the amount of questions. Randomization the question was performed on amount of questions about 10, 20, 30, and 40 by using this LCG and CLCG methods. In each variable number of questions about randomization will be taken 10 samples of randomization questions.
I. INTRODUCTION Implementation of a test aims to determine the achievement of ability and success in understanding the courses pursued by the student. In fact, the implementation of the test is less effective due to the act of fraudulently students in the form of done in cooperation with other students. The act of fraudulently students can be caused by several factors among other : lack of confidence students, the same type of exams and technological advances. From these factors, factors which the same type of exam is a factor that often give students opportunities to commit fraud. In the general the act of fraudulently done by a student involving friends around him such as the front, rear, left, right and diagonally. If the positions of seating students are in the middle, then these students have about the same chance of matching with friends around him. Hence in the
Fig. 1 Design position in the implementation of Test
247
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 3. Seen in Figure 1 that number 5 is a bench seat which is in a position among implementation of test. The aims of this research to determine the distribution of similarities about the bench number 5 of randomization questions with other seats. Common questions result was used to calculate and compare the percentage of methods LCG and CLCG.
is divisibe by 4 if 4 divides
C. Coupled Linear Congruential Generator (CLCG) Coupled Linear Congruential Generator is a pseudo-random number generator method by using the merger two linear equation based methods LCG. Mathematical models CLCG can be defined by (2) [4] :
III. MATHEMATICAL MODELS
(( ((
: :
A. Matrix Matrix is a collection numbers that ordered by the row and column so that they formed a board (array) square or rectangle. Matrix that have row and column called matrix × or matrix with orde × . Matrix simply board of a group numbers and does not have a relationship between the elements arithmetics [1]. Matrix will have different address the row and column as shown in the Figure 2.
: :
) )
) )
Note: = Numbers at random to= Numbers at random to= Numbers at random before = Numbers at random before = Multiplier = Incremental = Amount of question = 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . And so forth
]
Fig. 2 Notation Matrix (
The elements of matrix A seen in the Figure 2 are positive numbers. In this research, the elements of the A is suitable for randomization the question with the Coupled Linear Congruential Generator (CLCG). Number of columns matrix that used in this research as much as 5 while the number of row that is used as much as number of questions are divided into number of columns.
((
)
)
(
= = = = = =
(3)
:
)
(4)
:
Mathematical models for the results randomization by using matrix can be calculated by using similarities (5) : ,
: :
(1)
Note: :
)
The orde is obtained from calculation on modulo operation : of columns that had been found similarities (4) :
B. Linear Congruential generator ( LCG) Linear Congruential Generator is one of the kinds of pseudo-random number generator. LCG methods use to raise a random number in great Note : numbers and which quickly [2]. Mathematical models LCG can be defined by (1) [3] : :
(2)
Based on the result of : and : so it will be obtained as a series of random number that are converted into the order of matrix. The orde was obtained from calculation on modulo operation row that had been : of found similarities (3) :
, [
.
:
= = = = = =
-,
:
- (5)
Result random number toNumbers at random toNumbers at random toRow matrix Column matrix 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . etc.
Numbers at random to-n Numbers at random before By using the address of order matrix can be done by adjusting the decision-making address of Multiplier orde based on the result of matrix Incremental Amount of questions IV. ALGORITHM 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . etc.
LCG have full period if and only if [3] : 1. and are relatively prime. 2. is divisible by every prime factors of
Randomization the question with the LCG method will be done through four stages. The determination of questions that are randomized (was the first stage m) which will be done in this
.
248
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 research. After that was carried the stage of determining variable of multiplier (a). Third phase is the stage of determining the variable for incremental (b). The final, randomization the questions with LCG method is calulating combination of variables a, b, and m by using mathematical equation (1). It is different with randomization of questions with CLCG method. The first of the method CLCG is determination of the row and column where based on matrik A of elements in accordance with the number of questions that are randomized. After the determine of variables a, b, and m with the same as LCG and must be repeated twice. Third phase of the method CLCG is calculation numbers at random x and y in accordance with mathematical equation (2). The formation and adjustments of matrix Mn order based on matrix A in accordance with mathematical equation (3-5) is the final phase of randomization question with CLCG method. V. RESULT Table 1. showed that result of randomization questions using LCG and CLCG methods have common questions on bench number 5 with other seats around them. It was because of the use of combination variable values a and b influenced by the prime factors of variable values m to fulfill the requirement. More and more combination use values a and b will be resulted common question more a little bit. Based on the Table 1. and 2. can be seen that distribution pattern random questions with CLCG method more complicated than LCG method. If reviewed seats number 5, the distribution pattern about random pattern with LCG produce of randomization about -9, +11. While result of using CLCG methods produce pattern of randomization about +8,+3,+3,+8,+3. It was because of CLCG method influenced the formation matrix early became the determining the final result of randomization.
9 2 15 8 1 14 7
2 5 8 11 14 17 20
11 14 17 20 3 6 9
18 1 4 7 10 13 16
16 7 18 9 20 11 2
9 12 15 18 1 4 7
8 11 14 17 20 3 6
15 2 9 16 3 10 17
17 20 3 6 9 12 15
Table 2. Result of Randomization Coupled Linear Congruential Generator (CLCG) Coupled Congruential Generator ( CLCG) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 16 18 7 16 16 3 17 13 2 14 14 15 13 3 7 4 16 8 7 10 18 10 10 11 6 4 14 5 1 1 2 12 20 13 7 20 18 17 9 19 19 4 20 15 1 11 13 12 11 1 8 2 18 7 9 9 20 8 8 12 9 1 13 2 5 3 5 15 16 11 9 19 20 16 6 17 17 5 18 12 5 13 12 14 14 4 9 5 20 6 6 8 17 6 6 13 7 3 12 4 4 5 3 13 17 14 6 18 17 20 8 20 20 1 16 14 4 15 11 11 12 2 10 3 17 10 8 7 19 9 9 14 10 5 11 1 3 2 1 11 18 12 8 17 19 19 10 18 18 2 19 11 3 12 15 13 15 5 6 1 19 9 10 6 16 7 7 15 8 2 15 3 2 4 4 14 19 15 Table 3. showed that the mean of distribution common questions from 10 times of the experiment of randomization questions using LCG and CLCG methods. In numerical terms can be seen Table 3 that of randomization questions are done with a variety of issues that have result there is no change significantly both methods LCG and CLCG method. Table 3. Percentage Similarities of Randomization The Number percentage The percentage of similarities similarities CLCG (%) questions LCG (%) 10 15.1 18 20 13.3 18 30 15.7 21.7 40 14.6 18
Table 1. Result of Randomization Linear Congruential Generator (LCG) Linear Congruential Generator (LCG) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 3 12 19 13 10 9 4 18 13 6 15 2 4 13 12 11 1 6 9 18 5 15 16 15 18 4 19 12 1 8 6 19 18 5 7 12 15 4 11 17 2 1 12 10 5 18 7 14 8 5 4 19 13 18 1 10 17 19 8 7 6 16 11 4 13 20 10 11 10 13 19 4 7 16 3 1 14 13 20 2 17 10 19 6 12 17 16 7 5 10 13 2 9 3 20 19 14 8 3 16 5 12 14 3 2 1 11 16 19 8 15 5 6 5 8 14
Based on the Table 1. and 2. in terms of the common questions that are produced by this method LCG better than CLCG. But if observed from the questions of pattern randomization, the CLCG methods produce patterns that more complicated than LCG method. In the implementation education as randomization of questions which are encouraged to use
249
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 CLCG method which have the pattern more complicated than LCG method. VI. CONCLUSION The questions of pattern randomization using CLCG method more complicated than LCG method. Common questions that are produced by LCG method better than CLCG method. The mean of distribution common questions from a variety of questions with the LCG and CLCG methods have change of value is not significant. REFERENCES [1] Stroud, K.A. 1996. The program and the questions Mathematics To techniques (Ed. 4). Standard-Erwin Sucipto. Jakarta: Erlangga [2] Munthe, Daniel. 2014. “Implementasi Linier Congruent Method (LCM) Pada Aplikasi Tryout SNMPTN”. In the Journal Pelita Informatika Budi Darma, Volume : VII Nomor : 2 Hal 111-115, Medan : STMIK Budi Darma. [3] Knuth, Donald E. The Art of Conputer Programming. Vol 2. Ed 2. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1981. [4] Katti, Raj's and Rajesh G. Kavasseri. 2008. "Secure Pseudo-random Bit Sequence Generation using Inches Linear Congruential generator". In the Journal IEEE Intl. Symp. On schema need and Systems (ISCAS 2008), May 18-21, Seattle, North Dakota State University
250
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Analysis of Adjustment Delay Scheme Beacon Enabled Mode for Star Networks Eppy Yundra1, Bih-Hwang Lee2 1
Universitas Negeri Surabaya, Indonesia Kampus Ketintang Surabaya, Surabaya, Indonesia E-Mails: [email protected], [email protected] 2
National Taiwan University of Science and Technology, Taiwan. 43, Keelung Rd., Section 4, Taipei 106, Taiwan; E-Mails: [email protected];
clear channel assessment (CCA) detects as busy condition. The challenge of CSMA/CA as following: first, when the device nodes detect the channel in busy condition, the device nodes have to increase the value of backoff exponent (BE). However, which cause range of blind backoff process also increase. Second, when the device nodes detect the channel in busy condition, the device nodes have to increase number of backoff stage. However, which cause more energy consumptions for entering next backoff stage. In addition, the blind of backoff process in the slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) will cause lower channel utilization and more energy consumptions in the networks. The problem occur if every device node detect channel assessment (CCA) as busy condition, the device nodes have to increase the value of backoff exponent (BE) and as well as backof stage. This condition not only cause range of backoff process will increase but also more energy consumptions. The performance analysis of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC is still one of the important research topics in wireless sensor network. The authors of [2] present an evaluation of the slotted CSMA/CA of IEEE 802.15.4 based on all of its frequency, which only analyze each frequency and compare with each other but not to propose a method. In [3], the authors use node state and channel state models to analyze the performance of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC that are simple but accurate. The authors also present an analytical model for the slotted CSMA/CA algorithm adopted in the CAP of the beacon-enabled mode in IEEE 802.15.4 MAC, which only considers for the saturated mode. However, they do not consider about acknowledgement (ACK).
Abstract— In the contention mechanism used to slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) on IEEE 802.15.4 standard. Device nodes will perform a backoff process as soon as the clear channel assessment (CCA) detects as busy condition. The challenge of CSMA/CA when the blind backoff process in the slotted CSMA/CA will cause lower channel utilization and more energy consumptions. This article proposes a scheme to improve IEEE 802.15.4 medium access control, called adjustment delay scheme (ADES). This article also presents a comprehensive Markov chain analysis especially beacon-enabled mode to predict the bandwidth utilization and total network energy consumption. The analytical model and simulation experiments show that the performance of ADES is better than that of IEEE 802.15.4 standard in term of the average bandwidth utilization and total energy consumption. Keywords: IEEE 802.15.4, Markov chain, energy consumption.
I. INTRODUCTION The IEEE 802.15.4 is one of candidates for wireless sensor networks, which consist of large number of sensors that are densely deployed to some physical phenomena for a wide variety applications. The IEEE 802.15.4 standard has been designed to specify the physical layer (PHY) and medium access control (MAC) sublayer for low power consumption, short transmission range, and low-rate wireless personal area network (LR-WPAN) [1]. The super frame structure in IEEE 802.15.4 standard consist of active portion and inactive portion. The active portion comprised of beacon frame, contention access period (CAP) and contention access period (CFP). While inactive portion used to sleep mode for saving energy. During CAP that mean contention mechanism, all of nodes have to compete each other to access the channel using slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA). Whereas in CFP used to guaranteed time slot (GTS) for application that need specific requirement because device occupied as dedicated slot. In the contention mechanism used to slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA). Device nodes will perform a backoff process as soon as the
There are some mathematical analysis models have been proposed to analyze the performance of IEEE 802.15.4 based on the Markov chain model without considering packet retransmissions[4-6]. A number of the modified
251
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Markov chain models including packet retransmission have been investigated, but those models did not consider the defer transmission[7-8]. In [9-10], the authors propose improved Markov chain models with considering defer transmission. However, all of the abovementioned models only consider for CSMA/CA standard, i.e., not proposed new contention mechanism in CAP
ADES is explained in section 3. Analysis of ADES is derived in section 4. Simulation and analysis results is given in section 5. Final section are conclusions of the paper. II. OVERVIEW OF IEEE 802.15.4 The IEEE 802.15.4 standard can operate in beacon enable mode and non-beacon enable mode. In beacon enabled mode, each node employs two system parameters: beacon order (BO) and superframe order (SO), which define beacon interval (BI) and superframe duration (SD), respectively. Furthermore, the active portion of each superframe consists of three parts: beacon, CAP and CFP. In CAP, a node performs clear channel assessment (CCA) to make sure whether the channel is idle or busy, when the number of random backoff periods is decreased to 0. The value of CW will be decreased by one if the channel is idle; and the second CCA will be performed if the value of CW is not equal to 0. If the value of CW is equal to 0, it means that the channel is idle after twice CCA; then a node is committed the data transmission. On the other hand, in CFP, each node doesn‘t need compete to transmission of data packet because dedicated slot for transmission. However, a node has to request the usage of GTS by sending GTS request packet to network coordinator in the CAP of the previous superframe. If the network coordinator successfully receives the request packet, and then the network coordinator allocates GTS to the device node, then the device node transmits its packets by using the allocated GTS without contention
Several authors have been proposed to improve the slotted CSMA/CA using hybrid MAC protocol integrating CSMA and time division multiple access (TDMA) for wireless sensor network [11-13]. The authors of [14] propose an analysis for slotted CSMA/CA for energy consumption, but they only consider about idle condition for the standard and do not propose a new scheme. The authors of [15] propose an enhanced backoff (EB) mechanism shifts the range of backoff period (BP) to reduce redundant backoff and clear channel assessments (CCAs). However, the average delay also possibly increases. In [16] the authors present an additional carrier sensing (ACS) for IEEE 802.15.4 in order to improvement performance star networks. However, the authors do not consider about defer transmission and they do not provide retransmission state in Markov chain model. In [17-18], sensor nodes use different mechanisms to reduce the waiting time before they have successfully transmitted packets, which makes it possible to decrease the backoff time between packet transmissions. They can improve channel utilization. However, fail to alleviate collisions. This article proposes an adjustment delay scheme (ADES) for IEEE 802.15.4 which is the extended work from [19] and [20]. In [19], the authors focus on how to decrease the collisions between beacons or even between beacon and data packets by adjusting the beacon starting times of PAN and coordinator nodes for cluster tree topology. In [20], the authors focus on assigning adjustable length of GTS slot based on the length of packet and also deciding the precise time for the GTS starting time (GTSstart) and the GTS length (GTSlength) for star topology. However, all of the aforementioned models only consider CSMA/CA standard for contention mechanism. ADES focuses on adjustment delay if device node detects the channel in busy condition which can reduce probability of going to entering next backoff stage and blind of backoff process.
III. DESCRIPTION OF ADES A star network consists of one network coordinator and several device nodes, while the network coordinator periodically sends beacon frames to the device nodes. The network coordinator allocates the dedicated slots for its device nodes, if it receives the requests for GTS packets in the CAP period, otherwise the device nodes shall transmit their packets with contention in CAP. ADES is expected to adjust delay if the device node detects the channel in busy condition. If the device node detects channel in busy condition which cause blind of backoff process. In this case can cause degradation of performance networks not only lower bandwidth utilization but also more energy consumption. The performance of ADES for star topology is analyzed by the Markov chain model modified from [19] for considering packet retransmission, ACK and defer transmission, which is to obtain the bandwidth utilization and as well as energy consumption for IEEE 802.15.4 MAC in the networks. Let us denote SD and Tdelay be the supeframe duration in second and the time interval of waiting due to CCA busy in second, which can be obtained by Eqs.(1)and (2), respectively, where aBaseSuperframeDuration and Rs denote the minimum duration of the superframe and symbol data rate are equal to 960 symbols and 62500 symbol/second, respectively.
The major contribution of this article is to model the channel access for star network that analyze the performance of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC to obtain the average bandwidth utilization and energy consumption based on the proposed Markov chain. The rest of the paper is organized as follow. Brief overview of IEEE 802.15.4 is given in section 2. The description of
252
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
SD
aBaseSuperfram eDuration x 2
(1)
Tdelay
number of retransmissions, respectively, shown as Eq. (4), where bi,-1,k, bi,-2,k, bi,-3,k and bi,-4,k are the stationary probabilities for the first CCA (CCA1), the second CCA (CCA2), the third CCA (CCA3) and packet transmission, respectively, at the ith backoff stage and the kth retransmission. Let bSi,k and bCi,k be the stationary probabilities of the successful transmission and collision at the states of Si,k and Ci,k as shown in Eqs. (5) and (1) (6), respectively, where m and R are the maximum NB stage and retransmissions, i.e., they are equal to 4 and 3, respectively. Let bDFi,k , bDSAi,k and bDSBi,k be the stationary probabilities of delay one slot at first CCA busy, delay one slot for second CCA busy for first and delay one slot for second CCA busy for second at the states of DF i,k , DSAi,k, and DSBi,k for the ith backoff stage and the kth retransmission as shown in Eqs. (7) to (9), respectively. Finally, the total energy consumption of the network can be obtained bi, j, k lim Pst i, ct j, rt k, for i 0, m, j 4, w i 1, k 0, R
SO
Rs
1 Unitbackoffperiod Rs
(2) Let us also denote Lbeacon and Tbeacon be length of beacon in symbol and time interval of beacon in second, respectively; e.g., Lbeacon is equal to 190 symbols. Let denote CAPades be the length of CAP period in second and can be obtained by Eq. (3) CAPades SD - Tbeacon (3) In this article, each node will communicates with the network coordinator by using the slotted CSMA/CA in CAP. To transmit a packet, a node first delays a backoff period (BP) determined by randomly choosing from 0 to (2BE – 1) UBP, where BE is a backoff exponent and initially set to the value of aMinBE, and then performs the first CCA to detect channel condition. If the channel is founded in busy at the first CCA detection, it will reduces minus one the value of contention window (CW), then continue delay for one slot Tdelay and then perform the second CCA to detect the channel again. If the result of second CCA channel is detected by busy condition, the node will reduce again with minus one for value of contention window (CW), then continue delay for two slot Tdelay and then perform again for third CCA. If the result of third CCA channel is detected by idle condition, the node will starts to transmit its data packet and waits for the acknowledged packet from the coordinator after finishing the data packet transmission. However, if the result of third CCA channel is detected by busy condition, the device node will reassign a backoff period (BP) between 0 and (2(BE + 1) – 1) UBP for delay and attempt CCA again, where BE can be increased to the maximum value of macMaxBE. The transmission will fail if the number of backoff attempts (NB) exceeds the value macMaxCSMABackoffs. We consider star topology network having one network coordinator and twenty device nodes with the same value of six for SO and BO. An example implementation of ADES and IEEE 802.15.4 standard in the network can be shown in figures 1 and 2, respectively.
t
(4) b
S
i, k
lim P S S , r t k , i 0, m , k 0, R i t s t
(5)
bC lim P C s t C i , r t k , i 0, m , k 0, R i, k t
(6)
b DFi, k lim PDFs t DFi , rt k, i 0, m, k 0, R t
(7)
b DSAi, k lim PDSA st DSA i , rt k, i 0, m, k 0, R t
(8) b DSBi, k lim PDSB st DSB i , rt k, i 0, m, k 0, R t
(9) V. SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS RESULTS In this section, simulation experiments for ADES are performed by using the extended Castalia simulator to validate the analysis and performance evaluation. In simulation model, we consider a star network topology with one PAN coordinator and 20 device nodes, where Dnode is equal to 10 meters. To simulate the performance of power consumption, we consider the radio parameters of Chipcon‘s CC2420 2.4 GHz for the IEEE 802.15.4 RF transceiver [22], where the transmitting power PWRtx, the receiving power PWRrx, and the idle power PWRidle, are 31.32 mW, 35.28 mW, and 712 µW, respectively [21]. Table I summarizes the simulation parameters. We compute the average bandwidth utilization (BU) and the total network energy consumption and also compare the analytical (ana) and simulation (sim) results between the proposed algorithm (ADES) and IEEE 802.15.4 standard (Std).
IV. ANALYSIS OF ADES In this section, the proposed ADES based on the IEEE 802.15.4 use slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) for part of CAP only, because we only consider about active period, while part of CFP is neglected. This article also taking into account the case of acknowledged uplink data transmission is investigated comprehensively via Markov chain model as shown in Figure 3. Let bi,j,k be the stationary probability at the stochastic state (s(t) = i, c(t) = j, and r(t) = k), where s(t), c(t), and r(t) represent backoff stage, backoff counter, and
Table I The simulation parameters Parameter Value Physical data rate 250 kbps Packet length (Ldata) 720 bits
253
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Wireless Computing, Communication and Applications, Canada, 2012. [3] K. Ashrafuzzaman and K. Sup Kwak, ―On the Performance Analysis of the Contention Access Period of EEE 802.15.4 MAC,‖ IEEE Communications Letters, Vol. 15, No. 9, September 2011. [4] AN Alvi, SS Naqvi, SH Bouk, N Javaid, U Qasim, and ZA Khan, ―Evaluation of Slotted CSMA/CA of IEEE 802.15.4,‖ Seventh International Conference on Broadband, Wireless Computing, Communication and Applications, Canada, 2012. [5] K. Ashrafuzzaman and K. Sup Kwak, ―On the Performance Analysis of the Contention Access Period of EEE 802.15.4 MAC,‖ IEEE Communications Letters, Vol. 15, No. 9, September 2011. [6] Muneer O. Bani Yassien, Marwa Kh, Salayma, Wail E. Mardini, Yaser M. Khamayseh, Fibonacci Backoff Algorithm for IEEE 802.15.4/Zigbee, Network Protocols and Algorithms, pp. 62-78, Vol 4, No 3 (2012). [7] S Pollin, M Ergen, S Ergen, B Bougard, L Der Perre, I Moerman, A Bahai, P Varaiya, F Catthoor, ―Performance Analysis of Slotted Carrier Sense IEEE 802.15.4 Medium Access Layer,‖ IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol.7, no.9, pp.3359-3371, September 2008. [8] J He, Z Tang, HH Chen, Q Zhang, ―An accurate and scalable analytical model for IEEE 802.15.4 slotted CSMA/CA networks,‖ IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol.8, no.1, pp.440-448, January 2009. [9] C Buratti, ―Performance analysis of IEEE 802.15.4 beaconenabled mode,‖ IEEE Trans. Veh. Technol. 59, 2031–2045 (2010). [10] Y-K Huang, A-C Pang, H-N Hung, ―A comprehensive analysis of low-power operation for beacon-enabled IEEE 802.15.4 wireless networks,‖ IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol.8, no.11, pp.5601-5611, November 2009 [11] K Sarvakar, PS Patel, ―An Efficient Hybrid MAC Layer Protocol Utilized for Wireless Sensor Networks‖. In Proceedings of International Conference on Wireless Communication and Sensor Networks (WCSN), Allahabad, India, pp. 22-26. December 2008. [12] H Deng, J Shen, B Zhang, J Zheng, J Ma , H Liu. ―Performance Analysis for Optimal Hybrid Medium Access Control in Wireless Sensor Networks‖. In Proceedings of IEEE Global Telecommunications (GLOBECOM) Conference, New Orleans, LA, USA, pp. 203-207, November 2008 [13] I Rhee, A Warrier, M Aia, J Min, M.L Sichitiu. ―Z-MAC: A Hybrid MAC for Wireless Sensor Networks‖. IEEE/ACM Trans. Network. 2008, 16, 511-524. [14] MB Rasheed, N Javaid, A Haider, U Qasim, ZA Khan, TA Alghamdi, ―An Energy Consumption Analysis of Beacon Enabled Slotted CSMA/CA IEEE 802.15.4,‖ 28th International Conference on Advanced Information Networking and Applications Workshops (WAINA), Pp. 372-377, 13-16 May 2014.
UBP 80 bits NumSuperframeSlots 16 MacPacketOverhead 112 bits ACK length (Lack) 88 bits Dnode 10 m PWRtx 31.32mW PWRrx 35.28mW PWRidle 712µW BO=SO 6 BEmin 3 BEmax 5 Figure 4 shows the average bandwidth utilization (BU) against traffic load. The average bandwidth utilization of ADES has better efficiency than that of IEEE 802.15.4 standard. ADES can improve the bandwidth utilization because reduce probability going to next backoff stage, which cause blind of backoff process. Figure 5 shows the network energy consumption against traffic load. ADES consumes lesser network energy than that of the IEEE 802.15.4 standard, because the ADES algorithm can adjust the delay when CCA in busy condition which not only reduce probability collision but also probability entering next backoff stage. Moreover, ADES has greater probability of successful transmission than that of the IEEE 802.15.4 standard, especially in heavy traffic load, which means that ADES minimizes the energy consumption when retransmitting data packet. The energy consumption is obtained by summing the energy consumption of PAN coordinator and all of device nodes in the network. VI. CONCLUSIONS In this article, ADES is proposed to improve performance IEEE 802.15.4 networks in order to reduce collision and blind of backoff process which need more energy consumption for random backoff. The proposed ADES algorithm can adjust delay for CCA when channel find in busy condition. This article also presented a comprehensive Markov chain analysis of IEEE 802.15.4, specifically for star network, to predict the average bandwidth utilization as well as the network energy consumption. The validity of the analytical model is shown by closely matching its predictions of the simulation results. The results of analytical model and simulation experiment show that ADES is better than that of IEEE 802.15.4 standard in term of the average bandwidth utilization and energy consumption. As a future work, the proposed scheme will be compared by other algorithms
REFERENCES [1] IEEE 802.15.4, ―Part 15.4: Wireless Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for LowRate Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs),‖ IEEE standard for information technology, September 2006.
[15] JY Ha, TH Kim, HS Park, S Choi, WH Kwon, ―An Enhanced CSMA-CA Algorithm for IEEE 802.15.4 LRWPANs‖. IEEE Communication. Letters, vol.11, no. 5, Pp. 461-463, May, 2007. [16] B-H Lee, R-L Lai, H-K Wu, C-M Wong, ―Study on Additional Carrier Sensing for IEEE 802.15.4 Wireless Sensor Networks,‖ Sensors, Pp. 6275-6289, June 2010.
[2] A. N. Alvi, S. S. Naqvi, S. H. Bouk, N. Javaid, U. Qasim, and Z. A. Khan,‖ Evaluation of Slotted CSMA/CA of IEEE 802.15.4,‖ Seventh International Conference on Broadband,
254
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [17] Y Kwon, Y Fang and H Latchman, ―Design of MAC protocols with fast collision resolution for wireless local area networks,‖ IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol. 3, Pp. 793−807, May 2004. [18] JG Ko, YH Cho and H Kim, ―Performance Evaluation of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC with Different Backoff Ranges in Wireless Sensor Networks,‖ in Proceeding of IEEE International Conference on Communication Systems, Pp. 1−5, Nov. 2006. [19] B.-H. Lee, M Udin Harun Al Rasyid, H.-K. Wu, ―Analysis of superframe adjustment and beacon transmission for IEEE 802.15.4 cluster tree networks,‖ EURASIP Journal on Wireless Communication and Networking, July 2012
[20] B.-H. Lee, Eppy Yundra, H.-K. Wu and M Udin Harun Al Rasyid, , ―Analysis of superframe duration adjustment scheme for IEEE 802.15.4 networks,‖ EURASIP Journal on Wireless Communication and Networking, April, 2015 [21] B Bougard, F Catthoor, DC Daly, ―A Chandrakasan, W Dehaene, Energy Efficiency of the IEEE 802.15.4 Standard in Dense Wireless Microsensor Networks: Modeling and Improvement Perspectives‖. Proceeding of Design, Automation and Test in Europe Conference and Exhibition. (DATE’05), pp.196-201, Mar. 2005. [22] AS Chipcon SmartRF® CC2420 datasheet (rev 1.2), Chipcon corp., 2004 .
Tack Node 1
Tack Node 2
Tack Node 3 backoff
Next backoff
CCA
CCA 1 failed
CCA 2 failed
CCA 3 failed
data
ACK
Fig. 1 An example of implementation of ADES Tack Node 1
Tack Node 2 Next backoff
Node 3 Next backoff
Next backoff
Next backoff
Next backoff backoff
CCA
CCA 1 failed
CCA 2 failed
CCA 3 failed
data
ACK
Fig. 2 An example of implementation of IEEE 802.15.4 Std
255
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
1 ADES (ana) ADES (sim)
Bandwidth utilization
0.8
Standard (ana) Standard (sim)
0.6 0.4
0.2 0 0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
Traffic load
Fig. 4 The average bandwidth utilization against traffic load
Energy consumption (joule)
40 ADES (ana)
35
ADES (sim)
30
Standard (ana)
25
Standard (sim)
20 15 10 5 0 0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
Traffic load
Fig. 5 The total energy consumptions of network against traffic load
256
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig. 3 Markov chain model for ADES
257
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
258
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Sinogram Data Processing System on CT-SCAN Using Reconstruction Method Nur Kholis Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering State University of Surabaya [email protected]
detector. With that series, signals can be detected and processed in the computer supported by software. The results of previous studies is sinogram in grayscale. The sinogram data that will used as a test object in this study has several criteria: sinogram data in low resolution, medium and high. As sustainability of this study, will be planned data processing system called sinogram which is its output like image objects in test research. In the data processing used reconstruction filter radon method, this method can process sinogram data which is still square in 50:31 pixel, 100: 63 and 200; 127. The results of sinogram data are in the Microsoft Excel format, which is its image was sinogram. The aims of this study was to discover the results obtained on CT scans by reprocess sinogram data into the reconstruction method. In this study also can be developed to identify the density on a test object by using reconstruction method in the next application. Furthermore, this system developed into a next generation system CT-Scan computer by using electron beam generator, anode ring, and also spiral motion applications. With this principle, there no is motion, but movement changes of electron beam to the anode target which produces x-rays. Computerized CT-Scan system first generation is the simplest computerized system. This system use one radiation source and one detector. Radiation source and the detector placed in line and then moved translation and rotation that obtained absorption radiation data information on the object completely. Irradiation process on the first generation computerized system shown in Figure 1 [1] [2].
Abstract - The aims of this study was to discover the results obtained in a CT scan to reprocess the sinogram data, determine the form of the data obtained to the test object on CT-Scan using the reconstruction method, analyzing how to identify the density of the test object using reconstruction method in the next development on its application. In this study, using reconstruction method which can be divided into four methods: direct reverse projection method or summation method, fourier method, reverse filtered projection method and iteration method (series expansion method). From the research, reconstruction data were obtained from test object-1: R01.10s50x31, R01.10s100x61, R01.10s200x127; from the 2nd test object obtained R02.10s50x31, R02.10s100x61, R02.10s200x127 and from the 3rd test object obtained R03.10s50x31, R03.10s100x61, R03.10s200x127. Index Terms - CT-Scan, sinogram, reconstruction, grayscale.
test
objects,
I. PRELIMINARY System on CT Scan or also knowing as computed tomography scanning was an electronic system that can be used in several medical field. By the development of science and technology in electronics field, this system can be developed with other purposes and it has very rapid development, either on the system itself or its use in both the medical and industrial fields. Based on the its development, this system can be applied to the material field, moreover the system also can be used to observe internal structures in a material or object to be observed. In the medical field, the system also can be used to observe the internal organs in the human body. Basically that concerns the distribution of CT scan radiation absorption by a material. By the presence of distribution of radiation absorption by material. the process in CT-Scan can produce internal images of an object without damaging the material object itself. This study is a continuation of previous research, which produces output sinogram shaped with black and white (grayscale). In the previous research, data collection method using translational rotation. Translational motion detectors and radioactive lined up straight as far as the x-axis and its movement. Rotation is a circular motion on the test object with active radio range of the detector. Required amplifier circuits to strengthen the signal that generated from the
259
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Fig. 1 First CT-Scan System (a) First Generation, (b) Second Generation [1] [2] [3] [15]
Pictured above was the result of scanning which produces sinogram, each pixel produces different output value, that difference will be difference in color that came out from the image. These data will be used as test object in this study.
Object
Scanned
Fig. 2 Sinogram Data 10s medium 100x63
Sinogram Obtained
II. METHODOLOGY A. Reconstruction Methods Filter Radon Convolution theorem states that the fourier transformation of the products are comparable with each convolution of the fourier transformation. Convolution theorem equation represents the fourier transform from the product of two functions |k| and P(k , ) are P(Xr, ϕ) whilst transformation |k| are . By 1
Sinogram (test object)
Reconstruction
(2 2 x r ) 2
applying the results of each transformation on the equation of convolution theorem, equation obtained are:
Image Obtained
p , ( xr , ) Results Analysis
p( x , r , ) dx , r 2 2 ( xr x , r ) 2 1
(1) Equation (1) can be converted into a single convolution integral by derivatives on , so that it becomes: 1 p( x , r , ) / x , r , p , ( xr , ) 2 dx r 2 ( xr x , r ) 2 (3) Equation (3) initially revealed by Radon while solving gravity problem. [1] [9] [10] [11] [13].
Fig. 2 Testing Process Reconstruction System
Some devices used in this study was the software, and hardware. The software used was Delphi 7.0 and hardware used includes amplifier circuit, filter circuit, the interface circuit PPI 8255, a series of stepper motor controllers and other supporting hardware. [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]. Sinogram data obtained from scanning results on the used test object. Form of sinogram data that will be processed was in black and white (grayscale) using different pixels, and the data was stored in Excel format. Here is one of the test results on the test object in sinogram shaped, more details shown in image below.
Convolution Filter Convolution theorem equation still contains the
k . The
divergence caused by any factor
divergence can be removed if k was replaced by a function that comparable to k
km and
replaced with zero to k > km. Fourier transformation on cut-off condition of is: km
ke
km
j 2kxr
dk
km sin 2 (sin k m xr ) sin(2k m xr ) r 2 x2r
(4) By replacing contained in convolution theorem equation on its cut-off condition and applying convolution theorem, will be obtained: Fig. 3 Sinogram Data 10s low 50x31
260
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 p , ( xr , )
p( x
,
r
k sin[2k m ( xr x , r )] sin 2 [k m ( xr x , r )] , dx r , ) m ( xr x , r ) 2 ( xr x , r ) 2
Fig 5. Sinogram Data From test object-1, test object-2 and test object-3
(5) Equation (5) can be simplified to, p , ( x r , ) k m p( x r , )
Design Basically the image reconstruction process was a process of inverse transform analytic radon which can be expressed:
sin 2 [k m ( x r x , r )] , , p( x r , ) 2 ( x r x , r ) 2 dx r
(6)
p ( xr , ) was the measured profile, , p( x r , ) was a modified profile, and km is the
which
,
1 p ( xr ) / xr ( x, y) 2 dxr d 2 0 r cos( ) xr
largest spatial frequencies contained in the projections. Equation (6) has integral convolution, so that its name was used in this filter. For the implementation purpose, the equation (6) can be simplified. Because that integral only contains frequency of up to km, it can be replaced with the sum of dots spaced at intervals w = ½ km. In equation (6) there is formulation 2 , sin [k m ( xr x r )] which will only have values of 0 and 1. Depending on the value k m ( xr x , r ) even or odd relative to w. Therefore, equation (6) can be rewritten as, n p( xri ) p( xrj ) 1 (7) p , ( xri ) 2 4w w j 1, ganjil (i j ) 2 In equation (7) i and j is not a rank, but an index. Convolution filter was more accurate and faster when compared to filter radon, because it does not require derivatives. But the process was slower when compared to fourier filtering. [1] [9] [10] [11] [13]
(1) which
xr ( x y ) 2
2 1/ 2
and
1
tan (t / x)
reconstruction methods can be divided into four: direct reverse projection method or summation method, Fourier method, reverse filtered projection method and iteration method (series expansion method). [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20]. Data gathered in test object conducted in translational rotation. In the single exposure of an object in xr translational step, rotational position produce ray-sum notated P(xr). If the intensity of the radiation imposed on the object is I0, then the radiation material, the intensity exponentially weakened after passing track L(xr). Radiation intensity which captured by detector was I L, the intensity after passing through the object was written in equation:
I L I 0 exp ( x, y )ds L (x ) r
(2)
I P ( xr ) ln 0 IL
(3)
with (x,y) expressed the linear attenuation coefficient of materials on the x-y coordinates along the path of radiation beam L(xr). Ray-sum on viewpoint to xr position was defined as
Data Research The data were used as a test object in this research was sinogram data. Sinogram data was the data that will be processed in this study will as a test object. The test objects are divided into three parts, first part consists of three resolutions, the second part consists of three resolutions and the third part consists of three resolutions, each of it consists of a low resolution, medium and high. The testing process conducted on three objects which is each test was conducted three times with different resolutions. The division of the data shown in Figure 5.
( x, y )ds L ( xr )
If all the ray-sum represented in the spatial coordinates (xr ,) or the Radon space. [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20]. Sinogram was the result of the transformation of the object from cartesian space to radon space. III. ANALYSIS Reconstruction data in this research was the sinogram data which is processed by using the software. Sinogram was stored in the memory of the PC, its file extension named * .att and reconstructed until produced an image. Then the reconstructed image visually distinguished to actual object. Used resolution in sinogram data processing consist of three test objects-1, test object-2 and test object -3. Each test objects with different resolutions produces different data, such as: test object-1 produces data Tlng01.10s50x31, Tlng01.10s100x61, Tlng01.10s200x127; test object-2 produces data Tlng02.10s50x31, Tlng02.10s100x61, Tlng02.10s200x127; and the
261
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 test object-3 produces data Tlng03.10s50x3, Tlng03.10s200x127.
was reconstruction result on test object-3 using sampling time 10 seconds in high resolution. V. CONCLUSION
Avoid combining SI and CGS units, such as current in amperes and magnetic field in oersteds. This often leads to confusion because equations do not balance dimensionally. If you must use mixed units, clearly state the units for each quantity that you use in an equation.
The conclusion in this study were: Reconstruction method can be use as a sinogram data processor on CT-scan by reconstruct the data, results obtained consisted of three test object from reconstruction result. Test object-1 obtained reconstruction data R01.10s50x31, R01.10s100x61, R01. 10s200x127; Test object-2 obtained reconstruction data R02.10s50x31, R02.10s100x61, R02.10s200x127 and Test object3 obtained reconstruction data R03.10s50x31, R03.10s100x61, R03.10s200x127. The results obtained for each test object using reconstruction method was like the shape of the test object as object in this study, if the test object was round then reconstructed result was round too, the difference was the density of each test object. Based on the analysis from reconstruction results in the future development on reconstruction methods application can be used to identify the density of test object, observations results of each test object has a different density. If the test object has the same shape and has different densities, the level of difference density on test object can be determined, so the difference of the two test objects called as abnormalities in the test object.
IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION From the research results obtained reconstruction data, from test objects-1 obtained reconstruction data R01.10s50x31, R01.10s100x61, R01.10s200x127; test objects-2 obtained reconstruction data R02.10s50x31, R02.10s100x61, R02.10s200x127 and test objects3 obtained reconstruction data R03.10s50x31, R03.10s100x61, R03.10s200x127. The research results shown in Figure 6.
REFERENCES [21] Avinash C. Kak, 1999, Principle Of Computerized Tomographic imaging, IEEE Press.H. Simpson, Dumb Robots, 3rd ed., Springfield: UOS Press, 2004, pp.6-9. [22] Glenn F. Knoll, 1989, Radiation Detection And Measurement, second edition, Jhon Wiley & Sons. [23] Brooks, R.A., and Chiro, D., 1976, Priciple of Computer Assisted Tomography (CAT) in Radiographyc and Radioisotopic Imaging, Phis.Med.Biol.,21(5). [24] Rachmad Setiawan, Programmable Peripheral Interface, Diktat Kuliah. [25] Pradeep Kumar Jaisal, Anant G. Kulkarni, Srikant B. Burje. 2011. Design and Simulation of 8255 Programmable Peripheral Interface Adapter Using VHDL. [26] E. Santoso, E.G.R. Putra. Design And Construction Of The Control System For Batan Small Angle Neutron Scattering Spectrometer (Smarter), Vol 34, No 2 (2008). Atom Indonesia [27] Alexandru Morar. 2014. Study On Modelling And Simulation Of Permanent Magnet Stepping Motor By Matlab/Simulink. Scientific Bulletin Of The „Petru Maior‖University Of Tîrgu Mureş Vol. 11 (Xxviii) No. 2, 2014 Issn-L 1841-9267 (Print), Issn 2285-438x (Online), Issn 2286-3184 (Cd-Rom). [28] Devrim Akgün, Pakize Erdo Gmus. 2015. GPU Accelerated Training Of Image Convolution Filter Weights Using Genetic Algorithms. Applied Soft Computing. www.Elsevier.Com /Locate/Asoc [29] Morgan, CL., and Phil, m., 1983, Basic Principle Of Computerized Tomography, University Park Press, Baltimore. [30] Herman, G.T., 1980, Imaging Reconstruction from Projecion: The Fundamentals of Computed Tomography, Academic Press, New York. [31] Well, D.J., David and M. Morgan, 1994, Computer Tomography, Material Form, Vol.18, PP.111-113 [32] Nilofar Azmi, D. Sunil Sures. 2014. Design Of Low Power Operational Amplifier Using Cmos Technologies.
Fig 6. Sinogram Data From test object-1, test object-2 and test object-3
The intent of each data that obtained from test object-1, test object-2 and test object-3: R01.10s50x31 was reconstruction result on test object-1 using sampling time 10 seconds in low resolution, R01.10s100x61 was reconstruction result on test object-1 using sampling time 10 seconds in medium resolution, R01.10s200x127 was reconstruction result on test object-1 using sampling time 10 seconds in high resolution, R02.10s50x31 was reconstruction result on test object-2 using sampling time 10 seconds in low resolution, R02.10s100x61 was reconstruction result on test object-2 using sampling time 10 seconds in medium resolution, R02.10s200x127 was reconstruction result on test object-2 using sampling time 10 seconds in high resolution, and R03.10s50x31 was reconstruction result on test object-3 using sampling time 10 seconds in low resolution, R03.10s100x61 was reconstruction result on test object-3 using sampling time 10 seconds in medium resolution, R03.10s200x127
262
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
[33] [34]
[35]
[36] [37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]
Progress In Science and Engineering Research Journal ISSN 2347-6680 (E) D. Protopopescu and J.C. Mc. George, 2004, Experiment Single Analyzer, Department Of Phisics and Astronomi. Malcolm, 2007, Algebraic Reconstruction Algorithms, https://engineering.purdue.edu/~malcolm/pct/CTI_Ch07.p df Fogelman, GM. Blake, December 2000, Different Approach to Bone densitometry, The Journal of Nuclear Medicine, vol.41, No.12. Jack D. Gaskill, John Willey & Sons, 1978, Linear system, Fourier Transforms and Optics, New York. Gordon, R., 1974, A Tutorial on ART (Algebraic Reconstruction Techniques), IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science, NS(21). Ain, 2003, Fast Algebraic Reconstruction Method For Raysum Data Raysum Data Set Of Pixel Based Sampling, UGM Yogyakarta. Morgan, CL., and Phil, m., 1983, Basic Principle Of Computerized Tomography, University Park Press, Baltimore. Gordon, R., 1974, A Tutorial on ART (Algebraic Reconstruction Techniques), IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science, NS(21). Brooks, R.A., and Chiro, D., 1976, Priciple of Computer Assisted Tomography (CAT) in Radiographyc and Radioisotopic Imaging, Phis.Med.Biol.,21(5). Ain. 2003, Fast Algebraic Reconstruction Method For Raysum Data Raysum Data Set Of Pixel Based Sampling, UGM Yogyakarta. Malcolm, 2007, Algebraic Reconstruction Algorithms, https://engineering.purdue.edu/~malcolm/pct/CTI_Ch07.p df
263
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
264
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Electrical Load Data Clustering in PJB UP Gresik Based on Time Series Analysis Approach Ismit Mado1, Adi Soeprijanto2, Suhartono3 1
Graduate Student, ITS Surabaya Department of Electrical Engineering, Universitas Borneo Tarakan 2 Department of Electrical Engineering, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember 3 Department of Statistic, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
form a pattern of a group (cluster) of electricity consumption. So with this tendency will be determined model of sequential time (time series) of the dynamics of the electric load. The tendency of continuous consumption patterns by certain periods, it will be recognized through the process of grouping based on common characteristics. Attempts to get the optimal distribution of electrical energy from a power plant can be done by forming a cluster pattern in the condition of the electrical load characteristics. Where the cluster pattern aimed at in order to provide optimum power according to needs, energy efficiency, planning studies as well as the operation and control of the power system. This research will be carried out modeling of time series on production data of electricity load in PT. PJB Gresik Power Unit. The model will then be grouped (clustering) based on the dynamics of the distribution of electrical load. In the method of time series will be determined pattern of the electrical load requirement at each time interval the distribution of electric power PT. PJB Gresik Power Unit to the distribution unit based on historical data every half hour during the period January 2009 to December 2011. With a characteristic pattern of electrical power can be demonstrated statistical model the characteristics of the electric power in the pattern of the electrical load data, which shows a model of repeated regularly and can resolved through clustering method (Rencher, 2002). So with the input pattern analysis of the distribution of electrical power can be optimized.
Abstract - In electrical power systems, electrical power distributions on the generation side need serious attention. Where the provision of electrical power to the plant must be in accordance with the needs of the active power on the load side. Electrical power distribution pattern of a particular period will form a dynamic pattern of electrical load. The pattern to form a cluster in groups of similar characteristics of time series models. This research, the pattern of time series distribution of electric power on the plant side description through descriptive method of analysis for the period from January 1st, 2009 to December 31th, 2011 at PT. Generation Unit PJB Gresik, East Java. Descriptive results of data analysis will be grouped by similar characteristics that make up the load of cluster patterns shared among plants. Results clusters illustrated measured by peak load conditions and average power at each plant supplied to the load. Pattern groups based on common characteristics of this form 7 groups at intervals.Group 1 with a ranges of interval 0-18 MVA, group 2 ranges interval 18-36 MVA, group 3 ranges interval 36-54 MVA, group 4 ranges interval 54-72 MVA, groups of 5 intervals range of 72-90 MVA, group 6 interval range 90-108 MVA, and group 7 interval range 108-126 MVA. Keywords: active power, time series analysis, descriptive analysis, clustering. Index Terms - active power, time series analysis, descriptive analysis, clustering.
I. INTRODUCTION In human life, electrical energy plays a very important in supporting the activities of the community and industry so that the problem of electricity should receive serious attention. Activities conducted based on the characteristics of the state that contains a series of events in time, which can form a pattern. Forecasts are approaching the real conditions on the consumption of electrical energy is needed to help make decisions and policies of electric energy use. In the generation system, to determine the dynamics of the distribution of electrical power at a certain period, will be described the characteristics of the electrical load based on the needs and the electrical energy consumption at that time. Load behavior patterns that form the pattern of dynamic loads in a certain period of time it can
II. THEORITICAL FRAMEWORK A. Electrical Power System Broadly speaking, the power system is divided into 3 main parts, namely the generation, transmission and load. Modern electric power systems are complex systems consisting of plants, transmission lines and distribution network that serve to distribute power from generating stations to load centers. To meet the goal of power system operation, the third part of that generation, distribution and the burdens with one another can‘t be separated as shown in figure 1 below:
265
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Sisi pembangkit
sequentially based on time. Where the observation process is done with the same interval, for example, in the interval hourly, weekly, monthly, yearly, or others. The purpose of the analysis of time series there are two, namely to model a mechanism stochastic contained on observations based on the time that represents the behavior of long-term a time series and to predict or forecast the value of observation in the future based on existing data [3]. Stochastic process as a statistical phenomenon arranged in chronological order based on probability law. Data can be viewed as a reality of a stochastic process [3]. According to Wei, the stochastic process is a set of data based on the time composed of a random variable is the sample space and t is the time index [4]. Distribution function of the random variable is as follows: ( ) ( ) { ( ) } (3) observation Z_1, Z_2,…,Z_n is stochastic process, so the random variable Z_t1,Z_t2,…,Z_tn is said to be stationary in the distribution if : ( ) ( : : : ) (4) In a time series analysis can be done with descriptive data analysis method is a method that is associated with the collection and presentation of a range of data that provide useful information (Walpole, 1995). Descriptive analysis methods describe the state of the measurement data both numerically to obtain a more exact size (for example, calculating the average value) or graphically (in the form of table or graph). In this study used methods of measurement that indicates the tendency of centralized distribution measurement value of the average (mean) and the maximum power that will show the average power and peak load in each half-hour intervals from each plant.
Sisi penyaluran
Sisi beban Fig. 1 Main part electrical power system
Power plant in distributing electricity to customers through a distribution system or load forming the load based on usage patterns and needs. Electric power in three-phase power system is given power generator or three-phase power absorbed by the load consists of a three-phase active power (P) and reactive power (Q). By the following equation: (1) (2) where : = The angle between the phase currents (lagging) and The phase currents
In the sense of active power supply electrical power system must be in accordance with the needs of active power at the load [1]. Load characteristics for a very large system based on the power used and the time of the assignment. In the sense of power consumption in the load distribution pattern forming an electric power generation system that must be generated by a specific time period. Forecast electricity demand is less precise can cause inefficiency of generating capacity in serving the load demand. B. Characterictics of Load Electrical Power The main objective of the distribution of electrical power is to distribute electricity from the power plant or substation to the customers or the load. The main factor, which is very important in the distribution and supply distribution system are load characteristics. Load characteristics of a good use of the period of consumption by the household burden, the burden of commercial, public and industrial load, necessary for system voltage and thermic effect of loading can be analyzed properly. The analysis is included in determining the initial state of the load, which basically has formed a distribution pattern that is continuous and will also be used as a projection in the forward planning. The initial step in determining the characteristics of the load in a plant is very important in evaluating the load on the center of the plant. Forecast electrical load patterns have a major impact in providing optimum power according to the load requirements, energy efficiency, planning studies as well as the operation and control of the power system.
D. Cluster analysis The goal of cluster analysis is to find the optimal classifying objects based on common characteristics among these objects (Rencher, 2002). Thus, the characteristics of a good cluster that is, have a similarity between members of the cluster (internal homogeneity) and there is a difference between clusters with each cluster to another (external heterogeneity). Step cluster analysis interval time series data can be analyzed through descriptive analysis in the form distribution graphic. The distribution graph is the frequency distribution data presentation in the form of drawings in the descriptive analysis method. In other words, the distribution data graph is a visual presentation of data from an existing distribution data (Wiyono, 11-16: 2001).
C. Time Series Analysis Time series analysis first introduced in 1970 by George EP Box and Gwilym M. Jenkis [2]. Time series is a row of observations taken
III. DISCUSSION AND RESULT
266
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 To model the stochastic dynamics contained in the observation based on the time. That represents the behavior of the electrical load time series. By making the analysis steps as follows: 1. Plot description electric power time-series data on each plant to determine the stability of the data distribution; 2. Plot description electric power time series data, based on daily time intervals on each plant get a pattern dynamic load distribution; 3. Description of the data boxplot on each plant based on the time interval for 24 hours a day at each plant to obtain grouping data and get a categorical value based on the mean and median 4. Descriptive analysis of data on each generation basis for calculating the exact average power and maximum power of each half in the daily interval; 5. Furthermore, based on the descriptive data analysis, contains a number of information modeled in a group (cluster). In this research conducted a simulation analysis of time series against the 6 plants in PJB UP Gresik in Block II and III with a capacity of 1000 MVA. Analysis showed that each plant during the period of January 1st,2009 - December 31th, 2011 shows the distribution in Figure 2. From the analysis of descriptive time series data showed a stable load. It refers to the mean and maximum power to the load distribution in table 1, which revolves around the average value of the average power per day and maximum power at peak load conditions.
267
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig 2. Electrical Load Time series plot model
As for the presentation of data using boxplot analysis on each of the power plants show the characteristics of an average every half hour in accordance with a power capacity awakened. Every generation the average load distribution ranged from clock from 7 pm to 8.30 pm except MTR 23 likes to show in figure 3. Fig 3. Boxplot analysis on each of the power plants to avreage and peak load power plants.
As for the distribution of the maximum power load demand shows variants. These indications may mean there are conditions used to supply the power plant on a network system in certain conditions. In this descriptive analysis can be summarized in table 2 below form: TABLE II
268
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 HIGHEST AVERAGE POWER AND PEAK LOAD ON THE POWER
load distribution on the 6th plant in PT. Generation Unit PJB Gresik, East Java. Results of cluster pattern in the form of histogram diagram presented in Figure 4 below.
PLANT
Average in MVA
Peak Load in MVA
Generation Unit
Hourly
MTR 20
19:00
56.555
14:00
87.016
MTR 21 22
19:00
74.501
05:30
105.700
MTR 23
05:30
44.783
03:30
54.539
MTR 30
20:30
75.377
05:30
90.900
MTR 31 32
19:00
90.785
16:30
110.700
MTR 33
19:00
48.883
07:30
56.950
Hourly
In time series analysis, cluster patterns presented in descriptive data analysis method using a histogram chart pattern. Cluster patterns are divided into 8 groups of data distribution with the highest distribution of data distribution: MTR 20 at intervals of 3 (43.91%), MTR 21, 22 at intervals of 4 (44.49%), MTR 23 at intervals of 7 (51.81 %), MTR 30 at intervals of 7 (55.94%), MTR 31, 32 at intervals of 8 (54.66%) and MTR 33 at intervals of 7 (57.82%). The data summarized in Table 3 Summary of clustering as follows:
Cluster descriptive data distribution pattern, as contained in table 3, the loading condition is negative on the interval 1. This does not apply in the generation system. To meet the real load conditions based on the distribution of the data and see the peak load conditions at each plant, the formation of the cluster pattern is made in the interval that starts from 0 MVA to 18 MVA in any multiples distribution On a cluster, the data on the 6th generation based on peak loads that occur in the system becomes 7 class interval with distribution as follows: interval 1 (0-18 MVA), interval 2 (18-36 MVA), interval 3 (36-54 MVA), interval 4 (54-72 MVA), interval 5 (72-90 MVA), interval 6 (90-108 MVA), and interval 7 (108-126 MVA). In the descriptive analysis of this data using a graphical cluster pattern forming seven cluster distribution histogram data that meets the design criteria for the distribution of electrical power to the load. The purpose of this cluster puts the distribution pattern of the data that have similar characteristics between groups in simulating the
269
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Clus ter
TABLE IV PERCENTAGE DISTRIBUTION OF DATA Distribusi Data (%) MTR 20
MTR 21 22
MTR 23
MTR 30
MTR 31 32
MTR 33
1
0.53
10.29
4.45
0.13
0.87
0.52
2
47.05
6.08
28.49
2.94
2.56
8.52
3
25.56
48.60
67.00
8.04
11.63
88.42
4
19.13
7.92
0.07
20.22
5.62
2.54
5
7.73
15.84
0.00
68.11
12.58
0.00
6
0.00
11.27
0.00
0.57
66.55
0.00
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.20
0.00
IV. CONCLUSION From the analysis of descriptive data distribution of electric power to the load at PJB Gresik plant unit can be summarized as follows 1. The pattern of the dynamics of the distribution of electrical power in each generation during the period January 1st 2009 s / d December 31, 2011 shows stable characteristics. 2. In each of the plants show a series of data distribution of electric power to average power and maximum stable power both in terms of the distributions of daily or every half hour. 3. The pattern of clusters that meet the same characteristics in the group between plants with multiple intervals of 18 MVA that meets interval ranges: for cluster 1 (0-18 MVA), cluster 2 (18-36 MVA), cluster 3 (36-54 MVA), cluster 4 (54-72 MVA), cluster 5 (7290 MVA), cluster 6 (90-108 MVA), and the cluster 7 (108 0126 MVA). 4. Distribution of data based on the largest data distribution for each plant in the cluster is given as follows: MTR 20 in cluster 2 (47.05%), MTR 21, 22 in cluster 3 (48.60%), MTR 23 in cluster 3 (67%), MTR 30 in cluster 5 (68.11%), MTR 31, 32 in cluster 6 (66.55%) and MTR 33 in cluster 3 (88.42%). 5. Distribution of interval data based on the range that satisfies generation capacity based on peak load data is MTR 31, 32 at 0.20% in the cluster to 7. REFERENCES [44] Soeprijanto, Adi, 2012, Desain Kontroller Untuk Kestabilan Dinamik Sistem Tenaga Listrik, ITS Press, Surabaya. [45] Box, G.E.P., Jenkis, G.M., and Reissel, G.C., 1994, Time Series Analysis Forecasting and Control, 3th Edition, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall. [46] Sukarna and Aswi, 2006, Analisis Deret Waktu, Andira Publisher, Makassar. [47] Cryer, J.D., 1986, Time Series Analysis. Boston Publishing Company. [48] Wei, W.W.S., 1990, Time Series Univariate and Multivariate Methods. Canada: Addison Wesley Publishing Company, Inc [49] Liao, T. Warren, 2005, "Clustering of time series data—a survey." Pattern recognition 38.11 (2005): 1857-1874., jurnal elsevier. [50] Cui, Jie, et al., 2008, "BSMART: a Matlab/C toolbox for analysis of multichannel neural time series." Neural Networks, p. 1094-1104.
Based on the data in the distribution pattern of seven clusters on each plant, MTR stations 31, 32, which meet the class interval to 7 by category of 110.700 MVA peak load. Generating side work based cluster with the character of the same electrical power distribution between plants.
270
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [51] Das, Gautam, et al., 1998, ―Rule Discovery from Time Series‖, In: KDD., p. 16-22. [52] Li, Lei; Prakash, B. Aditya, 2011, ―Time series clustering: Complex is simpler‖, Proceedings of the 28th International Conference on Machine Learning (ICML11), p. 185-192.
271
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
272
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Designing Semi Automatic Dryer Machine System to Knock Down for to Overcome Problems The Batik Creative Industries Agung Prijo Budijono1, Wahyu Dwi Kurniawan2 1
Mechanichal Engineering Departemen, Engineering Faculty, State University of Surabaya email: [email protected] 2 Mechanichal Engineering Departemen, Engineering Faculty, State University of Surabaya email: [email protected] bright with no clouds or rain. However, if cloudiness or rain drying process can take 2 times as much. In other words, during cloudy or rainy batik production is inhibited significantly this will result in the customer will often complain. To answer these problems in this study will be composed of a semi-automatic equipment batik dryer knock down system that utilizes heat transfer process. To obtain optimum drying results, the distribution of hot air and the air circulation in the drying machine is treated (controlled) so that the color and the fabric remains in good condition during the drying process. [9] The purpose of this research is the realization of a batik cloth dryer equipment is semi automatic knock down (easy disassembly), with the hope of improving the efficiency (faster drying) and continuity productivity (not disturbed by natural factors, although the weather is cloudy / rainy , the drying process can still be done) batik industry in Indonesia. To obtain optimum drying results, the temperature of the hot air and hot air circulation in the drying chamber were treated (controllable) so batik remain in good condition in the drying room. The benefits of this research include: (1) hot air drying chamber can be continuously and maintained suhunnya as desired (range 40-50 °C), because the tool is equipped Termocontrolled associated with heat sensors that are placed in the drying room. How to operate Termokontrol simply rotate the temperature control switch is directed at the choice of temperature values that have been listed; (2) the drying process will be faster because there is a forced flow of hot air from the hot air reservoir chamber so that the desired conditions of heat drying chamber immediately reached (range 40-50 ° C) and maintained; (3) is not interrupted by natural factors, the sky is overcast or rainy season because it is done in an enclosed space; (4) the kiln is a knock down so that when it is finished can be assembled and kept back; (5) the dryer is moveable (removable) to be adjusted where there is sufficient space Result conducted research fish drying by utilizing sunlight as a heat collector heat
Abstract-During the drying process of batik creative industries, there are many who simply rely on heat from the sun, either directly or indirectly. Though to get quality batik printing drying fabric is good, the process takes between 45 minutes/drying cloth each time. This situation will be reached when the sun shines bright with no clouds or rain. However, if cloudiness or rain drying process may take 2 times as much. The specific objective of this research is the realization of a batik cloth dryer appliances that are knock down (easy disassembly) so as to improve the efficiency, quality, and continuity of production is maintained batik industry. The method used in this research is the development of methods to design, manufacture and implement batik semi- automatic dryers knock down system. It is expected that the results of this study, the drying process were not disturbed by natural factors, which despite overcast skies and rainy weather, the drying process can still be carried out because the tool is designed to be knocked down so that it can be done in a closed room. This study has the following conclusions that semiautomatic batik dryer machine developed showed good performance. This is evidenced by the temperature under control at setting point ±1ocelcius thus saving fuel consumption and the drying process to be more effective and efficient. Besides this drying machine is multifunctional as it can be used for the drying process in addition to batik, example for laundy service businesses, manufacturers crackers, chips, rattan, painting and so on. Index Terms: engineering machines, dryers, automatic, creative industries, batik
I.
INTRODUCTIONS
In the face of storms multi-dimensional crisis such as this, the characteristics of Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) are more powerful than a business with a larger scale. Therefore, it's normal if the government actively moving Usaka Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) as the cogs of the national economy. Especially for Small and Medium batik, during the rainy season must have experienced obstacles and barriers in the drying process. During the drying process, many still rely on heat from the sun, it is often frequently unmet market needs. Yet to get a good drying quality, the process takes between 5 s / d 6 hours. This situation will be reached when the sun is shining
273
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 exchanger (heat exchanger) further hot air blown by a fan into a drying oven for drying fish. From this research, he states that the speed and quality of drying depends on the fan speed and airflow direction when the dryer on the material to be dried. [5] Applying the furnace three functions, namely functions frying, cooking, and dry crackers. Especially for batik cloth drying function, utilizing exhaust gas heat with convection method with no air flow heat treatment to the material to be dried. From drying results with this method, he states that the quality of the resulting chips frying can not be unfolded differently when dried using solar heat. [4] Pabis has conducted a theoretical study with mathematical modeling of drying vegetables is seen that the model is built on a solid approach. The results of the modeling approach the experimental results that this model can be used to predict the drying process other objects. Referring to some of the results of the above research and industrial needs of the importance of doing their business efficiency and improve productivity, it is no exaggeration drying technique of developmental research done by utilizing the process of heat transfer by heating from LPG stove or an electric stove. [10] To get a good quality of the drying process necessary to study the introduction. This is because the source of energy used comes from the LPG stove or an electric stove, the preliminary study that needs to be made is how hot the results of LPG stoves or electric stoves can be taken to the maximum through the process of heat transfer to the appropriate method. Furthermore, the heat that has been used successfully transferred to the drying process of batik cloth. To get quality batik cloth drying results as expected, it is first important to know characteristic diffusivity of the material to be dried. Then to measure the success of the quality of the drying process, it is simply the result can be compared with conventional drying methods. Desired quality at least equal the minimum by conventional methods Conventional methods were used, namely batik fabric that has been put in an open area by utilizing the heat of the sun as pengeringnya. This pattern can be used as a reference for drying treatment contained in the drying room design results. The treatment of the drying process are: temperature drying, hot air drying distribution, air flow rate in the drying chamber and the humidity in the drying chamber should all be in accordance with the environment as conventional drying methods. Thus the initial data is needed on the treatment process in the conventional or natural drying. The main purpose of the drying process is to reduce the water content in the shortest possible time, by using the heat to a minimum, so
as not to cause damage to the material. In the process of mass transfer and drying occurs heat transfer, mass transfer occurs due to different levels of water moving from place to place wetter lower water content, while the heat transfer is due to the difference in temperature at high temperature layer to layer temperature lower, the heat and mass transfer occur simultaneously. Number of Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) in East Java is now more than 7 million are still in pristine condition requires intensive coaching to increase productivity. Character SMEs in general is to have an informal management run by a family, mengg unakan simple technology, is followed or "follower", does not have long-term plans, and limited capital. [12] The condition causes some SMEs have low productivity. In relation to the productivity of the business, a new business can be said to be productive if the business can be carried out efficiently and effectively, or it can use a minimum of resources with results as accurate as possible. So if you want to increase the productivity of a business can be done by improving the efficiency and effectiveness of the business. [11] There are several ways that can be taken by employers to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of its business, among other things: 1) By increasing the skill or skills of employees, and 2) the updating of production equipment. The way the latter is rarely reached by small entrepreneurs. This is in addition due to capital constraints, as well as the limitations of knowledge in general have not been able to access the latest information, especially relating to the development of increasingly sophisticated production equipment. Another case in the usual way pursued by entrepreneurs who have a great (professional), they are on average rather choose how to update production equipment to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of its business. [7] Apart from the group of large employers or small employers, before determining steps / way to be taken to improve the efficiency, employers should really consider first how it would be taken so as not to actually even lose money. SMEs Competing in the grant program are small businesses that have problems as above, namely to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of efforts to improve productivity. SME Leaders also recognize that this can be done by upgrading equipment. But because it is not financially able to, as well as knowledge in the field of development of production equipment is also weak, and had no innovation to develop the equipment, it is necessary to find the right solution to solve it. [3] Indicated that the production problems faced by small and medium enterprises (SMEs)
274
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Indonesia is not suitable when solved through the application / use of machines that technologically advanced / advanced, but rather much more suited solved through the application of appropriate technology order. Because the cost of investment for application is relatively inexpensive, and mastery of technology does not require knowledge that is too high. Therefore, an appropriate action once when the execution of the program - Research in Higher Education program one output can be implemented in SMEs to help improve the efficiency and productivity of their business. [2]
based on the needs of the SME partners that are knock down. The trial drier semi-automatic system to knock down stage 1. The collecting initial data by performing the simulation of heat distribution in the room without load dryer (batik) by varying the location and configuration of pipe bursts of dry air that has been heated in a heat exchanger and then in space dryer or walls in place the thermo-hygrometer in order to obtain the temperature and humidity of data simultaneously. The output of this stage is obtained optimal layout and configuration so that the drying process of batik fabric evenly with minimal drying characteristics similar to the natural drying process; (7) the trial drier semiautomatic system to knock down stage 2. The collecting of data is done by giving a load (batik) in the drying chamber according to the capacity that has been determined. The output of this stage is expected to result batik cloth drying process characteristics at least equal to the natural drying process with a relatively short time; (8) stages of revision and evaluation of the results of experiments I and II; (9) data collection and data analysis techniques with a qualitative descriptive method.
II. METHODS The method used in this study to the stages of development of research methods of designing, manufacturing, assembly, test and implement batik dryer semi automatic knock down system with the implementation procedures are grouped into two phases. That stage of drying equipment research design batik fabrics and semi-automatic laboratory scale implementation stages of the design research equipment batik cloth dryer semi automatic in batik business units. Stages of research design batik cloth dryer equipment semiautomatic consists of: (1) data acquisition characteristics of batik cloth produced by SMEs. Techniques of data collection with interviews and observations, where the data are taken in the form of fabrics, number of colors, and the average time of natural drying batik fabrics; (2) field test (conventional batik drying process) to obtain the characteristics of batik cloth in terms of the mass transfer and heat. Of the variables measured, the desired output is to investigate the characteristics of batik cloth drying naturally using the sun's heat; (3) the design, manufacture and assembly of the heat exchanger. Data that needs to be taken is characteristic of dry air that will go into the oven should be close to the characteristics of dry air in the natural drying process primarily on the relative humidity of the dry air that will go into the room the dryer. Of measurable variables and control variables, the desired output is to determine the magnitude of the heat is absorbed by the LPG flame heating element into the dry air with the help of a blower that will be used to heat the room batik cloth in the dryer. The output of this stage will determine the appropriate setting time in the drying process in the drying chamber; (5) data acquisition characteristics of dry air from the heat transfer from the combustion products of LPG stoves in the heat exchanger. Of the variables measured, the desired output is to determine the amount of dry air generated by the heat exchangers will be used for the drying process in the drying chamber; (6) The design, manufacturing, assembly and dryers are designed
III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS Based on discussions with the SME partners, the study of heat and mass transfer, then we obtain a block diagram of a dryer and a semiautomatic batik design batik cloth dryer semi automatic knock down system with the results shown in Figure 1
Figure 1. Isometric design semi-automatic batik dryer
Figure 2. Block diagram semi-automatic batik dryer
Based on the results of the manufacturing and assembly process, the obtained batik cloth
275
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 dryer semi automatic as shown in figure 3.
Figure 3. Semi automatic batik driyer
Figure 6. Graph temperature control test results 3rd with setting point 60 oC at no load
Based on the test results fungi tool that has been done, the obtained results as shown in the picture below
Based on temperature control test results for 3 times the setting point 46ocelcius, 55ocelcius, 60ocelcius at different times (morning, afternoon, and night) can be said that the engine showed good performance. This is evidenced by the temperature under control at setting point ±1ocelcius thus saving fuel consumption and the drying process to be more effective and efficient.
Value
Temperature (oC) Humidity (%) Heavy cloth (gr) Heavy LPG (kg)
Figure 4. Graph temperature control test results 1st with setting point 46 oC at no load
Time (hour)
Gambar 7. Graph machine function test results given load Based on the test results of batik cloth drying machine semi-automatic in a given load conditions the results showed that the drying process becomes more effective. This is consistent with studies in which objective indicators drying batik fabrics 1 to 15 minutes faster when compared to conventional drying is from 45 minutes to 30 minutes.
Figure 5. Graph temperature control test results 2nd with setting point 55 oC at no load
276
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Sustainability of production is maintained. This is because the drying process were not disturbed by natural factors. Despite the overcast skies and rainy weather, the drying process can still be done because the tool is designed to be a knock down so that it can be done in a closed room. The temperature in the drying chamber can be controlled and maintained as desired, namely around 46±1°Celsius although the drying process is done in an enclosed space, because the tool is semi-automatic, equipped with a thermocouple connected to a heat sensor that is placed in the drying room. How to operate the thermocouple simply rotate the temperature control switch is directed at the choice of temperature values that are already listed. The level of humidity in the drying chamber during the drying process, can be controlled and maintained as desired and it ranged 52±1%, due to the drying chamber equipped roof windows so the air is dry, and the temperature of saturated steam in the drying chamber can circulate properly so it is not trapped in the drying chamber. Characteristics of batik fabric weight every 10-minute interval during the drying process of batik fabrics tend to decrease slowly. This is influenced by the temperature and the humidity in the drying chamber can be controlled and maintained. Characteristics of drying temperature at 10 minutes early to rise drastically (from 29 ° C to 44 ° C), this is due at the beginning of a new kiln drying process is activated so that at the beginning of drying, the temperature was measured at room temperature. Consumption of LPG gas in the drying process once at 50 grams.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9] [10]
[11]
[12]
IV. CONCLUSIONS This study has the following conclusions that semi-automatic batik dryer machine developed showed good performance. This is evidenced by the temperature under control at setting point ±1ocelcius thus saving fuel consumption and the drying process to be more effective and efficient. Besides this drying machine is multifunctional as it can be used for the drying process in addition to batik, example for laundy service businesses, manufacturers crackers, chips, rattan, painting and so on.
[1]
[13]
REFERENCES A. B. Etemoglu . M. Can A. Avei . E. Pulat. 2004. Theoretical study of combined
277
heat and mass transfer process during paper drying_ Springer-Verlag 2004 Heat Mass Transfer41: 419–427 Fuad, Ahmadi. 2001. Karakteristik Teknologi Tepat Guna balam Industri Skala Usaha Kecil dan Menengah di Jawa Timur. Papers were presented in the context of small business productivity training in Unesa. Date 26 Juli tahun 2001. BiegeI, John E. 1998. Pengendalian Produksi, Suatu Pendekatan Kuantitatif. Translete. Bandung: Tarsito. Cholik, M, Alimufi. A 2004. Aplikasi Tungku Tiga Fungsi Untuk Meningkatkan Produktivitas Produksi Pada Industri Rumah Tangga Krupuk. Final Report Implementation Program Vucer LPM – Unesa Djatmiko, Ichsani. 2005. Perencanaan Dan Performansi Dari Tubular Tube Solar Collector Pada Proses Pengeringan, Final Report Research ITS. Djatmiko, Ichsani. 2004. Studi Eksperimental Alat Pengering Yang Menggunakan Kolektor Tubular DenganVariasi Kecepatan Dan arah Aliran Udara Pengering, Final Report Research ITS. Haryono. 1999. Buku Panduan Materi KuIiah Kewirausahaan. Unipres UNESA Surabaya. Incropera, Frank P. 1996. Fundamentals Of Heat And Mass Transfer. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Kreith, Frank. 1997. Prinsip-Prinsip Perpindahan Panas. Jakarta: Erlangga. Pabis, Stanislaw. 2007. Theoretical models of vegetable drying by convection Transp Porous Med 66:77– 87, Springer Science+Business Media B.V. 2007 Sutantra, I Nyoman. 2001. Produktivitas Sistem Produksi dan Tekno/ogi Papers were presented in the context of small business productivity training in Unesa. Date 26 Juni 2001. Sutiono. 2001. Produktivitas UKM di Jawa Timur. Papers were presented in the context of small business productivity training in Unesa. Date 26 Juni 2001. Peng, W. E. A. Smith And A. De Ville 1999. Airflow and temperature distribution in two-dimensional drying bins, Journal of Engineering Mathematics 36: 241–254, 1999.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
278
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Design Simulation on the Management of Water Pumps for Flood Control using Web Server and Arduino Debby Oktavia G1, Yulius Hari1, Arif Budijanto2 1
Informatics Department, Widya Kartika University Sutorejo Prima Utara II/1, Surabaya [email protected], [email protected] 2
Electronic Department, Widya Kartika University [email protected]
The author conducted a field survey by visiting some of the pump house located on East Surabaya. Information obtained from the survey of the field is in every house there is a person who is assigned pump keeping the pump house. But the guard has another job and if deemed no rain then the guard will leave the pump housing so that the water level cannot be monitored. At the time of site surveys also found that guard sleeping during working hours and so cannot know the status of the water level. Especially at this time, predictions are often less accurate rainfall where rain often fell abruptly. Measurement of water level in the pump house is also measured manually by looking at the water level limit. At each house, water pump is turned on manually via a button on the machine. With the information obtained, the researcher will design a management system that will overcome the water pump water level in the pump house. This was done by means of water pump activates automatically when the water level reaches a certain status. Water pump automatic deactivation can occur when the water has reached normal height. Measurement of water level in this simulation using a sensor that is connected to the Arduino microcontroller [2] that will connect to the server and the water pump. Making the simulation uses two pieces of container that the first container is assumed as the pump house and the second container as rivers with strong currents or water catchment areas. In short the process that occurs in this simulation is the removal of water at a certain status which is at the primary container to the second container to avoid the main container overflowing. The aim of this research is to create a simulation of the pump house management system based on the situation in Surabaya. Therefore this simulation can be reflect and implement to a real pump house, to help to mitigate the flooding impact and control the flood based on the water level.
Abstract - The water level in the pump house that already exists in urban areas are not monitored well and caused flood. Water pump management in the pump house is very useful in speeding up the handling when the water level is already high in order to not caused flooding. Pump house itself is a container while the volume of water that is located in urban areas are piped to the river or sea. The existence of automatic application makes the water level in the pump house can be directly handled as the Web Server that is connected to the Arduino microcontroller which would give the order for the water pump switch on automatically. There is an application as a backup when not working automatically with the help of an operator to run it. The status of the water level is divided into 3 status normal status, standby status and highest status is the warning status. There is also an alarm as a warning that sounds when the status of the water level is at Alert status. The data of water level, the water status, the status of the pump and tool status can also be monitored in real-time through Web Server application. Index Terms - Pump House Management, Flood Warning System, Water Altitude Status, Remote control, Arduino.
I. INTRODUCTION In the modern era, and advanced many new innovations that help the human work. Innovation is usually associated with the discovery of new and renewal that requires technology which helps man to implement his idea into a masterpiece. With the increasingly sophisticated technology, the authors will design a management simulation water pump in the pump house. This study is based on Tempo's website on 20 December 2014 [1] noted that of the many natural disasters that occurred in Indonesia, floods are the most frequent natural disaster occurs. Flood itself often occur in Indonesia, especially in big cities like Jakarta and Surabaya. Torrential rain that will result in the capacity of water in rivers flowing into the pump house will overflow. As a result of the overflow of water inside the pump house will disrupt community activities around the pump house.
279
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 II. RESEARCH METHODS A.
disconnected. Operators are also able to provide a monthly report as the report period for the boss. Working system of simulations that are Server which serves as the manager of all orders[5]. The server will turn on and turn off automatically when the water pump Ultrasonic Sensor connected to an Arduino Uno transmit data water level status. Ultrasonic Sensor serves as a water level gauge that sends and receives sound waves reflected back. Ultrasonic sensor uses an ultrasonic waves which have a longitudinal characteristic and usually works in a frequency above 20 KHz. Ultrasonic waves have a characteristic to create a particle motion with the same medium aptitude toward the same longitudinal direction, thus can create the medium aptitude became strain and stress [7]. The ultrasonic wave can move through the air with the speed 344 Meters/second. Ultrasonic sensor work with sending ultrasonic waves to an object and catch the waves back, differentiate time between each waves can determine the distance between the sensor and the object. For further information about how the sensor can determine the distance can be formulated as follows:
Methodology
Simulations were designed in this study is to manage the water pump. This simulation uses two pieces of container that simulated a pump house and rivers with strong currents or water catchment areas. The water level is measured by the ultrasonic sensor that will divide into 3 pieces status. The third status is the status Normal, standby status and the last is the Alert status. Alert status is the top point of the water levels that were located closest to the Ultrasonic Sensor. The simulation also a water pump that will move the water that is on the main container to be moved to the second container. There are two water pumps that will work when the water level shows the Ready state and Alert status. The first water pump will turn on when the water level status is in standby status. While the second water pump will turn on when the water level reaches the status Alert status. All of the running system is controlled at the server. The server contained within the PHP programming language command automation in the activation and deactivation of the water pump [3]. As there is a manual backup activation and deactivation of pump water through applications that can be accessed by Operator. If the altitude reaches Alert status and the standby status Ultrasonic Sensors connected to the Arduino sends the data to the server. The operator can know the status of the level after Server obtain elevation data from the Arduino [4]. All data on the status of the water level, the status of pump performance and the status of the device will be stored in the server. There is an alarm that will sound continuously when the water level is at Alert status B.
(1) Where:
S is the distance between object (meter) V is the speed of ultrasonic waves through an object (Km/s) tIn is the time differentiate in seconds between sending and receive of the ultrasonic waves.
0
System Design
10 cm
sekat Partition
3 cm >= 20 cm 18 - < 20 cm
<18 cm
Water air permukaan level
Fig. 1 System Design Water Pump Management Simulation.
From the figure 1, can be explained as follows: There is an operator that takes action when there is a warning as the water level reached and the alert status Alert status. Operators can also monitor the performance status of the water pump in the pump house, the problem in the transmission apparatus or the connection to the device is
38 wadah utama Main container
Fig. 2. Water Elevation Modeling.
From the Figure 2: Water elevation modeling, is important aspect how the sensor can measure and
280
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 determine the status of water level. Suppose height of the container is 28 cm. Sensors placed on the container at a distance of 10 cm. There are three status contained in the simulation. Alert status has the shortest distance to the sensor but the calculation of height values greater Alert status is equal to 20 cm. Standby status altitude value is 18 to less than 20 cm. while the value for the status Normal height is smaller than 18 cm. There are two actors in this simulation which is operator and supervisor. The task of operator is able to see the status of the water level of the server so that the operator know the latest status of the water level at each pump house. As a backup operator can activate the water pump through the application. When the status of the altitude alert pump1 turned on, when the Alert status pompa1 and pump2 turned on in order to discharge faster performance when using two pumps. Operators can also shut off the water pump first and second through the application after seeing the status of the water level is at Normal status. Operators can also view the status of the water pump performance, status tool connected or not connected. Automation of life or death of a water pump also works after the server gets the data about water levels. Supervisor task can only see the report period in the Server so it can determine the time when the water level reaches some status. The report also contains the status of the tool and status of the performance of the water pump in the pump house. These report will help the supervisor in decision making process thus can help to determine whenever those area need another pump or the strategy how they operate the pump.
Fig. 3. Water pump and sensor in aquarium
Fig. 4 Circuit design using arduino and relay board
Figure 3, can be explained as follows: In this series of water pumps will be placed in the aquarium to function as the transfer of water from the main container to be moved to another container. In the simulation takes two pieces of aquarium pump is placed next. At the aquarium pump added water pipes and water hoses to the water removal process. Furthermore, from figure 4, can be described as follows: In this series there are two Relay Board as a water pump switch. At Relay are NC (Normally Close), Com (Command) and NO (Normally Open) [6]. NC normally as Active Low while NO to Active High. Installation in this circuit, the Relay1 and Com on Relay2 combined. Relay1 NC and NC Relay2 not connected to anything. NO Relay1 connected with StopContact1 while NO Relay2 connected with StopContact2. Pin contained in Relay consists of 4 ie VCC pin, pin Gnd (Ground), pin IN1 and IN2 pin. The fourth pin located on the Relay will be connected with the female-male jumper cable to pin contained in Arduino. In the manufacture of circuit simulation at the VCC pin Relay connected with Arduino 5V pin. Pin relay and Gnd pin connected to the Arduino. Relay in1 pin is connected to pin 6 in Arduino. Relay for In2 pin connected to bread board that has been interconnected with the pin to 5 Arduino and
III. IMPLEMENTATION AND DISCUSSION A.
Implementation The Implementation tools used in this simulations using several parts assembled into one. Some sections are: 1. The series of Arduino 2. The series Ethernet Shield 3. The circuit Relay Board and Stop-Contact 4. The series of Ultrasonic Sensors 5. The circuit Pump Furthermore to give some illustration of the simulation design can be present in Figure 3 and 4 respectively.
281
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 positive pin so that the workings Buzzer as In2 Relay. Lastly, the implementation of the system in the form of display on each page which is an application for running the simulation. There is the home page, the page manual pump operation, pump status page, water level status page, status tool, report page and the login page that can be accessed by the operator. While pages that can be accessed by only the login page supervisor and supervisor period reports page. The screenshot of the web system can be shown on figure 5.
like stable internet connection and a computer in each pump house will be another issue. Obviously this simulation model can be expanded to various situation and may have different result in each implementation. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 5. Web interface for water level monitoring
On this page there is the status of the water level will be updated continuously shows the value of the water level, time and status of water. Data value of the water level, time and status of water levels that appear on this page as much as 20 data. Data status information will change the color of the water level when the water level is at Alert status (red) and standby status (yellow). To be able to run automatically obliged click the article the automatic mode so that the process can be run automatically. B.
Discussion
The conclusion that can be drawn from this simulation is as follows:
1. this simulation can help to manage the pump automation in pump house to prevent the flooding 2. Data related to the water level, time, duration and water status is automatically saved thus can help in determining the prediction of the flood period. 3. Automation and manual control can help the operator to operate or to stabilize the water level quickly. 4. This simulation can be a solution for automation in pump house without any operator. From the simulation result shown a good response, but for the implementation maybe still need a lot thing to consider, especially the facilities
282
Tempo (2012). Retrieved 30 December 2014, from http://www.tempo.co/read/news/2014 Arduiono Uno. (n.d.). Retrieved April 23, 2015, from https://www.arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardUno. Bruegge, Bern & Allen, H. Dutoit. (2010). ObjectOriented Software Engineering. United States of America: Pearson Kadir, Abdul. (2013). Panduan Praktis Mempelajari Aplikasi Mikrokontroler dan Pemperogramannya Menggunakan Arduino. Yogyakarta: Penerbit Andi. Oktofani, Y., Arief, A., & Aswin, S.. Sistem Pengendalian Suhu Dan Kelembaban Berbasis Wireless Embedded System. Retrieved May 22, 2015, from https://ptiik.ub.id/ Songle Relay. (n.d.). Retrieved June 20, 2015, from https://www.ghielectronics.com/downloads/man/2008414 1716341001RelayX1.pdf Ultrasonic Ranging Module HC - SR04. (n.d). Retrieved April 9, 2015, from www.Elecfreaks.com
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Design and Simulation of Mini Garden Fuzzy Microirrigation System Diana Rahmawati1, Kunto Aji1, Heri Setiawan2 1
Electrical Engineering University of Trunojoyo Madura JL. Raya Telang PO Box 2 Kamal Bangkalan Madura [email protected], , [email protected] 2 Electonics Department of Indonesian Army Technology Assessment Agencies 2 Po Box 42 Malang 2 [email protected]
and irrigation scheduled based on canopy temperature distribution of the plant, which was acquired with thermal imaging. In addition, other systems have been developed to schedule irrigation of crops and optimize water use by means of a crop water stress index (CWSI).[1] In some of the irrigation system irrigation scheduling is achieved by monitoring soil, water status with tension meters under drip irrigation by the automation controller system in sandy soil. It is very important for the farmer to maintain the content in the field. In this the design of a Arduino based drip irrigation mechanism is proposed. Irrigation system controls valves by using automated controller allows the farmer to apply the right amount of water at the right time, regardless of the availability of the labour to turn valves. Some irrigation systems are used to implement efficient irrigation scheme for the field having different crops. The system can be further enhanced by using fuzzy logic controller. The fuzzy logic scheme is used to increase the accuracy of the measured value and assists in decision making . In this project, Arduino will be interfaced with sensors such as Temperature Sensor and Soil moisture Hygrometer which will help in monitoring and also will help to control the output devices. Depending upon the data collected, many control methods are used to provide the plants with the proper conditions for the plants better growth. Objective of our project is:
Abstract - Automated minigardens have become
widely popular among professional minigardens caretakers and hobbyists alike. With the advent of newly affordable technologies such as microcontrollers and environmental sensors, engineers and hobbyists have devised ways to cut plant maintenance to a minimum. While some automated minigardens require little to no additional caretaking, others are simplistic and control only limited functions such as watering. The drip or trickle irrigation is a type of modern irrigation technique that slowly applies small amounts of water to part of plant root zone. Water is supplied frequently, often daily to maintain favorable soil moisture condition and prevent moisture stress in the plant with proper use of water resources. The project makes the irrigation automated. Arduino controller that will be used in this project. A 16×2 LCD is connected to the arduino, which displays the humidity level and ambient temperature. It supports scientifically irrigation according to real need of plants, thus improving the efficiency of water resource consumption. This is done using fuzzy inference system to calculate the sufficient amount of water. Keywords : microirrigation, fuzzy, MATLAB, arduino
To optimize the growth of plants. Use of module ensures the system to be low cost and low power consumable system.
I. INTRODUCTION Agriculture uses 85% of available freshwater resources worldwide, and this percentage will continue to be dominant in water consumption because of population growth and increased food demand. There is an urgent need to create strategies based on science and technology for sustainable use of water, including technical, agronomic, managerial, and institutional improvements .There are many systems to achieve water savings in various crops, from basic ones to more technologically advanced ones. For instance, in one system plant water status was monitored
In this paper, an efficient irrigation system is proposed based on the required irrigation quantity using fuzzy inference methodology. The Fuzzy Logic Toolbox of Matlab (MathWorks) was used to implement the fuzzy logic system. Whole irrigation process is mainly based upon above specified physical parameters. Since these parameters are physical and changes with time;
283
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 consequently amount of water being used for irrigation also changes. The irrigation system explicated in this paper exploit closed loop control. The control unit continuously receives feed back from different sensors placed in the field. It enables control unit to update its data about important system parameters. The control unit decides how much water tap to open, in accordance with the data collected from sensors and predefined parameters(depending upon the crop, weather conditions etc.) The major parameters that determine the irrigation process are: • type of growth; • status of the growth (height, depth of roots); • leaf coverage; • kind of soil and saltiness; • water budget (economy or normal irrigation). Therefore, the input parameters that are used by the system are: soil (ground) humidity; temperature; radiation; wind speed; air humidity. The output parameters are: opening/closing the valves for water and/or fertilizer, and adjusting their amounts in combination[2]. II. System Modelling 2.1 Evapotranpiration Model[3,4,5,6]: Penman-Monteith equation is a combination equation that has generally been accepted as a scientifically sound formulation for estimation of reference evapotranspiration (ETo). This equation is expressed as combined function of radiation, maximum and minimum temperature, vapor pressure, and wind speed. After the Penman method is updated by FAO in May 1990, the Penman Monteith equation is written as the following:
for a furnace would start with: "If the temperature is too high, reduce the fuel to the furnace. If the temperature is too low, increase the fuel to the furnace." Measurements from the real world (such as the temperature of a furnace) are converted to values between 0 and 1[7]. 2.3 Arduino Arduino is an open-source platform used for building electronics projects. Arduino consists of both a physical programmable circuit board (often referred to as a microcontroller) and a piece of software, or IDE (Integrated Development Environment) that runs on your computer, used to write and upload computer code to the physical board [8, 9]. 2.4 Arduino UNO
Fig. 1 Arduino Uno The Arduino Uno is a microcontroller board based on the ATmega328 (datasheet). It has 14 digital input/output pins (of which 6 can be used as PWM outputs), 6 analog inputs, a 16 MHz crystal oscillator, a USB connection, a power jack, an ICSP header, and a reset button. It contains everything needed to support the microcontroller; simply connect it to a computer with a USB cable or power it with a AC-to-DC adapter or battery to get started. The Uno differs from all preceding boards in that it does not use the FTDI USB-toserial driver chip. Instead, it features the Atmega8U2 programmed as a USB-to-serial converter. 2.5 Sensors Monitoring and controlling of a mini garden environment involves sensing the changes occurring inside it which can influence the rate of growth in plants. The parameters which are of importance are the temperature, humidity, moisture content in the soil, the illumination etc. inside the mini garden which affect the photosynthetic and transpiration processes. Since all these parameters are : 2.4.1 Soil Moisture Hygrometer Soil moisture sensor measure the water content in soil. A soil moisture probe is made up of multiple soil moisture sensors. Since analytical measurement of free soil moisture requires removing a sample and drying it to extract moisture, soil moisture sensors measure some other property, such as electrical resistance, dielectric constant, or interaction with neutrons, as a proxy for moisture content. 2.4.2 Digital Humidity and Temperature Sensor This is a multifunctional sensor) that gives you temperature and relative humidity information at
(1) Where ETo is reference evapotranspiration [mm day-1], Rn is net radiation at the crop surface [MJ m-2 day-1], G is soil heat flux density [MJ m-2 day-1], T is mean daily air temperature at 2 m height [°C], u2 is wind speed at 2 m height [m s-1], es is saturation vapour pressure [kPa], ea actual vapour pressure [kPa], es - ea is saturation vapour pressure deficit [kPa], ∆ is slope vapour pressure curve [kPa °C-1], γ is psychrometric constant [kPa °C-1]. 2.2 Fuzzy Logic Fuzzy logic is a form of many-valued logic that deals with approximate, rather than fixed and exact reasoning. Fuzzy logic is an attempt to apply the easy design of logic controllers to the control of complex continuously varying systems. Basically, a measurement in a fuzzy logic system can be partly true, that is if yes is 1 and no is 0, a fuzzy measurement can be between 0 and 1. The rules of the system are written in natural language and translated into fuzzy logic. For example, the design
284
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 the same time. It utilizes a DHT11 sensor that can meet measurement needs of general purposes. It provides reliable readings when environment humidity condition in between 20% RH and 90% RH, and temperature condition in between 0°C and 50°C, covering needs in most home and daily applications that don't contain extreme conditions. [10]
Fig 4. Membership Function of Output
III. System Design 3.1 Estimation of Evapotranspiration A simple ET0 prediction system is developed based on FIS using Matlab. The input variables of fuzzy system are the weather parameters, which are: air temperature, air humidity, and wind speed. The output variable is ET0; Figure 2 shows the proposed fuzzy logic system for computing ET0.
Fig 5. Part of the fuzzy rule table Fuzzy rule table is generated after setting the membership function. Part of these numerous rules is shown in Figure 5. There are 112 rule for this case.
Fig 2. Fuzzy Logic System For Computing ET0 The universes of discourse of input variable Temp are {8, 15, 22, 29, 35}. Its fuzzy language values are {NL (very cold), NM (cold), ZO (moderate), PM (hot) and PB (very hot)}. The universes of discourse of input variable Humidity are {25, 33, 42, 79, 95}. Its fuzzy language values are {NL (very dry), NM (dry), ZO (moderate), PM (wet) and PB (very wet)}. The universes of discourse of input variable Wind are {172, 198, 225, 251.5, 277}. Its fuzzy language values are {NL (very slow), NM (slow), ZO (moderate), PM (fast) and PB (very fast)}. Membership functions of input variables are shown in Figure 3. The universes of discourse of output variable ET0 are {1.19, 2.19, 3.45, 4.43, 9.28, 7.41, 10.13}. Its fuzzy language values are {vSmall (very small), small (small), medium (moderate), pHigh (high) and vHigh (very high)}.
3.2 Estimation of Irrigation Quantity Implementation Based on FIS, net irrigation prediction system is developed using Matlab. The input variables of fuzzy system are: ET0, the percentage ratio of depletion in soil moisture, as shown in Figure 6.
Fig 6. Fuzzy Logic System For Computing Irrigation
Fig 7. Membersip function of input to calculate irrigation
Fig 3. Membership function of input
285
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig 8. Membership function of output to calculate irrigation
Fig 10. ET0 fuzzy predicting surfaces
Fig 9. Fuzzy rule for irrigation Fuzzy rule table is generated after setting the membership function. Part of these numerous rules is shown in Figure 9. There are 15 rule for this case.
Fig 11. Irrigation fuzzy predicting surfaces V. Conclusion The prototype can :
IV. Simulation Result Based on the fuzzy rule table, a surface plot of ET0 fuzzy prediction can be obtained, as shown in Figure 10. It shows that ET0 is gradually increased with the increasing of air temperature, and wind speed. In addition, it is decreased with the increment of relative humidity. Simulation results show that FIS is an accurate efficient tool for predicting and controlling irrigation amount. Fuzzy logic maps the imprecise variability in weather conditions to appropriate amount of irrigation needed to be applied. The fuzzy reasoning result for predicting net irrigation is shown in Figure 10. It shows that the quantity of supplied irrigation water is increased rapidly with any increment in evapotranspiration. Moreover, Figure 11 shows that crop is irrigated, if and only if, the soil moisture depletion ratio reaches the specified depletion value. This value is supposed to be 50% of the total available water. Otherwise, if the depletion ratio was small, the soil still has a sufficient amount of water. Hence, crop does not need to be irrigated.
improve water use To give the crops the amount of water that is actually required for proper development. Frees human resource from repetitive tasks having an autonomous system able to monitor soil moisture conditions and enable/disable the mechanism irrigation when needed. REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
286
D. PALLAVI, DR. B. L. MALLESWARI, Micro Irrigation using GPRS, International Journal of Scientific Engineering and Technology Research, Vol.04, Issue.24, July-2015 Bahat, M., G. Inbar, O. Yaniv and M. Schneider,2000. A fuzzy irrigation controller system. Engineering Applications of Artificial Intelligence, 13: 137-145. P. Javadi Kia, A. Tabatabaee Far, M. Omid, R. Alimardani and L. Naderloo. Intelligent Control Based Fuzzy Logic for Automation of Greenhouse Irrigation System and Evaluation in Relation to Conventional Systems. World Applied Sciences Journal 6 (1): 16-23, 2009 ISSN 1818-4952. Hatfield, J. I. 1990. Methods of estimating evapotranspiration. In: Stewart, B. A., & Nielsen, D. R. (editors) Irrigation of Agricultural Crops: Agronomy 30. American Society of Agronomy. Madison. Richard, G.A., S.P. Luis, R. Dirk and S Martin, 2006. FAO Irrigation and Drainage Paper, No. 56: Crop Evapotranspiration. Alizadeh, A., 2006. Soil water-plant relation ship, Astane Ghodse Razavi.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [7]
Arduino-its history, products, information, microcontrollers, controlling of output devices, retrieved from http://www.arduino.cc/en/main/arduinoBoardUno [8] Information on different types of control system, Retrieved from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ Control_system [9] An Automated Greenhouse Control System Using Arduino Prototyping Platform by Jonathan A. Enokela Australian Journal of Engineering Research [10] Shailendra et.al., Greenhouse Automation and Control System, Advances in Engineering [11] Mousa, Amthal et.al., Fuzzy based Decision Support Model for Irrigation System Management, International Journal of Computer Applications (0975 – 8887) Volume 104 – No.9, October 2014
287
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
288
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Design And Implementation Of Embedded System For LPG Gas Leakage Detection Using PID Control System Kunto Aji1, Miftahul Ulum2, 1
Department Of Electrical Engineerin, Faculty Of Technic, Trunojoyo University Telang Kamal Bangkalan Madura [email protected] 2
Telang Kamal Bangkalan Madura [email protected]
Abstract - Safety plays a major role in today‘s world and it is necessary that good safety systems are to be implemented in places of education and work. This work modifies the existing safety model installed in industries and this system also be used in homes and offices. The main objective of the work is designing microcontroller based toxic gas detecting and alerting system. The hazardous gases like LPG and propane were sensed using MQ-6 gas sensor and displayed each and every second in the LCD display. The MQ-6 sensor has great sensitivity and rapid response time. This sensor can also beused to sense other gases like iso-butane, propane and even cigarette smoke. The output of the sensor goes LOW as soon as the sensor senses any gas leakage in the atmosphere. This is detected by the microcontroller and buzzer is turned on. After a delay of few milliseconds, the exhaust fan is also turned on for throwing the gas out which is controlled using PID control system.
But the current systems available are not so portable and are costly and difficult to implement. So an embedded system is designed using ATMEGA16 Microcontroller, for the purpose of detection of hazardous gas leakage, which in turn avoids the endangering of human lives. The hazardous gases like LPG and propane were considered here. If these hazardous gases level exceeds normal level that is LPG>1000ppm or Propane>10000ppm then an alarm is generated immediately, and an exhaust fan is also turned on in order to reduce the concentration of LPG gasses, which leads to faster diffusion of emergency situation. The system is affordable and can be easily implement in the chemical industries and in residential area which is surrounded by the chemical industries or plants, to avoid endangering of human lives. The system also supports to provide real-time monitoring of concentration of the gases which presents in the air. As this method is automatic the information can be given in time such that the endangering of human lives can be avoided.. A. Related Work In the year of 2008, Y.J. jung, Y.K lee and D.G. lee, Air Pollution Monitoring System Based On Geo Sensor Network‖, the paper focuses on, Intelligent residential burglar alarm, emergency alarm, fire alarm, toxic gas leakage remote automatic sound alarm and remote control system, which is based on 89c51 single chip computer. The system can perform an automatic alarm, which calls the police hotline number automatically. It can also be a voice alarm and shows alarm occurred address. This intelligent security system can be used control the electrical power remotely through telephone [2]. In the year of 2010, R. Al - Ali and Imran Zulkarnaen, ―A Mobile GPRS – Sensor Array For Air Pollution Monitoring ‖, this paper focuses on the wireless monitoring system, because the wireless remote monitoring system has more and more application, a remote monitoring system based on SMS through GSM. Based on the overall architecture of the system, the hardware and
Keywords –LPG gas, PID control system, MQ-6 (gas sensor), Gas leakage detection
I. INTRODUCTION The increase in the development of technology and the human race, we failed to take care about the surroundings in which we live in. Thus we polluted the environment and thereby reducing the quality of the place we live. Even though there are several aspects of pollution such as soil, air and water pollution, out of these air pollution acts as the serious aspect as the other can detected visually and by taste, but the polluted air cannot be detected as it can be odorless, tasteless and colorless. Hence there is a growing demand for the environmental pollution monitoring and control systems. In the view of the ever-increasing pollution sources with toxic chemicals, these systems should have the facilities to detect and quantify the sources rapidly. Toxic gases are one that causes serious health impacts, but are also used in industries in large quantities. These gases have to be monitored; such that increase in the normal level of them could be known and proper precaution measures can be taken [1].
289
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 software architecture of the system is designed. In this system, the remote signal is transmitted through GSM network. The system includes two parts which are the monitoring centre and the remote monitoring station. The monitoring centre consists of a computer and a TC35 communication module for GSM. The computer and the TC35 are connected by RS232. The remote monitoring station consist of a TC35 communication module for GSM, a MSP430F149 MCU, a display unit, sensors and a data gathering and processing unit. The software for the monitoring center and the remote monitoring station were designed using VB [3]. In the year of 2010, Ali Asghar Nazari Shirehjini, Abdulsalam Yassine, and Shervin Shirmohamma Visan, ―An RFID-Based Position and Orientation Measurement System for Mobile Objects in Intelligent Environments”, this paper focuses on, a low cost automotive localization system using RFID and GSM-SMS services, which provides the position of the vehicle on the driver‘s or owner‘s mobile phone as a short message (SMS) on his request. The system can be interconnected with the car alarm system which alerts the owner, on his mobile phone, about the events that occurs with his car when it is parked. The system is composed by a RFID receiver, a microcontroller and a GSM phone. In additional the system can be settled for acquiring and transmitting the information, whenever requested about automobile status and alerts the user about the vehicle started engine. The system can be used as a low cost solution for automobile position localizing as well as in car tracking system application [4] .
Fig. 1 Diagram Block Of The System
II. HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION The block diagram of the hardware implementation of the entire system is as shown in the Figure1. In this circuit used MQ-6 sensor for gas leakage detection. MQ-6 sensor composed by micro AL2O3 ceramic tube, Tin Dioxide (SnO2) sensitive layer, measuring electrode and heater are fixed into a crust made by plastic and stainless steel net. The heater provides necessary work conditions for work of sensitive components. The enveloped MQ-6 has 6 pin, 4 of them are used to fetch signals, and other 2 are used for providing heating current. Here MQ-6 sensor works on basics 0of combustion process, and output is given in variable voltage form, so, when LPG gas is leakage voltage at the output pin of MQ-6 is increased and we use IC2 (Op-amp LM324) as a comparator for compare the LPG leakage with respect to normal condition. Output of comparator is fed to IC1 microcontroller (ATMEGA16) and corresponding coding LCD is display gas leakage and give another instruction to driver circuit to control speed of exhaust fan. The main components of the system are :
B. Block Diagram Initially, the microcontroller detect signal from sensor and display on the LCD . Then if there is any gas leakage in the atmosphere it is detected by the gas sensor unit using MQ-6 sensor. After the sensor unit detects the gas leakage, a signal is sent to the ADCunit of the microcontroller which then sends activation signal to other external devices connected to it such as buzzer, and exhaustfan. The exhaust fan is drived using PID control system, so rotation speed of exhaust fan is synchronized to the level of LPG gas concentration. Blok diagram of the system shown in figure 1.
1. ATMEGA16 microcontroller 2. MQ – 6 Gas sensor 3. LCD A. ATMEGA 16 Microcontroler The ATMEGA16 (founded by ATMEL) is a CMOS-FLASH based High-performance 8-bit RISC Microcontroller. This powerful (200 nanosecond instruction execution) yet easy-toprogram (only 35 single word instructions) microcontroller packs ATMEGA16 architecture into a 40 pin package as shown in fig 2. The microcontroler features 256 bytes of EEPROM data memory, self-programming, an ICD, 2 Comparators, 8 channels of 10-bit Analog-toDigital converter, 2 capture/compare/PWM functions, the synchronous serial port can be configured as either 3-wire Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI™) or the 2-wire Inter-Integrated
290
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Circuit (I²C™) bus and a Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART). All of these features make it ideal for more advanced level A/D applications in automotive, industrial, appliances and consumer applications. Alternating current differ from DC in the direction of electron flow , first in one direction for a short time , then reverse direction and flow again in opposite direction for short time . The flow of electrons in one direction and then in another direction is called a cycle of AC. The number of cycles occur in one second of time is called ―Cycles/Second‖. In our country the standard power line frequency is 50 Hz [5].
Structure and configuration of MQ-6 gas sensor is (Configuration A or B), sensor composed by micro AL2O3 ceramic tube, Tin Dioxide (SnO2) sensitive layer, measuring electrode and heater are fixed into a crust made by plastic and stainless steel net. The heater provides necessary work conditions for work of sensitive components. The enveloped MQ-6 has 6 pin, 4 of them are used to fetch signals, and other 2 are used for providing heating current. In order to increase the accuracy of the MQ – 6 gas sensor so the sensor is completed with chamber[6].
C. LCD Display A liquid crystal display (LCD) is a flat panel display, electronic visual display, or video display that uses the light modulating properties of liquid crystals (LCs). LCs do not emit light directly. They are used in a wide range of applications, including computer monitors, television, instrument panels, aircraft cockpit displays, signage, etc. They are common in consumer devices such as video players, gaming devices, clocks, watches, calculators, and telephones.
Fig. 2 ATMEGA16 Pin Configuration
B. MQ – 6 Gas Sensor
Fig. 5 LCD Pinout Configuration
LCDs have replaced cathode ray tube (CRT) displays in most applications. They are available in a wider range of screen sizes than CRT and plasma displays, and since they do not use phosphors, they cannot suffer image burn-in. LCDs are, however, susceptible\to image persistence. LCDs are more energy efficient and offer safer disposal than CRTs. Its low electrical power consumption enables it to be used in battery-powered electronic equipment. It is an electronically modulated optical device made up of any number of segments filled with liquid crystals and arrayed in front of a light source (backlight) or reflector to produce images in color or monochrome. The most flexible ones use an array of small pixels. The earliest discovery leading to the development of LCD technology, the discovery of liquid crystals, dates from 1888. By 2008, worldwide sales of televisions with LCD screens had surpassed the sale of CRT units. LCDs available in two models: Character LCD and Graphics LCD. The character LCD displays ASCII values and graphics LCD displays graphics. Character LCDs are available in
Fig. 3 MQ – 6 Gas Sensor Pin Configuration
Fig. 4 MQ – 6 Gas Sensor With Chamber
MQ – 6 gas sensor is used in gas leakage detecting equipment in family and industry, are suitable for detecting of LPG, iso-butane, propane, LNG, avoid the noise of alcohol and cooking fumes and cigarette smoke as shown in fig 3.
291
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 various kinds of models. No. Of characters Lines: 8 1, 16 1, 16 2, 164, 20 4, 40 4,… Dots Dots: 122 32, 128 64, 240 128, 320 240… Color: Yellow, Green, Gray, Blue….Graphics LCDs are also available with different sizes and colors[6].
In this formula, P(t)-output signal of regulator; e(t)-the deviation signal of regulator, which is equal to the error between the measured value and the given value; KP-the proportion coefficient of regulator; TI-the integral time of regulator; TD-the differential time of regulator.
III. SOFTWARE IMPLEMENTATION
A. PID Control System Algorithm PID control based on the deviation calculates of the importation according to the proportion, integral and differential. The results of operation are exported as a control. PID control system for the basic structure program consists of the feedback principle, which is shown in Figure 6.
Fig. 6 Element Of PID
Fig. 8 Flowchart Software Implementation
IV. RESULT AND DISCUSSION
Fig. 7 Block diagram of control system
On this system, PID is used to control speed rotation of exhaust. Setting value of the PID algorithm is set according to the condition of MQ – 6 sensor as shown in figure 7. According to the block diagram, error signal is the signal get from comparison between set point and process variabel. Set point value is set when MQ – 6 is on normal condition as shown in fig 8. In practical applications, the structure of PID can be changed flexibly in accordance with the characteristics of the object and control requirements. Some parts of PID, such as proportion (P) regulation, proportion-integral (PI) regulation, proportion-integral-differential (PID), etc., can be taken to compose control rules. Especially in the computer control system, they can be more flexibly used, in order to give full play to the role of the computer. In stimulation system, the formula of PID can be written as follow [7]: (1)
Fig. 9 Design Of Testing Room
Fig. 10 Realization Design Of Testing Room
A. System Realization System can be tasted by using testing room. This testing room is a testing facility to test the working of the system as a whole. Testing room has a size
292
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 of 24 cm x 30 cm x 45 cm and consist of several parts , including parts for chamber of the sensor , the part as the exhaust fan , and part as a place of the control system circuit ( microcontroller , power supply , motor driver air conditioning , and a buzzer ) as shown on fig 9 and fig 10 .
equal to 940 rpm . And the exhaust fan rotation speed will decrease in proportion to the reduced levels of LPG gas . From the results of these tests it is known that the system can eliminate the LPG gas levels detected within 45 second. But to get back to normal conditions the system takes about 17 second.
B. Testing Of Sensor Response In Detecting LPG Gas Level
D. Comparison PID Control with Logic Control Here are the data concerning the test results in the control logic in controlling the speed rotation of an exhaust fan to remove gas levels in the test chamber. From the table 3, it can be observed using control logic process gas reductions in the testing room relatively quickly that the 15 second time with a motor speed of 940 rpm . However, LPG gas levels do not disappear completely , but still leaving the rest so as to eliminate the LPG gas in
How to determine the level of LPG gas that is detected by the sensor by using an equality . Based on data from the sensor specifications MQ-6 stating that MQ-6 sensor has the ability to detect levels of LPG gas at a maximum of 2000 ppm . It is meant for the maximum value of LPG gas,the output voltage of the sensor will indicate a value of 5 volts TABLE I RESPONSE MQ – 6 SENSOR TO THE GAS LEVEL
C. Testing Of PID Control In the PID control testing will be observed the effect of the use of PID control to regulate the speed of exhaust fan rotation in order to reduce LPG gas contained . In the PID control testing will be observed exhaust fan rotation speed which is the output of the PID controller , and the exhaust fan rotation speed will be compared to the rate of reduction in LPG gas levels in the testing room .
ADC Value
V Sensor (volt)
LPG Gas Level (ppm)
Resistamce (kΩ)
740
3.61328125
1500.78125
1.803783784
893
4.360351563
1769.726563
0.689473684
932
4.55078125
1838.28125
0.463948498
960
4.6875
1887.5
0.313333333
978
4.775390625
1919.140625
0.221063395
983
4.799804688
1927.929688
0.196032553
990
4.833984375
1940.234375
0.161414141
1001
4.887695313
1959.570313
0.107992008
total takes about 50 second. This is caused by the characteristics of the gas LPG which has a specific desity that is more han the density of the air , making it less suitable if given maximum speed.
TABLE II THE TEST RESULTS OF THE PID CONTROL
Exchange Of LPG Gas Level (ppm)
Sensor Resistance (kΩ)
Exhaust Fan Speed (rpm)
Time (second)
1847.65625
0.358007813
940
10
1738.28125
0.615039063
800
15
1621.09375
0.890429688
870
20
1699.21875
0.706835938
900
25
1.028125
875
30
1542.96875
1.074023438
400
35
1523.4375
1.119921875
480
40
1533.203125
1.096972656
300
45
1515.625
1.13828125
325
50
1464.84375
1.257617188
180
55
1445.3125
1.303515625
60
60
1484.375
1.21171875
0
62
1562.5
TABLE III THE TEST RESULTS OF LOGIC CONTROL
Exchange Of Gas Level (ppm)
Resistansi sensor (kΩ)
Motor speed (rpm)
Time (Second)
1882.8125
0.27539062
940
10
1523.4375
1.11992187
0
15
1533.203125
1.09697265
940
20
1484.375
1.21171875
0
25
1552.734375
1.05107421
940
30
1523.4375
1.11992187
0
50
1494.140625
1.18876953
0
55
V. CONCLUSIONS After a test of the whole system in this research , and based on data that has been obtained can be drawn some conclusions as follows : 1. By using the exhaust fan that is controlled using PID control , the removal process LPG gas levels in the test chamber can be
From the test results have shown that the PID control can control the rotation exhaust fan according gas levels that detected by the sensor . From the table above shows that the current LPG gas levels are set at the highest level , so the exhaust fan rotate at the maximum speed that is
293
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
2.
3.
accelerated. For gas concentration of 1941 ppm which is a dangerous level of LPG gas levels can be reduced up to 1641 ppm in a 45 second period When used logic control to adjust the rotation of the exhaust fan , the process of removal of LPG gas levels from the testing room showed faster results than PID control . For gas levels as in 1881 , 81 ppm can be reduced to 1523 ppm in just 15 second Control logic can eliminate the LPG gas levels in the testing space within a relatively faster than PID control ,but it can not eliminate the LPG gas in total , there are still some residual gas levels . While the PID control gas removal process takes longer than the control logic but LPG gas removal process can take place with a perfect or no residual REFERENCES
V Ramya, B Palaniappan, ― Embedded System For Hazardous Gas Detection And Alerting,‖ International Journal Of Distributed And Parallel System (IJDPS) India‖ , Vol.3, pp. 287 – 300, May 2012 [8] Y. J. Jung, Y. K. Lee, D. G. Lee, k. H. Ryu, and S. Nittel, ―Air Pollution monitoring system based on geo sensor network ‖ in proc. IEEE Int. Geoscience Remote Sensing Symp., 2008, vol, 3, pp. 1370-1373.. [9] R. Al-Ali, Member, IEEE, Imran Zualkernan, and FadiAloul, Senior Member, IEEE, ―A Mobile GPRSsensors array for Air Pollution Monitoring‖ vol.6, pp.410422, Oct.2010. [10] Ali Asghar Nazari Shirehjini, Abdulsalam Yassine, and Shervin Shirmohammadi, ―An RFID-Based Position and Orientation Measurement System for Mobile Objects in Intelligent Environments”, IEEE Transactions On Instrumentation And Measurement, Vol. 61, No. 6, June 2012. [11]S.Rajihta , T Swapna, ―A Security Alert System Using GSM For Gas Leakge ―, International Journal Of VLSI And Embedded System, Vol 3, Issue 4,pp 173 – 175, Oktober 2012. [12]Hitendra Rawat, Ashish Kuswah, Khyati Asthana,‖ LPG Gas Leak Detection And ControlSystem‖, International Journal Of Engineering And Technical Research, pp 133 – 138, 2014. [13]Yao Jubiao, Jiang Keyu, ―Analysis Of LPG Engine PID Parameter Control Of Transient Air – Fuel Ration Based Om Improved Elman Neural Network‖, Journal Of Software, Vol 5, No 1, pp 54 – 64, January 2009. [14]Pratap Vikhe, Neelam Punjabi, ―Chandrakant Kadu, Real Time DC Motor Speed Control Using PID Controller in LABVIEW‖, International Journal Of Advance Research In Electrical, Electronics And Instrumentation Engineering, Vol 3, Issue 9, pp 12162 – 12167, September 2014. [7]
294
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Frequency Sampling Method for Pelog East Java Gamelan Model Based on Analog Voice Sensor Joko Catur Condro Cahyono Electrical Engineering Dept, Faculty of Technique, Surabaya State University Kampus Unesa Ketintang Surabaya 60231 [email protected]
d. The difference is the noise of tools and environment Measured tones C = C reference tone + sound noise Sound noise = C scalable voice tone - the tone of voice .............................. C benchmark (1) 2. Calculate the frequency of gamelan a. Gamelan sound recording b. Calculate the frequency of recorded c. Frequency recorded gamelan = frequency measured .................................... (2) 3. Calculate the sound of gamelan riel a. Reducing the recording with the recording number one. b. Gamelan sound measured ............................. (3) Actual gamelan = gamelan measurable - noise sound ............................... (4)
Abstract - In the new frequency measurements need to be given the new measuring method. The method previously done is to calculate the frequency of the signal noise. The main obstacle when the noise happens is along these frequencies. So it could not be found the original frequency from this background needed a new method for calculating the new frequency in the hope gamelan can be determined precisely the pelog frequency. Gamelan used is Model Pelog Saron East Java. How this is done to calculate the new frequency gamelan. Gamelan used are Pelog Saron East-Java model. After calculating the frequency of each tone saron pelog East Java Model, results of this frequency makes software tested with the same frequency and attempted to penglaras. Penglaras expert opinion concluded that the frequency is calculated is the same as the original gamelan. It is intended to be carried out research for Jawatimuran Slendro tone, so we get the formula for the frequency of the tone gamelan Slendro East-Java Model.
II.
Index Terms - Measurement method, Pelog,
DATA EXPERIMENT
Saron tone pelog Java barrel easterlies Nada ji (1) erc ke- N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 1 V X X X X 2 V X X X X 3 V X X X X 4 V X X X X 5 V X X X X
Saron
I. INTRODUCTION Gamelan frequency measurements are usually done is to record the sound of gamelan is then calculated by measuring the noise that occurs sound sampling. Having found the noise then subtracted the original sound with the noise. The result is the original sound of gamelan without mixed-frequency noise. Measurement is one of them is the refinefrequency signals. Signal noise mixed in the sound has not been separated. Signal noise will be reduced if the original signal is interrupted several times. But the original signal will not be found through calculations if the intruder signals continuously. So that the original signal has the addition or subtraction. The calculation of the calculation then compiled a new way to measure the sound frequency of the sound source signal. In this study sample was gamelam pelog Jawatimuran barrel. Sound sensors used are analog microphone. The steps are as follows: 1. Calculating Noise environment and tools a. Record sound tones C with microphone b. Calculate the frequency of the tone C c. Comparing the count with a tone tone C C in reference.
Perc ke1 2 3 4 5
N1 X X X X X
N2 V V V V V
Nada ro (2) N3 N4 N5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
N6 X X X X X
N7 X X X X X
N6 X X X X X
N7 X X X X X
Nada lu (3)
295
Perc ke-
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
1
X
X
V
X
X
X
X
2
X
X
V
X
X
X
X
3
X
X
V
X
X
X
X
4
X
X
V
X
X
X
X
5
X
X
V
X
X
X
X
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 III.
Nada pat (4) Perc ke-
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
1
X
X
X
V
X
X
X
2
X
X
X
V
X
X
X
3
X
X
X
V
X
X
X
4
X
X
X
V
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
V
X
X
X
After carrying out the calculations and discussion of gamelan sound data it can be concluded: 1. Tool alignment tone Javanese gamelaneasterlies can be realized using a preamp circuit, tone decoder and microcontroller ATMEGA8 2. Frequency peak at beating gamelan instruments can be captured by ATMEGA8 used as pensaklar to turn on the LED sign that the frequency of gamelan instruments are tuned in accordance 3. Limit the frequency programmed in ATMEGA8 given error range of approximately 3 Hz because saron gamelan instruments affected by temperature, time and place.
Nada mo (5) Perc ke-
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
1
X
X
X
X
V
X
X
2
X
X
X
X
V
X
X
3
X
X
X
X
V
X
X
4
X
X
X
X
V
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
V
X
X
Perc ke-
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
1
X
X
X
X
X
V
X
2
X
X
X
X
X
V
X
3
X
X
X
X
X
V
X
4
X
X
X
X
X
V
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
V
X
IV.
Nada pi (7) N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
V
2 3 4 5
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
V V V V
ADVICE
1. At the time alignment of a craftsman gamelan gamelan will imitate the sound of gamelan that is so, so that the tool can be added savings gamelan sound tone desired by craftsmen. 2. gamelan tones in every region in Indonesia has different characteristics according to their respective regions. Should be identified for the region Sundanese gamelan frequency, Solo, Yogyakarta and Bali in order to preserve the cultural heritage of the nation. 3. In the area of Ngawi, Magetan and Ponorogo there are some craftsmen who follow aligned tone gamelan Solo but there are some craftsmen follow aligned East Java tone. Benchmark frequency gamelan tones on the outskirts of the provincial boundary is generally not clearly follow aligned so that the necessary standardization tone gamelan tones bedasarkan certain benchmark.
Nada nem (6)
Perc ke-
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES [1]
[2]
Of the test table can be seen that the truth detector frequency tone gamelan saron pelog East Javanese barrel is 100%. The average truths tools are: Ji : 5/5 x 100% = 100 % Ro : 5/5 x 100% = 100% Lu : 5/5 x 100% = 100% Pat : 5/5 x 100% = 100% Mo : 5/5 x 100% = 100% Nem : 5/5 x 100% = 100% Pi : 5/5 x 100% = 100%
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]
average truths tool = 100,00 % Analysis: This tool works in accordance with desired because ATMEGA8 microcontroller functions lit LED function when getting input the desired frequency of the input despite lasting less than 1 second but the microcontroller is able to detect it.
[7] [8]
[9]
296
Ahmadi Fuad (2001) Karakteristik Teknologi Tepat Guna balam Industri Skala Usaha Kecil dan Menengah di Jawa Timur. Makalah yang disampaikan dalam rangka pelatihan produktivitas usaha kecil di Unesa.Tanggal 26 Juli tahun 2001. Arnawa, I Made. (2010). Pendro. Artikel 1 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: cid:[email protected] 7.6.9. Arta, I Wayan Sumerta Dana. (2010). Laras Nada Cetik Sudah Terdaftar. Artikel 2 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: http://cetak.kompas.com/read/xml /2010/02/10/0301237/Laras.Nada.Cetik.Sudah..Terdaftar. Bandem, I Made, (1989). Prakempa: sebuah Lontar Karawitan Bali. Denpasar: ASTI Denpasar. Guritno, Pandam, (2010). Gamelan In Wayang. Artikel 3 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 10 April 2011 dari: http://www.seasite.niu.edu/indonesian/wayang/contents/ gamelan.htm. Haryono dkk. (1999). Buku Panduan Materi KuIiah Kewirausahaan. Unipres UNESA Surabaya. John E BiegeI (1998). Pengendalian Produksi, Suatu Pendekatan Kuantitatif. Terjemahan. Tarsito Bandung. J. Catur Condro C, (2012). Selaras Nada Internasional A440 Untuk Nada Gamelan Saron Pelog Menggunakan Pendekatan Frekuensi, Proseeding Semnas Fisika Unair. Kusumadinata, Raden Mahyar Angga, (2007). Pangawikan Rinengga Swara. Artikel 4 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: cid:op.mhtml.1271146268246 [email protected] 7.6.9.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [10] Nyoman Sutantra I (2001). Produktivitas Sistem Produksi dan Teknologi Makalah yang disampaikan dalam rangka pelatihan produktivitas usaha kecil di Unesa.Tanggal 26 Juni tahun 2001. [11] Rayana, Hendra. (2010). Instrumen Musik Gamelan Jawa. Artikel 5 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: http://www.blogcatalog.com/blog/dunia-wayangprabu/1ab52c76c0e75f69bdaa240ce61eb673. [12] Subroto, R. Hardjo, (2007). Pengetahuan Karawitan Yogyakarta. Artikel 6 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: cid:op.mhtml.1271146268246. [email protected]. [13] Sutiono (2001). Produktivitas UKM di Jawa Timur. Makalah yang disampaikan dalam rangka pelatihan produktivitas usaha kecil di Unesa,Tanggal 26 Juni tahun 2001. [14] Swara, Nawa. (2007). Gamelan Sistem Sembilan Nada Dalam Satu Gembyang, penelitian Hibah bersaing dibiayai DP2M Dikti. Artikel 7 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: cid:[email protected] 7.6.9. [15] Wayan Rai I (2007). Keragaman laras (Tuning Sistem) gamelan Gong Kebyar. penelitian Hibah bersaing dibiayai DP2M Dikti. Artikel 8 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: http://hendrasnts.wordpress.com/ Keragaman laras (Tuning Sistem) gamelan Gong Kebyar/. [16] , (2009). Tuna Netra sekaligus Tuna Rungu, Rojikin, Penyelaras Nada Gamelan. Artikel 9 of 12. Diambil pada tanggal 13 April 2011 dari: http://www.krjogja.com/news/detail/2300/www.krjgogja. com.
297
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
298
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
SIMONTA: Responsive Web-Based Thesis Management System Ibnu Febry Kurniawan1, Yuni Yamasari1, Andi Iwan Nurhidayat1, Wiyli Yustanti1 1
Informatics Department, State University of Surabaya Kampus Ketintang, Surabaya, Indonesia [email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
ranking. Third, there still exists unbalanced share of supervision. These errors, together, are likely to produce a degrading student quality. This unforeseen impact must be avoided if UNESA wants to keep its track to be top university in Indonesia. SIMONTA is designed and developed in attempt to leverage mentioned errors. The main reason behind this software construction is to minimize human error during thesis arrangement, and organize supporting documents. SIMONTA is able to keep related records systematically. Records will be stored by considering categories, and time. Therefore, any future needs can be accommodated quicker. Finally, provided screenshots demonstrate built modules which are already hosted at live server. The screenshot also shows that responsive concept in different platform.
Abstract - As one of compulsory student requirements to graduate, Thesis (Undergraduate, and Diploma) contains various procedures to be completed. Those procedures of each has different due date include topic submission, supervisor searching, proposal submission, proposal presentation, and oral defense. Similar to other departments, Informatics conducts these processes as well. There are approximately 70 students following proposal presentation and oral defense each semester. This number grows as the number of students register thesis annually. Consequently, thesis monitoring and management effort grow significantly. This research propose an accessible software for various stakeholders namely students, lecturers, and administrator. The software will integrate some existing business processes in order to help thesis implementation such as real-time, online, and paperless files including thesis proposals, letter of topic agreement, and advisor decree.
II. PRELIMINARY KNOWLEDGE A. Scientific Work Scientific writing is a text discussing a certain problem in certain discipline by using methods of display completely, regularly, and consistently. As its name implies, scientific work demands a strong demonstration of scientific basic with 3 requirements, such as: - Has content related to scientific knowledge. - Utilizes scientific method or way of thinking. - Displays a view of suitable scientific writing. People who have scientific thinking will always have skeptical, analytical, and critical behaviors when facing social phenomena. In addition, utilizing scientific methods will obtain knowledge through rational steps or procedures. Any scientific activities will reflect working process use scientific methods indicated with correct, and relevant theoretical arguments. Furthermore, there is also exist analysis of assessment which links between theoretical arguments and empirical facts. Finally, scientific activities can be categorized to research, evaluation, and development.
Index Terms - Management System, Thesis, Administration, Responsive, Online
I. INTRODUCTION Thesis plays important role in developing student‘s scientific ability. It demands student to demonstrate both writing and speaking skill in high level of academic. Extensive scientific work and good speech are needed if one wants to pass the examination. UNESA, one of government-owned universities, also conducts this activity every semester. Students from various faculties enroll this coursework as one of requirements to judicium phase. The phase is final evaluation performed by university committee to determine whether a student is eligible to graduate. Despite of regular arrangement, repetitive errors arise resulting unseen future effects. First, the increasing number of untraced almost-expire students. Many students enroll and do their thesis unmonitored, and less-supervised. Secondly, lessmanaged thesis documentation files which is one of important requirement for national university
B. Thesis Thesis is a required scientific work done by final-year students in order to obtain Bachelor or
299
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Diploma title. This activity is usually proposed as a final step before judicium phase. The work can be either field or theoretical research report. Field research is a research which focuses on empirical data collection with quantitative and qualitative approaches. While quantitative approach has deductive-inductive perspective, qualitative approach is oriented to deliver symptoms holistically and contextually through data collection. Theoretical research is a research performed to solve certain problem with critical and in-depth analysis making use of relevant foundations. Those foundations are used as source to locate idea or concept as material to deduct existing knowledge then new theories can be obtained as future fundamental solution. Thesis aims to give an understanding which is used by students to think logically and scientifically when decomposing and discussing problems then deliver them systematically. Students who want to perform thesis must meet certain prerequisite conditions, such as: - Has completed courses with total credit of 100. - Has completed Research Methods course with minimum score of C - Has cumulative grade of 2.25 - Active students (not in leave periods). - Has enrolled Thesis courses. Despite of differences in universities, thesis has similar procedures such as: - Students find thesis topic by consulting prospective adviser. - If the proposed topic is agreed by prospective adviser, then student must construct thesis proposal which is must be approved by the adviser. Students register thesis proposal presentation. - If the proposal is approved then students have to complete the thesis with periodic consults. - If the thesis is done and approved by adviser, then students may register oral defense. - Students do oral defense. - Students submit approved thesis report. - Students obtain thesis score.
To enrich the user experience in web 3.0, a range of technology is introduced such as semantic, micro format, user-language searching, machine learning, and recommendation supply agent. Furthermore, a revolutionary concept of web view was born. Responsive-web concept has emerged to enhance mentioned concepts further. Responsive web approach grants a concept of responsive architecture. This architecture attempts to response human existence in certain physical space. The concept also produces smart mirror technology that can view resident‘s density automatically when reaching defined threshold. Finally, privacy level can increase. Responsive web can provide a design and web development appropriately since it can response to users‘ behavior and environment. The environment changes include platform size, and screen orientation. This approach is implemented using a combination of flexible grid, layout, pictures, and accurate CSS. III. METHODS A model of software development is chosen as platform to analyze, design, and build the proposed solution. Thus, RAD model is chosen as foundation of Software Development Life Cycle. This model is chosen due to its robust and rapid approaches to design changes defined in real business process. A. Model Demonstrate
Analysis and Quick Design
Refine
Testing
Implement ation
Build
Fig. 1 RAD Model There are 5 stages based on RAD model which is performed during the development of proposed solution, such as: 1. Analysis and Quick Design Requirement A comprehensive analysis and design are constructed within minimal amount of time in order to obtain suitable functionality. The requirements in proposed solution include thesis registration, proposal registration procedure, consulting process, oral defense and revision process, and thesis advisory decree letter.
C. Responsive Web Development Web development scope includes every action of web building in internet world. The development process ranges from single-page to complex-page websites process with various business process, internet application, and social media involvement. Since its establishment in 1989 in which Web 1.0 introduced with static and one-way information, web has grown rapidly with more features. Web 2.0 then launched with is wisdom concept and finally, web 3.0 is also initiated.
2. Build Software development is performed in this phase to realize business processes which are defined in prior step. As a result, software modules will be produced namely: a) Proposal registration and advisor decision module. b) Proposal oral defense scheduling module.
300
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 c) Thesis supervision and monitoring module. d) Final oral defense and revision module. e) TA Administration module. f) Document management module.
Advisor
3. Demonstrate
Supervisor
Examiner
Advisor and Examiner Supervised Students Examination Decree Data Data
This third phase requires user to check whether the business processes suitable with built modules. It is possible to show each module operation only. Thus, received revisions will be limited to certain module prototypes. Users that will observe the demonstration such as:
Registration & Requirements Proposal Approval and Exam Scheduling
Proposal
Supervision
Oral Defense scheduling
server
Student
Thesis Committee
Oral Defense and Revision Data Management
a) Thesis committee. b) Advisors. 4. Refine
Upload and supporting files
Fig. 2 SIMONTA Overview
Refine phase is done to fix module prototypes which have been demonstrated to end-users. One of end-users can be one IT feasibility and thesis process business expert. If there are any mistakes, flaws, extra features exist, and then improvement will be performed shortly. Consequently, an extra iteration will take place.
To obtain proposed solution there several things designed as output of phase 1 in RAD model. These outputs will be presented accordingly in this sub-chapter. Following models are: 1. Data Flow Diagram (DFD)
5. Testing
A transformation between user business process and software development domain is achieved by creating a detailed DFD. In this diagram, retrieved require-ments are listed then modeled using actors who involve in proposed solution. Data movements between actors may be illustrated in different level of DFD. Therefore, following DFD (fig. 3) is constructed
Used software still needs nourishment since bugs may appear during its lifetime. This aims to clean software from bugs and to adapt new requirements. There are materials tested in this phase, which are: a) Black-Box Testing In this method, developed software will be evaluated by giving a wide range of input types, and checked if produce appropriate output. b) Feasibility technology
of
implemented
2. Data Models Database models are composed to further conversion real business process to technical domain. There are types of database models which are constructed sequentially. Those types are Entity Relationship Diagram (ERD), Conceptual Data Model (CDM) and Physical Data Model (PDM).
responsive
By using questioner filled in by respondents, an overall illustration will be obtained. 6. Implementation
ERD supplies high-level of technical domain with attributes, entities, and relationship components. This diagram also provides attribute types to inform the system designer how strong or weak an entity is. Yet, this diagram does not include any extra tables as a result of many-tomany relationship. This issue will be fixed in CDM.
Final software deployment will be performed at Informatics server. Online software will be ready to serve users‘ request. B. Designs Following illustration proposed system:
depicts
overview
of
CDM delivers conceptual level of technical domain. Not only brings extra tables created in many-to-many relationship, but also defines data types of each entity‘s attributes. In this model, entity concept has revolutionized into table concept. In addition, CDM can illustrate relationship degree between tables. This concept is called Cardinality. The illustration of overview system can be seen on figure 4.
301
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Finally, PDM provides technical level of data representation in implementation and deployment stage. This model gives exact picture of databaselevel implementation. Therefore, syntax which is relevant with chosen database exists. SIMONTA uses MySQL as Database Management System.
PDM can be automatically generated from CDM. Therefore, PDM has a tight-coupling relationship with CDM. The PDM of SIMONTA is illustrated by figure 5
supervisor exam schedule supervisor data supervisee data examexam score approval
student data thesis data student
SIMONTA
thesis data
exam schedule
committee
exam data lecturer data
examiner data exam schedule
examiner
Fig. 3 SIMONTA DFD offering ofr_id dsn_id ofr_title ofr_summary ofr_detail
users
FK_USR_MHS News nws_id nws_title nws_summary mws_detail
usr_username password usr_email usr_role usr_status created_at updated_at
varchar(25) varchar(50) varchar(30) varchar(3) numeric(1,0) timestamp timestamp
int varchar(1024) varchar(1024) varchar(3000)
student mhs_id usr_username mhs_nama mhs_status
numeric(10,0) varchar(50) text text text
FK_THESIS_TOPIC FK_USR_DSN
FK_THESIS_STUDENT
varchar(9) varchar(25) varchar(50) numeric(1,0)
ta_id mhs_id dsn_id ta_judul ta_abstrak ta_status
thesis lecturer int varchar(50) varchar(9) FK_SUPERVISOR dsn_id usr_username varchar(25) varchar(50) dsn_nama varchar(50) varchar(150) dsn_status numeric(1,0) varchar(1024) numeric(1,0)
FK_SIDANG_TA
FK_EXAMINER1
period prd_id prd_nama prd_jenis prd_status
int varchar(35) numeric(1,0) numeric(1,0)
exam_detail dsg_id FK_EXAM_PERIOD ta_id prd_id dsn_id lec_dsn_id dsg_waktu dsg_hasil
Fig. 4 SIMONTA CDM
302
bigint int int varchar(50) varchar(50) datetime numeric(1,0)
FK_EXAMINER2
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 offering ofr_id Number (10) ofr_title Text ofr_summary Text ofr_detail Text
users
usr_mhs News
(D)
nws_id Integer nws_title Variable characters (1024) nws_summary Variable characters (1024) mws_detail Variable characters (3000)
usr_username Variable characters (25) password Variable characters (50) usr_email Variable characters (30) usr_role Variable characters (3) usr_status Number (1) created_at Timestamp updated_at Timestamp
Identifier_1 (D)
usr_dsn
Identifier_1
thesis
Identifier_1
student thesis_student mhs_id Variable characters (9) mhs_nama Variable characters (50) mhs_status Number (1)
lecturer
ta_id Integer supervisor ta_judul Variable characters (150) ta_abstrak Variable characters (1024) ta_status Number (1)
dsn_id thesis_topic Variable characters (50) dsn_nama Variable characters (50) dsn_status Number (1) Identifier_1
Identifier_1
Identifier_1
examiner1 period
sidang_ta
prd_id Integer prd_nama Variable characters (35) exam_period prd_jenis Number (1) prd_status Number (1) Identifier_1
exam_detail dsg_id Long integer dsg_waktu Date & Time dsg_hasil Number (1) IDENTIFIER_1
Fig 5. SIMONTA PDM
303
examiner2
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 IV. RESULTS
Fig. 6 SIMONTA Front Page View Fig. 9 SIMONTA Backend Page (Resized Monitor View) Administration page is located at backend segment of SIMONTA. Figure 9 shows the dashboard of administrator in resized monitor view. There are 6 menus available in this page such as Management (Student, Lecturer, and Thesis), Information (News, and Thesis topic offering), Thesis Proposal (Schedule, Exam), Examination (Schedule), and Document Management.
Figure 6 shows the main page of SIMONTA which is themed white and black. On the right side of screen there is a login section with Captcha feature to give extra security. Moreover, figure 7 and figure 8 depict the main page in resized monitor view. This figure clearly shows that proposed responsive aspect has been achieved.
Fig.10 Student Mangement Page
Fig. 7 Front Page (Resized Monitor View)
Figure 10 and 11 demonstrate thesis document upload process in student‘s perspective. In this page, student can choose which document they want to upload and the result is provided at lower part of the page.
Fig. 8 Menu Collapsed
Fig. 11 Student Document Management Page
304
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 create a new exam period. The created period will determine how long examination takes place and manage report accordingly. CONCLUSION The proposed solution has successfully delivered integrated service which is able to administer thesis arrangement and to monitor thesis work time. Those achievements are based on defined business processes. FUTURE WORK Fig.12 Upload File Succeed
Despite vast modules achieved by SIMONTA, there are still other improvement can be done. First, student filtering feature can be enhanced. Current version of SIMONTA shows all students‘ current status, and thesis lifetime. This can be improved by giving an extra tool to filter which students to be showed. Secondly, examiners‘ document management. Due to growing administration requirement, lecturer who also does examination phase need to provide letter as a proof. This module can be added into future version. ACKNOWLEDGMENT This research is supported by grants from Faculty of Engineering, State University of Surabaya.
Fig.13 Supervisor Decree Letter Management Page (Resized Monitor View)
REFERENCES [1]
To monitor all student theses working time, a section at dashboard provides list of student and the duration.
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
Fig.14 Exam Period Management Page
[6]
[7] [8] [9]
Fig.15 Create New Exam Period Finally, exam period management pages are shown in figure 14 and 15. These figures show how to
305
Boronczyk, Tim, PHP and MySQL Create-Modify-Reuse, Wiley Publishing, Inc: 2008. Darie, Cristian, Ajax and PHP, Building Modern Web Application – Second Edition, Packt Publishing: 2009. Doyle, Matt, Beginning PHP 5.3, Programmer to Programmer, Wrox, 2010.Sommerfville, Ian, Software Engineering, Ninth Edition, Pearson Education: 2011. Ibrahim, Ali, 2011, Pengembangan Sistem Informasi Monitoring Tugas Akhir berbasis SMS Gateway di Fasilkom Unsri, Jurnal Ilmiah JUSI Vol.I, No 2. September 2011, ISSN: 2087-8737. L. Bass, P. Clements, R.Kazman, ―Software Architecture in Practice (3rd Edition) (SEI Series in Software Engineering)‖, United States: 2012 Marcotte, Ethan, Responsive Web Design, CSS, Layout & Grids, Mobile/Multidevice, Responsive Design, Interaction Design: 2010. Otwell, Taylor, Laravel: From Apprentice to Artisan, Leanpub, 2014. Tim, Panduan Skripsi Universitas Negeri Surabaya, UNESA Press: 2006. Vernon, D, Year 5 Software Enginnering 2 (Modul 514), Khalifa University, 2008.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
306
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Method Comparison of Lung Cancer between Xray Image and CT-Image Using Neural Network Hapsari Peni A.T1, Za‘imah Permatasari1 1
Electrical Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Uiversitas Negeri Surabaya [email protected]
treatment and prognosis (outlook) are often very similar.[1] There are many techniques to diagnose lung cancer like Chest Radiography (x-ray) and Computed Tomography (CT). Lung cancer nodule that observe by these technique were observe with image processing.The nodule was called pulmonary nodule. A pulmonary nodule is a small round or oval-shaped growth in the lung. It is sometimes also called a spot on the lung or a coin lesion. Pulmonary nodules are generally smaller than 3 centimeters in diameter. If the growth is larger than that, it is known as a pulmonary mass. A mass is more likely to represent a cancer than is a nodule.[2] A pulmonary nodule appears in lung X-Ray as a spherically shaped mass which can be distorted by surrounding anatomical structure and there is no limitationson size or distribution in lung tissue . The pulmonary nodule is classified into certain categories; nodule is connected to pleural surface, other connection to neighboring vessels by thin structure . Pre-diagnosis approaches help to locate the risk of lung cancer disease in very early stage [3] . II. METHODOLOGY
Abstract - Lung cancer is a deadly disease and if
a patient is correctly diagnosed in early stage there is a big chance for him or her to be cured. In other words, diagnosing a lung cancer patient to be a healthy person in the early stage is a serious mistake that results in the loss of a life. Comparative method introduced to summarize some method were used in nodule diagnosis system. Neural Network Algorithm is implemented using open source and its performance is compared to other classification algorithms. Index Terms – Lung cancer, Comparative method, Neural Network Algorithm, Classification
I. INTRODUCTION Cancer is leading cause of dead worldwide. According to data from GLOBOCAN (IARC) in 2012 Lung cancer is not only a type of cancer with the highest new cases and a major cause of cancer deaths in the male population, but also lung cancer have a high enough percentage of new cases in the female population, which amounted to 13.6% and lung cancer mortality of 11.1%. The percentage of deaths could decrease if the cancer can be detected and treated early, the possibility of recovery will be higher. There are 2 major types of lung cancer. Small cell lung cancer (SCLC) and Non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) . Small cell lung cancer is also called as cell cancer. About 10% to 15% of all lung cancers are small cell lung cancer (SCLC), named for the size of the cancer cells when seen under a microscope. Other names for SCLC are oat cell cancer, oat cell carcinoma, and small cell undifferentiated carcinoma. It is very rare for someone who has never smoked to have small cell lung cancer. About 85% of lung cancers are non-small cell lung cancers. This is the most common type of lung cancer. Squamous cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, and large cell carcinoma are all subtypes of non-small cell lung cancer. There are 3 main subtypes of NSCLC. The cells in these subtypes differ in size, shape, and chemical makeup when looked at under a microscope. But they are grouped together because the approach to
In this research, we noted similarity the methode that used in x ray image processing and CT image using neural network.
Fig. 1 : Pulmonary Nodule Diagnosis System Fig.1 gives an overview of lung nodule detection scheme. III. METHODE COMPARISON
307
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 image converted to binary image using Adaptive Thresholding method.[10] A.
Preprocessing
The pre-processing of image aims at selectively removing the redundancy present in scanned images without affecting the details, that play a key role in the diagnostic and analysis process. It contains moothing, enhancement, and segmentation. The aim of image enhancement is to improve the nterpretability or observation of information in images for human viewers, or to provide better input for other automated image processing techniques[5]
B. Feature Extraction Fundamental classification step for image processing was feature extraction. This stage Image features Extraction stage is an basic stage that uses algorithms and techniques to detect and separate various desired portions or shapes (features) of a given image. With this necessary feature required for analysis is extracted to predict the probability of lung cancer presence. Pixel Multiplication was used on X-Ray image processing while image enhancement and morphological operation used on CT image processing.[3][10]
Table 1. An overview of different preprocessing methods Methods Remark X ray Ct images Denoising from Denoising white the most white noise, salt and noise, salt and common pepper noise etc. [3] pepper noise [13] problems in image processing Gaussian and Median filtering filter out noise Laplacian filters[3] tech-nique.[6] that has Wiener filter[7] corrupted Gabor filter, Autoimage, remove enhancement and the blurring Fast Fourier transform techniques.[9] Histogram Histogramto enhancing equalization [4] Equalization[5] the edge of image structure include unsharping and enhancing image contrast Multi-level Adaptive to classify any thresholding[3] thresholding[10] point (x,y) in the image f(x,y)[3] converted to binary image[8]
Table 2. An overview of different feature extraction methods Methods Remark X-Rray CT images Pixel multiplication Image enhancement divides an of lung mask [3] and morphological image into its operation[10] fundamental regions or objects to achieve a better orientation in the image Sobel methods[3] GLCM (Grey Level to detect and Co-Occurrence separate various Method), desired portions Binarization or shapes Approach [5] (features) of a given image.
The following methods are used such as Binarization and GLCM, both methods are based on strong facts that related to lung anatomy and information of lung CT imaging and Sobel method was used in X-Ray image. C. Analysis of Extracted lung Nodule Using Neural Network
The table above describe similarity and difference beetwen preprocessing methods on x ray and CT images. It told that the most familier noise presence in x ray and CT image were white noise, salt and pepper noise[3],[13]. The presence of noise on image processing filtered using Gaussian and Laplacians filter [3] for x ray image, while CT image used median filter, Wiener filter and Gabor filter[6],[7],[9] Classifying x ray image using multi-level thresholding[3] and Fast Fourier Transform[9] Image enhancment play the important role in preprocessing stage. Both xray image and CT image were used same method to enhanct image that is histogram equalization[4],[5]. Lung fields were separated from another anatomical regions such as bone muscles and blood vessels. In X-Ray image, classify the image using Multi-Level Thresholding.[3] In CT image,
X-ray chest films are valuable in lung cancer diagnosis. However, there are cases where subsequent examination should be performed to increase the reliability of diagnoses. For example, if a patient has suffered pneumonia before, some tumors may appear in abnormal lung areas so that they are difficult to be distinguished from cicatrices. In this paper, an early stage lung cancer diagnosis system named LCDS[11] Table 3 An overview of different diagnosis systems methods Methods
308
Remark
X ray
Ct images
Back Propagation Neural Network[3][8]
feed-forward propagation network[5][12] Neural Ensemble based Detection (NED)[11]
realized in an early stage Lung Cancer Diagnosis System (LCDS).
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Research in Management & Computer Applications, ISSN: 2319-7471 Vol. 2 Issue 9, Nov.-Dec., 2013, pp: (40-47), [5] Raviprakash S. Shriwas, Akshay D. Dikondawar, ―Lung Cancer Detection And Prediction By Using Neural Network‖, IPASJ International Journal of Electronics & Communication (IIJEC), ISSN 2321-5984, Volume 3, Issue 1, January 2015,pp(17-21) [6] G. Vijaya, A. Suhasini, R. Priya, ―Automatic Detection Of Lung Cancer In CT Images‖, IJRET: International Journal of Research in Engineering and Technology, eISSN: 2319-1163 | PISSN: 2321-7308 Volume: 03 Special Issue: 07 | May-2014, Available @ http://www.ijret.org ,pp: 182-186 [7] Anitha, Sridhar, , ―Segmentation Of Lung Lobes And Nodules In CT Images‖, Signal & Image Processing : An International Journal(SIPIJ) ,Vol.1, No.1, September 2010, ,pp:1:12 [8] K.A.G. Udeshani, R.G.N. Meegama, T.G.I. Fernando, Statistical Feature-based Neural Network Approach for the Detection of Lung Cancer in Chest X-Ray Images‖, International Journal of Image Processing (IJIP), Volume (5) : Issue (4) : 2011 [9] Mokhled S.,‖ Lung Cancer Detection Using Image Processing Techniques‖, Leonardo Electronic Journal of Practices and Technologies, ISSN 1583-1078 Issue 20, January-June 2012, p. 147-158 [10] Kohei Arai,Yeni Herdiyeni, Hiroshi Okumura, Comparison of 2D and 3D Local Binary Pattern in Lung Cancer Diagnosis, , (IJACSA) International Journal of Advanced Computer Science and Applications, Vol. 3, No.4, 2012 pp98-95 [11] Zhi-Hua Zhou, Yuan Jiang, Yu-Bin Yang, Shi-Fu Chen, ―Lung Cancer Cell Identification Based on Artificial Neural Network Ensembles‖, Artificial Ingelligence in Medicine, 2002, vol.24, no.1, pp.25-36. @Elsevier [12] Bhawna Gupta, Shamik Tiwari,‖ Lung Cancer Detection using Curvelet Transform and Neural Network‖, International Journal of Computer Applications (0975 – 8887) Volume 86 – No 1, January 2014 , pp:15-17 [13]Maria V. Storozhilova, Alexey S. Lukin, Dmitry V. Yurin, Valentin E. Sinitsyn, ―Two Approaches for Noise Filtering in 3D Medical CT-Images‖, The 22nd International Conference on Computer Graphics and Vision, pp:68-72.
Neural Network Algorithm is implemented using open source and its performance is compared to other classification algorithms. Lung Cancer Diagnosis System on X-Ray image used Back Propagation Neural Network while Feed Forward Propagation Network and Neural Ensemble Based Detection were used in CT image. III. DISCUSSION The evaluation of a diagnosis system depends on the various kinds of methode used by the system. There are some pros and cons using Neural Network for diagnostic systems. A. Advantages and Disadvantages The advantages of using Neural Network in Diagnostic System: it requires less input of knowledge about the problem than other approaches, it is skilled of implementing more complex separating of feature space, it is amenable to high-performance parallel processing implementation of image, it works for both linear and non-linear data, it works with high accuracy. The disadvantages of using Neural Network in Diagnostic System: the extensive amount of training is required, slower operation when implemented as a simulation on a conservative computer, the unavailability of a detailed understanding of the decision making process that is being used. IV. CONCLUSION Neural Network Algorithm is implemented using open source and its performance is compared to other classification algorithms. Neural network model is a diagnostic system that performs at an accuracy level is constructed. In this process, the performance of neural network structure was investigated for lung cancer diagnosis problem. People can be checked for lung cancer disease quickly and painlessly and thus detecting the disease at an early stage. This indicates that neural network can be effectively used for lung cancer diagnosis to help oncologists. The prediction could help doctor to plan for a better medication and provide the patient with early diagnosis. REFERENCES [1]
[2] [3]
[4]
http://www.cancer.org/cancer/lungcancer-nonmallcell/detailedguide/non-small-cell-lung-cancer-whatis-non-small-cell-lung-cancer https://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/diseases_conditions/ hic_Pulmonary_Nodules Vinod kumar, Kanwal Garg,‖ Neural network based approach for detection of abnormal regions of lung cancer in x ray‖, International journal of engineering research & Technology (IJERT), ISSN:2278-0181, vol 1 Issue 5, July2012 p 1-7 Vinod Kumar, Anil Saini, ―Detection system for lung cancer based on neural network: X-Ray validation performance‖, International Journal of Enhanced
309
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
310
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
QUALITATIVE IMAGE ENHANCEMENT USING CONTRAST LIMITED ADAPTIVE HISTOGRAM EQUALIZATION AND ADAPTIVE ILLUMINATION COMPENSATION Achmad Fiqhi Ibadillah, Haryanto, Koko Joni Electrical Engineering - University of Trunojoyo Madura [email protected], [email protected], [email protected] relative to the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of pixel values in the area. CLAHE contrasts from AHE in contrast limiting. CLAHE can be applied on different color models by researchers. In proposed method, CLAHE is applied on LAB color space to improve the underwater images and it is founded that results are improved as compared to previous work done by other researchers.
Abstract— Digital camera often produces undesired result when working under poor light condition. The details of dark regions are too obscure to be recognized, and it would not be a good picture that the photographers wish. In the proposed method, a Contrast Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization (CLAHE) is employed to increase the brightness, while Adaptive Illumination Compensation (AIC) generates illumination-independent images since the obtained images are affected by the surface reflectance and illumination. In our proposed method, CLAHE and AIC is applied on LAB color space.
After we implement CLAHE, Adaptive Illumination Compensation (AIC) is implemented. AIC generates illumination-independent images since the obtained images are affected by the surface reflectance and illumination.
Index Terms – poor light condition, Contrast Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization, Adaptive Illumination Compensation, LAB color space
II. Related Work
I. INTRODUCTION Image enhancement is the mechanism to process the input image to make it more appropriate and clearly visible for the required application. Image enhancement improves the information content of the image and alters the visual impact of the image on the observer[1]. Image enhancement strengthens the features of images. It emphasizes the image features like edges, contrast to build the display of photographs more useful for examination and study. Qualitative objective approach is used in enhancing images to construct a visually impressive picture. Image enhancement includes many operations such as contrast stretching, noise clipping, pseudo coloring, noise filtering etc to improve the view of images. Many methods are used to remove poor quality of underwater images . Such as histogram equalization, Contrast Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization (CLAHE). CLAHE is generalization of adaptive histogram equalization. With this technique the image is broken up into tiles. The gray scale is calculated for each of these tiles, based upon its histogram and transform function, which is derived from the interpolation between the manipulated histograms of the neighboring sub-regions. The transformation function is
Fig. 1: System flowchart
III. Qualitative image enhancement using contrast limited adaptive histogram equalization and adaptive illumination compensation Figure 1 shows our system flowchart. The proposed method contains two main procedures, Contrast Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization (CLAHE) and Adaptive Illumination Compensation (AIC). These are the overall description of our proposed system framework. In the coming subsections, we will describe each step in more detail. A. Contrast Equalization
Limited
Adaptive (CLAHE)
Histogram
Histogram Equalization is the most powerful technique for image enhancement [2]. The histogram of an image mainly represents the relative frequency of occurrence of the various
311
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 gray levels in the image. The basic idea of Histogram Equalization method is to re-map the gray levels of an image based on the image‘s gray levels cumulative density function. The main goal of Histogram Equalization is to obtain a uniform histogram for the output image as it employs a monotonic and non linear mapping which reassigns the intensity values of pixels in the input image. Therefore this technique is used in image comparison processes and for the correction of non linear effects introduced by a digitizer or display system.
combined using bilinear interpolation in order to eliminate artificially induced boundaries. The contrast, especially in homogeneous areas, can be limited in order to avoid amplifying the noise which might be present in the image. Algorithm Steps: Obtain all the inputs: Image, Number of regions in row and column directions, Number of bins for the histograms used in building image transform function (dynamic range), Clip limit for contrast limiting (normalized from 0 to 1) Pre-process the inputs: Determine real clip limit from the normalized value if necessary, pad the image before splitting it into regions. Process each contextual region (tile) thus producing gray level mappings: Extract a single image region, make a histogram for this region using the specified number of bins, clip the histogram using clip limit, create a mapping (transformation function) for this region Interpolate gray level mappings in order to assemble final CLAHE image: Extract cluster of four neighboring mapping functions, process image region partly overlapping each of the mapping tiles, extract a single pixel, apply four mappings to that pixel, and interpolate between the results to obtain the output pixel; repeat over the entire image. A variety of adaptive contrast-limited histogram equalization techniques (CLAHE) are provided. Sharp field edges can be maintained by selective enhancement within the field boundaries. Selective enhancement is accomplished by first detecting the field edge in a portal image and then only processing those regions of the image that lie inside the field edge. Noise can be reduced while maintaining the high spatial frequency content of the image by applying a combination of CLAHE, median filtration and edge sharpening. This technique known as Sequential processing can be recorded into a user macro for repeat application at any time. A variation of the contrast limited technique called adaptive histogram clip (AHC) can also be applied. AHC automatically adjusts clipping level and moderates over enhancement of background regions of portal images.
Adaptive Histogram Equalization [3], [4] is a method of contrast enhancement which is sensitive to local spatial information in an image. It is useful to get the full dynamic range of ordinary display devices. This method is automatic, reproducible and simultaneously displays most of the information contained in the gray scale contrast of the image Adaptive histogram equalization attempts to overcome the limitations of global linear min-max windowing and global histogram equalization by providing most of the desired information in a single image which can be produced without manual intervention. In this technique, developed independently the contrast enhancement aping applied to a particular pixel is a function of the intensity values immediately surrounding the pixel. For each pixel in the image, a region centered about the pixel, called its contextual region, is assigned. The intensity values in that region are used to calculate a histogram equalization mapping which is then applied to the pixel in question. The result is an image in which the mapping applied to each pixel is different and is adaptive to the local distribution of pixel intensities rather than the global information content of the image. In practice, this produces an image in which different objects whose intensity values lie in different sub ranges of the intensity values are simultaneously visible. CLAHE was originally developed for medical imaging and has proven to be successful for enhancement of low-contrast images such as portal films. Contrast Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization, CLAHE, is an improved version of AHE, or Adaptive Histogram Equalization. Both overcome the limitations of standard histogram equalization. CLAHE [5] operates on small data regions (tiles), rather than the entire image. Each tile's contrast is enhanced, so that the histogram of the output region approximately matches the specified histogram. The neighboring tiles are then
312
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig. 2: The result of standard lighting compensation with𝐶𝑠𝑡𝑑 = 50% at poor lighting condition
Fig. 3: The result of adaptive lighting compensation with 𝐶𝑠𝑡𝑑 in equation (1) at poor lighting condition B. Adaptive Illumination Compensation (AIC)
We correct the obtained image by applying the scale factor to each channel. After that, obtained images are illumination-independent and skin color detection method can be much more accurate. As figure 3 shown, we can notice that the color of images after applying lighting compensation has better appearance than the original one.
The problem of elimination of non-standard illumination is one of the most burning problems in the area of computer vision [6]. The Grey World algorithm [6, 7] is applied to compensate the color of obtained images. The Grey World algorithm is defined in the equation (1):
At the figure above we can compare that the result of ideal (Standard mean gray value) and adaptive one. We can notice that the color of face at ideal result looks brighter till decrease the original face skin color at input image but at adaptive result enhances the original skin color at input image.
𝑣𝑔
∑ (
∑𝑚,
) ( 𝐺 ):
( 𝐺 )-
𝑊 ( )Where stands for scale factor for one specific channel of R, G, and B. and 𝑣𝑔 separately stand for the standard mean gray value and the mean value of the specific channel. In spite of the variants of GW (Grey World) algorithms, the is generally considered as a 50% ideal gray under the canonical. For example, in our normalized RGB color space, since the maximum value is 1, so that = 0.5. if it is applied to a 24-bit RGB color space, the = 0.5*255 = 128. The limitation of the standard GW algorithm is obvious, the constant standard mean value will not fit well for various real world images. Especially images wit a dark background and the foreground objects are not very bright will be ―over compensated‖.
IV. RESULT AND DISCUSSION In order to conveniently develop an HMI system, we used C++ programming language and OpenCV library to implement all the proposed algorithms. All the experiment results are executed on a general laptop with Intel Core i5 2.30 GHz CPU, 3.8GB memory and Ubuntu 12.04 LTS operating system (32-bit). The input RGB images resolution are 640 x 480 pixels.
Where m stands for the number of pixels in the image, n stands for the number of non-black pixels in image, this is to solve the over compensation problem for images with dark background, i.e., images taken at night. By calculating the average of the maximum and minimum channel percentage, an adaptive mean gray value of the whole image is gained. The 𝑣𝑔 is the mean of non-black pixels in each channel.
In order to analyze our proposed method, the experiments are performed under poor lighting condition. We implement our proposed method at night in the street, in front of the building, hall, etc. The result is shown below: The left images are input image, the middle images are implemented with CLAHE
313
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 method, and the right images are our proposed method.
314
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
315
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
316
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
V.
Conclusions
In this paper image enhancement method is proposed. Our proposed method is applied on L*A*B color space. It is founded that results are improved as compared to CLAHE. We conclude our proposed method makes the output image looks brighter and more natural.
References [1] Bharal Sonam, ― L*a*b based contrast limited adaptive histogram equalization for underwater images‖, International Journal of Computer Application (2250-1797) Volume 5– No. 4, June 2015 [2] A. K. Jain, ―Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‖. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 2001 [3] J. Zimmerman, S. Pizer, E. Staab, E. Perry,W. McCartney, and B. Brenton, ―Evaluation of the effectiveness of adaptive histogram equalization for contrast enhancement,‖ IEEE Transactions on Medical Imaging, pp. 304312, Dec. 1988. [4] WANG Zhiming, TAO Jianhua, ―A Fast Implementation of Adaptive Histogram Equalization‖, ICSP 2006 Proceedings, IEEE 2006. [5] Stephen M. Pizer, R. Eugene Johnston, James P. Ericksen,Bonnie C. N Yankaskas, Keith E. Muller, ―Contrast-Limited Adaptive Histogram Equalization Speed and Effectiveness‖, IEEE Int. Conf. Neural Networks & Signal Processing, Nanjing, China, December 14-17, 2003. [6] Chen, L., and Grecos, C., ―Fast skin color detector for face extraction‖, Proceedings of SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering, pp. 93-101, 2005. [7] Funt, B., Barnard, K., and Martin, L., "Is Machine Color Constancy Good Enough?," the 5th European Conference on Computer Vision, pp. 445-459, 1998.
317
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
318
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Osteoarthritis Severity Determination Using Linier Vector Quantization Based Otsu Thresholding Lilik Anifah1 1
Electrical Engineering Department Faculty of Engineering Universitas Negeri Surabaya Kampus Ketintang Universitas Negeri Surabaya Indonesia [email protected]
Localization is the first step in OA classification. Even if a radiologist expert or highly trained person is available to select regions, high inter- and intra-observer variabilities are still possible [7]. Our ultimate goal in this research is to develop an automated system for OA classification. But for preprocessing and segmentation process is already investigated in previous research.
Abstract - Localization is the first step in osteoarthritis (OA) classification, has already observed. The proposed system is designed as decision support system for medical doctors to classifying the severity of knee OA. We propose a method to classify using LVQ based Otsu Thresholding. There are 5 experiments using various steps: normalization, gabor kernel, Otsu Thresholding, and learning using LVQ. The results show that each experiment design has advantages and disadvantages. Overall we evaluated 25 data for training and 258 data for testing. But using LVQ based Otsu Thresholding is recommended but it still needs more improvement. Index Terms - knee osteoarthritis, classification, LVQ, Otsu Thresholding, Gabor kernel.
I. INTRODUCTION Osteoarthritis (OA), the general joint disorder, consists of a group of heterogeneous syndromes that affect all joint tissues and is characterized by articular cartilage and the adjacent bone often show the most notable changes. OA reflects a prominent musculoskeletal health and has been a burden of socioeconomic for society worldwide, causing progressive and irreversible articular cartilage tissue damage and, hence, the failure of the joint as a whole organ [1–3]. OA common happens the finger and thumb joints, particulary at the joints near fingertips and and at the joint that connects the thumb the hand, near the wrist, knee, the smaller joints of the other toes, spine, and hip. The joints terminate at the bones thet previously separated by cartilage, and then rub againt each other. It makes the painful joint symptoms due to damage in the tissue and the underlying bones. The joint space is at the hip because of bone spurs spur formation and loss of cartilage. OA population in Indonesia in 2004 was 60,000,000 in the year 2007 [4]. The methods used to know the OA joints status are X-ray, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) and arthroscopy [5]. Some cases were measured by osteo-CT [6]. Indonesian medical doctors are common to use X-ray imaging or MRI.
Several methods have been applied to classify knee OA, e.g., using of 20 pre-selected images as the gold standard with a center of a joint a 150×150 window, to find the region of interest (ROI) a factor 10, then performing a scan with a 15×15 shifted window. The respective position, the distances between the 15×15 of the shifted window and each of the 20 15×15 pre-defined joint images, was calculated using the eucledian distance and for predicting the KL-grade a simple weight nearest neighbor rule was employed [8]. But a developed method consists of image preprocessing, and delineation of cortical bone plates (active shape model) has also been proposed to perform detection using the edge based segmentation method [7]. The main feature to be extracted is the distance between femur and tibia bone by rotated images, arrays of mean intensity, rotation parameter(s), horizontally translated images and vertically translated images [9]. We propose a system for OA classification which can be implemented on X-ray images to classify the status of OA using Linear Vector Quantization based Otsu Thresholding. II. MATERIAL AND METHOD A. Material We observed 303 osteoarthritis fixed-flexion x-ray images, 25 data for training process and 258 data for testing. All data were obtained from the Osteoarthritis Initiative (OAI) dataset for knees [10]. Fig 1 is gold standard of Junction Space Area (JSA) used for training process. This experiments the severity determination classified into 4 clasters. KLGrade 0, KL-Grade 1, KL-Grade 2, KL-Grade 3, and KL-Grade 4. KL-Grade 0 is normal condition and KL-Grade 4 is the worst.
319
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Hardware specification used in this research is Dell Inspiron N3010 with Processor Intel(R) Core I5 CPU M430 @2,27 GHz with installed memory (RAM) 2,00 Gb. B. Method Segmentation stages is already observed and discussed in [11] and [12], this research concern to determine the status of osteoarthtritis based on the Junction Space Area (JSA) image. There are 5 experiments implemented described in Fig 2 to Fig 6. Each experiment consists of learning and testing phase. First experiment (Fig 1) the JSA image normalized into 10×40 image then it learnt using LVQ. Second experiment (Fig 2) implement the same method with the first but the template normalized into 50×200.
(Fig 5) implement almost the same method but the difference in normalization process. GABOR KERNEL The complex formula of the Gabor function in space domain is g ( x, y) s( x, y)wr ( x, y)
(1)
where s(x,y) is a complex sinusoid (carrier), and wr (x,y) is a two dimension gaussian-shaped function (envelope).
Fig 2. Experiment 1 Diagram Block Fig 7. Example of a Gabor kernel with parameter: α=8, θ=0, Ψ=[0 Π/2], γ=0,8 and (a) N=1 (b) N=2 (c) N=3 (d) N=4 (e) N=5 (f) N=6 (g) N=7 (h) N=8 (i) N=9
The complex sinusoid is defined as s( x, y) exp( j (2 (u0 x v0 y) P))
Fig 3. Experiment 2 Diagram Block
(2) Where upon (u0,v0) is defined as the spatial frequency and P as the phase of the sinusoid. The real part and the imaginary part of the sinusoid are: ( s( x, y )) cos(2 (u0 x v0 y ) P)
Fig 4. Experiment 3 Diagram Block
( s( x, y )) sin(2 (u0 x v0 y ) P) (3)
Parameters u0 and v0 define the spatial frequency of the sinusoid in the Cartesian coordinates. The spatial frequency expressed in polar coordinates in terms of magnitude F0 and direction ω0 is as follows:
Fig 5. Experiment 4 Diagram Block
Fo u02 v02 v0 u0
0 arctan
u0 Fo cos(0 ) v0 Fo sin(0 )
Fig 6. Experiment 5 Diagram Block
(4)
The complex sinusoid is then: Thirth experiment (Fig 4) JSA image is normalized into 50×200 then it processed using Gabor Kernel and learning process used Linear Vector Quantization. Fourth and Fifth experiment
320
s( x, y) exp( j (2Fo( x cos 0 y sin 0 ) P)) (5)
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The gaussian envelope as follows,
∑ 2 0 r
2
( )
< :
wr ( x, y) K exp( j ((a ( x x ) b ( y y ) )) (6) 2
2 0 r
(14) The mean intensity for whole image:
where K is scales for the magnitude of the gaussian envelope, (x0,y0) is the peak of the function, a and b are scaling parameter of the gaussian envelope, while r denotes the rotation operator [13].
(15) (16) Variance of thresholded image: ( ) (
)
Whereas: For bi-level thresholding, the optimal threshold t* : ( x x0 ) r ( x x0 ) cos( ) ( y y0 ) sin( )
( )+
*
( y y0 ) r ( x x0 ) sin( ) ( y y0 ) cos( )
*
;
+
*
OTSU THRESHOLDING Thresholding is an important technique for image segmentation that tries to identify and extract a target from its background on the basis of the distribution of gray levels or texture in image objects [14]. There are two types of thresholding methods global thresholding and local thresholding. Otsu method is type of global thresholding in which depend only gray value of the image [15]. Grayscale 2D image contains N pixels with gray levels from 1 to L. The number of pixels with gray level i is denoted fi, giving a probability of gray level i:
(8) Bi-level thresholding, the pixel devided into 2 classes, C1 gray levels [1, …, t] and C2 with graylevels [t+1. …, L]. Distributions of each class: ( )
(19) ∑
()
( )
(20) ∑ (21) ∑
(22)
The algorithm of LVQ is shown in Fig 8. The Learning Vector Quantization (LVQ) is an algorithm for learning classifiers from labeled data samples. Instead of modeling the class densities, it models the discrimination function defined by the set of labeled codebook vectors and the nearest neighborhood search between the codebook and data [16].
( )
∑ (11) ∑ < :
(12) Mean of class C1 and C2: ∑
( )
LINIER VECTOR QUANTIZATION
<
( )
)
With
(10) ( )
(
<
(9) :
(18) ; )+
Where
( )
:
(
;
(7) Figure 2 shows an example of Gabor kernel with several N parameter values.
1≤t
()
<
(13)
321
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Fig 11. Accuracy of the experiment 3 Testing data for experiment 3 is KL-Grade 0 is classified 28% correct as KL-Grade 0, but for KLGrade 1, 2, 3, and 4 has accuracy 38%, 40%, 15%, and 25% (Fig 11). Testing data for experiment 4 is KL-Grade 0 is classified 28% correct as KL-Grade 0, but for KL-Grade 1, 2, 3, and 4 has accuracy 40%, 23%, 39%, 8%, and 18% (Fig 12). Fig 8. The algorithm of LVQ
III. RESULTS SOM Algorithm implemented to classify the osteoarthritis status and all the testing data classified as KL-Grade 1. It caused the normalization 1040 make some data lost, so the data learning became not representative. Results of experiment is shown in fig 9-13 below. Testing data is KL-Grade 0 is classified 100% correct as KL-Grade 0, but for KL-Grade 1, 2, 3, and 4 has accuracy 20%, it means that 20% is classified in the correct cluster (Fig 9).
Fig 12. Accuracy of the experiment 4 Testing data for experiment 5 is KL-Grade 0 classified 52% correct as KL-Grade 0, but for KLGrade 1, 2, 3, and 4 has accuracy 65%, 5%, 1%, 39% and 18% (Fig 13).
Fig 9. Accuracy of the experiment 1 Fig 13. Accuracy of the experiment 5 Testing data for experiment 2 is KL-Grade 1 classified 100% correct as KL-Grade 0, but for KLGrade 1, 2, 3, and 4 has accuracy 20%, it means that 20% is classified in the correct cluster (Fig 10).
IV. DISCUSSION The failures caused the intensity of image influence the thresholding results, so in training and testing process classify the data not in precise cluster. The weight visualization of fifth experiment is shown in fig 14.
Fig 10. Accuracy of the experiment 2
322
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [16] Tati L. Mengko, Rachmat G. Wachjudi, Andriyan B. Suksmono, and Qonny Danudirdjo, ―Automated Detection of Unimpaired Joint Space for Knee Osteoarthritis Assessment,‖ pp. 400–403, 2005. [17] Osteoarthritis Initiatives, ―Osteoarthritis.‖ . [18] Anifah, Purnomo, Hariadi, Purnama, Performance Evaluation of Osteoarthritis x-Ray Image Enhancement Using Clahe and Gabor Kernel, Proceeding of International Conference on Biomedical Engineering and Madical Applications (ICBEMA) BME-Days 2012. [12] Anifah, Purnomo, Hariadi, Purnama, Automatic Segmentation of Impaired Joint Space Area for Osteoatritis Knee on X-ray Image using Gabor Filter Based Morphology Process, IPTEK, Vol.22 No.3 2011, 117-176. [13] Javier R. Movellan, ―Tutorial on Gabor Filters,‖ 2008. [14] Liao, Chen, A Fast Algorithm for Multilevel Thresholding, Journal of Information Science and Engineering 17, 713-727, 2001. [15] Vala, Baxi, A Review on Otsu Image Segmentation Algorithm, International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer Engineering and Technology (IJARCET), Vol 2, Issue 2, Feb, 2013. [16] Hollmen, A LVQ Algorithm for Probabilistic Models, EUSIPCO Vol II pp 721-724, 2000.
Fig 14 Weight Visualization of fifth experiment V. CONCLUSION The results show that each experiment design has advantages and disadvantages. Overall we evaluated 25 data for training and 258 data for testing. But using LVQ based Otsu Thresholding is recommended but it still needs more improvement. ACKNOWLEDGMENT This research was supported Osteoarthritis Initiative (OAI) USA. [8] [9] [10]
[11] [12]
[13] [14]
[15]
by
REFERENCES Woolf AD, Pfleger B, ―Burden of Major Muculoskeletal Conditions, Bull World Health Organ,‖ 2003. Elders MJ, ―The increasing impact of arthritis on public health,‖ pp. 6–8, 2000. Martel-Pelletier J, Lajeunesse D, Fahmi H, Tardif G, Pelletier JP, ―New thoughts on the pathophysiology of osteoarthritis: one more step toward new therapeutic targets.,‖ 2006. Desi Sayyidati Rahim, ―Jagoan Atasi Sendi.‖ . Buckland-Wright, ―Current status of imaging procedures in the diagnosis, prognosis and monitoring of osteoarthritis,‖ vol. 11, Nov. 1997. El Miedany, ―Altered bone mineral metabolism in patients with osteoarthritis,‖ 2000. P. Podsiadlo, M. Wolski, and G. W. Stachowiak, ―Automated selection of trabecular bone regions in knee radiographs,‖ vol. 35, pp. 1870–1882, May 2008. Lior Shamir, Shari M. Ling, William W. Scott, Angelo Bos, Nikita Orlov, ―Knee X-ray image analysis method for automated detection of Osteoarthritis,‖ pp. 1–10, 2008.
323
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
324
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Web Services Implementation on Internship Management System Integrated with SIAKAD Ricky Eka Putra1, Asmunin2 1,2
Department of Informatics, State University of Surabaya Ketintang [email protected], [email protected]
Abstract – Internship is a primary course that must be taken by undergraduate students in all departments within Faculty of Engineering, State University of Surabaya. The purpose of this course is to implement what is obtained in the courses to the company real practices. Issues related to Internship that all administration process are not integrated with SIAKAD. Some examples of problems in Internship are difficult search on industrial location, industry activities, students who have not done Internship, records of Internship supervision, students information, supervisor information, administrative data, and industry feedback. Based on mentioned problems, it is necessary to integrate Internship Management System at Faculty of Engineering with Sistem Informasi Akademik (SIAKAD). Web service is implemented on this research. This research utilizes open source based software, while the format data exchange with SIAKAD utilizes JSON and XML. This system can fulfill the needs for dynamic data exchange and high interoperability. Efficiency is achieved by eliminating the process of physical data exchange. The web services make the system more efficient than ever. Index Terms – internship management information system, integrated with SIAKAD, web service.
I. INTRODUCTION Internship is a primary course that must be taken by undergraduate students in all departments within Faculty of Engineering, State University of Surabaya. Internship activities was initiated by the students looking for a company to be used as a Internship location. The first, students make a proposal and give it to the company. If the company accepted the proposal, the students can started the Internship at there. If rejected, the students should seek other companies. Internship was carried out within 1 to 3 months and guided by tutors from the industry. During Internship, students must comply the rules and regulations in the industry and guided by mentors from the industry. Every day, students must record their activities in industry and seek approval from the industry supervisor. After the implementation, students arrange an Internship report to be guided by the supervisor. After getting approval from supervisor, students can register for the Internship exam. Internship coordinator arrange a schedule the exam based on registrant data. During the exam, the
student was accompanied by one supervisor and one examiner. If the student passed the exam, the students must work on revisions and always consult with their supervisor. After they obtaining the approval of revised Internship report, students can bind the report directly according to the rules and put it in the library. After that, students will report to Internship coordinator. Then, the Internship coordinator inputs the Internship score for each student on SIAKAD State University of Surabaya. If the exam does not passed then the students must retake Internship again in the next period. Internship Management System is a solution for students, faculty member, and the coordinator in internship activities. This system provides the informations needed by them. They can manage the internship easily with utilize this system. There are many researches which implement web service on their applications. A study in Tunisia offers a service-oriented architecture that implement web services and has been reinforced with the security of information system [1]. Web services are also utilized in geospatial applications [2]. In this application or often called by Gegraphical Information System (GIS), geographical information in such environtment is served to users by web services. Since the web services may come and go and information associated with services might be dynamically changing. Semantic web services [3] is another topic research in modern technology. This research utilizes the advantage of web services. The advantage is cross-platform. The first, the researchers build and deploy a weather web service using Microsoft .NET technologies and they develop a client application using Java technologies to access the weather web service. The second is utilization of web service for securities which is developed in Java and a client for cunsuming this service is built using .NET technologies. In this research, we utilize the advantages of web service on system development. We implement web services on Internship Management System integrated with SIAKAD. This paper consists of five parts. The first part explains the background research and the previous studies of web services. The second part illustrates the theory of web service. Third part describes the method used in this resarch, the methodology or software development life cycle
325
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 model which is utilized in this research. The two last parts show the result, analysis, and the conclusion of the research work. II. WEB SERVICES According to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium), web service is a software system which is designed for support machine-to-machine interaction and could operated through a network. The emergence of web services developments and standards in support of automated business integration has driven major technological advances in the integration software space [4]. Fig. 1 is a web service schema that could be operated in any software development. Because the web service is not used directly by the end user so that the web service generally does not have a display, and required the other application to call the service. Web service simply provides a service and other applications can call the service using HTTP. Currently, the web-based application service has been widely used because of the advantages. The advantages of web service are mentioned like below:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Cross-platform. Language independent. Connecting to database. Simplify the process of data exchange. Reuse of application components.
The web service is also called an interface that describes a collections that are network-accessible through standarized XML messaging [5]. The interface hides the implementation details of the service. This allows and encourages Web Servicesbased applications to be loosely coupled [6], and cross-technology implementations. Web services need standarized messaging on the data exchange. There are many standarization which is utilized in web services implementation. In this research, we utilize XML and JSON in the implementation of web services.
By offering a standard, flexible and inherently extensible data format, XML significantly reduces the burden of deploying the many technologies needed to ensure the success of Web services. The following XML also defines a students object with 3 student records: Ricky Put ra Asmunin Naila Eka Putra B. JSON Javascript Simple Object Nation (JSON) is a simple text-based message format which is typically used in web applications because JSON is a native data representation in Javascript. JSON is derived from JavaScript and therefore is very popular as a data format in web applications. Like XML, it is designed to be readable, and this can help when debugging and testing. However, JSON can be read and written by many programming languages. According to R. Credle et al. [9], JSON supports two structures: Objects and arrays. Objects are an unordered collection of name-value pairs, where arrays are ordered sequences of values. JSON also supports four simple types: Strings, numbers, Boolean expressions, and null values. This enables JSON to describe any resource. JSON can be seen as both human and machine-readable. JSON is an easy language for humans to read, and for machines to parse The following JSON example defines a studens object, with an array 3 student records: {"students":[ {"firstName":"Ricky", "lastName":"Putra"}, {"firstName":"Asmunin", "lastName":"Naila"}, {"firstName":"Eka", "lastName":"Putra"} ]} III. METHODS Software design and development in this resarch are refer to Waterfall model, a common system development life cycle [7]. There are five steps in this model. These steps are shown in Fig 2.
Fig. 1 Web service schema [7].
A. XML Extensible Markup Language (XML) makes web services to exchange data between various applications easily. An XML document describes a web service and includes detailed information on how the web service is run. According to D. Booth [8], XML solves a key technology requirement that appears in many places.
326
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 ERD is a relationship diagram between many entities. This ERD is shown in fig 3. The entity will becomes a table in database schema. SQL command is utilized to create databases in this research. Besides that, we create the web service architecture in Internship Management System. This architecture is ilustrated in fig 4. Internship application can utilize data from SIAKAD by request the data through web service. SIAKAD responds the request and give the data in JSON and XML messaging format. Thus, the Internship web client does not need a direct access to SIAKAD database server. AUTH
Fig. 2 Waterfall model.
These steps are requirement, design, implementation, verification &validation, and maintenance with the following explanation:
REQUEST
INTERNSHIP APP
WEB SERVICE CLIENT
WEB SERVICES
SIAKAD UNESA
RESPONSE
VALIDATION 1. Requirement The system‘s services, constraints, and Fig. 4 Web service architecture. goals are established by consultation with system users [6]. This step 3. Implementation conducted by referring to the latest During this stage, the application design is Internship manual on State University of realized as a set of programs as known Surabaya. The manual contains all as code programs. Code programs is informations related Internship, such as wrote based on Internship modules. requirements, report formats, and scores. According to fig 5. There are seven Beside that, we take some interviews modules were developed in this with Internship coordinator and collect research, they are: all of necessary Internship documents. 1. Requirement and registration modul. From the interview process, Internship 2. Exam schedulling modul problems that often occur and all of user 3. Supervision modul. needs can be known. After that, we 4. Exam and revision modul. determine the research subject. The 5. Administration modul. research subjects in this research are 6. Document management modul. Internship coordinator, students, 7. Reporting modul. supervisor, examiner, heads of department and faculty, and administration. 2. Design The design describes the Internship process on the Entity Relationship Diagram (ERD). Supervisor
Administration
Approval and Supervision
Print Letter of Internship Decree
Internship Requirement and Registration modules
S T U D E N T S
Approval of Internship Requirement and Proposal
Internship Supervision
Intership Supervisor Assignment
EInternshp exa and revision
Internship Application Server
Upload Softcopy and Supported File
Schedulling Internship Exam
Internship Data Management
Reporting modules
I N T
C O O R D I N A T O R
Database
HEAD OF DEPARTMENT
Fig. 5 Internship modules schema.
Implementation on this research utilizes open source based software, LAMP (Linux, Apache, MySQL and PHP), while the format data exchange with SIAKAD utilizes JSON and XML. Data that is exchanged for the authentication in the JSON format is as follows:
Fig. 3 Internship Management System ERD
327
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 {"Auth":[ {"Username":"admin", "Password":"2123 2f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3"}, {"Username":"users", "Password":"9bc65 c2abec141778ffaa729489f3e87"}, {"Username":"public", "Password":"4c91 84f37cff01bcdc32dc486ec36961"} ]} The student data format is as follows: { "nim": "12050974218", "fname": "ANGGRAENI WIDYA", "lname": "PURWITA", "department":"Pendidikan Teknologi Informasi", "faculty":"Enginnering", "semesters":"7", "ipk":"3.01", "address": { "streetAddress": "Jl. A Yani No 10", "city": "Surabaya", "postalCode": "60111" }, "phoneNumber": [ { "type": "home", "number": "031-76523738" }, { "type": "hp", "number": "0857263827382" } ] }
4. Verification & Validation In this stage, we take some software testings before implemented in the actual business processes. The testing simulates both data and processes such as the actual event. We are looking for some bugs or errors then fixing it. From this stage, the software is expected to be error free and fill the user requirements. 5. Maintenance This stage is the final step. Maintenance involves correcting errors which were not discovered in earlier stages of the life cycle [6]. Maintenance in this research are fixing the bugs and perform data backups on a regular basis.
users also have the different facilities. All of Internship guidance is shown in fig. 7. There are Internship flowchart, proposal format and Internship guidance from State University of Surabaya. The main processes of Internship is shown in fig. 8. There are Internship registration, supervision, exam registration, upload reports.
Fig. 6 Internship Management Sytems
Fig. 7 Guide menus
Fig. 8 Internship sub menus
V. CONCLUSION Internship Management System can manage the internship easily. This research adopts web services to integrate the system with SIAKAD. Therefore, The data exchange can be performed by asking and responding services in SIAKAD. This system can fulfill the needs for dynamic data exchange and high interoperability. Efficiency is achieved by eliminating the process of physical data exchange. ACKNOWLEDGMENT This research is supported by the grant from Faculty Engineering, State University of Surabaya, Indonesia.
IV. RESULTS This application is built by utilizes LAMP as open source based software and JSON + XML as the format data exchanges. The applications interface can be seen at Fig 6, 7 and 8. Fig 6 shows the front page of Internship Management System. Users can utilize the further facilities of this system. Different
REFERENCES M. Sellami, M. Jmaiel, ―A Secured Service-Oriented Architecture for E-government in Tunisia‖, Tunisia, 2009. [2] M. S. Aktas, G. Aydin, G. C. Fox, H. Gadgil, M. Pierce, A. Sayar, ―Information Services for Grid/ Web Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) Based Geospatial Applications‖. [1]
328
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 [3] J. Nandigam, V. N. Gudivada, M. Kalavala, ―Semantic Web Services‖, Consortium for Computing Science in Colleges, 2005. [4] M. P. Papazoglu, W-J. V. D. Heuvel, ―Service oriented architectures: approaches, technologies, and research issues‖, VLDB Journal, Springer-Verlag, 2007. [5] H. Kreger, ―Web Services Concept Architecture (WSCA 1.0)‖, IBM Corporation, New Yok, May 2001. [6] I. Sommerville, ―Software Engineering 9th Edition‖, AddisonWesley, United States of America, 2011. [7] E. Cavanaugh, ―Web services: Benefits, challenges, and a unique, visual development solution‖, Altova, United States, 2006. [8] D. Booth, H. Haas, F. McCabe, E. Newcomer, M. Champion, C. Ferris, D. Orchard, ―Web Service Architecture‖, W3C Working Group, 2004. [9] R. Credle, A. Armstrong, C. Atkinson, R. Bonner, G. Pirie, I. Singh. N. Williams, M. Wilson, M. Woolley, ―Implementing IBM CICS JSON Web Services for Mobile Applications‖, International Business Machines Corporation, 2013
329
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
330
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
A Joint Balanced Scorecard and COBIT for E-learning Performance Evaluation: A Conceptual Framework Yeni Anistyasari1 1
Department of Informatics – Universitas Negeri Surabaya Gedung B1 Kampus Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
perspectives are financial, customer, internal business process, and learning and growth. The measuring of these four perspectives provide a balanced view rather than the traditional financial summary. They also provide a holistic view of complex organization for stakeholders to see the interactions and interdependencies of the component parts and the contributions. Bielavitz [2] has conducted a study about BSC implementation for evaluation and assessment of learning outcome. It provides a selective review of outcomes assessment in academic libraries and explanation of BSC methodology, focusing on its relevance to assessment and experiment of accountability. The strategy map of this research is illustrated in Fig. 1. However, this study have not implemented in e-learning. Control Objectives for Information and Related Technologies, which is later referred as COBIT [3] is an international framework that describes a set of good practices for the board, executive management, and operational business and IT managers. COBIT is developed by ISACA (Information System Audit and Control Association) in the mid-90s of the financial audit community. ISACA claimed that COBIT provides all the required processes and other enablers to support business value creation through the use of IT. This principle is known as strategic alignment which is depicted in Fig. 2. COBIT is commonly used to measure the maturity level of an IT. The maturity rating scales are initial/ad hoc, repeatable yet intuitive, defined, managed and measurable, and optimized. The indicator of maturity are based on Plan and Organise (PO), Acquire and implement (AI), Deliver and support, and monitor and evaluate (ME). Each aspect is furthermore divided into several sub-aspects. This work considers ME aspect since the object of this work is to evaluate e-learning which is IT-based. ME consists of four aspects which are (1) monitor and evaluate IT performance, (2) monitor and evaluate internal control, (3) ensure compliance with external requirements, and (4) provide IT governance.
Abstract - E-learning is emerging as a popular learning approach utilized by many higher educations. However, most e-learning applications fail to meet student and higher education goals. Several issues exist between higher education interests and student needs when they utilize elearning which make e-learning less effective. To address this issue, a framework to evaluate elearning performance is proposed in this work. The key concept is to align higher education goals and student needs when being applied in e-learning. The alignment is arranged based on balanced scorecards, which provides a strategic business planning, and COBIT, which provides best-practice guidelines for IT. The objective of this work is to give some recommendations to improve the effectiveness of elearning in higher education. Index Terms – Balanced scorecard, COBIT, e-learning, higher education, key performance.
I. INTRODUCTION Recently, utilizing e-learning system to support teaching and learning process in higher educations is a very common phenomenon. Elearning is usually implemented across an entire university, faculty, and department to support course management ant student learning process. It facilitates lifelong learning and utilizes electronic communication for teaching and learning process from distance. Learners are allowed to access the online resources and discuss with other e-learning communities. Some prior works revealed elearning can be as effective as face-to-face conventional class if the techniques are appropriate for teaching goals and e-learning is aligned with organization interests. Therefore, an alignment between learner needs and higher education interests is required and a challenging issue. Most of prior works studied the impact of e-learning based on pedagogical domain. This work proposes a conceptual framework to evaluate e-learning performance based on IT and managerial domains. Balanced scorecard (BSC) [1] is developed by David Kaplan and Robert Norton in 1992 to evaluate the organization‘s performance in four perspectives. The aforementioned four
331
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 This work proposes a joint of BSC and COBIT, partially ME 1, to evaluate e-learning performance which has not been fully investigated by previous works. The goal of this work is to provide some recommendation to improve the effectiveness of e-learning. The remaining of this paper is organized as follows. Section II describes the concept of balanced scorecard and COBIT and the combination of BSC and COBIT for e-learning measurement. Finally, the conclusion is provided in Section IV.
Fig. 2 COBIT principles [2]
II. BALANCED SCORECARD AND COBIT The basic concept of BSC is depicted in Fig. 3. The basic concept is then translated to the need of e-learning evaluation. Financial aspect is applied to control the effort to succeed financially in e-learning. Internal business process is to satisfy shareholders (i.e. learners, teachers, administration staffs, etc) by being excellent to business process. To establish learning and growth aspect, a higher education should consider the goal achievement process. The last aspect is customer whom a higher education should appear some effort to achieve the goal. The customer here are lecturers and students. The monitoring and evaluation of IT performance is measured by COBIT that satisfies the business requirements for IT. The requirements are transparency and understanding of IT cost, benefits, strategy, policies, and service in accordance with higher education governance requirements. The measurement is focused on monitoring and reporting process metrics and identifying the improvement actions. The maturity is achieved by collating and translating process performance reports into higher education management reports and by reviewing performance against agreed-upon targets and initiating necessary. The maturity is also measured by the satisfaction of management and governance entity with the performance reporting, number of improvement actions driven by monitoring activities and percent of critical processes monitored. The control objectives of ME1: Monitor and Evaluate IT performance are then described as follows. The following description is adapted from [3].
Fig. 1 Strategy map of Bielavitz [1]
A.
Monitoring approach Establish a general monitoring framework and approach to define the scope, methodology and process to be followed for measuring e-learning solution and service delivery, and monitor e-
332
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 learning contribution to the business. Integrate the framework with the corporate performance management system.
This work proposes a concept framework of elearning performance evaluation by combining balanced scorecard and COBIT. Higher education is recommended to establish the goal of e-learning utilization in terms of financial, costumer, internal business process, and learning and growth. After implementation of e-learning, higher education is expected to measure and to ensure that e-learning works on a track and align with its requirements. For further work, a testing evaluation of the proposed framework will be employed in some higher educations which utilized e-learning.
B.
Definition and collection of monitoring data Work with the business to define a balanced set of performance targets and have them approved by the business and other relevant stakeholders. Define benchmarks with which to compare the targets, and identify available data to be collected to measure the targets. Establish processes to collect timely and accurate data to report on progress against targets.
REFERENCES [1] Kaplan, R. S., & Norton, D. R. (1992). The balanced scorecard: measures that drive performance. Harvard Business Review. [2] Bielavitz, T. (2010). The Balanced Scorecard: A Systemic Model for Evaluation and Assessment of Learning Outcomes?. Evidence Based Library and Information Practice. [3] ISACA. (2007). COBIT 4.1 Fig. 3 Basic concept of BSC
C. Monitoring method Deploy a performance monitoring method (e.g., balanced scorecard) that records targets; captures measurements; provides a succinct, allaround view of e-learning performance; and fits within the enterprise monitoring system. D. Performance assessment Periodically review performance against targets, analyze the cause of any deviations, and initiate remedial action to address the underlying causes. At appropriate times, perform root cause analysis across deviations. E. Board and executive reporting Develop senior management reports on elearning‘s contribution to the business, specifically in terms of the performance of the enterprise‘s portfolio, e-learning enabled investment programs, and the solution and service deliverable performance of individual programs. Include in status reports the extent to which planned objectives have been achieved, budgeted resources used, set performance targets met and identified risks mitigated. Anticipate senior management‘s review by suggesting remedial actions for major deviations. Provide the report to senior management, and solicit feedback from management‘s review. F. Remedial actions Identify and initiate remedial actions based on performance monitoring, assessment and reporting. This includes follow-up of all monitoring, reporting and assessments. III. CONCLUSION
333
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
334
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Character Segmentation for Indonesian License Plate Using Morfology Process Haryanto1 1
Electrical Engineering University of Trunojoyo Madura JL. Raya Telang PO Box 2 Kamal Bangkalan Madura [email protected],
management, toll payment, etc. The aim of this paper is to give contribution to development of license plate recognition technology, specially for Indonesian license plate. This research is to make software used to segment characters on the Indonesian license plate and normalized each character as 20 x 50 pixels character. The character is normalized so its easyrecognition the number of the license. A. State of The Art of License Plate Recognition Bar-hen Ron, Johanan Erez, 2011[1] The research using feedfoward Neural Network, its used 3 layers, 200 neurons for input layer, 20 neurons for second layer and 10 neurons for output layer. It used 238 digit of data. Step of the reseach are filtering with yellow filter the captured image (because the colour of the license plate is yellow), feature extraction, adjusting the image using Coulomb Sum Graph, second adjusting using Lines Sum Graph, cropping the image, make the a greyscale image, then it equalized to threshold the image. Next step is segment the license plate then segment the character using sum of the line, and normalized character is recognize using neural network. Research of Serkan Ozbay, Automatic Vehicle Identification by Plate Recognition (2010) [2] Algorithm of this reseach is to recognize the license plate automatically, image is captured at the distaqnce 4 to 5 meters. Captured image is segmented as single character, and recognize each character. Feature extraction is the first algorithm of this process. Captured image is processed as black and white image, it‘s used smearing method to find the plate area. The segmentation of the character as single character using dilation operation.
Abstract - Automatic License Plat Recognition is very usefull for our dailly live, such as parking management, traffic monitoring, ticket management, toll payment management, and so on. The aim of this paper is to segment the character for license plate of Indonesia car using Indexing Method and Morfology filter. Thus it‘s could contribute for development of license plate recognition technology, specially for Indonesian license plate. Captured image is preprocessed of the following processes: resized 0,6 times from original image, sobel edge detection, image is closed, make the pixel mergerd if distance of pixel less then 10 pixels, noise is cleared, and indexing all candidates area that has posibility as license plate. Segmentation of licence plate is using moment method. Next process is normalized the plat as standart size 1000 x 300 pixels. All area in the normalized plate is indexed as candidates as character. The character is segmented using moment method if it has area 3500 pixels up to 15000 pixels and has comparion between lenght and height 1 up to 5. The characters is normalized as 20 x 50 pixels character. There are several ways to segment character of license‘s plate but using Indexing Method and Morphology Filter has good performance that has accuracy 94,74%. Index Terms : Segmentation, Indonesian license plate, index, moment methodo I. INTRODUCTION License plate recognition has been researched over the world, but research about Indonesia license plate still rare untul now. License plate in all country has the same characteristic, it has contras colour between character and the background. For example red and white, black and white, yellow and black, and so on. Automatic license plate recognition is very usefull in our dailly live, such as parking management, traffic monitoring, ticket
Research of Parker and Feder[3]
335
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 The steps of the reseach as the following: preprossed the captured image, moothing, edge detectioon, and to find the location of the plate its used genetic algorithm. Experiments in Image Segmentation for Automatic US License Plate Recognition of Beatriz Diaz Acosta, 2011[5] Image segmentation of this research is divided into two steps. First step is detection the area of plate then extractiong the plate from the background. Three method is used to find the location of the plate, first is used distance from eigenspace, second is find location of the border used edge detection and hough transform, and thirth is text detection using spectral analysis. Multivariate hiearchical agglomerative clustering and minimum –variance color quantization is used to segment US license plate. License plate recognition using Principal Components Analysis Method by Resmana Lim, Lukman Vendy W., Kartika Gunadi[10]. Captured image is identified using feature reduction Principal Components Analysis. This system has accuracy + 82%. This system is good for control system and security in parking area.
Figure 1. Steps of the research Preprocessing is used to make eas to find the location of the plate and separate it from background so plate could be processed in the next step. Feature extraction is removing information from the image as vector information, in this case the information is license plate. Plate normalization is the step that the plate is normalized as standart one. So although there are many size of plate, the normalized plate has the same size. Character segmentation is to segment character into single character. Then single character recognized with various method.
II. INDONESIAN LICENSE PLATE Indonesian License Plate is made from I mm thick aluminium metal. Its cntain two line of information: First line as area code and serial license plate number information. Second line as month and year of license. The size of car‘s license plate 395 x 135 mm. It has a 5 mm thick line between two information. At top right and bottom left side has security mark from POLRI, and at the left side and right side has special mark ―DITLANTAS POLRI‖. The colour of Indonesian License Plate are the following: Private and rental transportation has black background colour and white colour number. \public and rental transportation has yellow background colour and black colour number. Goverment transportation has red background colour and white colour number. Foreign Diplomatic Country Corps has white background colour and black colour number.
System design
Figure 2. Scheme of the system
III. METODOLOGY
IV. DATA ANALYSE
Steps of the research are illustrated at Figure 1. A.
336
Preprocessing
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
There are some preprocessing is tested, but the best result is the following steps: Image is resized into 0,6 time from original image, greyscale process, sobel edge detection, imclose pixel thatr has size minimal 10 pixels, removing noise, indexing area that has possibility as candidat, find square of area, find the height and weight.
Imclose 10 pixels. Imfill Bwboundaries Find area square
Prepocessing 1 steps: Resize 0,4 times from original image Dilation square 15 pixel. Greyscale. Threshold 0,5. Imclose 4 pixels.
Preprocessing 7 steps: Resize 0,6 times from original image Grayscale Sobel Edge detection Imclose 10 pixels. Imfill Bwboundaries Find area square
Preprocessing 2 steps: Resize 0,5 times from original image Greyscale. Sobel Edge detection Imclose strel, 7 pixels. Imfill hole Finding squre of area.
Accuracy of Process 1 is 31,58%, accuracy of process 2 is 39,47%, accuracy of process 3 is 47,74%, accuracy of process 4 is 52,63%, accuracy of process 5 is 60,53%, and accuracy of process 6 is 94,74%. Process 6 and 7 has the same accuration, but process 6 needs time more longer than process 7, its coused by the size of the image 6 is bigger than image 7.
Preprocessing 3 steps: Resize 0,2 times from original image Greyscale. Sobel Edge detection Imclose 7 pixels. Removing noise that has size 150 pixels Imclose 2 pixels Imfill hole Bwboundaries
B. Plate’s Segmentation Some of methods to segment the plate are the following: Colour filter Hough transform Using isolation and find the candidat of the plate. Colour Filter Based on Johanan erez research if the plate‘s segmentation using colour filter there is an troble if the colour of the background and foreground is the same. This method is difficult to implement for Indonesian‘s license plate because the colour of Indonesian license plate are variety and there are many car that has the same colour with the plat. Figure 3 is example that car and license plate has the same colour.
Preprocessing 4 steps: Resize 0,2 times from original image Sobel Edge detection Imclose 7 pixels. Removing noise that has size 150 pixels square Imclose 2 pixels Imfill hole Preprocessing 5 steps: Resize 0,5 times from original image Grayscale Sobel Edge detection Imclose 7 pixels. Removing noise that has size 150 pixels Imclose 2 pixels Imfill hole
i.
(b) (c) Figure 3. the colour of the car and plate has the same colour HoughTtransform Indonesian‘s license plate doesn‘t have special line to make boundary of plate area. It caused if Indonesian‘s plate using Hough Transform still could not separate the plate area, so Hough Transform do not match to crop Indonesian‘s from the background.
Preprocessing 6 steps: Resize 0,8 times from original image Grayscale Sobel Edge detection
337
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Figure 7. Candidate area of plate Figure 10. is figured the thresholded image. Next process is segmented characters as single character so the character could be recognized. Figure 4. Original image and resized image.
Figure 8. RGB Indonesian License Plate area
Figure 9. Greyscale Indonesian License Plate area Figure 5. Hough Transform Figure 5 is example Indonesian‘s plate using Hough Transform to separate the plate and background. From original image in Figure 4. It‘s clear that using Hough Transform couldn‘t boundary the plate area so it‘s proof that Hough Transform couldn‘t implement to crop plate area automatically.
Figure 10. Thresholded Indonesian License Plate area Moment feature extraction is used, and it‘s define as:
Using isolation and find the candidat of the plate. Preprocessing image is indexed, result of indexed image from Figure 4 is Figure 6. Here are some candidates s plate area in Figure 6. The candidates is choosen as plate area based on the square of area and comparation between weight and height. If it match to criteria so it‘s the plate area. The coordinate of plate is used to crop the plate.
Mpq = R xP yq f(x,y) dxdy
…. (1)
Where as N = p+q Integration range is x (-1, 1) and y (-1,1) to avoid divergence in finding the center of coordinate area, whereas square had length 2a for x axis coordinate and 2b for y axis coordinate. The center of the moment is definded as: Mpq = R xP yq (x-x)i(y-y)I f(x,y) dxdy …. (2) Whereas (x,y) is the center of area f(x,y) Based on experiment, the accuration of this method finding the plate area is 92,11%. All colour of Indonesian plate could be detected.
Figure 6. Indexed candidate area
C. License Plate Normalization Comparation Methode is used to normalize the license plate. Cropped plate has variety of size so we have to make it has the standart size 300 x 1000 pixels. Figure 11 is an example normalized size.
Cropping result from Figure 6 is figured in Figure 7. If coordinate information is used toRGB and greyscale image the result is shown in Figure 8 and Figure 9
338
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Figure 11. Normalized plat‘s size Figure 14. Noise if using coulomb sum graph and line sum graph method
Cropped image is (gx, gy) has standart size 300 x 1000 pixels, the scale is defined: Scalex = 300/gx Scaley = 1000/gy
Red elips and blue box in Figure 14 is image‘s noise if using coulomb sum graph and line sum graph method. So it couldn‘t using this method to separate into single character.
...….. (3) ……. (4)
Transform image has size: Indexing Character’s Candidate Figure 12 each area is indexed. Indexed area is filtered by comparison filter and square of area filter. Comparison filter is area filtered that has weight and length has comparison 1 and 5. Square of Area filter is area is filtered that has square of area 2500 pixels to 15000 pixels. Figure 13 is an example of segmentation process using indexing method and morphology filter.
Ggx‘ = gx x scalex ……. (5) Ggy‘ = gy x scaley ……. (6) Normalized image is (gx‘, gy‘) D.
Character Segmentation of License Plate Some methods to segment character in license plate are: Coloumb sum Graph and Line sum Graph Indexing Character‘s candidate Coloumb sum Graph and Line sum Graph Figure 12 is Line sum graph from normalized plate and figure 13 is Coulomb Sum Graph from Figure 10. This method is match to implement to license‘s plate that just has information about plate number. Indonesian license plate beside has information about number plate, it has information about the lifetime of plate‘s number too, and it has straight line to separate the plate number and lifetime of the plate. So Coulomb sum graph and line sum graph isn‘t best method in character segmentation for Indonesian‘s plate.
Figure 15. Character Segmentation E.
Character Normalized All segmentation characters is normalized as 20 x 50 pixels character. The purpose of this process in order to make to recognize the character of the license plate.
Figure 16. Thresholded and Normalized Character
Normalized scale of character is: Scalexi = 20/gxi ……. (7) Scaleyi = 50/gyi ……. (8) Transform character size is : Ggxi‘ = gxi x scalex ….. ...(9) Ggyi‘=gyi x scaley ...….. (10) Standart size of character is (gxi‘, gyi‘) or 20 x 50 pixels.
Figure 12. Line Sum Graph
V. CONCLUSION This paper proposes an effective method to segment character of Indonesian license‘s plate. There are several ways to segment character of license‘s plate but using Indexing Method and Morphology Filter has good performance that has
Figure 13. Crop Coulomb Sum Graph
339
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 accuracy 94,74%. This method is match of Indonesian license plate characteristics. ACKNOWLEDGMENT [5] Acosta, Experiment in Image Segmentation for Automatic US Licence Plate Recognition. Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University 2011 [6] Munir, Rinaldi, Pengolahan Citra Digital dengan Pendekatan Algoritmik Penerbit Informatika, 2004. [7] Mori Nishihida, Yamada. Optical Character Recognition. John Willey and Son. 1999 [8] www.wikipedia.org [9] Wibawa, Pengolahan Citra Iris dengan menggunakan SOM untuk mendeteksi secara Dini Gangguan pada Organ Pankreas sebagai penyebab Timbulnya Penyakit Diabetes Melitus, ITS Surabaya, 2005. [10] Resmana Lim, Lukman Vendy W., Kartika Gunadi Sistem Pengenalan Plat Nomor Mobil dengan Metode Principal Components Analysis, Jurnal Teknik Elektro Universitas Kristen Petra Maret 2013/Vol. 8/No. 1
The author grategully acknowledges the helpful suggestions made by anonymous reviewers for improving the paper from its earlier draft, and thank all the participants in user study experiments. REFERENCES [1] Ron, Erez, A. Real-Time Vehicle License Plate Recognition (LPR) system. Ollendorf Research Center. 2011 [2] Ozbay, Automatic Vehicle Identification by Plate Recognition. Transaction on Engineering, Computing and Technology V 9 November ISSN 1305-5313.2010 [3] Parker and Feder An Approach to License Plate Recognition University of Calgary. 2009. [4] Berlangga, Besada, dkk. Optimizing Statistical Character Recognition using Evolutionary Strategies to Recognize Aircraft Tail Number EURASIP Journal on Applied Signal Processing 2013
[11] Mousa, Amthal et.al., Fuzzy based Decision Support Model for Irrigation System Management, International Journal of Computer Applications (0975 – 8887) Volume 104 – No.9, October 2014
340
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Fig 1. ET0 fuzzy predicting surfaces
The Effect of Convolutional Coding and Bit Interleaving for Rayleigh Communication Channel Pradini Puspitaningayu1, Faisal Aries Ramadhany2, Ahmadan Ainul Fikri3, Rosmita Dwijayanti4 1,2,3
Electrical Engineering Department of Universitas Negeri Surabaya Jalan Ketintang, Surabaya 1
pradinip@unesa,ac,id, 2
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
Abstract – Among multicarrier transmission techniques, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is the most popular one of that uses parallel data streams in communication system for its ability to enhance the data rate. This paper concerned with comparison of the performance of OFDM system using different modulation schemes under influence AWGN and Rayleigh fading channel. Simulations of OFDM signals are carried out with Rayleigh faded signals to understand the effect of channel coding and to produce optimum value of Bit Error Rate (BER). Evaluate with applying the ½ rate convolutional code (CC) for Rayleigh channel in order to optimize the error correction of the information bit in conjunction with Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) modulation. The simulation is done on MATLAB software.
conclusion that Rayleigh Channel are less in the packet loss, bit loss BER and SNR as compared to AWGN channel which shows that Rayleigh Channel is better than AWGN channel. This research still only focus on the comparing which is the best channel using in OFDM with QPSK, and did not give a solution to correcting errors in the transmission communication process of the information bit.
Digital communications can use a transmission technique that is Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) which is sending data in parallel. OFDM itself is a multicarrier transmission technique, which the spectrum is broken into multiple subcarriers and on each subcarrier is modulated to the low rate using QPSK modulation. Convolutional coding is one part of the coding techniques that help the working of channel coding in order to work optimally that generated from wave and the forward error correction techniques.
Keywords : Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN), Rayleigh Fading Channel, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), Convolutional Code (CC). 1.
INTRODUCTION
Telecommunication technology nowadays requires more and more reliability security to ensure the information can be sent with minimal errors. Many methods were developed, from optimizing a modulation technique, until providing a channel encoder in a set of communication system. As one of the most promising multiplexing and modulation methods, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) also offers higher reliability and capacity increase. It sends data in parallel by dividing the whole channel into subcarriers. Each subcarrier has a narrow bandwidth which makes signals more durable from frequency selective caused by multiple delay spread.
This research propose an analysis of OFDM system performance with 1/2 rate convolutional coding and using different modulation schemes between AWGN and Rayleigh Fading Channel. From those different modulation schemes, we will perform its performance to produce optimum value of Bit Error Rate (BER) function. The obtained results then have the ability to give recommendation which one is the most suitable scheme for a OFDM system in communication process. 2.
DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION
Telecommunication systems development are growing rapidly with the presence of digital communication. In this digital communication data transmission had a slight change and adopts a little
Sharma, et all [3] in their research analyzed the OFDM with QPSK using AWGN and Rayleigh fading Channel. It came up with a
341
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 from analog technology. Digital communication itself also has little interference with the data transmission.
A.
by receive the data signal due to interference from signals. In this study used two Jamming techniques, namely Single Tone Jamming (STJ) and Multi Tone Jamming (MTJ). Single Tone Jamming is transmitted on a single frequency shown in Figure 2. Thus, the jamming signal is a continuous tone wave that placed on a single frequency. STJ also called Jamming spot.
System Model
The digital communication, there is a transmission technique with a lot of frequency (multicarrier) perpendicular (orthogonal) which is called OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing). In OFDM modeling input data containing bits of information that generated randomly and uniformly distributed then encoded by convolutional encoder with rate ½ and constraint length 7. Once the input data is sent in parallel that have previously been in the serial to parallel converter (S/P) according to the number of subcarriers used which is 48 and the number of data symbols on each subcarrier which is 64, then that input data will be modulated on QPSK In QPSK there are four different output phases, then there must be four different input conditions. To produce four different input conditions more than a single bit have to be used. Using 2 bits, there are four possible conditions: 00, 01, 10 and 11. The next process is Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) and guard interval addition in the form of Cyclic Prefix (CP) with a length of 1/8 of the number of IFFT points. Then data passes Rayleigh channel contained Jamming and the input data is received by the recipient. After that proceed with cyclic prefix removal, FFT which the data is passed back to the data series and subsequently occur demodulation then the data will be compared with the data input data to get the number of Bit Error Rate (BER). The explanation is illustrated in Figure 1.
Fig. 2 Single-tone jamming
() ( ) ……………………(1) Where: A = Amplitude f = STJ Frequency = An early stage of uniform distribution between (0, 2π). C.
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) is a transmission technique that uses some mutually perpendicular frequencies (orthogonal). Data transmission is done paralleled on a frequency domain. Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a multicarrier transmission, whereby existing spectrum is divided into several subcarriers of each subcarrier and modulated by the data stream at a low rate. D.
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) Modulation QPSK modulation is a type of modulation M-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) with M=4. Input bit binary split into two transmission channels, namely baseband I and Q, then the channel is converted into a signal by the PAM signal converter, from a binary signal which has an amplitude of +1 and 0, to L-level signal which has amplitude + (L -1) and - (L - 1), can be called with 2 to L Converter, where the value of L = 2k / 2. Once the signal had converted into a signal PAM, then modulated by the balanced modulator with Sin (ωct) on channel I and Cos (ωct) on channel Q, then summed linearly, into a signal I + jQ and signals turn into modulated signals M-QAM.
Fig. 1 OFDM design
B.
Jamming
Jamming is a disturbance at the time of receiving and sending data that effected 342
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Has four symbols that have the same amplitude with different phase. The fourth symbol is formed from a group of two input bits, so there are four possible conditions, there are 00, 01, 10 and 11. Each bit produces one of four possible phases, so the output rate is half of the input rate.
data bits that the current output is dependent upon. The constraint length determines how powerful and complex the code is. Convolutional encoder converts data k sequence into code n sequences using k × n matrix transfer function G (D). In this
E.
FFT and IFFT In the OFDM system, the relationship of the subcarriers orthogonal can be implemented using Fourier transformation, in which the transmitter side OFDM (modulator) using Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) to convert the signal with frequency domain to the time domain, while at the receiving side OFDM (Demodulator) using Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to convert the signal back into the domain frequency. IFFT and FFT make the equation for modulation and demodulation process becomes simpler and easily applied on the OFDM system.
study, code rate used is that means one input will be encoded into 2 output. G.
Parameter Simulation For the simulation, we set some important parameters. First thing to consider is the simulation is performed in baseband equivalent model. The channel coding used is convolutional coding with half rate, 7 constraint length and [171 131] as the polynomial generator. The modulation technique is 16-QAM with 48 subcarriers and 64 points of IFFT/FFT. The cyclic prefix is 25% of the FFT points, with Eb/N0 are between 0 – 40 dB.
F.
Convolutional Coding Convolutional Coding is a part of the coding techniques that can help the working channel coding in order to work optimally that generated from waves and Forward Error Correction (FEC) technique. Convolutional Coding itself is often used on the system when the system SNR is low. Then coding techniques check the errors on the transmission of information bits. Convolutional coder able to check e bit error of each 4k bits, where k is the solution to 2k = the number of nodes (state).
The used channel in the simulation is assumed priority Rayleigh channel. The jamming strategies are single-tone and multitone jamming. III. RESULT & DISCUSSION This section of the chapter presents and discusses all of the results obtained by the computer simulation program written in Matlab7.9.0, following the analytical approach of a wireless communication system considering AWGN, Rayleigh Fading Channel. A test case is considered with the synthetically generated data. The results are represented in terms of bit energy to noise power spectral density ratio (Eb/No) and bit error rate (BER) for practical values of system parameters. A. BER comparison between AWGN channel and Rayleigh Fading Channel.
…………………………….(2) dmin is the shortest distance between two lines with the same start and end nodes on the trellis diagram. dmin is also the shortest distance between zero track and the other track on the trellis diagram that starts at node 0 (time 0) and ends at node 0 (next time).
A convolutional code is generated by passing the information sequence through a finite state shift register. In general, the shift register contains N k-bit stages and m linear algebraic function generators based on the generator polynomials. The input data is shifted into and along the shift register, k bits at a time. The number of output bits for each k bit user input data sequence is n bits. The code rate :
Figure 3. Performance of AWGN vs RayleighChannel
Figure 3 shows that bit error rate in AWGN channel is better than Rayleigh-fading channel. But this is the closest approach to the real condition that when a signal is passed into the channel, it will surely experience fading. From now on, the rayleigh-fading approach will be used for the following simulations.
R=k/n ……………………………………..(3) The parameter N is called the constraint length and indicates the number of input 343
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 By looking for those simulation results, it can be concluded that system with convolutional coding and interleaver performs best in rayleighfading channel to overcome the effect of random error and burst error. The best convolutional coding rate was ½ and the best interleaver matrix was 8x8. It means that this formula is the most recommended to be applied on OFDM-based communication system.
B. BER Comparison in Rayleigh Fading Channel between system with and without convolutional coding and interleaver. 0
10
-1
10
-2
BER
10
-3
10
-4
10
no codec code rate 1/2 code rate 2/3 rate 1/2 with interleaver rate 2/3 with interleaver
-5
10
REFERENCES [1] Proakis, John G., Digital Communications, Third edition, New York, McGraw Hill, 1995. [2]Gitlin, Richard D., Jeremiah F. Hayes, and Stephen B. Weinstein, Data Communications Principles, New York, Plenum Press, 1992. [3]. G.F. Elmasry,l Comparative Review of Commercial vs. Tac tica I Wi re less Networks, IEEE Communication Magazine, October 201O. [4] R. Prasad, OFDMlor llireless Communicotion System, Artech House,2fiX [5]J.G. Proakis, M. Salehi, Drgzlal Communication Fifih Edition, McGraw-Hill, 200E [6]. AM. Michelson, AH. Levesque, Error{ontrol Techniques for Digital Commuoication, John Willey & Sons, 1985. [7]. TJ( Mmq Error Correction Coding, A John Wiley and Sons, Inc. Publication" 2fi)5. [8]. R Poisel, Modern Communications Jamming Principles and Techniques, Artech House,20l l. BOOKS :U0l. [9]J,G. Proakis, M. Salehi, Drgrral Commtnication Fifth Edinon, McCraw-Hill,2008 [10] AM. Michelson" AH. Levesque, Error{ontrol Techniques for Digital Communication, John Willey & Sons, 1985. [12]. T.K- Mmn, Error Correction Coding, A John Wiley and Sons, Inc. Publication, 2005. [13]. R. Poisel, Modern Communications Jamming Principles and Tecbniques, Artech House,20l l.
-6
10
0
2
4
6
8 Eb/No (dB)
10
12
14
16
Figure 4. Performance on Rayleigh-fading channel with convolutional coding and interleaver addition
Figure 4 shows that by using convolutional coding with rate ½ and interleaver has the best performance compared to other coding rate. C. BER comparison between system with convolutional coding inserted jamming and system with convolutional coding without jamming. Single-tone Jamming
0
10
-1
BER
10
-2
10
-3
10
Interleaver 4x4 Interleaver 8x8 Interleaver 16x16 -4
10
0
2
4
6
8 10 Eb/No (dB)
12
14
16
18
Figure 5. Performance on Rayleigh-fading channel with convolutional coding and interleaver with jamming insertion
Figure 5 shows that the best interleaver matrix was the 8x8 compared to 4x4 and 16x16 when the system was attacked by single-tone jamming. IV. CONCLUSION
344
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Impacts of the Use of Appropriate Technology on the Increase of Milkfish Processing Productivity Supari Muslim1, Aminudin Kasdi2, Any Sutiadiningsih3 1
2
Faculty of Engineering, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
Faculty of Social Sciences, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya 3 Faculty of Engineering, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
Abstract - Sidoarjo is the largest producer of shrimp and milkfish in East Java. The shrimp and milkfish production reached more than 85% of the total production, and about 70% is the production of milkfish. The number of milkfish farmers in Sidoarjo reached 3,227 people with 15 530 ha farm land. The total fish production in 2009 reached 16.03 thousand tons, up 1.13% over the previous year. However, the potential for milkfish is not processed optimally, because the Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) of processed milkfish has many weaknesses, such as: (1) the means of production are still conventional; (2) the skills of human resources is still low; (3) knowledge of product diversification and higinies is still limited; (5) the packaging model is not good yet; (6) the packaging process are still manual; (7) the ability to establish trade cooperation is still low; and (8) the marketing model is still traditional. Based on some of the weaknesses of SMEs above, this study was aimed to increase the productivity of processed milkfish through engineering and utilization of appropriate technology, which includes: (1) the milkfish smoking machine; (2) the raw material mixer for otak-otak bandeng; and (3) the effect of the use of appropriate technologies to increase the productivity of processed milkfish. Therefore, a study was conducted, with the experimental method in the location of SMEs, namely in Kalanganyar, Sedati, Sidoarjo used as a role model in this study. This study found the following results: (1) the milkfish smoking machine, with a temperature setting, can increase the productivity by 250% compared to traditional fumigation; (2) the raw material mixer for otak-otak bandeng can increase the production capacity by 400% compared to traditional mixing; and (3) by utilizing the appropriate milkfish processing machine, the productivity and quality of processed milkfish can be increased, and the stability of the supply of products to customers more secure, unit production costs become cheaper— thus increasing the competitiveness of the products. Based on the above findings, the research suggested that the SMEs processing milkfish in Sidoarjo use:
(1) milkfish smoking machine with temperature setting; and (2) the raw material mixer for otak-otak bandeng as used by UD. Hikmah Arta Makmur, because the machine has proven to increase the productivity. Index Terms - SMEs processing milkfish, Appropriate Technology, smoked milkfish, and Otakotak Bandeng.
I. INTRODUCTION Sidoarjo District is the largest producer of shrimp and milkfish in East Java. The shrimp and milkfish production reached more than 85% of the total production, and about 70% is the production of milkfish. The number of milkfish farmers in Sidoarjo reached 3,227 people with 15 530 ha farm land. The total fish production in 2009 reached 16.03 thousand tons, up 1.13% over the previous year which was 3,465 tons [1]. The abundant milk products processed by SMEs in the vicinity of the pond, one of which is UD. Hikmah Arta Makmur. To produce such a variety of processed milk, UD. Hikmah Arta Makmur has a workshop in the village of Kalanganyar, Sedati, Sidoarjo. However, the potential for milkfish could not be processed optimally, because the small and medium enterprises (SMEs) of processed milkfish has many weaknesses, such as: (1) the means of production are still conventional; (2) the skills of human resources is still low; (3) knowledge of product diversification and higinies is still limited; (5) the packaging model is not good yet; (6) the packaging process are still manual; (7) the ability to establish trade cooperation is still low; and (8) the marketing model is still traditional. Based on some of these weaknesses, through the activities of the National Priorities Research Master Plan for the Acceleration and Expansion of Indonesian Economic Development (Penprinas-MP3EI) 2011-2025, an evaluation
345
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 was conducted through interviews, observation, and experiment on the effect of the use of appropriate technologies (Milkfish Smoking Machine and Dough Mixer Machine for otakotak bandeng) to increase the productivity of SMEs processing fish in Kalanganyar, Sedati, Sidoarjo. It is hoped that SMEs processing fish that have improved productivity is: (1) strong and capable of producing a variety of processed milk and diversification effectively and efficiently through the use of TTG, so the cost of the production unit to be cheap, which means it has high competitiveness ; (2) able to improve the quantity and quality of various processed milkfish products are hygienic; (3) capable of acting as a creator of new jobs for the surrounding community; (4) able to increase the contribution to national food security; and (5) more able to improve themselves as the motor of the national economy. II.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Milkfish (15 in number) to be smoked are hung inside the machine evenly; The stove is turned on, until the coconut shell lights; Coconut shell being burnt will produce smoke and heat the engine; Fumigation of the milkfish began to work; and Fumigation is done until fish is cooked (about 4 hours with a temperature of 50 ° C.
B. Dough Mixer Machine Dough Mixer Machine for otak-otak bandeng resulting from this study is shown in Figure 3. Figure 4 is the raw material that have been stirred by the machine. Figure 5 is a milkfish skin ready to be filled by the dough mixer. Figure 6 otak-otak bandeng that have been fried and ready to eat.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Milkfish Smoking Machine In the following is Milkfish smoking machine produced in this study as shown in picture 1. Mean while, picture 2 is smoked milkfish produced by UD. Hikmah Arta Makmur, as a role model in this study. Figure 3. Dough Mixer Machine for otak-otak bandeng
Fig. 4. Mixing of Otak-otak Bandeng
Figure 1. Milkfish Smoking Machine
Figure 5. Milkfish skin
Figure 2. Smoked milkfish
Before being operated continuously, feasibility of the milkfish smoking machine must be tested technically, so that production capacity can be known when the engine reaches optimum point. The performance testing is done with the following steps: 1. The combustion must initially be filled with pieces of coconut shell; 2. LPG Stoves rack mounted under the combustion;
Figure 6. Otak-Otak Bandeng
Before being operated continuously, feasibility of the dough mixer for otak-otak bandeng must be tested technically, so that production capacity can be known when the engine reaches optimum point. Testing is technically done by using technical feasibility test instruments, and the test results are shown in Table 1 below.
346
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 method, the process of curing is considered good, if the weight of the fish that shrinkage of only about (5-10)% of the weight of the fish after weeded. Should be maintained, so that the smoked fish do not become dry and hard, as this will reduce the quality [3]. The test results of performance against MPB shown in Table 2 below.
Tabel 1. Result of Technical Feasibility Test on Dough Mixer Machine for Otak-Otak Bandeng
No 1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
Description Placement of the machine Placement of the machine against shared connecting panel Installation of SCP to the machine Electricity input to Electric Motor 220V Initial Currents (Is) to Electric Motor (max 1,2 In) Normal current (In) of work of Electric Motor Frequency od electric Motor (50 Hz) Temperatur of Motor at normal work (<70°C) III.
Status Pass the test Pass the test
Tabel 2 Performance test results against the machine (capacity 15 milkfish)
No.
Weight of LPG needed (kg) 1 I 55 60 0,8 2 II 65 75 1,5 3 III 80 95 1,95 As shown in Table 2, the evaporation process consists of three phases, namely Phase I, Phase II and Phase III. In phase I, the temperature curing is used at 55 ° Celsius, with a curing time of 60 minutes, which require as much as 0.8 kg of LPG. In stage II, used curing temperature is 65 ° C, with a curing time of 75 minutes, which require as much as 1.5 kg of LPG. Mean while, in Phase III, the curing temperature is 80 °C, in 95 minutes, which require as much as 1.95 kg of LPG. The relationship between the curing temperature, curing time, and the weight of LPG required by the machine is shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8 below.
Pass the test Pass the test Pass the test Pass the test Pass the test Pass the test
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
A. Smoked Milkfish Machine Before the engine is operated continuously, the engine must be tested technical feasibility, as described above. Furthermore, the machine is tested to determine its production capacity when it reaches the optimum point. Performance test conducted using the method according to the research by Saparinto [2]. According Saparinto [2], in principle, fumigation of milkfish can be carried out according to the scheme of making the smoked milkfish in general. In general, smoked milkfish processing is done in such stages as follows: (1) first smoked milkfish with thick smoke temperature (30-40) °C for (3060) minutes, in order to evaporate some of the water evenly from the fish; (2) Furthermore, the temperature was raised to (50-60) ° C, the thickness of the smoke is reduced, and the duration of curing (30-45) minutes; (3) The final stage is to raise the temperature slowly with temperature (7080)°C for (30-60) minutes. The temperature setting is done by adjusting the size of the fire in the LPG stove. There are somewhat different from the method of curing by Saparinto [2] as described above. According Saparinto [2] there are some entrepreneurs who do it with heat curing at temperature (70-80) ° C for several hours, and then the temperature is lowered back. The curing continued for several days. However, whatever the
Stage of curing process
Curing temperature (°Celcius)
Curing time (minute)
Figure 7.The relationship between curing temperature, Curing Time and the weight of LPG required by machine
Figure 8. Graph of the relationship between curing temperature, Curing Time and the weight of LPG required by machine
Through three stages of the curing process, as many as 15 milkfish are processed and ready to be consumed. Thus, based on the performance of the engine test results in Table 2 along with Figure 7 and Figure 8, it can be concluded that this machine can be used reliably
347
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 in order to improve productivity UD. Hikmah Arta Makmur. With the use of these machines, the productivity of curing can be increased from 3x10 milkfish / day (in the traditional smoking process) to 7x 15 milkfish / day, which means that there is an increase in production as much as = (105-30) / 30 x 100% = 250%. The increase of productivity is not only meaningful for customers of milkfish in general, but also can reduce unit costs of production, which means increasing competitiveness in the market of the ASEAN Economic Community. B. Dough Mixer Machine Based on the discussion with the SME UD. Hikmah Arta Makmur, the results were declared good and evenly. If the results of stirring are evenly, quality of otak-otak bandeng is better. With the results of this test, the machine may be used and function fully as a mixer. This mixing machine capacity is 25 kg/hours or as much as 125 kg/5 hours. During this time, the traditional production process (traditional/manual mixing) for 5 hours /day, manufacturers are only able to produce as much as 25 kg. It can be concluded that by using the raw material mixing machine, the results is finer, and the production capacity increased by 400%, which means that the unit cost of production becomes lower, thus increasing competitiveness. Increased competitiveness, in line with the demands of the Asean economy society, suggests that we should be able to face competition by improving product quality and lower unit costs of production.
100% = 250%. Likewise, by the use of the machine, (1) a mixture of raw materials brains banding produced is better and evenly; (2) quality of otak-otak bandeng is higher ,; and (3) the production capacity increased by 400%, which means that the unit cost of production becomes lower, thereby improving product competitiveness of otak-otak bandeng. It can be concluded that, with the use of machines for processing milkfish, which consists of the milkfish smoking machine, and dough mixer for otak-otak bandeng, then: (1) the productivity and quality of milkfish production can be increased; (2) stability and supply products to customers more secure; (3) the price of the unit costs of production become cheaper; (4) competitiveness of products to be superior; and (5) improving the competitiveness of the market is in line with the demands of the Asean Economy Society (MEA), that we should be able to face competition by improving product quality and lowering the unit cost of the product. IV.
CONCLUSION
Based on the result of experiment and discussion, this study found the following conclusions: The milkfish smoking machine, with a temperature setting, can increase the productivity by 250% compared to traditional curing/fumigation. The raw material mixer for otak-otak bandeng can increase the production capacity by 400% compared to manual/traditional mixing. By utilizing the appropriate milkfish processing machine, the productivity and quality of processed milkfish can be increased, and the stability of the supply of products to customers more secure, unit production costs become cheaper— thus increasing the competitiveness of the products.
C.Impacts of the Use of Appropriate Technology on the Increase of Milkfish Processing Productivity As explained above, that the appropriate technology (TTG) generated in this study are, smoked milkfish machine, and dough mixer machine for otak-otak bandeng. Both engines have been tested TTG technical feasibility, so that the machines can be used by UD Hikmah Arta Makmur as milk processing SMEs and as a role model in this study. With the use of smoked milkfish machine, productivity can be improved of the average productivity of milkfish 3x10/7x15 day to milk/day, which means that there is an increase in production as much as = (105-30)/30 x
REFERENCES [1]
Pemerintah Kabupaten Sidoarjo (2011). Sidoarjo Dalam Angka. Sidoarjo: Pemerintah Kabupaten Sidoarjo. [2] Kurniawan, A. (2013). Aneka Olahan Bandeng Maharani Crispy-Sidoarjo. Surabaya: Jurusan PKK-Tata Boga, Fakultas Teknik-Unesa. [3] Astrawan, M.W dan Astrawan, M. (1988). Teknologi Pengolahan Pangan Hewani Tepat Guna. Jakarta: Akademika Pressindo.
348
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Increasing the Productivity of Chips Manufacturers through Utilization of Chip Raw Materials Chopper and Oil Drying Machine Sukma Perdana Prasetya 1, Endryansyah 2, Retnani 3 1
Faculty of Social Sciences, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected] 2 Faculty of Engineering, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
3
Faculty of Languages and Arts, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya
Abstract - The availability of inferior tubers in Indonesia are very abundant. However, during this time, the processing of inferior tubers is not optimal. In general, inferior tubers are processed by boiling and frying. According to Ginting, the types of products processed from inferior tubers are still largely in the form of fresh processed products such as boiled potatoes (49.1%), fried potatoes (27.2%), sawut (15.5%), shredded (4.5% ), getuk (3.4%) and carang mas (<1%). This phenomenon shows that the utilization of the inferior-tubers for the purpose of food is still very limited. In fact, the Small and Medium Enterprises (SME) can easily process inferior tubers into a variety of food products (taro chips, purple cassava chips, honey cassava chips, yam chips, carrot bread, etc.). However, SMEs chips manufacturers have a variety of drawbacks. Based on the initial survey, SMEs in Sentra Industri Kripik (Bangsal, Mojokerto), has several weaknesses which are: (1) the means of production is conventional; (2) the skills of human resources (HR) is still low; (3) and knowledge of product diversification is still limited. The weaknesses need some solution, because of the role and contribution of SMEs greatly to the growth and resilience of the national economy. The solution can be done by using the appropriate technology machines. Through PENPRINAS MP3EI 2011-2025, in 2015, the experiment was held on the use of Appropriate Technology Machines that includes raw material chips chopper/slicer engine and oil drainer engine, in order to increase the productivity of SMEs processing inferiortubers in Bangsal, Mojokerto, East Java. Based on experiments conducted, the research found out that: (1) the use of raw material chips chopper engine can increase the average productivity of chopped raw material chips to 55 kg / hour or an average productivity increase of 300% compared to the productivity of traditional method (as much as 12,5kg/hour); (2) the use of oil drainer engine can increase productivity draining oil to the chips into 30 kg/hour or an increase in the average productivity of
200% compared to the previous productivity (as much as 10 kg/h); and (3) the content of the oil that is low on chips will improve product quality of chips (chips not rancid, and the average age of the chips be longer). Based on some of the findings, the study suggested: (1) the chips processing engine be maintained in prime condition, and human resources are needed, specifically as professional operators for the chips processing engine; and (2) the oil draining of the fried chips is a critical point of the whole process of making chips; hence, the critical point should be the real concern for chips manufacturers in general. Index Terms - chips, chips manufacturers, raw material chips chopper engine and oil drainer engine
I. INTRODUCTION There are many inferior tubers in Indonesia, for all that the production of inferior tubers has not been optimally managed. The most types of tubers cultivated are Garut, Ganyong, Gadung, Uwi, Gembili, Uwi Katak, Kimpul, Talas Belitung, Suwek [1]. But producing the inferior tubers during this time is not optimal. Generally the tubers are produced by boiling and frying. According to Ginting [2], the types of products processed from inferior tubers are still largely in the form of fresh processed products such as boiled potatoes (49.1%), fried potatoes (27.2%), sawut (15.5%), shredded (4.5% ), getuk (3.4%) and carang mas (<1%). This shows that inferior tubers used for food is very limited [3]. In the case, according to Arfiningsih [4], Small and Medium Enterprise can easily produce inferior tubers into a variety of foods such as taro chips, purple tuber chips, honey tuber chips, yam chips, carrot bread, and others.
349
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Referring to preliminary survey, the Small and Medium Enterprise, in Sentra Industri Kripik (Bangsal, Mojokerto), has weakness such as follows; (1) The conventional means of production; (2) the low human resources skill; (3) and the limited knowledge of product diversification, (5) the traditional packaging models; (6) lack of ability to establish trade cooperation; and (7) the traditional marketing model. Since the role and contribution of Small and Medium Enterprise (UKM) to national economic Figure 1. The Chips Raw Material Slicer Machine growth and resilience is so significant, that the problem of their weakness must be solved immediately. The solutions such as the conventional means of production, it can be solved by appropriate technology (TTG). Through PENPRINAS MP3EI 2011-2025 in year of 2015, it will be held experiments on the use of appropriate technology that includes raw material chips slicer and oil dyer for increasing the productivity of Small and Medium Enterprise‘s inferior tuber in Bangsal, Mojokerto, Figure 2. The Raw Material of Chips (Purple Tubers) and The sliced product of East Java. The manufacturer‘s increased product Raw Material quality, it is expected that UKM, as follows (1) Table 1 resilient and potential to process inferior tubers Result of feasibility test for the chips raw material slicer effectively and efficiently through the use of machine appropriate technologies (TTG), so the unit cost of (machine roll = 2800 rpm) production can be cheap, meaning that it is highly No. Description Status competitive; (2) potential to improve the quantity 1 Panel Plancement of Connecting Pass the test and quality of chips processed products with inferior Share tubers raw materials; (3) potential to play as job 2 Instalation of Panel Plancement of Pass the test vacancy provider, for the aim in equalizing the Connecting Share to machine distribution of community income; (4) potential to 3 Input Voltage to 220V Electricity Pass the test Motor increase the contribution on national food security; 4 First current (Im) to electrical Pass the test and (5) more potential to improve themselves as motor ( 1.2 maximal of nominal national economy generators. II.
current (In) Normal Current Of Electrical Motor Based On Motor’s Name Plate Frequency of (50 Hz) electrical motor Temperature of electrical motor at normal run (65-75°Celcius) Engine capacity/hour =55 kg
5
MATERIALS AND METHODS
The machine design of appropriate technology in this study consisted of raw material chips slicer and oil dryer machines. Before the continuous operation, it is necessary to test the engine technically. The method developed was technical feasibility and the performance test for each appropriate machine technology for producing chips. This research was aimed in seeking the optimum data of machine performance which can be gained. While the benefit is to give recommendations on the optimum operation of the engine achieved. Each machine with its test can be explained as follows: A. The raw material of chips slicer machine The chips raw material slicer machine shown in Figure 1, the raw material of chips (purple tubers) and the products of slicing raw material of chips in Figure 2. The result of the technical feasibility of the raw material of chips slicer machine as shown in Table 1 below.
6 7 8
Pass the test
Pass the test Pass the test Pass the test
B. Oil Dryer Mechine To determine the technical feasibility level of oil dryer machine, then this machine is needed to go through a technical feasibility test. The result of the technical feasibility of the machine can be shown in Table 2 below; Table 2 The Result of the Technical Feasibility of oil Dryer Machine (n= 2800 rpm)
No. 1
2
350
Description Instalation of Panel Plancement of Connecting Share to oil dryer machine Input Voltage to 220V Electricity Motor of oil
Status Pass the test
Pass the test
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 dryer machine First current (In) to electrical motor of oil dryer mechine ( 1.2 maximal of nominal current (In) Normal Current Of Electrical Motor Based On Motor’s Name Plate of oil dryer mechine Frequency of (50 Hz) electrical motor The quality of draining chips (good) capacityof oil dryer machine =(30 kg/hour)
3
4
5 6 7
concluded that the machine can be operated maximally to increase the productivity of raw material of sliced chips.
Pass the test
Table 3 The test of technical feasibility of Chips Raw Materials Slicer Mechine with 7 thickness variations (Mechine Roll =2800 rpm)
Pass the test
No.
Pass the test 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pass the test Pass the test
Slicing the raw material of chips, after being washed and then drained, to reduces the water content. The next process is frying the sliced raw material into chips. Then, to reduce the oil content in chips, Oil Dryer Machine is needed to drain the water as shown in Figure 4 below.
Thickness (T) Of Chips In Mm/3 Kg 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
Slicing Time (W = In Minute) 3 3 3 3 2,5 2,5 2,5
Slicing Quality (Q)
Electrical Power (P=Watt)
Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Very good
95 100 115 130 140 150 160
The productivity of slicing raw material of chips using the slicer machine can increase averagely to 55 kg / h or an average productivity of slicing raw material of chips increases to (55 to 12.5): 12.5 x 100% = 340% compared to productivity of slicing traditionally in 10kg / hour. With this increase in productivity, the unit cost of production is low, which means the ability of competitive production can increase. B. Oil Dryer Machine The results of performance test against Oil Dryer Machine with the following variables: (1) the weight of fried chips (B); (2) frying time (w); (3) the quality of draining (q), and (4) the required electric power (P), as shown in Table 4 below.
Figure 4. Oil Dryer Machine
Figure 5. The oil-drained chips
III. A.
FINDING AND DISCUSSION OF RESEARCH
Slicer Machine of Chips Raw Materials
After the Slicer Machine of Chips Raw Materials passed the test of technical feasibility, the next process was to test the performance of the machine with 7 thickness variations of the chips, with results as shown in Table 3 below. The performance test of the machine uses the test materials of purple tubers with a round cutter n = 2850 rpm, which includes variable of thick pieces (t), the slicing time (w), the slicing quality (q), and required electrical power (P ), as shown in Table 3 above. Based on the the results of performance test, as shown in Table 2 and Table 3 above, it is
Table 4 Result Of Performance Test Against Oil Dryer Machine (n= 2800 rpm) No. Chips Time Quality The Weight (w) Of Requiered (b) Being Needed Drainig Electrical Fried (fg) In (q) Power (p) Second In Watt 1 1,5 3 Good 75 2 2 4 Good 90 3 2,5 5 Good 100 4 3 6 Good 105 5 3,5 7 Good 115 The optimum capasity of oil dryer machine (ODM) is 30kg/hour, meaning that it potentially increases the productivity as (30-10):10x100% =250% compared manual productivity in 10kg/hour. Draining the chips after being fried is the crucial point of all chips production process, and the number of oil level in chips which determine the age of the chips. Therefore, the crucial point should be a concerns by Unit of trade. Dian Putri Jaya and other chips producers. Therefore, the performance test of oil
351
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 dryer machine, as shown in a bar chart in figure 6, as follows.
to manual results in 12,5kg /hour; (2) the use of oil dryer machine can increase productivity of chips‘ oil drying into 30kg/hour or an average productivity increases in (30-10): 10 x 100% = 200%, which is compared to manual productivity of 10 kg/hour; and (3) the level of low oil content in chips will improve product quality of chips [6], the product is not rancid chip, and the average age of the product chips will be longer. IV.
Figure 6. Bar Chart of Oil Dryer Machine Performance Test
Referring to Table 4 and Figure 6 can be seen that to obtain results of fried chips draining process properly (q), therefore, the weight of chips, the draining time required is longer for thick chips, and electrical power (P) required is also greater. If the chips after fying is drained well (oil content is small), the quality of chips will be great, not rancid, and the average age of the chips will be longer [4]. If the quality of the chips has potential achievement, so that competitive power of chips products increases [2], which means that it will be potentially compete in Asean Economic Community (AES) C. The Effect of Appropriate Technology on Productivity Improvement Of UD. Dian Putri Jaya As described in point B, the result of machine design of appropriate technology of producing chips consists of raw material chips slicer machine and oil dryer machine. The effect of appropriate technology on productivity improvement of small and medium enterprise / UD. Dian Putri Jaya is as follows: (1) The use of slicing raw material of chips using the slicer a machine can increase the average productivity of slicing raw material of chips to 55 kg/hour or an average productivity increase in (50 to 12.5): 12.5 x 100% = 300% which is compared
CONCLUSION
The use of chips raw material slicer machine can increase the average productivity of slicing chips raw material to 55 kg/hour or an average productivity of sliced chips increases into 300%, which is compared to traditional productivity of 12,5kg/hour. The use of oil dyer machine can increase productivity of draining chips‘ oil into 30kg/hour or the average productivity increases in 200% compared to manual traditional productivity of 10 kg / hour. The low level of oil content in chips will increase the quality of the products, chips are not rancid, and the average age of the product chips will be longer. . REFERENCES [1] Kasno, A., N. Saleh dan E. Ginting. 2006. Legumes and Tubers-based food Development for national food Resilience. Crops Bulletin No. 12. 43-45. [2] Ginting, E. 1994. The proportional use of Sweet Potatoes in daily Menu for reducing Rice Consumption Framework. The special edition Balittan Malang 3: 136-144. [3] Arfiningsih, Y. 2004. CERIPING KIMPUL Business Planning. Thesis. Department of Services Technology and Production. Faculty of Engineering. State University of Semarang. [4] Marinih. 2005. Pembuatan Keripik Kimpul Bumbu Balado dengan Tingkat Pedas yang berbeda. Tugas Akhir. Jurusan Teknologi Jasa dan Produksi. Fakultas Teknik. Univeristas Negeri Semarang
352
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Improving the Performance of Crackers SMEs through Diversification of Products and Utilization of Crackers Drying Machine, in Purpose to Improve National Food Security and Crackers Export Bambang Suprianto 1, Agus Suprijono 2, Dwi Kristiastuti 3 1
Faculty of Engineering, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected] 2 Faculty of Social Sciences, Unesa Fakultas Ilmu Sosial-Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected] 3
Faculty of Engineering, Unesa Ketintang Surabaya [email protected]
Abstract - Crackers is one of the many traditional processed products consumed by the public. Crackers is very well known in all ages and social strata of society. Crackers is readily available at all places, both at the roadside stalls, and in the five-star hotel restaurant. East Java is known as an exporter of crackers highest among several other provinces. Crackers export of East Java reached 79% of total shrimp crackers throughout Indonesia. However, as well as SMEs in various other fields, the crackers SMEs also have various weaknesses. Based on an initial survey, some of these weaknesses include: (1) the trademark has not been paid the attention by the SMEs (2) the means of production is still traditional; (3) the skills of human resources is low; (4) knowledge of "product diversification" is limited; (5) packing models are simpler and less informative; (6) the ability to establish trade cooperation is still low; and (7) the marketing model in general is still traditional and not using information technology. The second weakness is the low level of awareness on the use of appropriate technology machines in the SME environment in general. Crackers SMEs are unaware that the utilization of the machines can increase cracker products, in terms of both quantity and quality. Solutions to the internal weknesses should be found, since SMEs are the backbone of national economy. Therefore, through this research, an experiment was conducted on product diversification and utilization of the dryer (Crackers Drying Machine) and its influence on the performance of crackers manufacturers. The results found out that (1) the diversification of products can increase revenue as much as Rp. 522.500, -/month towards UMKM Chasanah as a crackers manufacturer; and (2) crackers drying machine can increase its production capacity by 200% compared to the traditional production capacity. Based on these findings, the study suggested that the diversification of products (by making the waste of fish/shrimp into organic fertilizer) should be
encouraged, since this activity increases revenues of SMEs and also has an impact on hygiene and environmental health. Index Terms - Crackers, Crackers SMEs, Diversification of Products, Crackers Drying Machine
I. INTRODUCTION "Crackers" is one of traditional processed products consumed by many people [1]. Crackers is well known in all ages and social strata of society and available in various places, both at the roadside stalls, and the five-star hotel restaurant [2]. East Java is known as the highest crackers exporter compared to other provinces [3]. East Java reached 79% of total shrimp crackers throughout Indonesia, followed by the other provinces, such as North Sumatra, South Sumatra, Central Java and West Java. Crispness and taste of the crackers have been spread to foreign countries and accepted by the Asian, European, also American markets, and the export affects in increasing the foreign exchange. As well as SMEs in various other areas, Crackers SME face various drawbacks. Based on the previous survey, some of these weaknesses include: (1) lack of attention from the SMEs to the trademark; (2) traditional production equipments; (3) low of human resources; (4) lack knowledge of product diversification; (5) simple and less informative of packing models; (6) less competence in establishing trading cooperation; and (7) traditional marketing model and without using information technology. Another weakness is the low awareness in using the appropriate technologies (TTG) in the SME environment. Crackers SMEs are less aware that utilizing the TTG (mixer, slicing machine and drying
353
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 machine) is able to increase the products, both in procedures in compost production of waste fish/ quantity and quality [4]. With the mixer, the dough shrimp are [2]. becomes more well-mixed and stirring capacity 1.Preparation can be added. With the slicing machine, slicing capacity To get good quality compost, the material used are increased and the incision results are the same. should come from carbon-containing materials With the drying machine, drying process can be (agricultural waste/plant) and nitrogen -containing accelerated, and the capacity can be increased and materials (waste fish/shrimp, dirt, etc.). The amount does not depend on the weather conditions [4]. SMEs of materials also need to be considered (earned nearly awareness in utilizing TTG at a crackers village, uniform size). The more similar and smaller material Gununganyar Tambak Surabaya, needs to be size are, the faster decomposting process will be. If improved by training them to operate TTG (which is necessary, the waste of fish/shrimp needs to be required in the cracker business). grinded (after dried to reduce the water), and Based on the discussion, through PENPRINAS agricultural waste needs to be chopped/cut manually MP3EI 2011-2025, in 2014 the evaluation and or by machine. research about the weaknesses of crackers SMEs in Surabaya‘s crackers village, at Gununganyar Tambak 2.Mixing Process I, Gununganyar Tambak, Surabaya. Through the Those similar materials are mixed with a shovel research in the first year of 2014, it has resulted as or hoe, until prevailed. At the stirring process, water follows: (1) the trademark cracker manufacturers‘ can be added if the material is too dry. The addition awareness are good; they are aware to take care of of water should be enough, because if it is too much their own trademarks to maintain the continuity and then composting process will bre detained. the existence of its business; (2) the cracker producer‘s awareness in term ofattractive and 3.Composting Process informative packaging are good; they are aware in Composting is the main process that determines applying product packaging; (3) TTG machine has the quality of the compost. Composting location been made (dough mixer and slicing machine) which should be protected from rain and direct sun. have been tested and used in increasing the Aeration (air supply), inside of the compost pile productivity of UMKM Chasanah; (4) The product should be considered, because the air ducts should diversification activities have produced fish high- not be closed. Stirring continuously is also important, calcium crackers, paste, paste and soy sauce derived so the composting process is prevailed. Material from fish waste, and other product diversifications, moisture is maintained, by continuous flushing water such as fish-carrot chips, strawbery-fish crackersand to a compost pile when it is too dry. The composting fish-potato chips; (5) human resources (HR) process is complete when the color is changed manufacturers of fish crackers have been trained to (lackish compost). Compost is good when it hassame operate TTG machine (mixing machine and slicing color, non-sticky and odorless. machine) as well as skills in product diversification; and (6) selling the product by online marketing, the 4.Packaging webb/blog(www.krupukikanchasanah. blogspot.com) The compost is packed in plastic bags for their has been created. own use or for sale to give another income for SMEs Based on the background and the results of as one of diversification product. This is the the research in the first year (2014), the purposes of processes and procedures for composting fish/shrimp the research in the second year (2015) are: (1) waste as shown in Figure 1 below. analyzing the effect of product diversification in increasing incomes of SMEs crackers; and (2) analyzing the effect of crackers drying machine (CDM) utilization in increasing the productivity of UMKM krupuk Chasanah. II.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Product Diversification Product diversification is done by utilizing waste fish/shrimp into organic fertilizer. It requires creativity to process waste into products that has an important role in human life. The perfect solution is by processing the waste (fish/shrimp) as raw material for compost [2]. Composting is very useful because it Fig 1. Composting Process Production can convert organic waste which pollutes the B.Crackers Drying Machine environment into the economic value substance. Generally the quality of compost depends on the Crackers drying machine (CDM), resulted from treatment used, there are several steps that must be considered to obtain quality of compost. The this research, as shown in Figure 5, has 10 this rack,
354
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Production and Sale Data of Organic Fertilizer (Raw material of fish/shrimp and agricultural waste) No Product June July Aug Sept Diversification Activities
using LPG heater, equipped with a blower (150 watt electric motor), and temperature gauge. Blover is used to flatten the heat inside the dryer crackers
1
(CDM), so the crackers will beevenly dried on the entire racks (CDM). If necessary, during the drying process, the rackscan be exchanged to make sure that
2
the crackers are evenly dried throughly. Obtaining optimum performance of dryers crackers (CDM), the CDM needs technically to be
3
Production of organic fertilizer (in sack) Sale of organic fertilizer (in sack) Remains (in
35
55
70
85
28
49
63
69
7
6
7
16
sack)
tested. The CDM technical feasibility test results as shown in Table 2. CDM capacity can be adjusted as needed, by adjusting the heating temperature (T) will be obtained the duration (time) that needed to dry the crackers, as shown in Table 3. CDM with a capacity of 30 kg/hours can dry crackers within 1 (one) hour, with a temperature of 50°.
Figure 3. Diagram of Productions and Sales Data of Organic Fertilizer (Fish/Shrimp adn Agricultural waste raw material)
Figure 5. Crackers Drying Machine
Figure 4. Graph Productions and Sales Data of Organic Fertilize Figure 6. Sample of fish crackers before dried by CDM
Figure 7. Sample of fish crackers after dried by CDM
III.
RESULT AND DISCUSSION
A.Effect of Product Diversification for SMEs in increasing the income Production and Sale data of organic fertilizer fish/shrimp waste raw materials can be seen from the table 1 below. Table 1
The data is illustrated in the form of charts and graphs, the productions and sales data of organic fertilizer are seen as in Figure 3 and Figure 4. In Table 1 product diversification activities in producing organic fertilizer were started from June to the September 2015, the figures showsthe increasing, both production and sales aspects. Organic fertilizer production is average of 61.25 sack/month, and soldin average of 52.25 sack/month (85.30%), while the remaining average of 9 sacks/month (14.70%) remains as the stock for the next month. By the price of 5,000 per sack, the average income of the sale of organic fertilizer is Rp 522.500,00/ month. The condition is very promising, as the fish/shrimp waste crackers in SME environments can be economically utilized to increase the income, as well as to keep the environment clean and healthy. Those activities should be encouraged, so SMEs in the area of the cracker village at Gununganyar Tambak I are able to do the same thing. This becomes a shared
355
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 responsibility between SMEs, Cooperative Management, Board of Community, as well as the government officials in implementing the "Eco Green" in Surabaya and surrounding areas. The discussion concluded that the product diversification (organic fertilizer from fish/shrimp waste) affecting on the increasing income of UMKM Chasanah as Rp. 522.500,00/ month.
with temperature of 40° C, and 30 kg crackers will be dried within 1 hour, if CDM temperature is 50° C.
B.Crackers Drying Machine Testing results of the technical feasibility of crackers drying machine (CDM) as shown in Table 2, and the setting of CDM capacity as shown in Table 3 below. Tabel 2 The testing result of technical feasibility of crackers drying machine
Based on the results of technical feasibility testing as described, it is concluded that crackers drying machine (CDM) generated through this research can be fully operated. It is purposed to maintain the stability and increase the production, especially in the rainy season so the supply of fish crackers can continually run without being distracted by the weather (although at the time of the rainy season). By using CDM, the crackers productivity is increased to 30 kg/hr compared to 10 kg/h through traditional drying process.
(equipped by the blower 150 Watt) N o 1 2 3
4 5 6
7
Description
Note
Input voltage to the Electric Motor (blower) 220V Initial current (Im) to Motor Power (blower) Maximum 1.2 In (nominal current) Normal working currentof electric motors normal (blower) according to the motor name plate. Frequency of Electric Motor (blower) (50 Hz) Electric Motor Rotation (blower) is (n)=2800 rpm Electric motor temperature(blower) onnormal activities (70 °Celcius) CDM capacity =30 kg/hour (t=50° Celcius)
Passe d Passe d Passe d
IV.
Passe d
Table 3 The setting capasity of crackers drying machine (CDM) The relation between temperature (t) and the drying time (w)
4 5
Temperature (t) in°Celcius
Drying time (w) in hour
1 2 3
30 35 40
3 2,5 2
45 50
CONCLUSION
Product diversification (organic fertilizer made offish/shrimpwaste) affects the income of UMKM Chasanah in crackers production. By the price of 10.000,00 per sack, the additional income from the sale of organic fertilizer SMEs evenly is Rp. 522.500,00/month. This product diversification activities should be encouraged to make all SMEs in the area of srackers village Gununganyar Tambak I do the same in increasing business income of SMEs as well as to keep the environment clean and healthy. Crackers drying machine (CDM) generated through this research can be fully operated with the capacity of 30kg/hr, and able to increase production capacity into 200% compared to traditional manufacturing. It is purposed to maintain the stability and increase the production (especially in the rainy season) so the supply of fish crackers can continually run without being distracted by the weather.
Passe d Passe d Passe d
No.
Figure 8. Graph ofthe relation between temperature and drying time
REFERENCES
1,5 1
CDM capacity can be adjusted as needed. by heating the temperature control can be obtained the drying time that is needed, as shown in Table 3. Dryers Crackers (CDM) with a capacity of 30kg will be able to dry the crackers as much as 30 kg (average crackers thickness =2mm) within 3 hours with the CDM temperature of 30°C, or 30 kg crackers will be dried within 2.5 hours with a CDM temperature (t) of 35° C, 30kg crackers will be dried within 2 hours
[1] Subekti, E.I. (1998). Optimasi Perencanaan Produksi Industri Krupuk Udang/Ikan di Perusahaan Krupuk Indrasari Indramayu Jawa Barat.Jurusan Teknologi Pangan dan Gizi, Fakultas Teknologi Pertanian, IPB Bogor. [2] Suryani, A., Hambali, E., dan Hidayat, E. (2005). Aneka Produk Olahan Limbah Ikan dan Udang. Jakarta: Penebar Swadaya [3] Pujiharto. 2005. Kebijakan Diversifikasi Produk dan Pengaruhnya Terhadap Kinerja: Studi Empiris pada Perusahaan Publik di Indonesia. Jurnal SNA VIII Solo, 15-16 September 2005. [4] Saraswati. (1986). Membuat Krupuk Udang. Jakarta: Bhratara Karya Aksara
356
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Effect of Project-Based Learning Strategies and Self-Efficacy Toward Student‘s Learning Outcomes and Arguing Ability Joko Fakutas Teknik Unesa Surabaya Indonesia [email protected] Abstract - This study aims to determine: (1) the effect of learning model toward learning outcome electric motor controlling, (2) the effect of learning model toward the ability arguing, (3) the effect of self-efficacy toward learning outcomes of electric motor controlling, (4) the effect of self efficacy on the ability arguing, (5) the effect of the interaction between the model of learning and self-efficacy toward electric motor controlling learning outcomes, and (6) the effect of the interaction between the learning model and selfefficacy toward the ability arguing. Quasi-experimental research methods to design A 2x2 factorial design. The subject of research students from the Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Surabaya in Electrical Engineering D3 Program as an experimental class of 30 students and 30 students of Electrical Engineering Education S1 as the control class. Analysis of study data using multivariate analysis techniques at the significant level of 0.05. The results showed: (1) there significant effect on learning outcomes learning model electric motor controllers. Results of the study group of students with projectbased learning model is higher than the direct learning model, (2) there is a significant influence learning model for students' ability to express opinions. A group of students with project-based learning model has ability to express opinions is higher than the direct learning model, (3) there is a significant effect of self-efficacy on learning outcomes electric motor controllers. A group of students who have high self-efficacy study results are higher than the low self-efficacy, (4) there is the influence of self-efficacy on the ability to express opinions. A group of students who have high selfefficacy has the ability to express opinions is higher than the low self-efficacy, (5) there is an interaction effect model of learning and self-efficacy for controlling the electric motor learning outcomes. Results of the study group of students with project-based learning model is higher than the direct instructional model in any condition of self-efficacy, and (6) there is an interaction effect by the model of learning and selfefficacy on the ability of expression. A group of students with project-based learning model has the ability of expression is higher than the direct learning model on any condition of self efficacy. Index Terms - model of learning, self-efficacy, learning outcomes, and Traffic expression
I. INTRODUCTION
The learning process in universities are currently not optimal, in the learning process of students passive and tend to be a good listener. Students lacking in depth in attempt to understand and criticize the content of a course are given lecturers. At the time of the exam students only reveal the contents of a course that have been memorized without understanding the critical and profound. The learning process as mentioned above is not a complete success, but it is a way of learning that is "less successful" in achieving the goals of learning. Ideally learning activities in higher education institutions are not only focused on gaining knowledge and skills as much as possible, but also how to use all the knowledge and skills acquired it for facing new situations or to solve specific problems that are related to the field of study. In the learning process there is activities to build character, attitude and sense of responsibility in addition to acquire knowledge and skills. Lecturers are expected to conduct a self-evaluation and strives to improve the learning process is conducted so as not to allow students the protracted in a learning atmosphere that is disadvantage, because these young people will become people who will face a world full of challenges and problems. According to Gie (2003), these students will become leaders in the future so as to be prepared to face the challenges and problems of life. Conceptually and empirically believed that affective aspects play an important role on the level of a person's success in work and in life as a whole. In college affective development is more emphasis on personality development groups of subjects. Affective learning outcomes may only be used as an accompaniment effect or be hidden curriculum that is inserted in the main learning activities. In the a course of learning the electric motor controller (EMC), applied learning models using direct learning model (DI-M). The emphasis is more on the learning outcomes of knowledge and psychomotor aspects. On student learning tend to be passive because all the information likely to be given lecturers. Similarly, when the practice of students also tend to just follow orders lecturers and follow the steps there is to jobsheet. As a result, student results are not optimal and less students are helped in developing affective ability, including the
357
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 ability arguing. The indicator is the average of the cognitive and psychomotor learning outcomes achieved new 2.67, and the ability arguing of students is still low, average 2.48. Some of the descriptions above Showed importance Make Efforts to optimize student learning outcomes, both cognitive, psychomotor and affective. One effort that can be done is make innovate in the learning models can hope assist in optimizing student learning outcomes. One a model of learning that can help students develop cognitive abilities, psychomotor, and affective is project-based learning model (PjBL-M). In addition to the learning model, are also believed to be factors students characteristic an effect on learning outcomes and students' ability to arguing. One of the characteristics of students are self-efficacy (SE). Self-efficacy is the belief or beliefs of individuals concerning his ability to organize, perform a task, achieve an objective, produce something, and implement measures for the displaying certain skills (Bandura, 1997). Degeng (1989) classifies learning variables into the conditions, methods and learning outcomes. These three variables must be considered from the beginning of designing learning to improve the quality of learning. condition variables grouped into (1) the purpose and characteristics of the field of study, (2) constraints field of study and (3) the characteristics of the students. While method can be classified into (1) the organization of teaching strategies, (2) delivery of teaching strategies and (3) teaching management strategies. This shows that the characteristics of the a course, the model applied learning, and student characteristics (SE) effect on learning outcomes electric motor controllers and students' ability to arguing. Based on some of the above description relating to the model of learning, self-efficacy, learning outcomes, and the ability arguing, researchers intend to examine more deeply and comprehensively through research with the title: The effect model of project-based learning, direct instructional model and self efficacy toward learning outcome EMC and the ability of students arguing. The problems studied were: (1) whether there was an effect of learning model toward learning outcomes EMC?, (2) whether there was an effect of learning model toward the ability of arguing?, (3) whether there was an effect of SE toward learning outcomes EMC?, (4) whether there is effect of SE toward 'ability to arguing, (5) whether there is an interaction effect of the model of learning and SE toward learning outcomes EMC, and (6) whether there is an interaction effect of the model of learning and SE toward ability to arguing. Direct instructional model is an effective way to teach skills and basic information to students. DI-M is aimed to achieving the two main objectives of students, namely completion of academic content that is well structured and the acquisition of the entire skill (Nur, 2011: 17). The purpose of the application
of DI-M is a student receives two kinds of knowledge, namely knowledge of declarative and procedural knowledge. Mastery of knowledge is interconnected in order to achieve maximum learning results. The consequence, in order to achieve results in accordance with the purpose of DI-M, the steps are learning to be done properly. Steps DI-M are: (1) presents the objectives and prepare learner, (2) demonstrate knowledge and skills, (3) guiding the training, (4) checking understanding and provideing feedback, and (5) provide opportunities advanced training and implementation. Measures to direct learning model differs from PjBL-M. Project-based learning is a model that organizes learning around projects.‖ (Thomas, 2000). Thomas, Mergendoller & Michaelson, (2006) to define PBL as: Complex tasks, based on challenging questions or problems, that involve students in design, problemsolving, decision making, or investigative activities; give students the opportunity to work relatively autonomously over extended periods of time; and culminate in realistic products or presentations According to the definitions found in PBL handbooks for teachers, projects are complex tasks, based on challenging questions or problems, that involve students in design, problem-solving, decision making, or investigative activities; give students the opportunity to work relatively autonomously over extended periods of time; and culminate in realistic products or presentations. Although assigning projects to learners in a traditional classroom is not a new phenomenon, PjBL is different from traditional learning implementations. There are five criteria PjBL, there are: (1) The PjBL is the core, not the front of the curriculum, (2) PjBL focused on questions or problems that encourage students to discover the main concepts and principles of interdisciplinary, (3) involves student in the investigation of constructive projects, (4) the project encourages students to a certain degree are significant, and (5) a realistic project, unlike in the school in general. Previously Green (1998) stated that the projectbased learning better learners in the act and more active in learning. Instructors work behind the learners are working on their projects, so as to make active learners resolve project issues, not passive recipients of knowledge. Better student conditions in the act and more active in learning if measures based learning project done right. Step-by-step project based learning according to Andi Stix and Frank Hrbek (2006) through nine stages, namely: (1) the lecturer make settings on the students so that the authentic project is done or in accordance with the real conditions of life, (2) the student makes the project design, if possible in debate to convey ideas, (3) the students discuss and gather information needed to design their projects, (4) faculty and students negotiate the criteria for evaluating projects, (5) students gather materials needed for the project that has been designed, (6)
358
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 students make projects, (7) the students evaluate the results of their projects, (8) the students prepare and present the results of their projects, and (9) the student self-reflection and evaluate projects based on criteria that agreed in step 4. Step-step project-based learning can be done if in the planning and implementation also consider or pay attention to selfefficacy on student. Self-efficacy is one aspect of self-knowledge or self-knowledge of the most influential in everyday human life. This is due Self efficacy possessed humans did influence in determining the measures to be taken to achieve a goal, including estimates of the various events that will be encountered (Nur Ghufron and Rini, 2010: 73). Self-efficacy is the belief that the student can solve a complex problem. Students who have high self-efficacy will feel challenged if it finds difficult problem, while the students who have low self-efficacy tend to avoid these problems. This shows that students who have high self-efficacy study results are higher than the low self-efficacy students. Related to learning outcomes, Anderson L.W. & Krathwohl D.R. (2001) cognitive aspects are grouped into six levels of ability, there are: remembering (C1), understanding (C2), applying (C3), analyze (C4), evaluating (C5), and creating (C6). For psychomotor learning outcomes, Simpsonin (Dimyati and Mudjiono, 2006) divides the world of learning psychomotor into seven types of learning psychomotor behavior, there are: perception, readiness, guided movement, a movement that familiar, complex movements, the adjustment patterns of movement, and creativity. Learning outcomes psychomotor if it is associated with the subject electric motor controllers and the level of students' abilities can be stated as: skills to select and use tools and materials, the attitude in doing the work, (3) the skills to analyzing, arrange sequence, and task practices, (4 ) reading skills image or symbol, (5) the speed in working, (6) compatibility of shapes and sizes the product is produced according with provision, and (7) skills in analyzing and concluding the data obtained. The affective learning outcomes according to Bloom and Krathwohl (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001) emphasizes the atmosphere of feelings, emotions or degree of acceptance or rejection. Aspect affective classified into five, are: (a) receiving, (b) responding, (c) valuing, (d) organization, and (e) characterization . In this study, the affective aspects include: (1) initiative or courage to arguing, (2) the suitability of the opinion in the context of the discussion, (3) the rationality of the opinions expressed, (4) able to demonstrate the skills arguing effectively, and (5) establish and keep manners polite in arguing and respond to other people's opinions. Based on the theories and statements relating to the model of learning, self-efficacy, learning outcomes, and the ability arguing on the above, showed a group of student on the PjBL-M, and have SE-H learning outcomes and ability arguing is higher
than the group of students in learning DI-M and have SE-L. II.
METHOD
This research is a research experimental quasi. Research was conducted in the Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Unesa Surabaya on first semester of academic year 20142015. The research population was students the Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Unesa Surabaya are programmed the electric motor controller a number of 4 classes. Of the four classes taken two classes for the research sample. Techniques lottery conducted to choose the classes that will be charged with PjBL-M and DI-M, while the cluster technique used to select all the learners in the class who has been selected to be the samples (intact group). Based on the results of the lottery two classes S1 PTE 2012 as the control group were treated with DI-M and grade D3 TL 2012 as an experimental group treated with PjBL-M learning. Summary the results of the determination of the study subjects are shown Table 3.1. Table 3.1. Research Subjects
Group Exsperiment Control Total
Class D3 TL 12 S1 PTE 12 2
Number of Student 30 30 60
Number of Subject 30 30 60
of the four classes were selected as the sample is then given a pretest to determine the initial capability, pretest only performed on cognitive aspects. Learning outcomes electric motor controller (EMC) as the dependent variable, in addition influenced learning model and self efficacy, allowing also influenced by differences in ability of early possessed learners. Therefore, the ability of early learners need to be controlled. Control is done by test the initial (pre-test) and the results are tested if there are significant differences or not the average results. Statistical analysis techniques were used to test the ability by early test. The purpose of this analysis to determine the level of equality before given PjBL-M and DI-M. The design is nonequivalent control group, with consideration of the determination of experimental and control groups can not be done individualy or randomly, but with a random group (assignment random sampling). Researchers using group intact, which is predicted to weaken the power of design to establish a causal relationship. This is because there is doubts about the equivalence before the experiment began (Salkind, 2006). Efforts are being made to minimize the weakness of this design is the use of random assignment technique in determining the existing classes, one class as the control group and one exsperiment group classes. Before the study began both groups were given a pretest to determine equality ability and and
359
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 posttest after the learning process is completed to determine the learning outcome. The main Effect and the effect the interaction of certain variables can be viewed by using a factorial design, and research structures with two or more independent variables to assess its effects independently and interactively on a dependent variable (Kerlinger et. al., 1993). The study design nonequivalent pretest-posttest control group shown in Table 3.2. Tabel 3.2. Research Design
Ex O1 X1 O2 -----------------K O3 X2 O4 Adaptation of Tuckman (1999). Description: Ex = experimental group BK = control group X1 = the application of learning with PjBL-M X1 = Application of learning by DI-M O1 = pre-test experimental group O2 = post test experimental group O3 = pre-test control group O4 = post test control group
Preparation phase Steps taken at this stage is: (1) preparing a learning device, the research instrument (assessment of learning outcomes, ability to arguing, and SE, (2) a discussion with lecturers EMC to get input, (3) the make improvements devices and research instruments, (4) validate the instructional design experts and expert content, (5) the make improvements devices and research instruments, (6) trials research instruments, and (7) analyzing the trials results. Validation sheets to validate contain of a closed questionnaire with Likert scale 1-5 equipped open questionnaire contains suggestions written expert. To conduct the assessment or categories of validation results are based on categorization according Riduwan (2010), three of which are: 5 very valid; 4 valid, and 3 is quite valid. Summary the validation plan of lectures semester (PLS), teaching materials (TM), worksheet (WS), learning outcomes assessment instruments (LOAI), and self efficacy test (SET) is shown in Figure 1.
The design of the research used is A 2x2 factorial design. Pattern the research design are shown in Table 3. In this research all groups received treatment, the experimental group was given treatment with PjBL-M and the control group with DI-M. Tabel 3. Desain Faktorial 2x2
Dependent Variable Moderator Variabel SE-H (A1) SE-L (A2)
Gambar 1. Summary the validation
Instructional Model PjBL-M (A1) DI-M(A2) A 1 B1 A2 A1 A1 B2 A2 B2
Based on Figure 1 it appears that the PLS, TM, WS, LOAI, and SET in the category of very valid and valid. The results showed that the learning device, learning outcomes assessment instruments, and The variables in this study consisted of: (1) instruments worth and self efficacy may be used in independent variables with dimension PjBL-M and this research. DI-M, (2) the dependent variable, learning outcomes Pilot tests instruments conducted to determine controllers electric motor and the ability arguing, (3) the validity and reliability of the instrument. Validity the control variables, coverage course material, tool- according Arikunto (2012) is a measure that indicates learners, lecturer, time allocation, assessment the levels of validity or validity of an instrument, instruments, evaluation time, the ability early, and (4) while reliability indicate the extent to which it can moderator variables, self efficacy with high provide relatively not different results when the dimensions and lower. measurements were taken back to the same subject. Determination of model of learning in each Pilot tests were conducted on 30 students were not as class at random by the lottery technique. research subjects. Criteria of validity the instrument, Implementation of the study treatment eight times in three of which are: 0.80 <1.00 is very valid; each class. Prior to the implementation of the 0.60 <0.80 high, and 0.40 <0.60. Interpretation of the treatment conducted a pretest to determine the ability coefficient of reliability, three of which are from 0.80 early and to know the results of study conducted to 1 (very high), 0.6 <0.80 (hight), 0.40 to 0.60 posttest after treatment is completed (moderate). The design analysis of research data used is Based on the calculation of correlation with multivariate analysis of variance (Manova). SPSS 19, to 19 grains (7 items cognitive, According to the study variables, the design of the psychomotor items 7, and 5 item afektif) each valid, research data analysis shown in Table 4. XY correlation of 0.75 (valid category) and a reliability of 0.77 (high category). These results Table 4. Design Data Analysis indicate that the instrument is valid and reliable so Instructional Model Dependent Variable Tota that it can be used in this research. PjBL-M DI-M Executive research Moderator Variable l (A1) (A2) At this stage were conducted: (1) the collection SE-H tinggi (A1) 15 15 30 of the data, covering perform pretest cognitive and SE-L (A2) 15 15 30 test self effcacy, (2) implement the treatment of Jumlah 30 30 60 learning a number of 8 times of learning, (3) perform
360
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 post-test, Including tests of cognitive and psychomotor), and observing ability arguing, and (4) analyze the the data to answer the research problem. To determine the level of early ability conducted the pretest, both in the experimental group and the control group experiment. The mean results of 24.5 pretest control group, and the experimental group 23.6. Based on data from different test results mean pretest conducted using test. Results showed that sig. 0.654> 0.05 and -0.262 tcount < ttable of 0.200 at the level of sig. 0.05. The results showed that its accepted. The calculation results showed that the ability of ability early experimental group and the control group are no different statistically significant, so it was decided can proceed with the study treatment. III.
Learning Outcome Ability Arguing
Table 4. Descriptive Statistics
Self Std. Efficacy Mean Deviation
N
MPBL
High
82.00
9.47
15
Low
75.53
9.92
15
Total
78.76
10.08
30
High
80.40
4.68
15
Low Total
64.80 72.60
5.58 9.41
15 30
High
81.20
7.38
30
Low
70.16
9.61
30
Total
Arguing Ability
1
Sig. .383
58
.605
Table 7. Tests of Between-Subjects Effects
RESULT
Learning Model
MDI
.271
df2 58
Sig. <0.05, indicating that the data derived from the variance is homogeneous. Value box's test of equality matrices at the significant level of 0.053, these results indicated there is a similarity in the covariance matrix. Because the data is normal, homogeneous and covariance matrix equal, then the multivariate test may be continued to determine the influence of the main and interaction effects between variables. Summary results of Tests of Between-Subjects Effects shown in Table 7.
Summary of descriptive statistics to learn control of electric motors results and and ability of expression shown in Table 4.
Learning Outcome
Levene Statistic df1 .774 1
Type III Sum of Squares
Source
Dependent Variable
Corrected Model
LO AA
Intercept
LO AA
A*B
LO AA
312.81 1 201.66 1
A
LO AA
570.41 1 1179.26 1
570.41 9.45 .003 1179.26 26.14 .000
B
LO AA
1826.01 1 1749.60 1
1826.01 30.27 .000 1749.60 38.78 .000
df
Mean Square
2709.25 3 3130.53 3
F
Sig.
903.08 14.97 .000 1043.51 23.13 .000
343678.01 1 343678.01 309889.06 1 309889.06 312.81 201.66
5.69 .000 6.86 .000 5.18 .027 4.47 .039
Total
75.68
10.16
60
LO is Learning outcome AE is Ability arguing A is PBL Model B is DI Model
MPBP
High Low Total
83.53 69.06 76.30
4.84 3.99 8.55
15 15 30
Multivariate analysis of the results obtained pairwise comparisons of data LO and AA versus Instructional Model as shown in Table 8.
MPL
High
71.00
8.26
15
Low
63.86
8.53
15
Total
67.437
9.02
30
High
77.267
9.21
30
Mean Dependent (I) Inst. (J) Inst. Difference Variable Model Model (I-J) Std. Error
Low
66.47
7.06
30
LO
Total
71.87
9.79
60
PjBL DI
DI PjBL
6.167 -6.167
2.005 2.005
.003 .003
AA
PjBL DI
DI PjBL
8.867 -8.867
1.734 1.734
.000 .000
Total
Summary of test results data normality learning outcomes and students' ability of expressions shown in Table 5. Table 5. Tests of Normality Postest
Kolmogorov-Smirnova Statistic df Sig.
Table 8. Pairwise Comparisons
Sig.
Multivariate analysis of the results obtained pairwise comparisons of data LO and AA versus Self Efficacy as shown in Table 9. Table 9. Pairwise Comparisons
Learning Outcome
.116
60
.180
Arguing Ability
.101
60
.200*
Mean Dependent (I) Self (J) Self Difference Variable Efficacy Efficacy (I-J) SE
Based on Table 5 sig> 0.05 for all the variables, meaning all the data come from a homogeneous variance. Summary results of the homogeneity test data learning outcome and ability of arguing in Table 6. Table 6. Test of Homogeneity of Variances
361
SE
Std. Error
Sig.
High
Low
11.033*
2.005
.000
Low
High
-11.033*
2.005
.000
Low High
*
1.734 1.734
.000 .000
High Low
10.800 -10.800*
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Based on Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9 show that:
1. F = 9.45 and sig. 0.03 <0.05. The results showed that there is significant effect the learning model towards outcome learning electric motor controllers. Learning outcomes motor controllers student studied with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M, 2. Value F = 26.14 and sig.000 <0.05. The results showed there is significant effect of learning model toward ability arguing. The ability arguing groups of students who studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M, 3. Value F = 30.27 and sig.000 <0.05. The results showed there is significant effect the SE towards outcome learning electric motor controllers. Learning outcomes electric motor controllers student have SE-H higher than the SE-L, 4. Value F=38.78 and sig.000<0,05. The results showed there is significant effect of SE toward ability of arguing. The ability of arguing groups of student have SE-H higher than the SE-L, 5. Value F = 5.18 and sig. 0.027 <0.05. The results showed there is significant effect interaction learning models and SE toward learning outcomes the electric motor controllers. Learning outcome controller electric motor the group of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M in any conditions SE any, and learning outcomes electric motor controller group of students who have SE-H is higher than the low SE-L in conditions learning of any models;; and (6) Value F=4,47 and sig. 0,039<0,05. Value F=4,47 and sig. 0,039<0,05, and 6. The results showed there is significant effect interaction learnings models and SE toward ability arguing. Ability arguing the group of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M in conditions SE of any, and ability arguing group of students who have SE-H higher than the low SE-L in conditions learning models of any.
are shown in Figure 2.
Estimated Marginal Means on research variables Figure 2. Estimated Marginal Means IV.
DISCUSSION
The device consists of a validation study plan of lectures semester (PLS), teaching materials (TM), the worksheet (WS), learning outcomes assessment instruments (Loai), and self-efficacy test (SET) in the category of valid and very valid. These results demonstrate the learning and research instruments feasible and can be used in this study.
362
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Instruments used also meet the elements of construct validity for the given column enter the validation sheet and advice from experts and the feedback has been fixed. Results of the test item analysis based on data from the test results indicate that the instrument is valid because it has a XY correlations of 0.77 and reliability of 0.75. These results indicate that the instrument is feasible and can be used in this study. Results of the analysis of the data research shows that: (1) there is significant effect towards the learning model of learning outcomes electric motors controllers. The motor controllers student learning outcomes studied with PjBL-M higher than the DIM; (2) There is significant effect of learning models toward ability arguing. The ability arguing groups of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DIM; (3) There is significant effect of the SE towards learning outcomes electric motors controllers. Learning outcomes electric motors student controllers have SE-H higher than the SE-L; (4) There is an significant effect of SE toward ability arguing. The ability of arguing groups of student have SE-H is higher than the SE-L; (5) There is significant interaction effect learning models and SE toward learning outcomes the electric motors controllers. Learning outcomes controller electric motors the group of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M in conditions SE of any, and learning outcomes electric motor controller group of students who have SE-H higher than the low SE-L in conditions of learning models of any; and (6) There is significant interaction effect learnings and SE models toward ability arguing. Ability arguing the group of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M in the SE of any conditions, and ability arguing group of students who have SE-H higher than the low SE-L models of learning in any conditions. The results is support some expert opinions and previous theory. Learning outcomes learners are influenced by the applied learning strategies and characteristics of learners (Slavin, 1997; Lyle & Robinson, 2001; Moore, 2005; Degeng, 2007). The results also confirmed the results of the study point and Joko (2015) also revealed that the learning outcomes of cognitive, affective, and psychomotor groups of learners that learned with MPBP higher and significantly different compared with the learning outcomes of learners that learned with MPL on competence improvement household electrical appliances. Further research Hendrik (2015) also revealed that the learning outcomes of students that learned to use project-based learning model is better than the students that learned using learning model directly on the installation of lighting subjects. Railsback (2002) states there are eight advantages based learning projects, four of which are: (1) increase the ability of problem solving (2) improve the ability of social communication, (3) increase the confidence of learners, and (4) encouraging learners doing important work and forming learners work attitude. Project-based learning is touted as a superior learning method to improve problem solving,
thinking skills, and involve learners in their learning (Berends, Boersma & Weggemann, 2003). V.
CONCLUSION
The results showed there is significant effect the learning model towards outcome learning electric motor controllers. Learning outcomes motor controllers student studied with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M; (2) Value F = 26.14 and sig.000 <0.05. The results showed there is significant effect of learning model toward ability arguing. The ability arguing groups of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M; (3) Value F = 30.27 and sig.000 <0.05. The results showed there is significant effect the SE towards outcome learning electric motor controllers. Learning outcomes electric motor controllers student have SE-H higher than the SE-L; (4) Value F=38.78 and sig.000<0,05. The results showed there is significant effect of SE toward ability arguing. The ability arguing groups of student have SE-H higher than the SE-L; (5) Value F = 5.18 and sig. 0.027 <0.05. The results showed there is significant effect interaction learning models and SE toward learning outcomes the electric motor controllers. Learning outcome controller electric motor the group of students studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M in any conditions SE , and learning outcomes electric motor controller group of students who have SE-H higher than the low SE-L in conditions learning of an models;; and (6) Value F=4,47 and sig. 0,039<0,05. Value F=4,47 and sig. 0,039<0,05. The results showed there is significant effect interaction learnings models and SE toward ability arguing. Ability arguing the group of students who studying with PjBL-M higher than the DI-M in any conditions SE , and ability arguing group of students who have SE-H higher than the low SE-L in any conditions of learning models. VI.
SUGGESTION
Based on the conclusions of the research results can be put forward as suggestions relating to the utilization of research results in learning the electric motor controllers. 1. Utilization in learning In an effort dissemination and utilization of research findings in the study:
a. Lecturer in the electric motor controllers are advised to improve learning outcomes cognitive, psychomotor, and affective by applying the PjBL-M suit the characteristics of PjBL-M b. Lecturer suggested in designing learning systematically contextual to consider the characteristics of learners, especially early ability, motivation to learn, and locus of control, c. The establishment of collaborative working groups for the initial stage of the learner need a little intervention by considering the
363
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
characteristics of learners, and the third condition learning environment with the hope to increase motivation and interest in learning learners. d. PjBL-M demands activeness, ability to cooperate, independence, understand the problem, and the ability to take advantage of learning resources, so it needs good conditioning. e. Self Efficacy has a strong influence in project-based learning, so it requires high attention.
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26] [27] [28]
REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[11]
[12] [13] [14] [15]
[29]
Arikunto, Suharsimi. 2012. Dasar-dasar Evaluasi Pendidikan. Jakarta. Bumi Aksara. Bandura, A. 1997. Self Efficacy: the Exercise of Control. New York: Freeman. Dimyati dan Mudjiono. 2006. Belajar dan Pembelajaran. Jakarta: PT Rineka Cipta. Ghufron, Nur dan Rini. 2010. Teori-Teori Psikologi. Yogyakarta: Ar-Ruz Media. Mendikbud. 2013. Kurikulum 2013. Nur, Mohamad. 2011. Model Pengajaran Langsung. Surabaya: Pusat Sains dan Matematika Sekolah Unesa. Peraturan Menteri Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan Republik Indonesia Nomor 65 Tahun 2013 tentang Standar Proses Pendidikan Dasar dan Menengah. Pramesti, Getut. 2014. Kupas Tuntas Data Penelitian dengan SPSS 22. Surakarta: Kompas Gramedia. Riduwan. 2010. Skala Pengukuran Variabel-variabel Penelitian. Bandung: Alfabeta. Anderson, L. W., et. al., 2001. A Taxonomy for Learning, Teaching and Assesing: A Revision of Blooms Taxonomy of Educational Obejectives. (Eds). Abridged Edition: New York: Longman. Andi Stix and Frank Hrbek, 2006. Teachers as Classroom Coaches: How to motivate Students across the content areas..Copyright © 2006 by Andi Stix and Frank Hrbek. All rights reserved. Arends, R. I., 2008. Learning to Teach. Seventh Edition. New York: McGraw Hill Companies, Inc. Arikunto, Suharsimi, 2010. Prosedur Penelitian Suatu Pendekatan Praktik. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta. Arikunto, Suharsimi. 2012. Dasar-dasar Evaluasi Pendidikan. Jakarta. Bumi Aksara. Bandura, A. 1997. Self Efficacy: the Exercise of Control. New York: Freeman.
[16] Barron, B. J. S., Schwartz, D. L., Vye, N. J., Moore, A., et al., 1998. Doing with understanding: Lessons from research on problem and project-based learning. Journal of the Learning Sciences, 7, (3/4), 271-311. [17] Beren Berends, H., Boersma, K. & Weggeman, M., 2003. The structuration of Organizational Learning. Human Relations, 56, 9, 1035-1056. [18] Degeng, I. N. S., 1989. Ilmu Pengajaran Taksonomi Variabel. Jakarta: Depdikbud, Ditjendikti, P2LPTK. [19] Degeng, I. N. S., 2007. Paradigma Pendidikan Behavioristik ke Konstruktivistik. Bahan Presentasi Perkuliahan Prodi TEP. Malang: PPS Universitas Negeri Malang. [20] Dimyati dan Mudjiono. 2006. Belajar dan Pembelajaran. Jakarta: PT Rineka Cipta. [21] Dimyati, M. & Mudjiono, 2010. Belajar dan Pembelajaran. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta. [22] Doppelt, Y., 2003. Implementation and Assessment Project-Based Learning in A Flexible Environment.
[30]
[31]
[32] [33] [34] [35] [36]
[37] [38]
[39]
[40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45]
364
International Journal of Technology and Design Education, 13, 255-272. Duncan, R. & Tseng, K. A., 2010. Designing ProjectBased Instruction to Foster Generative and Mechanistic Understandings in Genetics. Journal of Research in Science Teaching, 45, 8, 922-939. Frank, M., & Barzilai, A., 2004. Integrating Alternative Assessment in A Project-Based Learning Course for Preservice Science and Technology Teachers. Assessment & Evaluation in Higher Education, 29,1, 4. Frank, M., Lavy, I. & Elata, D., 2004. Implementing the Project-Based Learning Approach in an Academic Engineering Course. International Journal of Technology and Design Education, 13, 273-288. Gagne, R. M., Briggs, L. J. & Wager, W. W., 1992. Principles of Instuctional Design 5th (Eds). New York: HBJ College & Scholl Division. Ghufron, Nur dan Rini. 2010. Teori-Teori Psikologi. Yogyakarta: Ar-Ruz Media. Green, A. M., 1998. Project-Based Learning: Moving Sudents Through the GED Toward Meaningful Learning. San Antonio, TX. ERIC Document Reproduction Service, ED 422 466. Heckendorn, R. B., 2002. Building a Beowulf: Leveraging research and department needs for student enrichment via project based learning. Computer Science Education, 12, 4, 255–273. Hendrik, Setyo. H., Joko, 2015. Implementasi Model Pembelajaran Langsung dan Model Pembelajaran Berbasis Proyek Terhadap Hasil Belajar Siswa Pada Mata Pelajaran Instalasi Penerangan Listrik. Jurnal Pendidikan Teknik Elektro, 04, 02, 309-316. Jennifer, Railsback, 2012. Project-Based Instruction: Creating Excitement For Learning. Planning. Northwest Regional Educational Laboratory. http:// educationnorthwest.org/ sites/default/files/projectbased.pdf. Diakses 14 Maret 2014. Kardi & Nur, 2005. Pengajaran Langsung. Surabaya: Unesa-University Press. Kardi, S. & Nur M., 2000. Pengajaran Langsung. Surabaya: Universitas Negeri Surabaya. Kerlinger, F. N., 1993. Foundation of Behavior Research. Ed. Ke-2. New York: Holt Saunder. Lyle, K. S. & Robinson, W. R., 2001. Teaching Science Problem Solving: An overview of experimental work. Journal of Chemical Education, 78, 1162-1163. Maclean, R., 2008. The Future of Work and Skill Development for Employability: Implications for Tecnical and Vocational Education Training. Journal Seameo Voctech 8 pages. Mergendoller, J. R., 2006a. Project Based Learning Handbook, 2nd Edition. Novato, CA: Buck Institute for Education. Mergendoller, J., Maxwell, N., & Bellisimo, Y., 2006b. The Effectiveness of Problem-Based Instruction: A comparative study of instructional methods and student characteristics. Interdisciplinary Journal of Problembased Learning, 1, 2, 49-69. Moti Frank & Abigail Barzilai, 2006. Project-Based Technology: Instructional Strategy for Developing Technological Literacy. Journal of Technology Education, 18, 1, Fall 2006. Nur, Mohamad. 2011. Model Pengajaran Langsung. Surabaya: Pusat Sains dan Matematika Sekolah Unesa. Reigeluth, M. C. 1999. Instructional-Design Theories and Models. Volume II. London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publisher. Riduwan. 2010. Skala Pengukuran Variabel-Variabel Penelitian. Bandung: Alfabeta Salkind, N. J., 2006. Exploring Researcht. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Slavin, R. E., 2000. Educational Psychologycal: Theory and practice. (Eds). Sixth Edition. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. Terry Smith, 2009. Project-Based Learning: Changing the Face of Traditional Education Learning. A paper presented at the Irish Educational Technology Users’ Conference, EdTech 2009. 2020 Vision: Changing
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
[46]
[47]
[48]
[49]
Learning Futures Through Technology National College of Ireland May 21-22, 2009. http://ilta.ie/files/PBLILTA-final-Tsmith_%5B1%5.pdf. Diakses tanggal 12 Desember 2012. Thomas, J. & Mergendoller, J., 2000a. Managing Project Based Learning: Principles from the Field. Date accessed: 13 November 2008. http://www.bie.org/. Diakses tanggal 14 Februari 2011. Thomas, J., 2000b. A Review of the Research on Project-Based Learning. The Autodesk Foundation McInnis Parkway San Rafael, California. http://www.autodesk.com/ foundation. Diakses tanggal 14 Februari 2011. Titik Khoyriah, Joko, 2015. Pengaruh Model Pembelajaran Berbasis Proyek dan Model Pembelajaran Langsung terhadap Keaktifan dan Hasil Belajar Siswa pada Standar Kompetensi Memperbaiki Peralatan Rumah Tangga Listrik. Jurnal Pendidikan Teknik Elektro, 04, 01, 209-214. Tuckman, B. W. 1999. Conducting Educational Researcht. 5th Edition. Orlando: Harcourt Brace College Publisher.
365
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
366
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Implementing the Interactive Learning Media in Power System Protection Class to Improve the Achievement Achmad Imam Agung Faculty of engineering,universitas negeri surabaya Ketintang Surabaya [email protected] I. INTRODUCTION
Abstract - The carrying out of the protection of Power System (PST) subject in Electrical engineering of Electrical Faculty in Surabaya State University: (1) still aply a draw or static graph methodology; (2) the rate score for students‘ learning are (B-); (3) the subject matter of PST inclined to memorize only by the students‘; and (4) it is not available interactive learning media yet. The research of implementation of interactive media for PST subject in Electrical Engineering Students of Surabaya University has purpose such as; (1) Produce the interactive learning media validity; (2) Analize the studenst‘ response rate toward interactiverate learning media; and (3) Analize the outcome of the students‘ studied on PST subject who apply the interactive learning media. This study belongs Quasi Experimental Design in the of Pre-test and Post-test Group Design, in with sample research were the S-1 students who joined Power System Protection Class, Electric Power, Engineering Education year 2010 with 24 students‘. The research concludes: (1) the validated interactive learning media in Power SystemProtection class had been produced with the students‘avararage score 3.77 which meant that this interactive learning media was valid; (2) the average score students‘ responses toward the implementation of the interactive learning media was 3.36 or 84 %,which meant that the media was very good or very attractive so it could be usedas learning reference; and (3) the students‘ score before using interactive learning, mastery learning as much as 3 students‘ (12.5%) and learning lessons Power System Protection with help of interactive learning media mastery learning students‘ produce as 22 students‘ (91.67%) while the mean score of learning outcomes by 86 or 3.36 according linkert scale, which includes the excellent category. The research suggests: (1) the following research is expected to make reperation on interactive learning media construction especially on it‘scolouring perform, letters and animation. Thus the media is become better and more attractive; and (2) the validity result for interactive learning media is good category and suitable for learning reference, however it‘s still necessary and repairing of media form, more examples and also aplications,so the students‘ are going to understand to PST subject.
A. Background Learning the skills needed someone in mastering science and technology. One form of learning is systematic and controlled study in college, school,tutoring,etc. Learning is a process of behavior change, as a result of interaction with the environment. Behavior that contains the broad sense that includes: knowledge, understanding, skills, attitudes and others. Every behavior there is observable and unobservable. Behaviors that can be observed directly called behavioral performance, such as the ability to explain, mention or perform an act. While behavior can not be observed directly referred to the tendency of behavior (behavior tendencies), for example: knowledge, understanding, skills, attitudes and so a person has. According to Skinner (in Nursalim, et al. 2007: 54) study is: "A process of progressive behavior adaption which means the adaptation process takes place progressively". Supporting factors to be able to accelerate the achievement of a learning process, we need a media that can facilitate the learning process. This is an interactive that can help the learning process that serves to clarify the meaning of the message so that the goal can be achieved with good learning. According to (Arsyad, 2011: 7), that the learning media is: Media that carry messages or information that aims instructional or contain instructional purposes. Learning media includes physical tools that are used to convey the content of learning material which is comprised of: books, tape recorders, cassettes, video camera, video recorder, picture frames, photographs, drawings, graphics, television and computers. In other words, the media is a component of learning resources that contain instructional materials, which can stimulate students to learn. In accordance with the development of technology, learning media experience significant changes. Learning media are used not only in the form of visual or audio form but has already become a form of audio-visual. Of the various forms of media, one of which can be selected is a form of interactive learning media.
Index Terms - Interactive learning media, student ‘responses, students’ achievement
367
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
resource that can stimulate the mind, feelings, Based on the experience of the researcher as a concerns, and the willingness of students so as to teacher, some students responded that the subject encourage the teaching and learning process to a Protection Power System is a subject that is difficult better level. to be understood because it is abstract, but it is a compilation of subjects base that has been taken and b. According Arsyad, A (2011: 3): its application in electric power system, while the Media is anything that can be used to deliver a material taught is not contained in around us, so that message from the sender to the receiver so that it can students tend to memorize it. This is an obstacle in stimulate the mind, feelings, interests and concerns of the delivery of course material as well. students so that learning occurs well. Based on the above, the necessary media interactive 2. Media Interactive Learning learning so that the learning process is Interactive more word comes from the English "Interactive", which interesting than learning media in the form of files, a means interconnected, interacting. In use the learning copy, books, transparency, and power point. It is tools, interactive learning device having the sense expected the delivery of course material Power that it allows for interaction (interconnected, System Protection on the lecture to be better and feedback) between the learning device invitation more easily understood by students from the learners to get information. Interactive understanding Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of is the presence of 2-way communication or more of Engineering, State University of Surabaya. The the components of communication. Communication material is lifted interactive learning media based on components in interactive learning media (computerusage levels include a preliminary discussion of the based) is the relationship between humans (as a user) Power System Protection (PST), setting relay and the computer (software / products in specific file overcurrent / Over Current Relay (OCR) and formats) (Harto, Dwi Budi. 2009: 22). coordination of protection in the distribution system. Media interactive learning is an integral component Learning model used in the discussion of the matter of the learning system. Position interactive learning is: (1) for material introduction Protection Power media as communication components shown in System used models learning directly (MPL) and (2) Figure 1. for the material setting relay overcurrent / Over TRANSLATE Current Relay (OCR) and coordination of protection IDEA MPI CODE in the distribution system used models based Criticism / problems learning (MPBM). Suggestions UNDERSTANDING
CODE
FEEDBACK
B. Review of Literature
Figure 1.MPI position in the Learning System
1. Learning Media The word comes from the Latin media medius which literally means middle, intermediate, or introduction (Arsyad, 2011: 3). The media is any tool that can be used as a conduit message in order to achieve learning objectives. In the process of teaching and learning, the use of media has a significant role in these activities because of the vagueness of the material presented by the lecturers can be helped by presenting the media as intermediary in learning. As a tool, the media's function facilitates the achievement of learning objectives. It is based on the belief that learning with the help of the media and the process will produce better learning outcomes than without the help of the media. In another sense mentioned that the media is a tool that can help the learning process that serves to clarify the meaning of the message that learning objectives can be better achieved. In addition Oemar Hamalik (2011: 125) argues: Media is one factor that determines the success of learning because he had helped the faculty and students in delivering course material in connection with the learning objectives that have been formulated in lesson planning. There are several definitions of media, including: a. According Munadi, Yudi (2009: 14): Media are all a form that can be used as a learning
In the learning process, the media has a function as a carrier of information from the source (lecturers) to the receiver (student). While the method is a procedure to assist students in receiving and processing information in order to achieve the learningobjectives. The function of the media in the learning process shown in Figure 2
DOSEN
MPI
MESSAGE/MATERIAL
MAHASISWA
METHODE Figure 2MPI function in the learning process Source: Arsyad, A. 2011
In the course of interaction between students and the environment, the media function can be determined based on the excess media and obstacles that may arise in the learning process. Three excess media capabilities Gerlach & Ely (in Arsad. A 2006: 96) is asfollows: First, the ability of fixative, meaning it can capture, store, and display the back of an object or event.
368
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
With this capability, object or event can be drawn, photographed, recorded, filmed, can then be stored and the time required can be demonstrated and observed again like the original incident. Second, manipulative ability, meaning that media can redisplay the objects or events with various changes (manipulation), as needed, for example, resized, speed, color, and can also be repeated presentation. Third, the distributive capabilities, meaning the media able to reach a large audience numbers in a single presentation simultaneously, such as TV broadcasts. 3. Validity The word comes from the English validity validity, which means the rate keandalah according sekaran (in Harto, Dwi Budi. 2009: 11-18): "There are several types of validity that is used to test the reliability / accuracy of measurement, including the validity of the content (content validity) and the validity of the concept (concept validity) ". Validity is a step tests performed on the content (content) from a media, with the aim to measure the accuracy of instruments used in a study. In the development of multimediabased learning model, then the validity of the test is intended to test the extent to which the developed learning media can be used as a model of instructional media, so as to know the level of truth and accuracy of the media. 4. Response to Media Interactive Learning Students In terms psikolosi, the response is "bring the process back and imagine the picture of the observations". According Kartono (1996: 58). The response can be identified as a depiction memory of observations. While Ahmadi (1992: 64) states that: "The response is a picture memory and observation of objects that have been observed are no longer in space and time of observation". 5. Learning Outcomes The concept of learning outcomes based on the concept of learning completed. Learning completed a term that is translated from the term mastery learning. Nasution, S 1982 (in Supriyono, Agus, 2009: 4) states that: Mastery learning or study completion, meaning that full mastery. The full mastery can be achieved when the student is able to master a particular matter thoroughly as evidenced by good learning outcomes on such materials. Nasution, S 1982 (in Supriyono, Agus. 2009: 18) also mentions: "Some of the factors that affect the full control, namely: (1) the talent to learn something; (2) the quality of learning; (3) the ability to understand learning; (4) persistence; and (5) the time available for learning ". The fifth of these factors need to be considered by the lecturer, when implementing the learning is complete, so that students can achieve learning outcomes according to criteria that have been set. Blomm learning outcomes by 1956 (in Suprijono 2009: 6), is "includes cognitive, affective and
psychomotor domains". Cognitive learning outcome focuses on the intellectual process (Oemar Hamalik, 2011: 79), while according Blomm cognitive learning outcomes expressed as follows: knowledge (knowledge) -is a reminder of the substance / material that has been studied, from fact to theory, such as: terms, facts, methods and procedures. Concepts and principles; comprehension (understanding) - the ability to master the meaning, such as understanding the facts and principles, interpret material / materials; application (apply) - the ability of using the material / material that has been dipelajarai into new real situations, such as: concepts / principles to new situations, law / theory to applied; analysis (outlines) - the ability to specify the material / part-bagain material into easily understandable include identification chart, examines the relationship between the chart, compiled according to the hierarchy, such as: realize the logic in thinking; my thesis - the ability to combine the parts into a whole new focus on creatifity manner and structur formulate a new pattern, such as: experiment is; and evaluation (judging) - the ability to consider nilah substance / material with the intent of certain criteria, such as: the certainty of a conclusion based on the data. Effective learning outcomes realm is the attitudes, feelings, emotions, and moral characteristics, while in this sphere developed by Blomm, Krathwohl dam Masia, as follows: receiving (accepting) - in a conscious state willing to accept, kamampuan to receive; responding (attitude respond) - to be open and provide feedback from the input; valuing (value) -being receptive values; organization (organization) Traffic combining a / organize a system of values; and characterization (characteristics) - ability to formulate values in life. Learning outcomes realm of Psychomotor is an indicator on physical movement and physical control, physical prowess may be a pattern of movement or physical skills, while the sphere was developed by Elizabeth Simpson (in Suprijono 2009) as follows: preception (perception) - use of the senses manuasia for gain awareness of the destination and to translate into action / action; set (readiness) - response memebrikan state ready both mentally, physically and emotionally; guided response (response guided) shows an example of a model and imitate the model; mechanism (mechanism) - physical response has been learned becomes a habit; complex overt response (response unique) - provide a unique response to the input; Adaption (adaptation) - change in response to new circumstances; organization (organization) - combining the responses become more organized, create new actions In this study, the intended learning outcomes are the result of cognitive learning alone, with the following considerations: (1) directly visible realm kognif verbal ability learners; (2) the parameters measured
369
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
more objectively reflect learners; (3) the time required is short,
Figure 3 Stages Source: PLN 2009
occurrence
of
Electrical
Energy
6 .Power System Protection .Power System Protection (PPT) The need for electrical energy is now a major energy needs in human life today. The energy requirements used for the production of (business) or for the needs of the small-scale households. In the household electrical energy is to meet the needs of lighting, household electrical appliances (general), the energy industry is not only used for lighting, mainly used to move the machine - the machine so that the production process is faster, economical and efficient. Given the importance of system reliability in electricity supply, the required safety systems (Protection System) are eligible: sensitivity / sensitivity, reliability / reliability, selectivity / selective, speed of operation / speed, simplicity / simple and economic / good economical so The system is not only safe for the equipment but also the consumer / user and the operator also B.Ravindranath and M.Chander (1997: Vol 1). According Aiyub (2009: Journal Litek Vol5 No. 1, March 1) on the protection system, "relay is the main equipment". Relay is a device that can detect the presence of disorder or abnormality that can harm the equipment or protected system. In the electric power system there are various relay used in protection systems, including overcurrent relay (Over Current Relay) and relay soil disturbance (Ground Fault Relay). In the provision of electricity to consumers requires the stages are quite long and complex, globally can be seen in the picture In the provision of electricity through several phases starting power plant (Power Plant), both using water energy source, coal, etc. These energy sources to use to drive a turbine which in coupling generator which generates electrical energy, and electrical energy is channeled through the transmission in the form of Air Line Extra High Voltage (SUTET) 500 kV or Air Line High Voltage (SUTT) 150 kV which is then sent to Gandu Parent Channel (GIS) that converts voltage into medium voltage 70 kV (Medium Voltage Networks / JTM) with stepdown transformer. C. The method The research method is basically a scientific way to obtain "data" with "purpose" and "specific purpose" (Sugiyono, 2012: 2). Scientific way mean that research activities are based on the characteristics of science, namely the rational (reasonable), empirical (observable by human senses - observed) and
systematic (a logical step). The data obtained through research is empirical data that have certain criteria that is valid (the degree of accuracy). The research method can be classified based on the purpose and the level of naturalness (natural setting) the object studied. Based on the research objective can be classified into: (1) Basic research discovering new knowledge; (2) Research & development (Research and Development - R & D) research to develop or validate the products used in education and learning; and (3) Applied Research solve problems of practical life. Meanwhile, based on the level of naturalness, the research can be classified into: (1) experimental research; (2) Research Survey; and (3) Research Naturalistic. Interactive media development learning methods development research (Research and Development R & D) as a destination for research and experimental research when seen from the level of naturalness research. For the research used experimental method by using one (1) class as a class experiment. 1.Population and Sample The population in this study was student of Power Engineering Education S1 class of 2010 that are subject to program Power System Protection (PST). Samples in this study using first class with some 24 students of Electrical Power Engineering Education S1 class of 2010. 2. Study Design The research design will be used by researchers is a quasi-experimental design (Quasi Experimental Design) in the form of pre-test and post-test Group. In this design used for the study group was not chosen at random / random. Before the treatment group was given pretest and after treatment / treatment given posttest. A. Discussion 1. Presentation of Data Validation Results Media Interactive Learning and Problem In Media Interactive Learning. a) Description Results Validation Media Interactive Learning. Assessment validator for interactive learning media refers to indicators of interactive learning media that have been described, while the indicator is validated: Media Format and Content Format. While examples of validation sheets contained in the appendix. Technique validation is to put a check mark (√) in the weight value sheet validation options you have available. Results of the validation interactive learning media by validator is shown in Table 1. Table 1 Validation results Media Interactive Learning By Validator
370
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
1)
Description
2)
Student
of
Student
Response
Response
Questionnaire
Student response questionnaire data obtained using a questionnaire responses of students. In this
study,
the
test
instrument
student
questionnaire responses, filled with 24 students S1 TTL class of 2010 Department of Electrical Engineering UNESA. The following percentage of the student questionnaire responses as shown in Table 3. d) Learning Application
Outcomes
Data
Media
Interactive
Presentation Learning.
Prior to the learning activities of students first students were given pre-test done as much as 1 Figure 2 Tube diagram of Interactive Learning Media Assessment
(one) time. Pretest against the student class of 2010, which amounted to 24 students to
b) Description Results Validation Problem in Media
determine the initial data and the stability of the
InteractiveLearning.
state of a group or level of ability of the students
Assessment validator for interactive learning
who carry out learning activities without the use
media refers to the aspect of interactive learning
of interactive learning media course on Power
about the media that have been described in
System Protection. Data learning outcomes
Chapter III, while the validated aspects are:
learning activities before and after using
Material (X1), Construction (X2), and the
interactive learning media can be seen Figure 1 .
language or culture (X3). While examples of validation sheets contained in the appendix. Pemvalidasian technique is to put a check mark (√) in the weight value sheet validation options you have available. Results of the validation interactive learning media by validator is shown in Table 2.
Tube
Table 2 Results Validation Problem in Media Interactive Learning By Validator
c)
Against Student Response Data Presentation Application
Media
Interactive
as
Figure 1 Interactive Learning
IV.
Learning. 1.
2010 on the application of interactive learning described
of
Media
Assessment
shows a diagram tube validation results media interactive learning practices by the validator Based on the analysis of interactive learning media assessment showed an average total of 3.77 (Table 5.1) which means that the category is valid and can be used as a learning reference. But still need improvement for subsequent research that interactive learning media produced can be better.
Presentation of student response data S1 TTL of media
diagram
follows:
371
CONCLUSION
Based on the results of the validation media interactive learning courses Power System Protection obtained an average score of 3.77, which includes a valid category so that it can be used as a learning reference.
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
2.
3.
The mean score of student response to media interactive learning on the subject Power System Protection is at 3:36 or 84%, which means that interactive learning media including the category of very good so that it can be used as a reference study on the subject Power System Protection. The results of student learning before using interactive learning media only produce complete learn as much as 3 students (12.5%) and learning power system protection with the help of interactive learning media learning completeness students produce as many as 22 students (91.67%) while the Score the average learning outcomes by 86 or 3.36 according Linkert scale, which includes the excellent
students easier to understand subject matter of protection of electric power systems. REFERENCES [1] [2]
[3] [4] [5]
[6]
[7]
V.
SUGGESTIONS [8]
1. In subsequent research, need improvement in terms of the construction of interactive learning media on the display colors, fonts and animations so interactive learning media produced can be better and more interesting. 2. Although the results valiidasi interactive learning media including categories very good or very attractive so that it can be used as a reference of learning, but still in need of improvement -Fixes in terms of media formats, and the need many more examples and applicable, so that the
[9] [10] [11] [12]
[13] [14]
372
Ahmadi Abu. 1992. Psikologi Sosial. Jakarta : PT. Rineka Cipta. Aiyub, S. 2009. ―Koordinasi Sistem Proteksi Over Current Relay Type BEI-51 pada Trasformator Daya dengan Ground Foult Relay‖. Jurnal Litek Vol 5 No 1. Arikunto, S. 2010. Porsedur Penelitian Suatu Pendekatan Praktik. Yogjakarta: Rineka Cipta. Arsyad, A. 2011. Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta: Raja Grafindo Persada. Ali, M. Maret 2009. ―Pengembangan Media pembelajaran interaktif pada MataKuliah Medan Elektromagnetik‖. Jurnal Edukasi@Elektro UNY, Vol.5, No.1, pp.11-18. B.Ravindranath and M.Chander. 1997. Power System Protection& Switchgear. London : The Institution of Elektrical Engineers Press. Vol 1. Hamalik, Oemar. 2011. Kurikulum dan Pembelajaran. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara. Harto, Dwi Budi. 2009. Pertimbangan Estetika dalam Perancangan Multimedia pembelajaran interaktif (MPI) (handout untuk Mahasiswa Prodi Rancangan Komunikasi Visual D3-Unes). Semarang: Jurusan Seni Rupa FBS Unnes. Kartono Kartini. 1996. Pengantar Metodologi Riset Sosial. Bandung : CV. Mandar Maju. Munadi, Yudi. 2009. Media pembelajaran interaktif Sebuah Pendekatan Baru. Jakarta: Gaung Persada Press. PPs Universitas Negeri Surabaya. 2012. Pedoman Penulisan Tesis dan Disertasi. Surabaya: UNESA. Priashant P., Bedekar,. Sunhir R., Bhide., Vijay S Kale. 2009. ― Optimum Time Coordination of Overcurrent Relays using Two Phase Simplex Method‖. International Journal of Elketrical and Computer Engineering, 4:12 Riduwan. 2011.Dasar-dasar Statistika. Jakarta: Alfabeta. Sarwiko Dwi. 2008. ― Pengembangan Media Pemnelajaran Berbasis Multimedia Interaktif Menggunakan Macromedia pada Matakuliah Pengolahan Citra
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
Information Services for Industrial Practice in The Department of Electrical Engineering Based on Google Maps Api Lusia Rakhmawati Jurusan Teknik Elektro - FT- Unesa email: [email protected]
- Industrial Practice (PI) is an implementation of a systematic and synchronisation between on-campus education programs with programs mastery obtained through direct work activities in the world of work to achieve a certain level of expertise. Problems most often arise in the PI site selection is related to the characteristics possessed by a protease that is poorly understood by the students, and the number of the students group in the same place in a year is causing limitation of new information from the industrialized world that can be reported. A directory location of PI implemented will facilitate and optimize the PI coordinator to spread the students in a proper location, for the students can access information of PI location easily. PI directory will be presented in the form of a map using the Google Maps API technology which covers city on an area of east java province. The development of this PI directory can provide a container for the industry and know where the location of the business is located. The method used to achieve the goal of the first phase are: observation; interviews; modelling and classifying PI directory. The second stage is the manufacturing specifications, description, and some prototype PI directory. The third stage is the installation and testing of prototype PI directory. Development of PI directory list can provide a container in the form of a web of various types of business and know the location where the business is located. The information presented in the form of multimedia to be more interesting and interactive. Abstract
Index Terms - Information System, Google Maps API.
I. INTRODUCTION The development of increasingly sophisticated technologies, particularly in the field of electronics and information technology, it is expected the presence of human resources capable of running and creating things - things that are useful for people in the field. On campus students do not know in detail the development of technology. Therefore,
students need the theory and practice in the field of electronics and information technology. To improve the knowledge and skills of students of Department of Electrical Engineering, State University of Surabaya, the students are required to take courses Industrial Practice (PI) that weighs 2 credits. This is intended to allow students to apply the lecture bench stock gained into the world of work. Industry Practice (PI) is an implementation of a systematic and synchronized between on-campus education programs with programs mastery obtained through direct work activities in the world of work to achieve a certain level of expertise. During its development, site selection PI becomes an obstacle for students. One company may receive more than one group of students per year, with each group consisting of two to five students, this is the cause of the topics raised in the report of the PI did not develop so the impact on the quality of the PI itself which can be said to be in the low category. Students tend to mimic the force on it in the discussion on the PI reports. For department managers, PI location data can not be traced accurately, because of limited resources which can only be checked in the list of SK assignment as a supervisor only. Hence the need for assistive technologies that can facilitate student looking for the location of the PI and department managers can expand cooperation with the business or other industrial world. In other words resources through information technology is considered very necessary to develop, so that both students and department managers can look for an alternative location other protease inhibitors in accordance with their respective competences courses. II. RELATED WORK ON GOOGLE MAPS API Information system that utilizes the Google Maps API has been widely applied in various fields. Zhang (2009) conducted a development system for mapping geographic information. Gibin et al (2008) made the city of London cartographic applications using the Google Maps API. Google Maps API also been developed for information systems for tourists (Pan et al., 2007). Google Maps API can be used to perform
373
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 mapping of sugarcane land (Agastiya, 2010). This application is used to map the sugarcane farm with the help of a GPS device. In addition, this application can be used for storage, processing and delivery of digital spatial data appropriately and accurately. Applications developed using the Google Maps API requires a GPS (Global Positioning System). The system utilizes the Google Maps API and GPS devices are also widely used for tracking goods. Wicaksono (2008) have built a system that can perform tracking of mobile devices equipped with GPS module. This application is designed to detect a mobile device with the help of GPS as a tool to obtain the position or the device coordinates. This application uses the Google Maps API technology to map applications on the web and Java by using additional libraries Location API (JSR-179) for application on the mobile device. Hadi (2009) has made the property advertising system using J2ME and Online Map. This application is to facilitate the consumer to seek a variety of buying and selling property information such as home, land, other buildings or even a boarding house. This application uses the Google Maps API technology as an online map application. This application utilizes only GMarker class as a class to create a sign or marker on the map. Applications that use Web 2.0 philosophy allows the use of the Internet platform that divides the data sources and services together depending on the needs of users (O'Reilly, 2007). Google mapping platform is Google Maps and Google Earth have dominated applications that have been widely implemented mashub (Zang et al., 2008). Google Earth enables greater interaction in the form of 3-D, but causes difficulties when combining with web services applications. Potential use of Google Earth for cartography and visualization have been developed by Wood et al. (2007). Google Maps mapping service was formally launched in February 2005. Google to release Google Maps Application Programming Interface (API) to facilitate the development of google maps (McConchie, 2008). API is a set of libraries that allow users to access the services provided on the application (Boulos, 2005). Google provides APIs in two different programming languages, namely JavaScript and ActionScript. Applications developed kites mapping is: MapQuest, Microsoft Bing Maps (Microsoft Visual Earth), OpenLayers / OpenScales, OpenStreetMap, and Yahoo! Maps. Google Maps API is used freely in cartography (Rod et al, 2001; Wood, 2003) and resolve the issues of debate that there is no GIS (Miller, 2006). Google Maps can be run directly in the browser and does not require downloading a plug-in when using the JavaScript API. Google Maps API easy to display KML files, a format that is capable of displaying fast spatial information (Harrower, 2009). There are many resources to learn and using the Google Maps API, from the online documentation and manual code techniques (Gibson and Erle, 2006; Brown, 2006).
There are online tools that can be used for example GeoCommons Maker which can digunakansecara effective (Harrower et al., 2008). Applications created using Google Maps allows users to add maps on a web page that is made (Purves et al., 2006). Figure 1 is the result of research Ross et al. (2009) that uses Google Maps to illustrate the magnitude of the crime scene in the District of Columbia.
Figure 1 Google Maps for criminal cases spread (Ross et al., 2009). The studies were conducted generate various maps and images for visualization system image on a web-based environment is a big part to develop visualization techniques for the development environment (Batty and Hudson-Smith, 2007): for ionic city imagery, geodemographics, landscape activity, etc. Hudson-Smith et al. (2008) has also developed a web-based application services that are used for public domain GIS, mapping and imaging. Johnson (2008) developed a system of visualization techniques for spatiotemporal information. III. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
Figure 3. Process Diagram From the analysis model of the process diagram as shown in Figure 4. In the figure shows user management obtained are as an administrator and users of the service.
374
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Figure 5 is a map-based Google Map interface by selecting the district where we will know its location, the map will appear automatically on the borderline region. Which then will be seen the number of locations PI according to the database that has been inserted as shown in Figure 6. IV. CONCLUSION Based on the discussions in the previous chapters, it can be concluded from the study in the first year of this: It has been successfully established industry practice directory mapping method using a web-based system to facilitate the management of industry data and search industry practice for visitors (students ), so that access can be more information. REFERENCES
Figure 4. Process Diagram for administrator and user Figure 5 shows interface based on google maps, it figures the result of the location in Surabaya as example.
Figure 5. Interface based on Google Map
[1] Agastiya, Bayu, 2010, Pembangunan Sistem Informasi Geografis Pemetaan Lahan Tebu berbasis Web menggunakan GPS dan Google Maps API, Skripsi Program Studi Teknik Informatika (Unpublished), Universitas Atma Jaya Yogyakarta, Yogyakarta. [2] Brown, M. C., 2006, Hacking Google Maps and Google Earth, Indianapolis, [3] Dekranasda DIY, 2005, Strategi Pengelolaan Usaha Kerajinan Yang Efisien. [4] Google Maps API, Applied Spatial Analysis and Policy, Volume 1, Number 2 [5] Gibson, R. & Erle, S., 2006, Google Maps Hacks, Sebastopol, CA, O'Reilly. [6] Harrower, M., Heyman, D., Sheesley, B. & Woodruff, A., 2008, Maker! Mapping the world's data, NACIS 2008. Missoula, MT. [7] Maceachren, A. M. & Dibiase, D., 1991, Animated maps of aggregate data:Conceptual and practical problems, Cartographic and Geographic Information Science, 18, 221-229. [8] Peterson, M., 2008, Choropleth Google Maps. Cartographic Perspectives, 60, 80-83. [9] Purves M., Sambells J., and Turner C, 2006, Beginning Google Maps Applications with PHP and Ajax, Apress, Berkeley, CA. [10] Ratna, sari. (2012). Peran Praktik industri dalam Menunjang Kesiapan Memasuki Dunia Kerja Siswa Kelas XI Program Keahlian Busana SMK Karya Rini Yogyakarta. Skripsi. Fakultas Teknik Universitas Negeri Yogyakarta. [11] http://eprints.uny.ac.id/6905/ diakses tanggal 10 Februari 2014 [12] Suselo, Thomas, dkk. 2013. Analisis dan Rancang Bangun Direktori Bisnis untuk Usaha Mikro, Kecil, dan Menengah Berbasis Google Maps API dan Multimedia di Daerah Istimewa Yogyakarta. Laporan. Universitas Atmajaya Yogyakarta. http://e-journal.uajy.ac.id/4553/ diakses tanggal 10 Februari 2014
Figure 6. Industrial data interface.
375
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
376
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015
The Use of Internet Media as A Source of Learning in Supporting Study Results Students in State Vocational Schools 5 Surabaya Agus Budi Santosa Electrical Engineering Department, Engineering Faculty, Universitas Negeri Surabaya [email protected]
Through internet media the science be distributed quickly, right, cheap and reliable.Distance is not longer be a obstacles.The time difference because the geography not be a hindrance for someone who wants access science.Internet use as a medium education in the education sector is expected to become solutions to problematika occurring during this. In the information technology and computers that very fast recently; has received a positive response in society.Various services the community has already been implement ict ( information and communication technology. Demands which should be done by teachers and schools in the implementation of the learning that use information technology and communication have faced various obstacles are not simple.The main problem often faced by school management and teachers are limited resources, good physical resources, human resources as well learn based computer technology and telecommunication.Data the ministry of national education shows that 95 % smk have having a computer.However, less than a 25 percent of smu and 10 % vocational high school who has an the internet ( mohandas: 2003 ) The purpose of this research is to governing the utilization of the internet as a source of learning students are elaborated as follows: 1. Describe the utilization of the internet as a source of learning by students of SMK. 2. Identify the learning outcomes of students by utilizing the internet as a source of learning.
Abstract - The research is done in SMKN 5 surabaya on the expertise technique electricity installation. The purpose of this research is to describe the utilization of the internet as a learning resource in supporting student learning outcomes. that includes: 1. Describe the utilization of the internet as a source of student learning CMS. 2. Find out the influence of the internet as a source of learning towards the learning outcomes of students. Design the research is Survey. A research Population are 36 student on X class program expertise technique electricity installation. The data collected by using quisseneir and documentation. Data analysis using descriptive statistics with double regression to find the relationship between the X1, X2, X 3 and the results of learning Y. This research result indicates under the use of the internet (X1), motivation factors (X2) and restricting factors (X3) there is the effect on study results students (Y). Of these three indicators are very influential towards the results of the study are (X2) because it had a constant indicator of 0.182 so more than other indicators. Indicator X 2 can also serve as a predictor of student learning results, because the value of stadar deviation greater than X 1 and X 3, with its value 5.836. Index Terms - source of learning, the internet, learning outcome. I. INTRODUCTION
II. LITERATURE STUDY
The internet network is the network of connecting computers around the world, so information about in different types and in various forms can be communicated between parts of the world instantly and global. The presence of the internet has give change by revolutionary with the method of life and human activity daily. The internet present as media that integrates all media communication and information conventional already had,On the internet on everyone can access to the world global to obtain any information they need in all their daily needs.
A. A sources of learning According to miarso ( 1994: 6 ) the sources of learning is everything which includes a message, people, ingredients, a tool, engineering and environment whether its own and terkombinasikan can allow for learning. A definition that other from a source learning is everything power that can be beneficial to the interests of the learning process, either directly or indirectly, partially or fully a whole (sudjana & rivai, 2001: 76.A source of learning could be designed specifically to used for the
377
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 interests of the weighting (learning resources by design but a source of learning can also as something living used because are already available in the environment (learning resources by utilization.Then the term learn can be defined as a process interaction between a man and a source of learning that produces the occurrence of a change behavior. Ericson (in yanuar, 2006: 19) said that a source of learning recognized as components important in education for its learn act as the facilitator may be the act of learning.Of several opinions mentioned above a conclusion can be drawn that what is meant by a source of learning is everything who come from outside the one can allow for the learning process.
III. RESEARCH METHOD This research, is a research experiment. By using descriptive quantitative data analysis. The subjects in this study are students of SMK Negeri 5 Surabaya on Electrical Installation engineering. The research design used was expostfacto, that this research does not hold the treatment on the subjects of research. Thees research uses a quantitative approach with descriptive statistical analysis, which seeks to connect between the utilization of internet by the results of student learning. X1
B. The definition of the Internet, Internet is one word which lately often we come across and we heard. On many occasions, we often hear these words. Actually, what is the internet?. Viewed from the formation of he says, the term internet stands for Interconnection Networking. While the public commonly used definition for internet is "... a global network of computer networks ..." a global network of computers (Randall Latullipe in Tjiptono Santoso, 2000). According to Supriyanto (2005:336) the internet is a global computer network, which consists of millions of interconnected computers by using the same protocol to share information together. So the internet is a collection of computer network merger or local or global computer network into a LAN or WAN. According to Sulianta (2007:8) the internet is a computer network that consists of millions of computers connected via According to Sulianta (2007:8) the internet is a computer network that consists of millions of computers connected via a particular protocol for the exchange of information between computers. All computers connected to the internet do Exchange information through the same protocol, namely by means of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). C. Definition of Learning Outcomes. According to the Jihad, et al (2008) the learning outcomes are the patterns of deeds, values, understandings and attitudes as well as apersepsi and abilitas. According to Usman (1995:34) the results of the study are the results that have been achieved through student test results of a study that aims to obtain an overview of student's absorption. The results of the study need to be known, because it is very difficult for teachers to witness the process of learning. The results of learning a student can be known from the measurements. Test results of learning is one of the measuring instrument used to determine the success of students in the process of teaching and learning (Zainul, 2001)
X2
Y
X3 X1 X2 X3 Y
: Internet utilization as learning source : motivation factors : restricting factors : Result of learning
The instruments used to collect data are: 1. question form, (X1; X2 and X3) 2. a list of the results of the study are the result of learning basic electronics subjects grade 2 TAV. 1. Data analysis Data analysis conducted with of the computer software SPSS Release 5 For Windows. To find out the relationship between utilization of internet by learning outcomes students use regression beganda, as for the form of the equation of regression double as follows: Description: Y ' = Student Learning Outcomes A = Constant X1 = Internet Utilization X2 = Motivation factors X3 = Restricting factors 2. Analysis of research results
From the results of the analysis multiple regression using SPSS program Release 5 For Windows in the get an outcome simultaneously as follows: Y‘ = a + b1 X1 + b2 X2 + b3 X3 Y‘ = 67.013 + 0.048 X1 + 0.182 X2 + (-0.016) X3
378
International Conference on Vocational Education and Electrical Engineering (ICVEE) 2015 Y‘ = 67.013 + 0.048 X1 + 0.182 X2 - 0, 016 X3
―One of us (R. B. G.) thanks …‖ Instead, try ―R.B.G. thanks …‖ Put sponsor acknowledgments in the unnumbered footnote on the first page. based on the results of research on the utilization of the internet as a source of learning to support the learning outcomes of students in SMK Negeri Surabaya 5 can be summed up as follows; utilization of the internet as a source of learning has positive influence toward student learning outcome of these three indicators that greatly affects the results of learning is motivation factors (X 2), because of the huge charge indicators will be greater than the other indicator i.e. of 0.182.
The value of the constants of 67.013; This means that if the utilisation of the internet (X 1), pomotifasi (X 2) and restricting factors (X 3) its value is 0, then the median student learning outcomes – align 67.013, so it can be concluded that the internet there is its effect on student learning results, judging from the median – median niai students have finished. The variable regression the use of the internet ( x1 ) of 0,048; pales independent variable the value remained and ( x1 ) increased 1 % so students scores would rise means that any impact on the use of the internet student learning 0,048. ofKoefesien are positive means there was a positive relationship between pemanfataan internet with study results, so than internet use has influence of the results of the study. The regression coefficient of the variable motivation factors (X 2 ') is 0.182; This means that if the independent variable value is fixed and motivation factors increase 1% the student result of study will increase can be interpreted that there is influence motivation towards learning outcomes students of 0.182. Koefesien is positive means positive relationships occur between motivation factors with student learning outcomes, the greater the motivation of students in utilizing the internet then the better grades of students. The regression coefficient of the variable restricting factor (X 3) of-0.016; This means that if the independent variable fixed and restricting factor decrease 1%, the student result of study will increase (inversely proportional) as 0.016. Koefesien is negative that means going negative relationship between restricting factor with student learning outcomes, the greater the obstacle the students in the use of internet then crappy students values.
REFERENCES [1] Irawan, Budhi. 2008. Implikasi Perkembangan Teknologi Internet dan Internet terhadap Dunia Pendidikan di Indonesia. 2003-24. (Online). (http://pustekkom.go.id. Diakses 27 Februari 2008). [2] Nugroho, Yanuar, 1998. Memilih dan Menggunakan Komputer.Jakarta: Puspa Swara. [3] Oetomo, Budi Sutedjo. 2002. e-education Konsep, Teknologi, Aplikasi, Internet Pendidikan. Yogyakarta: Penerbit Andi Yogyakarta [4] Pidekso, Ari.2009.Panduan Praktis SPSS 17 untuk Pengolahan Data Statistik.Yogyakarta: CV. Andi Offset. [5] Purwanto,2009. Pemanfaatan Sumber Belajar di Sekolah, (Online), (www.learningcorner.com, diakses29Maret2010). [6] Priyatno, Duwi. 2008. Mandiri Belajar SPSS. Jakarta: Mediakom. Prawiralaga, Dewi Salma & Siregar, Eveline. 2007. Mozaik Teknologi Pendidikan. Jakarta: Kencana. [7] Rahardjo, B. 2002. Memahami Teknologi Informasi: Menyikapi dan Membekali Diri terhadap Peluang dan Tantangan Teknologi Informasi. Jakarta: Elex Media Komputindo. [8] Sudjana, Nana & Rivai, Ahmad. 2001. Teknologi Pengajaran. Bandung: Sinar Baru Algesindo [9] Sugiyono. 2010. Metode Penelitian Pendidikan Pendekatan Kuantitatif, Kualitatif, dan R&D. Bandung: Alfabeta [10] Sulianta, Feri. 2007: Seri Referensi Praktis Konten Internet. Jakarata: Penerbit PT Elex Media Komputindo. [11] Tjiptono, Fandy & Santoso, Totok Budi. 2000. Strategi Riset Lewat Internet.Yogyakarta: Penerbit Andi Ofset. [12] Winkel, W.S. 1987. Psikologi Pengajaran. Jakarta: PT Gramedia Widiasarana Indonesia. [13] Wittich, W.A. and Schuller, C.F. 1979. Instructional Techonology: Its Nature and Use. New York: Harper and Row Publishers.
IV. CONCLUSION The preferred spelling of the word ―acknowledgment‖ in America is without an ―e‖ after the ―g.‖ Try to avoid the stilted expression,
379
